TOA | YC-280 | manual | TOA YC-280 User manual

TOA YC-280 User manual
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
PACKET INTERCOM SYSTEM
N-8000 SERIES
Thank you for purchasing TOA's Packet Intercom system.
Please carefully follow the instructions in this manual to ensure long, trouble-free use of your equipment.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
For N-8000EX/8010EX/8000RS/8010RS/8400RS/8000MI
/8000DI/8000AF/8000CO/8000AL ........................................................ 14
2. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS CONFIGURATION ..................... 16
Chapter 1 : GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1. General Description ........................................................................ 1-2
2. Features .......................................................................................................... 1-3
3. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS .................................................................... 1-3
4. Specifications ........................................................................................... 1-4
5. System Configuration .................................................................... 1-6
5.1. System Configuration Example .......................................................................... 1-6
5.2. Component Description ...................................................................................... 1-9
5.3. Rack Mounting Examples for Exchanges ......................................................... 1-15
6. Nomenclature and functions .............................................
1-17
6.1. IP Intercom Exchanges and Their Connected Equipment ................................ 1-17
6.2. IP Station .......................................................................................................... 1-32
6.3. Substation Interface Units and Their Connected Equipment ........................ 1-47
6.4. Interface Unit .................................................................................................... 1-60
7. System Function Table ................................................................
1-66
7.1. Basic Functions ................................................................................................ 1-66
7.2. Other Functions ................................................................................................. 1-76
8. TWO CALL RESPONSE METHODS
............................................... 1-78
8.1. Sequential Response (Master-to-Master System) ............................................ 1-78
8.2. Selective Response (Master-to-Sub System) ................................................... 1-78
9. PAGING FUNCTION OUTLINES ......................................................... 1-79
9.1. Paging Types ..................................................................................................... 1-79
9.2. Paging Functions .............................................................................................. 1-80
9.3. Station Paging Receiving Mode ........................................................................ 1-81
9.4. Responding to Paging ....................................................................................... 1-82
10. OUTLINE OF THE MESSAGE PAGING FUNCTION ........... 1-83
10.1. Message Recording ......................................................................................... 1-84
10.2. Programmed Message Confirmation .............................................................. 1-84
10.3. Initiating Message Pagings ............................................................................ 1-84
10.4. Message Paging Zones .................................................................................. 1-85
10.5. Message Paging Termination .......................................................................... 1-85
10.6. Message Paging Priority Level ........................................................................ 1-86
10.7. Contact Interlock Control ................................................................................. 1-86
10.8. Muting Message Pagings (N-8510MS only) .................................................... 1-86
2
11. OTHER FUNCTION OUTLINE ............................................................ 1-87
11.1. Tie-line Connection ......................................................................................... 1-87
11.2. PBX Interface (E and M Interface) ................................................................... 1-87
11.3. BGM ................................................................................................................ 1-88
11.4. Contact Input and Output Functions ................................................................ 1-89
11.5. Time Signal ...................................................................................................... 1-92
11.6. Audio Trigger ................................................................................................... 1-92
11.7. Recording ......................................................................................................... 1-93
11.8. Time Correction ............................................................................................... 1-93
11.9. Automatic Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time) Correction .......................... 1-93
11.10. Broadcast to SX-2000 System ....................................................................... 1-94
Chapter 2 : FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
1. BASIC USAGE .................................................................................................. 2-2
1.1. Calling from a Master Station (Individual Calls) ................................................... 2-2
1.2. Receiving a Call (when the system is set to "Sequential Response" mode) ..... 2-3
1.3. Receiving a Call (when the system is set to "Selective Response" mode) ........ 2-3
1.4. Station Speaker Volume ..................................................................................... 2-5
1.5. Speech Method .................................................................................................. 2-6
2. CONVERSATION FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION .................
2-8
2.1. Calling ................................................................................................................. 2-8
2.2. Setting Call Receiving Modes
(only when the system is set to "Sequential Response" mode) ........................ 2-10
2.3. Speed Dialing ................................................................................................... 2-11
2.4. Hold ................................................................................................................... 2-14
2.5. Call Transfer ...................................................................................................... 2-15
2.6. Automatic Transfer ............................................................................................ 2-17
2.7. Remote Response
(only when the system is set to "Sequential Response" mode) ........................ 2-22
2.8. Executive Priority
(only when the system is set to "Sequential Response" mode) ........................ 2-24
3. PAGING FUNCTION AND OPERATION ........................................ 2-25
3.1. Paging ............................................................................................................... 2-25
3.2. Responding to Paging ...................................................................................... 2-31
4. BROADCAST TO SX-2000 SYSTEM
(n-8600ms only, only when sx-200ip is used) ................................................... 2-33
4.1. Selected Zone Broadcast ................................................................................. 2-33
4.2. General-Purpose Broadcast ............................................................................ 2-34
4.3. BGM Broadcast ............................................................................................... 2-35
4.4. Control Output Activation .................................................................................. 2-37
4.5. Multi-Operation Activation ............................................................................... 2-39
5. Other FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION ......................................
5.1. Scan Monitor ...................................................................................................
5.2. Three-Party Conference .................................................................................
5.3. Time Signal (only when the N-8000AF is used) ..............................................
5.4. PBX Connection (only when the N-8000MI is used) .......................................
2-44
2-44
2-46
2-50
2-56
3
5.5. Outside Line Connection (only when the N-8000CO is used) ......................... 2-58
5.6. Tie-Line Connection (only when the N-8000MI is used) ................................. 2-67
5.7. BGM (only when the N-8000MI is used) .......................................................... 2-69
5.8. External Equipment Control (only when the N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF
/8050DS/8540DS/8640DS/8650DS is used) ................................................... 2-71
5.9. Door Remote Control (only when the N-8050DS/8540DS/8640DS/8650DS
/8000MI/8000DI/8000AF is used) .................................................................... 2-74
5.10. Message Pagings (available only when IP Master Stations are used) ............ 2-76
5.11. Audio Trigger Function Settings
(only when the N-8050DS/8640DS/8650DS is used) ...................................... 2-78
5.12. IP Door Station's Speaker Output Switching Control
(only when the N-8640DS/8650DS is used) .................................................... 2-81
5.13. Access Code Authentication (except N-8500MS/8510MS) ............................ 2-82
6. MASTER station Operation table .....................................
2-83
7. MULTIFUNCTIONAL MASTER STATION'S LCD DISPLAY
TABLE .................................................................................................................. 2-88
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS
AND OPERATION
1. FUNCTIONS ASSIGNABLE TO THE FUNcTION KEY .......
2-92
2. FUNCTIONS ENABLED WITH THE REMOTE
MICROPHONE STATION .........................................................................
2-93
3. FUNCTION COMPARISON TABLE BETWEEN N-8610RM
AND RM-200SA ............................................................................................. 2-94
4. CONVERSATION FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION ...............
2-95
4.1. Calling ............................................................................................................... 2-95
4.2. Receiving a Call (when the system is set to "Sequential Response" mode) ... 2-96
4.3. Receiving a Call (when the system is set to "Selective Response" mode) ....... 2-97
4.4. Station Speaker Volume .................................................................................. 2-98
4.5. Speech Method ................................................................................................ 2-98
4.6. One-touch dialing ............................................................................................ 2-100
4.7. Dial Pattern Activation ..................................................................................... 2-100
5. USING THE PRIVACY FUNCTION .................................................. 2-101
5.1. Privacy Mode Settings ..................................................................................... 2-101
5.2. Resetting the Privacy Mode ............................................................................ 2-101
6. PAGING FUNCTION AND OPERATION ...................................... 2-102
6.1. Paging Call ...................................................................................................... 2-102
6.2. Responding to Paging .................................................................................... 2-105
7. bROADCAST TO SX-2000 SYSTEM
(only when using SX-200IP) .................................................................................
7.1. Selected Zone Broadcast ................................................................................
7.2. General-Purpose Broadcast ...........................................................................
7.3. BGM Broadcast ...............................................................................................
7.4. Control Output Activation ...............................................................................
2-106
2-106
2-110
2-111
2-111
4
7.5. Multi-Operation Activation ............................................................................... 2-112
8. OTHER FUNCTIONS ................................................................................
2-115
8.1. Using the Shift Key .......................................................................................... 2-115
8.2. Using the Microphone Indicator Function ....................................................... 2-115
9. REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION
OPERATION TABLE .................................................................................
2-116
DOOR STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
1. Calling from a door station ..............................................
2-117
1.1.‌Calling from a door station
(when the system is set to "Sequential Response" mode) ............................. 2-117
1.2. Calling from a door station
(when the system is set to "Selective Response" mode) ................................ 2-118
2. Making an EMERGENCY Call (only possible when system is set
for "selective response") ...................................................................................... 2-119
3. Receiving a Call .................................................................................
2-119
4. Audio Trigger function
(N-8050DS/8640DS/8650DS only) ....................................................................... 2-120
5. Call button restriction (N-8050DS/8640DS/8650DS only)
(Only when the system is used to "Sequential Response" mode) .................. 2-122
5.1. Making a Call ................................................................................................... 2-122
6. DOOR station Operation table .......................................... 2-122
SUBSTATION/SWITCH PANEL'S FUNCTIONS
AND OPERATION
1. Calling from a SUBstation .................................................... 2-123
1.1. O
‌ peration Using the Call Button
(when the system is set to "Sequential Response" mode) ............................. 2-123
1.2. ‌Operation Using the Call Button
(when the system is set to "Selective Response" mode) ................................ 2-124
1.3. Calling by Lifting the Handset (only when the RS-141 is combined with
the RS-140/142/143/144, and when the RS-481 is combined with the
RS-442/480.) .................................................................................................. 2-125
2. Making an EMERGENCY Call
(only when system response mode is set for "Selective Response") ............. 2-126
2.1. Using the Emergency Call Button ................................................................... 2-126
2.2. Using the Call Button with a Lower Priority .................................................... 2-127
3. Receiving a Call ................................................................................. 2-128
4. NOTE ON RECEIVING PAGING CALLS ...................................... 2-128
5. USING THE PRIVACY FUNCTION (RS-140 only) .......................... 2-129
5.1. Privacy Mode Settings ..................................................................................... 2-129
5
5.2. Resetting the Privacy Mode ............................................................................ 2-129
6. CALL BUTTON RESTRICTION
(Only when the system is used to "Sequential Response" mode) ..................
6.1. Stations to Which the Call Button Restriction Function can be Programmed .....
6.2. Function Description .......................................................................................
6.3. Making a Call ..................................................................................................
2-130
2-130
2-130
2-131
7. SUBstation Operation table ................................................
2-131
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED
TELEPHONE FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
1. BASIC USAGE .............................................................................................. 2-132
1.1. Calling from a Telephone (Individual Calls) ..................................................... 2-132
1.2. Receiving a Call .............................................................................................. 2-133
2. CONVERSATION FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION .............. 2-134
2.1. Calling ..............................................................................................................
2.2. Call Transfer ....................................................................................................
2.3. Automatic Transfer ..........................................................................................
2.4. Executive Priority (Only when the system is set to
"Sequential Response" mode) .........................................................................
2-134
2-135
2-137
2-142
3. PAGING FUNCTION AND OPERATION ...................................... 2-143
3.1. Paging ............................................................................................................. 2-143
3.2. Receiving Paging Calls (only Emergency pagings can be received) ............. 2-147
4. Other FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION ..................................... 2-148
4.1. Scan Monitor ..................................................................................................
4.2. External Equipment Control (only when the N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF
/8050DS/8540DS/8640DS/8650DS is used) ..................................................
4.3. Door Remote Control‌(only when the N-8050DS/8540DS/8640DS/8650DS
/8000MI/8000DI/8000AF is used) ...................................................................
4.4. IP Door Station's Speaker Output Switching Control
(only when the N-8640DS/8650DS is used) ...................................................
4.5. Access Code Authentication ...........................................................................
2-148
2-150
2-153
2-155
2-156
5. Telephone Operation table ................................................. 2-157
OPERATION FROM AN OUTSIDE LINE
1. Calling a station ............................................................................... 2-159
1.1. Direct-In Line Calls .......................................................................................... 2-159
1.2. Direct-In Dialing Calls ..................................................................................... 2-159
2. PAGING ............................................................................................................. 2-160
2.1. Zone Paging .................................................................................................... 2-160
2.2. Selectable Paging ........................................................................................... 2-162
2.3. All-Call Paging ................................................................................................ 2-164
3. Other FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION ..................................... 2-165
3.1. Scan Monitor .................................................................................................. 2-165
3.2. Time Signal (only when the N-8000AF is used) ............................................. 2-167
6
3.3. External Equipment Control (only when the N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF
/8050DS/8540DS/8640DS/8650DS is used) .................................................. 2-173
4. Outside line telephone Operation table ............
2-176
OTHER FUNCTIONS (CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS)
1. Priorities .................................................................................................... 2-177
1.1. Call Priority (available only when in "Selective Response" mode) .................. 2-177
1.2. Speech Path Priority ....................................................................................... 2-177
2. Time-Out ........................................................................................................ 2-178
3. Recording (only when the N-8000AF is used) ....................................... 2-178
4. Group Blocking .................................................................................. 2-179
5. Paging Delay Output ..................................................................... 2-180
6. Paging Pre-Announcement Tone Output
Control ........................................................................................................ 2-180
7. External Input Paging
(only when the N-8000MI/8000AF is used) ......................................................... 2-181
8. Paging Sync Contact Output Control
(only when the N-8000MI/8000AF is used) ......................................................... 2-182
9. Calling Station Indication/CCTV Interlock
(only when the N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF is used) ............................................ 2-183
10. Outside line Calling Station Indication/CCTV
Interlock
(only when the N-8000CO/8000MI/8000DI/N8000AF is used) ....................... 2-184
11. Call/Conversation Sync Contact Output
(only when the N-8050DS/8540DS/8640DS/8650DS is used) ........................ 2-185
12. IP DOOR STATION EXTERNAL CONTROL INPUT
(only when the N-8640DS/8650Ds is used) ..................................................... 2-186
13. Remote Dial Control
(only when the N-8000MI/8000DI is used) ....................................................... 2-187
14. Direct Select (only when the N-8000DI is used) ............................ 2-188
15. Contact Bridge Function (only when the N-8000MI
/8000DI/8050DS/8540DS/8640DS/8650DS is used) ........................................ 2-189
16. Paging Busy Input (only when the N-8000MI is used) ................ 2-189
17. System Diagnosis
(only when the N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF is used) ......................................... 2-190
7
17.1. Line status diagnosis ..................................................................................... 2-190
17.2. Network status diagnosis .............................................................................. 2-190
18. Time Signal ............................................................................................. 2-191
19. Time correction ............................................................................... 2-191
20. Automatic Daylight Saving Time (Summer time)
Correction ............................................................................................ 2-191
21. NTP CLIENT FUNCTION (only when the N-8000AF is used) ......... 2-192
REMARKS
Chapter 3 : INSTALLATION & WIRING
1. Installation of the Exchange ..............................................
3-2
1.1. Equipment Rack Mounting ................................................................................. 3-2
1.2. Desk-Top Installation .......................................................................................... 3-3
1.3. Wall Mounting .................................................................................................... 3-4
2. Installation of the sUBstation interface
unit ........................................................................................................................
3-5
2.1. Equipment Rack Mounting ................................................................................. 3-5
2.2. Desk-Top Installation .......................................................................................... 3-6
2.3. Wall Mounting ..................................................................................................... 3-7
3. INSTALLATION OF THE MULTI INTERFACE UNIT ................
3-8
3.1. Equipment Rack Mounting ................................................................................. 3-8
3.2. Desk-Top Installation .......................................................................................... 3-9
3.3. Wall Mounting ................................................................................................... 3-10
4. INSTALLATION OF THE direct select UNIT .................... 3-11
4.1. Equipment Rack Mounting ................................................................................ 3-11
4.2. Desk-Top Installation ......................................................................................... 3-12
4.3. Wall Mounting ................................................................................................... 3-13
5. INSTALLATION OF THE Audio interface unit,
c/o interface UNIT AND TELEPHONE
interface unit ......................................................................................... 3-14
5.1. Equipment Rack Mounting ................................................................................ 3-14
5.2. Desk-Top Installation ......................................................................................... 3-16
5.3. Wall Mounting ................................................................................................... 3-16
6. INSTALLATION OF THE IP MODULE ............................................. 3-17
7. Installation of master Stations ..................................... 3-18
7.1. When Mounting the Station on a Wall ............................................................... 3-18
7.2. Wall Hanging ..................................................................................................... 3-19
7.3. Desk-Top Installation ........................................................................................ 3-23
7.4. Flush Mounting ................................................................................................. 3-25
7.5. Wall Surface Mounting ..................................................................................... 3-29
8
8. INSTALLATION OF REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION .....
3-31
8.1. Desk-Top Installation ........................................................................................ 3-31
8.2. Wall Hanging .................................................................................................... 3-32
8.3. Creating Remote Microphone Name Labels ................................................... 3-34
9. Installation of DOOr Stations ..........................................
3-38
9.1. Flush Mounting ................................................................................................. 3-38
9.2. Wall Surface Mounting ...................................................................................... 3-41
10. Installation of substations .............................................
3-44
10.1. Flush Mounting ............................................................................................... 3-44
10.2. Wall Surface Mounting ................................................................................... 3-46
11. Installation of switch panel ...........................................
3-48
11.1. Flush Mounting ............................................................................................... 3-48
11.2. Wall Surface Mounting ................................................................................... 3-50
12. Installation of option handset ....................................
3-52
13. Wiring ............................................................................................................
3-53
13.1. Exchange Connection ................................................................................... 3-53
13.2. Connections of Stations Used in conjunction with the Exchange .................. 3-55
13.3. N-8000RS/8010RS Substation Interface Unit Connection ............................ 3-60
13.4. Connections of Stations Used in conjunction with the N-8000RS/8010RS ..... 3-61
13.5. N-8400RS Substation Interface Unit Connection .......................................... 3-63
13.6. Connections of Stations Used in conjunction with the N-8400RS ................. 3-64
13.7. Multi Interface Unit Connection ...................................................................... 3-66
13.8. Direct Select Unit Connection ........................................................................ 3-69
13.9. Audio Interface Unit Connection ..................................................................... 3-71
13.10. C/O Interface Unit Connection ...................................................................... 3-73
13.11. Telephone Interface Unit Connection ............................................................ 3-74
13.12. IP Station Connection .................................................................................... 3-75
13.13. Type of Cable ................................................................................................ 3-81
13.14. Relations Between Core Diameter of Cable and Maximum Cable Length ..... 3-82
13.15. Connector Connection .................................................................................. 3-83
Chapter 4 : SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW
1. SYSTEM DESIGN PRECAUTIONS .....................................................
4-2
2. Turning the system's power switch on ....................
4-2
2.1. Caution When Turning the Power Switch On ..................................................... 4-2
2.2. Turning the Power Switch On ............................................................................ 4-2
3. SETTING PROCEDURES .........................................................................
4-2
4. Network Settings Using a Personal
Computer .......................................................................................................
4-3
5. SYSTEM SETTING ITEMS AND DEFAULT ..................................
4-5
5.1. General System .................................................................................................. 4-5
5.2. Exchange ........................................................................................................... 4-6
5.3. Multi Interface Unit ............................................................................................. 4-8
9
5.4. Sub Stations ...................................................................................................... 4-10
5.5. IP Stations ......................................................................................................... 4-11
5.6. Stations ............................................................................................................. 4-14
5.7. C/O Interface ..................................................................................................... 4-16
5.8. Telephone Interface .......................................................................................... 4-17
5.9. Audio Interface .................................................................................................. 4-19
5.10. Direct Select .................................................................................................... 4-21
5.11. Gateway .......................................................................................................... 4-22
5.12. Paging ............................................................................................................ 4-22
5.13. Group .............................................................................................................. 4-22
Chapter 5 : SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
1. N-8000 Setting Software General
Description ................................................................................................
5-2
1.1. General Description ............................................................................................ 5-2
1.2. PC Network Settings ......................................................................................... 5-2
1.3. Notes on Setting Update .................................................................................... 5-2
2. Installing Software .......................................................................
5-3
2.1. System Requirements ........................................................................................ 5-3
2.2. Activating the Setup Guide ................................................................................ 5-3
2.3. Required Component Installation (Except when the OS is Windows 8.1) ......... 5-4
2.4. N-8000 Setting Software Installation ................................................................. 5-5
2.5. Operating the N-8000 Setting Software Program on Windows 8.1 .................... 5-7
2.6. N-8000 Setting Software Uninstallation ........................................................... 5-11
2.7. Folder Configuration .......................................................................................... 5-12
2.8. Version Update Information ............................................................................. 5-12
3. Activating N-8000 Setting Software
Program ........................................................................................................ 5-13
4. Unit Scan (Network Settings) .............................................. 5-15
4.1. Screen Description ............................................................................................ 5-15
4.2. Changing Equipment Settings .......................................................................... 5-16
5. System Setting function ........................................................... 5-17
5.1. Screen Description ............................................................................................ 5-17
5.2. Menu ................................................................................................................. 5-18
5.3. Overall System Configuration Settings ............................................................. 5-19
5.4. Exchange Settings ........................................................................................... 5-30
5.5. Multi Interface Unit Settings ............................................................................. 5-38
5.6. Setting Sub-station Interface ........................................................................... 5-50
5.7. Setting IP Stations ............................................................................................ 5-58
5.8. Setting Stations Connected to the Exchange, and Analog Master Stations
Connected to the Substation Interface Unit ...................................................... 5-79
5.9. Setting C/O Interface ....................................................................................... 5-85
5.10. Setting Telephone Interface ........................................................................... 5-93
5.11. Setting Audio Interface .................................................................................. 5-102
5.12. Setting Direct Select ...................................................................................... 5-111
5.13. Setting Gateway ............................................................................................ 5-118
5.14. Paging Zone Settings .................................................................................... 5-121
5.15. Group Settings .............................................................................................. 5-123
10
6. When Settings Are Completed ......................................... 5-126
6.1. Saving Setting Contents to Files .....................................................................
6.2. Uploading Settings ..........................................................................................
6.3. Downloading Settings .....................................................................................
6.4. Printing Settings ..............................................................................................
5-126
5-126
5-126
5-127
7. System Clock Settings ............................................................... 5-128
8. Message PAGING Settings ........................................................ 5-129
8.1. Display the Setting Screen ..............................................................................
8.2. Menu ...............................................................................................................
8.3. Create and Test-Listen to the Original Messages ...........................................
8.4. Registering Messages in the IP Master Station and IP Remote Microphone
Station .............................................................................................................
5-129
5-130
5-131
5-135
Chapter 6 : SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
1. Outline of settingS using browser .............................
6-2
2. Menu Items ....................................................................................................
6-2
3. Displaying the Menu Screen ...................................................
6-3
4. Network Setting ..................................................................................
6-5
5. OPERATION Status Display ..........................................................
6-6
5.1. N-8000EX/8010EX ............................................................................................. 6-6
5.2. N-8000RS/8010RS ............................................................................................ 6-8
5.3. N-8400RS .......................................................................................................... 6-9
5.4. N-8000MI .......................................................................................................... 6-11
5.5. N-8000DI .......................................................................................................... 6-13
5.6. N-8000AF ......................................................................................................... 6-14
5.7. N-8000CO ......................................................................................................... 6-15
5.8. N-8000AL .......................................................................................................... 6-17
5.9. N-8500MS/8510MS .......................................................................................... 6-19
5.10. N-8600MS ....................................................................................................... 6-21
5.11. N-8540DS ....................................................................................................... 6-23
5.12. N-8640DS/8650DS ......................................................................................... 6-24
6. L
‌ ine Status Indication (only for Exchange
and Sub-station interface unit) ........................................
6-26
6.1. N-8000EX/8010EX ........................................................................................... 6-26
6.2. N-8000RS/8010RS .......................................................................................... 6-28
6.3. N-8400RS ........................................................................................................ 6-29
7. Network Status Indication .....................................................
6-31
8. Operation Log ........................................................................................
6-32
9. Stream Log ................................................................................................
6-34
10. System MANAGEMENT .....................................................................
6-37
11
10.1. Changing System Names and Passwords ..................................................... 6-39
10.2. Uploading Setting File .................................................................................... 6-39
10.3. Downloading Setting File ............................................................................... 6-40
10.4. Updating Firmware .......................................................................................... 6-41
10.5. Clock Settings ................................................................................................ 6-42
Chapter 7 : MULTIFUNCTIONAL STATION MENU SCREEN
OPERATION (N-8000MS/8500MS/8600MS only)
1. Keys Used for Menu Screen Operation ...................... 7-2
2. Menu Items ..................................................................................................... 7-3
3. Monitoring Line Status .................................................................. 7-4
4. Updating Log Files ............................................................................... 7-5
5. CONFIRMING THE SET SOUND VOLUME
(N-8500MS/8600MS only) ......................................................................................... 7-5
6. SETTING THE LCD BACKLIGHT (N-8600MS only) ........................... 7-6
7. System Settings ...................................................................................... 7-7
7.1. Entering Maintenance Screen ............................................................................. 7-7
7.2. Network Settings ................................................................................................. 7-8
7.3. Station Number Settings ..................................................................................... 7-9
7.4. System Clock Settings ...................................................................................... 7-10
7.5. Restarting the Equipment .................................................................................. 7-11
Chapter 8 : APPENDIX
1. FULL DUPLEX AND HALF DUPLEX CONVERSATIONS ......
8-2
1.1. Speech Method .................................................................................................. 8-2
1.2. A Difference of Speech Method Depending on Usage Conditions of
the Station .......................................................................................................... 8-5
1.3. What If You Failed to Make Conversation Properly ........................................... 8-6
2. Basic Knowledge About Networks ...............................
8-6
2.1. IP Networks and Address ................................................................................... 8-6
2.2. Network Address Port Translation (NAPT, IP Masquerade) and N-8000 Setting
Software Program ............................................................................................... 8-7
2.3. Unicast vs. Multicast Communications .............................................................. 8-8
2.4. Network Paging Restrictions .............................................................................. 8-8
2.5. Unit Scan and Broadcast Communications Domains ........................................ 8-9
2.6. Sampling Frequency Correction (N-8000EX/8010EX/8000MI only) ................. 8-9
2.7. NTP (Network Time Protocol) ........................................................................... 8-10
3. If Trouble Occurs: ............................................................................ 8-11
4. Indicator Status & Troubleshooting ......................... 8-14
5. Specifications ......................................................................................... 8-15
12
5.1. N-8000EX IP Intercom Exchange ..................................................................... 8-15
5.2. N-8010EX IP Intercom Exchange ..................................................................... 8-16
5.3. N-8000MS Multifunctional Master Station ........................................................ 8-17
5.4. N-8010MS Standard Master Station ................................................................. 8-18
5.5. N-8011MS Standard Hands-Free Master Station ............................................. 8-19
5.6. N-8020MS Industrial-Use Master Station ........................................................ 8-20
5.7. N-8031MS Flush-Mount Master Station ............................................................ 8-21
5.8. RS-191 Option Handset .................................................................................... 8-21
5.9. N-8033MS Flush-Mount Master Station .......................................................... 8-22
5.10. N-8050DS Door Station ................................................................................. 8-23
5.11. N-8500MS IP Multifunctional Master Station .................................................. 8-24
5.12. N-8510MS IP Standard Master Station .......................................................... 8-25
5.13. N-8600MS IP Multifunctional Master Station ................................................. 8-26
5.14. N-8610RM IP Microphone Station .................................................................. 8-27
5.15. N-8540DS IP Door Station ............................................................................. 8-28
5.16. N-8640DS IP Door Station ............................................................................. 8-29
5.17. N-8650DS IP Door Station ............................................................................. 8-30
5.18. N-8000RS Substation Interface Unit .............................................................. 8-31
5.19. N-8010RS Substation Interface Unit .............................................................. 8-32
5.20. RS-150 Indoor Substation .............................................................................. 8-33
5.21. RS-160 Indoor Vandal-Resistant Substation ................................................. 8-33
5.22. RS-170 Outdoor Vandal-Resistant Substation ............................................... 8-34
5.23. RS-180 Emergency Substation ...................................................................... 8-34
5.24. RS-140 Switch Panel ..................................................................................... 8-35
5.25. RS-141 Option Handset ................................................................................. 8-35
5.26. RS-142 Switch Board ..................................................................................... 8-36
5.27. RS-143 Switch Panel ...................................................................................... 8-36
5.28. RS-144 Switch Panel ..................................................................................... 8-36
5.29. N-8400RS Substation Interface Unit ............................................................. 8-37
5.30. N-8410MS Analog Standard Master Station .................................................. 8-38
5.31. RS-450 Indoor Substation .............................................................................. 8-39
5.32. RS-460 Indoor Vandal-Resistant Substation ................................................. 8-39
5.33. RS-470 Outdoor Vandal-Resistant Substation .............................................. 8-40
5.34. RS-480 Emergency Substation ..................................................................... 8-40
5.35. RS-442 Switch Board ..................................................................................... 8-41
5.36. RS-481 Option Handset .................................................................................. 8-41
5.37. N-8000MI Multi Interface Unit ........................................................................ 8-42
5.38. N-8000CO C/O Interface Unit ....................................................................... 8-43
5.39. N-8000AF Audio Interface Unit ...................................................................... 8-44
5.40. N-8000AL Telephone Interface Unit .............................................................. 8-45
5.41. N-8000DI Direct Select Unit ........................................................................... 8-46
5.42. SX-200IP IP Module ....................................................................................... 8-46
5.43. YC-280 Wall Mounting Bracket ...................................................................... 8-47
5.44. YC-290 Wall Mounting Bracket ...................................................................... 8-47
5.45. YC-850 Wall Mounting Bracket ...................................................................... 8-47
5.46. YC-241 Back Box ........................................................................................... 8-48
5.47. YC-251 Wall-Mount Box ................................................................................. 8-48
5.48. YC-150 Back Box ........................................................................................... 8-48
5.50. YC-302 2-Gang Electrical Box ....................................................................... 8-49
5.51. YC-801 Flush-Mount Box ............................................................................... 8-49
5.52. YC-802 Wall-Mount Box ................................................................................ 8-49
5.53. YC-822 Indoor Wall-Mount Box ..................................................................... 8-49
5.54. YC-823 Outdoor Wall-Mount Box .................................................................. 8-50
5.55. YC-841 Back Box ........................................................................................... 8-50
13
5.56. E-7000TB Terminal Board .............................................................................. 8-50
5.57. AD-1210P AC Adapter ..................................................................................... 8-51
5.58. AD-1215P AC Adapter .................................................................................... 8-51
14
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
For N-8000EX/8010EX/8000RS/8010RS/8400RS/8000MI/8000DI/8000AF
/8000CO/8000AL
• Before installation or use, be sure to carefully read all the instructions in this section for correct and safe
operation.
• Be sure to follow all the precautionary instructions in this section, which contain important warnings and/or
cautions regarding safety.
• After reading, keep this manual handy for future reference.
Safety Symbol and Message Conventions
Safety symbols and messages described below are used in this manual to prevent bodily injury and property
damage which could result from mishandling. Before operating your product, read this manual first and
understand the safety symbols and messages so you are thoroughly aware of the potential safety hazards.
WARNING
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if mishandled, could
result in death or serious personal injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if mishandled, could
result in moderate or minor personal injury, and/or property damage.
WARNING
When Installing the Unit
• Do not expose the unit to rain or an environment
where it may be splashed by water or other liquids,
as doing so may result in fire or electric shock.
• Use the unit only with the voltage specified on
the unit. Using a voltage higher than that which is
specified may result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not cut, kink, otherwise damage nor modify
the power supply cord. In addition, avoid using the
power cord in close proximity to heaters, and never
place heavy objects -- including the unit itself -- on
the power cord, as doing so may result in fire or
electric shock.
• Avoid installing or mounting the unit in unstable
locations, such as on a rickety table or a slanted
surface. Doing so may result in the unit falling
down and causing personal injury and/or property
damage.
• Install the unit only in a location that can structurally
support the weight of the unit and the mounting
bracket. Doing otherwise may result in the unit
falling down and causing personal injury and/or
property damage.
When the Unit is in Use
• Should the following irregularity be found during
use, immediately disconnect the power supply plug
from the AC outlet and contact your nearest TOA
dealer. Make no further attempt to operate the unit
in this condition as this may cause fire or electric
shock.
· If you detect smoke or a strange smell coming
from the unit.
· If water or any metallic object gets into the unit
· If the unit falls, or the unit case breaks
· If the power supply cord is damaged (exposure of
the core, disconnection, etc.)
· If it is malfunctioning (no tone sounds.)
• To prevent a fire or electric shock, never open nor
remove the unit case as there are high voltage
components inside the unit. Refer all servicing to
your nearest TOA dealer.
• Do not insert nor drop metallic objects or flammable
materials in the ventilation slots of the unit's cover,
as this may result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not touch a plug during thunder and lightning, as
this may result in electric shock.
CAUTION
When Installing the Unit
• Never plug in nor remove the power supply plug with
wet hands, as doing so may cause electric shock.
• When unplugging the power supply cord, be sure
to grasp the power supply plug; never pull on the
cord itself. Operating the unit with a damaged power
supply cord may cause a fire or electric shock.
15
• Do not block the ventilation slots in the unit's cover
or fan exhaust vent. Doing so may cause heat to
build up inside the unit and result in fire.
• Be sure to follow the instructions below when rackmounting the unit. Failure to do so may cause a fire
or personal injury.
· Install the equipment rack on a stable, hard floor.
Fix it with anchor bolts or take other arrangements
to prevent it from falling down.
· To mount the unit on the TOA equipment rack, use
the rack mounting hardware supplied with the unit.
· When connecting the unit's power cord to an AC
outlet, use the AC outlet with current capacity
allowable to the unit.
When the Unit is in Use
• Do not place heavy objects on the unit as this may
cause it to fall or break which may result in personal
injury and/or property damage. In addition, the
object itself may fall off and cause injury and/or
damage.
• Do not stand or sit on, nor hang down from the unit
as this may cause it to fall down or drop, resulting in
personal injury and/or property damage.
16
2. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS CONFIGURATION
This operating instruction consists of Chapter 1 – 8 as follows.
Please read the necessary chapter as required.
To all users
Chapter 1
General Description
• System Configuration
• Nomenclature and Functions
• System Function
To the person who operates
the equipment
Chapter 2
Function and
Operation
• Master Station's Functions and
Operation
• Remote Microphone Station's
Fanctions and Operation
• Door Station's Functions and
Operation
• Substation/Switch Panel's Functions
and Operation
• N-8000AL Telephone Interface
connected Telephone Functions
and Operation
• Operation from Outside Line
Telephone
• Other Functions (useful functions)
• Remarks (list of signal tones)
Chapter 3
Installation and
Wiring
• Installation of the Exchange
• Installation of the Substation
Interface Unit
• Installation of the Various Kinds of
Interface Units
• Installation of Stations
• Wiring
Chapter 4
System Design
Precautions
• Turning the System's Power
Switch ON
• Network Settings with a Personal
Computer
• System Setting Items and Default
Chapter 5
System Settings by
Software
• General Description
• Installation and Activating
• Equipment Scan
• System Settings
Chapter 6
System Settings
Using the Browser
• Starting the Browser
• Network Settings
• Operating Status Indication,
Operation Log Indication
• System Administration
Chapter 7
Multifunctional Station
Menu Screen Operation
(N-8000MS/8500MS only)
• Menu Items
• Entering Maintenance Screen
• Settings
Chapter 8
Appendix
• Basic Knowledge about Networks
• Trouble Occurs
• Indicator Status & Troubleshooting
• Specifications
To the person who installs and
wires the equipment
To the person who designs
and maintains the system
To the person who installs and
wires the equipment
17
Chapter 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This chapter describes the N-8000 Series Packet Intercom System's
basic equipment configurations (exchanges, stations and various
interface units), component functions and operations, and two types
of conversation methods.
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1. General Description
The N-8000 Series is a packet intercom system (IP network compatible intercom) employing packet audio
technology*1. By connecting IP intercom exchanges (which can connect up to 16 stations per exchange),
IP stations, and various kinds of interface units to a network (LAN or WAN*2), an optimal system can be
constructed for in-house or wide area information communications such as duplex conversations between
stations, periodical broadcasts, and BGM broadcasts. Since up to 192 exchanges, IP stations, and various
kinds of interface units can be combined, systems of up to a total of 3072 stations can be realized. An echo
canceller*3 and voice switch realize hands-free conversation (conversations made without using a handset at
both parties) between stations. Depending on conditions, full duplex (simultaneous two-way) conversation by
way of an echo canceller or half duplex (alternate two-way) conversation by way of a voice switch is made.
(Refer to p. 8-2, "FULL DUPLEX AND HALF DUPLEX CONVERSATIONS.")
In addition, The system's various interface units and modules can be used to realize a host of functions,
including contact bridging by means of contact input and output control, contact external equipment control
and timer-activated fixed-time broadcasts, connection to outside lines (central office lines), and broadcast to the
SX-2000 system. Further, the system supports two different conversation methods and is capable of operating
in master/master or master/sub configurations.
*1 Technology related to audio transmission over a network
*2 T
he fixed global IP address must be assigned to the units connected via the Internet.
*3 A circuit that prevents acoustic feedback or echo generated when the voice output from the station's internal
speaker enters the microphone.
Warning
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case
the user may be required to take adequate measures.
1-2
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2. Features
• Exchanges, IP stations, and various kinds of interface units can be connected over a data communications
network.
• Can be connected to an existing local area network (LAN) or wide-area network (WAN). The system can also
be easily connected to fiber-optic networks without restrictions on operating distance.
• The dedicated software program enables centralized control with a personal computer.
• System maintenance (verifying operation log and Line supervision) can also be performed with a personal
computer and Internet browser.
• 3 types of exchanges differ in the following points.
(1) 2-wire system
N-8000EX: Internal 4 links*, external 8 links*, with PA paging output
N-8010EX: Internal 1 link*, external 2 links*, without PA paging output
(2) 2-core shielded system
N-8000RS: External 2 links*
N-8010RS: External 1 link*
(3) 4-wire system
N-8400RS: External 2 links*
• 4 types of stations are available: 2-wire system, 2-core shielded system, 4-wire system and IP-type stations.
The first three stations must be connected to a corresponding system exchange to make operation possible,
while the IP station can be operated on its own without being connected to any exchange. (However, the
system configured only with IP door stations cannot be realized.)
(1) IP-type
(2) 2-wire system
(3) 2-core shielded system
(4) 4-wire system
• There are five types of interface units as shown below:
(1) Multi interface unit
(2) Audio interface unit
(3) Direct select unit
(4) C/O interface unit
(5) Telephone interface unit
• The Multi interface unit or Direct select unit can interlock with an electronic lock system or CCTV surveillance
system by way of contact input/output control function.
• Using IP stations permits a system having no exchange to be created. However, the system configured only
with IP door stations cannot be realized.
• Using IP interface modules permits broadcast to the SX-2000 system.
* L
ink is a speech path. The "internal 4 links" means that 4 simultaneous calls can be performed between the
stations connected to an exchange or 4 different broadcasts can be simultaneously made in a system. The
"external 8 links" means that 8 simultaneous calls can be made to the stations connected to other exchange
or to IP stations, or 8 different broadcasts can be simultaneously made to other exchange system.
3. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS
The Internet is not guaranteed quality. So, when this system is connected to the Internet, packet loss may result
if the network is congested, possibly causing voice communications to be interrupted or noise to be generated.
1-3
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
4. Specifications
Number of Units Connectable to LAN: Maximum 192
(a total of Exchanges, IP stations, and various kinds of interface units)
Line Capacity:
Maximum 3072 (192 Exchanges x 16 stations per Exchange)
Speech Link Capacity:
Maximum 768 (192 N-8000EX Exchanges)
Single exchange
N-8000EX:
4 links
N-8010EX:
1 link
N-8400RS:
1 link
Unit to unit
N-8000EX:
8 links
N-8010EX:
2 links
N-8000RS:
2 links
N-8010RS:
1 link
N-8400RS:
2 links
N-8000MI:
2 links
Speech (through the PBX or tie-line): Maximum 2 links
Audio input:
Maximum 2 links
Audio output:
Maximum 2 links
Note
The above links can be simultaneously used.
(Refer to the table on p. 1-13.)
SX-200IP:
2 links
Paging
Paging zones:
Maximum 192
Paging outputs:
Maximum 384 (When 192 N-8000EX Exchanges or Multi interface units
are connected)
N-8000EX:
2 outputs
N-8000MI:
2 outputs
N-8000AF:
1 output
Simultaneous access capacity for paging links:
N-8000EX:
Multicast paging: Maximum 4 links
Unicast paging: 1 link
N-8010EX:
Multicast paging: Maximum 2 links
Unicast paging: 1 link
N-8000MI:
Multicast paging: Maximum 2 links
Unicast paging: 1 link
N-8000AF:
Multicast paging: Maximum 1 link
Unicast paging: 1 link
N-8500MS:
Multicast paging: 1 link
Unicast paging: 1 link
N-8510MS:
Multicast paging: 1 link
Unicast paging: 1 link
N-8600MS:
Multicast paging: 1 link
Unicast paging: 1 link
N-8610RM:
Multicast paging: 1 link
Unicast paging: 1 link
N-8000AL:
Multicast paging: 1 link
Unicast paging: 1 link
N-8000CO:
Multicast paging: 1 link
Unicast paging: 1 link
N-8400RS:
Multicast paging: Maximum 2 links
Unicast paging: 1 link
SX-200IP:
Multicast zone broadcast: 2 links
Unicast zone broadcast: 2 links
Paging destinations via network: Multicast paging: Maximum 191
Unicast paging: Maximum 16
(N-8000AL/8000AF/8000CO: Maximum8)
Zone broadcast to SX-2000 system: Maximum 16 basses per system
Maximum 128 basses (8 systems)
1-4
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BGM:
Maximum 8 channels (Number of channels selectable at the station)
PBX Interface:
Maximum 384 (When 192 Multi interface units are connected)
Tie-line Interface:
Maximum 384 (When 192 Multi interface units are connected)
C/O Interface:
Maximum 192 (When 192 C/O interface units are connected)
Telephone Interface:
Maximum 384 (When 192 Telephone interface units are connected)
External Contact Output:
N-8000MI:
Maximum 3072 (When 192 Multi interface units are connected)
N-8000DI:
Maximum 6144 (When 192 Direct select units are connected)
N-8000AF:
Maximum 1536 (When 192 Audio interface units are connected)
External Contact Input:
N-8000MI:
Maximum 3072 (When 192 Multi interface units are connected)
N-8000DI:
Maximum 6144 (When 192 Direct select units are connected)
N-8000AF:
Maximum 1536 (When 192 Audio interface units are connected)
System Settings: Personal computer setting using a dedicated software program (over LAN)
(Network Related)
Voice Delay Time:
Connection Delay Time:
Usage Bandwidth:
80 or 320 ms, selectable
Maximum 1 second (When Multicast paging is made to 191 zones)
Maximum 2.08 Mbps (one way)/When Unicast paging is made to 16 zones
Maximum 130 kbps (two-way)/one call
1-5
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
5. System Configuration
5.1. System Configuration Example
This system consists of the following equipment.
2-wire type exchange N-8000EX/8010EX
2-wire type station
N-8000MS
N-8010MS
RS-191 N-8031MS
N-8011MS
N-8020MS
N-8033MS
N-8050DS
2-core shielded type exchange N-8000RS/8010RS
Network
2-core shielded type station
RS-150
RS-160/170
RS-180
RS-140
RS-142
RS-143
RS-144
RS-141
4-wire type exchange N-8400RS
4-wire type station
RS-450
N-8410MS
RS-460/470
RS-480
RS-481
RS-442
1-6
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
IP type station
Audio interface unit N-8000AF
Telephone interface unit N-8000AL
N-8500MS/8600MS
Network
C/O interface unit N-8000CO
IP interface module SX-200IP
N-8510MS
N-8610RM
Network
N-8540DS
N-8640DS
N-8650DS
Multi interface unit N-8000MI
Direct select unit N-8000DI
1-7
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
5.1.1. Exchange
5.1.3. Peripheral components
[2-wire type exchange]
N-8000EX: IP Intercom Exchange
N-8010EX: IP Intercom Exchange
N-8000MI:
N-8000DI:
N-8000AF:
N-8000CO:
N-8000AL:
SX-200IP:
[2-core shielded type exchange]
N-8000RS: Substation Interface Unit
N-8010RS: Substation Interface Unit
[4-wire type exchange]
N-8400RS: Substation Interface Unit
5.1.2. Stations
[IP stations]
N-8500MS:
N-8510MS:
N-8600MS:
N-8610RM:
N-8540DS:
N-8640DS:
N-8650DS:
IP Multifunctional Master Station
IP Standard Master Station
IP Multifunctional Master Station
IP Remote Microphone Station
IP Door Station
IP Door Station
IP Door Station
[2-wire type
N-8000MS:
N-8010MS:
N-8011MS:
N-8020MS:
N-8031MS:
N-8033MS:
RS-191:
N-8050DS:
stations]
Multifunctional Master Station
Standard Master Station
Standard Hands-Free Master Station
Industrial-Use Master Station
Flush-Mount Master Station
Flush-Mount Master Station
Option Handset
Door Station
[2-core shielded type stations]
RS-150:
Substation
RS-160:
Substation
RS-170:
Substation
RS-180:
Substation
RS-140:
Switch Panel
RS-141:
Option Handset for RS-140/142/143
/144
RS-142:
Switch Board
RS-143:
Switch Panel
RS-144:
Switch Panel
[4-wire type
N-8410MS:
RS-442:
RS-450:
RS-460:
RS-470:
RS-480:
RS-481:
Multi Interface Unit
Direct Select Unit
Audio Interface Unit
C/O Interface Unit
Telephone Interface Unit
IP Interface Module
5.1.4. Others
YC-150:
Back Box for the N-8050DS/8540DS/
8640DS/8650DS
YC-241
Back Box for the N-8031MS
YC-251:
Wall-Mount Box for the N-8031MS
YC-280:Wall Mounting Bracket for the
N-8000MS/8010MS/8020MS/8410MS
/8500MS/8510MS/8600MS
YC-290:
Wall Mounting Bracket for the
N-8011MS
YC-302:
2-Gang Electrical Box
YC-801:
Flush-Mount Box for the RS-140/143/
144
YC-802:
Wall-Mount Box for the RS-140/143/
144
YC-822:
Wall-Mount Box
YC-823:
Wall-Mount Box
YC-841:
Wall-Mount Box for the N-8033MS
YC-850:
Interface Unit Bracket
(For N-8000RS/8010RS/8400RS
/8000DI/8000AF/8000CO/8000AL)
YS-13A:
Wall-Mount Box for the
N-8050DS/8540DS/8640DS/8650DS
AD-1210P: AC Adapter for the N-8500MS/8510MS/
8600MS/8540DS/8640DS/8650DS
AD-1215P: AC Adapter for the N-8500MS/8510MS/
8600MS/8540DS/8640DS/8650DS
E-7000TB: 40-Station Terminal Board
CR-273:
Equipment Rack
CR-413:
Equipment Rack
stations]
Analog Standard Master Station
Switch Board
Substation
Substation
Substation
Substation
Option Handset for RS-480
1-8
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
5.2. Component Description
5.2.1. Exchange
[2-wire type exchange]
• N-8000EX IP Intercom Exchange
The Exchange permits connection of up to sixteen 2-wire type stations and features two outputs for public
address paging. The speech links consist of 4 internal links and 8 external links. The exchange is equipped
with a networking interface, allowing connection with IP stations, various kinds of interface units, and other
IP intercom exchanges. The Exchange can be mounted in an EIA standard rack (1U), to a wall or installed on
a desk.
• N-8010EX IP Intercom Exchange
The Exchange permits connection of up to sixteen 2-wire type stations.
The speech links consist of 1 internal link and 2 external links.
The exchange is equipped with a networking interface, allowing connection with IP stations, various kinds of
interface units, and other IP intercom exchanges.
The Exchange can be mounted in an EIA standard rack (1U), to a wall or installed on a desk.
[2-core shielded type exchange]
• N-8000RS IP Intercom Substation Interface Unit
The Exchange permits connection of up to sixteen 2-core shielded type stations.
The speech links consist of 2 external links.
The exchange is equipped with a networking interface, allowing connection with IP stations, various kinds of
interface units, and other IP intercom exchanges.
The Exchange can be mounted in an EIA standard rack (1U), to a wall or installed on a desk.
• N-8010RS IP Intercom Substation Interface Unit
The Exchange permits connection of up to sixteen 2-core shielded type stations.
The speech link consists of 1 external link.
The exchange is equipped with a networking interface, allowing connection with IP stations, various kinds of
interface units, and other IP intercom exchanges.
The Exchange can be mounted in an EIA standard rack (1U), to a wall or installed on a desk.
[4-wire type exchange]
• N-8400RS IP Intercom Substation Interface Unit
The Exchange permits connection of up to sixteen 4-wire type stations.
The speech links consist of 1 internal link and 2 external links.
The exchange is equipped with a networking interface, allowing connection with IP stations, multi interface
units, and other IP intercom exchanges.
The Exchange can be mounted in an EIA standard rack (1U), to a wall or installed on a desk.
Kind of Exchange
Model No.
2-wire type
exchange
N-8000EX
N-8010EX
2-core shielded
type exchange
N-8000RS Audio: Analog base band
4-wire type
exchange
Communication methods
Internal Link
External Link
Audio: Digital PCM
4
8
Control: Multiplex system
1
2
N-8010RS Control: Current loop system
N-8400RS
Audio: Analog base band
Control: Current loop/pilot tone system
Impossible
1
2
1
2
1-9
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
5.2.2. Stations
[IP station]
Specification
Type of Stations
N-8500MS:
IP Multifunctional
Master Station
N-8510MS:
Standard
Master Station
N-8600MS:
IP Multifunctional
Master Station
N-8610RM:
IP Remote
Microphone Station
Speech Method
Installation Method
Auto- External Control Control PC
LCD
Wall
Power
HandsWall
Flushdialing speaker output input cascadeDisplay
Handset free
Headset Desk top hanging mounting surface
connection
mounting
*1
*2
*3
*1
*2
*3
*1
*2
*3
*4
*3
N-8540DS:
IP Door Station
*5
*6
*3
N-8640DS:
IP Door Station
*5
*6
*3
N-8650DS:
IP Door Station
*5
*6
*3
*1 T
he front operation panel can be inclined 16° from the desk surface by attaching the YC-280 Wall Mounting
Bracket to its bottom surface.
*2 A dedicated YC-280 Wall Mounting Bracket is required.
*3 A PoE (Power over Ethernet) switching hub compliant with IEEE802.3af or optional AD-1210P/1215P AC
Adapter is required.
*4 A dedicated WB-RM200 Wall Mount Bracket is required.
*5 A dedicated YC-150 Back box is required.
*6 A dedicated YS-13A Wall-mount box is required.
1-10
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[2-wire type station]
Specification
Type of Stations
Speech Method
Installation Method
LCD
Auto- External Control External
Wall
Flushsurface Display dialing speaker output dial input
Handset Hands- Headset Desk top Wall
free
hanging mounting mounting
N-8000MS: Multifunctional
Master Station
*1
*3
N-8010MS: Standard
Master Station
*1
*3
N-8011MS: Standard
Hands-Free Master Station
*2
*4
N-8020MS: Industrial-Use
Master Station
*1
*3
N-8031MS: Flush-Mount
Master Station
*5
*6
*8
N-8033MS: Flush-Mount
Master Station
*10
*10
N-8050DS: Door Station
*7
*9
*1The front operation panel can be inclined 16° from the desk surface by attaching the YC-280 Wall Mounting
Bracket to its bottom surface.
*2The front operation panel can be inclined 16° from the desk surface by attaching the YC-290 Wall Mounting
Bracket to its bottom surface.
*3 A dedicated YC-280 Wall Mounting Bracket is required.
*4 A dedicated YC-290 Wall Mounting Bracket is required.
*5 Permits handset conversation when used in conversation with the RS-191 Option Handset
*6 A dedicated YC-241 Back Box is required.
*7 A dedicated YC-150 Back box is required.
*8 A dedicated YC-251 Wall-mount box is required.
*9 A dedicated YS-13A Wall-mount box is required.
*10 A dedicated YC-841 Wall-Mount Box is required.
1-11
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[2-core shielded station]
Specification
Type of Stations
Speech Method
Handset
Hands-free
Installation Method
Flush-mounting
Wall surface mounting
RS-150:
Sub Station
*1
*2
RS-160:
Sub Station
*1
*2
RS-170:
Sub Station
*1
*2, *3
RS-180:
Sub Station
*1
*2, *3
External speaker
RS-140:
Switch Panel
*4
*5
*6
*7
*5
RS-143:
Switch Panel
*4
*5
*6
*7
*5
RS-144:
Switch Panel
*4
*5
*6
*7
*5
Control output
*1A dedicated YC-302 2-Gang Electrical Box is required.
*2 A dedicated YC-822 Wall-Mount Box is required.
*3 A dedicated YC-823 Wall-Mount Box is required.
*4Permits handset conversation when used in conversation with the RS-141 Option Handset
*5 Connection to an already installed 25 V line speaker allows it to be used for conversation applications (as
it can be made to function both as a microphone and a speaker).
*6 A dedicated YC-801 Flush-Mount Box is required.
*7 A dedicated YC-802 Wall-Mount Box is required.
[4-wire type station]
Specification
Type of Stations
Speech Method
Handset
N-8410MS: Analog
Standard Master Station
Hands-free
Installation Method
Desk
top
*1
Wall
hanging
Flushmounting
Wall surface
mounting
*2
RS-450:
Sub Station
*3
*4
RS-460:
Sub Station
*3
*4
RS-470:
Sub Station
*3
*4, *5
*3
*4, *5
RS-480:
Sub Station
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*6
Control
output
The front operation panel can be inclined 16° from the desk surface by attaching the YC-280 Wall Mounting
Bracket to its bottom surface.
A dedicated YC-280 Wall Mounting Bracket is required.
A dedicated YC-302 2-Gang Electrical Box is required.
A dedicated YC-822 Wall-Mount Box is required.
A dedicated YC-823 Wall-Mount Box is required.
Permits handset conversation when used in conversation with the RS-481 Option Handset
1-12
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
5.2.3. Peripheral components
[N-8000MI Multi Interface Unit]
Having 2 channels each for audio input and output, and 16 contacts each for control input and output, the
N-8000MI performs the following interface functions*.
• Tie-line interface for connection with the EXES-2000 and EXES-6000 systems.
• PBX interface for connection with the PBX via the analog E&M interface.
• PA paging interface for connection with PA equipment
• External input broadcast interface for connection with a music player (chime unit) or paging microphone
irrespective of with or without remote control function.
• Interface function that enables external broadcast by connecting a paging microphone or a playing
device without a Remote Control function.
• Interface to control an indicator or external equipment such as a CCTV's switcher using relay contacts.
• Interface function that enables Calling Station Display and Remote Dialing functions for designated
Master Stations using contact input and output.
• Interface function that uses contact output to diagnose system line and network statuses and transmits
the diagnosed result.
The N-8000MI also features Network interface for connection with IP stations, IP intercom exchanges, and
various kinds of interface units.
The N-8000MI interface is a rack-mounted model (1U size), but can be used for desktop and wall-mount
applications as well.
* The interface functions can be combined in the following 9 patterns.
Interface function
Combination pattern
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PBX 1
PBX 2
Tie-line 1
Tie-line 2
Audio output 1
Audio output 2
Audio input 1
Audio input 2
Contact IN/OUT
[N-8000AF Audio Interface Unit]
Having 1 channel for audio input and output, and 8 contacts each for control input and output, and 1 contact for
time sync input , the N-8000AF performs the following interface functions.
• PA paging interface for connection with PA equipment
• External input broadcast interface for connection with a music player (chime unit) or paging microphone
irrespective of with or without remote control function.
• Interface function that enables external broadcast by connecting a paging microphone or a playing
device without a Remote Control function.
• The Time Signal function enables the N-8000AF to activate its built-in timer at preset times to play its
built-in sound source or an external playing device by closing the contact output terminal.
• The Interface function records the designated Master Station's conversation on an external recorder
by outputting the conversation from the N-8000AF's audio output and transmitting it to the recorder
activated when the N-8000AF's contact output terminal is closed.
• NTP Client function synchronizes the clock of the N-8000AF with NTP server when the NTP Client
function of the N-8000AF set to the clock master is enabled.
The N-8000AF also features Network interface for connection with IP stations, IP intercom exchanges, and
various kinds of interface units.
The N-8000AF is a rack-mounted model (1U size and half-size width), but can be used for desktop and wallmount applications as well.
1-13
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[N-8000DI Direct Select Unit]
Having 32 contacts each for control input and output, the N-8000DI performs the following interface functions.
• Interface to control an indicator or external equipment such as a CCTV's switcher using relay contacts.
• Interface function that enables Direct Select, Calling Station Display and Remote Dialing functions for
designated Master Stations using contact input and output.
• Interface function that uses contact output to diagnose system line and network statuses and transmits
the diagnosed result.
The N-8000DI also features Network interface for connection with IP stations, IP intercom exchanges, and
various kinds of interface units.
The N-8000DI is a rack-mounted model (1U size), but can be used for desktop and wall-mount applications as
well.
[N-8000CO C/O Interface Unit]
This unit has one analog outside line circuit and connects to the outside line to enable the following functions:
• Direct In Line — Calls the designated Master Station from the analog outside line. • Direct Inward Dialing — Calls the Master Station from the analog outside line by designating that station
through dialing.
• Outside Line Call Transfer — Transfers calls to the analog outside line when the called Master Station
is not available or does not respond.
• Outside Line Paging — Makes paging calls from the analog outside line.
• Outside Line Equipment Control — Controls external equipment connected to the N-8000MI or
N-8000DI from the analog outside line.
The N-8000CO also features Network interface for connection with IP stations, IP intercom exchanges, and
various kinds of interface units.
The N-8000CO is a rack-mounted model (1U size and half-size width), but can be used for desktop and wallmount applications as well.
[N-8000AL Telephone Interface Unit]
The N-8000AL unit has one outside line connection circuit and connects to analog telephones to enable the
following functions:
• Master Station — Permits the connected analog telephone to be used in the same manner as the
Master Station.
The N-8000AL also features Network interface for connection with IP stations, IP intercom exchanges, and
various kinds of interface units.
The N-8000AL is a rack-mounted model (1U size and half-size width), but can be used for desktop and wallmount applications as well.
[SX-200IP IP Interface Module]
The SX-200IP is a module to enable broadcasts from the N-8000 system to the SX-2000 system. Incorporated
in the SX-2100AI Audio input unit of the SX-2000 system, the SX-200IP allows broadcasts from the N-8600MS
Multifunctional master station or N-8610RM IP Remote microphone station to be made to each zone of the SX2000 system.
5.2.4. Others
[40-Station Terminal Board E-7000TB]
The E-7000TB is a clip type terminal board for connecting station lines to each exchange. Up to 40 lines
(twisted pair cables) can be connected. The optional YC-105 clipping tool is required for wiring. The E-7000TB
is rack-mountable (3U size).
[Equipment Racks CR-273 and CR-413]
The Exchange, 40-station terminal board, and other equipment components are mounted in these racks.
1-14
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
5.3. Rack Mounting Examples for Exchanges
Note
The Exchange N-8000EX in these examples can be replaced with the N-8010EX/8000RS/8010RS/8400RS.
5.3.1. A 128-line exchange system
5.3.2. A 192-line exchange system
5.3.3. A 256-line exchange system
One CR-273 Equipment Rack is
used.
One CR-413 Equipment Rack is
used.
Two CR-273 Equipment Racks are
used.
Blower unit
(BU-412)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Blower unit
(BU-412)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Blower unit
(BU-412)
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Switching hub
Power distributor
128-line exchange (CR-273)
Perforated panel
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Perforated panel
Perforated panel
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Switching hub
Switching hub
Power distributor
Power distributor
Power distributor
Power distributor
192-line exchange (CR-413)
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
256-line exchange (CR-273)
1-15
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
5.3.4. A 3072-line exchange system
Sixteen CR-413 Equipment Racks are used.
Blower unit
(BU-412)
Rack No. 1
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
No. 8
No. 9
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Perforated panel
Perforated panel
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Switching hub
Exchange (N-8000EX)
Switching hub
Power distributor
Power distributor
Power distributor
Power distributor
No. 15
No. 16
Blank panel (2U)
Blank panel (2U)
Blank panel (2U)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Blank panel (3U)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Blank panel (3U)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
Terminal board
(E-7000TB)
3072-line exchange (CR-413)
1-16
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6. Nomenclature and functions
6.1. IP Intercom Exchanges and Their Connected Equipment
6.1.1. N-8000EX IP Intercom Exchange
[Front]
1 2 3 4 5
1. Reset key [RESET]
Pressing this key reactivates the exchange.
4. Power indicator [POWER] (green)
Lights when power is supplied to the exchange.
2. LNK/ACT indicator [LNK/ACT] (green)
Lights when connected to a network, and flashes
while transmitting or receiving data.
5.MAC address
This is the MAC address* for the unit. Since the
relationship of each unit location to its MAC address
is established when setting the network attributes,
keep track of this relationship for later use.
3. Status indicator [STATUS] (red)
Continuously lights while data is written to an
internal storage medium (FlashMemory), and
flashes to indicate such exchange malfunctions as
cooling fan failure. (Refer to p. 8-14.)
* The inherent address assigned to each network
component, expressed in 12-digit hexadecimal
notation.
[Rear]
6
7
8
9
10
6. Functional earth terminal [SIGNAL GND]
Ground this terminal.
Note: This terminal is not for protective earth.
7. Cooling fan
CAUTION
Do not block the fan exhaust vent. Doing so
may cause heat to build up inside the unit and
result in fire.
8. AC inlet
Connect the supplied power cord.
Note
If there is a danger of lightning strikes, insert an
appropriate surge arrester into the power line.
9. Cord clamp
Pass the power cord through this clamp to ensure
that the plug does not pull out when the unit is
mounted to a wall. (Refer to p. 3-4.)
11
12
10. Line connection terminals [LINE]
Connect the station to each terminal using a miniclamp connector. (Refer to p. 3-83, "Mini-clamp
connector connection.")
11. Paging output terminals [PAGING OUT 1/2,
AUDIO/CONTROL]
Includes audio outputs (0 dB*, 600 Ω, balanced)
and contact outputs (no-voltage make, 24 V DC,
0.5 A MAX).
Each control output remains closed during audio
signal output.
Connect using a removable terminal plug. (Refer
to p. 3-83, "Terminal plug connection.")
12. Network connection terminal [10/100M]
Connects a 10BASE-T- or 100BASE-TX-compatible
network. (Ethernet RJ-45 jack)
* 0 dB = 1 V
1-17
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.1.2. N-8010EX IP Intercom Exchange
[Front]
1 2 3 4 5
1. Reset key [RESET]
Pressing this key reactivates the exchange.
4. Power indicator [POWER] (green)
Lights when power is supplied to the exchange.
2. LNK/ACT indicator [LNK/ACT] (green)
Lights when connected to a network, and flashes
while transmitting or receiving data.
5.MAC address
This is the MAC address* for the unit. Since the
relationship of each unit location to its MAC address
is established when setting the network attributes,
keep track of this relationship for later use.
3. Status indicator [STATUS] (red)
Continuously lights while data is written to an
internal storage medium (FlashMemory), and
flashes to indicate such exchange malfunctions as
cooling fan failure. (Refer to p. 8-14.)
* The inherent address assigned to each network
component, expressed in 12-digit hexadecimal
notation.
[Rear]
6
7
8
9
10
6. Functional earth terminal [SIGNAL GND]
Ground this terminal.
Note: This terminal is not for protective earth.
7. Cooling fan
CAUTION
Do not block the fan exhaust vent. Doing so
may cause heat to build up inside the unit and
result in fire.
8. AC inlet
Connect the supplied power cord.
Note
If there is a danger of lightning strikes, insert an
appropriate surge arrester into the power line.
11
9. Cord clamp
Pass the power cord through this clamp to ensure
that the plug does not pull out when the unit is
mounted to a wall. (Refer to p. 3-4.)
10. Line connection terminals [LINE]
Connect the station to each terminal using a miniclamp connector. (Refer to p. 3-83, "Mini-clamp
connector connection.")
11. Network connection terminal [10/100M]
Connects a 10BASE-T- or 100BASE-TX-compatible
network. (Ethernet RJ-45 jack)
1-18
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.1.3. N-8000MS Multifunctional Master Station
[Top]
4
1
5
2
3
6
7
10
8
9
11
12
13
14
15 16 17 18
1. Handset
Lift the handset for handset conversation. Lifting
the handset disconnects both the hands-free
microphone and the speaker.
5. Speaker
Outputs call tones and used for hands-free
conversations.
2. Auto-dial key
Used to call or register the party to be called. (Refer
to p. 2-11.)
6. Liquid crystal display
Displays the dialed number or the number of a call
received in 2 lines of 16 digits. Pressing the Menu
key (8) displays the menu screen.
3. Auto-dial directory
Writes the auto-dial registration contents to this
directory.
7. Selection key [SELECT]
Used for menu item selection or input value
confirmation.
4. Status indicator (red)
Flashes when a call is received, continuously lights
during a conversation, and is off while in standby
mode. The indicator also continuously lights while
receiving a paging announcement.
8. Menu key [MENU]
Used for auto-dial registration (refer to p. 2-11) or
system settings. (Refer to Chapter 7.)
1-19
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
9. Redial key [REDIAL]
Permits the last called number to be dialed. (Refer
to p. 2-8.)
10. Function key [FUNCTION]
Use this key to perform function settings such as
assigning call transfer recipients or programming
one-touch dialing.
11. Push-to-talk key [PTT]
Pressing this key while calling a party by means
of a continuous call tone permits a voice call to
be made. (Refer to p. 2-9.) Also, pressing this
key during a hands-free conversation establishes
a one-way conversation from the party who
pressed the key. (Refer to p. 2-7.)
12. Dial keys
Use these keys to make a call or set a function.
14. Arrow keys [ ][ ][ ][ ]
Use these keys to perform auto-dial registration
(refer to p. 2-11) or system settings (refer to
Chapter 7).
15. Paging key [CALL]
Makes a paging. (Refer to p. 2-25.)
16. Paging response key [RESP.]
Responds to a paging.
(Refer to p. 2-31.)
17. Hold key [HOLD]
Places the conversation on hold.
(Refer to p. 2-14.)
18. Transfer key [TRANSFER]
Used to transfer the current conversation to
another station. (Refer to p. 2-15.)
13. Clear key [C]
Terminates the conversation.
[Rear]
19
20
19. External speaker terminal [EXT.SP.]
An external speaker (8 Ω, 0.6 W) can be connected
to this terminal. (Refer to p. 3-57.)
Shift the Speaker selector switch (22) located
on the bottom surface of the unit to the EXT.SP
position when using the external speaker.
21
21. Line connection terminal [LINE]
Connects to the exchange. (RJ-11 modular jack)
20. Headset terminal [HEADSET]
Connects to a headset. Connection of the headset
disables the speaker.
1-20
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[Bottom]
22
24
23
22. Speaker selector switch [INT.SP/EXT.SP]
Used to select either an internal (INT.SP) or an
external (EXT.SP) speaker.
23.Microphone
Used for hands-free conversation.
Note
Avoid placing obstacles close to the microphone
that might block sound and prevent conversations.
24. Wall bracket mounting slots
Hang the mounting bracket hooks to these slots
when using the YC-280 Wall Mounting Bracket.
(Refer to p. 3-19, p. 3-23.)
1-21
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.1.4. N-8010MS Standard Master Station
[Top]
3
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1. Handset
Lift the handset for handset conversation. Lifting
the handset disconnects both the hands-free
microphone and the speaker.
2. Dial directory
Writes the dial registration of the party to be called
to this directory.
3. Status indicator (red)
Flashes when a call is received, continuously lights
during a conversation, and is off while in standby
mode. The indicator also continuously lights while
receiving a paging announcement.
4. Speaker
Outputs call tones and used for hands-free
conversations.
5. Function key [FUNCTION]
Use this key to perform function settings such as
assigning call transfer recipients or programming
one-touch dialing.
6. Redial key [REDIAL]
Permits the last called number to be dialed. (Refer
to p. 2-8.)
12 13
7. Transfer key [TRANSFER]
Used to transfer the current conversation to
another station. (Refer to p. 2-15.)
8. Push-to-talk key [PTT]
Pressing this key while calling a party by means
of a continuous call tone permits a voice call to
be made. (Refer to p. 2-9.) Also, pressing this
key during a hands-free conversation establishes
a one-way conversation from the party who
pressed the key. (Refer to p. 2-7.)
9. Dial keys
Use these keys to make a call or set a function.
10. Clear key [C]
Terminates the conversation.
11. Paging key [CALL]
Makes a paging. (Refer to p. 2-25.)
12. Paging response key [RESP.]
Responds to a paging.
(Refer to p. 2-31.)
13. Hold key [HOLD]
Places the conversation on hold.
(Refer to p. 2-14.)
1-22
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[Rear]
14. Line connection terminal [LINE]
Connects to the exchange. (RJ-11 modular jack)
14
[Bottom]
16
15
15.Microphone
Used for hands-free conversation.
Note
Avoid placing obstacles close to the microphone
that might block sound and prevent conversations.
16. Wall bracket mounting slots
Hang the hooks of the mounting bracket to these
slots when using the YC-280 Wall Mounting
Bracket. (Refer to p. 3-19, p. 3-23.)
1-23
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.1.5. N-8011MS Standard Hands-free Master Station
[Top]
4
5
1
6
3
8
2
7
9
10
11
1. Paging response key [RESP.]
Responds to a paging. (Refer to p. 2-31.)
2. Paging key [CALL]
Makes a paging. (Refer to p. 2-25.)
3. Hold key [HOLD]
Places the conversation on hold.
(Refer to p. 2-14.)
4. Status indicator (red)
Flashes when a call is received, continuously lights
during a conversation, and is off while in standby
mode. The indicator also continuously lights while
receiving a paging announcement.
5. Speaker
Outputs call tones and used for hands-free
conversations.
6. Function key [FUNCTION]
Use this key to perform function settings such as
assigning call transfer recipients or programming
one-touch dialing.
7. Redial key [REDIAL]
Permits the last called number to be dialed. (Refer
to p. 2-8.)
8. Transfer key [TRANSFER]
Used to transfer the current conversation to
another station. (Refer to p. 2-15.)
9. Push-to-talk key [PTT]
Pressing this key while calling a party by means
of a continuous call tone permits a voice call to
be made. (Refer to p. 2-9.) Also, pressing this
key during a hands-free conversation establishes
a one-way conversation from the party who
pressed the key. (Refer to p. 2-7.)
10. Dial keys
Use these keys to make a call or set a function.
11. Clear key [C]
Terminates the conversation.
1-24
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[Rear]
12. Line connection terminal [LINE]
Connects to the exchange. (RJ-11 modular jack)
12
[Bottom]
14
13
13.Microphone
Used for hands-free conversation.
Note
Avoid placing obstacles close to the microphone
that might block sound and prevent conversations.
14. Wall bracket mounting slots
Hang the mounting bracket hooks to these slots
when using the YC-290 Wall mounting bracket.
(Refer to p. 3-21, p. 3-22.)
1-25
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.1.6. N-8020MS Industrial-Use Master Station
[Top]
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
1. Handset
Lift the handset for handset conversation. Lifting
the handset disconnects both the hands-free
microphone and the speaker.
2. Status indicator (red)
Flashes when a call is received, continuously lights
during a conversation, and is off while in standby
mode. The indicator also continuously lights while
receiving a paging announcement.
12
7. Redial key [REDIAL]
Permits the last called number to be dialed. (Refer
to p. 2-8.)
8. Transfer key [TRANSFER]
Used to transfer the current conversation to
another station. (Refer to p. 2-15.)
9. Dial keys
Use these keys to make a call or set a function.
3. Speaker
Outputs call tones and used for hands-free
conversations.
10. Hold key [HOLD]
Places the conversation on hold.
(Refer to p. 2-14.)
4. Paging key [CALL]
Makes a paging. (Refer to p. 2-25.)
11. Push-to-talk key [PTT]
Pressing this key while calling a party by means
of a continuous call tone permits a voice call to
be made. (Refer to p. 2-9.) Also, pressing this
key during a hands-free conversation establishes
a one-way conversation from the party who
pressed the key. (Refer to p. 2-7.)
5. Paging response key [RESP.]
Responds to a paging. (Refer to p. 2-31.)
6. Function key [FUNCTION]
Use this key to perform function settings such as
assigning call transfer recipients or programming
one-touch dialing.
12. Clear key [C]
Terminates the conversation.
1-26
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[Rear]
Protection cover
13
13. Line connection cable [LINE]
Connects to the exchange. (3 m-length cable with
RJ-11 modular plug)
Note: Do not remove the protection cover.
14. External speaker terminal [EXT.SP.]
An external speaker (8 Ω, 0.6 W) can be
connected to this terminal. When connecting,
replace a protection cap with a supplied rubber
bushing. (Refer to p. 3-57.)
14 15
Shift the Speaker selector switch (16) located
on the bottom surface of the unit to the EXT.SP
position when using the external speaker.
15. Contact output terminal [CONTACT OUT]
Permits connection of a device to indicate the
calling station.
This terminal closes only while a call is being
made or received. (Output capacity: 30 V DC and
50 mA.)
When connecting, replace a protection cap with a
supplied rubber bushing. (Refer to p. 3-57.)
[Bottom]
Figure of the terminal
where protection cover
is removed
16
17
18
Figure viewed from front center
16. Speaker selector switch [INT.SP/EXT.SP]
The internal switch is exposed if the protection
cover is removed.
Used to select either an internal (INT.SP) or an
external (EXT.SP) speaker. After shifting the
selector switch, fit the protection cover back into
place.
17. Microphone
Used for hands-free conversation.
Note
Avoid placing obstacles close to the microphone
that might block sound and prevent conversations.
18. Wall bracket mounting slots
Hang the mounting bracket hooks to these slots
when using the YC-280 Wall mounting bracket.
(Refer to p. 3-19, p. 3-23.)
1-27
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.1.7. N-8031MS Flush-Mount Master Station
[Front]
[Rear]
1
13
1 2
5
2
3
14
6
7
8
9
10
4
11
15
7
8
9
C
COM
12
1. Status indicator (red)
Flashes when a call is received, continuously lights
during a conversation, and is off while in standby
mode. The indicator also continuously lights while
receiving a paging announcement.
2. Paging key [CALL]
Makes a paging. (Refer to p. 2-25.)
3. Hold key [HOLD]
Places the conversation on hold. (Refer to p. 2-14.)
4. Push-to-talk key [PTT]
Pressing this key while calling a party by means
of a continuous call tone permits a voice call to be
made. (Refer to p. 2-9.) Also, pressing this key
during a hands-free conversation establishes a
one-way conversation from the party who pressed
the key.
(Refer to p. 2-7.)
5. Speaker
Outputs call tones and used for hands-free
conversations.
6. Paging response key. [RESP.]
Responds to a paging. (Refer to p. 2-31.)
7. Function key [FUNCTION]
Use this key to perform function settings such as
assigning call transfer recipients or programming
one-touch dialing.
8. Redial key [REDIAL]
Permits the last called number to be dialed. (Refer
to p. 2-8.)
9. Transfer key [TRANSFER]
Used to transfer the current conversation to
another station. (Refer to p. 2-15.)
10. Dial keys
Use these keys to make a call or set a function.
11. Clear key [C]
Terminates the conversation.
12.Microphone
Used for hands-free conversation.
13. Line connection terminals [1, 2]
Connect to the exchange. (Pin header)
Note
The removable terminal plug (2P) is factoryattached. (Refer to p. 3-56.)
1-28
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
14. Handset connection terminals [CN302]
A dedicated RS-191 Option Handset can be
connected. (Refer to p. 3-58.)
15. External dial input terminals [CN306]
An external switch such as a footswitch can be
connected. (Refer to p. 3-59.)
One-touch dial function needs be programmed
when using the external switch. (Refer to p. 2-12.)
6.1.8. RS-191 Indoor Option Handset
[Front]
1. Handset Cable
Connects to the N-8031MS station's handset
connection terminal.
1
2. Handset
Used to make handset calls from the N-8031MS
station. While this handset is used, the N-8031MS
station's hands-free microphone and speaker are
cut off.
2
1-29
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.1.9. N-8033MS Flush-Mount Master Station
[Front]
[Rear]
1
1 2
13
5
2
3
6
7
8
9
10
4
11
14
7
8
9
C
COM
12
Note
The front protective sheet is a wear-and-tear item. It is highly recommended to replace it every 100,000 times
of operations (approx. 3 years) for any key.
Part code: 115-51-304-00
For replacement, please contact your nearest TOA dealer.
1. Status indicator (red)
Flashes when a call is received, continuously lights
during a conversation, and is off while in standby
mode. The indicator also continuously lights while
receiving a paging announcement.
2. Paging key [CALL]
Makes a paging. (Refer to p. 2-25.)
3. Hold key [HOLD]
Places the conversation on hold. (Refer to p. 2-14.)
4. Push-to-talk key [PTT]
Pressing this key while calling a party by means
of a continuous call tone permits a voice call to be
made. (Refer to p. 2-9.) Also, pressing this key
during a hands-free conversation establishes a
one-way conversation from the party who pressed
the key. (Refer to p. 2-7.)
5. Speaker
Outputs call tones and used for hands-free
conversations.
6. Paging response key. [RESP.]
Responds to a paging. (Refer to p. 2-31.)
7. Function key [FUNC.]
Use this key to perform function settings such as
assigning call transfer recipients or programming
one-touch dialing.
8. Redial key [RE.]
Permits the last called number to be dialed. (Refer
to p. 2-8.)
9. Transfer key [XFER.]
Used to transfer the current conversation to
another station. (Refer to p. 2-15.)
10. Dial keys
Use these keys to make a call or set a function.
11. Clear key [C]
Terminates the conversation.
12.Microphone
Used for hands-free conversation.
13. Line connection terminals [1, 2]
Connect to the exchange. (Pin header)
Note
The removable terminal plug (2P) is factoryattached. (Refer to p. 3-56.)
14. External dial input terminals [CN306]
An external switch such as a footswitch can be
connected. (Refer to p. 3-59.)
One-touch dial function needs be programmed
when using the external switch. (Refer to p. 2-12.)
1-30
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.1.10. N-8050DS Door Station
[Front]
[Rear]
5
6
1
2
3
4
1. Speaker
Outputs call tones and used for hands-free
conversations.
2. Status indicator (red)
Flashes when a call is received, continuously lights
during a conversation, and is off while in standby
mode. The indicator also continuously lights while
receiving a paging announcement.
3. Call button
Used to call the preprogrammed master station.
4.Microphone
Used for hands-free conversation.
5. Line connection terminal [LINE]
Connects to the exchange. (Terminal block)
(Refer to p. 3-56.)
6. Contact output terminals [H, C]
External equipment such as an electronic lock can
be connected.
(Output capacity: 30 V DC and 50 mA)
(Refer to p. 2-74, p. 2-185, p. 3-59.)
1-31
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.2. IP Station
6.2.1. N-8500MS IP Multifunctional Master Station
[Top]
4
1
5
2
3
6
7
10
8
9
11
12
13
14
15 16 17 18
1. Handset
Lift the handset for handset conversation. Lifting
the handset disconnects both the hands-free
microphone and the speaker.
6. Liquid crystal display
Displays the dialed number or the number of a
call received in 2 lines of 16 digits. Pressing the
Menu key (8) displays the menu screen.
2. Auto-dial key
Used to call or register the party to be called. (Refer
to p. 2-11.)
7. Selection key [SELECT]
Used for menu item selection or input value
confirmation.
3. Auto-dial directory
Writes the auto-dial registration contents to this
directory.
8. Menu key [MENU]
Used for auto-dial registration (refer to p. 2-11) or
system settings. (Refer to Chapter 7.)
4. Status indicator (red)
Flashes when a call or paging announcement is
received, continuously lights during conversation,
and is off while in standby mode. The indicator
also continuously lights while data is written to
an internal storage memory (FlashMemory), and
flashes if there is a failure.
(Refer to p. 8-14.)
9. Redial key [REDIAL]
Permits the last called number to be dialed. (Refer
to p. 2-8.)
10. Function key [FUNCTION]
Use this key to perform function settings such as
assigning call transfer recipients or programming
one-touch dialing.
5. Speaker
Outputs call tones and used for hands-free
conversations.
1-32
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
11. Push-to-talk key [PTT]
Pressing this key while calling a party by means
of a continuous call tone permits a voice call to
be made. (Refer to p. 2-9.) Also, pressing this
key during a hands-free conversation establishes
a one-way conversation from the party who
pressed the key. (Refer to p. 2-7.)
15. Paging key [CALL]
Makes a paging. (Refer to p. 2-25.)
16. Paging response key [RESP.]
Responds to a paging.
(Refer to p. 2-31.)
17. Hold key [HOLD]
Places the conversation on hold.
(Refer to p. 2-14.)
12. Dial keys
Use these keys to make a call or set a function.
13. Clear key [C]
Terminates the conversation.
18. Transfer key [TRANSFER]
Used to transfer the current conversation to
another station. (Refer to p. 2-15.)
14.Arrow keys [ ][ ][ ][ ]
Use these keys to perform auto-dial registration
(refer to p. 2-11) or system settings (refer to
Chapter 7).
[Rear]
24
25
26
27
LAN
19 20 21 22 23
19. AC adapter terminal [DC INPUT]
Connect the AC adapter* to this terminal.
*
Use the AD-1210P/1215P (optional) or its
equivalent.
20. External speaker terminal [EXT.SP.]
An external speaker (8 Ω, 0.6 W) can be connected
to this terminal. (Refer to p. 3-75.)
Shift the Speaker selector switch (29) located
on the bottom surface of the unit to the EXT.SP
position when using the external speaker.
21. Headset terminal [HEADSET]
Connects to a headset. Connection of the headset
disables the speaker.
22. Network connection terminal [LAN]
Can be connected to a network of 10BASET/100BASE-TX in auto-sensing.
Connecting the station to a PoE (Power over
Ethernet) switching hub eliminates the need for
an AC adapter.
(Ethernet RJ-45 jack)
23. PC connection terminal [PC]
A PC can be cascaded with the station.
(Not compatible with PoE function)
(Ethernet RJ-45 jack)
24. ACT indicator (green)
Lights while transmitting or receiving data.
25. FD indicator (yellow)
Lights when the network is in full duplex
communications.
26. ACT indicator (green)
Lights while the connected PC is transmitting or
receiving data.
27. FD indicator (yellow)
Lights when a PC is connected.
1-33
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[Bottom]
28
29
31
30
28. MAC address
This is the MAC address* for the unit. Since
the relationship of each unit location to its MAC
address is established when setting the network
attributes, keep track of this relationship for later
use.
* The inherent address assigned to each network
component, expressed in 12-digit hexadecimal
notation.
29. Speaker selector switch [INT.SP/EXT.SP]
Used to select either an internal (INT.SP) or an
external (EXT.SP) speaker.
30. Microphone
Used for hands-free conversation.
Note
Avoid placing obstacles close to the microphone
that might block sound and prevent conversations.
31. Wall bracket mounting slots
Hang the mounting bracket hooks to these slots
when using the YC-280 Wall Mounting Bracket.
(Refer to p. 3-19, p. 3-23.)
1-34
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.2.2. N-8510MS IP Standard Master Station
[Top]
3
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1. Handset
Lift the handset for handset conversation. Lifting
the handset disconnects both the hands-free
microphone and the speaker.
2. Dial directory
Writes the dial registration of the party to be called
to this directory.
3. Status indicator (red)
Flashes when a call is received, continuously lights
during a conversation, and is off while in standby
mode. The indicator also continuously lights while
receiving a paging announcement.
4. Speaker
Outputs call tones and used for hands-free
conversations.
5. Function key [FUNCTION]
Use this key to perform function settings such as
assigning call transfer recipients or programming
one-touch dialing.
6. Redial key [REDIAL]
Permits the last called number to be dialed. (Refer
to p. 2-8.)
12 13
7. Transfer key [TRANSFER]
Used to transfer the current conversation to
another station. (Refer to p. 2-15.)
8. Push-to-talk key [PTT]
Pressing this key while calling a party by means
of a continuous call tone permits a voice call to
be made. (Refer to p. 2-9.) Also, pressing this
key during a hands-free conversation establishes
a one-way conversation from the party who
pressed the key. (Refer to p. 2-7.)
9. Dial keys
Use these keys to make a call or set a function.
10. Clear key [C]
Terminates the conversation.
11. Paging key [CALL]
Makes a paging. (Refer to p. 2-25.)
12. Paging response key [RESP.]
Responds to a paging.
(Refer to p. 2-31.)
13. Hold key [HOLD]
Places the conversation on hold.
(Refer to p. 2-14.)
1-35
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[Rear]
17
CONTACT IN
C H
14 15
18
LAN
16
14. AC adapter terminal [DC INPUT]
Connect the AC adapter* to this terminal.
*
Use the AD-1210P/1215P (optional) or its
equivalent.
15.Message start terminal [CONTACT INPUT]
The message is broadcast by connecting this
terminal to external equipment (such as a switch
or a sensor) and closing this terminal by means of
a make contact signal.
17. ACT indicator (green)
Lights while transmitting or receiving data.
18. FD indicator (yellow)
Lights when the network is in full duplex
communications.
16. Network connection terminal [LAN]
Can be connected to a network of 10BASET/100BASE-TX in auto-sensing.
Connecting the station to a PoE (Power over
Ethernet) switching hub eliminates the need for
an AC adapter.
(Ethernet RJ-45 jack)
1-36
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[Bottom]
19
21
20
19.MAC address
This is the MAC address* for the unit. Since
the relationship of each unit location to its MAC
address is established when setting the network
attributes, keep track of this relationship for later
use.
* The inherent address assigned to each network
component, expressed in 12-digit hexadecimal
notation.
20. Microphone
Used for hands-free conversation.
Note
Avoid placing obstacles close to the microphone
that might block sound and prevent conversations.
21. Wall bracket mounting slots
Hang the mounting bracket hooks to these slots
when using the YC-280 Wall Mounting Bracket.
(Refer to p. 3-19, p. 3-23.)
1-37
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.2.3. N-8600MS IP Multifunctional Master Station
[Top]
4
1
5
2
3
6
7
10
8
9
11
12
13
14
15 16 17 18
1. Handset
Lift the handset for handset conversation. Lifting
the handset disconnects both the hands-free
microphone and the speaker.
6. Liquid crystal display
Displays the dialed number or the number of a
call received in 2 lines of 16 digits. Pressing the
Menu key (8) displays the menu screen.
2. Auto-dial key
Used to call or register the party to be called. (Refer
to p. 2-11.)
7. Selection key [SELECT]
Used for menu item selection or input value
confirmation.
3. Auto-dial directory
Writes the auto-dial registration contents to this
directory.
8. Menu key [MENU]
Used for auto-dial registration (refer to p. 2-11) or
system settings. (Refer to Chapter 7.)
4. Status indicator (red)
Flashes when a call or paging announcement is
received, continuously lights during conversation,
and is off while in standby mode. The indicator
also continuously lights while data is written to
an internal storage memory (FlashMemory), and
flashes if there is a failure.
(Refer to p. 8-14.)
9. Redial key [REDIAL]
Permits the last called number to be dialed. (Refer
to p. 2-8.)
10. Function key [FUNCTION]
Use this key to perform function settings such as
assigning call transfer recipients or programming
one-touch dialing.
5. Speaker
Outputs call tones and used for hands-free
conversations.
1-38
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
11. Push-to-talk key [PTT]
Pressing this key while calling a party by means
of a continuous call tone permits a voice call to
be made. (Refer to p. 2-9.) Also, pressing this
key during a hands-free conversation establishes
a one-way conversation from the party who
pressed the key. (Refer to p. 2-7.)
15. Paging key [CALL]
Makes a paging. (Refer to p. 2-25.)
16. Paging response key [RESP.]
Responds to a paging.
(Refer to p. 2-31.)
17. Hold key [HOLD]
Places the conversation on hold.
(Refer to p. 2-14.)
12. Dial keys
Use these keys to make a call or set a function.
13. Clear key [C]
Terminates the conversation.
18. Transfer key [TRANSFER]
Used to transfer the current conversation to
another station. (Refer to p. 2-15.)
14.Arrow keys [ ][ ][ ][ ]
Use these keys to perform auto-dial registration
(refer to p. 2-11) or system settings (refer to
Chapter 7).
[Rear]
24
DC INPUT EXT SP
12V 200mA
HEAD SET
SP
MIC
25
LAN
19 20 21 22 23
19. AC adapter terminal [DC INPUT]
Connect the AC adapter* to this terminal.
*
Use the AD-1210P/1215P (optional) or its
equivalent.
20. External speaker terminal [EXT SP]
An external speaker (8 Ω, 0.6 W) can be connected
to this terminal. (Refer to p. 3-77.)
Shift the Speaker selector switch (27) located
on the bottom surface of the unit to the EXT.SP
position when using the external speaker.
21. Headset speaker terminal [HEAD SET SP]
Connects to a headset speaker.
When connected, the built-in station speaker is
disabled.
23. Network connection terminal [LAN]
Can be connected to a network of 10BASET/100BASE-TX in auto-sensing.
Connecting the station to a PoE (Power over
Ethernet) switching hub eliminates the need for
an AC adapter.
(Ethernet RJ-45 jack)
24. LNK/ACT indicator (green)
Lights when the station is connected to a network
and flashes while transmitting or receiving data.
25. FD indicator (yellow)
Lights when the network is in full duplex
communications.
22. Headset microphone [HEAD SET MIC]
Connects to a headset microphone.
1-39
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[Bottom]
26
27
29
28
26.MAC address
This is the MAC address* for the unit. Since
the relationship of each unit location to its MAC
address is established when setting the network
attributes, keep track of this relationship for later
use.
* The inherent address assigned to each network
component, expressed in 12-digit hexadecimal
notation.
28. Microphone
Used for hands-free conversation.
Note
Avoid placing obstacles close to the microphone
that might block sound and prevent conversations.
29. Wall bracket mounting slots
Hang the mounting bracket hooks to these slots
when using the YC-280 Wall Mounting Bracket.
(Refer to p. 3-19, p. 3-23.)
27. Speaker selector switch [INT.SP/EXT.SP]
Used to select either an internal (INT.SP) or an
external (EXT.SP) speaker.
1-40
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.2.4. N-8610RM IP Remote Microphone Station [Top]
2
4
3
6
5
7
9
8
1
6
7
8
10
N-8610RM
IP REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION
11 12 13
1.Microphone
Used for conversation and voice announcements.
2. Power indicator (green)
Lights when the power is turned on.
3. Status indicator (red)
Flashes when a call is received, continuously
lights during conversation or when a paging
announcement is received, and is off while in
standby mode.
The indicator also continuously lights while
data is written to an internal storage memory
(FlashMemory), and flashes if there is a failure.
4. Status indicator (orange/green)
Light, flash, or go off depending on the current
operation state of function key (covered key).
5. Function key (covered)
Pressing a specific function key executes the
function that has been assigned to that key by the
N-8000 Setting Software.
Assignment of functions to specific keys is done
using the N-8000 Setting Software.
6. Indication label insert slots
Labels can be printed using the SX-2000 Setting
Software.
For details, refer to the instruction manual of the
SX-2000 Setting Software.
7. Status indicator (orange/green)
Light, flash, or go off depending on the current
operation state of function key.
8. Selection indicators (green)
Light, flash, or go off depending on the current
selection state of function key.
9. Function keys (R1 – R10)
Positioned in top-down order (R1, R2 ... R10).
Pressing a specific function key executes the
function that has been assigned to that key by the
N-8000 Setting Software.
Assignment of functions to specific keys is done
using the N-8000 Setting Software.
1-41
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
10. Talk key
Press this key to broadcast a voice announcement
and conversation.
If the Talk key is set to "PTT" ("press-to-talk")
mode, then it must be pressed continuously for the
duration of the broadcast. If the Talk key is set to
"Lock" mode, then it must be pressed once to turn
the microphone on at the beginning of a broadcast,
then pressed again to turn the microphone off
once the broadcast is finished. The microphone
can also be set to sound a chime at the beginning
and/or end of each broadcast. The Talk key mode
("PTT" or "Lock") and the chime function are set
using the N-8000 Setting Software.
11. Function keys (L1 – L3)
Positioned in top-down order (L1, L2, L3). These
keys operate in the same manner as the Function
keys (R1 – R10) (No. 9).
12. Broadcast status indicator (orange/green/red)
Lights, flashes, or goes off depending on the
current operation state of the Talk key.
13. Microphone indicator (green)
Lights or goes off depending on the current
operation state of the Talk key.
Flashes while the chime is being activated.
[Side]
14. RM-210 extension connector
This port is used to connect RM-210 extension
units.
14
N
NSIO
EXTE
1-42
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[Rear]
15. AC adapter terminal [DC INPUT]
Connect the AC adapter*1 to this terminal.
Use the AD-1210P/1215P (optional) or its
*1 equivalent.
IP REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION
DC INPUT
12V
15
400mA
LAN
16
17
16. Network connection terminal [LAN]
Can be connected to a network of 10BASET/100BASE-TX in auto-sensing.
Connecting the station to a PoE (Power over
Ethernet) switching hub eliminates the need for
an AC adapter.
(Ethernet RJ-45 jack)
17. MAC address
This is the MAC address*2 for the unit. Since
the relationship of each unit location to its MAC
address is established when setting the network
attributes, keep track of this relationship for later
use.
*2 The inherent address assigned to each network
component, expressed in 12-digit hexadecimal
notation.
[Bottom]
18
18. Wall bracket mounting slots
Hang the mounting bracket hooks to these slots
when using the WB-RM200 Wall Mounting
Bracket. (Refer to p. 3-32.)
1-43
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.2.5. N-8540DS IP Door Station
[Front]
[Side]
[Rear]
7
1
5
2
3
8
9
10
6
4
[Top]
11
1. Speaker
Outputs call tones and used for hands-free
conversations.
2. Status indicator (red)
Flashes when a call or paging announcement is
received, continuously lights during conversation,
and is off while in standby mode. The indicator
also continuously lights while data is written to
an internal storage memory (FlashMemory), and
flashes if there is a failure.
(Refer to p. 8-14.)
3. Call button
Used to call the preprogrammed master station.
4.Microphone
Used for hands-free conversation.
5.MAC address
This is the MAC address* for the unit. Since the
relationship of each unit location to its MAC address
is established when setting the network attributes,
keep track of this relationship for later use.
* The inherent address assigned to each network
component, expressed in 12-digit hexadecimal
notation.
6. AC adapter terminal
Connect the AC adapter* to this terminal.
*
Use the AD-1210P/1215P (optional) or its
equivalent.
7. Contact output terminals [H, C]
External equipment such as an electronic lock
can be connected.
(Output capacity: 30 V DC and 50 mA)
(Refer to p. 2-74, p. 2-185, p. 3-79.)
8. Frame ground terminal (FG)
Ground from this terminal when the switch box is
not grounded.
9. ACT indicator (green)
Lights while transmitting or receiving data.
10. FD indicator (yellow)
Lights when the network is in full duplex
communications.
11. Network connection terminal [PC]
Can be connected to a network of 10BASET/100BASE-TX in auto-sensing.
Connecting the station to a PoE (Power over
Ethernet) switching hub eliminates the need for
an AC adapter.
(Ethernet RJ-45 jack)
1-44
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.2.6. N-8640DS IP Door Station
[Front]
[Rear]
5
1
2
3
4
8
6
7
1. Speaker
Outputs call tones and used for hands-free
conversations.
2. Status indicator (red)
Flashes when a call or paging announcement is
received, continuously lights during conversation,
and is off while in standby mode. The indicator
also continuously lights while data is written to
an internal storage memory (FlashMemory), and
flashes if there is a failure.
(Refer to p. 8-14.)
3. Call button
Used to call the preprogrammed master station.
4.Microphone
Used for hands-free conversation.
5. Frame ground terminal
Be sure to ground this terminal.
6. Network connection terminal [LAN]
Can be connected to a network of 10BASET/100BASE-TX in auto-sensing.
Connecting the station to a PoE (Power over
Ethernet) switching hub eliminates the need for an
AC adapter.
7. AC adapter terminal
Connect the AC adapter* to this terminal.
*
Use the AD-1210P/1215P
equivalent.
(optional)
or
its
8. External connection cables
• External contact input (HOT: Gray, COM:
White)
Connects to an external device such as a switch
and sensor.
No-voltage make contact input (Open voltage: 5
V DC, Short-circuit current: 10 mA or less)
• External contact output (Blue x 2)
Connects to an external device such as an
electric lock.
Relay contact output (Withstand voltage: 30 V
DC max., Maximum control current: 500 mA)
• External contact output (CH 1: Brown, CH
2: Red, CH 3: Orange, CH 4: Yellow, COM:
Purple)
Connects to an external device such as an
indicator.
Open collector output (Withstand voltage: 30 V
DC, Maximum control current: 50 mA)
• External speaker output (Black x 2)
Connects to a external speaker (8 Ω, 0.6 W or
less).
1-45
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.2.7. N-8650DS IP Door Station
[Front]
[Rear]
1
2
3
6
4
5
1. Speaker
Outputs call tones and used for hands-free
conversations.
2. Call button/Status indicator (red)
Used to call the preprogrammed master station.
Flashes when a call or paging announcement is
received, continuously lights during conversation,
and is off while in standby mode. The indicator
also continuously lights while data is written to
an internal storage memory (FlashMemory), and
flashes if there is a failure.
(Refer to p. 8-14.)
3.Microphone
Used for hands-free conversation.
4. Network connection terminal [LAN]
Can be connected to a network of 10BASET/100BASE-TX in auto-sensing.
Connecting the station to a PoE (Power over
Ethernet) switching hub eliminates the need for an
AC adapter.
5. AC adapter terminal
Connect the AC adapter* to this terminal.
*
Use the AD-1210P/1215P
equivalent.
(optional)
or
its
6. External connection cables
• External contact input (HOT: Gray, COM:
White)
Connects to an external device such as a switch
and sensor.
No-voltage make contact input (Open voltage: 5
V DC, Short-circuit current: 10 mA or less)
• External contact output (Blue x 2)
Connects to an external device such as an
electric lock.
Relay contact output (Withstand voltage: 30 V
DC max., Maximum control current: 500 mA)
• External contact output (CH 1: Brown, CH
2: Red, CH 3: Orange, CH 4: Yellow, COM:
Purple)
Connects to an external device such as an
indicator.
Open collector output (Withstand voltage: 30 V
DC, Maximum control current: 50 mA)
• External speaker output (Black x 2)
Connects to a external speaker (8 Ω, 0.6 W or
less).
1-46
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.3. Substation Interface Units and Their Connected Equipment 6.3.1. N-8000RS/8010RS 2-Core Shielded Substation Interface Unit
[Front]
1 2 3 4 5
Note: The figure represents the N-8000RS.
1. Reset key [RESET]
Pressing this key reactivates the unit.
4. Power indicator [POWER] (green)
Lights when power is supplied to the unit.
2. LNK/ACT indicator [LNK/ACT] (green)
Lights when connected to a network, and flashes
while transmitting or receiving data.
5.MAC address
This is the MAC address* for the unit. Since the
relationship of each unit location to its MAC address
is established when setting the network attributes,
keep track of this relationship for later use.
3. Status indicator [STATUS] (red)
Continuously lights while data is written to an
internal storage medium (FlashMemory), and
flashes to indicate such unit malfunctions as
internal cooling fan failure. (Refer to p. 8-14.)
[Rear]
6
7
* The inherent address assigned to each network
component, expressed in 12-digit hexadecimal
notation.
8
9
10
6. AC inlet
Connect the supplied power cord.
Note
If there is a danger of lightning strikes, insert an
appropriate surge arrester into the power line.
7. Cord clamp
Pass the power cord through this clamp to ensure
that the plug does not pull out when the unit is
mounted to a wall. (Refer to p. 3-7.)
9. Network connection terminal [LAN]
Connects a 10BASE-T- or 100BASE-TXcompatible network. (Ethernet RJ-45 jack)
10. Functional earth terminal [SIGNAL GND]
Ground this terminal.
Note: This terminal is not for protective earth.
8. Substation connection terminals [LINE 1 – 16]
Use 2-core shielded cable to connect the substation
to these terminals.
Use the supplied removable terminal plug for
connection. (Refer to p. 3-83, "Terminal plug
connection.")
1-47
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.3.2. RS-150 Indoor Substation
[Front]
[Rear]
3
1
2
1. Speaker
Outputs call tones and used for hands-free
conversations.
3. Connection cable (orange, brown, black)
Connects to the 2-core shielded substation
interface unit.
2. Call button
Used to call the preprogrammed master station.
6.3.3. RS-160 Indoor Vandal-Resistant Substation and RS-170 Outdoor Vandal-Resistant Substation
[Front]
[Rear]
3
1
2
The RS-170 substation has
a weather-resistant coating
on its printed circuit board.
1. Speaker
Outputs call tones and used for hands-free
conversations.
3. Connection cable (orange, brown, black)
Connects to the 2-core shielded substation
interface unit.
2. Call button
Used to call the preprogrammed master station.
1-48
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.3.4. RS-180 Emergency Substation
[Front]
[Rear]
4
1
2
3
The RS-180 substation has a weather-resistant
coating on its printed circuit board.
5
1. Speaker
Outputs call tones and used for hands-free
conversations.
4. Connection cable (orange, brown, black)
Connects to the 2-core shielded substation
interface unit.
2. Status indicator (red)
Flashes when a call is received, continuously lights
during a conversation, and is off while in standby
mode. The indicator also continuously lights while
receiving a paging announcement.
5. Control cable (blue, white)
Connectable to an external equipment such as an
indicator.
A closed contact is provided only during
conversation.
(Open collector output, Output capacity: 24 V DC,
30 mA)
3. Call button
Used to call the preprogrammed master station.
1-49
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.3.5. RS-140 Switch Panel
[Front]
[Side]
1
3
2
4
5
6
7
1. Status indicator (red)
Flashes when a call is received, continuously lights
during a conversation, and is off while in standby
mode. The indicator also continuously lights while
receiving a paging announcement.
2. Privacy indicator (red)
Lights when the station is in Privacy mode.
3. Call button [CALL]
Used to call the preprogrammed master station.
5. Connection cable (brown, red, orange)
Connects to the 2-core shielded substation
interface unit.
6. Speaker cable (yellow, green, blue)
Connects to the external speaker.
7. Handset cable (purple)
Connects to the RS-141 Option Handset.
4. Privacy Button [PRIVACY]
Switches Privacy mode On and Off with each
depression of this button.
1-50
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.3.6. RS-142 Switch Board
[Front]
1
2
3
1. Connection cables (Brown, Red, Orange)
Connects to the 2-core shielded substation
interface unit.
2. Speaker cables (Yellow, Green, Blue)
Connects to an external speaker.
3. Call button interlock cable (Purple)
Connects to the RS-141 Optional handset.
4. Call button 1 cables (White, Brown)
Used to call the preprogrammed master station.
5. Call button 2 cables (Orange, Gray)
Used to call the preprogrammed master station.
4 5
6.3.7. RS-143 Switch Panel
[Front]
[Side]
1
2
3
4
1. Call button [CALL]
Used to call the preprogrammed master station.
3. Speaker cables (Yellow, Green, Blue)
Connects to an external speaker.
2. Connection cables (Brown, Red, Orange)
Connects to the 2-core shielded substation
interface unit.
4. Call button interlock cable (Purple)
Connects to the RS-141 Optional handset.
1-51
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.3.8. RS-144 Switch Panel
[Front]
[Side]
1
2
3
4
5
1. Emergency call button [EMERGENCY]
Used to call the preprogrammed master station.
4. Speaker cables (Yellow, Green, Blue)
Connects to an external speaker.
2. Call button [NORMAL]
Used to call the preprogrammed master station.
5. Call button interlock cable (Purple)
Connects to the RS-141 Optional handset.
3. Connection cables (Brown, Red, Orange)
Connects to the 2-core shielded substation
interface unit.
1-52
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.3.9. RS-141 Indoor Option Handset for RS-140/142/143/144
[Front]
1. Volume control
Adjusts the call volume heard at the handset.
1
2. Connection cable (brown, red, orange)
Connects to the 2-core shielded substation
interface unit.
3. Speaker cable (yellow, green, blue)
Connects to the external speaker.
2
3
4
5
4. Handset cable (purple)
Connects to the RS-140/143/144 Switch Panel or
the RS-142 Switch Board.
5. Handset
Used to make handset calls from the RS140/143/144 Switch Panel or the RS-142 Switch
Board. While this handset is used, the RS140/142/143/144 unit's external speaker is cut off.
Note
Do not lift the handset during paging reception only
when the RS-140/143/144 Switch Panel or the RS142 Switch Board is used in conjunction with the
N-8010RS Substation Interface unit.
Paging calls are not heard well through the handset.
1-53
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.3.10. N-8400RS 4-Wire Substation Interface Unit
[Front]
1 2 3 4 5
1. Reset key [RESET]
Pressing this key reactivates the unit.
4. Power indicator [POWER] (green)
Lights when power is supplied to the unit.
2. LNK/ACT indicator [LNK/ACT] (green)
Lights when connected to a network, and flashes
while transmitting or receiving data.
5.MAC address
This is the MAC address* for the unit. Since the
relationship of each unit location to its MAC address
is established when setting the network attributes,
keep track of this relationship for later use.
3. Status indicator [STATUS] (red)
Continuously lights while data is written to an
internal storage medium (FlashMemory), and
flashes to indicate such unit malfunctions as
internal cooling fan failure. (Refer to p. 8-14.)
[Rear]
6
7
* The inherent address assigned to each network
component, expressed in 12-digit hexadecimal
notation.
8
9
10
6. AC inlet
Connect the supplied power cord.
Note
If there is a danger of lightning strikes, insert an
appropriate surge arrester into the power line.
7. Cord clamp
Pass the power cord through this clamp to ensure
that the plug does not pull out when the unit is
mounted to a wall. (Refer to p. 3-7.)
9. Network connection terminal [LAN]
Connects a 10BASE-T- or 100BASE-TXcompatible network. (Ethernet RJ-45 jack)
10. Functional earth terminal [SIGNAL GND]
Ground this terminal.
Note: This terminal is not for protective earth.
8. Substation connection terminals [LINE 1 – 16]
Connect substations to these terminals using two
pairs of twisted pair cables.
Use the supplied removable terminal plug for
connection. (Refer to p. 3-83, "Terminal plug
connection.")
1-54
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.3.11. N-8410MS Analog Standard Master Station
[Top]
3
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1. Handset
Lift the handset for handset conversation. Lifting
the handset disconnects both the hands-free
microphone and the speaker.
2. Dial directory
Writes the dial registration of the party to be called
to this directory.
3. Status indicator (red)
Continuously lights when a call is received or
during conversation, and is unlit while in standby
mode. The indicator also continuously lights while
receiving a paging announcement.
4. Speaker
Outputs call tones and used for hands-free
conversations.
5. Function key [FUNCTION]
Use this key to perform function settings such as
assigning call transfer recipients or programming
one-touch dialing.
6. Redial key [REDIAL]
Permits the last called number to be dialed. (Refer
to p. 2-8.)
12 13
7. Transfer key [TRANSFER]
Used to transfer the current conversation to
another station. (Refer to p. 2-15.)
8. Push-to-talk key [PTT]
Pressing this key while calling a party by means
of a continuous call tone permits a voice call to
be made. (Refer to p. 2-9.) Also, pressing this
key during a hands-free conversation establishes
a one-way conversation from the party who
pressed the key. (Refer to p. 2-7.)
9. Dial keys
Use these keys to make a call or set a function.
10. Clear key [C]
Terminates the conversation.
11. Paging key [CALL]
Makes a paging. (Refer to p. 2-25.)
12. Paging response key [RESP.]
Responds to a paging.
(Refer to p. 2-31.)
13. Hold key [HOLD]
Places the conversation on hold.
(Refer to p. 2-14.)
1-55
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[Rear]
14. Hands-free speaker volume control switch
[HANDS FREE SP VOL]
Adjusts the hands-free speaker volume.
15. Handset speaker volume control dial [HAND
SET SP VOL]
Adjusts the handset speaker volume.
16. Line connection terminal [LINE]
Connects to the 4-wire substation interface unit.
(RJ-11 modular jack)
HANDS FREE
SP VOL
HAND SET
SP VOL
14 15
LINE
16
[Bottom]
18
17
17. Microphone
Used for hands-free conversation.
Note
Avoid placing obstacles close to the microphone
that might block sound and prevent conversations.
18. Wall bracket mounting slots
Hang the hooks of the mounting bracket to these
slots when using the YC-280 Wall Mounting
Bracket. (Refer to p. 3-19, p. 3-23.)
1-56
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.3.12. RS-450 Indoor Substation
[Front]
1
[Rear]
2
3
4
1. Speaker
Outputs call tones and used for hands-free
conversations.
2. Call button
Used to call the preprogrammed master station.
3.Microphone
Used for hands-free conversation.
4. Connection cable (brown, red, orange, yellow)
Connects to the 4-wire substation interface unit.
6.3.13. RS-460 Indoor Vandal-Resistant Substation and RS-470 Outdoor Vandal-Resistant Substation
[Front]
1
[Rear]
2
3
The RS-470 substation has
a weather-resistant coating on
its printed circuit board.
1. Speaker
Outputs call tones and used for hands-free
conversations.
2. Call button
Used to call the preprogrammed master station.
4
3.Microphone
Used for hands-free conversation.
4. Connection cable (brown, red, orange, yellow)
Connects to the 4-wire substation interface unit.
1-57
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.3.14. RS-480 4-Wire Multi-Purpose Substation
[Front]
[Rear]
5
2
1
3
4
The RS-480 substation has a
weather-resistant coating on
its printed circuit board.
1. Speaker
Outputs call tones and used for hands-free
conversations.
2. Status indicator (red)
Flashes when a call is received, continuously lights
during a conversation, and is off while in standby
mode. The indicator also continuously lights while
receiving a paging announcement.
3. Call button
Used to call the preprogrammed master station.
4.Microphone
Used for hands-free conversation.
6
7
5. Handset cable (purple)
Connects to the RS-481 Option Handset.
6. Connection cable (brown, red, orange, yellow)
Connects to the 4-wire substation interface unit.
7. Control cable (blue, green)
Connectable to an external equipment such as an
indicator.
A closed contact is provided only during
conversation.
(Open collector output, Output capacity: 24 V DC,
30 mA)
1-58
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.3.15. RS-442 4-Wire Switch Board
[Front]
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
1. Connection cable (brown, red, orange, yellow)
Connects to the 4-wire substation interface unit.
5. Speaker cable (red, black)
Connects to the external speaker.
2. Control cable (green, blue)
Connectable to an external indicator.
A closed contact is provided only during
conversation.
(Open collector output, Output capacity: 24 V DC,
30 mA)
6.Microphone
Fix the microphone to an operation panel.
3. Panel connection cable (black)
Connects to a frame ground.
7. Call button connection cables (white, gray,
white, brown, white, blue)
Used to call the preprogrammed master station.
Up to 3 buttons can be connected, to each of which
call destination can be assigned.
4. Handset cable
Connects to the RS-481 Option Handset.
6.3.16. RS-481 Indoor Option Handset for RS-480
[Front]
1. Volume control
Adjusts the call volume heard at the handset.
2. Handset cable (purple)
Connects to the RS-480 Substation or the RS-442
Switch Board.
1
2
3. Handset
Used to make handset calls from the RS-480
station. While this handset is used, the RS-480
station's hands-free microphone and speaker are
cut off.
3
1-59
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.4. Interface Unit
6.4.1. N-8000MI Multi Interface Unit
[Front]
1 2 3 4 5
1. Reset key [RESET]
Pressing this key reactivates this unit.
4. Power indicator [POWER] (green)
Lights when power is supplied to the unit.
2. LNK/ACT indicator [LNK/ACT] (green)
Lights when connected to a network, and flashes
while transmitting or receiving data.
5.MAC address
This is the MAC address*1 for the unit. Since the
relationship of each unit location to its MAC address
is established when setting the network attributes,
keep track of this relationship for later use.
3. Status indicator [STATUS] (red)
Continuously lights while data is written to an
internal storage medium (FlashMemory).
Flashes if there is a failure. (Refer to p. 8-14.)
*1 The inherent address assigned to each network
component, expressed in 12-digit hexadecimal
notation.
[Rear]
M
6
7
8
9
10
11
6. Functional earth terminal [SIGNAL GND]
Be sure to ground this terminal unless the unit
connects to a PBX.
Note: This terminal is not for protective earth.
7. AC inlet
Connect the supplied power cord.
Note
If there is a danger of lightning strikes, insert an
appropriate surge arrester into the power line.
8. Cord clamp
Pass the power cord through this clamp to ensure
that the plug does not pull out when the unit is
mounted to a wall. (Refer to p. 3-10.)
9. Contact input terminals [CONTACT IN]
No-voltage make contact inputs.
Short-circuit current: 10 mA, Open-circuit voltage:
12 V
Connect using a removable terminal plug.
(Refer to p. 3-83, "Terminal plug connection.")
12
13
E
M
14
E
15
10. Contact output terminals [CONTACT OUT]
Relay contact outputs.
Withstand voltage: 24 V DC, Control current:
Maximum 0.5 A
Connect using a removable terminal plug.
(Refer to p. 3-83, "Terminal plug connection.")
11. Input volume controls
[EXTERNAL SIGNAL 1, 2]
Use these controls to adjust the audio input
levels for channels 1 and 2 according to the input
sources.
12. Audio input terminal [AUDIO IN]
Includes audio inputs (maximum 0 dB*2, over 10
kΩ, balanced) and contact inputs (no-voltage
make contact, short-circuit current: 10 mA, opencircuit voltage: 12 V).
Connect using a removable terminal plug.
(Refer to p. 3-83, "Terminal plug connection.")
1-60
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
13. Audio output terminal [AUDIO OUT]
Includes audio outputs (maximum 0 dB*2, under
600 Ω, balanced) and control outputs (relay
contact withstand voltage: 24 V DC, control
current: maximum 0.5 A).
Each control output remains closed during audio
signal output.
Connect using a removable terminal plug.
(Refer to p. 3-83, "Terminal plug connection.")
14. PBX interface terminal [PBX IF]
Connects to the Exchange of the EXES-2000
or EXES-6000 system by a tie-line, or the PBX
exchange via the analog E&M interface.
15. Network connection terminal [10/100M]
Connects to a 10BASE-T- or 100BASE-TXcompatible network. (Ethernet RJ-45 jack)
*2 0 dB = 1 V
6.4.2. N-8000CO C/O Interface Unit
[Front]
[Rear]
1 2 3 4 5 6
1. Reset key [RESET]
Pressing this key reactivates this unit.
2. LNK/ACT indicator [LNK/ACT] (green)
Lights when connected to a network, and flashes
while transmitting or receiving data.
3. Status indicator [STATUS] (red)
Continuously lights while data is written to an
internal storage medium (FlashMemory).
Flashes if there is a failure. (Refer to p. 8-14.)
4. Power indicator [POWER] (green)
Lights when power is supplied to the unit.
7 8
9
10
11
7. Cord clamp
Pass the power cord through this clamp to ensure
that the plug does not pull out when the unit is
mounted to a wall. (Refer to p. 3-17.)
8. Functional earth terminal [SIGNAL GND]
Ground this terminal.
Note: This terminal is not for protective earth.
9. AC inlet
Connect the supplied power cord.
Note
If there is a danger of lightning strikes, insert an
appropriate surge arrester into the power line.
5.MAC address
This is the MAC address*1 for the unit. Since the
relationship of each unit location to its MAC address
is established when setting the network attributes,
keep track of this relationship for later use.
10. Outside Line Connection Terminal
[C/O line]
Connect the outside line to this terminal using a
mini-clamp connector. (Refer to p. 3-83, "Miniclamp connector connection.")
*1 The inherent address assigned to each network
component, expressed in 12-digit hexadecimal
notation.
11. Network connection terminal [LAN]
Connects to a 10BASE-T- or 100BASE-TXcompatible network. (Ethernet RJ-45 jack)
6. Outside line indicator [LINE] (green)
Remains lit while accessing the outside line.
1-61
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.4.3. N-8000AF Audio Interface Unit
[Front]
[Rear]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
14
1. Reset key [RESET]
Pressing this key reactivates this unit.
2. LNK/ACT indicator [LNK/ACT] (green)
Lights when connected to a network, and flashes
while transmitting or receiving data.
3. Status indicator [STATUS] (red)
Continuously lights while data is written to an
internal storage medium (FlashMemory).
Flashes if there is a failure. (Refer to p. 8-14.)
4. Power indicator [POWER] (green)
Lights when power is supplied to the unit.
5.MAC address
This is the MAC address*1 for the unit. Since the
relationship of each unit location to its MAC address
is established when setting the network attributes,
keep track of this relationship for later use.
*1 The inherent address assigned to each network
component, expressed in 12-digit hexadecimal
notation.
6. Signal indicator [SIGNAL] (green)
Lights when audio is input.
7. Peak indicator [PEAK] (red)
Lights when over-input is applied to the audio input.
8. Cord clamp
Pass the power cord through this clamp to ensure
that the plug does not pull out when the unit is
mounted to a wall. (Refer to p. 3-17.)
9. AC inlet
Connect the supplied power cord.
Note
If there is a danger of lightning strikes, insert an
appropriate surge arrester into the power line.
9
10
15
11
12
13
16 17
10. Audio output terminal [AUDIO OUTPUT]
This terminal connects to a recording device, etc.
(Refer to p. 3-83, "Terminal plug connection.")
Max. 0 dB*2, 600 Ω or less, balanced 11. Contact input terminals [CNT IN]
No-voltage make contact inputs.
Short-circuit current: under 5 mA, Open-circuit
voltage: 24 V
Connect using a removable terminal plug.
(Refer to p. 3-83, "Terminal plug connection.")
12. Contact output terminals [CNT OUT]
Relay contact outputs.
Withstand voltage: 24 V DC, Control current: 2 –
500 mA
Connect using a removable terminal plug.
(Refer to p. 3-83, "Terminal plug connection.")
13. Network connection terminal [LAN]
Connects to a 10BASE-T- or 100BASE-TXcompatible network. (Ethernet RJ-45 jack)
14. Functional earth terminal [SIGNAL GND]
Ground this terminal.
Note: This terminal is not for protective earth.
15. Input volume control [INPUT VOLUME]
Adjusts the input signal level. Use this volume
control to adjust the signal level to below the point
where the Peak Signal Indicator begins to light.
16. Audio input terminal [AUDIO INPUT]
Connect the microphone or other sound source
equipment to this terminal.
Max. 0 dB*2, 2 kΩ or more, balanced
17. Time sync input terminal [TIME SYNC]
Connect the Program Timer, etc. to this terminal.
Use the removable terminal plug for connection
of this terminal.
*2 0 dB = 1 V
1-62
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.4.4. N-8000AL Telephone Interface Unit
[Front]
1 2 3 4 5 6
1. Reset key [RESET]
Pressing this key reactivates this unit.
2. LNK/ACT indicator [LNK/ACT] (green)
Lights when connected to a network, and flashes
while transmitting or receiving data.
3. Status indicator [STATUS] (red)
Continuously lights while data is written to an
internal storage medium (FlashMemory).
Flashes if there is a failure. (Refer to p. 8-14.)
4. Power indicator [POWER] (green)
Lights when power is supplied to the unit.
[Rear]
7 8
9
10
11
7. Cord clamp
Pass the power cord through this clamp to ensure
that the plug does not pull out when the unit is
mounted to a wall. (Refer to p. 3-17.)
8. Functional earth terminal [SIGNAL GND]
Ground this terminal.
Note: This terminal is not for protective earth.
9. AC inlet
Connect the supplied power cord.
Note
If there is a danger of lightning strikes, insert an
appropriate surge arrester into the power line.
5.MAC address
This is the MAC address*1 for the unit. Since the
relationship of each unit location to its MAC address
is established when setting the network attributes,
keep track of this relationship for later use.
10. Telephone connection terminal
[TELEPHONE]
Connect a telephone to this terminal using a miniclamp connector. (Refer to p. 3-83, "Mini-clamp
connector connection.")
*1 The inherent address assigned to each network
component, expressed in 12-digit hexadecimal
notation.
11. Network connection terminal [LAN]
Connects to a 10BASE-T- or 100BASE-TXcompatible network. (Ethernet RJ-45 jack)
6. Line indicator [LINE] (green)
Lights when the connected telephone is off-hook.
1-63
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.4.5. N-8000DI Direct Select Unit
[Front]
1 2 3 4 5
6
1. Reset key [RESET]
Pressing this key reactivates this unit.
2. LNK/ACT indicator [LNK/ACT] (green)
Lights when connected to a network, and flashes
while transmitting or receiving data.
3. Status indicator [STATUS] (red)
Continuously lights while data is written to an
internal storage medium (FlashMemory).
Flashes if there is a failure. (Refer to p. 8-14.)
4. Power indicator [POWER] (green)
Lights when power is supplied to the unit.
5.MAC address
This is the MAC address*1 for the unit. Since the
relationship of each unit location to its MAC address
is established when setting the network attributes,
keep track of this relationship for later use.
*1 The inherent address assigned to each network
component, expressed in 12-digit hexadecimal
notation.
6. Channel status indicator [CHANNEL] (green)
Lights when the contact output is ON.
[Rear]
7 8
9
10
7. Cord clamp
Pass the power cord through this clamp to ensure
that the plug does not pull out when the unit is
mounted to a wall. (Refer to p. 3-13.)
8. Functional earth terminal [SIGNAL GND]
Ground this terminal.
Note: This terminal is not for protective earth.
9. AC inlet
Connect the supplied power cord.
Note
If there is a danger of lightning strikes, insert an
appropriate surge arrester into the power line.
11
12
10. Contact input terminals [CONTACT INPUT]
No-voltage make contact inputs.
Short-circuit current: under 5 mA, Open-circuit
voltage: 24 V
Connect using a removable terminal plug.
(Refer to p. 3-83, "Terminal plug connection.")
11. Contact output terminals
[CONTACT OUTPUT]
Relay contact outputs.
Withstand voltage: 24 V DC, Control current: 2 –
500 mA
Connect using a removable terminal plug.
(Refer to p. 3-83, "Terminal plug connection.")
12. Network connection terminal [LAN]
Connects to a 10BASE-T- or 100BASE-TXcompatible network. (Ethernet RJ-45 jack)
1-64
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.4.6. SX-200IP IP Interface Module
[Front]
1 2 3
4
FOR SX-2000 SERIES ONLY
LAN
LINK/ACT 10/100M
RESET RUN
IP INTERFACE MODULE
1.MAC address
This is the MAC address* for the unit. Since the
relationship of each unit location to its MAC address
is established when setting the network attributes,
keep track of this relationship for later use.
* The inherent address assigned to each network
component, expressed in 12-digit hexadecimal
notation.
2. Reset key [RESET]
Pressing this key reactivates this module.
3. Run indicator [RUN]
Flashes during operation. The indicator also
continuously lights while data is written to an
internal storage memory (FlashMemory).
model SX-200IP
4. Network connection terminal [LAN]
Connects to a 10BASE-T- or 100BASE-TXcompatible network. (Ethernet RJ-45 jack)
LINK/ACT indicator
(green)
LAN
LINK/ACT 10/100M
10/100M indicator
(yellow)
LNK/ACT indicator (green)
Flashes while transmitting or receiving data.
10/100M indicator (yellow)
Lit when connected to a 100BASE-TX network and
unlit when connected to a 10BASE-T network.
1-65
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
7. System Function Table
7.1. Basic Functions
IP stations or the system consisting of Exchanges and stations makes the following functions available.
7.1.1. Master station's functions
Function
Operation Setting
The desired party can be called by dialing its station
number.
p. 2-8
Redialing
Pressing the Redial key automatically redials the last
number called.
Only the N-8000MS/8500MS/8600MS permits selection
from the most recent 10 numbers.
p. 2-8
Recall
The last conversation partner can be recalled by
pressing the [#/ ] key regardless of whether the call
was made or received.
Only the N-8000MS/8500MS/8600MS permits selection
from the most recent 10 numbers.
p. 2-9
Voice calling
Holding down the Push-to-talk key while making a call
by means of a continuous call tone permits a voice
calling to be made to the called station. The voice
calling reverts to the original continuous tone call when
the Push-to-talk key is released.
p. 2-9
Group call
When a station is assigned to a call group, if the station is
called, all stations within that group are simultaneously
called by a continuous call tone regardless of their call
receiving mode settings. If any one of the stations within
the group responds, calls to the other stations stop.
p. 2-10
Automatic
connection
Incoming calls are automatically connected after a brief
call tone (1 second) or without a call tone.
p. 2-10
Continuous call
Calls continue with a continuous call tone (or without a
call tone) and a status indicator continuously flashes as
long as no response is made.
p. 2-10
Auto-dialing
(N-8000MS/
8500MS/
8600MS only)
Speed
dialing
Reference page
Individual call
Conversation
Incoming
call
selection
Description
The dial operation (up to 20-digit numbers) programmed
into the station’s auto dialer can be performed by onetouch dialing.
p. 5-65
p. 5-80
p. 2-11
p. 5-68
p. 5-83
One-touch
dialing
Programming the dial operation (up to 32-digit numbers)
into the station’s [7], [8], [9], [0] or off-hook (with the
handset lifted) keys allows calls or other operation to be
made by one-touch dialing.
p. 2-12
Dial pattern
activation
(N-8600MS only)
When the dial operation (up to 380-digit numbers) is
preprogrammed into the N-8600MS as dial pattern,
such programmed call can be made.
p. 2-13
p. 5-77
1-66
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Function
Description
Reference page
Operation Setting
Mic off
When it is desirable to hold the line during a conversation,
if any dialing key ([0] – [9]) is pressed, the microphone
is disabled as long as the key is pressed.
p. 2-14
Call hold
Pressing the Hold key during a conversation places the
conversation on hold, transmitting a hold tone to both
parties. If the Hold key is pressed again, the hold mode
is cancelled, and the original conversation is restored.
p. 2-14
Current conversations can be placed on hold to
call a third party by pressing the Transfer key. The
original conversation can be subsequently restored
or transferred to the third party after conclusion of the
second call.
p. 2-15
Group hunting
Calls to a busy station are automatically transferred to
another designated station, if group hunting function is
set to the called station.
p. 2-17
Absence transfer
When no response is made to a call for a set period
of time, the call is automatically transferred to another
designated station.
p. 2-19
Call forwarding
Calls to stations are automatically transferred to
another designated station without sounding a call tone.
Programming a station to which a call is to be rerouted
instantly sets that station to the Call forwarding mode.
Time-based
call forwarding
Calls to stations are automatically transferred to
another designated station without sounding a call
tone. Even when the station to which a call is being
rerouted is programmed, the station is not switched to
Call forwarding mode until the set time is reached.
p. 2-21
Remote response*
Calls to a station can be answered by pressing the
Push-to-talk key of another station, provided both
stations are assigned to the same group.
p. 2-22 p. 5-125
Executive priority*
If a called station is busy, as indicated by a busy tone,
pressing the [9] key transmits a short priority call tone,
then forcibly terminates the current conversation,
allowing the call to go through. Access to priority
call operation or refusal of priority calls can be set
individually for each station.
p. 2-24
p. 5-67
p. 5-82
Station speaker volume setting
(except N-8410MS)
Pressing the [#/ ] key during conversation increases
the volume.
Pressing the [ / ] key during conversation decreases
the volume.
p. 2-5
p. 5-65
p. 5-80
Hold
Call transfer*
Automatic
transfer
p. 5-35
p. 5-62
p. 2-20 p. 5-65
p. 5-80
* T
he stations connected to the N-8010EX Exchange or the N-8400RS Substation Interface Unit have
restrictions on use of these functions.
1-67
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Function
Paging
Paging
response
Broadcast
to SX-2000
system
(N-8600MS
only, only
when SX200IP is
used)
Other
functions
Description
Reference page
Operation Setting
Zone paging
Calls can be made to one of the preprogrammed zones.
p. 2-25
Selectable
paging
Calls can be made to up to 50 zones of the
preprogrammed multiple zones.
p. 2-26
Selectable
paging to
individual zones
or the zones set
by a zone pattern
(N-8600MS only)
Calls can be made by selecting a zone or zone pattern
from the preprogrammed areas (zones).
p. 5-67
p. 5-82
p. 5-121
p. 2-27
p. 5-77
p. 5-121
Calls can be made simultaneously to all of the
preprogrammed zones.
p. 2-28
p. 5-67
p. 5-82
p. 5-121
Emergency
paging
Terminates all conversations, paging calls and other
operations that are currently in progress within the
system, allowing announcements to be simultaneously
made to all stations and all units preprogrammed to
receive paging calls.
p. 2-29
p. 5-67
p. 5-82
Message paging
Recorded Messages can be broadcast through either
IP Master Station key operation or remote activation of
the IP Master Station by control signals from external
connected equipment. The contact outputs of the Multi
Interface Unit, Direct Select Unit, and Audio Interface
Unit can be made to close in synchronization with the
activation of the Message paging.
p. 2-76
p. 5-70
p. 5-129
Automatic
response
Dialing the Paging Response key automatically initiates
a response to the paging last received.
p. 2-31
Zone number
designation
paging
Dialing the number assigned to paging response
automatically initiates a response to a next-to-last
paging.
p. 2-32
Selected zone
broadcast
Broadcasts can be made to the SX-2000 system zones.
General-purpose
broadcast
The General broadcast pattern having been set in the
SX-2000 system can be activated.
p. 2-34
BGM broadcast
The BGM pattern having been set in the SX-2000
system can be activated.
p. 2-35
Control output
activation
The control output of the SX-2000 system can be
activated.
p. 2-37
Multi-operation
activation
Multiple operations including the SX-2000 selected zone
broadcast, SX-2000 system’s control output pattern
activation, and N-8000 paging can be performed at the
same time.
p. 2-39
p. 5-28
p. 5-72
p. 5-77
p. 5-121
Scan monitor
The ambient audio of multiple preprogrammed stations
can be monitored in preprogrammed sequence from
the station. Designating the stations by operation of
the master station also permits them to be monitored in
designated sequence.
p. 2-44
p. 5-69
p. 5-84
Three-party
conference
Simultaneous three-party handset conference calls can
be held by calling other Master Stations in sequence.
p. 2-46
All-call paging
p. 5-36
p. 5-63
p. 2-33
p. 5-28
p. 5-72
p. 5-77
1-68
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Function
Description
Reference page
Operation Setting
Time signal
Schedules can be set, changed or suspended. The Time
Signal operates according to programmed schedules.
p. 2-50 p. 5-107
PBX connection
If the Multi interface unit is connected to the PBX’s
analog E&M interface, calls or conversations can be
mutually made between the N-8000 system’s stations
and the PBX’s extension telephones or paging calls can
be initiated from the PBX extension telephone.
p. 2-56
p. 5-45
Outside line
connection
The use of the C/O Line Interface Unit allows the Master
Station to make or receive calls to or from the outside
line telephone.
p. 2-58
p. 5-90
Tie-line
connection
Using the Multi interface unit for tie-line connection
between the N-8000 Series intercom system exchange
and other series intercom system exchanges via 4-wire
private lines permits calls, conversations, or paging to
be mutually made between stations connected to the
tie-lined exchanges.
p. 2-67
p. 5-45
BGM
Connecting playback components to the Multi interface
unit permits Background music selectable from up to 8
programs to be heard from each station speaker while
in standby mode.
p. 2-69
p. 5-36
p. 5-45
p. 5-63
External
equipment
control
Through operation of the station, external equipment
can be controlled by transmitting a one-shot make
output signal or make/break contact signal to the
contact of the designated Multi-Interface, Direct Select
unit, or Audio Interface unit, or by transmitting a oneshot make output signal to the contact of the designated
door station.
p. 2-71
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
Audio trigger
Activates alarm operation if audio input to the
microphone or the preprogrammed N-8050DS Door
Station or N-8640DS/8650DS IP Door station meets
set conditions.
p. 2-78
p. 5-67
p. 5-81
Door remote
control
Electronic locks or other external devices can be
controlled through utilization of the Door Station’s
contact output.
If a Master Station engaged in conversation with a Door
Station activates the Remote Door Control function, the
Door Station’s contact output closes for a specified
period of time. Similarly, the contact output of the MultiInterface Unit, the Direct Select Unit, and the Audio
Interface Unit can also be controlled.
p. 5-35
p. 5-37
p. 5-62
p. 5-64
p. 2-74
p. 5-66
p. 5-80
p. 5-97
p. 5-100
IP door station’s
speaker output
switching
control (only
when the
N-8640DS/
8650DS is
used)
The audio output destination of the N-8640DS/8650DS
IP door station engaged in conversations with the
master station can be switched to either the internal
speaker or the speaker connected to the external
speaker terminal by the master station’s dial operation.
The switched audio output destination reverts to the
internal speaker when the conversations terminate or
when interrupted by paging with higher priority.
p. 2-81
p. 5-66
Access code
authentication
Usage of the master station can be restricted when the
access code authentication (4-digit password) is enabled.
If authentication fails, such operations as calling,
scan monitor, and paging calls cannot be made. Call
response and emergency operations are not subject to
access code authentication.
p. 2-82
p. 5-66
p. 5-81
Other
functions
5-35
5-43
5-49
5-62
5-67
5-82
5-106
5-110
5-114
5-117
1-69
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
7.1.2. Remote microphone station’s functions
Function
Conversation Individual call
Incoming
call
selection
Speed
dialing
Paging
response
The desired party can be called by pressing the station
call key into which the station number to be called is
programmed.
Reference page
Operation Setting
p. 2-95
p. 5-76
p. 2-96
p. 5-65
Automatic
connection
Incoming calls are automatically connected after a brief
call tone (1 second) or without a call tone.
Continuous call
Calls continue with a continuous call tone (or without a
call tone) and a status indicator continuously flashes as
long as no response is made.
One-touch
dialing
Programming the dial operation (up to 32-digit numbers)
into a station key allows paging or other operation to be p. 2-100 p. 5-68
performed by one-touch dialing.
Dial pattern
activation
When the dial operation (up to 380-digit numbers) is
preprogrammed into the Remote microphone station as p. 2-100 p. 5-78
a dial pattern, such programmed paging can be made.
The Privacy function refuses station calls and all paging
p. 2-101 p. 5-75
except Emergency paging calls.
Privacy
Paging
Description
Selectable
paging
Calls can be made to up to 50 zones of the
p. 5-67
preprogrammed multiple zones (N-8000 paging zones p. 2-102
p. 5-121
and paging zone patterns).
Automatic
response
Dialing the Paging Response key automatically initiates
a response to the paging last received.
Zone number
designation
paging
Dialing the number assigned to paging response p. 2-105 p. 5-63
automatically initiates a response to the last zonedesignated paging.
Selected zone
broadcast
Broadcasts can be made to the SX-2000 system zones.
General-purpose
broadcast
The General broadcast pattern having been set in the
p. 2-110 p. 5-28
SX-2000 system can be activated.
p. 5-72
The BGM pattern having been set in the SX-2000
p.
5-77
p. 2-111
system can be activated.
Broadcast
to SX-2000
BGM broadcast
system
(only when
SX-200IP is Control output
activation
used)
p. 2-106
The control output of the SX-2000 system can be
p. 2-111
activated.
Multi-operation
activation
Multiple operations including the SX-2000 selected zone
broadcast, SX-2000 system’s control output pattern
p. 2-112
activation, and N-8000 paging can be performed at the
same time.
Mic off
When it is desirable to hold the line during a conversation,
if any dialing key ([0] – [9]) is pressed, the microphone
is disabled as long as the key is pressed.
p. 2-14
Call hold
Pressing the Hold key during a conversation places the
conversation on hold, transmitting a hold tone to both
parties. If the Hold key is pressed again, the hold mode
is cancelled, and the original conversation is restored.
p. 2-14
Hold
p. 5-28
p. 5-72
p. 5-77
p. 5-121
1-70
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Function
Description
Reference page
Operation Setting
Current conversations can be placed on hold to
call a third party by pressing the Transfer key. The
original conversation can be subsequently restored
or transferred to the third party after conclusion of the
second call.
p. 2-15
Group hunting
Calls to a busy station are automatically transferred to
another designated station, if group hunting function is
set to the called station.
p. 2-17
Absence transfer
When no response is made to a call for a set period
of time, the call is automatically transferred to another
designated station.
p. 2-19
Call forwarding
Calls to stations are automatically transferred to
another designated station without sounding a call tone.
Programming a station to which a call is to be rerouted
instantly sets that station to the Call forwarding mode.
p. 2-20
Time-based call
forwarding
Calls to stations are automatically transferred to
another designated station without sounding a call
tone. Even when the station to which a call is being
rerouted is programmed, the station is not switched to
Call forwarding mode until the set time is reached.
p. 2-21
Remote response
Calls to a station can be answered by pressing the
Push-to-talk key of another station, provided both
stations are assigned to the same group.
p. 2-22 p. 5-125
Executive priority
If a called station is busy, as indicated by a busy tone,
pressing the [9] key transmits a short priority call tone,
then forcibly terminates the current conversation,
allowing the call to go through. Access to priority
call operation or refusal of priority calls can be set
individually for each station.
p. 2-24
p. 5-67
Station speaker volume setting
Pressing the [#/ ] key during conversation increases
the volume.
Pressing the [ / ] key during conversation decreases
the volume.
p. 2-98
p. 5-65
Call Transfer
Automatic
transfer
Microphone indicator
p. 5-62
p. 5-65
The broadcast status indicator on the left side of the Talk
key can be switched to act as a microphone indicator. p. 2-115
1-71
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
7.1.3. Door station's functions
Function
Description
Reference page
Operation Setting
Call
Pressing the call button allows the preprogrammed
Master Station or the analog telephone connected to
the N-8000AL unit to be called.
p. 2-117
p. 5-68
p. 5-83
Emergency call
Emergency calls can be made by quickly pressing
the call button twice in sequence.
p. 2-119
p. 5-67
p. 5-82
Conversation
Since a call received is automatically connected, it is
possible to answer the call with no need to perform
any response operation.
p. 2-119
Audio trigger
(N-8050DS/8640DS/8650DS
only)
Call button restriction
(N-8050DS/8640DS/8650DS
only)
Automatically makes a call when audio is detected
under preprogrammed conditions.
Pressing the Call button 3 times within 3 seconds
performs calling operation.
This function will prevent calls by accidental
depression of the button.
p. 2-120
p. 5-67
p. 5-81
p. 2-122
p. 5-67
p. 5-82
7.1.4. Substation's and switch panel's functions
Function
Description
Reference page
Operation Setting
Call
Pressing the call button allows the preprogrammed
Master Station or the analog telephone connected to
the N-8000AL unit to be called.
p. 2-123 p. 5-56
Handset conversation
Allows handset conversations by using the RS140/143/144 Switch Panel or the RS-142 Switch
Board in combination with the RS-141 Handset or the
RS-480 Substation or the RS-442 Switch Board in
combination with the RS-481 Handset.
p. 2-125
Emergency call
Emergency calls can be made by quickly pressing
the call button twice in sequence.
p. 2-126 p. 5-57
Conversation
Since a call received is automatically connected, it is
possible to answer the call with no need to perform
any response operation.
p. 2-128
Privacy (RS-140 only)
Pressing the Privacy button (when its indicator is unlit)
switches on Privacy mode. No calls can be made or
received while the station is in Privacy mode.
p. 2-129
Call button restriction
(RS-150/160/170/450/
460/470/480/442 only)
Pressing the Call button 3 times within 3 seconds
performs calling operation.
This function will prevent calls by accidental
depression of the button.
p. 2-130 p. 5-57
1-72
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
7.1.5. Telephone's functions
Function
Reference page
Operation Setting
Individual call
Calls can be made to the desired station by dialing its
p. 2-134
number.
Group call
When a station is assigned to a call group, if the station is
called, all stations within that group are simultaneously
called by a continuous call tone regardless of their call p. 2-134 p. 5-99
receiving mode settings. If any one of the stations within
the group responds, calls to the other stations stop.
Conversation
By hook-flashing (momentarily depressing the hook
switch) a third party can be called to switch from a twoparty conversation to a three-party conference call,
and the third party conversation returned to the original p. 2-135
two-party conversation or switched to a conversation
between the original conversation partner and the
called third party.
Call transfer
Automatic
transfer
Description
Group hunting
Calls to a busy station are automatically transferred to
another designated station, if group hunting function is p. 2-137
set to the called station.
Absence transfer
When no response is made to a call for a set period
of time, the call is automatically transferred to another p. 2-139
designated station.
Call forwarding
p. 5-97
Calls to stations are automatically transferred to
p. 5-99
another designated station without sounding a call tone.
p. 2-140
Programming a station to which a call is to be rerouted
instantly sets that station to the Call forwarding mode.
Time-based
call forwarding
Calls to stations are automatically transferred to
another designated station without sounding a call
tone. Even when the station to which a call is being p. 2-141
rerouted is programmed, the station is not switched to
Call forwarding mode until the set time is reached.
Executive priority
If a called station is busy, as indicated by a busy tone,
pressing the [9] key transmits a short priority call tone,
then forcibly terminates the current conversation,
p. 2-142 p. 5-100
allowing the call to go through. Access to priority
call operation or refusal of priority calls can be set
individually for each station.
1-73
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Function
Paging
Other
functions
Description
Reference page
Operation Setting
Zone paging
Calls can be made to one of the preprogrammed zones.
Selectable
paging
Calls can be made to up to 50 zones of the
preprogrammed multiple zones.
All-call paging
Calls can be made simultaneously to all of the
preprogrammed zones.
Emergency
paging
Terminates all conversations, paging calls and other
operations that are currently in progress within the
system, allowing announcements to be simultaneously
made to all stations and all units preprogrammed to
receive paging calls.
p. 2-146 p. 5-100
Scan monitor
The ambient audio of multiple preprogrammed stations
can be monitored in preprogrammed sequence from
the station. Designating the stations by the telephone
operation also permits them to be monitored in
designated sequence.
p. 2-148 p. 5-101
Door remote
control
Electronic locks or other external devices can be
controlled through utilization of the Door Station's
contact output.
If a telephone engaged in conversation with a Door
Station activates the Remote Door Control function,
the Door Station's contact output closes for a specified
period of time. Similarly, the contact output of the
Multi-Interface Unit, the Direct Select Unit, and the
Audio Interface Unit can also be controlled.
p. 5-35
p. 5-37
p. 5-62
p. 5-64
p. 2-153
p. 5-66
p. 5-80
p. 5-97
p. 5-100
External
equipment
control
Through operation of the telephone, external
equipment can be controlled by transmitting a oneshot make output signal or make/break contact signal
to the contact of the designated Multi-Interface, Direct
Select unit, or Audio Interface unit, or by transmitting
a one-shot make output signal to the contact of the
designated door station.
p. 5-35
p. 5-43
p. 5-49
p. 5-62
p. 2-150 p. 5-100
p. 5-106
p. 5-110
p. 5-114
p. 5-117
IP door station's
speaker output
switching control
(only when the
N-8640DS/
8650DS is used)
The audio output destination of the N-8640DS/8650DS
IP door station engaged in conversations with the
telephone can be switched to either the internal
speaker or the speaker connected to the external
speaker terminal by the telephone's dial operation.
The switched audio output destination reverts to the
internal speaker when the conversations terminate or
when the condition changes.
p. 2-155 p. 5-66
Access code
authentication
Usage of the telephone can be restricted when the access
code authentication (4-digit password) is enabled.
If authentication fails, such operations as calling,
p. 2-156 p. 5-100
scan monitor, and paging calls cannot be made. Call
response and emergency operations are not subject to
access code authentication.
p. 2-143
p. 2-144 p. 5-100
p. 5-121
p. 2-145
1-74
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
7.1.6. Outside line's functions
Function
Reference page
Description
Direct in line call
Calls up to
simultaneously.
Direct inward dialing call
Calls the desired station directly via a designated
station.
Paging
Other
functions
four
preprogrammed
Operation Setting
stations
p. 2-159 p. 5-90
Zone paging
Calls can be made to one of the preprogrammed zones.
Selectable
paging
Calls can be made to up to 50 zones of the
preprogrammed multiple zones.
All-call paging
Calls can be made simultaneously to all of the
preprogrammed zones.
p. 2-164
Scan monitor
The ambient audio of multiple preprogrammed stations
can be monitored in preprogrammed sequence from
the outside line. Designating the stations by the outside
line operation also permits them to be monitored in
designated sequence.
p. 5-27
p. 2-165 p. 5-89
p. 5-92
External
equipment
control
Using the outside line's function, external equipment
can be controlled by transmitting a one-shot make
output signal or make/break contact signal to the
contact of the designated Multi-Interface, Direct
Select unit, or Audio Interface unit, or by transmitting
a one-shot make output signal to the contact of the
designated door station.
p. 2-173
Time signal
Schedules can be set, changed or suspended. The
Time Signal operates according to programmed
schedules.
p. 2-167 p. 5-107
p. 2-160
p. 2-162 p. 5-89
p. 5-121
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
5-27
5-35
5-43
5-49
5-62
5-89
5-106
5-110
5-114
5-117
1-75
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
7.2. Other Functions
Function
Description
Reference page
Operation Setting
Priority
Response Priority:
When the system's call response mode is set to
"Selective Response" and a station simultaneously
receives multiple calls, priorities can be assigned to
calls to be responded to.
Call Priority:
Priorities can be assigned to calls. If a higher priority
station or paging call is made to a station currently
in use, that station's conversation or other current
operation is forcibly interrupted.
p. 5-36
p. 2-177 p. 5-44
p. 5-63
Time-out
This function terminates or cancels a call if the user
forgets to do so.
Limits can be set for calling time, conversation time
and paging time.
p. 2-178
Recording
Setting the Audio Interface Unit's operation mode
to Conversation Recording allows the recording of
conversations, conferences, paging calls and scan
monitoring of the Master Stations and telephones
(used instead of stations). It is also possible to record
conversations of the outside line telephones. Such
conversations and conferences are recorded on
recorders connected to the Audio Interface Unit.
p. 5-66
p. 5-81
p. 2-178 p. 5-89
p. 5-100
p. 5-106
Group blocking
By preprogramming groups of stations that can only
call restricted stations, operations for making calls or
paging between groups can be restricted.
p. 2-179 p. 5-123
Paging delay output
This function controls the audio output according to
the connected external equipment's activation time.
Delay time can be inserted into the time duration
from paging completion to paging pre-announcement
tone output (or paging commencement). The contact
that provides output in synchronization with paging
activation closes upon paging completion, irrespective
of the delay time setting.
p. 5-36
p. 5-44
p. 5-55
p. 2-180 p. 5-63
p. 5-91
p. 5-98
p. 5-107
Paging pre-announcement
tone output control
Paging can be initiated without using a paging preannouncement tone. Use of the pre-announcement
tone is selectable.
p. 2-180
External input paging
Activating the control input after connecting the
Remote microphone or playback components to the
N-8000MI/8000AF enables broadcasting to the
preprogrammed zone(s).
p. 5-36
p. 5-55
p. 5-63
p. 5-91
p. 5-98
p. 2-181
p. 5-45
p. 5-106
Paging sync contact output
control
The contact output of both the N-8000MI and
N-8000AF interface units can be set as the paging
output destination. This makes it possible to control
connected external equipment in synchronization with
paging activation.
p. 2-182 p. 5-122
Calling station indication/
CCTV interlock
Closing the Multi interface unit's, the Direct select unit's,
or the Audio interface unit's contact in synchronization
with calls received enables calling station indication or
CCTV system control.
p. 2-183
p. 2-184
p. 5-36,
p. 5-43
p. 5-54
p. 5-63
p. 5-90
p. 5-98
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
5-37
5-55
5-57
5-64
5-66
5-81
5-89
5-98
5-100
1-76
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Function
Description
Reference page
Operation Setting
Call/conversation sync
contact output
The contact output of the door station is closed
depending on their respective operations.
p. 2-185
p. 5-37
p. 5-64
IP door station external
control input
When dialing operations (up to 20 digits) have been
preprogrammed into the external control input of the
N-8640DS/8650DS, such dialing operations can
be performed by closing the N-8640DS/8650DS's
contact input. Nothing operates even when
closing the contact input if no dialing operation is
preprogrammed.
p. 2-186 p. 5-67
Remote dial control
When the Multi interface unit's or the Direct select
unit's contact input terminal is closed, the specified
station is made to automatically perform the set dial
operation.
p. 2-187
Direct select
This function can be used when the system's call
response mode is set to "Selective Response." After
designating the Master Station to be controlled and
assigning calling stations to the N-8000DI Direct
Select Unit's contact input and output channels, the
stations calling the designated Master Station are
indicated by corresponding lamps or other indicators.
Also, operating the desired channel enables calls
to be made between the Master Station and its
corresponding stations.
p. 2-188 p. 5-116
Contact bridge
Closes the Multi interface unit's or the Direct select
unit's output contact terminal when the input contact
terminal is closed.
p. 2-189
Paging busy input
Notifies the busy status of connected external PA
paging equipment.
p. 2-189 p. 5-48
System diagnosis
The Multi interface unit, the Direct select unit, or the
Audio interface unit diagnoses the system condition
via the network, and provide their results at the
contact output terminal as open or closed contact.
p. 5-49
p. 2-190 p. 5-110
p. 5-117
Time signal
Automatically plays the external connected sound
source or the N-8000AF Audio interface unit's internal
sound source according to the preprogrammed
schedule.
p. 2-50 p. 5-106
Time correction
Synchronizes the clocks of all components in the
system with the one as a clock master. The Master
Clock transmits a sync command to all other system
equipment once a day.
p. 2-191 p. 5-27
Automatic daylight saving
time correction
Automatically adjusts the time for the period of
daylight saving time.
p. 2-191 p. 5-27
NTP client
Synchronizes the clock of the N-8000AF set to the
clock master with NTP Server. Cannot be used
simultaneously with the Time sync function.
p. 2-192 p. 5-26
p. 5-48
p. 5-116
p. 5-48
p. 5-116
1-77
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
8. TWO CALL RESPONSE METHODS
Two different call response methods are available to the N-8000 system: "Sequential Response" and "Selective
Response." The former is used in "Master-to-Master" systems that allow free communication between Master
Stations by calling one another, while the latter is used in "Master-to-Sub" systems in which substations installed
in different locations call one specified Master Station.
Note
The entire system is set for Sequential Response. A Master Station set for Sequential Response cannot be
used in combination with a Master Station set for Selective Response.
8.1. Sequential Response (Master-to-Master System)
This method is used in systems in which the Master Stations are mainly used and calls are freely made. Its
main applications include communication and paging, and received calls are responded to on a first-comefirst-served basis. Response can be set to either "Continuously Called Station Response" or "Auto-Respond"
modes. Selecting "Auto-Respond" eliminates the need for button operation and allows conversations to be
started instantly.
(1) Calling
(3) Response to call.
LAN
(2) Calling
• Only one call is accepted.
• The second call is placed in busy mode.
• Responds to the first call.
(Note: However, the second calling party can
break in on the conversation using Emergency
Interrupt to request the called party to return
the call after conversation completion.)
8.2. Selective Response (Master-to-Sub System)
This method is used in systems in which a Master Station is called from multiple Substations or Door Stations. Its
main applications include interphone and nurse call systems, and the Master Station selects which Substation
to respond to. Auto-Respond cannot be used in this system.
• The Master Station confirms it has received
two or more calls.
• The Master Station selects the call to respond
to and begins conversation.
(1) Calling
LAN
(3) Calling
(2) Calling
(4) Response to call.
1-78
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
9. PAGING FUNCTION OUTLINES
There are two types of paging: (1) PA paging by way of external PA equipment and (2) Station paging by way of
the station's internal speaker. Both types have access to the (1) zone paging function which pages one zone, (2)
the selectable paging function which pages multiple selected zones, and (3) the all-call paging function which
pages all zones simultaneously.
9.1. Paging Types
9.1.1. PA paging (Only when the N-8000EX/8000MI/8000AF is used)
Connecting PA equipment to the N-8000EX exchange's or N-8000MI multi interface unit's or N-8000AF audio
interface unit's output terminal permits PA paging to be made by dial operation at the station.
Broadcast to
desired channel
Amplifier
N-8000MI
LAN
9.1.2. Station paging
Performing dial operation at a station permits paging to be made to other stations' internal speakers.
When paging is made to stations engaged in conversation, its behavior depends on the following priority modes,
either of which can be selected: "Paging priority" that puts the busy stations on hold and allows them to be
paged, and "Conversation priority" that allows the paging to go through except the busy stations.
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software program to perform the mode setting.
N-8500MS
LAN
Station Paging
N-8000EX
N-8000EX
PA paging
Station Paging
N-8000MI
PA paging
1-79
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
9.1.3. External input paging
Microphone announcements or background music can be broadcast to any desired channel by connecting a
Remote microphone or playback components to the N-8000MI/8000AF unit.
Note
External input pagings with priority ON take precedence over paging calls and conversations.
Audio signal: 1 pair
(0 dB*)
N-8000MI
Broadcast to
desired channel
Control: 1 pair
(Make contact)
or
N-8000AF
Remote microphone,
playback components,
etc.
9.2. Paging Functions
9.2.1. Zone paging
Calls can be made to one of the preprogrammed zones. For PA paging, assign a PA paging output to the
zone number. For station paging, assign a station to the zone number. One of the following three settings can
be selected: PA paging only, station paging only, or a combination of PA paging and station paging. Use the
supplied N-8000 Setting Software program to perform the mode setting. There are no limitations of the number
of stations that can be programmed nor the number of PA paging output.
9.2.2. Selectable paging
By performing dial operation at the station, paging can be made to up to 50 zones of the preprogrammed
multiple zones.
9.2.3. All-call paging
Calls can be made simultaneously to all of the preprogrammed zones.
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
9.2.4. Emergency paging
Paging calls can be made to all stations including those for which zone paging settings have not been performed.
Further, paging can be initiated from all N-8000MI Multi-Interface Unit, N-8000AF Audio Interface Unit and
N-8000EX IP Intercom Exchange audio outputs for which paging output has been set.
1-80
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
9.3. Station Paging Receiving Mode
The station that receives Station Paging operates in either Conversation priority mode or Paging priority mode
as described below. However, when the exchange to which the station connects is the N-8010EX, the mode is
fixed to the Conversation priority mode.
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software for the mode setting.
Note
All stations in a corresponding zone can receive Emergency paging calls, Message pagings or external
input broadcasts for which priority has been switched ON, regardless of the stations' reception mode setting.
Interrupted functions are not restored.
9.3.1. Conversation priority mode
• When a paging is made, the station in standby mode receives it. If it is engaged in conversation or dialing, it
does not receive the paging.
• Even when a station is called while being paged, it continues to receive paging without being placed in called
status. In this case, the calling party hears a busy tone.
When a paging arises on a station being engaged in conversation and still continues after the conversation
is over, the station starts receiving the paging on completion of the conversation.
Note
Dialing is possible even while receiving a paging.
9.3.2. Paging priority mode
• When a page is made, the station in standby mode receives it. If paged during a conversation, the paged
station receives the page without terminating the current conversation, while a holding tone is transmitted to
the conversation partner during a conversation between paging and paged parties if the paging station does
not belong to the same paging zone.
• When the station being paged receives a call from another station, the paged station becomes busy and
maintains the paging. When the call to the station maintains after paging completion, the station receives the
call.
Note
Dialing is impossible while receiving a page. (Paging response cannot be performed at a paging receiving
station, either.)
1-81
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
9.4. Responding to Paging
If the paged party responds at a station, the paged party can be put through to the paging party. The following
two response modes are available. Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software program to set either mode.
9.4.1. Automatic response
If the paged party dials the number assigned to paging response, the paging party who initiated the paging last
is called and put through to the paged party.
To respond to the paging, use the station assigned to the paged zone. Use this mode when each paging zone
is independent. When using external PA speakers, their zones must match those of master stations.
Building A
Building B
Zone 1
Building C
Zone 2
Zone 3
Speaker
Hello, Mr. TOA.
Please respond.
Speaker
Note
The Automatic response does not function in the paged zone
to which only the PA paging is assigned.
9.4.2. Zone number dialing
When making a paging, the paging party notifies the paging zone to use, and the paged party dials the
designated zone number when responding. If the paged party responds dialing the designated zone number,
the paging party who made the paging to the designated zone last is called and put through to the paged party.
Use this mode in locations where broadcasts from multiple zones can be heard or if only the PA Paging is used.
To respond to the paging, use the station assigned to the paged zone. Any station can also respond to the
paging as long as it is connected to the same exchange as the station assigned to the paged zone or the PA
paging output are connected to.
Zone 1
Zone 2
Speaker
(Zone number with
3-digit length)
0
0
Hello, Mr. TOA.
Please respond to Response 002.
2
1-82
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
10. OUTLINE OF THE MESSAGE PAGING FUNCTION
Emergency communication systems can be created using the N-8500MS/8510MS/8600MS IP Master Stations
or the N-8610RM IP Remote Microphone Station. Messages preprogrammed into the IP Master Station or the
IP Remote Microphone Station can automatically be broadcast through operation of that station's keys or by
means of external control input. As with the Paging function, public address devices and/or speaker stations can
be selected to receive message outputs. If a message paging is activated, conversations and paging at stations
covered by the message paging are all interrupted, allowing the message paging to go through. Surveillance
cameras, electronic locks, etc. can also be controlled in synchronization with the message paging activation.
Classroom A
Classroom B
Switch
Make contact signal
Emergency situation
in Classroom A.
N-8500MS
Message activation
Network
N-8510MS
N-8000EX
N-8000EX
Teachers' Office
Emergency
situation in
Classroom A.
School Corridor
N-8000MS
Emergency situation
in Classroom A.
N-8000MI
School Board
Make contact output
Emergency
situation in
Classroom A.
Elementary school A
Elementary school B
Elementary school C
Kindergarten A
Kindergarten B
Kindergarten C
Display panel
1-83
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
10.1. Message Recording
• Use the N-8000 Setting Software to record the Message
on a PC and program it into the IP Master Station or the IP
Remote Microphone Station from the PC.
• Messages of up to 20 seconds in length can be recorded
and programmed.
PC installed with N-8000
Setting Software.
10.2. Programmed Message Confirmation
Messages programmed into the IP Master Station or the IP Remote
Microphone Station can be confirmed at that station. To confirm it, press the
Paging Call key when the IP Master Station or the IP Remote Microphone
Station is in standby mode, then press the Paging Response key.
Emergency situation.
10.3. Initiating Message Pagings
10.3.1. Startup method
The following two startup methods are available:
(1) Pressing the IP Master Station's or the IP Remote Microphone Station's Paging Call key four times in rapid
succession initiates the Message recorded on that station.
Message paging
initiated.
Emergency situation.
Emergency situation.
Note
The Message paging cannot be initiated when the IP Master Station or the IP Remote Microphone Station to
be operated is currently in use. Wait until the station is in Standby mode. An exception to this is priority given
to Message pagings initiated at an IP Master Station that is receiving a paging call in the system set for Call
Priority mode. (Refer to the next page.)
1-84
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
(2) Only the N-8510MS standard IP Master Station can initiate Message pagings using the make contact signal
input if its rear panel-mounted Message Startup terminal is connected to a switch, sensor or other external
device. When the N-8510MS Station receives the make contact signal while it is in use, it stops its current
operation and initiates the Message paging.
Make contact signal
Message activation
Message paging
initiated.
Emergency situation.
Emergency situation.
Switch
In the case of the N-8510MS Station, set the usable startup method using the N-8000 Setting Software.
10.3.2. Startup conditions
Startup method
Station status
(1) Startup through
station operation
(2) Startup by external contact
input (N-8510MS only)
Standby
Being called
×
Busy
×
Paging
×
Calling
Being paged
×
When system is set to
Call Priority mode:
When system is set to
Paging Priority mode: ×
10.4. Message Paging Zones
Pagings can be made over any specified paging zone (example: all-zone paging) set for individual IP Master
Stations or IP Remote Microphone Stations. Use the N-8000 Setting Software to set the paging zones.
10.5. Message Paging Termination
To terminate a Message paging, press the Clear key of the IP Master Station or the IP Remote Microphone
Station which initiated the paging. The number of times the Message paging repeats can be set to either
continuous repetition till the Clear key is pressed for manual termination or to 1 – 10 repetitions for automatic
termination when the set limit is reached. Manual termination takes precedence over automatic termination.
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set a limit on the number of times.
Note
Message paging is not terminated even if the standard IP Master Station's Message activation terminal is
opened. To terminate, either press the station's Clear key or set the number of repetitions.
1-85
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
10.6. Message Paging Priority Level
The Message paging takes precedence over normal conversations and paging calls (except Emergency
paging). When the station to which the Message is being transmitted is in operation, all such operations are
forcibly terminated, allowing the Message paging to go through. Such terminated operations are not restored
even after the Message paging is completed.
10.7. Contact Interlock Control
The N-8000MI Multi-Interface Unit's, the N-8000DI Direct Select Unit's, or N-8000AF Audio Interface Unit's
contact output terminal can be made to close in synchronization with the initiation of the Message paging. Two
methods are available for this: one is to constantly keep the terminal closed during message broadcast and the
other is to close the contact by means of a one-shot pulse only when the broadcast begins.
Message paging
initiated
N-8000MI
Contact output
Revolving light
10.8. Muting Message Pagings (N-8510MS Only)
Only the master station (N-8510MS only) activating Message pagings can be set not to output Message pagings
from its station speaker.
Other operations such as status indicator lighting, repetition of paging, and contact-related controls except
Message paging output are the same as those when mute is not activated.
Audio signals are output as normal at the paging receiving stations.
When the operation other than Message paging activation is performed, sound source (like a call tone)
corresponding to the operation is output.
Tip: Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software program for Message paging mute setting. (See p. 5-70.)
Notes
• Message pagings can be muted at the master station’s built-in speaker only but not at its handset speaker.
• While a Message paging is activated, sound sources such as an error tone other than a message, even if
produced, will be muted. However, these sounds are not muted unless Message pagings are activated.
1-86
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
11. OTHER FUNCTION OUTLINE
11.1. Tie-line Connection
Conversations or paging can be performed by connecting the N-8000MI unit to the exchange of EXES-2000 or
EXES-6000 Series intercom systems. Wiring requires two pairs of cables per line, and the connected exchange
must be equipped with a Tie-line unit (TI-20A for the EXES-2000 and TI-600 for the EXES-6000).
EXES-2000
EXES-6000
TI-20A
TI-600
Audio signal: 2 pairs
(0 dB)*
N-8000MI
11.2. PBX Interface (E and M Interface)
Connecting the N-8000MI unit to a PBX permits conversations to be made between the intercom station and
the telephone, or paging calls to be initiated from the telephone. The N-8000MI is connected to a standard
PBX analog E&M interface using 3 pairs of cables per line. Since the ground return method is employed for
the installation of the system connecting between the trunk and the N-8000MI, use grounding or connect the
grounding cable separately.
Audio signal: 2 pairs (0 dB*)
N-8000MI
PBX
analog E&M interface
Control: 1 pair (E and M)
Grounding
Grounding
or
Direct connection
* 0 dB = 1 V
1-87
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
11.3. BGM
Background music can be transmitted to the station speakers in standby mode by connecting the N-8000MI
unit to musical playing equipment. Any BGM program can be selected from 8 channels at each station.
BGM signal: 1 pair each (0 dB*)
BGM 7
N-8000MI
Can be freely
selected at
each station.
BGM
Channel 1
BGM
Channel 2
BGM 4
BGM 1
N-8000MI
BGM
Channel 7
BGM
Channel 8
* 0 dB = 1 V
Note
Since BGM is lower than conversations and paging in priority, BGM may be interrupted at a BGM-broadcast
station even if the station performs no operation when other station makes a call or paging with all speech links
busy. Especially for the N-8010EX, which has a small number of speech links, BGM interruption happens more
frequently.
1-88
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
11.4. Contact Input and Output Functions
The following functions can be realized by using the N-8000MI's, the N-8000DI's, or N-8000AF's contact input
and output. However, the functions that can be realized are different depending on the models as shown in the
table below.
Function
Unit N-8000MI
External equipment
control
Remote dial control
Contact bridge function
Paging busy input
System diagnosis
Direct select
x
Calling station indication/
CCTV interlock
N-8000DI
x
N-8000AF
x
x
x
x
: Usable
x : Not usable
11.4.1. External equipment control
External equipment can be controlled by a one-shot make signal or a make/break signal provided at the
N-8000MI's, the N-8000DI's, or the N-8000AF's contact output through either interlock with received calls or
station operation. Such control includes door remote control, calling station indication control, and hospital
waiting status indication control.
N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF
External equipment
Make contact
11.4.2. Remote dial control
When the N-8000MI's or the N-8000DI's contact input terminal is closed, a station is made to automatically
perform dial operation. A set of up to 20 dial codes (including dial numbers and key operations) can be assigned
to each contact input terminal.
For example, signals from a sensor can automatically activate a station to make a call as shown below.
Note
To perform the remote dial control, the contact input terminal needs to be closed for over 50 ms.
N-8000MI/8000DI
Make contact
Sensor, etc.
Remote control activation
Calls No. 100.
Call tone
No. 200
1
0
No. 100
0
1-89
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
11.4.3. Contact bridge function (external contact interlock)
Contact signals can be transmitted by way of a network.
Contact output
Contact output
Contact output
N-8640DS
N-8050DS
N-8000EX/8010EX
LAN
N-8000MI/8000DI
N-8000MI/8000DI
Contact input
11.4.4. Paging busy input
Busy status data from an airport broadcast system or similar large sound systems can be received when the
N-8000MI is interlocked with such systems, allowing important information to be accurately transmitted.
Large airport broadcast
system, etc.
Busy signal
N-8000MI
Audio signal
11.4.5. System diagnosis
The N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF diagnoses the system condition, and provides its results at the contact output
terminal as open or closed contact. The system diagnosis is performed in a way that the N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF
connects the target equipment via the network.
The contact output terminal is closed only when an abnormality has been detected.
Thereafter, its closed terminal opens when the N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF judges the condition to be normal.
This function aims to diagnose the exchange's line status and the network status of the connected equipment.
Note
Diagnosis is performed at the set time intervals*. Therefore, the diagnosis results are not obtained in real time.
The system condition, even if a change occurs, cannot be detected in the intervals from a diagnosis to the next
diagnosis.
* Diagnosis results are renewed every 20 seconds or less.
Contact outputs
N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF
Network
N-8000EX
N-8010EX
N-8000MI
1-90
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
11.4.6. Direct select
This function can be used when the system's call response mode is set to "Selective Response." By separately
making an operation panel for a specified Master Station which is equipped with the lamps and buttons
corresponding to other stations, and by assigning the Master Station and other stations to the N-8000DI's
contact input and output channels, the stations that are calling the Master Station are indicated by means of
lamps. Also, operating the desired channel button allows calls to be made between the Master Station and the
station assigned to that channel.
1
10
2
10
01
2
3
10
2
20
1
30
04
1
3
20
2
30
4
01
5
10
4
20
3
30
2
40
• The lamp for Station No. 201 flashes if the
Master Station is called by Station No. 201.
• Pressing the button for Station No. 201
connects the station to the Master Station.
6
10
05
2
4
30
3
40
6
20
5
30
4
40
06
3
5
40
Calling
6
40
No. 201
No. 202
Specially-made operation panel
(with lamps and buttons)
LAN
No. 203
Calling
N-8000DI
11.4.7. Calling station indication/CCTV interlock
By installing a lamp type indication board at the specified station, conversation partners and calling stations
that made calls to the specified station during conversation can be displayed on the board. The indication board
can be shared among multiple stations (up to 8 stations) to indicate which station within the group has been
called. It is also possible to use the N-8000MI's, the N-8000DI's, or the N-8000AF's contact for interlocking
the N-8000MI, the N-8000DI, or the N-8000AF with a CCTV system so that a calling party is displayed on the
monitor screen.
Camera 1
Specially-made display panel
300
301
302
308
309
310
Calling
316
317
318
No. 302
LAN
CCTV monitor
CCTV switcher
No. 301
Camera 2
Camera 3
No. 3 03
N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF
Camera 1's image
1-91
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
11.5. Time Signal
This function pagings set sound sources to set paging zones according to preprogrammed schedules using
the N-8000AF Audio Interface. The operation mode of one of the Audio Interfaces in the system must be set to
"Time Signal," and "Events" (time, paging zone, sound source, etc.) and "Schedules," which are combinations
of various "Events," must be preprogrammed to automatically operate the Time Signal function.
Mon
Sun
9:00
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Morning chime Morning chime Morning chime Morning chime Morning chime
12:00
Lunch break
12
Lunch break
Lunch break
Lunch break
Lunch break
N-8000AF
Chime tone
9
Chime tone
11.6. Audio Trigger
Alarm operation is activated if audio that enters the preprogrammed N-8050DS Door Station's or
N-8640DS/8650DS IP Door Station's microphone meets set conditions.
Only the N-8000EX Exchange can support this function, and up to four Door Stations that enable Audio Trigger
alarm operation can be connected per Exchange. The Audio Trigger function cannot be used for stations that
are set to receive background music. The Door Station detects input audio when it is in standby mode.
Preprogrammed Master Station calls can be generated or the contact terminal of the preprogrammed N-8000MI
Multi-Interface Unit or N-8000DI Direct Select Unit can be closed upon alarm operation (closure by one-shot
pulse). In addition, audio detected by the Door Station can be heard at the preprogrammed Master Station's
hands-free speaker for a set period of time after Audio Trigger detection.
k!!
Crac
Call tone
Call generated
N-8050DS/8640DS/8650DS
1-92
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
11.7. Recording
Setting the Audio Interface Unit's operation mode to Conversation Recording allows the recording of
conversations, conferences, paging calls and scan monitoring of the Master Stations and telephones (used
instead of stations). It is also possible to record conversations of the outside line telephones. Such conversations
and conferences are recorded on recorders connected to the Audio Interface Unit.
Recording begins with the start of a call, conference, paging or scan monitor on the Master Station or telephone,
which has been set to enable recording. Recording is completed when such operations end.
Conversation
Voice of conversation
LAN
N-8000AF
Audio
Contact
Recording device
11.8. Time Correction
Synchronizes the clocks of all components in the system with the one as a clock master.
The Master Clock transmits a sync command to all other system equipment once a day.
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software program for the Master Clock setting.
N-8000AF
Network
N-8000EX
N-8000MI
N-8000AF
11.9. Automatic Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time) Correction
Daylight saving time (summer time) can be supported and the following settings performed using the N-8000
Setting Software:
• Automatic daylight time correction ON/OFF
• Daylight time start setting (month, week, day, hour)
• Daylight time end setting (month, week, day, hour)
The daylight saving time correction will start or end at the set [hour] of nth [day] of [week] of [month].
The last day of the week in the month can also be designated.
1-93
Chapter 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
11.10. Broadcast to SX-2000 System
Using the SX-200IP IP Interface Module in the SX-2000 system allows broadcasts from the N-8600MS
Multifunctional master station or N-8610RM IP Remote microphone station to be made to the SX-2000 system.
SX-2000 system (1)
SX-2000SM
SX-200IP
N-8600MS
SX-2100AI
Slot
LAN/WAN
(Max. 8 modules)
SX-2100AO
Zone 1
N-8610RM
Zone 2
N-8000 system
Zone 8
(Max. 8 systems)
SX-2000 system (8)
SX-2000SM
SX-200IP
(Max. 8 modules)
SX-2100AI
Slot
SX-2100AO
One SX-200IP module allows simultaneous 2 channels of broadcasts.
Up to 8 modules can be employed per SX-2000 system, allowing simultaneous up to 16 channels of broadcasts.
Broadcasts can be simultaneously made to up to 8 SX-2000 systems, enabling individual selected broadcasts
to up to 2048 zones.
1-94
Chapter 2
FUNCTION AND OPERATION
This chapter describes the system functions and operation of the
N-8000 Series Packet Intercom System.
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S
FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
1. BASIC USAGE
Operation is the same for both the stations connected to the exchange and the IP stations connected to a LAN,
and also for the N-8031MS Hands-free Master Station used in combination with the RS-191 Handset.
1.1. Calling from a Master Station (Individual Calls)
Step 1. Press the station number to be called.
In this case, the station's handset may be either
lifted or in place.
or
1
The call tone is heard through the calling station's
internal speaker (heard in the handset speaker if the
handset is lifted).
When a busy tone is heard, wait till the line becomes
free, and you are automatically connected to the
called party.
5
1
5
Call tone
Call tone
or
Master station
Master station
Step 2. Start conversations when the call tone stops and the
called party answers.
Note
When the system is set to "Sequential Response*"
and the called station set to "Automatic Connection
Mode*," it is possible to start conversations after a
brief ring tone is sounded once. In other settings,
the call tone continues to sound and stops when
the called party answers, allowing conversations to
start.
or
Step 3. To finish conversations, press the Clear key or
replace the handset.
or
C
* Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to perform Sequential response and Incoming call mode setting.
(Refer to p. 5-26, 5-65, 5-80.)
Note
If the system has been set for call time-out or conversation time-out, the call or conversation automatically
stops after the specified time limit. The specific length of this time-out (in 10-second units between 10 and
990 seconds) is preprogrammed into individual exchanges or IP stations using the supplied N-8000 Setting
Software. (Refer to 5-36, 5-54, 5-63, 5-98.)
2-2
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
1.2. Receiving a Call (when the system is set to "Sequential Response" mode)
Step 1. Answer a received call.
1-1. When the called station's incoming call mode is set to
"Automatic Connection Mode*," the call tone sounds
only once, after which the calling party's voice is heard
immediately through the internal speaker. Answer
by speaking into the station microphone or lifting the
handset.
Master station
[Example]
1-2. When the called station's incoming call mode is set to
"Continuous call tone mode*," press any key for hands-free
conversation or lift the handset for handset conversation.
Tip
If a headset is connected to the called station, the call
tone is also heard from the station speaker.
Handset conversation is established when the handset is
lifted.
or
5
Step 2. To finish conversations, press the Clear key or replace
the handset.
* Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to perform Automatic
connection mode/Continuous call tone mode setting. (Refer to
5-65, 5-80.)
or
C
1.3. Receiving a Call (when the system is set to "Selective Response" mode)
Note: Only continuous call tones is available in "Selective Response" mode.
[Answering a call at the Standard Master Station]
Step 1. Answer a received call.
1-1. When responding by lifting the handset:
Lifting the handset stops the call tone and permits conversation to proceed.
1-2. Response with the Push-to-talk key
Pressing the Push-to-talk key enables hands-free conversation.
or
PTT
Step 2. To finish conversations, press the Clear key or replace
the handset.
or
C
2-3
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
[Multi-Functional Master Station response]
The Multi-Functional Master Station can respond to stations displayed on the LCD in the same way as the
Standard Master Station. When multiple calls are simultaneously received, the call to be answered can be
selected with the following operation.
Step 1. Press the Up and Down arrow keys to display the stations to be responded to.
The station number and name are displayed according to call priorities. Pressing the Clear key returns
the screen to the original display.
[Display example for normal received calls]
Calling station No.
Calling station name
200
: N - 8 0 5 0DS
Ca l l - i n
:
3
[Display example for received calls
containing Emergency calls]
300
: RS - 1 5 0
Eme r . c a l l - i n
3
The number of
waiting parties*
310
: N - 8 5 4 0DS
Ca l l - i n
: 1 /
610
: RS - 1 6 0
Eme r . c a l l - i n
1 /
First waiting party
406
: N - 8 5 0 0MS
Ca l l - i n
: 2 /
420
: N - 8 6 0 0MS
Ca l l - i n
2 /
Second waiting party
113
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
Ca l l - i n
: 3 /
515
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
Ca l l - i n
3 /
Third waiting party
* The
currently-displayed party is not included.
If nothing is displayed, there is no waiting station.
Step 2. Lift the handset when the desired station number and
name are displayed.
The call tone then stops and permits conversation to
proceed. (The Push-to-talk key may also be pressed for
hands-free response.)
or
PTT
2-4
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
1.4. Station Speaker Volume
The master station speaker volume can be preset using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software, however it can
also be adjusted at the station.
When using the master station other than the N-8410MS:
• The speaker volume level can be changed in 5 steps (in 3 dB per step).
• Pressing the [
] key during conversation increases the volume.
• Pressing the [
] key during conversation decreases the volume.
Note
The changed volume level is maintained even after conversation is
finished.
When using the N-8410MS:
The station speaker volume cannot be adjusted with key operation.
• Hands-free speaker volume can be adjusted using the station's rear-mounted hands-free speaker volume
control switch.
Its output level can be changed in 3 steps (in 4 dB per step).
• Handset speaker volume can be adjusted using the station's rear-mounted handset speaker volume control
dial.
N-8410MS
Hands-free speaker volume control switch
Handset speaker volume control dial
2-5
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
1.5. Speech Method
1.5.1. Hands-free conversation
Permits conversations to be made without using the handset when a call is made without lifting a handset or
received in automatic connection mode.
or
Duplex conversations
[Operation when both stations are engaged in hands-free conversation]
• When both stations (except the N-8410MS) are engaged in hands-free conversation, either full duplex
conversation by way of an echo canceller* or half duplex conversation by way of a voice switch is made
depending on conditions. (Refer to p. 8-2, "FULL DUPLEX AND HALF DUPLEX CONVERSATIONS.")
During this conversation, station's internal settings (parameters relating to the condition of sound reflection)
are constantly updated in response to the change in sound collected by the built-in microphone, allowing for
optimum hands-free conversation.
When both stations make hands-free conversation after either one has been moved in a new environment or
the environment surrounding the station has significantly changed, this may cause acoustic feedback. In this
case, continue the conversation and the situation will soon return to the normal condition.
If acoustic feedback cannot be removed, adjust the microphone sensitivity and speaker output volume of the
station.
Note
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software (refer to p. 5-65, p. 5-80) to set the microphone sensitivity and
speaker output volume.
It is possible to set the master station's speaker output volume at the station. (Refer to p. 2-5.)
* An echo canceller is used to eliminate acoustic feedback caused when the voice outputs from the station's
speaker are picked up by the same station's microphone. As acoustic feedback cannot be eliminated
thoroughly, the echo canceller is usually used in conjunction with a voice switch.
• When the N-8410MS is engaged in hands-free conversation, the speech method is the one using a voice
switch only. (Refer to p. 8-5.)
2-6
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
1.5.2. Handset conversation
Calls can be made or received by lifting the handset.
or
Duplex conversations
1.5.3. PTT conversation
This function makes announcements and conversations possible to areas with a high ambient noise level.
Pressing the Push-to-talk key during a hands-free conversation enables one-way conversation from the party
who pressed the Push-to-talk key. Conversation flow reverses when the key is released.
One-way conversation
PTT
One-way conversation
When both parties have pressed the Push-to-talk key, the party who pressed the button last is given precedence
to speak.
PTT
PTT
One-way conversation
One-way conversation
PTT
2-7
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
2. CONVERSATION FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
2.1. Calling
2.1.1. Individual calls
• The desired party can be called by pressing its station number with or without lifting the handset.
• Conversation can start when the called party answers and the call tone stops.
• A busy tone indicates that the called party is already engaged on another line.
Connection to the called party will be made as soon as the busy line is freed.
2.1.2. Redialing
Pressing the Redial key automatically redials the last dialed number.
Only the N-8000MS Multifunctional Master Station and the N-8500MS/8600MS IP Multifunctional Master
Station permit selection from the most recent 10 numbers dialed.
Tip
Keys to be registered into the Redial key are the Dial keys (12 keys), the Paging key, and the Function key.
When using the N-8010MS/8011MS/8020MS/8031MS/8033MS/8410MS/8510MS:
Press the Redial key to automatically redial the last dialed
[Example when dialing the paging last]
number (individual call, paging, etc.)
Paging
When using the N-8000MS/8500MS/8600MS station:
Step 1. Press the Redial key to display the most recently
dialed numbers on the display.
Step 2. Use the Up and Down arrow keys to display the
desired dial number. Pressing the Down arrow key
displays the last ten numbers dialed in reverse
chronological order. They are numbered 0 − 9 from
top to bottom.
Step 3. Press either the Select or Redial key to perform the
dial operation indicated on the display (individual
call, paging, etc.).
[Example]
Red i a l i ng
0:1001
Red i a l i ng
7:1203
1203
TOA
Ca l l i ng
2-8
2.1.3. Recall
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
The last conversation partner can be recalled by pressing the [
] key regardless of whether the call was made
or received. Only the N-8000MS Multifunctional Master Station and the N-8500MS/8600MS IP Multifunctional
Master Station permit selection from the most recent 10 numbers.
When using the N-8010MS/8011MS/8020MS/8031MS/8033MS/8410MS/8510MS:
Press the [
] key to recall the last conversation partner
regardless of whether the call was made or received.
Call
(The last conversation partner)
When using the N-8000MS/8500MS/8600MS:
Step 1. Press the [
] key to display the recent dial data of
the conversation partners regardless of whether the
call was made or received on the display.
Step 2. Use the Up and Down arrow keys to display the desired
dial number. Pressing the Down arrow key displays
the last ten numbers dialed in reverse chronological
order. They are numbered 0 − 9 from top to bottom.
] key to perform the
Step 3. Press either the Select or [
dial operation indicated on the display.
[Example]
Reca l l
0:1008
Reca l l
8:1111
1 1 1 1 Ma i n en t r an
Ca l l i ng
2.1.4. Calling by voice (Only when the system is set to "Sequential Response" mode)
Calling by voice can be made to the partner during call
by means of a continuous call tone and to the RS-140
placed in privacy mode.
Continuous call tone
• Voice a call to a called party by pressing the Push-totalk key as the continuous call tone sounds.
The call tone stops as long as the Push-to-talk key is
pressed, enabling the called party to hear your voice.
Call
Hello, Mr. TOA.
• The original continuous call tone resumes as soon as
the Push-to-talk key is released.
• For the RS-140 placed in privacy mode, the privacy
tone resumes when the PTT key is released.
Continuous call tone
He
.
OA
r. T
M
llo,
Call
PTT
Note
Calling by voice cannot be made to the station which has been set as a member of group call.
2-9
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
2.1.5. Group calls
• When a station is assigned to group call member station, if the station is called, this station (representative
station) and all member stations are simultaneously called by a continuous call tone regardless of their call
receiving mode settings.
• Even when the representative station is busy, all of the associated member stations within the same group
are called by means of a continuous call tone. This continuous call tone stops when any one of the associated
stations responds to the call.
• Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to perform the group call member station setting.
(Refer to p. 5-65, 5-80)
Notes
• The N-8050DS Door Station, N-8540DS/8640DS/8650DS IP Door Station, RS-150/160/170/180/450/460
/470/480 Substation, RS-140/143/144 Switch Panel, and RS-142/442 Switch Board cannot be assigned to the
group call representative station nor member station.
• When the call response mode is set to “Selective Response,” the stations connected to the same N-8010EX
Exchange or the N-8400RS Substation Interface Unit cannot be assigned to the group call member stations.
Continuous call tone
X
X
Continuous call tone
Continuous call tone
Call
Station number where
group calls is set
Conversation
X
Any key
2.2. Setting Call Receiving Modes
(only when the system is set to "Sequential Response" mode)
Call receiving modes, and call tone on/off can be selected for each station.
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to perform the setting. (Refer to p. 5-65, p. 5-80.)
2.2.1. Automatic connection
Incoming calls are automatically connected after a brief call tone (about 1 second) or without a call tone.
When a call is received, the status indicator changes from unlit to flashing red. It lights red continuously when
a conversation begins.
Lifting the handset creates a handset conversation.
2.2.2. Continuous call
Calls continue with a continuous call tone (or without a call tone) and a status indicator flashes as long as
there is no answer. When a call is received, the status indicator changes from unlit to flashing red. It lights red
continuously when a conversation begins.
Handset conversation is established when the handset is lifted, and hands-free conversation when any key is
pressed to answer a call (one-touch key response).
Note
The N-8050DS Door Station and N-8540DS/8640DS/8650DS IP Door Station cannot be set for the continuous call mode.
2-10
2.3. Speed Dialing
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
2.3.1. Auto-dialing (N-8000MS/8500MS/8600MS only)
When the dial operation (up to 20-digit numbers) is
preprogrammed into each station's Auto Dial key, such
programmed call can be made by simply pressing a single
key.
• Auto Dial keys can be programmed individually at each
station.
• The contents programmed into each Auto Dial key can
be confirmed at each station.
Call
1
[Programming]
Step 1. Press the Menu key to set the display to Menu
mode.
1 : Au t o - d i a l i ng
2 : L i n e mo n i t o r
Step 2. Press the Select key to set the display to auto-dial
programming mode, displaying the data already
programmed into the Auto Dial key 1.
Au t o - d i a l 1 :
Tips
• Use the Left and Right arrow keys to scroll the
display of programmed numbers with more than
15 digits.
• Since there are no factory program settings, the
display is initially blank.
[Example]
Step 3. Select the desired Auto Dial key by pressing the
corresponding Auto Dial key directly or moving
the cursor using the Up and Down keys.
4
or
Step 4. Press the Select key to allow the contents
programmed into the selected Auto Dial key to be
edited.
Step 5. Dial keys (12 keys), Paging key, Paging response
key, Hold key, Transfer key, and Function key can
be used for programming into the Auto Dial keys.
Entering a number longer than 15 digits causes
the screen to scroll.
Step 6. Press the Select key to enter the number into the
program of the selected Auto Dial key. To continue
programming additional Auto Dial, return to Step
3 and repeat the process.
Step 7. Press the Menu key to return the screen to the
normal (standby) mode.
Au t o - d i a l 4 :
X
Au t o - d i a l 4 :
2004
Au t o - d i a l 4 :
2004
1 0 : 0 8 AM
2000
2-11
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
2.3.2. One-touch dialing
Programming the dial operation (up to 32-digit numbers) into
the station's [7], [8], [9], [0] or off-hook* key allows calls or
other operation to be made by one-touch dialing.
* The action to lift up the handset.
Call
No. 200
8
Notes
• Perform one-touch dial programming when using the
external dial input terminal on the N-8031MS/8033MS.
• The one-touch programming can be performed either by dialing operation (see below) or using the supplied
N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-68, 5-83.)
Function
One-touch Dial to be programmed
designation No. dialing key
(up to 32 digits)
[Programming]
[Erasure]
+
6
+
X
+
Y
+
6
+
X
+
PTT
Y
+
PTT
(Confirmation tone)
(Confirmation tone)
Tips
• The key X above represents the [7], [8], [9], [0], or Push-to-talk key, which is used for one-touch
functions.
• Enter one-touch dialing programming (the key Y above) using the Dial keys (12 keys), Paging key,
Paging response key, Hold key, and/or Function key.
[Example] Programming [7] key for function designation number of Call forwarding.
Function
One-touch
designation No. dialing key
+
6
+
7
Dial to be programmed
+
4
+
1
+
+
PTT
(Example) Function designation number of Call forwarding
• Press the Push-to-talk key when enabling the Off-Hook function for one-touch key operation.
[Example] Programming and erasing of station [1][2][3] for the Off-Hook function.
[Programming]
Function
One-touch
designation No. dialing key
+
6
+
PTT +
Dial to be programmed
1
+
2
+
3
+
PTT
[Erasure]
Function
One-touch
designation No. dialing key
+
6
+
PTT + PTT
Note
The programmed contents set by dialing operation are automatically saved into the exchange or IP
stations at midnight every day. If the exchange or IP station is turned off before completion of save, the
state returns to the contents that were programmed before power-off.
2-12
2.3.3. Dial pattern activation (N-8600MS only)
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
When the dial operation (up to 380-digit numbers) is preprogrammed into the N-8600MS as dial pattern, such
programmed call can be made by the following operation.
Press the function key, [2], and then the function
key followed by the dial pattern number (01 −
54).
[Example]
Call
2
0
No. 123456
1
Notes
• Enter dial pattern programming using the Dial keys (12), Paging key, Paging response key, Hold key, Transfer
key, and/or Function key.
• Programming can be performed using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-77.)
2-13
2.4. Hold
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
2.4.1. Mic off
Disabling the microphone during a conversation places the line on hold.
[Mic off]
[Example]
Hold down any key of [0] through [9] continuously
during a conversation.
Mic off
0
Receiving call
[Mic off release]
If the key being held down is released, the original
conversation mode is restored.
0
Conversation
Release the key hold down.
2.4.2. Call hold
Calls during conversations can be placed on hold.
Holding tone
[Hold]
When the Hold key is pressed during conversations,
a hold tone is heard at both parties, placing the
conversation on hold.
If the handset is replaced with Hold key is pressed, the
conversation is not terminated.
Holding tone
Hold
[Hold release]
If the Hold key is pressed again, the hold mode is
cancelled, and the original conversation mode is
restored.
If the call is on hold with the handset on hook, only
lifting the handset cancels the hold mode.
Conversation
2-14
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
2.5. Call Transfer
Either party engaged in two-party conversation can call the third party to make conversation with (placing the
original conversation partner on hold). After the conversation end, it is possible to restore the original two-party
conversation or transfer the conversation with the third party to the original conversation partner.
Note
The stations connected to the N-8010EX/8400RS cannot transfer the calls.
Step 1. Press the Transfer key during two-party conversation.
The current conversation is placed on hold, sending a hold tone to the other party.
Step 2. Dial the third party's station number, for example [6][3]. If the third party answers, the first party can
speak with the third party while keeping the original conversation on hold.
The first party
The second party
No. 61
No. 62
No. 61
Dial the third party's station number.
6
The first party
No. 61
3
On hold
Holding tone
The second party
No. 62
The third party
No. 63
After completing the conversation with the third party, the first party can transfer the original conversation to the
third party or return to the original conversation, as described on the next page.
2-15
[Transferring calls to the third party]
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Step 3. To connect the third party to the original conversation partner being placed on hold, either press the
Clear key or replace the handset. This permits conversation between the second and third parties.
The first party
The second party
No. 61
No. 62
or
C
The third party
No. 63
[Returning to the original conversation]
Step 4. To return to the original conversation without transferring it to the third party, press the Transfer key
again. The original two-party conversation is restored.
No. 61
The first party
The second party
No. 61
No. 62
The third party
No. 63
The third party
Tip
Even if the first party does not press the Transfer
key, if the third party either presses the Clear key
or replaces the handset, the original conversation
is restored.
No. 63
or
C
2-16
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
2.6. Automatic Transfer
Note
Calls cannot be automatically transferred to the station connected via the multi interface unit.
2.6.1. Group hunting
Calls to a busy station set for Group hunting are automatically transferred to another designated station.
This Group hunting function also applies to the call transfer (p. 2-15) performed during conversation.
Note
The station to which a call is to be transferred can be set either by dialing operation (see p. 2-18) or using the
supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-65, 5-80.)
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to enable or disable the Group hunting function. (Refer to p. 5-35,
5-62.)
The station to which a call is to be transferred cannot be designated unless the group hunting function is
enabled.
(Example: A call to the station number 62 will automatically be transferred, if No. 62 is busy, to the next
designated station, No. 63.)
Conversation
No. 10
No. 62
Call
No. 63
No. 11
6
2
Notes
Calls are not transferred under the following conditions.
• The designated station is set for Call forwarding.
• The designated station is not in standby mode. (However, even when the designated station is busy, if it is set
for Group hunting, the call is further transferred to the next designated station.)
• The station set for Group hunting is called as a representative or its associated member station of the group.
• The designated station is busy when the system is set to "Selective Response."
• The designated station is the Remote microphone station placed in Privacy mode.
2-17
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
[When the called station and the call forwarding receiving stations are all busy]
The called station and the call forwarding receiving stations differ in operations during conversations depending
on the system's call response mode.
Sequential response mode: When the designated station set for Group hunting to which a call was transferred
is busy, the call is automatically transferred to the next designated station, and this
continues in series until a free line is found.
[Setting example] Settings can be performed to permit calls to be transferred to designated
stations in a cyclical manner.
Calls to the busy station No. 62 is transferred to the designated stations No.
62 through No. 65 in a cyclical manner until one of those stations becomes
free.
(Called station)
Call received
Group hunting
No. 62
Group hunting
No. 63
Group hunting
No. 64
No. 65
Group hunting
Selective response mode: Calls are responded by the called station or the call forwarding receiving station on
a first-in-first-come basis. Calls cannot be transferred further to other stations even
if the transfer destination station is set for Group hunting.
[Setting example] Calls to the station No. 62 can be responded by either station No. 62 or No. 63
even if the group hunting function is registered at the station No. 63.
(Called station)
Call received
Group hunting
No. 62
Group hunting
No. 63
No. 64
Programming or erasure can be performed at your station.
Function designation
number
[Programming]
+
4
5
Transfer destination
station number
+
X
X
+
(Confirmation tone)
The originally called (your) station number
[Erasure]
+
4
5
+
Y
Y
+
(Confirmation tone)
Notes
• The station to which a call is to be transferred via multi interface unit cannot be programmed as a
transfer destination station.
• The programmed contents set by dialing operation are automatically saved into the exchange or IP
stations at midnight every day. If the exchange or IP station is turned off before completion of save, the
state returns to the contents that were programmed before power-off.
2-18
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
2.6.2. Absence transfer
When no response is made to a call to the station set for Absence transfer for a set period of time, the call is
automatically transferred to another designated station.
Calls received during conversations can be transferred. (Refer to p. 2-15.)
The station to which a Absence transfer is to be transferred can be set either by dialing operation (see below)
or using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-65, 5-80.)
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to enable or disable the Absence transfer or to set a calling duration.
(Refer to p. 5-35, 5-62.)
The station to which a call is to be transferred cannot be designated unless the Absence transfer function is
enabled.
Call tone
Call
No. 62
A call is automatically
transferred to another
designated station after
a set period of time
6
No. 11
2
Call tone
The designated transfer
destination station
No. 63
Notes
Calls are not transferred under the following conditions,
• The designated station is set for Call forwarding.
• The designated station is not in standby mode.
• The station set for Absence transfer is called as a representative or its associated member station of the
group.
• The designated station is the Remote microphone station placed in Privacy mode.
Programming or erasure can be performed at your station.
Function designation
number
[Programming]
+
4
4
Transfer destination
station number
+
X
X
+
(Confirmation tone)
The originally called (your) station number
[Erasure]
+
4
4
+
Y
Y
+
(Confirmation tone)
Notes
• The station to which a call is to be transferred via multi interface unit cannot be programmed as a
transfer destination station.
• The programmed contents set by dialing operation are automatically saved into the exchange or IP
stations at midnight every day. If the exchange or IP station is turned off before completion of save, the
state returns to the contents that were programmed before power-off.
2-19
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
2.6.3. Call forwarding
Calls to stations set for call forwarding are automatically transferred to another designated station without
sounding a call tone.
Two different modes are available: one is Call forwarding, in which calls are manually rerouted to the selected
station, and the other is Time-based Call forwarding, which transfers calls only when the preset time is reached.
This Call forwarding function also applies to the call transfer (p. 2-15) performed during conversations.
The station to which a Call forwarding is to be transferred can be set either by dialing operation (see below and
p. 2-21) or using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-65, 5-80.)
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to enable or disable the Call forwarding function or to set the transfer
start/end time. (Refer to p. 5-35, 5-62.)
The station to which a call is to be transferred cannot be designated unless the Call forwarding function is
enabled.
Notes
Calls are not transferred under the following conditions.
• The station set for Call forwarding is called as an associated member station of the group.
• The designated station is the Remote microphone station placed in Privacy mode.
[Calls to stations manually set for Call forwarding]
Calls to the station manually set for Call
forwarding are automatically transferred to
the designated station without sounding a
call tone.
No. 61
6
No. 62
(The originally called
station, which has been
set to the Call forwarding mode)
2
Call tone
No. 63
(The designated transfer destination station)
Programming can be performed at your station or the transfer destination station, while erasure at your
station.
Function designation
number
[Programming at your station]
+
4
1
Transfer destination
station number
+
X
X
+
(Confirmation tone)
The originally called (your) station number
[Programming at the transfer
destination station]
+
4
2
+
Y
Y
+
(Confirmation tone)
The originally called (your) station number
[Erasure]
(available only at your station)
+
4
1
+
Y
Y
+
(Confirmation tone)
Notes
• The station to which a call is to be transferred via multi interface unit cannot be programmed as a
transfer destination station.
• The programmed contents set by dialing operation are automatically saved into the exchange or IP
stations at midnight every day. If the exchange or IP station is turned off before completion of save, the
state returns to the contents that were programmed before power-off.
2-20
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
[Calls to stations set for Time-based Call forwarding]
Step 1. When the preset transfer time is reached, the station's display shows the station (e.g. No. 62) has
entered the Time-based Call forwarding mode (N-8000MS/8500MS/8600MS only).
Transfer destination
Transfer destination station name
station number
63
: En t r ance
62
Original station number
Step 2. Calls to stations (original station) are automatically transferred to the transfer destination station without
sounding a call tone.
Original station number
No. 62
No. 61
6
0:00
2
18:00
Transfer time
zone
16:00
Start time
Call tone
6:00
8:00
12:00
End time
Transfer destination station
No. 63
Programming or erasure can be performed at your station.
Function designated
number
[Programming]
+
4
3
Transfer destination
station number
+
X
X
+
(Confirmation tone)
The originally called (your) station number
[Erasure]
+
4
3
+
Y
Y
+
(Confirmation tone)
Notes
• The station to which a call is to be transferred via multi interface unit cannot be programmed as a
transfer destination station.
• The programmed contents set by dialing operation are automatically saved into the exchange or IP
stations at midnight every day. If the exchange or IP station is turned off before completion of save, the
state returns to the contents that were programmed before power-off.
2-21
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
2.7. Remote Response (only when the system is set to "Sequential Response" mode)
When a station is being called, such calls can be answered by another station instead if these stations are
assigned to the same group.
Up to 16 stations can be set to a Response group.
The Remote Response function can only be used while calls are being made by a continuous call tone.
The Remote response function cannot be used for answering a call made by the group call function.
Notes
• Remote Response group can be set either by dialing operation (see p. 2-23) or using the supplied N-8000
Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-125.)
• The stations connected to the N-8010EX/8400RS cannot be assigned to the Remote Response group.
[Operation example]
Press the Push-to-talk key while the station assigned to the same Remote Response group (Example 62) is
being called by a continuous call tone.
Continuous call tone
6
2
Calling
No. 62
No. 60
PTT
Remote Response group
The party (Station No. 60) who pressed the Push-to-talk key can
respond instead of the called station (No. 62).
No. 62
No. 60
Conversation
Remote Response group
2-22
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
[Remote response group new programming]
Function designation number
+
7
0
+
(Confirmation tone)
[Remote response group member addition]
Member station number
+
7
1
+
X
X
+
(Confirmation tone)
[Remote response group erasure]
+
7
2
+
(Confirmation tone)
[Remote response group member erasure]
Member station number
+
7
2
+
X
X
+
(Confirmation tone)
Notes
• Stations currently set for other Remote Response groups can not establish a different Remote
Response group.
• Stations currently set for other Remote Response groups cannot join a different Remote Response
group as a member station.
• Stations currently set for other Remote Response groups cannot erase from a member station of the
Remote Response group.
• The programmed contents set by dialing operation are automatically saved into the exchange or IP
stations at midnight every day. If the exchange or IP station is turned off before completion of save, the
state returns to the contents that were programmed before power-off.
2-23
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
2.8. Executive Priority (only when the system is set to "Sequential Response" mode)
If a called station is busy, as indicated by a busy tone, performing Priority operation from a call station transmits
a short priority call tone, then forcibly terminates the current conversation, allowing the call to go through.
Access to priority call operation or refusal of priority calls can be set individually for each station.
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to perform the setting. (Refer to p. 5-67, 5-82.)
Note
The Executive priority calls cannot interrupt the stations connected to the N-8010EX/8400RS and the telephones
connected to the N-8000AL.
[Operation]
When Station A calls Station B, which is at that time
engaged in a conversation with Station C, press [9] key
at Station A.
A
Busy tone
During conversation
B
C
Interrupt conversation
A priority call tone is transmitted to both Stations B and
C, and the conversation is forcibly terminated, enabling
Station A to be connected to Station B.
Note
If a function to refuse priority calls has been assigned to
Station B being called, Station A cannot interrupt Station
B and the busy status remains unchanged.
A
B
9
Conversation terminated
C
2-24
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
3. PAGING FUNCTION AND OPERATION
3.1. Paging
Paging stations are preprogrammed.
Paging durations can be limited by preprogramming the time limit (between 10 and 990 seconds in 10-second
units) for each exchange or IP station.
Note
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to enable or disable the paging operation and to set the paging
duration. (Refer to p. 5-36, 5-63, 5-67, 5-82.)
3.1.1. Zone paging
Paging calls can be made to one of the pre-programmed zones.
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set the paging zones. (Refer to p. 5-121.)
Step 1. Press the Paging key, followed by the desired paging zone number (1 − 192).
A paging tone is transmitted to the selected zone.
Note
Enter a zone number with the digit length (1 − 3 digits) set by way of the N-8000 Setting Software.
Step 2. Page with the handset either lifted or in place.
If the system's paging response mode has been set for Zone number designation response (refer to p.
2-32), announce the response zone number to the paged party in the paging message.
Step 3. Either press the Clear key or replace the handset.
The paging is completed.
[Example paging to the zone 23]
Zone 1
1
Amplifier
(Zone number with 3-digit length)
0
2
2
Speakers
Zone 23
3
No. 1001
No. 1002
No. 1003
No. 1004
or
3
Zone 192
Speaker
or
C
Amplifier
No. 6000
2-25
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
3.1.2. Selectable paging
Paging calls can be made to up to 50 preprogrammed zones.
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set the paging zones. (Refer to p. 5-121.)
Step 1. Press the Paging key, then [
] key followed by the desired paging zone number (1 − 192).
Note
Enter a zone number with the digit length (1 − 3 digits) set with the N-8000 Setting Software.
Step 2. To select the zone numbers consecutively, press the [
] key.
Step 3. To terminate the zone selection, press the [
] key following the zone number.
A paging tone is sounded in the selected zone(s).
Step 4. Page with the handset either lifted or in place.
Note
If the system's paging response mode has been set for Zone number designation response (refer to p.
2-32.), announce the response zone number (any one of the paged zones) to the paged party in the
paging message.
Step 5. Either press the Clear key or replace the handset.
The paging is completed.
[Example paging to the zones 1, 23, and 105.]
Zone 1
1~3
Amplifier
Speakers
Zone 23
(Zone number with 3-digit length)
4
0
0
0
2
3
1
0
5
1
No. 1000
No. 1002
No. 1003
No. 1004
Zone 105
Speaker
or
5
Amplifier
No. 2000
or
C
2-26
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
3.1.3. Selectable paging to individual zones or the zones set by a zone pattern (N-8600MS only)
Broadcasts can be made to the preset multiple zones (individual zones or a zone group set as a zone pattern*).
* A pattern into which multiple paging zones are grouped.
Note
Set the paging zone and zone pattern using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-121, 5-77.)
Step 1. Press the Paging key.
Step 2. Select a zone.
Multiple zones or zone patterns can be sequentially selected by repeating the key operation in the
following step 2-1 or 2-2.
Note
The maximum number of digits for zone selection dial is 380.
2-1. When selecting a zone
Press the [
] key, followed by the desired paging zone number (1 − 192).
Note
Enter the zone number with the digit length set by the N-8000 Setting Software.
2-2. When selecting a zone pattern
] key and then Function key, followed by the desired paging zone pattern number
First press the [
(001 − 216).
Step 3. Press the [
] key.
A paging tone is transmitted to the selected zone(s).
Step 4. Page with the handset either lifted or in place.
Tip
When the Call response mode is set to "Zone number designation response" (refer to p. 2-32), inform
the zone number (only one of the paged zones) to respond to at a paging call.
Step 5. Either press the Clear key or replace the handset.
Paging is completed.
[Example paging to the zone 53 and zone pattern 01
(zones 1, 2, and 3)]
Zone 1
Zone 1
Zone 2
1–3
Zone 3
No. 1000
No. 1002
No. 1003
No. 1004
Zone 2
Zone 3
(Zone number with 3-digit length)
0
5
3
0
0
1
Zone 53
Zone 53
Speaker
Amplifier
No. 2000
2-27
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
3.1.4. All-call paging
Paging calls can be made simultaneously to all of the pre-programmed zones.
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set the paging zones. (Refer to p. 5-121.)
Step 1. Press the Paging key, followed by the paging zone number "0" (for all-call paging).
A paging tone is transmitted to all zones.
Note
Enter a zone number with the digit length (1 − 3 digits) set with the N-8000 Setting Software.
Step 2. Page with the handset either lifted or in place.
Note
If the system's paging response mode has been set for Zone number designation response (refer to p.
2-32), notify the paged party to respond to [0] in the paging message.
Step 3. Either press the Clear key or replace the handset.
The paging is completed.
Zone 1
1
Amplifier
Speakers
(Zone number with 3-digit length)
0
0
0
2
or
Zone 192
3
Speaker
or
Amplifier
No. 100
C
2-28
3.1.5. Emergency paging
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
This function terminates all conversations, paging calls and other functions currently in progress throughout the
system, and simultaneously makes a paging call to all stations, the N-8000EX IP Intercom Exchange's audio
outputs, the N-8000MI Multi-Interface Unit designated as paging output, and N-8000AF Audio Interface Unit's
audio output.
Note
All contact output terminals of N-8000MI and N-8000AF units included in the paging zone are closed.
Step 1. Press the [
] key four times.
All functions currently in operation are terminated, transmitting a paging pre-announcement tone to all
zones.
Step 2. Page with the handset either lifted or in place.
Note
If the system's paging response mode has been set for Zone number designation response (refer to p.
2-32), notify the paged party to respond to [ ] in the paging message.
Step 3. Either press the Clear key or replace the handset.
The paging is completed.
Note
Functions terminated by Emergency paging are not restored, even when the Emergency paging is
completed.
Equipment No. 1
1
No. 100
No. 101
No. 115
Equipment No. 2
2
or
Equipment No. 192
3
Speaker
or
Amplifier
C
2-29
3.1.6. Paging priority
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
[Emergency paging]
Emergency paging takes precedence over conversations, paging calls and all other functions. Initiating
Emergency paging terminates all other functions currently in operation, and these functions are not restored
even when the page is completed. Further, all other functions are disabled until the Emergency paging is
completed.
[All-call paging, zone paging and selectable paging priorities]
The all-call paging has the highest priority, while the zone paging and selectable paging are the same in priority
level.
• Initiating the all-call paging during the zone or selectable paging terminates the zone or selectable paging,
allowing the all-call paging to go through.
• Initiating another paging of the same priority during a paging causes the later paging to be held busy when
the paged station or in-use PA paging output overlaps.
[All paging function priorities]
Priorities are assigned in the following order.
• Emergency paging
• Message paging
• External input paging (when priority is enabled) (Refer to p. 2-181.)
• All-call paging
• Zone paging and selectable paging
Note
For more information, read "Priorities" on p. 2-177.
2-30
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
3.2. Responding to Paging
If the paged party responds at the nearest station, the paging party is called and put through to the paged
party. "Automatic Response" and "Zone Number Designation Response" modes are available for the paging
response, and the system is preset to one of the two modes. (Refer to p. 5-36, 5-63.)
Notes
• In the system when the call response mode is set to "Selective Response," paging response cannot be
performed at a paging receiving station. In this case, respond to the paging after the paging call ends.
• In the system when the call response mode is set to "Sequential Response" and the station paging receiving
mode* set to "Paging priority," paging response cannot be performed at a paging receiving station. Respond
to the paging after the paging call ends.
* The station that receives station paging operates in either Conversation priority mode or Paging priority
mode, which has been already set to the station. (Refer to p. 5-36, 5-63.)
3.2.1. Automatic response
If the paged party responds by pressing the Paging Response key, the paging party who made the last page is
called and put through to the paged party.
[Operation]
Press the Paging Response key. The paging party who made the last page is called and put through to the
paged party.
Building A
Zone 1
Speaker
Building B
Zone 2
Building C
Zone 3
Hello, Mr. TOA.
Please respond.
Speaker
• Since each paging zone is independent, responding from any station where a paging call is received connects
the paged party to the paging party.
2-31
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
3.2.2. Zone number designation response
If the paged party responds by pressing the designated zone number, the paging party who made the paging
to the designated zone last is called and put through to the paged party.
When making a paging, the paging party should announce the paging zone to respond.
[Operation]
Press the Paging Response key, followed by zone number paged.
Note
Enter a zone number with the digit length (1 − 3 digits) set with the N-8000 Setting Software.
The paging party who made the paging to the designated zone last is called and put through to the paged party.
[Example]
Zone 1
Zone 2
Speakers
(Zone number with
3-digit length)
0
0
Hello, Mr. TOA.
Please respond to Response 002.
2
The station that can make response is as follows.
• Station assigned to the paged zone
• Station assigned to the paged zone and station connected to the same exchange as the PA paging output is
connected to.
2-32
4. BROADCAST TO SX-2000
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
SYSTEM (N-8600MS only, only when SX-200IP is used)
4.1. Selected Zone Broadcast
Broadcasts can be made to the zone(s), or zones assigned to a zone pattern*1 within the SX-2000 system area.
Broadcast durations can be limited by preprogramming the time limit (between 1 and 20 minutes in 1-minute
units) for each station.
*1 A pattern into which multiple zones are grouped.
Notes
• Perform zone pattern settings using the N-8000 Setting Software. You can also import and use the output
zone pattern having been set on the SX-2000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-77.)
• Set the time limit (Time out) using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-72.)
Step 1. Press the Paging key.
Step 2. Select a zone.
Multiple zones or zone patterns can be sequentially selected by repeating the key operation in the
following step 2-1 or 2-2.
Note
The maximum number of digits for zone selection dial is 380.
2-1. When selecting a zone
Press the following keys in order.
‌
*2 Z
one numbers are assigned as shown in
the table below.
2-2. When selecting a zone pattern
Press the following keys in order.
SX-2000 system ID
number (01 – 08)
X
X
Zone pattern number*3
(001 – 216)
Z
Z
Z
...
Y
1
1
008
009
1
2
8
1
...
Y
001
002
SX-2000AO's
audio output
terminal No.
1
2
...
Y
SX-2000AO's
unit No.
...
X
Zone
No.
...
X
SX-2000
zone number*2 (001 – 256)
...
SX-2000 system ID
number (01 – 08)
256
32
8
‌
*3 The
pattern number having
been set using the N-8000
Setting Software.
Step 3. Press the [
] key.
A chime tone is transmitted to the selected zone(s).
Step 4. Page with the handset either lifted or in place.
Step 5. Either press the Clear key or replace the handset.
A chime tone is transmitted to the selected zone(s), then paging is completed.
Notes
• Set the SX-2000 system ID using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-28.)
• Chime tone can be set to OFF. (Refer to p. 5-72.)
2-33
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
4.2. General-Purpose Broadcast
General broadcast patterns*1 having been set in the SX-2000 system can be activated.
*1‌Contain the preset broadcast sound sources, output zones, and other settings. For details, refer to the SX2000 Setting Software Instructions.
‌In the N-8000 system, you can import the SX-2000 system setting and use it as a control pattern using the
N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-77.)
Note
The SX-2000 system's general broadcast pattern that can be activated by the N-8000 system's station is only
the one set as "General broadcast (Level)" assigned to each unit's control input in the Event setting.
4.2.1. Activation
Step 1. Press the Function key.
Step 2. Select the control pattern to which the function to activate a general broadcast pattern is assigned.
Press the following keys in order.
Control pattern number*2
(001 – 162)
SX-2000 system ID
number (01 – 08)
X
X
1
Y
Y
Y
‌
*2 The
pattern number having been set using the N-8000 Setting Software.
Multiple control patterns can be sequentially selected by repeating above key operation.
] key.
Step 3. Press the [
The set general broadcast pattern or patterns are selected and activated.
Note
Set the SX-2000 system ID using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-28.)
2-34
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
4.2.2. Termination
Step 1. Press the Function key.
Step 2. Select the control pattern to which the function to activate a general broadcast pattern is assigned.
Press the following keys in order.
SX-2000 system ID
number (01 – 08)
X
X
Control pattern number*1
(001 – 162)
2
Y
Y
Y
* The pattern number having been set using the N-8000 Setting Software.
Multiple control patterns can be sequentially selected by repeating above key operation.
1 ‌
Step 3. Press the [
] key.
The set general broadcast pattern or patterns are selected and activated.
Note
Set the SX-2000 system ID using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-28.)
4.3. BGM Broadcast
The BGM pattern*2 having been set in the SX-2000 system can be activated.
*2‌A broadcast pattern containing BGM source, output zone, and other preset items. For details, refer to the SX2000 Setting Software Instructions.
4.3.1. Activation
Step 1. Press the Function key.
Step 2. Select the control pattern to which a BGM pattern change function is assigned.
Press the following keys in order
SX-2000 system ID
number (01 – 08)
X
X
Control pattern number*3
(001 – 162)
5
Y
Y
Y
* The pattern number having been set using the N-8000 Setting Software.
Multiple control patterns can be sequentially selected by repeating above key operation.
3 ‌
Step 3. Press the [
] key.
The set BGM pattern or patterns are selected and activated.
In this case, if other BGM has been broadcasting, it will be stopped and overridden by the BGM pattern
broadcast activated with this key.
2-35
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
4.3.2. Termination
Step 1. Press the Function key.
Step 2. Select the control pattern to which a BGM pattern end function is assigned.
Press the following keys in order.
SX-2000 system ID
number (01 – 08)
X
X
Control pattern number*
(001 – 162)
5
Y
Y
Y
‌
* The
pattern number having been set using the N-8000 Setting Software.
Multiple control patterns can be sequentially selected by repeating above key operation.
Step 3. Press the [
] key.
The set BGM pattern or patterns are selected and terminated.
Note
Set the SX-2000 system ID using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-28.)
2-36
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
4.4. Control Output Activation
The control output of the SX-2000 system can be activated.
4.4.1. Activating the control output
Step 1. Press the Function key.
Step 2. Select a control pattern set for the control output pattern.
Press the following keys in order.
Multiple control patterns*1 can be sequentially selected by repeating key operation shown below.
*1 ‌Perform control pattern settings using the N-8000 Setting Software. You can also import the control
output pattern of the SX-2000 system, or designate the control output terminal number of the SX2000 system. (Refer to p. 5-77.)
Note
The maximum number of digits for control output selection dial is 380.
SX-2000 system
ID number (01 – 08)
X
X
Control pattern number*2
(001 – 162)
3
B
B
B
* The pattern number having been set using the N-8000 Setting Software.
2 ‌
Step 3. Press the [
] key.
The control output(s) are activated.
Note
Set the SX-2000 system ID using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-28.)
2-37
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
4.4.2. Deactivating the control output
Step 1. Press the Function key.
Step 2. Select a control pattern set for the control output pattern.
Press the following keys in order.
Multiple control patterns*1 can be sequentially selected by repeating key operation shown below.
*1 ‌Perform control pattern settings using the N-8000 Setting Software. You can also import the control
output pattern of the SX-2000 system, or designate the control output terminal number of the SX2000 system. (Refer to p. 5-77.)
Note
The maximum number of digits for control output selection dial is 380.
SX-2000 system
ID number (01 – 08)
X
X
Control pattern number*2
(001 – 162)
4
B
B
B
‌
*2 The
pattern number having been set using the N-8000 Setting Software.
] key.
Step 3. Press the [
The control output(s) are deactivated.
Note
Set the SX-2000 system ID using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-28.)
2-38
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
4.5. Multi-Operation Activation
4.5.1. Simultaneously activating selected zone broadcast and control output pattern
Broadcasts to the SX-2000 zone (individual zone or zone pattern*1) and SX-2000 system's control output
activation can be performed at the same time.
Broadcast durations can be limited by preprogramming the time limit (between 1 and 20 minutes in 1-minute
units) for each station.
*1 A pattern into which multiple zones are grouped.
Notes
• Perform zone pattern settings using the N-8000 Setting Software. You can also import and use the output
zone pattern having been set on the SX-2000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-77.)
• Set the time limit (Time out) using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-72.)
Step 1. Press the Paging key.
Step 2. Select a zone.
Multiple zones or zone patterns can be sequentially selected by repeating the key operation in the
following step 2-1 or 2-2.
Note
The maximum number of digits for zone selection dial is 380.
2-1. When selecting a zone
Press the following keys in order.
‌
*2 Z
one numbers are assigned as shown in
the table below.
2-2. When selecting a zone pattern
Press the following keys in order.
SX-2000 system ID
number (01 – 08)
X
X
Zone pattern number*3
(001 – 216)
Z
Z
...
Y
1
1
008
009
1
2
8
1
...
Y
001
002
SX-2000AO's
audio output
terminal No.
1
2
...
Y
SX-2000AO's
unit No.
...
X
Zone
No.
...
X
SX-2000
zone number*2 (001 – 256)
...
SX-2000 system ID
number (01 – 08)
256
32
8
‌
*3 The
pattern number having
been set using the N-8000
Setting Software.
Z
Step 3. Select the control pattern set for the control output function.
Press the following keys in order.
SX-2000 system
ID number (01 – 08)
X
X
Control pattern number*2
(001 – 162)
3
B
B
B
* The pattern number having been set using the N-8000 Setting Software.
Multiple control patterns can be selected by repeating the above key operation.
4 ‌
2-39
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Step 4. Press the [
] key.
Confirmation tone sounds, then a chime tone is transmitted to the selected zone(s).
The control output(s) assigned to the selected control output pattern are activated.
Step 5. Page with the handset either lifted or in place.
Step 6. Either press the Clear key or replace the handset.
A chime tone is transmitted to the selected zone(s), then paging is completed.
On termination of broadcast, the control output having been activated in synchronization with the
broadcast is also terminated.
Note
Set the SX-2000 system ID using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-28.)
2-40
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
4.5.2. Simultaneously activating paging, selected zone broadcast, and control output pattern
Broadcasts to the N-8000 system zone (paging zone or paging zone pattern*1) and the SX-2000 system zone
(individual zone or zone pattern*2), and SX-2000 system's control output activation can be performed at the
same time.
Broadcast durations can be limited by preprogramming the time limit (10 − 990 seconds in 10-second units or
1 − 20 minutes in 1-minute units) for each station.
*1‌A pattern into which multiple paging zones are grouped.
*2‌A pattern into which multiple zones are grouped.
Notes
• Set the N-8000 system zone and time limit (Time out) using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to
p. 5-121, 5-77, 5-63, 5-72.)
• Perform SX-2000 zone pattern settings using the N-8000 Setting Software. You can also import and use the
output zone pattern having been set on the SX-2000 Setting Software.
Tip
When making N-8000 Paging call and SX-2000 Selected zone broadcast at the same time, the same operations
regarding pre-announcement paging tone, chime tone, or other paging-related functions are performed to both systems.
Determine which setting to choose, N-8000 system setting or SX-2000 system setting by the priority settings
(p. 5-73) in the N-8000 Setting software.
The table below shows the operations depending on the priority setting.
Priority setting
N-8000
SX-2000
Operation
Operates according to the settings of the N-8000 pre-announcement paging tone,
paging delay time, and paging time limit in addition to the Paging call and Selected
zone broadcast.
A paging pre-announcement tone instead of a chime tone is also broadcast to the SX2000 system zone.
Operates according to the settings of the SX-2000 chime tone, waiting time, and time
out in addition to the Paging calls and Selected zone broadcast.
A chime tone instead of a pre-announcement paging tone is also broadcast to the
N-8000 system zone.
It is not possible to operate on each different setting that a pre-announcement paging tone is broadcast to the
N-8000 system and a chime tone to the SX-2000 system.
[Operation]
Step 1. Press the Paging key.
Step 2. Select an N-8000 zone and SX-2000 zone.
Multiple N-8000 zones, N-8000 zone patterns, SX-2000 zones, or SX-2000 zone patterns can be
sequentially selected by repeating the key operation in the following step 2-1 or 2-2.
Note
The maximum number of digits for zone selection dial is 380.
2-1. When selecting an N-8000 zone
Press the following keys in order.
N-8000 zone number
(001 – 192)
X
X
X
Note
Enter the zone number with the digit length (1 − 3) set on the N-8000 Setting Software.
2-41
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
2-2. When selecting an N-8000 zone pattern
Press the following keys in order.
N-8000 zone pattern number
(001 – 216)
Y
Y
Y
2-3. When selecting a SX-2000 zone
Press the following keys in order.
‌
*1 Z
one numbers are assigned as shown in
the table below.
2-4. When selecting a SX-2000 zone pattern
Press the following keys in order.
SX-2000 system
ID number (01 – 08)
X
X
Zone pattern number*2
(001 – 216)
Z
Z
...
Y
1
1
008
009
1
2
8
1
...
Y
001
002
SX-2000AO's
audio output
terminal No.
1
2
...
Y
SX-2000AO's
unit No.
...
X
Zone
No.
...
X
SX-2000
zone number*1 (001 – 256)
...
SX-2000 system
ID number (01 – 08)
256
32
8
‌
*2 The
pattern number having
Z
been set using the N-8000
Setting Software.
Step 3. Select the control pattern set for the control output function.
Press the following keys in order.
SX-2000 system
ID number (01 – 08)
X
X
Control pattern number*3
(001 – 162)
3
B
B
B
‌
*3 The
pattern number having been set using the N-8000 Setting Software.
Multiple control patterns can be selected by repeating the above key operation.
2-42
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Step 4. Press the [
] key.
Confirmation tone sounds, then a paging pre-announcement tone or chime tone is transmitted to the
selected zone(s).
The control output(s) assigned to the selected control output pattern are activated.
Step 5. Page with the handset either lifted or in place.
or
Zone
1
2
3
23
3
23
Zone 1
Zone 1
Amplifier
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone
1
2
Speaker
Zone 2
Zone 3
SX-2000 system
Zone 23
Speaker
Amplifier
N-8000 system
Zone 23
Amplifier
Speaker
No. 1000
No. 1002
No. 1003
No. 1004
Step 6. Either press the Clear key or replace the handset.
Paging is completed.
On termination of broadcast, the control output having been activated in synchronization with the
broadcast is also terminated.
Note
Set the SX-2000 system ID using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-28.)
2-43
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
5. other FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
5.1. Scan Monitor
The station can scan arbitrary stations for auditory monitoring.
The station to be scan-monitored must be preprogrammed into a monitor group or can be selected each time
by designating the station number.
The stations to be monitored are switched in preprogrammed sequence or in order of being selected at specified
time intervals.
Manual control from the monitoring station can also be performed.
Up to 16 stations can be programmed to the same monitor group.
Up to 4 station groups (up to 64 stations) can be monitored in sequence from a single station.
Up to 16 stations can be selected by key operation.
• Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set a monitor group, scan monitor duration, and the conditions of
the stations to be monitored. (Refer to p. 5-69, 5-84.)
• Stations in use or in busy state are skipped and not monitored. The RS-140 Switch Panel or N-8610RM
Remote Microphone Station set to Privacy mode is also skipped.
Manual scan
0
: Stop/Restart
: Advances the scan.
: Moves the scan back.
PTT : A voice warning
Monitor group number
2
Y
2
X
Y
to the monitored station
or
C
replace the handset: Scan monitor ends.
or
Station No.
Press
Station No.
Y
Y
Monitor scan
No. 330
No. 331
No. 332
No. 339
Scan monitor group or stations selected by key operation
The station to be scan-monitored is preset to one of the following display modes using the N-8000 Setting
Software:
[Display OFF]
The station remains in standby mode (status indicator unlit) even while being scan-monitored.
[Display ON]
The status indicator remains lit while the station is being scan-monitored.
[Display & Monitor Tone]
A start tone (key-touch tone) sounds when scan monitoring begins and the status indicator remains lit during
monitoring.
Note
In the case of the RS-140/180/480, the status indicator does not light even if set to "Display ON" mode.
2-44
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
[Operation]
Step 1. Automatic Scan
1-1. When scan-monitoring the preprogrammed stations
Press the [
], [2] keys, then the monitor group number (1 − 4), followed by the [
When monitoring two or more groups, press the group numbers consecutively.
1-2. When scan-monitoring by designating the station numbers
Press the [
], [2], [
] keys, then the station number.
To select the station number consecutively, press the [
] key.
To terminate the station selection, press the [
] key following the station number.
] key.
• Scan monitoring starts and cycles through the station groups in preprogrammed sequence or in order
of being selected at specified time intervals until its operation is manually stopped.
• Both the number and name of the station being monitored are displayed on the monitoring station's
LCD. (N-8000MS/8500MS/8600MS only)
[Example] Station No. 331 is being monitored.
Station No.
331
:E l eva t or
S c a n mo n i t o r i n g
Station name
• A handset can also be used for monitoring.
Step 2. Manual Scan
2-1. Stopping and restarting automatic scan
To continuously monitor a specified station, press the [0] key when that station is displayed to stop
automatic scan operation. Pressing the [0] key again restores automatic scan operation.
2-2. Advancing a scan
] key advances the scan by one station.
Pressing the [
2-3. Moving back a scan
Pressing the [
] key moves the scan back one station.
2-4. Warning the monitored station by voice
To transmit a voice warning to the monitored station, press the Push-to-talk key.
Step 3. Scan Monitor end
To end Scan monitor, either press the Clear key or replace the handset.
2-45
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
5.2. Three-Party Conference
A simultaneous (full duplex) three-party handset conversation can be held by calling up other master stations
in sequence. It is possible to call a conference by calling other stations from the standby mode or by calling a
third party from the two-party conversation mode.
Note
Master stations connected to the N-8010EX/8400RS, N-8610RM IP Remote Microphone Station, outside line
telephones connected to the N-8000CO, and telephones connected to the N-8000AL cannot participate in the
conference.
5.2.1. Initiating a 3-party conference
Step 1. First press the function key and then [5][1], followed by the station number of the desired (second)
party.
When the second party answers, the conversation between the first and second parties can begin.
B
A
Function designation number
5
+
+
1
+
Call
Station number of
the second party
X
Call tone
X
Step 2. Press the Transfer key after the second party has answered.
The second party will then be placed on hold.
B
A
Conversation (on hold)
2-46
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Step 3. Dial the station number of the third party.
When the third party answers, the second party is released from hold mode, permitting a 3-party
conversation to proceed.
B
A
Conversation (on hold)
Station number of the third party
Y
Y
Calling
C
Call tone
3-party conference
B
A
Response
for conversation
C
Note
Unless both the first and second parties are lifting the handsets, an
error tone sounds at both parties when the Transfer key is pressed,
reverting to the original conversation between the two.
Step 4. The conference is terminated when the originator of the conference either presses the Clear key or
replaces the handset.
Tip
If a called party other than the originator of the conference
presses the Clear key or replaces the station handset, that
party can exit the conference. (The originator represents
the station that called the third party.)
A
or
A
C
Note
For operation details, refer to p. 2-49 "Operation details of 3-party conference."
2-47
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
5.2.2. Initiating a 3-party conference during a 2-party conversation
Step 1. While connected with the second party, press the Transfer key.
The second party will be placed on hold.
B
A
Conversation (on hold)
Step 2. First press the function key and then [5][1], followed by the station number of the third party.
When the third party answers, the second party is released from hold mode, permitting a 3-party
conference to proceed.
Calling the third party
B
A
Function designation number
+
5
+
1
+
Station number of
the third party
Y
Conversation (on hold)
Y
Note
Unless both the first and second parties are lifting the
handsets, an error tone sounds at both parties before
pressing the third party's station number, reverting to the
original conversation between the two.
Calling
C
Calling tone
3-party conference
A
B
When C answers,
3-party conference
becomes available.
C
2-48
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Step 3. The conference is terminated when the originator of the conference either presses the Clear key or
replaces the handset.
This completes the conference call.
Tip
If a called party other than the originator of the conference
presses the Clear key or replaces the station handset, that
party can exit the conference. (The originator represents
the station that called the third party.)
A
or
A
C
Note
For operation details, refer to the next item "Operation details of 3-party conference."
5.2.3. Operation details of 3-party conference
(1) If the station unable to participate in the conference (Door station, substation, Master station connected to
the N-8010EX/8400RS, N-8610RM IP Remote Microphone Station, outside line telephone connected to
the N-8000CO, or telephone connected to the N-8000AL) is dialed, an error tone sounds at the originating
station, reverting to the original conversation between the two.
(2) If the called Master Station responds in hands-free mode, the calling party's voice can be heard from the
called station's speaker (hands-free voice reception mode). Lift the handset to talk.
(3) If the called master station is set for Call forwarding, conference call is automatically transferred only to the
transfer destination master station. Conference call is not transferred to the destination station other than
the destination master station.
(4) When the called third party is busy, a busy tone is transmitted to the calling party and the calling party must
wait. As soon as the third party finishes its conversation, the calling party is automatically put through to the
third party. (Camp-On Busy mode)
(5) If the Call Back function is performed*1 while attempting to call the third party, the call is canceled, and the
original conversation is restored*2.
(6) If the originator of the conference presses the Transfer key followed by the participant station number during
3-party conference, the designated station is cancelled, reverting to the original conversation between the
two.
*1 Press the Transfer key.
*2 Pressing the Clear key or replacing the handset while attempting to call the third party will terminate the
conference.
2-49
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
5.3. Time Signal (only when the N-8000AF is used)
The Time Signal function broadcasts preset sound sources over preset paging zones according to
preprogrammed schedules. The N-8000AF Audio Interface of which operation mode has been set to "Time
Signal" outputs the time signals.
5.3.1. Time signal event
• Event settings must be performed to automatically start the Time Signal function. Set events are recorded in
the N-8000AF.
• To perform event settings, the N-8000AF's operation mode must be set to "Time Signal."
• Only one (1) N-8000AF in the system can be set to "Time Signal" operation mode.
Note
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to perform Time Signal settings, including events and schedules.
(Refer to p. 5-107.)
[Internal timer-initiated event settings]
• Up to 1,024 events can be set.
• Individual events are assigned to a maximum of 16 schedules (up to 64 events per schedule).
Schedule
Schedule
Event
Event
Event
Event
Up to 64
Event
Event
Up to 16
• Each event is comprised of the following contents: Time (in second units), day of week (multiple days
selectable), paging zones (up to 10 zones selectable from 192 zones), sound source number (selected from
0 − 9) and external equipment control (ON or OFF).
• The function of each sound source number is as follows:
0: Silent
1: Internal sound source 1 (Trill tone)
2: Internal sound source 2 (Bell 1)
3: Internal sound source 3 (Bell 2)
4: Internal sound source 4 (Chime Tone 1)
5: Internal sound source 5 (Chime Tone 2)
6. External sound source 1 (N-8000AF's Contact Output 1 activated)
7. External sound source 2 (N-8000AF's Contact Output 2 activated)
8. External sound source 3 (N-8000AF's Contact Output 3 activated)
9. External sound source 4 (N-8000AF's Contact Output 4 activated)
• Set the sound source activation time (1 − 99 sec.).
2-50
[External timer-initiated event settings]
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
• "Time Signal" broadcasts can be triggered by make contact from an external timer connected to the N-8000AF
Audio Interface's contact input.
• The external timer-initiated event is comprised of the following contents for each contact input (1 − 8): Paging
zones (up to 10 zones selected from 192), sound source numbers (0 − 9) and external equipment control (ON
or OFF).
5.3.2. Automatic time signal activation
[Operation]
• Audible time signal can be broadcast in synchronization with preprogrammed events.
• Schedules to be activated must be set in advance.
Time signal is broadcast over preset paging zones when the event activation time for each preset schedule
is reached.
• Only one (1) N-8000AF in the system can be set to transmit the time signal.
• The time signal sound source can be either the N-8000AF's internal sound source or an external sound
source connected to the N-8000AF.
• Contact output terminals (any of contact outputs 5 − 8, including those of another N-8000AF, N-8000MI, or
N-8000DI) can be closed to operate a bell or other external equipment in synchronization with Time Signal
Activation.
• New events activated during Time Signal operation are ignored.
• Time Signal operation is terminated when the preset sound source operation time elapses.
• The function to limit the paging time does not operate.
• If "Silent" is selected and external equipment control is set to OFF, nothing is operated.
[Activation]
The following two methods can be used to automatically trigger the time signal.
(1) Activation by Internal Timer
• Time signal begins operation in synchronization with the preprogrammed event activation schedule.
• Time is managed by the N-8000AF's internal timer.
• Schedules to be activated can be changed through operation of any master station.
(2) Activation by External Timer
• The Time Signal begins operation when the N-8000AF receives make contact from the connected external
timer.
• Connect the external timer to the N-8000AF's contact inputs (1 − 8).
• The Time Signal operates according to the external timer-initiated events preprogrammed for the individual
contact inputs.
• The Time Signal is activated by make contact from the external timer. However, opening the contact will not
terminate Time Signal operation.
[Conceptual diagram]
Contact inputs 1 – 8
Audio input
Contact outputs 1 – 4
Timer
External sound source
2-51
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
[Operation when the Time Signal broadcast overlaps other calls or broadcasts]
• Operation during overlap is the same as for external input broadcasts (refer to p. 2-181).
• When a station is in use, the time signal is broadcast to all other stations except the busy station.
5.3.3. Changing time signal schedules
System Time Signal schedules can be changed at any station.
Note
Station-set contents are saved to the N-8000AF daily (00:00 AM). Switching off the power before the settings
are saved returns the settings content to that which existed before changes were made.
Schedule No.
(01 – 16)
Function designation No.
+
9
+
0
+
X
+
X
(confirmation tone)
5.3.4. Suspending time signal schedules
System Time Signal schedules can be suspended at any station. To restart the suspended schedules, follow
the procedure for changing the schedules.
Note
Station-set contents are saved to the N-8000AF daily (00:00 AM). Switching off the power before the settings
are saved returns the settings content to that which existed before changes were made.
Function designation No.
+
9
+
0
+
0
+
0
(confirmation tone)
4.3.5. Time signal schedule confirmation (N-8000MS/8500MS/8600MS only)
System Time Signal schedules can be confirmed by pressing the following buttons to display the schedule
number on the LCD screen for five seconds.
Displayed for 5 sec.
Cu r r en t
No=1
Function designation No.
+
9
+
2
Schedu l e
(confirmation tone)
2-52
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
5.3.6. Manually trigger time signal
Time Signal can be activated simultaneously with the master station's dial operation, through which the sound
source number, external equipment control ON/OFF, and paging zone number should be designated.
• The sound source number is designated by "0" to "9."
0: Silent
1: Internal sound source 1 (Trill tone)
2: Internal sound source 2 (Bell 1)
3: Internal sound source 3 (Bell 2)
4: Internal sound source 4 (Chime Tone 1)
5: Internal sound source 5 (Chime Tone 2)
6. External sound source 1 (N-8000AF's Contact Output 1 activated)
7. External sound source 2 (N-8000AF's Contact Output 2 activated)
8. External sound source 3 (N-8000AF's Contact Output 3 activated)
9. External sound source 4 (N-8000AF's Contact Output 4 activated)
• The external equipment control ON/OFF is designated by "0" or "1."
With the external equipment control set to ON, the external equipment preset by the N-8000 Setting Software
can be activated in synchronization with Time Signal Activation.
0: External equipment control OFF
1: External equipment control ON
• When the external equipment control is set to ON, contact output terminals (any of contact outputs 5 − 8,
including those of another N-8000AF, N-8000MI, or N-8000DI) can be closed to operate a bell or other
external equipment in synchronization with Time Signal Activation.
• Up to 10 zones from 192 zones can be selected for paging zones.
Designate them in the zone number digits (1 − 3) preset by the N-8000 Setting Software.
(Example) Zone number when 3-digit number is set: 001, 025, 192
[Operation: Making paging calls to a single zone]
External equipment control ON/OFF
Sound source No.
Function designation No.
+
9
1
+
Paging zone No.
X
+
+
Y
+
Z
(confirmation tone)
Time Signal is activated after the confirmation tone sounds.
[Operation: Making paging calls to 2 or more zones]
Max. 10 zones
External equipment control ON/OFF
Sound source No.
Function designation No.
+
9
+
1
Paging zone No.
+
X
+
Y
+
+
Z
Paging zone No.
+
Z
+
(confirmation tone)
Time Signal is activated after the confirmation tone sounds.
2-53
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
5.3.7. Time signal temporary exception
Any station can be temporarily excepted from the time signal-initiated paging destinations through key operations
at the master station.
Up to 10 stations can be simultaneously excepted through a single operation.
Once registered for temporary exception, the stations will not accept any time signal-initiated paging calls until
exception cancellation is performed to those stations.
[Time signal temporary exception: Registration]
Max. 10 units
Function designation No.
9
+
3
+
Station No.
+
X
+
Station No.
+
+
+
X
+
(confirmation tone)
Designate the station number in the station number digits (2 − 6) preset by the N-8000 Setting Software.
[Time signal temporary exception: Cancellation]
Function designation No.
+
9
+
4
+
(confirmation tone)
All temporary exception registrations are cancelled.
5.3.8. Reserving the time signal schedule change
System Time Signal schedule change can be reserved through key operations at any station.
To set the reserved day, designate the day from one (next day) to 9 days later after performing the reservation
operation by number (1 − 9).
The reserved schedule is executed at 00:00 AM on the reserved day.
Function designation No.
+
9
+
5
Reserved day
(1 – 9)
+
X
+
Schedule No.
(01 – 16)
Y
+
Y
(confirmation tone)
2-54
5.3.9. Cancelling the reserved time signal schedule
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
The reserved Time Signal Schedule can be cancelled through key operations at any station.
Function designation No.
+
9
+
5
+
(confirmation tone)
4.3.10. Confirming the reserved time signal schedule (N-8000MS/8500MS/8600MS only)
The reserved Time Signal Schedule can be confirmed through key operations at any station.
Reserved status can be displayed on the LCD screen for 5 seconds with the following operation.
(When reservation
has been made)
Function designation No.
+
9
+
6
Days to a reserved day
(confirmation tone)
(When no reservation
has been made)
Displayed for 5 sec.
Xd a y s r ema i n i n g
No . =YY
Schedule No.
Displayed for 5 sec.
No Rese r va t i on
2-55
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
5.4. PBX Connection (only when the N-8000MI is used)
If the Multi interface unit is connected to the PBX's analog E&M interface, calls or conversations can be
mutually made between the N-8000 system's stations and the PBX's extension telephones or paging calls can
be initiated from the PBX extension telephone.
Note
This function cannot be used if the system is set to "Selective Response" mode.
5.4.1. Calling the PBX extension telephone
Step 1. Dial the analog E&M interface access number at a N-8000 system's station.
The station is connected to a PBX.
Step 2. Confirm that a dial tone from the PBX is heard, then dial the PBX extension number.
The extension telephone is called.
Note
Set the analog E&M interface access number using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-45.)
London
Paris
Call tone
Call
Telephone
X
Analog E&M interface
access No.
Confirmation tone
Y
Y
PBX extension No.
5.4.2. Being called from a PBX extension telephone
Dialing the intercom access number as well as the N-8000 system's station number at the PBX extension
telephone permits the N-8000 system's station to be called.
The method for receiving a call from the PBX extension telephone at the N-8000 system's station is the same
as when it is called by another station within the system.
Note
Set the intercom access number at the PBX.
Paris
London
Call
Call tone
Y
Intercom
access No.
X
X
N-8000 system's station No.
2-56
5.4.3. Being paged from a PBX extension telephone
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Dialing the intercom access number, " ," "8," and the N-8000 system's paging zone number in this order at the
PBX extension telephone permits the paging calls to be made to the N-8000 system's stations.
The method for responding a paging call at the station is the same as when it is paged from the N-8000
system's station. (Note that paging response is valid only while the paging call is in progress.)
Notes
• Paging calls from the PBX extension telephone can be made only when line attribute is set to "PB" using the
supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-46.)
• Set the intercom access number at the PBX.
London
Paris
Paging calls
Y
Intercom
access No.
8
X
X
N-8000 system's
paging zone number
2-57
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
5.5. Outside Line Connection (only when the N-8000CO is used)
Outside lines can be connected to the N-8000 system, permitting the system's master stations to make or
receive outside line telephone calls.
5.5.1. Calls with outside line telephones
[Handset conversation]
Calls can be made or received by lifting the handset.
Duplex conversations
[PTT conversation]
Pressing the Push-to-talk key during a hands-free
conversation enables one-way conversation from the
master station. Conversation flow is reversed when the
key is released.
PTT
One-way conversation
One-way conversation
5.5.2. Calling the Outside line telephone
Step 1. Dial the C/O interface unit access number at a N-8000 system's station.
The station is connected to an outside line.
Step 2. Confirm that a dial tone from the outside line is heard, then dial the outside line telephone number.
The outside line telephone is called.
Notes
• When a dial tone is not heard, dial the outside line telephone number after more than 3 seconds have passed.
• Settings must allow outside line calling operation. (Refer to p. 5-90.)
• Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set the outside line access number and enable or disable
outside line calling operation.
• Even if the outside line telephone to which a call is made is busy, the call is automatically made to the free
outside line telephone for which the same access number is set.
Call
Calling tone
X
C/O interface unit
access No.
Confirmation tone
Y
Y
Telephone
Telephone No.
2-58
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
5.5.3. Receiving calls from an outside line telephone
There are two modes for receiving calls from an outside line telephone: Direct-In Line and Direct-In Dialing. The
audible call tone for a received outside line call is different from those of other incoming calls. (Refer to "List of
Signal Tones" on p. 2-193.)
[Calls by Direct-In Line]
When a call is received from an outside line telephone, a call tone is sounded at the preprogrammed Master
Station and its member stations. One (1) Master Station can also be designated as a representative station and
up to three other Master Stations as member stations for each N-8000CO.
Notes
• Settings must be made so that Direct-In Line calls can be received.
• Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to enable or disable Direct-In Line call reception. (Refer to p.
5-90.)
• Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set a representative station and its member stations to receive
Direct-In Line calls. (Refer to p. 5-90.)
When the call tone sounds, answer the call. (For the operating procedure, refer to p. 2-3.)
Call tones at all master stations stop, allowing the master station that answered to initiate the
conversation.
Call tone
or
X
[Calls by Direct-In Dialing]
Stations can be called individually from an outside line telephone by dialing the station number. N-8000 system
stations can receive Direct-In Dialing calls from an outside line telephone in the same way as receiving calls
from a system station.
Notes
• Calls are automatically terminated if the caller pauses for more than five seconds while dialing the number.
• Call mode is automatically switched to Direct-In Line if the caller does not dial the station number within 10
seconds after hearing a Direct-In Dialing confirmation tone.
• Settings must be made to enable Direct-In Dialing.
• Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to enable or disable Direct-In Dialing.
2-59
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
5.5.4. Receiving paging from an outside line telephone
Stations can receive paging calls from outside line telephones.
Note
Outside line telephones can page system stations only when Direct-In Dialing has been enabled by the supplied
N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-90.)
5.5.5. Outside line Group hunting
Outside line telephones can be designated as the transfer destinations for Group hunting (refer to p. 2-17).
This Outside line Group hunting function also applies to the call transfer (p. 2-15) performed during conversation.
• The station to which a Group hunting is to be transferred can be set either by using the supplied N-8000
Setting Software or by station key operation. (Refer to p. 5-65, 5-80.)
• Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to enable or disable the Outside line Group hunting function.
(Refer to p. 5-35, 5-62.)
The station to which a call is to be transferred cannot be designated unless the Group hunting function is
enabled.
• Settings must allow outside line calling operation.
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set the outside line access number and enable or disable
outside line calling operation. (Refer to p. 5-90.)
• Even if the outside line telephone to which a call is made is busy, the call is automatically made to the free
outside line telephone for which the same access number is set. Thereafter, the telephone connected last
becomes the transfer destination telephone.
(Example: A call to the station No. 62 will automatically be transferred, if No. 62 is busy, to the designated
outside line telephone.)
Conversation
No. 10
No. 62
Call tone
Designated transfer destination telephone
Call
No. 11
6
2
Note
Calls received from an outside line telephone are not transferred to the destination station, but only the Master
Station to transfer is called.
2-60
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Programming or erasure can be performed at your station.
[Programming]
Function designation
number
+
4
5
C/O interface unit access number
(1-digit or 2-digit)
+
+
X
+
(Confirmation tone)
[Erasure]
Function designation The originally called (your)
station number
number
+
4
5
+
Y
Y
+
(Confirmation tone)
Note
The programmed contents by set dialing operation are automatically saved into the exchange or IP
stations at midnight every day. If the exchange or IP station is turned off before completion of save, the
state returns to the contents that were programmed before power-off.
2-61
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
5.5.6. Outside line Absence transfer
Outside line telephones can be designated as the transfer destinations for Absence transfer (refer to p. 2-19).
This Outside line Absence transfer function also applies to the call transfer (p. 2-15) performed during
conversation.
• The station to which an Absence transfer is to be transferred can be set either by using the supplied N-8000
Setting Software or by station key operation. (Refer to p. 5-65, 5-80.)
• Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to enable or disable the Outside line Absence transfer function or
to set the transfer start/end time. (Refer to p. 5-35, 5-62.)
The station to which a call is to be transferred cannot be designated unless the Absence transfer function is
enabled.
• Settings must allow outside line calling operation.
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set the outside line access number and enable or disable
outside line calling operation. (Refer to p. 5-90.)
• Even if the outside line telephone to which a call is made is busy, the call is automatically made to the free
outside line telephone for which the same access number is set. Thereafter, the telephone connected last
becomes the transfer destination telephone.
Call tone
Call
No. 62
A call is automatically
transferred to another
designated station after
a set period of time
No. 11
6
2
Call tone
Designated transfer destination telephone
Note
Calls received from an outside line telephone are not transferred to the destination station, but only the Master
Station to transfer is called.
2-62
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Programming or erasure can be performed at your station.
[Programming]
C/O interface unit access number
(1-digit or 2-digit)
Function designation
number
+
4
4
+
+
X
+
(Confirmation tone)
[Erasure]
Function designation
number
+
4
4
The originally called (your)
station number
+
Y
Y
+
(Confirmation tone)
Note
The programmed contents set by dialing operation are automatically saved into the exchange or IP
stations at midnight every day. If the exchange or IP station is turned off before completion of save, the
state returns to the contents that were programmed before power-off.
2-63
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
5.5.7. Outside line Call forwarding
Outside line telephones can be designated as the transfer destinations for Call forwarding (refer to p. 2-20).
Destinations for both manual and automatic time-interlocked Call forwarding can be set to outside line
telephones.
• The station to which a Call forwarding is to be transferred can be set either by station key operation or by
using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-65, 5-80.)
• Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to enable or disable the outside line Call forwarding function or to
set the transfer start/end time. (Refer to p. 5-35, 5-62.)
The station to which a call is to be transferred cannot be designated unless the Call forwarding function is
enabled.
• Settings must allow outside line calling operation.
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set the outside line access number and enable or disable
outside line calling operation. (Refer to p. 5-90.)
• Even if the outside line telephone to which a call is made is busy, the call is automatically made to the free
outside line telephone for which the same access number is set. Thereafter, the telephone connected last
becomes the transfer destination telephone.
• When the outside line telephone to which a Call forwarding is to be transferred is busy in conversation with a
door station or substation, calling to the busy telephone continues for 25 seconds. if the line is still busy after
such calls, the Master Station to transfer is called.
Note
Calls received from an outside line telephone are not transferred to the destination station, but only the Master
Station to transfer is called.
[Calls to stations manually set for outside line Call forwarding]
Calls to the station manually set for Call forwarding are automatically transferred to the designated outside line
telephone without sounding a call tone.
No. 61
6
No. 62
(The originally called station, which has been
set to the Call forwarding mode)
2
Call tone
Designated transfer destination telephone
2-64
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Programming or erasure can be performed at your station.
[Programming]
C/O interface unit access number
(1-digit or 2-digit)
Function designation
number
+
4
1
+
+
X
+
(Confirmation tone)
[Erasure]
The originally called
(your) station number
Function designation
number
+
4
1
+
Z
Z
+
(Confirmation tone)
Note
The programmed contents set by dialing operation are automatically saved into the exchange or IP
stations at midnight every day. If the exchange or IP station is turned off before completion of save, the
state returns to the contents that were programmed before power-off.
2-65
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
[Calls to stations set for outside line Time-based Call forwarding]
Step 1. When the preset transfer time is reached, the
station's display shows the station (e.g. No. 62)
has entered the Time-based Call forwarding mode
(N-8000MS/8500MS/8600MS only).
Transfer destination
N-8000CO’s equipment number
Transfer destination
N-8000CO’s name
COT 0 0 1 : CO - L i n e 1
62
Step 2. Calls to the original station are automatically
transferred to the transfer destination outside line
telephone without sounding a call tone.
Original station number
Original station number
No. 62
No. 61
6
0:00
2
18:00
Transfer time
zone
16:00
Start time
6:00
8:00
12:00
End time
Call tone
Transfer destination C/O line telephone
Programming or erasure can be performed at your station.
[Programming]
C/O interface unit access number
(1-digit or 2-digit)
Function designation
number
+
4
3
+
+
X
+
(Confirmation tone)
[Erasure]
The originally called
(your) station number
Function designation
number
+
4
3
+
Z
Z
+
(Confirmation tone)
Note
The programmed contents set by dialing operation are automatically saved into the exchange or IP
stations at midnight every day. If the exchange or IP station is turned off before completion of save, the
state returns to the contents that were programmed before power-off.
2-66
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
5.6. Tie-Line Connection (only when the N-8000MI is used)
Using the Multi interface unit for tie-line connection between the N-8000 Series intercom system exchange and
other series intercom system exchanges via 4-wire private lines permits calls, conversations, or paging calls to
be mutually made between stations connected to the tie-line connected exchanges.
Note: This function cannot be used if the system is set to "Selective Response" mode.
4.6.1. Calling another intercom system
Step 1. Press the tie-line access number.
The called intercom system can be connected.
Step 2. After confirming a dial tone from the connected system, dial the station number of the intercom system
to call.
Note
Set the tie-line access number using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-46.)
Another intercom system
N-8000 system
Call
Call tone
X
Tie-line
access No.
Confirmation tone
Y
Y
Y
Intercom system's station No.
5.6.2. Being called from another intercom system
Dialing the tie-line access number and the N-8000 system's station number at the other intercom system's
station permits the N-8000 system's station to be called. The method for receiving a call from the other intercom
system's station at the N-8000 system's station is the same as when it is called by another station within the
N-8000 system.
Note
Set the tie-line access number to be used by another intercom system at another intercom system side.
Another intercom system
N-8000 system
Call
Call tone
Y
Tie-line
access No.
X
X
X
Intercom system's station No.
2-67
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
5.6.3. Making paging calls to another intercom system
Step 1. Press the tie-line access number.
The called intercom system can be connected.
Step 2. After confirming that a dial tone from the connected intercom system is heard, dial the paging operation
number of the connected intercom system, and make a paging call to the connected intercom system.
Note
Set the tie-line access number using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-46.)
Another intercom system
N-8000 system
Paging call
X
Tie-line
access No.
Confirmation tone
Y
Y
Intercom system's
paging operation No.
Note
Paging calls cannot be made simultaneously over both the N-8000 system and other intercom systems.
5.6.4. Being paged from another intercom system
Dialing the intercom access number, " " or " •," "8," and the N-8000 system's paging operation number in this
order at the other intercom system's station permits paging calls to be made to the N-8000 system.
The method for responding a paging call at the N-8000 system's station is the same as when it is paged from
the N-8000 system's station. (Note that paging response is valid only when the paging call is in progress.)
Note
The tie-line access number to be used by another intercom system's stations must be set at another intercom
system side.
N-8000 system
Another intercom system
Paging call
Y
Tie-line
access No.
or
8
X
X
Intercom system's
paging operation No.
2-68
5.7. BGM (only when the N-8000MI is used)
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Connecting playback components to the Multi interface unit permits Background music selectable from up to 8
programs to be heard from each station speaker while in standby mode.
It is possible to make or receive calls at the station even in BGM mode. In this event, BGM broadcasts are
automatically interrupted.
Interrupted BGM broadcasts are automatically restored after the conversation or paging is completed.
Notes
• Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set the unit number and audio input number of the Multi interface
unit with connected playback components, and the stations that can receive BGM broadcasts. (Refer to p.
5-36, 5-45, 5-63, 5-66, 5-80.)
• Since BGM is lower than conversations and paging in priority, BGM may be interrupted at a BGM-broadcast
station even if the station performs no operation when other station makes a call or paging with all speech
links busy. Especially for the N-8010EX, which has a small number of speech links, BGM interruption happens
more frequently.
• For a Multi interface unit connected to playback components and exchanges connected to stations that select
BGM, perform settings so that they can be connected to the network that enables multicast communications
(Refer to p. 5-25) of high-quality mode (Refer to p. 5-33, 5-41, 5-61).
• Substations and telephones cannot access the background music function.
[Channel Selection]
• Press [Function key][1][Channel number].
BGM
Function designation number
1
• Pressing [Function key][1][
BGM
(Channel 1)
Channel number (1 – 8; 0: OFF)
X
] increases the channel number by 1 (1
2
...7
8
0...).
BGM
(Channel 2)
Function designation number
Channel number change (a number increases by 1)
1
• Pressing [Function key][1][
BGM
(Channel 1)
] decreases the channel number by 1 (1
0
8
7...).
OFF
(Channel 0)
Function designation number
Channel number change (a number decreases by 1)
1
2-69
[BGM volume adjustment]
BGM volume can be adjusted in 5 increments.
• Press [Function key][1][9][
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
] to increase the volume.
BGM
BGM
Function designation number
1
9
• Press [Function key][1][9][
] to decrease the volume.
BGM
BGM
Function designation number
1
9
2-70
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
5.8. External Equipment Control
(only when the N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF/8050DS/8540DS/8640DS/8650DS is used)
External equipment can be controlled by transmitting a one-shot make output signal (or make/break contact
signal) to the contact of the designated Multi-Interface unit, Direct Select unit, or Audio Interface unit, or by
manually causing the station to transmit a one-shot make output signal to the contact of the designated door
station. Remote door lock control can be performed using the one-shot make output, and indication boards can
be controlled using the make/break output.
Note
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set the one-shot make duration, operation number digits, operation
numbers, and the stations allowed to control external equipment. (Refer to p. 5-35, 5-43, 5-49 , 5-62, 5-67,
5-82, 5-106, 5-110, 5-114, 5-117.)
[Door remote control example using one-shot make output control]
Data receiving device
Door lock control
[Hospital waiting status indication board example using the make/break output]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
[One-shot make output operation]
Press [Function key][3][0], then the access number for the contact corresponding to the external equipment to
be controlled.
Function designation number
3
0
Contact access No. (2 – 4 digits)
X
......
X
2-71
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
[Make output operation]
Press [Function key][3][1], then the access number for the contact corresponding to the external equipment to
be controlled.
Function designation number
3
1
Contact access No. (2 – 4 digits)
X
......
X
[Break output operation]
Press [Function key][3][2], then the access number for the contact corresponding to the external equipment to
be controlled.
Function designation number
3
2
Contact access No. (2 – 4 digits)
X
......
X
[Door station one-shot make output operation (when the N-8050DS/8540DS is used)]
Press [Function key][3][3], then the door station number to be controlled.
Function designation number
3
3
Door station No. (2 – 6 digits)
X
......
X
2-72
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
[Door station one-shot make output operation (when the N-8640DS/8650DS is used)]
The N-8640DS/8650DS has 5 contact outputs. Function designation number differs depending on the contact
output to be controlled.
Press the function designation number corresponding to the contact output, followed by the door station number
to be controlled.
Function designation number
Door station No. (2 – 6 digits)
To control the contact output 1
3
3
X
......
X
To control the contact output 2
3
4
X
......
X
To control the contact output 3
3
5
X
......
X
To control the contact output 4
3
6
X
......
X
To control the contact output 5
3
7
X
......
X
2-73
5.9. Door Remote Control
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
(only when the N-8050DS/8540DS/8640DS/8650DS/8000MI/8000DI/8000AF is used)
N-8050DS/8540DS/8640DS/8650DS's contact outputs can be shorted for a set period of time by the dial operation
at the master station engaged in conversation with the N-8050DS Door Station or N-8540DS/8640DS/8650DS
IP Door Station of which "Door station contact output" item is set to "Door remote control."
Similarly, the Multi interface unit's, Direct select unit's, or Audio interface unit’s contact outputs can be shorted
for a set period of time by the dial operation at the master station engaged in conversation with a station.
For example, a door lock can be controlled by connecting the contact outputs to an electronic lock system.
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to perform settings for the Door station contact output, the one shot
make duration and the N-8000MI's contact output corresponding to each station. (Refer to p. 5-35, 5-37, 5-62,
5-64, 5-66, 5-80, 5-97, 5-100.)
[Operation (when using the contact outputs of the N-8050DS/8540DS/8000MI/8000DI/8000AF)]
Step 1. Press the Transfer key during a conversation.
Current conversation is placed on hold, transmitting a hold tone to other party.
Step 2. Press the Function key and [0] key.
Contact outputs of N-8050DS/8540DS in conversation or the station's corresponding N-8000MI's,
N-8000DI's, or N-8000AF’s contact outputs can be shorted for a set period of time.
For example, the corresponding door lock can be released if contact outputs are connected to an
electronic lock system.
Step 3. A confirmation tone sounds, and the original conversation is restored.
[Example of N-8050DS/8540DS operation]
Door lock
control
Contact output
N-8050DS/8540DS
0
Operation at a Master station
[Example of N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF operation]
N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF
Door lock
control
Contact output
0
Operation at a Master station
2-74
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
[Operation (when using the contact outputs of the N-8640DS/8650DS)]
The N-8640DS/8650DS has 5 contact outputs. The contact output to be controlled can be selected through
key operation.
Step 1. Press the Transfer key during a conversation.
Current conversation is placed on hold, transmitting a hold tone to other party.
Step 2. Press the function key, followed by the designation number (0 − 4) for the contact output of the IP door
station to be controlled.
Designation number for the contact output 1 (open collector) : 0
Designation number for the contact output 2 (open collector) : 1
Designation number for the contact output 3 (open collector) : 2
Designation number for the contact output 4 (open collector) : 3
Designation number for the contact output 5 (relay) :
4
Contact outputs of N-8640DS/8650DS in conversation can be shorted for a set period of time.
For example, the corresponding door lock can be released if contact outputs are connected to an
electronic lock system.
Step 3. A confirmation tone sounds, and the original conversation is restored.
[Example of N-8640DS/8650DS operation]
Door lock
control
Contact output
N-8640DS/8650DS
X
Operation at a Master station
X
: Designation number for the contact output
Contact output 1
0
Contact output 3
2
Contact output 2
Contact output 4
Contact output 5
1
3
4
2-75
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
5.10. Message Pagings (available only when IP Master Stations are used)
Message pagings can be made using messages preprogrammed into the N-8500MS/8600MS Multi-Functional
IP Master Station or N-8510MS Standard IP Master Station. The Message paging is output to the preset paging
zones.
Notes
• Use the N-8000 Setting Software to set the activation method, paging zone numbers, number of repetitions
and contact interlock control for the Message paging. (Refer to p. 5-70.)
• Use the N-8000 Setting Software to record messages on a PC and program the messages into the IP master
station. (Refer to p. 5-129.)
5.10.1. Message paging operation
Step 1. Message Paging Activation
The following two startup methods are available.
Note
Use the N-8000 Setting Software to perform activation settings.
1-1. Activation by IP Master Station keys:
Press the Paging Call keys four times in a row.
Message paging
initiated.
Emergency situation.
Emergency situation.
Note
The Message paging cannot be initiated when the IP Master Station to be operated is currently in use.
Wait until the station is in Standby mode. An exception to this is priority given to Message pagings
initiated at an IP Master Station that is receiving a paging call in the system set for Call Priority mode.
1-2. Activation by Standard IP Master Station Message Activation Terminal (N-8510MS only):
The Message paging is initiated by a make contact signal transmitted from a switch or other external
device connected to the Standard IP Master Station's Message Activation terminal. The station is freed
to immediately start the Message paging, even when the IP Master Station that receives the make
contact signal is busy. The external device make contact signal must be transmitted for at least 100 ms.
Make contact signal
Message activation
Message paging
startup
Emergency situation.
Emergency situation.
Switch
2-76
Step 2. Message Paging Termination
There are two termination methods.
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
2-1. Termination by IP Master Station key.
Press the Clear key.
Note
This operation forcibly terminates the Message Paging even if the number of
broadcast repetitions is set.
C
2-2. Termination by Preset Repetitions
The broadcast automatically terminates when the message is played back the set number of broadcast
repetitions.
Notes
• Use the N-8000 Setting Software to set the number of repetitions. (Refer to p. 5-70.)
• Even if the paging time has been limited (refer to p. 5-63), this has no effect on the Message paging.
• Opening the Standard IP Master Station's Message Activation terminal does not terminate the paging.
To terminate, press the station's Clear key or set the number of paging repetitions.
5.10.2. Message paging priority level
The Message paging takes precedence over normal conversations and paging calls (except Emergency
paging). When the station to which the Message is being transmitted is in operation, all such operations are
forcibly terminated, allowing the Message paging to go through. Such terminated operations are not restored
even after the Message paging is completed.
5.10.3. Contact interlock control
The N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF unit's contact output terminal can be made to close in synchronization with
the initiation of the Message paging. Two methods are available for this: one is to constantly keep the terminal
closed during message paging and the other is to close the contact by means of a one-shot pulse only when
the broadcast begins.
5.10.4. Programmed message confirmation
Messages programmed into the IP Master Station can be confirmed at that station.
Step 1. When the IP master station is in Standby mode, press the Paging Call
key, followed by the Paging Response key.
The Message can be heard from the internal speaker or handset of the
operated station.
Emergency situation.
Step 2. Press the Clear key.
Message playback completed.
Note
The message is repeatedly played back until the Clear key is pressed.
5.10.5 Muting Message pagings (N-8510MS only)
Only the master station (N-8510MS only) activating Message pagings can be set not to output Message pagings
from its station speaker.
Other operations such as status indicator lighting, repetition of paging, and contact-related controls except
Message paging output are the same as those when mute is not activated.
Audio signals are output as normal at the paging receiving stations.
When the operation other than Message paging activation is performed, sound source (like a call tone)
corresponding to the operation is output.
Tip: Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software for Message paging mute setting. (See p. 5-70.)
Notes
• The IP Remote Microphone Station cannot be set to mute Message pagings.
• Message pagings can be muted at the master station’s built-in speaker only but not at its handset speaker.
• While a Message paging is activated, sound sources such as an error tone other than a message, even if
produced, will be muted. However, these sounds are not muted unless Message pagings are activated.
2-77
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
5.11. Audio Trigger Function Settings (only when the N-8050DS/8640DS/8650DS is used)
Audio Trigger function settings for the N-8050DS Door Station and the N-8640DS/8650DS IP Door station can
be performed at the Master Station (refer to p. 2-120).
5.11.1. Enabling the audio trigger
The Audio Trigger can be enabled at any station by designating the Door Station.
Notes
• Only the N-8000EX Exchange can support this function, and up to four Door Stations that enable Audio
Trigger alarm operation can be connected per Exchange.
• The Audio Trigger function cannot be used for stations that are set to receive background music.
Function designation number
8
1
Door station number
X
X
5.11.2. Disabling the audio trigger
The Audio Trigger can be disabled at any station by designating the Door Station.
Function designation number
8
0
Door station number
X
X
2-78
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
5.11.3. Confirming audio trigger setting status (N-8000MS/8500MS/8600MS only)
The setting status of the Audio Trigger function can be confirmed at any Multi-Functional Master Station by
designating a Door Station.
Displayed for 5 sec.
Function designation number
8
2
200
: Ac t i ve
L e v e l = 1 : T i me = 1
Door station number
X
X
5.11.4. Adjusting the effectiveness of Audio Trigger Function
The effectiveness of Audio Trigger function can be adjusted by designating a Door Station at any station and
changing the setting value of the alarm detection conditions.
[Making the Audio Trigger function less effective]
If the Audio Trigger function works when not needed, change the setting value following the operation below.
• When the alarm detection method is set to “Level detection,” the sound pressure level of the specified Door
station’s Audio Trigger function can be increased by 3 dB through the operation shown below.
• When the alarm detection method is set to “Audio detection,” the set sensitivity value of the specified Door
station’s Audio Trigger function can be increased by one step through the operation shown below.
Function designation number
8
3
Door station number
X
X
[Making the Audio Trigger function more effective]
If the Audio Trigger function does not work when needed, change the setting value following the operation
below.
• When the alarm detection method is set to “Level detection,” the detection level of the specified Door station’s
Audio Trigger function can be decreased by 3 dB through the operation shown below.
• When the alarm detection method is set to “Audio detection,” the set sensitivity value of the specified Door
station’s Audio Trigger function can be decreased by one step through the operation shown below.
Function designation number
8
3
Door station number
X
X
2-79
5.11.5. Changing the audio trigger detection time
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
The time interval for detecting sound to activate the alarm function can be changed at any station by designating
a Door Station. Set the detection time using the dial keys 1 − 9. The larger the number becomes, the longer the
detection time becomes.
Function designation number
8
detection time
Y
4
Door station number
X
X
5.11.6. Ambient noise display (N-8000MS/8600MS only)
By designating a Door Station, its ambient noise level can be displayed on any Multi-Functional Station's LCD
screen. Values displayed are reference values in units of dB SPL.
Displayed for 5 sec.
Function designation number
8
5
Door station number
X
X
200
:
No i se=80
2-80
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
5.12. IP Door Station's Speaker Output Switching Control
(only when the N-8640DS/8650DS is used)
The audio output destination of the N-8640DS/8650DS IP door station engaged in conversations with its master
station can be switched to either the internal speaker or the speaker connected to the external speaker terminal
by the master station's dial operation.
The switched audio output destination reverts to the speaker designated on the N-8000 Setting Software when
the conversations terminate or when interrupted by paging with higher priority.
Notes
• If the called IP door station does not have this function, an error tone sounds at the master station that made
a dial operation, and the state returns to the conversation mode.
• The internal and external speakers cannot be used simultaneously.
5.12.1. When switching to the external speaker
Speaker output
switching control
N-8640DS/8650DS
1
Operate the master station during conversation.
5.12.2. When switching to the internal speaker
Speaker output
switching control
N-8640DS/8650DS
0
Operate the master station during conversation.
2-81
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
5.13. Access Code Authentication (except N-8500MS/8510MS)
Usage of the master station can be restricted when the access code authentication is enabled.
Entering a preprogrammed 4-digit access code number before each function key number permits the master
station to be used as usual. Incorrect access code number entry will cause an access error.
Following are restricted functions: Functions to activate at the master station such as calls, paging calls and
scan monitoring, and functions to control through dial operations such as external equipment control and
setting change for the original station.
Call receiving and remote response can be executed without the need for access code number entry.
Emergency paging call activation and Message paging activation functions, which have higher priority, can be
used without entering an access code number.
Operation not in standby mode such as manual call transfer during conversation can be executed without
entering an access code number.
Tip: Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software for access code authentication and access code number
setting. (See p. 5-66, 5-81)
Notes
• The N-8500MS Multi-functional IP Master Station, M-8510MS Standard IP Master Station, and stations
at the Tie-line side or PBX side connected to the N-8000MI Multi-interface unit cannot use Access code
authentication function.
• When initiating calls by One-touch dialing or Remote dialing, the access code number is required.
When registering the number, include the access code number before the dial key number to activate function
such as station number.
• When access code authentication is enabled, redial function cannot be used.
• Access code authentication cannot be performed by auto-dialing.
5.13.1. Operation
The steps below show an example of making station call when access code authentication is enabled.
Step 1. Press the access code number
(4-digit number).
In this case, the station's handset
may be either lifted or in place.
(Access code number: Example when the password is 1234)
or
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Tip
The entered digit of password will be displayed as an asterisk ( ) at
the master station equipped with an LCD screen, then all asterisks
are cleared after a 4-digit input is completed.
1 2 : 0 0 AM
Step 2. Press the station number to call.
100
(Example when station number is 15)
or
1
5
1
5
2-82
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
6. MASTER station Operation table
Function
Call
Item
Call
Redialing
Recall
Voice Calling
Response (Sequential response mode)
Call station display
Response
selection
(Selective
response mode) First call station display
Last call station display
Selective response
Handset conversation
Hands-free conversation
Conversation
PTT conversation
Auto-dialing Operation
Operation
Programming
Speed dialing
One-touch
dialing
Dial pattern
activation
Hold
Call transfer
Erasure
Operation
Mic Off
Call hold
Call hold release
Call transfer
Automatic call transfer
Returning to the
original conversation
Programming
at your station
Erasure at your station
Programming
at the designated station
Time-based
Programming
call forwarding Erasure
Absence
Programming
transfer
Erasure
Group
Programming
hunting
Erasure
Call
forwarding
Operation
Remarks
Dial station No. [X][X] ··· [X]
Station No: 2 – 6 digits
Press the [Redial] key
Press the [
] key
Voice a call to a called party by pressing the [PTT] key as the
continuous call tone sounds.
Press any key or lift the handset.
Press the [ ] or [ ] key. (Arrow key)
Press the [ ] key. (Arrow key)
Press the [ ] key. (Arrow key)
Press the [PTT] key, or lift the handset.
Conversation can be made by lifting the handset.
Conversation can be made without lifting the handset.
Press the [PTT] key during a hands-free conversation.
Press the Auto-dialing key ( [1] – [8].)
Press [7] , [8] , [9] , [0] or lift the handset.
Dial [Function] [6] [the one-touch dialing key] [the dial to
be programmed] [PTT] keys.
• The one-touch dialing key represents the [7], [8], [9], [0],
or [PTT] key, which is used for one-touch function.
• Press the [PTT] key when enabling the Off-Hook
function for one-touch key operation.
• The dial to be programmed is up to 32 digits.
• Enter one-touch dialing key using the Dial keys (12 keys),
Paging key, Paging response key, Transfer key, and/or
Function key.
Dial [Function] [6] [the one-touch dialing key] [PTT] keys.
Dial [Function] [2] [Function] [dial pattern No.] keys.
N-8000MS/8500MS
/8600MS only
N-8600MS only
Dial pattern No.: 01 – 54
Continuously hold down any key ( [0] – [9] ) during a
conversation.
Press the [Hold] key during a conversation.
Press the [Hold] key during hold.
Press the [Transfer] key during a conversation.
The other party is placed on hold.
Dial the third party's station number.
Conversation with the third party.
(Original conversation party is placed on hold).
Either press the [C] key or replace the handset.
Call transfer completion
Press the [Transfer] key during a conversation.
The other party is placed on hold.
Dial the third party's station number.
Conversation with the third party.
(The original conversation party is placed on hold).
Press the [Transfer] key again.
Return to the original conversation.
(The original conversation is restored).
Dial [Function] [4] [1] [the designated station No.] [
] keys. Station No: 2 – 6 digits
Dial [Function] [4] [1] [your station No.] [
Dial [Function] [4] [2] [your station No.] [
] keys.
] keys.
Dial [Function] [4] [3] [the designated station No.] [
] keys.
Dial [Function] [4] [3] [your station No.] [
] keys.
Dial [Function] [4] [4] [the designated station No.] [
] keys.
Dial [Function] [4] [4] [your station No.] [
] keys.
Dial [Function] [4] [5] [the designated station No.] [
] keys.
Dial [Function] [4] [5] [your station No.] [
] keys.
2-83
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
C/O line automatic
call transfer
Function
Call
forwarding
Absence
transfer
Group
hunting
Time-based
call forwarding
Remote
response
Item
Programming
at your station
Erasure at your station
Programming
at your station
Erasure at your station
Programming
at your station
Erasure at your station
Programming
New programming
Operation
Dial [Function] [4] [1] [
] [the C/O line interface access
number] [
] keys.
Dial [Function] [4] [1] [your station No.] [
] keys.
Dial [Function] [4] [4] [
] [the C/O line interface access
number] [
] keys.
Dial [Function] [4] [4] [your station No.] [
] keys.
Dial [Function] [4] [5] [
] [the C/O line interface access
number] [
] keys.
Dial [Function] [4] [5] [your station No.] [
] keys.
Dial [Function] [4] [3] [
] [the C/O line interface access
number] [
] keys.
Dial [Function] [4] [3] [your station No.] [
] keys.
When call is received to the station assigned to the same
group, press the [PTT] key.
Dial [Function] [7] [0] [
] keys.
Member addition
Dial [Function] [7] [1] [member station No.] [
] keys.
Erasure
Member erasure
Dial [Function] [7] [2] [
] keys.
Dial [Function] [7] [2] [member station No.] [
] keys.
Erasure
Response
Executive priority
Scan monitor
Start
Paging
Stop/Restart
Advancing Scan
Reverse Scan
Voice transmission
End
Zone paging
Selectable paging
Selectable paging to
zones and zone
pattern-set zones
All-call paging
Emergency paging
Paging Response Automatic Response
Zone number dialing
Station speaker Increase volume
output settings
Decrease volume
If a called station is busy, press the [9] key.
Dial [
] [2] [Monitor group No.] [Monitor group No.] ···
[
] keys.
or
Dial [
] [2] [
] [Monitored station No.] [
]
[Monitored station No.] ··· [
] keys.
Press [0] to stop. Press [0] again to restart.
Press [
] key to advance the scan by one station.
Press [
] key to move the scan back one station.
Press [PTT] to establish conversation.
Either press the [C] key or replace the handset.
Dial [Paging] [Zone No.] keys.
Dial [Paging] [
] [Zone No.] [
] [Zone No.] [
]
··· [Zone No.] [
] keys.
Dial [Paging] [zone or zone pattern selection]···[zone or
zone pattern selection] [
] keys.
• Zone selection: Dial [
] [zone No.].
• Zone pattern selection: Dial [
] [Function]
[paging zone pattern No.].
Dial [Paging] [0] keys.
Press [
][
][
][
] keys.
Press [Paging Response] key.
Dial [Paging Response] [Zone No.] keys.
Press [
] key during a conversation.
Press [
] key during a conversation.
Remarks
Station No: 2 – 6 digits
Stations currently set
for other Remote
Response groups can
not establish a different
Remote Response group.
Stations currently set for
other Remote Response
groups cannot join a
different Remote
Response group as a
member station.
Stations currently set for
other Remote Response
groups cannot erase
from a member station
of the Remote Response
group.
Monitor group No.:
1–4
Monitored station No.:
2 – 6 digits
Dial during monitoring
Zone No.: 1 – 3 digits
N-8600 only
Zone No.: 1 – 3 digits
Paging zone pattern
No.: 001 – 216
Zone No.: 1 – 3 digits
2-84
Function
3-party
conference
Item
2-party conversation
3-party conversation
Switching from 2-party
conversation to
3-party conference
Switching from 3-party
conference to 2-party
conversation
End of conference
Broadcast to
Selected zone
SX-2000 system broadcast
or other activation
operation
(N-8600MS only)
General broadcast
activation
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Operation
Remarks
Dial [Function] [5] [1] [second party station No.].
Conference-Originating
Station Operation
Dial [Transfer] [third party station No.].
Dial [Transfer] [Function] [5] [1] [third party station No.] during
a conversation.
Dial [Transfer] [conference ending station No.].
Either press the [C] key or replace the handset.
Dial [Paging] [zone or zone pattern selection]···[zone or zone
] keys.
pattern selection] [
• Zone selection
Dial [
] [Transfer] [SX-2000 system ID] [zone No.].
• Zone pattern selection
Dial [
] [Transfer] [SX-2000 system ID] [Function] [zone
pattern No.].
SX-2000 system ID
No.: 01 − 08
Zone No.: 001 − 256
Zone pattern No.: 001
− 216
Dial [Function] [
] [Transfer] [SX-2000 system ID]
Control input pattern
[Function] [1] [Function] [control input (for general broadcast No.: 001 − 162
pattern activation) pattern No.] [
] keys.
General broadcast
termination
] [Transfer] [SX-2000 system ID]
Dial [Function] [
[Function] [2] [Function] [control input (for general broadcast
pattern activation) pattern No.] [
] keys.
BGM broadcast
change
] [Transfer] [SX-2000 system ID]
Dial [Function] [
[Function] [5] [Function] [control input (for BGM change) No.]
[
] keys.
BGM broadcast end
] [Transfer] [SX-2000 system ID]
Dial [Function] [
Equipment No.: 1 − 5
[Function] [5] [Function] [control input (for BGM change) No.] Equipment ID
[
] keys.
No.: 00 − 32
Control input
Dial [Function] [control output or control output pattern
No.: 01 − 32
selection]···[control output or control output pattern selection]
Control output
[
] keys.
No.: 01 − 32
• Control output pattern selection
Control output pattern
Dial [
] [Transfer] [SX-2000 system ID] [Function] [3]
No.: 001 − 162
[Function] [control output pattern No.] keys.
Control output
activation
Control output
deactivation
Dial [Function] [control output or control output pattern
selection]···[control output or control output pattern selection]
] keys.
[
• Control output pattern selection
Dial [
] [Transfer] [SX-2000 system ID] [Function] [4]
[Function] [control output pattern No.] keys.
Multi-operation
activation (Selected
zone broadcast and
control output pattern
activation)
Dial [Paging] [zone or zone pattern selection]···[zone or zone
pattern selection] [control output pattern selection]···[control
] keys.
output pattern selection] [
• Zone selection
Dial [
] [Transfer] [SX-2000 system ID] [zone No.].
• Zone pattern selection
Dial [
] [Transfer] [SX-2000 system ID] [Function] [zone
pattern No.].
• Control output pattern selection
Dial [
] [Transfer] [SX-2000 system ID] [Function] [3]
[Function] [control output pattern No.] keys.
2-85
Function
Item
Broadcast to
SX-2000 system
or other activation
operation
(N-8600MS only)
Multi-operation
activation
(N-8000 paging call,
SX-2000 selected
zone broadcast, and
control output pattern
activation.)
Time signal
Changing time signal
schedules
Suspending time
signal schedules
Manually trigger
time signal
Manually trigger
selectable time signal
Audio trigger
Door remote
Time signal schedule
confirmation
Temporary exception
programming
Temporary exception
cancellation
Schedule reservation
Reserved schedule
cancellation
Reserved schedule
confirmation
Enabling audio trigger
Disabling audio trigger
Confirming audio
trigger setting status
Increasing detection
level
Decreasing detection
level
Changing audio
trigger detection time
Ambient noise display
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Operation
Dial [Paging] [N-8000 zone or zone pattern selection,
SX-2000 zone or zone pattern selection]···
[N-8000 zone or zone pattern selection, SX-2000 zone or
zone pattern selection] [control output pattern selection]···
[control output pattern selection] [
] keys.
• N-8000 zone selection
Dial [
] [paging zone N0.].
• N-8000 zone pattern selection
Dial [
] [Function] [zone pattern No.].
• SX-2000 zone selection
Dial [
] [Transfer] [SX-2000 system ID] [zone No.].
• SX-2000 zone pattern selection
Dial [
] [Transfer] [SX-2000 system ID] [Function]
[zone pattern No.].
• Control output pattern selection
Dial [
] [Transfer] [SX-2000 system ID] [Function] [3]
[Function] [control output pattern No.] keys.
Dial [Function] [9] [0] [schedule No.] keys.
Remarks
N-8000 paging
zone No.: 1 – 3 digits
N-8000 paging zone
pattern No.: 001 – 216
SX-2000 system ID
No.: 01 – 08
SX-2000 zone
No.: 001 – 256
SX-2000 zone pattern
No.: 001 – 216
Control output pattern
No.: 001 – 162
Schedule No.: 01 – 16
Dial [Function] [9] [0] [0] [0] keys.
Dial [Function] [9] [1] [sound source No.] [external control]
[zone No.] keys.
Dial [Function] [9] [1] [sound source No.] [external control]
[zone No.] [
] [zone No.] [
] ··· [zone No.] [
]
keys.
Dial [Function] [9] [2] keys.
Dial [Function] [9] [3] [
[
] ··· [station No.] [
Dial [Function] [9] [4] [
Zone No.: 1 – 3 digits
Sound source No.: 1 – 9
External control: 0
(no handshaking),
1 (controlled)
Multi-functional Master
station only
] [station No.] Station No.: Exception
intended station
] [station No.] [
] keys.
] keys.
Dial [Function] [9] [5] [Reserved day] [Schedule No.] keys.
Dial [Function] [9] [5] [
] keys.
Reserved day: 1 – 9
Schedule No.: 01 – 16
Dial [Function] [9] [6] keys.
Multi-functional Master
station only
Dial [Function] [8] [1] [Door station No.] [
Dial [Function] [8] [0] [Door station No.] [
Dial [Function] [8] [2] [Door station No.] [
] keys.
] keys.
] keys.
Dial [Function] [8] [3] [
] [Door station No.] [
] keys.
Dial [Function] [8] [3] [
] [Door station No.] [
] keys.
Dial [Function] [8] [4] [detection time] [Door station No.]
[
] keys.
Dial [Function] [8] [5] [Door station No.] [
] keys.
(When using the N-8050DS/8540DS)
Dial [Transfer] [Function] [0] keys during a conversation.
(When using the N-8640DS/8650DS)
Dial [Transfer] [Function] [Designation number for the contact
output No.] keys during a conversation.
Designation number for
the contact output:
Contact output 1 = 0
Contact output 2 = 1
Contact output 3 = 2
Contact output 4 = 3
Contact output 5 = 4
2-86
Function
BGM
Item
Channel selection
Volume up
External
equipment
control
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Operation
Dial [Function] [1] [channel number] keys.
Dial [Function] [1] [
] keys.
Dial [Function] [1] [
] keys.
Dial [Function] [1] [9] [
] keys.
Remarks
Channel number: 0 – 8
Increasing a number by 1
Decreasing a number by 1
Volume down
Dial [Function] [1] [9] [
One-shot make output
Make output
Break output
Door station
one-shot make output
Dial [Function] [3] [0] [contact access number] keys.
Dial [Function] [3] [1] [contact access number] keys.
Dial [Function] [3] [2] [contact access number] keys.
(When using the N-8050DS/8540DS)
Dial [Function] [3] [3] [Door station No.] keys.
(When using the N-8640DS/8650DS)
Dial [Function] [3] [Designation number for the contact
output No.] [Door station No.] keys.
Speaker output
switching control
(When switching to the internal speaker)
Dial [Transfer] [Function] [
] [0] keys during a
conversation with the N-8640DS/8650DS.
(When switching to the external speaker)
Dial [Transfer] [Function] [
] [1] keys during a
conversation with the N-8640DS/8650DS.
Dial [Access code number] before performing key operation. Access code number:
4-digit number
Access code authentication
] keys.
Contact access
number: 2 – 4 digits
Designation number for
the contact output:
Contact output 1 = 3
Contact output 2 = 4
Contact output 3 = 5
Contact output 4 = 6
Contact output 5 = 7
2-87
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
7. MULTIFUNCTIONAL MASTER STATION'S LCD DISPLAY TABLE
Standby mode
Holding
Current time
Your station number
1 2 : 0 0 AM
100
Dial status display 1 (Off-hook)
Di a l i ng
Dial status display 2 (Dialing)
Dialing number
Calling (individual, group, recall or
voice call)
Called station's number
Called station's name
200
N - 8 0 0 0MS
Ca l l i ng
Call received
Called station's number
Called station's name
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
rece i v i ng
Conversation mode
Called station's number
Called station's name
200
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
Conve r sa t i on
Busy mode
Called station's number
200
Busy
Called station's name
200
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
Ho l d i ng
Dial status display 3 (when the Transfer
key is pressed)
Di a l i ng
Dialing mode 4 (dialed after Transfer
key depression)
Dialing number
200
Di a l i ng
200
Ca l l
Called station's number
Called station's name
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
300
Di a l i ng
Calling (transfer mode)
Designated station's number
Designated station's name
300
: N - 8 6 0 0MS
Ca l l i ng
Conversation mode (transfer mode)
Designated station's number
Designated station's name
300
: N - 8 6 0 0MS
Conve r sa t i on
Call hold
Called station's number
Called station's name
200
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
Conve r sa t i on
Call forwarding
Designated station's number
200
Designated station's name
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
100
Your station
number
2-88
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Paging
Paging zone number
Zone0
Pag i ng
Paging zone name
: ALL CALL
Note: For selectable Paging, the zone selected first
is displayed.
Paging receiving
Paging operation
station number
200
Pag i ng
Paging operation
station name
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
Emergency paging
Paging zone number
Zone
:
Eme r g . p a g
Paging operation
station name
200
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
Eme r g . p a g
Time signal receiving
Equipment No. :
Line No.
Schedule name
1:1
: T I ME 1
T i me s i g n a l
Scan monitor
Monitored
station number
Monitored
station name
205
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
S c a n mo n i t o r i n g
Recall
Reca l l
0:400
Red i a l
0:400
Dialing data
Outside line dialing
N-8000CO's outside line telephone number (Last 16 digits)
0000000000000000
Conve r sa t i on
Outside line call received
N-8000CO's
equipment number
N-8000CO's name
COT 0 0 1 : CO - L i n e 1
Ca l l r ece i v i ng
Outside line conversation mode
Emergency paging receiving
Paging operation
station number
Redial
N-8000CO's
equipment number
N-8000CO's name
COT 0 0 1 : CO - L i n e 1
Conve r sa t i on
Outside line busy mode
N-8000CO's
equipment number
N-8000CO's name
COT 0 0 1 : CO - L i n e 1
Busy
Outside line call forwarding
Designated N-8000CO's
equipment number
Designated N-8000CO's
name
COT 0 0 1 : CO - L i n e 1
100
Your station number
Outside line paging receiving
N-8000CO's
equipment number
N-8000CO's name
COT 0 0 1 : CO - L i n e 1
Pag i ng
Dialing data
2-89
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Selected zone broadcast
SX-2000 system ID number
Zone1
Pag i ng
: SX
Audio Trigger alarm received
Called station's number
200
Ca l l
Called station's name
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
rece i v i ng
Response to Audio Trigger alarm
Called station's number
Called station's name
400
: N - 8 0 5 0DS
Conve r sa t i on
Making a 3-party conference call
(originator)
Called party's station number
Called party's station name
300
: N - 8 5 0 0MS
Ca l l i ng
Receiving call for 3-party conference
(called party)
Originator's station number
100
Ca l l
Originator's station name
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
rece i v i ng
3-party conference call established
(originator)
Called party's station number
300
:200
Con f e r ence
3-party conference call established
(called party)
Originator's station number
Originator's station name
100
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
Con f e r ence
3-party conference in progress
(originator)
Called party's station number
300
Busy
Called party's station name
: N - 8 6 0 0MS
2-90
Selective Response
• Call in (no waiting call)
Called station's number
Called station's name
200
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
Ca l l - i n
• Call in (1 waiting call)
1st call station's number
1st call station's name
200
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
Ca l l - i n
:
1
• Call in (99 waiting calls)
1st call station's number
1st call station's name
200
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
Ca l l - i n
: 99
• Third call displayed (all normal calls)
3rd call station's number
3rd call station's name
300
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
Ca l l - i n
: 2 /
• 100th call displayed (all normal calls)
100th call station's number 100th call station's name
400
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
Ca l l - i n
:99 /
• Emergency call received (no waiting call)
Called station's number
Called station's name
200
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
Eme r . c a l l - i n
• Emergency call received
(1 waiting call including Emergency Call)
1st call station's number
1st call station's name
200
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
Eme r . c a l l - i n
1
• Emergency call received
(99 waiting calls including Emergency Calls)
1st call station's number
1st call station's name
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
MASTER STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
• Third call displayed (Third received call is
normal, but an Emergency call precedes it. )
3rd call station's number
3rd call station's name
300
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
Ca l l - i n
2 /
• Third call displayed (Third received call is
Emergency. )
3rd call station's number
3rd call station's name
300
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
Eme r . c a l l - i n
2 /
• 100th call displayed (100th received call is
normal, but an Emergency call precedes it. )
100th call station's number 100th call station's name
400
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
Ca l l - i n
99 /
• 100th call displayed (100th received call is
Emergency. )
100th call station's number 100th call station's name
300
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
Eme r . c a l l - i n 9 9 /
• Outside line call in (no waiting call)
N-8000CO’s equipment number
N-8000CO’s line number
3:1
:
C/O ca l l - in
Note
Displays for busy status waiting calls, etc. are
as shown in other examples.
• Audio trigger call in (no waiting call)
Called station's number
Called station's name
400
: N - 8 0 5 0DS
Tr ig. ca l l - in
Note
Displays for busy status waiting calls, etc. are
as shown in other examples.
200
: N - 8 0 0 0MS
Eme r . c a l l - i n
99
2-91
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S
FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
1. FUNCTIONS ASSIGNABLE TO THE FUNcTION KEY
Any one of the functions shown in the table
below can be assigned to the Function keys on
the N-8610RM Remote microphone station and
RM-210 Remote microphone expansion unit.
N-8610RM
Function key
RM-210
Function key
When the IP Master station's key function has
been assigned to the Remote microphone
station, it is possible to realize the same function
as that available for the IP Master station except
for the functions relating to the handset and LCD.
For the same functions and operation as those of
the IP Master station, refer to "MASTER STATION’S
FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION." on p. 2-2.
SX-2000 System function
N-8000 System function
The remote microphone station's distinct
functions and operation will be detailed later.
Hereinafter, Function keys are named with the
assigned function names. (Example: Paging
zone key)
Assignable function
Paging zone selection
All zone clear
Dial (0 − 9,
,
), C, Paging,
Paging response, Hold, Transfer,
Function, Redial
PTT
Volume +
Volume −
Privacy
Station number (Station call)
Dial pattern
Sift key
Mic Indicator
Zone selection
All zone clear
General broadcast pattern
BGM pattern change
BGM pattern end
Control output
N-8610RM
Talk key
Function description
Selects the zone or paging zone pattern to be paged.
Clears all zone selections made at the time of paging calls.
Same functions as those assignable to the N-8000 system's
station keys.
Used when responding to paging calls.
Increases the station's built-in speaker volume during
conversation.
Decreases the station's built-in speaker volume during
conversation.
Used when rejecting incoming calls. Some specifications differ
from those of the RS-140 Switch panel's privacy function.
Calls or responds to the designated station.
Activates a dial pattern.
Used in combination with other key. (Refer to p. 2-115.)
Switches the broadcast status indicator to microphone indicator.
Selects the zone or zone pattern to be broadcast when making
broadcast to the SX-2000 system. Control output pattern can
also be included.
Clears all zone selections made when making broadcast to the
SX-2000 system.
Activates or terminates SX-2000 General broadcast pattern.
Activates SX-2000 BGM pattern.
Terminates SX-2000 BGM pattern.
Activates or deactivates SX-2000 Control output.
Note: Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to assign the functions. (Refer to p. 5-73)
2-92
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
2. FUNCTIONS ENABLED WITH THE REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION
Function
Functions available
exclusively for
the Remote
microphone station
(or functions to
be performed
exclusively)
Same functions as
those available for
the Master station
Same functions as
those available for
the N-8600MS IP
Master station
Calling (Station number)
Sequential response
Selective response
End of conversation
Paging
Station speaker volume change
Dial pattern start
Privacy
Selected zone broadcast
Mic indicator
General broadcast pattern start
BGM pattern change/end
Control output activation
Multi-operation Activation
Calling (Individual calls)
One-touch dialing
Hold
Call transfer
Automatic transfer
Remote response
(Sequential response)
Executive priority
(Sequential response)
Paging
Paging response
Scan monitor
Dial pattern start
SX-2000 selected zone broadcast
SX-2000 General-purpose broadcast
(General broadcast pattern start/end)
SX-2000 BGM broadcast (BGM pattern
change/end)
SX-2000 Control output activation/
deactivation
Multi-operation activation
Operation
(reference page)
p. 2-95
p. 2-96
p. 2-97
p. 2-95, 2-96, 2-97
p. 2-102
p. 2-98
p. 2-100
p. 2-101
p. 2-106
p. 2-115
p. 2-110
p. 2-111
p. 2-111
p. 2-112
p. 2-2
p. 2-100
p. 2-14
p. 2-15
p. 2-17
p. 2-22
p. 2-24
p. 2-25
p. 2-31
p. 2-44
p. 2-13
p. 2-33
p. 2-34
p. 2-35
p. 2-37
p. 2-39
Remarks
Assign each individual
function other than a
dial key to the function
key.
When a dial key has
been assigned to
the function key, it is
possible to realize
functions described at
left which are the same
ones available for the
master station.
When a dial key has
been assigned to
the function key, it is
possible to realize
functions described at
left which are the same
ones available for the
N-8600MS IP Master
station.
2-93
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
3. FUNCTION COMPARISON TABLE BETWEEN N-8610RM AND RM-200SA
The table below shows the difference between the functions assignable to the N-8610RM Remote microphone
station and RM-200SA Remote microphone regarding broadcasts to the SX-2000 system.
Type of broadcast made to SX-2000
N-8610RM Remote
microphone station
RM-200SA Remote microphone
Selected zone broadcast
BGM pattern change/end
General broadcast pattern start
General EV broadcast
–
Emergency broadcast
–
2-94
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
4. CONVERSATION FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
4.1. Calling
4.1.1. Using a station call key
Step 1. Press the station call key into which the station call number to
be called is programmed.
Status indicator
Selection indicator
Station call key
Flashes Green
orange
The call tone is heard through the calling station's internal speaker.
Note
When a busy tone is heard, wait till the line becomes free, and you are
automatically connected to the called party.
Step 2. Speak into the microphone when the call tone stops and the called
party answers.
Note
When the system is set to "Sequential Response*" and the called
station set to "Automatic Connection Mode*," it is possible to start
conversations after a brief ring tone is sounded once. In other settings,
the call tone continues to sound and stops when the called party
answers, allowing conversations to start.
Talk key
Step 3. To finish conversations, press the Talk key.
* Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to perform Sequential response and Incoming call mode setting.
(Refer to p. 5-26, 5-65.)
Note
If the system has been set for call time-out or conversation time-out, the call or conversation automatically stops
after the specified time limit. The specific length of this time-out (between 10 and 990 seconds in 10-second
units) is preprogrammed into individual exchanges or IP stations using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software.
(Refer to p. 5-63.)
4.1.2. Using dial keys
When dial keys are assigned to the Function keys, calls can be made through the same dial operation as that
for individual calls from the Master station.
2-95
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
4.2. Receiving a Call (when the system is set to "Sequential Response" mode)
Step 1. Answer a received call.
1-1. When the called station's incoming call mode is set to
"Automatic Connection Mode*," the call tone sounds
only once, after which the calling party's voice is heard
immediately through the internal speaker. Answer by
speaking into the microphone.
1-2. When the called station's incoming call mode is set to
"Continuous call tone mode*," the call tone keeps on
sounding.
Speak into the microphone after pressing the PTT key.
If a station call key is assigned a calling station number,
the key's status indicator flashes.
Press the PTT key or the station call key of which status
indicator is flashing, then speak into the microphone.
PTT key
or
Status indicator
Station call key
Flashes
orange
Step 2. To finish conversations, press the Talk key.
Talk key
* Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to perform Incoming call mode setting. (Refer to p. 5-65.)
2-96
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
4.3. Receiving a Call (when the system is set to "Selective Response" mode)
Note: Only continuous call tones is available in "Selective Response" mode.
Step 1. Answer a received call.
1-1. When responding by selecting the station
When a call is received, the status indicator of the calling station's
station call key flashes.
Status indicator
Station call key
Flashes
orange
Press the station call key, then speak into the microphone.
When calls from 2 or more stations are received, press the station
call key for the station to respond to.
Status indicator
Selection indicator
Station call key
Lights Lights
orange green
1-2. When responding to the station with the highest priority
Press the PTT key, then speak into the microphone.
Selection indicator
PTT key
Green
(Lights only
when pressed)
Step 2. To finish conversations, press the Talk key.
Talk key
2-97
4.4. Station Speaker Volume
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
The station speaker volume can be preset using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software, however it can also be
adjusted at the station.
The speaker volume level can be changed in 5 steps (in 3 dB per step).
• Pressing the [Volume +] key during conversation increases the volume.
Selection indicator
[Volume +] key
Green
• Pressing the [Volume –] key during conversation decreases the volume.
Selection indicator
[Volume –] key
Green
4.5. Speech Method
4.5.1. Hands-free conversation
Permits conversations to be made without using the handset when a call is made
without lifting a handset or received in automatic connection mode.
[Operation when both stations are engaged in hands-free conversation]
When both stations (except the N-8410MS) are engaged in hands-free conversation, either full duplex
conversation by way of an echo canceller* or half duplex conversation by way of a voice switch is made
depending on conditions. (Refer to p. 8-2, "FULL DUPLEX AND HALF DUPLEX CONVERSATIONS.")
During this conversation, station's internal settings (parameters relating to the condition of sound reflection)
are constantly updated in response to the change in sound collected by the built-in microphone, allowing for
optimum hands-free conversation.
When both stations make hands-free conversation after either one has been moved in a new environment or
the environment surrounding the station has significantly changed, this may cause acoustic feedback. In this
case, continue the conversation and the situation will soon return to the normal condition.
If acoustic feedback cannot be removed, adjust the microphone sensitivity and speaker output volume of the
station.
Note
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software (refer to p. 5-65) to set the microphone sensitivity and speaker
output volume.
* An echo canceller is used to eliminate acoustic feedback caused when the voice outputs from the station's
speaker are picked up by the same station's microphone. As acoustic feedback cannot be eliminated
thoroughly, the echo canceller is usually used in conjunction with a voice switch.
2-98
4.5.2. PTT conversation
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
This function makes announcements and conversations possible to areas with a high ambient noise level.
Pressing the PTT key during a hands-free conversation enables one-way conversation from the party who
pressed the PTT key. Conversation flow reverses when the key is released.
One-way conversation
PTT key
One-way conversation
When both parties have pressed the PTT key, the party who pressed the button last is given precedence to
speak.
One-way conversation
PTT key
One-way conversation
PTT key
PTT key
2-99
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
4.6. One-touch dialing
Programming the dial operation* (up to 32-digit numbers) into the station's [7], [8], [9], or [0] key allows paging
or other operation to be performed by one-touch dialing.
* [0] − [9] keys,
key,
key, Paging key, Paging response key, Hold key, Transfer key, and Function key.
Selection indicator
(Example)
[8] key
Zone 1 (N-8000)
Green
Amplifier
For example, when the dial operation of
[Paging call] [
] [0] [0] [1] [
] [0] [2] [3]
[
] is preprogrammed into the dial 8, such
programmed paging call can be made to the
Zones 1 and 23 by pressing only the key
assigned to dial 8. (When the assigned zone
number is 3-digit long)
Speaker
Zone 23 (N-8000)
No. 1000
No. 1002
No. 1003
Note
The one-touch programming can be performed by using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software.
(Refer to p. 5-68.)
No. 1004
4.7. Dial Pattern Activation
4.7.1. Using a dial pattern
When dial operations (up to 380-digit numbers) have been preprogrammed as a dial pattern, assigning the dial
pattern key number to the dial pattern key allows paging or other operation to be performed by one-touch dialing.
Press the Dial pattern key.
Selection indicator
(Example)
Dial pattern 1 key
Zone 1 (N-8000)
Green
For example, when the operation of
combined activation (see p. 2-41) has been
preprogrammed into the Dial pattern 1, pressing
only the Dial pattern 1 key allows N-8000 Paging
call, SX-2000 selected zone broadcast, and
control output pattern activation to be performed
at the same time.
Amplifier
Speaker
Zone 1 (SX-2000)
Amplifier
Speaker
Control output activation
Notes
• Program a dial pattern using the Dial keys (12 keys), Paging key, Paging response key, Hold key, Transfer key,
and/or Function key.
• The dial pattern programming can be performed by using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software.
(Refer to p. 5-77.)
4.7.2. Using dial keys
When dial keys are assigned to the Function keys, a dial pattern can be activated through the same dial
operation as that for dial pattern activation from the N-8600MS Master station.
2-100
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
5. USING THE PRIVACY FUNCTION
The Privacy function refuses all paging, scan monitor, and station calls except Emergency paging calls.
Note
The Privacy mode can be set or reset only when the Remote Microphone Station is placed in the state below.
• Standby mode
• Paging (except Emergency paging calls) being received
• BGM being received
During dial operation, call receiving, conversation, or paging call, Privacy mode setting becomes invalid even
if operated.
5.1. Privacy Mode Settings
Press the Privacy key when its Status indicator is unlit.
The Remote Microphone Station is placed in Privacy mode and the Status
indicator lights.
Notes
• Pressing the station call key calls the preprogrammed Master Station or
telephone to enable conversation even when the Remote Microphone
Station is in Privacy mode. The original Privacy mode is restored as
soon as the conversation is completed.
• Call receiving is rejected when in privacy status. When the master
station or telephone calls the remote microphone station placed in
privacy status, an error tone sounds at the master station or telephone
and the call is automatically terminated. Neither an error tone nor a call
tone sounds at the remote microphone station.
• If the Remote Microphone Stations in Privacy mode are included in
the group call member stations, a call is received at the representative
station and member stations except these Remote Microphone
Stations.
• If the Remote Microphone Stations in Privacy mode are included in the
paging output destinations, paging can be made to the paging output
destination stations except these Remote Microphone Stations.
• When scan-monitoring the Remote Microphone Station in Privacy
mode from the master station or telephone, a busy tone is heard at the
master station or telephone, skipping to the next station to monitor.
Status indicator
Selection indicator
Privacy key
Lights
orange
Green
(Lights only
when pressed)
5.2. Resetting the Privacy Mode
Press the Privacy key when its Status indicator is lighting.
The privacy mode is cancelled and the Status indicator goes out.
Status indicator
Selection indicator
Privacy key
Goes
out
Green
(Lights only
when pressed)
2-101
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
6. PAGING FUNCTION AND OPERATION
6.1. Paging Call
Paging stations are preprogrammed.
Paging duration can be limited by preprogramming the time limit (between 10 and 990 seconds in 10-second
units) for each station.
Note
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to enable or disable the paging operation and to set paging duration.
(Refer to p. 5-63, 5-67.)
6.1.1. Using the N-8000 zone selection key
Paging calls can be made to the preprogrammed zones (Paging zones and Paging zone patterns*).
* A pattern into which multiple paging zones are grouped.
Note: Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to perform zone settings. (Refer to p. 5-121.)
[When the Talk key is set to "LOCK"]
Step 1. Press the N-8000 zone selection key. (N-8000 zone
selection).
Paging zones and Paging zone patterns can be
selected in combination by pressing 2 or more keys
in sequence.
The selection indicator of the selected key lights green.
Tips
• To clear selection, press the N-8000 zone selection
key again.
• To clear selection of all zones simultaneously, press
the All zone clear key.
Step 2. Press the Talk key. (Paging call start).
(Example)
Status indicator
Selection indicator
N-8000 zone
selection key (Zone 1)
N-8000 zone
selection key
(Zone 23 and
Zone pattern 02)
Green
Orange Green
N-8000 zone
selection key (Zone 1)
Broadcast status indicator
Microphone indicator
N-8000 zone
selection key
(Zone 23 and
Zone pattern 02)
Talk key
Lights
orange Flashes
green
A pre-announcement paging tone is broadcast.
In this event, the paging pre-announcement tone is heard through the station's built-in speaker.
The microphone indicator of the Talk key flashes green while the paging pre-announcement tone is
being sounded.
Note
A pre-announcement paging tone can be set to "Disable." Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software
to perform paging tone setting. (Refer to p. 5-63.)
2-102
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Step 3. Speak into the microphone when the microphone indicator of the Talk key begins to light green.
Tip
When a part of the zones being broadcast to is assigned to the N-8000 zone selection key other than
the key pressed in Step 1, the status indicator of so assigned zone selection key flashes green.
Note
Flashes green.
In the example shown at right, the status
indicator of the uppermost zone selection
key flashes green as a part (Zone 1) of the
Orange Green
set zone group (Zone pattern 01) is placed in
broadcast mode.
N-8000 zone selection key
(Zone pattern 01*)
N-8000 zone selection key (Zone 1)
N-8000 zone selection key
(Zone 23 and Zone pattern 02*)
Broadcast status indicator
Microphone indicator
Talk key
* Zone pattern 01: Zones 1, 2, and 3
Zone pattern 02: Zones 4 and 5
Orange Green
Zone 1
Amplifier
Speaker
Zone 23
No. 1000
Step 4. Press the Talk key. (Paging call end)
No. 1002
No. 1003
No. 1004
Talk key
2-103
[When the Talk key is set to "PTT"]
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Step 1. Press the N-8000 zone selection key. (N-8000 zone
selection).
Paging zones and Paging zone patterns can be
selected in combination by pressing 2 or more keys
in sequence.
The selection indicator of the selected key lights green.
Tips
• To clear selection, press the N-8000 zone selection
key again.
• To clear selection of all zones simultaneously, press
the All zone clear key.
Step 2. Hold down the Talk key. (Paging call start)
(Example)
Status indicator
Selection indicator
N-8000 zone
selection key (Zone 1)
N-8000 zone
selection key
(Zone 23 and
Zone pattern 02)
Green
Orange Green
N-8000 zone
selection key (Zone 1)
Broadcast status indicator
Microphone indicator
N-8000 zone
selection key
(Zone 23 and
Zone pattern 02)
Talk key
Lights
orange Flashes
green
The paging pre-announcement tone is broadcast.
In this event, the paging pre-announcement tone is heard through the station's built-in speaker.
The microphone indicator of the Talk key flashes green while the paging pre-announcement tone is
being sounded.
Note
The paging pre-announcement tone can be set to "Disable." Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software
to perform paging pre-announcement tone setting. (Refer top. 5-63.)
2-104
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Step 3. Speak into the microphone while holding down the Talk key when the microphone indicator of the Talk
key begins to light green.
Tip
When a part of the zones being broadcast to is assigned to the N-8000 zone selection key other than
the key pressed in Step 1, the status indicator of so assigned zone selection key flashes green.
Note
In the example shown at right, the status
indicator of the uppermost Paging zone
pattern key flashes green as a part (Zone
1) of the set zone group (Zone pattern 01) is
placed in broadcast mode.
Flashes green.
Orange
N-8000 zone selection key
(Zone pattern 01*)
Green
N-8000 zone selection key (Zone 1)
N-8000 zone selection key
(Zone 23 and Zone pattern 02*)
Broadcast status indicator
Microphone indicator
Talk key
* Zone pattern 01: Zones 1, 2, and 3
Zone pattern 02: Zones 4 and 5
Orange Green
Zone 1
Amplifier
Speaker
Zone 23
No. 1000
Step 4. Release the Talk key. (Paging call end)
No. 1002
No. 1003
No. 1004
Talk key
6.1.2. Using dial keys
When dial keys are assigned to the Function keys, paging calls can be made with the same dial operation (p.
2-26) as that of the Master station's selectable paging.
6.2. Responding to Paging
If the paged party performs a response operation at the nearest station, it can call and begin conversations
with the paging party. Paging response operation can be performed with the Paging response key in the same
manner as the master station.
For operation details, read "Responding to Paging" at the master station. (Refer to p. 2-31.)
2-105
7. bROADCAST TO
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
SX-2000 SYSTEM (only when using SX-200IP)
7.1. Selected Zone Broadcast
Broadcasts can be made to the zone(s), or zones assigned to a zone pattern* within the SX-2000 system.
Broadcast durations can be limited by preprogramming the time limit (between 1 and 20 minutes in 1-minute
units) for each station. (Only when the Talk key is set to "LOCK")
* A pattern into which multiple zones are grouped.
Tips
• Perform zone pattern settings using the N-8000 Setting Software. You can also import and use the output
zone pattern having been set on the SX-2000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-77.)
• Set the time limit (Time out) using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-72.)
7.1.1. Using the SX-2000 zone selection key
Paging calls can be made to the preprogrammed zones (zone and zone broadcast pattern).
[When the Talk key is set to "LOCK"]
Step 1. Press the SX-2000 zone selection key. (Zone selection)
(Example)
Multiple zones and zone patterns can also be selected in
combination by pressing 2 or more keys in sequence.
The selection indicator of the selected key lights green.
Tips
• When the status indicator is flashing green, broadcast
is being made by other equipment to a part or all of the
zones set to the SX-2000 zone selection key.
• To clear selection, press the SX-2000 zone selection key
again.
• To clear selection of all zones simultaneously, press the
All zone clear key.
Step 2. Press the Talk key. (Broadcast start)
The chime tone will be broadcast.
In this event, the chime tone is heard
through the station's built-in speaker.
The microphone indicator of the Talk
key flashes green while the chime tone
is being sounded.
Status indicator
Selection indicator
SX-2000 zone
selection key
(Zone 1)
SX-2000 zone
selection key
(Zone 8 and
Zone pattern 02)
Green
Orange Green
Broadcast status indicator
Microphone indicator
SX-2000 zone
selection key
(Zone 1)
SX-2000 zone
selection key
(Zone 8 and
Zone pattern 02)
Talk key
Orange Flashes
green
Note
The chime tone can be set to "None."
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to perform chime tone setting. (Refer to p. 5-72.)
2-106
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Step 3. Speak into the microphone when the microphone indicator of the Talk key begins to light green.
Tip
When a part of the zones being broadcast to is assigned to the SX-2000 zone selection key other than
the key pressed in Step 1, the status indicator of so assigned zone selection key flashes green.
Note
In the example shown at right, the
status indicator of the uppermost
SX-2000 zone selection key flashes
green as a part (Zone 1) of the set
zone group (Zone pattern 01) is
placed in broadcast mode.
Flashes green.
Orange
SX-2000 zone selection key
(Zone pattern 01*)
Green
SX-2000 zone selection key
(Zone 1)
SX-2000 zone selection key
(Zone 8 and Zone pattern 02*)
Broadcast status indicator
Microphone indicator
Orange
Talk key
* Zone pattern 01: Zones 1, 2, and 3
Zone pattern 02: Zones 4 and 5
Green
Zone 1
Amplifier
Speaker
Zone 8
Amplifier
Step 4. Press the Talk key. (Broadcast end)
The chime tone will be broadcast.
In this event, the chime tone is heard through the station's builtin speaker.
Speaker
Talk key
2-107
[When the Talk key is set to "PTT"]
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Step 1. Press the SX-2000 zone selection key. (Zone selection)
Multiple zones and zone patterns can also be selected in
combination by pressing 2 or more keys in sequence.
The selection indicator of the selected key lights green.
Tips
• When the status indicator is flashing green, broadcast
is being made by other equipment to a part or all of the
zones set to the SX-2000 zone selection key.
• To clear selection, press the SX-2000 zone selection key
again.
• To clear selection of all zones simultaneously, press the
All zone clear key.
Step 2. Hold down the Talk key. (Broadcast start)
(Example)
Status indicator
Selection indicator
SX-2000 zone
selection key
(Zone 1)
SX-2000 zone
selection key
(Zone 8 and
Zone pattern 02)
Green
Orange Green
SX-2000 zone
selection key
(Zone 1)
Broadcast status indicator
Microphone indicator
SX-2000 zone
selection key
(Zone 8 and
Zone pattern 02)
Talk key
Orange Flashes
green
The chime tone will be broadcast.
In this event, the chime tone is heard through the station's built-in speaker.
The microphone indicator of the Talk key flashes green while the chime tone is being sounded.
Note
The chime tone can be set to "None." Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to perform chime tone
setting. (Refer to p. 5-72.)
2-108
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Step 3. Speak into the microphone while holding down the Talk key when the microphone indicator of the Talk
key begins to light green.
Tip
When a part of the zones being broadcast to is assigned to the SX-2000 zone selection key other than
the key pressed in Step 1, the status indicator of so assigned Zone pattern key flashes green.
Note
In the example shown at right, the
status indicator of the uppermost
SX-2000 zone selection key flashes
green as a part (Zone 1) of the set
zone group (Zone pattern 01) is
placed in broadcast mode.
Flashes green.
Orange
SX-2000 zone selection key
(Zone pattern 01*)
Green
SX-2000 zone selection key
(Zone 1)
SX-2000 zone selection key
(Zone 8 and Zone pattern 02*)
Broadcast status indicator
Microphone indicator
Orange
Talk key
* Zone pattern 01: Zones 1, 2, and 3
Zone pattern 02: Zones 4 and 5
Green
Zone 1
Amplifier
Speaker
Zone 8
Amplifier
Step 4. Release the Talk key. (Broadcast end)
The chime tone will be broadcast.
In this event, the chime tone is heard through the station's builtin speaker.
Speaker
Talk key
7.1.2. Using dial keys
When dial keys are assigned to the Function keys, selected zone broadcast can be made with the same dial
operation (p. 2-26) as that of the N-8600MS's selected zone broadcast.
2-109
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
7.2. General-Purpose Broadcast
General broadcast patterns* having been set in the SX-2000 system can be activated.
*‌Contain the preset broadcast sound sources, output zones, and other settings. For details, refer to the SX2000 Setting Software Instructions.
‌In the N-8000 system, you can import the SX-2000 system setting and use it as a control pattern using the
N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-77.)
Note
The SX-2000 system's general broadcast pattern that can be activated by the N-8000 system's station is only
the one set as "General broadcast (Level)" assigned to each unit's control input in the Event setting.
7.2.1. Using the General broadcast pattern key
Step 1. Press the General broadcast pattern key
A set general broadcast pattern is selected and
activated.
The selection indicator of the General broadcast
pattern key lights green.
Step 2. Press the General broadcast pattern key again.
The General broadcast pattern stops by pressing the
currently selected Function key again.
The selection indicator of the General broadcast
pattern key goes out.
Selection indicator
General broadcast
pattern key
Green
General broadcast
pattern key
7.2.2. Using the General broadcast pattern key
When the dial key is assigned to each key, general broadcast pattern can be activated with the same dial
operation (p. 2-34) as that of the N-8600MS's general broadcast patter start.
2-110
7.3. BGM Broadcast
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
The BGM pattern* having been set in the SX-2000 system can be activated.
*‌A broadcast pattern containing BGM source, output zone, and other preset items. For details, refer to the SX2000 Setting Software Instructions.
7.3.1. Using the BGM pattern change key
Step 1. Press the BGM pattern change key.
The set BGM pattern is selected and activated.
(When other BGM is being broadcast, it is stopped and
replaced with the BGM pattern assigned to the pressed
key.)
Selection indicator
Green
(Lights only
when pressed)
Step 2. Press the BGM pattern end key.
BGM is terminated.
All indicators go out.
BGM pattern
change key
BGM pattern
end key
Tip
Assign the key different from the BGM pattern change key as the BGM pattern end key in advance.
7.3.2. Using dial keys
When dial keys are assigned to the Function keys, BGM broadcast pattern can be activated with the same dial
operation (p. 2-35) as that of the N-8600MS's BGM pattern start.
7.4. Control Output Activation
The SX-2000 Control output can be activated.
7.4.1. Using the Control output key
Step 1. Press the Control output key.
The set SX-2000 control output is activated.
The selection indicator lights green and the status
indicator lights orange.
Status indicator
Step 2. Press the Control output key again.
Control output is deactivated.
All indicators go off.
Selection indicator
Control output key
Orange Green
Control output key
7.4.2. Using dial keys
When dial keys are assigned to the Function keys, control output can be activated with the same dial operation
(p. 2-37) as that of the N-8600MS's control output activation.
2-111
7.5. Multi-Operation Activation
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
7.5.1. Simultaneously activating selected zone broadcast and control output pattern
When the control output pattern is programmed into the zone selection key, broadcasts to the SX-2000 zone
(zone and zone pattern*1) and SX-2000 control output activation can be made simultaneously. The control
output will be deactivated simultaneously with the completion of Zone broadcast.
Broadcast durations can be limited by preprogramming the time limit (between 1 and 20 minutes in 1-minute
units) for each station. (Only when the Talk key is set to "LOCK")
* A pattern into which multiple zones are grouped.
Note
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software for control output pattern*2 programming, Zone pattern*2 setting, and
time limit (Time out) setting. (See p. 5-77, 5-72.)
*2 You can also import the control output patterns or output zone pattern settings performed using the SX-2000
Setting Software.
[Operation]
Operations are the same as those of the Selected zone broadcast (see 2-106).
Note
Control output activation or deactivation cannot be interlocked with the Selected zone broadcast using the
Control output key.
Pressing the Zone key followed by the Control output key immediately activates only the control output.
(Example)
Orange Green
The figure at right shows an example to make
SX-2000 broadcast to the zones assigned to
the zone broadcast pattern 01 and zone 8 as
well as to activate control output pattern 1.
Status indicator
Selection indicator
Microphone indicator
Broadcast status indicator
Zone selection key
(Zone pattern 01: Zones 1, 2, and 3,
and Control output pattern1)
Zone selection key
(Zone 8)
Talk key
Orange Green
Zone
1
2
3
8
Control output pattern 1 activation
Zone 1
Amplifier
Zone 2
Zone 3
Speaker
SX-2000 System
Zone 8
Amplifier
Speaker
2-112
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
7.5.2. Simultaneously activating paging, selected zone broadcast, and control output pattern
Broadcasts to the N-8000 paging zone (paging zone and paging zone pattern) and the SX-2000 zone (zone and
zone pattern) can be made at the same time.
When the control output pattern is programmed into the Zone key, SX-2000 control output activation and
each broadcast can be made at the same time. The control output will be deactivated simultaneously with the
completion of broadcast.
Broadcast durations can be limited by preprogramming the time limit (10 − 990 seconds in 10-second units or
1 − 20 minutes in 1-minute units) for each station.
Notes
• Set the paging zone, each time limit (Time out), and priority level using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software.
(Refer to p. 5-121, 5-63, 5-72.)
• Perform SX-2000 zone pattern* settings and program control output pattern* using the N-8000 Setting
Software. (Refer to p. 5-77.)
* You can also import the control output pattern or output zone pattern having been set on the SX-2000
Setting Software.
Tip
When making N-8000 Paging call and SX-2000 Selected zone broadcast at the same time, the same operations
regarding pre-announcement paging tone, chime tone, or other paging-related functions are performed to both
systems.
Determine which setting to choose, N-8000 system setting or SX-2000 system setting by the priority settings
(p. 5-73) in the N-8000 Setting software.
The table below shows the operations depending on the priority setting.
Priority setting
N-8000
SX-2000
Operation
Operates according to the settings of the N-8000 pre-announcement paging tone,
paging delay time, and paging time limit in addition to the Paging call and Selected
zone broadcast.
A pre-announcement paging tone instead of a chime tone is also broadcast to the SX2000 system zone.
Operates according to the settings of the SX-2000 chime tone, waiting time, and time
out in addition to the Paging calls and Selected zone broadcast.
A chime tone instead of a pre-announcement paging tone is also broadcast to the
N-8000 system zone.
It is not possible to operate on each different setting that a pre-announcement paging tone is broadcast to the
N-8000 system and a chime tone to the SX-2000 system.
2-113
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
[Operation]
Basic operations are the same as those when making paging calls (p. 2-102) and zone selectable broadcast
(p. 2-106).
Multiple keys including the N-8000 zone selection key, SX-2000 zone selection key, and Control output key can
be selected in random order at the time of zone (N-8000) and zone (SX-2000) selection.
Note
Control output activation or deactivation cannot be interlocked with the N-8000 paging and SX-2000 selected
zone broadcast using the Control output key.
Pressing the N-8000 zone selection key or SX-2000 zone selection key followed by the Control output key
immediately activates only the control output.
(Example)
The figure at right shows an
example to make broadcast to
the zones assigned to the Paging
zone pattern 01 and zone 23 of
the N-8000 System as well as to
the zones assigned to the Zone
broadcast pattern 01 and zone 23
of the SX-2000 System.
Microphone indicator
Broadcast status
indicator
Orange Green
N-8000 zone selection key
(Zone pattern 01: Zones 1, 2, and 3)
N-8000 zone selection key
(Zone 23)
SX-2000 zone selection key
(Zone broadcast pattern 01: Zones 1, 2, and 3)
SX-2000 zone selection key
(Zone 8)
Status indicator
Selection indicator
Talk key
Orange Green
Zone
1
2
3
8
Zone 1
Amplifier
Zone 2
Zone 3
3
23
Zone 1
Speaker
SX-2000 System
Zone 8
Amplifier
Zone
1
2
Speaker
Amplifier
Zone 2
Zone 3
N-8000 System
Zone 23
Speaker
No. 1000
No. 1002
No. 1003
No. 1004
2-114
8. OTHER FUNCTIONS
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
8.1. Using the Shift Key
Following 2 different functions can be assigned to the Remote microphone station's key in advance: one
activated with a single key operation and another activated with key operation in conjunction with the Shift
key.
(Example)
For example, set a function for a single key operation to [Volume + (Volume increase)] and a function for
key operation in conjunction with the Shift key to [Volume − (Volume decrease)], then operate the keys as
follows.
Selection indicator
• ‌To increase the volume, press the [Volume +] key during
conversation.
[Volume +]
key
Green
Selection indicator
[Volume −]
key
• ‌To decrease the volume, press both the [Volume −] key and
Shift key simultaneously during conversation.
Shift key
Green
8.2. Using the Microphone Indicator Function
The broadcast status indicator on the left side of the Talk key can be switched to act as a microphone
indicator.
Status indicator
Step 1. Press the Microphone indicator key.
The broadcast status indicator switches to the
microphone indicator.
Selection indicator
Orange Green
(Lights only
when pressed)
Microphone indicator
key
Step 2. Speak into the microphone.
The broadcast status indicator flashes.
It flashes green when audio signals are input from the microphone. It flashes red when an over
peak level signal is input.
Microphone indicator
Broadcast status indicator
(Microphone indicator)
Flashes
green.
Step 3. Press the Microphone indicator key again.
The indicator reverts to its original broadcast
status indicator function.
Talk key
Green
Status indicator
Selection indicator
Green
(Lights only
when pressed)
Microphone
indicator
2-115
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
9. REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION OPERATION TABLE
The table below shows the remote microphone station's exclusive operations.
For the same operations as those of the master station, refer to "MASTER STATION OPERATION TABLE" on
p. 2-83.
Function
Call
Response (Sequential response mode)
Response (Selective response mode)
Conversation end
Station's speaker Increase volume
volume setting
Decrease volume
Conversation
Speed dialing
Privacy
Operation
Press the station key.
(Continuously called station response mode)
Speak into the microphone.
(Continuous call mode)
Press the PTT key, then speaker into the microphone.
(Response by selecting the station)
Press the key of the station to respond to among the
station's keys of which status indicators are flashing, then
speak into the microphone.
(Responding to the station with the highest priority)
Press the PTT key, then speak into the microphone.
Press the Talk key.
Press the [Volume +] key during conversation.
Remarks
Press the [Volume −] key during conversation.
Hands-free conversation Conversation can be made without lifting the handset.
PTT conversation
One-touch dialing
Dial pattern activation
Privacy ON
Privacy OFF
Paging call
Broadcast to SX- Selected zone
2000 System
broadcast
Press the PTT key during hands-free conversation.
Press [7], [8], [9], or [0] key.
Press the Dial pattern key.
Press the Privacy key while the status indicator of the
Privacy key remains unlit.
Press the Privacy key while the status indicator of the
Privacy key is lighting.
Multiple zone selection
(Start)
Press the N-8000 zone selection key, followed by the Talk key. keys can be selected.
Note: When the Talk key is set to "PTT", speak into the
microphone while holding down the Talk key.
(End)
When the Talk key is set to "LOCK": Press the Talk key again.
When the Talk key is set to "PTT": Release the Talk key.
(Start)
Multiple zone selection
Press the SX-2000 zone selection key, followed by the Talk key. keys can be selected.
Note: When the Talk key is set to "PTT", speak into the
microphone while holding down the Talk key.
(End)
When the Talk key is set to "LOCK": Press the Talk key again.
When the Talk key is set to "PTT": Release the Talk key.
General broadcast
(Start) Press the General broadcast pattern key.
(End) Press the General broadcast pattern key again.
BGM broadcast
(Start) Press the BGM pattern change key.
(End) Press the BGM pattern end key.
Control output activation Press the Control output key.
Control output
deactivation
Multi-operation
activation (SX-2000
selected zone broadcast
and control output
pattern activation)
Press the Control output key again.
(Activation)
Press the Zone selection key, followed by the Talk key.
Note: When the Talk key is set to "PTT", speak into the
microphone while holding down the Talk key.
(Deactivation)
When the Talk key is set to "LOCK": Press the Talk key again.
When the Talk key is set to "PTT": Release the Talk key.
Multi-operation activation Press the N-8000 zone selection key, SX-2000 zone
(N-8000 paging call,
selection key, followed by the Talk key.
SX-2000 selected zone
broadcast, and control
output pattern activation)
Microphone indicator
(Function ON) Press the Microphone indicator key.
(Function OFF) Press the Microphone indicator key again.
Multiple zone selection
keys can be selected.
Control output pattern
needs to be programmed
into the Zone selection
key.
Multiple keys including
the N-8000 zone
selection key and SX2000 zone selection
key can be selected in
random order. To activate
the control output pattern,
program it into the SX2000 zone selection key.
2-116
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
DOOR STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
DOOR STATION'S
FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
1. Calling from a door station
1.1.‌Calling from a door station
(when the system is set to "Sequential Response" mode)
Step 1. Press the call button to call the pre-programmed master station or telephone.
The call tone is heard through the calling station's internal speaker.
• If the door station is not set to door station mode, a busy tone is heard when
the called master station is busy. When a busy tone is heard, wait till the
line becomes free, and you are automatically connected to the called party.
[When the door station is set to door station mode]
The call tone sounds only once regardless of the called station's connection
mode settings.
When no response is made to a call within 30 seconds, the call automatically
stops, as the call timeout is limited to 30 seconds in this mode.
Call tone
[When the door station is not set to door station mode]
When the called master station is set to Automatic connection mode, it is
possible to start conversations after a brief call tone is sounded once.
When the called master station is set to Continuous call tone mode, the call
tone continues to sound and stops when the called party answers, allowing
conversations to start.
Note
Calls cannot be terminated at the door station.
Step 2. Start conversation when the called party answers.
[When the door station is set to door station mode]
Conversation automatically terminates in 30 seconds, as the conversation
timeout is limited to 30 seconds.
Tip
This 30-second limit becomes invalid when lifting the handset, or pressing the hold key or transfer key
at the master station.
[When the door station is not set to door station mode]
Conversation mode continues until the called party replaces the handset of
the master station or telephone, or presses the Clear key.
Note
Conversation cannot be terminated at the door station.
Notes
• Preprogram the master station or the telephone to call to.
Programming can be performed by dialing operation of the multifunctional master station (refer to p. 7-9) or
using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software (refer to p. 5-68, 5-83).
• Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to perform Door station mode setting. (Refer to p. 5-67, 5-82.)
2-117
1.2. ‌Calling from a door station
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
DOOR STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
(when the system is set to "Selective Response" mode)
Step 1. Press the call button to call the pre-programmed master station or telephone.
The status indicator flashes.
Flashes
Note
When the call time limit has been set, if no response is made within a set
period of time, the call is automatically terminated.
Step 2. If the master station or the telephone
responds, a brief call tone is sounded.
Speak toward the panel.
Note
The status indicator mode changes from
flashing to steady-on state.
Steady-on
Brief call tone
Conversation is terminated if the called party replaces the handset of the master
station or telephone, or presses the Clear key.
Note: The status indicator goes out when the conversation ends.
Notes
• Preprogram the master station or the telephone to call to.
Programming can be performed by dialing operation of the multifunctional master station (refer to p. 7-9) or
using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software (refer to p. 5-68, 5-83).
• Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to perform call time-out function setting. (Refer to p. 5-36, p.
5-63.)
2-118
2. Making
‌
an EMERGENCY Call
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
DOOR STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
(only possible when system is set for "Selective Response")
Emergency Calls take precedence over other calls. If the Master Station or telephone responds to the Emergency
Call, the conversation becomes an Emergency Conversation and is handled with a higher priority than other
conversations and paging calls.
Notes
• Only Door Stations that are set to be capable of making an Emergency Call when the system response mode
is set to "Selective Response" can initiate the Emergency call.
• If the Master Station or telephone responds to an Emergency Call when all speech links are occupied, a
lower-priority conversation or paging call will be interrupted for the Emergency Conversation to begin.
Step 1. Press the call button twice or more in rapid succession (under 400 ms interval).
If a Master Station is called, the Emergency Call tone is sounded.
If a Multi-Functional Master Station is called, the Emergency Call indication is
displayed and the Emergency Call tone sounded.
Note
Call time limits are not applicable to the Emergency Call.
Step 2. Begin the conversation if the called station responds. (Emergency Conversation)
The conversation can continue until terminated by the called master station or telephone.
Note
Call time limits are not applicable to the Emergency Conversation.
Notes
• Preprogram the master station or the telephone to call to.
Programming can be performed by dialing operation of the multifunctional master station (refer to p. 7-9) or
using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software (refer to p. 5-68, 5-83).
• Door Stations must be set to allow Emergency Call.
• Use the N-8000 Setting Software to enable or disable Emergency Call operation for the Door Station.
(Refer to p. 5-67, 5-82.)
• Use the N-8000 Setting Software to set the system's response mode. (Refer to p. 5-26.)
3. Receiving a Call
Step 1. When receiving a call from the master station, the
call tone sounds only once, after which the calling
party's voice is heard immediately through the
internal speaker.
Call tone (once)
Voice
Step 2. Answer by speaking into the door station.
Step 3. Conversation is terminated if the called party replaces the handset or presses the Clear key.
Note
Conversation termination operation cannot be executed at the door station.
Conversation can be terminated by the termination operation at the master station or telephone, or
after the preset time limit.
2-119
4. Audio Trigger function
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
DOOR STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
(N-8050DS/8640DS/8650DS only)
Alarm operation is activated if audio that enters the preprogrammed N-8050DS Door Station's and
N-8640DS/8650DS IP Door station’s microphone meets set conditions.
Notes
• This function may accidentally be activated in response to ambient sounds (e.g. rain, wind, music, traffic
noise).
• When the alarm detection method is set to “Audio detection” (see p. 2-121), audio signals may not be detected
depending on circumstances.
Tips
• Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to perform audio trigger function setting. (Refer to p. 5-67, 5-81.)
• Portions of the setting contents can be changed with manual Master Station operation. (Refer to p. 2-78.)
[Door Stations capable of Audio Trigger alarm operation]
• When using this function by the N-8050DS, only the N-8000EX Exchange can support this function, and up
to four Door Stations that enable Audio Trigger alarm operation can be connected per Exchange.
• The Audio Trigger does not work for Door Stations set to receive background music.
• The Door Station detects audio input when it is in standby mode.
[Alarm operation]
Alarm operations can be selected from the options.
• Calls to Master Station
Calls the preprogrammed master station.
k!!
Crac
Call tone
Calling
N-8050DS/8640DS/8650DS
• N-8000MI/N-8000DI Contact Control
Closes the preprogrammed contact input of the N-8000MI Multi Interface or N-8000DI Direct Select unit.
(One-shot make contact)
Contact output
Revolving light
N-8000MI/8000DI
k!!
Crac
Contact control
Contact output
N-8050DS/8640DS/8650DS
• Monitor Output
Audio from the Door Station is output from the preprogrammed Master Station's hands-free speaker for a
preset period of time after Audio Trigger detection.
Crack!!
Monitor output
k!!
Crac
N-8050DS/8640DS/8650DS
2-120
[Alarm detection method]
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
DOOR STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
One of the following 2 methods can be selected for the Alarm detection method.
• Level detection
Activates alarm if a sound pressure level exceeding the set level is detected for a specified period of time.
• Audio detection
Activates alarm if a human voice is detected.
Allows only the human voices to be detected from the input sound by filtering characteristic frequency
components contained in the human voice’s vowels.
Notes
• Audio detection may be activated in response to sounds like music, siren, and engine having a similar
frequency range to that of the human voice.
• Audio signals may not be detected in such cases where an ambient noise is louder than them.
[Alarm detection conditions]
• Level detection
Duration (level):
Level:
• Audio detection
Duration (audio):
Sensitivity:
Sets the time interval till sounds are detected.
Setting range: 1 – 9 seconds (9 steps, in 1-second units)
Sets a sound pressure threshold.
Setting range: 73 – 97 dB* (9 steps, in 3-dB units)
* The unit is dB (SPL), and the value is for reference only.
Sets the duration of vowels of the human voice to detect.
Setting range: 100 – 500 ms (9 steps, in 50-ms units)
Sets the detection sensitivity of the human voice.
Setting range: 1 – 9 (9 steps, 1: Most likely to detect, 9: Least likely to detect)
[Trigger time settings]
The time range during which the alarm can be activated in a day can be limited. If the start and end times are
set, audio is only detected during that period to trigger the alarm.
[Audio Trigger call priority]
• When the call response mode is set to "Sequential Response":
As with normal calls, if the connected Master Station is busy, a busy tone is heard at the Door Station. The
Master Station is called as soon as the conversations terminate.
• When the call response mode is set to "Selective Response":
Audio Trigger calls take precedence over normal calls. (Refer to Call Priorities on p. 2-177.)
2-121
5.
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
DOOR STATION'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Call button restriction (N-8050DS/8640DS/8650DS only)
(Only when the system is used to "Sequential Response" mode)
Enabling the Call button restriction function changes the usage of the Call button. Pressing the Call button 3
times within 3 seconds performs calling operation. This function will prevent calls by accidental depression of
the button.
Immediately after the Call button is pressed 3 times within 3 seconds, the preprogrammed master station or
telephone is called.
When receiving a call, the station is called with a call tone, and engaged in conversation even if the call button
restriction is enabled.
Tip: Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software for call button restriction setting. (See p. 5-67, p. 5-82)
Notes
• Activation method by means of the N-8640DS’s and N-8650DS’s external contact input remains unchanged.
• Functions interlocked with the calling operations such as Calling station indication/CCTV interlock and Call/
Conversation sync contact output (Door station contact output) work immediately after the Call button is
pressed 3 times within 3 seconds.
• The status indicator lights immediately after the Call button is pressed 3 times within 3 seconds.
5.1. Making a Call
Step 1. Press the Call button 3 times within 3 seconds.
Immediately after the Call button is so pressed 3 times, the preprogrammed
master station or telephone is called.
Step 2. Start conversation when the called party answers.
6. DOOR station Operation table
Function
Call
Conversation
Emergency call
Call button restriction
(N-8050DS/8640DS/8650DS only)
Operation
Press the call button.
No dial operations are required since incoming calls are automatically connected.
Press the call button twice or more in rapid succession (under 400 ms interval).
Press the Call button 3 times within 3 seconds.
2-122
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
SUBSTATION/SWITCH PANEL'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
SUBSTATION/SWITCH PANEL'S
FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
This section describes the functions and operations of the substation, switch panel, and switch board to
be connected to the Substation Interface Unit. Hereinafter, these connected devices are collectively called
"Substation."
1. Calling from a SUBstation
1.1. ‌Operation Using the Call Button
(when the system is set to "Sequential Response" mode)
Step 1. Press the call button to call the pre-programmed master station or telephone.
The status indicator flashes (RS-140/180/480 only).
A call tone is heard from the substation's internal speaker (external speaker
in the case of RS-140). The call tone continues to sound until conversation
begins.
Note
When the called Master Station is busy, a busy tone is heard at the Door
Station. In such cases, simply wait. The master station is called as soon as
the conversations terminate.
Step 2. Speak toward the panel when the called party answers.
(Speak toward the external speaker in the case of the RS140/142/143/144.)
Notes
• The status indicator mode changes from flashing to steady-on
state (RS-140/180/480 only).
• Lifting the handset permits handset conversation when the
RS-141 is combined with the RS-140/142/143/144 or when the
RS-481 is combined with the RS-442/480.
Step 3. Terminate the conversation.
Conversation is terminated if the called party replaces the handset of the
master station or telephone, or presses the Clear key.
Replacing the handset terminates handset conversation when the RS-141
is combined with the RS-140/142/143/144 or when the RS-481 is combined
with the RS-442/480.
Note
The status indicator goes out when the conversation terminates (RS140/180/480 only).
Flashes
Call tone
(When the RS-140 is used.)
External speaker
Tips
• The RS-142 has 2 call buttons, and RS-442 has 3 call buttons. No change occurs if other call button is
pressed during calls or conversations made using one call button.
• Operation using the RS-144's Emergency Call button is the same as that described above.
Notes
• Preprogram the master station or the telephone to call to.
• Programming can be performed by dialing operation of the multifunctional master station (refer to p. 7-9) or
using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software (refer to p. 5-35).
2-123
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
SUBSTATION/SWITCH PANEL'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
1.2. ‌Operation Using the Call Button
(when the system is set to "Selective Response" mode)
Step 1. Press the call button to call the pre-programmed master station or telephone.
The status indicator flashes (RS-140/180/480 only).
Note
When the call time limit has been set, if no response is made within a set
period of time, the call is automatically terminated.
Step 2. Speak toward the panel when a call tone is
heard. (Speak toward the external speaker in
the case of the RS-140/142/143/144.)
Notes
• The status indicator mode changes from
flashing to steady-on state (RS-140/180/480
only).
• Lifting the handset permits handset
conversation when the RS-141 is combined
with the RS-140/142/143/144, or when the RS442/481 is combined with the RS-480.
Flashes
Steady-on
Brief call tone
(When the RS-140 is used.)
External speaker
Step 3. Terminate the conversation.
Conversation is terminated if the called party replaces the handset of the
master station or telephone, or presses the Clear key.
Replacing the handset terminates handset conversation when the RS-141 is
combined with the RS-140/142/143/144, or when the RS-442/481 is combined
with the RS-480.
Note
The status indicator goes out when the conversation terminates (RS-140/180/480 only).
Notes
• The RS-142 has 2 call buttons, and RS-442 has 3 call buttons. When other call button is pressed during calls
made using one call button, these calls currently in progress are cancelled, permitting the later calls to go
through if the call button pressed later has a higher priority than that pressed earlier.
• The RS-144 has the call and Emergency Call buttons. When the Emergency Call button is pressed during
calls made using the call button, these calls currently in progress are cancelled, permitting the emergency
calls to go through.
• Preprogram the master station or the telephone to call to.
Programming can be performed by dialing operation of the multifunctional master station (refer to p. 7-10) or
using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software (refer to p. 5-56).
• Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to perform call time-out function setting. (Refer to p. 5-54.)
2-124
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
SUBSTATION/SWITCH PANEL'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
1.3. ‌Calling by Lifting the Handset (only when the RS-141 is combined with
the RS-140/142/143/144, and when the RS-481 is combined with the RS-442/480.)
Step 1. Lift the handset.
Calls the preprogrammed master station or
telephone.
The status indicator flashes (RS-140/480 only).
Note
When the call time limit has been set, if no
response is made within a set period of time, the
call is automatically terminated.
Flashes
Step 2. Speak into a handset when a call tone is heard.
The brief call tone sounds when the called party at
the master station or telephone answers.
Note
The status indicator mode changes from flashing
to steady-on state (RS-140/480 only).
Steady-on
Step 3. To terminate the conversation, replace the handset.
The RS-140/480's status indicator goes out.
Note
Replacing the handset at the master station or
the telephone, or pressing the Clear key also
terminates the conversation.
Note
The figure shows an
example when the RS141 is combined with
the RS-140.
Brief call tone
Goes out
Tip
Lifting the handset in standby mode when the RS-142/144 is used in combination with the RS-141 calls the
master station, or the telephone connected to the N-8000AL, both programmed as "Call 1" on the N-8000
Setting Software.
The stations' call buttons corresponding to "Call 1" or "Call 2" serve as function buttons as listed in the table 1.
Lifting the handset during a call or conversations switches the mode from external speaker conversation to
handset conversation.
The status remains unchanged if the call button is pressed during a call or conversations.
The table 2 shows the operation when the handset is lifted (off hook).
[Table 2]
[Table 1]
RS-142
Call 1
Call button 1
Call 2
Call button 2
RS-144
Emergency call
button (Emergency)
Call button
(Normal)
State just before off hook
Standby
Operation when off hook
Calls "Call 1."
Making a call to "Call 1"
The calling tone can be heard from the handset.
A call to "Call 1" continues.
Making a call to "Call 2"
The calling tone can be heard from the handset.
A call to "Call 2" continues.
Making conversations
with "Call 1"
Making conversations
with "Call 2"
Switches to handset conversation.
Conversations with "Call 1" continue.
Switches to handset conversation.
Conversations with "Call 2" continue.
Notes
• Preprogram the master station or the telephone to call to.
Programming can be performed by dialing operation of the multifunctional master station (refer to p. 7-10) or
using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software (refer to p. 5-56).
• Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to perform call time-out function setting. (Refer to p. 5-54.)
2-125
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
SUBSTATION/SWITCH PANEL'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
2. Making
‌
an EMERGENCY Call
(only when system response mode is set for "Selective Response")
Emergency Calls take precedence over other calls. If the Master Station or telephone responds to the Emergency
Call, the conversation becomes an Emergency Conversation and is handled with a higher priority than other
conversations and paging calls.
Notes
• Only Substations that are set to be capable of making an Emergency Call when the system response mode
is set to "Selective Response" can initiate the Emergency call.
• In the case of the N-8010RS, if the Master Station or telephone responds to an Emergency Call when all
speech links are occupied, a lower-priority conversation, paging call, or scan monitor will be interrupted for
the Emergency Conversation to begin.
• Substations must first be set to allow Emergency Call.
• Use the N-8000 Setting Software to enable or disable Emergency Call operation for the Substation.
(Refer to p. 5-57.)
• Use the N-8000 Setting Software to set the system's response mode. (Refer to p. 5-26.)
2.1. Using the Emergency Call Button
The RS-144 is equipped with a dedicated Emergency Call button.
The call buttons on other substations are also made to have the same function as the Emergency Call button
by changing the priority order settings in advance.
Note
It is also possible to set the RS-144's Emergency Call button not to initiate the emergency calls by changing the
priority order settings.
Step 1. Press the Emergency Call button or lift the handset*.
* When the RS-144 and RS-141 are used in combination
If a Master Station is called, the Emergency Call tone is sounded.
If a Multi-Functional Master Station is called, the Emergency Call
indication is displayed and the Emergency Call tone sounded.
Note
Call time limits are not applicable to the Emergency Call.
or
RS-144
Step 2. Begin the conversation if the called station responds. (Emergency
Conversation)
Note
Call time limits are not applicable to the Emergency Conversation.
Conversation is terminated if the called party replaces the handset
or presses the Clear key.
Note
The substations cannot terminate conversations except when handset conversations are made using
the RS-140/142/143/144 in combination with the RS-141 or using the RS-442/480 in combination with
the RS-481.
Notes
• Preprogram the master station or the telephone to call to.
Programming can be performed by dialing operation of the multifunctional master station (refer to p. 7-10) or
using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software (refer to p. 5-56).
• Use the N-8000 Setting Software to set the call priority order. (Refer to p. 5-56.)
2-126
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
SUBSTATION/SWITCH PANEL'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
2.2. Using the Call Button with a Lower Priority
The call button assigned a lower priority can also initiate the emergency calls through the operation described
below.
Notes
• The RS-140/180/480 is not capable of initiating Emergency Calls through the operation described below, but
can initiate Emergency Calls by changing the call priority order settings.
• The RS-144's call button can initiate the emergency calls through the operation described below.
Step 1. Press the call button twice or more in rapid succession (under 400 ms
interval).
If a Master Station is called, the Emergency Call tone is sounded.
If a Multi-Functional Master Station is called, the Emergency Call indication
is displayed and the Emergency Call tone sounded.
Note
Call time limits are not applicable to the Emergency Call.
Flashes
Step 2. Begin the conversation if the called station responds. (Emergency Conversation)
The conversation can continue until terminated by the called master station or telephone.
Note
Call time limits are not applicable to the Emergency Conversation.
Conversation is terminated if the called party replaces the handset or presses the Clear key.
Note
The substations cannot terminate conversations except when handset conversations are made using
the RS-140/142/143/144 in combination with the RS-141 or using the RS-442/480 in combination with
the RS-481.
Notes
• Preprogram the master station or the telephone to call to.
Programming can be performed by dialing operation of the multifunctional master station (refer to p. 7-10) or
using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software (refer to p. 5-56).
• Use the N-8000 Setting Software to set the call priority order. (Refer to p. 5-56.)
2-127
3. Receiving a Call
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
SUBSTATION/SWITCH PANEL'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Step 1. When receiving a call from the master station, the call tone
sounds only once, after which the calling party's voice is
heard immediately through the internal speaker.
Flashes
Brief call tone
Steady-on
Voice
Step 2. Speak toward into the door station.
Note
Lifting the handset permits handset conversation when the
RS-141 is combined with the RS-140, or when the RS-481 is
combined with the RS-442/480.
Step 3. Terminate the conversation.
Conversation is terminated if the called party replaces the
handset or presses the Clear key.
Tip
Replacing the handset terminates the conversation when
the handset conversations are made using the RS-141 in
combination with the RS-140/142/143/144, or using the RS481 in combination with the RS-442/480.
Note
Conversation cannot be terminated at the substation, except for handset conversations made
from the RS-140/143/144 (Switch Panel)/142 (Switch Board)/RS-141 (Optional Handset) or RS-442
(Switch Board)/480 (Substation)/RS-481 (Optional Handset) Combined Substation. Conversations
are terminated by the termination operation at the master station or telephone or when the preset
conversation time elapses.
4. NOTE ON RECEIVING PAGING CALLS
Do not lift the handset during paging calls only when the N-8010RS Substation Interface Unit, RS-140/142/143/144
Switch Panel, and RS-141 Option Handset are used in combination.
Paging calls cannot be correctly heard if the handset is lifted.
N-8010RS
RS-141
RS-140
Paging calls
2-128
5. USING THE PRIVACY
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
SUBSTATION/SWITCH PANEL'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
FUNCTION (RS-140 only)
The Privacy function refuses all paging and station calls except Emergency paging calls.
5.1. Privacy Mode Settings
Press the Privacy button on the RS-140 Switch Panel when the
Privacy indicator is unlit.
The Switch Panel is placed in Privacy mode and the Privacy
indicator lights.
Steady-on
Notes
• Pressing the call button calls the preprogrammed Master Station
or telephone to enable conversation even when the Switch Panel
is in Privacy mode. The original Privacy mode is restored as soon
as the conversation is completed.
• If the RS-140 Switch Panel in Privacy mode is called by a Master
Station or telephone, a Privacy tone is heard at the Master Station
or telephone. (A call tone is not sounded at the RS-140.)
• Pressing the Master Station's Push-to-talk key while the Privacy
tone is sounded allows the Master Station to make a voice call.
5.2. Resetting the Privacy Mode
Press the Privacy button on the RS-140 Switch Panel when the
Privacy indicator is lighting. The privacy mode is cancelled and the
Privacy indicator goes out.
Goes out
Notes
• The Privacy mode can be reset even during a conversation.
• When the Privacy reset operation is performed during a
conversation or voice call, it is accomplished after conversation
completion.
2-129
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
SUBSTATION/SWITCH PANEL'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
6. CALL BUTTON RESTRICTION
(Only when the system is used to "Sequential Response" mode)
6.1. Stations to Which the Call Button Restriction Function can be Programmed
• RS-150/160/170 only of the substations to be connected to the N-8000RS/8010RS
N-8000RS/8010RS
RS-150
RS-160
RS-170
• All the substations and switch board to be connected to the N-8400RS
N-8400RS
RS-450
RS-460
RS-470
RS-480
RS-442
Note
This function cannot be used for the RS-480 and RS-442 when combined with the RS-481.
N-8400RS
RS-442
RS-480
RS-481
RS-481
6.2. Function Description
Enabling the Call button restriction function changes the usage of the Call button. Pressing the Call button 3
times within 3 seconds performs calling operation. This function will prevent calls by accidental depression of
the button.
Immediately after the Call button is pressed 3 times within 3 seconds, the preprogrammed master station or
telephone is called.
When receiving a call, the station is called with a call tone, and engaged in conversation even if the call button
restriction is enabled.
Tip: Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software for call button restriction setting. (See p. 5-57)
Notes
• Functions interlocked with the calling operations such as Calling station indication/CCTV interlock work
immediately after the Call button is pressed 3 times within 3 seconds.
• The status indicator lights immediately after the Call button is pressed 3 times within 3 seconds.
2-130
6.3. Making a Call
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
SUBSTATION/SWITCH PANEL'S FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Step 1. Press the Call button 3 times within 3 seconds.
Immediately after the Call button is so pressed 3 times, the preprogrammed
master station or telephone is called.
Step 2. Start conversation when the called party answers.
Flashes
Steady-on
7. SUBstation Operation table
Function
Call
Conversation
Emergency call
Privacy
Privacy mode setting
(RS-140 only) Resetting privacy mode
Call button restriction (RS-150/160/170
/450/460/470/480*/442* only)
Operation
Press the call button.
No dial operations are required since incoming calls are automatically connected.
Press the emergency call button. (RS-144 only)
Press the call button twice or more in rapid succession (under 400 ms interval).
Press the Privacy button when the Privacy indicator is unlit.
Press the Privacy button when the Privacy indicator is lighting.
Press the Call button 3 times within 3 seconds.
* This function cannot be used for the RS-480 and RS-442 when combined with the RS-481.
2-131
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE
CONNECTED TELEPHONE
FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
1. BASIC USAGE
1.1. Calling from a Telephone (Individual Calls)
Step 1. Lift the handset and press the station number to be called.
1
The calling station's handset speaker sounds an audible call tone.
When a busy tone is heard, wait till the line becomes free, and you are
automatically connected to the called party.
5
Call tone
Telephone
Step 2. Start conversations when the call tone stops and the called party answers.
Note
When the system is set to "Sequential Response*" and the called station set
to "Automatic Connection Mode*," it is possible to start conversations after a
brief call tone is sounded once. In other settings, the call tone continues to
sound and stops when the called party answers, allowing conversations to
start.
Step 3. To finish conversations, replace the handset.
* Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to perform Sequential response and Incoming call mode setting.
(Refer to p. 5-26.)
Notes
• If the system has been set for call time-out or conversation time-out, the call or conversation automatically
stops after the specified time limit. The specific length of this time-out (in 10-second units between 10 and
990 seconds) is preprogrammed into individual N-8000ALs using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software.
(Refer to p. 5-98.)
• Conversations are not possible between the N-8000AL-connected telephone and an outside line telephone.
• Conversations are not possible between the N-8000AL-connected telephone and the PBX extension
telephone via the N-8000MI or tie-line connected intercom stations.
• Set the N-8000AL-connected telephone so that it outputs a PB signal. (The N-8000AL does not operate on
DP10 or DP20 signals.)
2-132
1.2. Receiving a Call
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
Step 1. When a call is received, lift the handset to answer the call.
Step 2. To finish conversations, replace the handset.
2-133
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
2. CONVERSATION FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
2.1. Calling
2.1.1. Individual calls
• To call a station, lift the handset, then press its station number.
• Conversation can begin when the called party answers and the call tone stops.
• A busy tone indicates that the called party is already engaged on another line.
Connection to the called party will be made as soon as the busy line is freed.
2.1.2. Group calls
• When a station is assigned to group call member station, if the station is called, this station (representative
station) and all member stations are simultaneously called by a continuous call tone regardless of their call
receiving mode settings.
• Even when the representative station is busy, all of the associated member stations within the same group
are called by means of a continuous call tone. This continuous call tone stops when any one of the associated
stations responds to the call.
Notes
• Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to perform the group call member station setting.
(Refer to p. 5-99.)
• The N-8050DS Door Station, N-8540DS/8640DS/8650DS IP Door Station, RS-150/160/170/180/450/460
/470/480 Substation, RS-140/143/144 Switch Panel, and RS-142/442 Switch Board cannot be assigned to the
group call representative station nor member station.
Continuous call tone
X
X
Continuous call tone
Continuous call tone
Call
Station number where
group calls is set
Conversation
X
Any key
2-134
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
2.2. Call Transfer
Either party engaged in two-party conversation can call the third party to make conversation with (placing the
original conversation partner on hold). After the conversation ends, it is possible to restore the original twoparty conversation or transfer the conversation with the third party to the original conversation partner.
Step 1. Hook-flash* during a two-party conversation.
The current conversation is placed on hold, sending a hold tone to the other party.
* Momentarily depressing the receiver switch.
Step 2. Dial the third party's station number, for example [6][3]. If the third party answers, the first party can
speak with the third party while keeping the original conversation on hold.
The first party
The second party
No. 61
No. 62
No. 61
Hook-flash
The first party
No. 61
After hook-flashing, dial the third party’s station number.
6
3
Hold
Hold tone
The second party
No. 62
The third party
No. 63
After completing the conversation with the third party, the first party can transfer the original conversation to the
third party or return to the original conversation.
2-135
[Transferring calls to the third party]
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
Step 3. To connect the third party to the original conversation partner being placed on hold, replace the
handset. This permits conversation between the second and third parties.
The first party
The second party
No. 61
No. 62
The third party
No. 63
[Returning to the original conversation]
Step 4. To return to the original conversation without transferring it to the third party, repeat hook-flash.
The original two-party conversation is restored.
No. 61
Hook-flash
The second party
The first party
No. 62
No. 61
The third party
No. 63
Tip
Even if the first party does not hook-flash, if the third
party either presses the Clear key or replaces the
handset, the original conversation is restored.
The third party
No. 63
or
C
2-136
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
2.3. Automatic Transfer
Note
Calls cannot be automatically transferred to the station connected via the multi interface unit or the C/O line
interface unit.
2.3.1. Group hunting
Calls to a busy telephone set for Group hunting are automatically transferred to another designated station or
telephone.
This Group hunting function also applies to the call transfer (p. 2-15) performed during conversation.
When the designated station to which a call was transferred is busy, the call is automatically transferred to the
next designated station, and this continues in series until a free line is found.
Note
The station to which a call is to be transferred can be set either by dialing operation (see below) or using the
supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-99.)
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to enable or disable the Group hunting function. (Refer to p. 5-97.)
The station to which a call is to be transferred cannot be designated unless the group hunting function is
enabled.
(Example: A call to the telephone No. 62 will automatically be transferred, if No. 62 is busy, to the next designated
station, No. 63.)
Conversation
No. 10
No. 62
Call tone
No. 63
Call
No. 11
6
2
Notes
Calls are not transferred under the following conditions.
• The designated station is set for Call forwarding.
• The designated station is not in standby mode. (However, even when the designated station is busy, if it is set
for Group hunting, the call is further transferred to the next designated station.)
• The station set for Group hunting is called as a representative or its associated member station of the group.
2-137
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
Programming or erasure can be performed at your telephone.
Function designation
number
[Programming]
+
4
5
Function designation
number
[Erasure]
+
4
5
Transfer destination
station number
+
X
X
+
(Confirmation tone)
The originally called
(your) telephone number
+
Y
Y
+
(Confirmation tone)
[Setting example] Calls can be transferred to designated stations in a cyclical manner.
Call received
Group hunting
No. 62
Group hunting
No. 63
Group hunting
No. 64
No. 65
Group hunting
Notes
• The telephone to which a call is to be transferred via multi interface unit or C/O line interface unit cannot
be programmed as a transfer destination station.
• The programmed contents set by dialing operation are automatically saved into the C/O line interface
unit at midnight every day. If the C/O line interface unit is turned off before completion of save, the state
returns to the contents that were programmed before power-off.
2-138
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
2.3.2. Absence transfer
When no response is made to a call to the telephone set for Absence transfer for a set period of time, the call
is automatically transferred to another designated station or telephone.
Calls received during conversations can be transferred. (Refer to p. 2-15.)
The station to which a Absence transfer is to be transferred can be set either by a dialing operation (see below)
or using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-99.)
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to enable or disable the Absence transfer or to set a calling duration.
(Refer to p. 5-97.)
The station to which a call is to be transferred cannot be designated unless Absence transfer function is
enabled.
Call tone
Call
No. 62
A call is automatically
transferred to another
designated station after
a set period of time
No. 11
6
2
Call tone
The designated transfer
destination station
No. 63
Notes
Calls are not transferred under the following conditions,
• The designated station is set for Call forwarding.
• The designated station is not in standby mode
• The station set for Absence transfer is called as a representative or its associated member station of the
group.
Programming or erasure can be performed at your telephone.
Function designation
number
[Programming]
+
4
4
Transfer destination
station number
+
X
X
+
(Confirmation tone)
Function designation The originally called
number
(your) telephone number
[Erasure]
+
4
4
+
Y
Y
+
(Confirmation tone)
Notes
• The telephone to which a call is to be transferred via multi interface unit or C/O line interface unit
cannot be programmed as a transfer destination station.
• The programmed contents set by dialing operation are automatically saved into the C/O line interface
unit at midnight every day. If the C/O line interface unit is turned off before completion of save, the state
returns to the contents that were programmed before power-off.
2-139
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
2.3.3. Call forwarding
Calls to telephones set for Call forwarding are automatically transferred to another designated station or
telephone without sounding a call tone.
Two different modes are available: one is Call forwarding, in which calls are manually rerouted to the selected
station, and the other is Time-based Call forwarding, which transfers calls only when the preset time is reached.
This Call forwarding function also applies to the call transfer (p. 2-15) performed during conversations.
The telephone to which a Call forwarding is to be transferred can be set either by dialing operation (see below
and p. 2-141) or using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-99.)
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to enable or disable the Call forwarding function or to set the transfer
start/end time. (Refer to p. 5-97.)
The telephone to which a call is to be transferred cannot be designated unless the Call forwarding function is
enabled.
Note
Calls are not transferred if the telephone set for Call forwarding is called as an associated member station of
the group.
[Calls to stations manually set for Call forwarding]
Calls to the telephone manually set for Call
forwarding are automatically transferred to
the designated station without sounding a
call tone.
6
No. 61
No. 62
(The originally called
station, which has been
set to the Call forwarding mode)
2
Call tone
No. 63
(The designated transfer destination station)
Programming can be performed at your telephone (Call forwarding telephone) or the transfer destination
station, while erasure at your telephone.
Function designation
number
[Programming at your telephone]
+
4
1
Transfer destination
station number
+
X
X
+
(Confirmation tone)
Function designation The originally called (your)
telephone number
number
[Programming at the transfer
destination station]
[Erasure]
(available only at your telephone)
+
4
2
+
Y
Y
+
(Confirmation tone)
Function designation The originally called (your)
telephone number
number
+
4
1
+
Y
Y
+
(Confirmation tone)
Notes
• The telephone to which a call is to be transferred via multi interface unit or C/O line interface unit cannot
be programmed as a transfer destination station.
• The programmed contents by dialing operation are automatically saved into the C/O line interface unit at
midnight every day. If the C/O line interface unit is turned off before completion of save, the state returns
to the contents that were programmed before power-off.
2-140
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
[Calls to stations set for Time-based Call forwarding]
Step 1. When the preset transfer time is reached, the telephone enters the Time-based Call forwarding mode.
Step 2. Calls to stations (original telephone) are automatically transferred to the transfer destination station
without sounding a call tone.
Original telephone number
No. 62
No. 61
6
0:00
2
18:00
Transfer time
zone
16:00
Start time
Call tone
6:00
8:00
12:00
End time
Transfer destination station
No. 63
Programming or erasure can be performed at your station.
Function designated
number
[Programming]
+
4
3
Function designated
number
[Erasure]
+
4
3
Transfer destination
station number
+
X
X
+
(Confirmation tone)
The originally called (your)
telephone number
+
Y
Y
+
(Confirmation tone)
Notes
• The telephone to which a call is to be transferred via multi interface unit or C/O line interface unit
cannot be programmed as a transfer destination station.
• The programmed contents set by dialing operation are automatically saved into the C/O line interface
unit at midnight every day. If the C/O line interface unit is turned off before completion of save, the state
returns to the contents that were programmed before power-off.
2-141
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
2.4. Executive Priority (Only when the system is set to "Sequential Response" mode)
If a called station is busy, as indicated by a busy tone, performing Priority operation from a call telephone
transmits a short priority call tone, then forcibly terminates the current conversation, allowing the call to go
through. Access to priority call operation or refusal of priority calls can be set individually for each telephone
or station.
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to perform the setting. (Refer to p. 5-100.)
Note
The Executive priority calls cannot interrupt the stations connected to the N-8010EX/8400RS.
[Operation]
When Station A calls Station B, which is at that time
engaged in a conversation with Station C, press [9] key
at Station A.
A
Busy tone
During conversation
B
C
Interrupt conversation
A priority call tone is transmitted to both Stations B and
C, and the conversation is forcibly terminated, enabling
Station A to be connected to Station B.
Note
If a function to refuse priority calls has been assigned to
Station B being called, Station A cannot interrupt Station
B and the busy status remains unchanged.
A
B
9
Conversation terminated
C
2-142
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
3. PAGING FUNCTION AND OPERATION
3.1. Paging
Paging stations are preprogrammed.
Paging durations can be limited by preprogramming the time limit (between 10 and 990 seconds in 10-second
units) for each C/O line interface unit.
Note
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to enable or disable the paging operation and to set the paging
duration. (Refer to p. 5-98, 5-100.)
3.1.1. Zone paging
Paging calls can be made to one of the pre-programmed zones.
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set the paging zones. (Refer to p. 5-121.)
Step 1. Lift the handset, then press the [ ][8] keys, followed by the desired paging zone number (1 − 192).
A paging tone is transmitted to the selected zone.
Note
Enter a zone number with the digit length (1 − 3 digits) set by way of the N-8000 Setting Software.
Step 2. Page with the handset.
If the system's paging response mode has been set for Zone number designation response (refer to p.
2-32), announce the response zone number to the paged party in the paging message.
Step 3. Replace the handset.
The paging is completed.
[Example paging to the zone 23]
Zone 1
1
Amplifier
Speakers
Zone 23
(Zone number with 3-digit length)
2
3
8
0
2
3
No. 1001
No. 1002
No. 1003
No. 1004
Zone 192
Speaker
Amplifier
No. 6000
2-143
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
3.1.2. Selectable paging
Paging calls can be made to up to 50 preprogrammed zones.
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set the paging zones. (Refer to p. 5-121.)
Step 1. Lift the handset, then press the [ ][8][ ] keys, followed by the desired paging zone number (1 − 192).
Note
Enter a zone number with the digit length (1 − 3 digits) set with the N-8000 Setting Software.
Step 2. To select the zone numbers consecutively, press the [
] key.
Step 3. To terminate the zone selection, press the [#] key following the zone number.
A paging tone is sounded in the selected zone(s).
Step 4. Page with the handset.
Note
If the system's paging response mode has been set for Zone number designation response (refer to
p. 2-32.), announce the response zone number (any one of the paged zones) in the paging message.
Step 5. Replace the handset.
The paging is completed.
[Example paging to the zone 1, 23, and 105.]
Zone 1
1~3
Amplifier
Speakers
Zone 23
(Zone number with 3-digit length)
8
4
0
0
1
0
2
3
1
0
5
No. 1000
No. 1002
No. 1003
No. 1004
Zone 105
Speaker
5
Amplifier
No. 2000
2-144
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
3.1.3. All-call paging
Paging calls can be made simultaneously to all of the pre-programmed zones.
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set the paging zones. (Refer to p. 5-121.)
Step 1. Lift the handset, then press the [ ][8] keys, followed by the paging zone number 0 (for all-call paging).
A paging tone is transmitted to all zones.
Note
Enter a zone number with the same digit length (1 − 3 digits) set with the N-8000 Setting Software.
Step 2. Page with the handset.
Note
If the system's paging response mode has been for Zone number designation response (refer to p.
2-32), notify the paged party to respond to [0] in the paging message.
Step 3. Replace the handset to terminate the paging.
Zone 1
1
Amplifier
Speakers
(Zone number with 3-digit length)
8
0
0
0
2
3
Zone 192
Speaker
Amplifier
No. 100
2-145
3.1.4. Emergency paging
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
This function terminates all conversations, paging calls and other functions currently in progress throughout the
system, and simultaneously makes a paging call to all of the pre-programmed zones.
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set the paging zones. (Refer to p. 5-121.)
Step 1. Lift the handset, then press the [ ] key four times.
All functions currently in operation are terminated, transmitting a paging pre-announcement tone to all
zones.
Step 2. Page with the handset.
Note
If the system's paging response mode has been set for Zone number designation response (refer to p.
2-32), notify the paged party to respond to [ ] in the paging message.
Step 3. Replace the handset to terminate the paging.
Note
Functions terminated by Emergency paging are not restored, even when the Emergency Page is
completed.
Zone 1
1
Amplifier
Speakers
2
Zone 192
3
Speaker
Amplifier
No. 100
2-146
3.1.5. Paging priority
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
[Emergency paging]
Emergency paging takes precedence over conversations, paging calls and all other functions. Initiating
Emergency paging terminates all other functions currently in operation, and these functions are not restored
even when the page is completed. Further, all other functions are disabled until the Emergency paging is
completed.
[All-call paging, zone paging and selectable paging priorities]
The all-call paging has the highest priority, while the zone paging and selectable paging are the same in priority
level.
• Initiating the all-call paging during the zone or selectable paging terminates the zone or selectable paging,
allowing the all-call paging to go through.
• Initiating another paging of the same priority during a paging causes the later paging to be held busy when
the paged station or in-use PA paging output overlaps.
[All paging function priorities]
Priorities are assigned in the following order.
• Emergency paging
• Message paging (Refer to p. 2-76.)
• External input broadcast (when priority is enabled) (Refer to p. 2-181.)
• All-call paging
• Zone paging and selectable paging
Note
For more information, read "Priorities" on p. 2-177.
3.2. Receiving Paging Calls (only Emergency pagings can be received)
If a telephone connected to the N-8000AL Telephone Interface Unit receives an Emergency paging call, the call
bell of that telephone rings.
The call bell is different from a normal call tone. (Refer to the List of Signal Tones on p. 2-193 to confirm.)
Lift the telephone handset to hear the paging content with the handset.
2-147
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
4. other FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
4.1. Scan Monitor
The telephone can scan arbitrary stations for auditory monitoring.
The station to be scan-monitored must be preprogrammed into a monitor group or can be selected each time
by designating the station number.
The stations to be monitored are switched at specified time intervals in preprogrammed sequence or in order
of being selected .
Up to 16 stations can be programmed to the same monitor group.
Up to 4 station groups (up to 64 stations) can be monitored in sequence from a single telephone.
Up to 16 stations can be selected by key operation.
• Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set a monitor group, scan monitor duration, and the conditions of
the stations to be monitored. (Refer to p. 5-69, 5-84.)
• Stations in use or in busy state are skipped and not monitored. The RS-140 Switch Panel set to Privacy mode
is also skipped.
Manual scan
0 : Stop/Restart
Monitor group number
: Advances the scan.
2
: Moves the scan back.
X
Station number
2
Y
Y
or
Station number
Y
Replace the handset: Scan monitor ends.
Y
Monitor scan
No. 330
No. 331
No. 332
No. 339
Scan monitor group or stations selected by key operation
The station to be scan-monitored is preset to one of the following display modes using the N-8000 Setting
Software:
[Display OFF]
The station remains in standby mode (status indicator unlit) even while being scan-monitored.
[Display ON]
The status indicator remains lit while the station is being scan-monitored.
[Display & Monitor Tone]
A start tone (key-touch tone) sounds when scan monitoring begins and the status indicator remains lit during
monitoring.
Note
In the case of the RS-140/180/480, the status indicator does not light even if set to "Display ON" mode.
2-148
[Operation]
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
Step 1. Automatic Scan
1-1. When scan-monitoring the preprogrammed stations:
Press the [ ] and [2] keys, then monitor group number (1 − 4), followed by the [#] key.
When monitoring two or more groups, dial the group numbers consecutively.
1-2. When scan-monitoring by designating the station numbers:
Press the [ ], [2], [ ] keys, then the station number.
To select the station number consecutively, press the [ ] key.
To terminate the station selection, press the [#] key following the station number.
Scan monitoring is started and cycles through the station groups in preprogrammed sequence and at
specified time intervals until its operation is manually stopped.
Step 2. Manual Scan
2-1. Stopping and restarting automatic scan
To continuously monitor a specified station, press the [0] key when that station is displayed to stop
automatic scan operation. Pressing the [0] key again restores automatic scan operation.
2-2. Advancing a scan
Pressing the [#] key advances the scan by one station.
2-3. Moving back a scan
Pressing the [ ] key moves the scan back one station.
Step 3. Scan Monitor end
To end Scan monitor, replace the handset.
2-149
4.2. ‌External Equipment Control
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
(only when the N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF/8050DS/8540DS/8640DS/8650DS is used)
External equipment can be controlled by making the Multi-Interface Unit's, Direct Select Unit's, or Audio
Interface Unit’s contact output designated by telephone operation provide a one-shot make contact or make/
break contact, or by making the designated door station's contact output provide a one-shot make contact.
For example, remote door lock control can be performed using the one-shot make output, and indication boards
can be controlled using the make/break output.
Note
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set the one-shot make duration, operation number digits, operation
numbers, and the telephones allowed to control external equipment. (Refer to p. 5-35, 5-43, 5-49 , 5-62, 5-100,
5-106, 5-110, 5-114 , 5-117.)
[Door remote control example using one-shot make output control]
Data receiving device
Door lock control
[Hospital waiting status indication board example using the make/break output]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
[One-shot make output operation]
Press [ ][3][0] keys, then the access number for the contact corresponding to the external equipment to be
controlled.
Function designation number
+
Contact access No. (2 – 4 digits)
3 + 0 + X +
+
X
2-150
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
[Make output operation]
Press [ ][3][1] keys, then the access number for the contact corresponding to the external equipment to be
controlled.
Function designation number
+
Contact access No. (2 – 4 digits)
3 + 1 + X +
+
X
[Break output operation]
Press [ ][3][2] keys, then the access number for the contact corresponding to the external equipment to be
controlled.
Function designation number
+
Contact access No. (2 – 4 digits)
3 + 2 + X +
+
X
[Door station one-shot make output operation (When the N-8050DS/8540DS is used)]
Press [ ][3][3] keys, then the door station number corresponding to the door station to be controlled.
Function designation number Door station No. (2 – 6 digits)
3
3
X
X
2-151
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
[Door station one-shot make output operation (when the N-8640DS/8650DS is used)]
The N-8640DS/8650DS has 5 contact outputs. Function designation number differs depending on the contact
output to be controlled.
Press the function designation number corresponding to the contact output, followed by the door station number
to be controlled.
Function designation number
Door station No. (2 – 6 digits)
To control the contact output 1
+
3 + 3 + X +
+
X
To control the contact output 2
+
3 + 4 + X +
+
X
To control the contact output 3
+
3 + 5 + X +
+
X
To control the contact output 4
+
3 + 6 + X +
+
X
To control the contact output 5
+
3 + 7 + X +
+
X
2-152
4.3. ‌Door Remote Control‌
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
(only when the N-8050DS/8540DS/8640DS/8650DS/8000MI/8000DI/8000AF is used)
N-8050DS/8540DS/8640DS/8650DS's contact outputs can be shorted for a set period of time by the dial operation
at the telephone engaged in conversation with the N-8050DS Door Station or N-8540DS/8640DS/8650DS IP
Door Station of which "Door station contact output" item is set to "Door remote control."
Similarly, the Multi interface unit's, Direct select unit's, or Audio interface unit’s contact outputs can be shorted
for a set period of time by the dial operation at the telephone engaged in conversation with a station.
For example, a door lock can be controlled by connecting the contact outputs to an electronic lock system.
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to perform settings for the Door station contact output, the one shot
make duration and the N-8000MI's/N-8000DI's contact output corresponding to each station. (Refer to p. 5-35,
5-37, 5-62, 5-64, 5-66, 5-80, 5-97, 5-100.)
[Operation (when using the contact outputs of the N-8050DS/8540DS/8000MI/8000DI/8000AF)]
Step 1. Hook-flash* during a two-party conversation.
The current conversation is placed on hold, transmitting a hold tone to the other party.
* Momentarily depressing the receiver switch.
Step 2. Press the [ ][0] keys.
Contact outputs of N-8050DS/8540DS in conversation or the telephone's corresponding N-8000MI's,
N-8000DI's, or N-8000AF’s contact outputs can be shorted for a set period of time.
For example, the corresponding door lock can be released if contact outputs are connected to an
electronic lock system.
Step 3. A confirmation tone sounds, and the original conversation is restored.
[Example of N-8050DS/8540DS operation]
Door lock
control
Hook-flash
0
Contact output
N-8050DS/8540DS
[Example of N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF operation]
N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF
Door lock
control
Hook-flash
Contact output
0
2-153
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
[Operation (when using the contact outputs of the N-8640DS/8650DS)]
The N-8640DS/8650DS has 5 contact outputs. The contact output to be controlled can be selected through
key operation.
Step 1. Hook-flash* during a two-party conversation.
The current conversation is placed on hold, transmitting a hold tone to the other party.
* Momentarily depressing the receiver switch.
Step 2. Press the [ ] key, followed by the designation number (0 − 4) for the contact output of the IP door
station to be controlled.
Designation number for the contact output 1 (open collector) : 0
Designation number for the contact output 2 (open collector) : 1
Designation number for the contact output 3 (open collector) : 2
Designation number for the contact output 4 (open collector) : 3
Designation number for the contact output 5 (relay) :
4
Contact outputs of N-8640DS/8650DS in conversation can be shorted for a set period of time.
For example, the corresponding door lock can be released if contact outputs are connected to an
electronic lock system.
Step 3. A confirmation tone sounds, and the original conversation is restored.
[Example of N-8640DS/8650DS operation]
Door lock
control
Hook-flash
X
X
Contact output
N-8640DS/8650DS
: Designation number for the contact output
Contact output 1
0
Contact output 3
2
Contact output 2
Contact output 4
Contact output 5
1
3
4
2-154
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
4.4. ‌IP Door Station's Speaker Output Switching Control
(only when the N-8640DS/8650DS is used)
The audio output destination of the N-8640DS/8650DS IP door station engaged in conversations with its
telephone can be switched to either the internal speaker or the speaker connected to the external speaker
terminal by the telephone's dial operation.
The switched audio output destination reverts to the speaker designated on the N-8000 Setting Software when
the conversations terminate or when interrupted by paging with higher priority.
Notes
• If the called IP door station does not have this function, an error tone sounds at the telephone that made a dial
operation, and the state returns to the conversation mode.
• The internal and external speakers cannot be used simultaneously.
4.4.1. When switching to the external speaker
Speaker output
switching control
Hook-flash
N-8640DS/8650DS
1
Operate the telephone during conversation.
4.4.2. When switching to the internal speaker
Speaker output
switching control
Hook-flash
N-8640DS/8650DS
0
Operate the telephone during conversation.
2-155
4.5. Access Code Authentication
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
Usage of the telephone can be restricted when the access code authentication is enabled.
Entering a preprogrammed 4-digit access code number before each function key number permits the telephone
to be used as usual. Incorrect access code number entry will cause an access error.
Following are restricted functions: Functions to activate at the telephone such as calls, paging calls and scan
monitoring, and functions to control through dial operations such as external equipment control and setting
change for the original telephone.
Call receiving can be executed without the need for access code number entry.
Emergency paging call activation function, which has higher priority, can be used without entering an access
code number.
Operation not in standby mode such as manual call transfer during conversation can be executed without
entering an access code number.
Tip: Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software for access code authentication and access code number
setting. (See p. 5-100)
4.5.1. Operation
The steps below show an example of making station call when access code authentication is enabled.
Step 1. Press the access code number
(4-digit number).
(Access code number: Example when the password is 1234)
1
Step 2. Press the station number to call.
2
3
4
(Example when station number is 15)
1
5
2-156
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
5. Telephone Operation table
Function
Call/Response
Conversation
Call transfer
Item
Call
Response
Handset conversation
Call transfer
Returning to the
original conversation
Automatic call transfer
Programming
at your station
Erasure at your station
Programming
at the designated station
Time-based
Programming
call forwarding Erasure
Absence
Programming
transfer
Erasure
Group
Programming
hunting
Erasure
Executive priority
Scan monitor
Start
Call
forwarding
Paging
Stop/Restart
Advancing Scan
Reverse Scan
End
Zone paging
Selectable paging
All-call paging
Emergency paging
Receiving emergency paging calls
One-shot make output
External
Make output
equipment
Break output
control
Door station one-shot
make output
Operation
Dial station No. [X][X] ··· [X]
Lift the handset.
Conversation can be made by lifting the handset.
Hook-flash during a conversation.
The other party is placed on hold.
Dial the third party's station number.
Conversation with the third party.
(Original conversation party is placed on hold).
Replace the handset.
Call transfer completion
Hook-flash during a conversation.
The other party is placed on hold.
Dial the third party's station number.
Conversation with the third party.
(The original conversation party is placed on hold).
Hook-flash again.
Return to the original conversation.
(The original conversation is restored).
Dial [ ] [4] [1] [the designated station No.] [ ] keys.
Dial [
Dial [
] [4] [1] [your station No.] [
] [4] [2] [your station No.] [
Remarks
Station No.: 2 – 6 digits
Station No: 2 – 6 digits
] keys.
] keys.
Dial [ ] [4] [3] [the designated station No.] [ ] keys.
Dial [ ] [4] [3] [your station No.] [ ] keys.
Dial [ ] [4] [4] [the designated station No.] [ ] keys.
Dial [ ] [4] [4] [your station No.] [ ] keys.
Dial [ ] [4] [5] [the designated station No.] [ ] keys.
Dial [ ] [4] [5] [your station No.] [ ] keys.
If a called station is busy, press the [9] key.
Dial [ ] [2] [Monitor group No.] [Monitor group No.] ···
[ ] keys.
or
Dial [ ] [2] [ ] [Monitored station No.] [ ]
[Monitored station No.] ··· [ ] keys.
Press [0] to stop. Press [0] again to restart.
Press [ ] key to advance the scan by one station.
Press [ ] key to move the scan back one station.
Replace the handset.
Dial [ ] [8] [Zone No.] keys.
Dial [ ] [8] [ ] [Zone No.] [ ] [Zone No.] ··· [Zone No.] [ ]
keys.
Dial [ ] [8] [0] keys.
Dial [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] keys.
Lift the handset.
Dial [ ] [3] [0] [contact access number] keys.
Dial [ ] [3] [1] [contact access number] keys.
Dial [ ] [3] [2] [contact access number] keys.
(When using the N-8050DS/8540DS)
Dial [ ] [3] [3] [Door station No.] keys.
(When using the N-8640DS/8650DS)
Dial [ ] [3] [Designation number for the contact output No.]
[Door station No.] keys.
Monitor group No.:
1–4
Monitored station No.:
2 – 6 digits
Dial during monitoring
Zone No.: 1 – 3 digits
Contact access
number: 2 – 4 digits
Designation number for
the contact output:
Contact output 1 = 3
Contact output 2 = 4
Contact output 3 = 5
Contact output 4 = 6
Contact output 5 = 7
2-157
Function
External
equipment
control
Item
Speaker output
switching control
Door remote
Access code authentication
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
N-8000AL TELEPHONE INTERFACE CONNECTED TELEPHONE
Operation
(When switching to the internal speaker)
Hook-flash during a conversation with the N-8640DS/8650DS,
then dial [ ] [ ] [0] keys.
(When switching to the external speaker)
Hook-flash during a conversation with the N-8640DS/8650DS,
then dial [ ] [ ] [1] keys.
(When using the N-8050DS/8540DS)
Hook-flash during a conversation with the N-8050DS/8540DS,
then dial [ ] [0] keys.
(When using the N-8640DS/8650DS)
Hook-flash during a conversation with the N-8640DS/8650DS,
then dial [ ] [Designation number for the contact output No.
keys.
Remarks
Designation number for
the contact output:
Contact output 1 = 0
Contact output 2 = 1
Contact output 3 = 2
Contact output 4 = 3
Contact output 5 = 4
Dial [Access code number] before performing key operation. Access code number:
4-digit number
2-158
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OPERATION FROM AN OUTSIDE LINE
OPERATION FROM AN OUTSIDE LINE
(only when the N-8000CO is used)
1. Calling a station
Direct-In Line and Direct-In Dialing functions allow the N-8000 system to receive calls from an outside line
telephone. The method used to call the station differs between the two.
1.1. Direct-In Line Calls
If the N-8000CO C/O Line Interface Unit is set for the Direct-In Line, up to four preprogrammed stations can be
simultaneously called.
Dial the N-8000CO's outside line number.
A call tone is sounded at the four preprogrammed stations.
If one of the four stations responds, the telephone call is put through to that station.
Note
If the called master station does not respond within 30 seconds, the call is disconnected from the line.
Call
Call tone
N-8000CO's outside line number
X
X
1.2. Direct-In Dialing Calls
If the N-8000CO C/O Line Interface Unit is set for Direct-In Dialing, a single station is designated and called.
Step 1. Lift the handset and dial the N-8000CO's outside line number.
The N-8000CO automatically responds to the call and a dial confirmation tone is transmitted to the
caller.
Step 2. After hearing the confirmation tone, dial the desired station number to call.
A call tone is sounded at the called station.
When the called party answers, conversation can be started.
Notes
• If there is a pause of 5 seconds during dialing operation, this is regarded as an error, and the attempted
call is disconnected from the line.
• If the called master station does not respond within 30 seconds, the call is disconnected from the
line.
Call
N-8000CO's outside line number
X
X
Station number (2 – 6 digits)
(Dial confirmation tone)
+
Y
Call tone
Y
2-159
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
2. PAGING
OPERATION FROM AN OUTSIDE LINE
If the N-8000CO C/O Line Interface Unit is set to receive Direct-In Dialing calls as well operate paging calls,
N-8000 system paging can be initiated from the outside line telephone.
Also, a paging time limit can be set by programming a time limit (in 10 seconds units from 10 − 990 sec.) into
each N-8000CO unit.
Note
Use the N-8000 Setting Software to enable or disable Direct-In Dialing and paging, and set the paging time
limit. (Refer to p. 5-90.)
2.1. Zone Paging
Paging calls can be made to one of the pre-programmed zones.
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set the paging zones. (Refer to p. 5-121.)
Step 1. Lift the handset and dial the N-8000CO's outside line number.
The N-8000CO unit automatically responds to the call and a dial confirmation tone is transmitted to
the caller.
Step 2. After hearing the confirmation tone, press the [ ][8] keys, w then the zone number (1 − 192) to be
paged.
A paging tone is transmitted to the selected zone.
Note
Enter a zone number with the digit length (1 − 3 digits) set by way of the N-8000 Setting Software.
Step 3. Page with the handset.
Note
If the system's paging response mode has been set for Zone number designation response (refer to p.
2-32), announce the response zone number to the paged party in the paging message.
Step 4. Either replace the handset or press the [0][0][#] keys.
The paging is completed.
Notes
• A repeated busy tone is heard at paged stations if the handset is replaced to terminate paging.
• If paging is terminated by [0][0][#] key operation, the DTMF signal tones of these keys are heard at
paged stations.
2-160
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OPERATION FROM AN OUTSIDE LINE
[Example paging to the zone 23]
Zone 1
1, 2
Amplifier
Speakers
Zone 23
(Zone number with 3-digit length)
N-8000CO's outside line number
X (Dial confirmation tone)
X
8
0
2
No. 1002
No. 1003
No. 1004
Zone 192
3
Speaker
3
4
No. 1001
Amplifier
No. 6000
or
0
0
2-161
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
2.2. Selectable Paging
OPERATION FROM AN OUTSIDE LINE
Paging calls can be made to up to 50 preprogrammed zones.
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set the paging zones. (Refer to p. 5-121.)
Step 1. Lift the handset and dial the N-8000CO's outside line number.
The N-8000CO unit automatically responds to the call and a dial confirmation tone is transmitted to
the caller.
Step 2. After hearing the confirmation tone, press the [ ][8] keys, then [ ] key, followed by the desired paging
zone number (1 − 192).
Note
Enter a zone number with the digit length (1 − 3 digits) set by way of the N-8000 Setting Software.
Step 3. To select the zone numbers consecutively, press the [ ] key.
Step 4. To terminate the zone selection, press the [#] key following the zone number.
A paging tone is sounded in the selected zone(s).
Step 5. Page with the handset.
Note
If the system's paging response mode has been set for Zone number designation response (refer to p.
2-32.), announce the response zone number (any one of the paged zones) to the paged party in the
paging message.
Step 6. Either replace the handset or press the [0][0][#] keys.
The paging is completed.
Notes
• A repeated busy tone is heard at paged stations if the handset is replaced to terminate paging.
• If paging is terminated by [0][0][#] key operation, the DTMF signal tones of these keys are heard at
paged stations.
2-162
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OPERATION FROM AN OUTSIDE LINE
[Example paging to the zone 1, 23, and 105.]
Zone 1
1~ 4
Speakers
Amplifier
Zone 23
(Zone number with 3-digit length)
N-8000CO's outside line number
X
X
(Dial confirmation tone)
No. 1000
No. 1002
No. 1003
No. 1004
8
0
0
1
0
2
3
1
0
5
5
6
Zone 105
Speaker
Amplifier
No. 2000
or
0
0
2-163
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OPERATION FROM AN OUTSIDE LINE
2.3. All-Call Paging
Paging calls can be made simultaneously to all of the pre-programmed zones.
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set the paging zones. (Refer to p. 5-121.)
Step 1. Lift the handset and dial the N-8000CO's outside line number.
The N-8000CO unit automatically responds to the call and a dial confirmation tone is transmitted to
the caller.
Step 2. After hearing the confirmation tone, press the [ ][8] keys, followed by the paging zone number 0 (for
all-call paging).
A paging tone is transmitted to all zones.
Note
Enter a zone number with the digit length (1 − 3 digits) set with the N-8000 Setting Software.
Step 3. Page with the handset.
Note
If the system's paging response mode has been set for Zone number designation response (refer to p.
2-32), notify the paged party to respond to [0] in the paging message.
Step 4. Either replace the handset or press the [0][0][#] keys.
The paging is completed.
Notes
• A repeated busy tone is heard at paged stations if the handset is replaced to terminate paging.
• If paging is terminated by [0][0][#] key operation, the DTMF signal tones of these keys are heard at
paged stations.
Zone 1
1, 2
Amplifier
Speakers
(Zone number with 3-digit length)
N-8000CO's outside line number
X (Dial confirmation tone)
X
8
0
0
0
3
4
Zone 192
Speaker
Amplifier
No. 100
or
0
0
2-164
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
3. other FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OPERATION FROM AN OUTSIDE LINE
3.1. Scan Monitor
If the N-8000CO C/O Line Interface Unit is set to allow scan monitor operation, the outside line telephone can
scan arbitrary stations for auditory monitoring. It is also possible to set an outside line control password to be
used when dialing from the outside line telephone.
The station to be scan-monitored must be preprogrammed into a monitor group or can be selected each time
by designating the station number.
The stations to be monitored are switched at specified time intervals in preprogrammed sequence or in order
of being selected .
It is not possible to stop or restart the scan-monitor operation during monitoring of the stations from the outside
line telephone.
Up to 16 stations can be programmed to the same monitor group.
Up to 4 station groups (up to 64 stations) can be monitored in sequence from a single outside line telephone.
Up to 16 stations can be selected by key operation.
• Use the N-8000 Setting Software to enable or disable the scan monitor, and setup the outside line control
password, monitor groups and scanning time. (Refer to p. 5-92.)
• If the outside line connection timeout is set to be shorter than the scan monitor operation time, the outside line
connection timeout takes precedence and is disconnected from the line before the set scan monitor time ends.
N-8000CO's outside line number
X
X
Monitor Group No.
Outside Line Control Password
(Dial confirmation tone) +
2 + Y
Y
Y
Y
+
Z
or
N-8000CO's outside line number
X
X
Outside Line Control Password
(Dial confirmation tone) +
2 + Y
Y
Y
Y
+
Monitored station No. Monitored station No.
+
+
Z
Z
Monitor scan
No. 330
No. 331
No. 332
No. 339
Scan monitor group or stations selected by key operation
The station to be scan-monitored is preset to one of the following display modes using the N-8000 Setting
Software:
[Display OFF]
The station remains in standby mode (status indicator unlit) even while being scan-monitored.
[Display ON]
The status indicator remains lit while the station is being scan-monitored.
[Display & Monitor Tone]
A
start tone (key-touch tone) sounds when scan monitoring begins and the status indicator remains lit
2-165
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OPERATION FROM AN OUTSIDE LINE
during monitoring.
Note
In the case of the RS-140/180/480, the status indicator does not light even if set to "Display ON" mode.
[Operation]
Step 1. Lift the handset and dial the N-8000CO's outside line number.
The N-8000CO unit automatically responds to the call and a dial confirmation tone is transmitted to
the caller.
Step 2. Automatic Scan
2-1. When scan-monitoring the preprogrammed stations:
After hearing the dial confirmation tone, press the [ ][2][Outside Line Control Password* (4 digits)]
[Monitor Group No. (1 − 4)][#] keys in sequence.
* The outside line control password is required only when it has been set.
Note: When monitoring two or more groups, press the group numbers consecutively.
2-2. When scan-monitoring by designating the station numbers:
After hearing the dial confirmation tone, press the [ ][2][Outside Line Control Password* (4 digits)]
[ ][Station No.] keys in sequence.
To select the station numbers consecutively, press the [ ] key.
To terminate the station selection, press the [#] key.
* The outside line control password is required only when it has been set.
• Scan monitoring starts and cycles through the station groups in preprogrammed sequence or in order
of being selected at specified time intervals until its operation is manually stopped (Step 3).
• When the station to be monitored is switched to another, a monitor start tone (key touch tone) is heard
at the outside line telephone.
• When the station to be monitored is busy, a 1-sec. busy tone is transmitted to the outside line
telephone.
Step 3. Either replace the handset or press the [0][0][#] keys.
The scan monitor ends.
or
0
0
2-166
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OPERATION FROM AN OUTSIDE LINE
3.2. Time Signal (only when the N-8000AF is used)
Change, suspension, confirmation, reservation, and reservation confirmation of the time signal schedule can
be made from the outside line telephone when the Direct-In Dialing function is set to the N-8000CO unit.
It is also possible to set an outside line control password to be used when dialing from the outside line telephone.
Use the N-8000 Setting Software to enable or disable the direct-in line function, and setup the outside line control
password. (Refer to p. 5-26, 5-90.)
3.2.1. Changing time signal schedules
The System Time Signal schedule can be changed through operation from the outside line telephone.
[Operation]
Step 1. Lift the handset and dial the N-8000CO's outside line number.
The N-8000CO unit automatically responds to the call and a dial confirmation tone is transmitted to
the caller.
Step 2. After hearing the dial confirmation tone, press the [ ][9][0][Outside Line Control Password* (4 digits)]
[Schedule No. (01-16)] keys in sequence.
A confirmation tone can be heard at the calling party, and the time signal schedule changes to the
designated one.
* The outside line control password is required only when it has been set.
Outside line
control password
N-8000CO's outside line number
X
(Dial
X confirmation tone)
9
0
Y
Y
Y
Y
Schedule No.
Z
Z
(Confirmation tone)
Tip
Following that, the calling party can confirm the changed time signal schedule.
Perform Step 2 in "Time signal schedule confirmation" (refer to p. 2-169) within 10 seconds after a
confirmation tone is heard.
The line is cut off if incorrect dialing operation is performed or there is a pause of 10 seconds during
dialing operation.
Step 3. Either replace the handset or press the [0][0][#] keys.
or
0
0
Note
The contents set through operation from the outside line telephone are saved to the N-8000AF unit once a day
(at 00:00 AM).
If the N-8000AF is turned off before the contents are saved, the time signal schedule returns to the setting
contents that were programmed before power-off.
2-167
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OPERATION FROM AN OUTSIDE LINE
3.2.2. Suspending time signal schedules
The System Time Signal schedule can be suspended through operation from the outside line telephone.
To restart the suspended schedules, change the time signal schedule. (Refer to p. 2-167.)
[Operation]
Step 1. Lift the handset and dial the N-8000CO's outside line number.
The N-8000CO unit automatically responds to the call and a dial confirmation tone is transmitted to
the caller.
Step 2. After hearing the dial confirmation tone, press the [ ][9][0][Outside Line Control Password* (4 digits)]
[0][0] keys in sequence.
A confirmation tone can be heard at the calling party, and the time signal schedule changes to the
designated one.
* The outside line control password is required only when it has been set.
N-8000CO's
outside line number
X
X
(Dial
confirmation tone)
Outside line
control password
9
0
Y
Y
Y
Y
0
0
(Confirmation tone)
Tip
Following that, the calling party can confirm the changed time signal schedule.
Perform Step 2 in "Time signal schedule confirmation" (refer to p. 2-169) within 10 seconds after a
confirmation tone is heard.
The line is cut off if incorrect dialing operation is performed or there is a pause of 10 seconds during
dialing operation.
Step 3. Either replace the handset or press the [0][0][#] keys.
or
0
0
Note
The contents set through operation from the outside line telephone are saved to the N-8000AF unit once a day
(at 00:00 AM).
If the N-8000AF is turned off before the contents are saved, the time signal schedule returns to the setting
contents that were programmed before power-off.
2-168
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OPERATION FROM AN OUTSIDE LINE
3.2.3. Time signal schedule confirmation
The System Time Signal schedule can be confirmed through operation from the outside line telephone.
With an audible tone through the telephone, its schedule can be confirmed by operations from the outside line
telephone.
[Operation]
Step 1. Lift the handset and dial the N-8000CO's outside line number.
The N-8000CO unit automatically responds to the call and a dial confirmation tone is transmitted to
the caller.
Step 2. After hearing the dial confirmation tone, press the [ ][9][2][Outside Line Control Password*1 (4 digits)]
keys in sequence.
The calling party can hear a schedule tone*2, followed by a confirmation tone (ding-dong).
But only a confirmation tone can be heard during time signal schedule suspension.
*1 The outside line control password is required only when it has been set.
*2A beep is used to indicate the figure "1" and a long beep to indicate the figure "5." All schedule
numbers are indicated using beep tones.
(Example)
In the case of Schedule No. 3: beep-beep-beep
In the case of Schedule No. 5: A long beep
In the case of Schedule No. 7: A long beep-beep-beep
In the case of Schedule No. 10: A long beep-a long beep
N-8000CO's
outside line number
X
X
(Dial
confirmation tone)
Outside line
control password
9
2
Y
Y
Y
Y
(schedule tone) (Confirmation tone)
Step 3. Either replace the handset or press the [0][0][#] keys.
or
0
0
2-169
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OPERATION FROM AN OUTSIDE LINE
3.2.4. Reserving the time signal schedule change
The System Time Signal schedule can be reserved through operation from the outside line telephone.
To set the reserved day, designate the day from one (next day) to 9 days later by number (1 − 9) after performing
the reservation operation.
The reserved schedule is executed at 00:00 AM on the reserved day.
[Operation]
Step 1. Lift the handset and dial the N-8000CO's outside line number.
The N-8000CO unit automatically responds to the call and a dial confirmation tone is transmitted to
the caller.
Step 2. After hearing the dial confirmation tone, press the [ ][9][5][Outside Line Control Password* (4 digits)]
[Reserved day (1 − 9)][Schedule No. (01 − 16)] keys in sequence.
The calling party can hear a confirmation tone, and the changed time signal schedule is reserved.
* The outside line control password is required only when it has been set.
Outside line
control password
N-8000CO's
outside line number
X
X
(Dial
confirmation tone)
9
5
Y
Y
Y
Reserved day
Z
Y
Schedule No.
A
A
(Confirmation tone)
Tip
Following that, the calling party can confirm the changed time signal schedule.
Perform Step 2 in "Confirming the reserved time signal schedule" (refer to p. 2-172) within 10 seconds
after a confirmation tone is heard.
The line is cut off if incorrect dialing operation is performed or there is a pause of 10 seconds during
dialing operation.
Step 3. Either replace the handset or press the [0][0][#] keys.
or
0
0
Note
The contents set through operation from the outside line telephone are saved to the N-8000AF unit once a day
(at 00:00 AM).
If the N-8000AF is turned off before the contents are saved, the time signal schedule returns to the setting
contents that were programmed before power-off.
2-170
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OPERATION FROM AN OUTSIDE LINE
3.2.5. Cancelling the reserved time signal schedule
The System Time Signal schedule reservation can be cancelled through operation from the outside line
telephone.
[Operation]
Step 1. Lift the handset and dial the N-8000CO's outside line number.
The N-8000CO unit automatically responds to the call and a dial confirmation tone is transmitted to
the caller.
Step 2. After hearing the dial confirmation tone, press the [ ][9][5][Outside Line Control Password* (4 digits)]
[ ] keys in sequence.
The calling party can hear a confirmation tone, and the reserved time signal schedule is cancelled.
* The outside line control password is required only when it has been set.
N-8000CO's
outside line number
X
X
(Dial
confirmation tone)
Outside line
control password
9
5
Y
Y
Y
Y
(Confirmation tone)
Tip
Following that, the calling party can confirm the changed time signal schedule.
Perform Step 2 in "Confirming the reserved time signal schedule" (refer to p. 2-172) within 10 seconds
after a confirmation tone is heard.
The line is cut off if incorrect dialing operation is performed or there is a pause of 10 seconds during
dialing operation.
Step 3. Either replace the handset or press the [0][0][#] keys.
or
0
0
Note
The contents set through operation from the outside line telephone are saved to the N-8000AF unit once a day
(at 00:00 AM).
If the N-8000AF is turned off before the contents are saved, the time signal schedule returns to the setting
contents that were programmed before power-off.
2-171
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OPERATION FROM AN OUTSIDE LINE
3.2.6. Confirming the reserved time signal schedule
The System Time Signal schedule reservation can be confirmed through operation from the outside line
telephone.
With an audible tone through the outside line telephone, its schedule reservation can be confirmed by operations
from the outside line telephone.
[Operation]
Step 1. Lift the handset and dial the N-8000CO's outside line number.
The N-8000CO unit automatically responds to the call and a dial confirmation tone is transmitted to
the caller.
Step 2. After hearing the dial confirmation tone, press the [ ][9][6][Outside Line Control Password*1 (4 digits)]
keys in sequence.
The calling party can hear a tone*2 indicating the reserved day and schedule, followed by a confirmation
tone (ding-dong).
But only a confirmation tone can be heard during time signal schedule suspension.
*1 The outside line control password is required only when it has been set.
*2 A beep is used to indicate the figure "1" and a long beep to indicate the figure "5." Remaining days
until the reserved day and all schedule numbers are indicated using beep tones. A short beep tone
sounds 3 times consecutively between the beep tones indicating the remaining days and schedule
number.
(Example)
In the case of remaining days until the reserved day is 1 and Schedule No. 3:
Beep-pause-a short beep-a short beep-a short beep-pause-beep-beep-beep
In the case of remaining days until the reserved day is 5 and Schedule No. 6:
A
long beep-pause-a short beep-a short beep-a short beep-pause-a long beep-beep
In the case of remaining days until the reserved day is 0 and Schedule No. 1:
A short beep-a short beep-a short beep-pause-beep
N-8000CO's
outside line number
X
X
(Dial
confirmation tone)
Outside line
control password
9
6
Y
Y
Y
Y
(Confirmation tone)
Step 3. Either replace the handset or press the [0][0][#] keys.
or
0
0
Note
The contents set through operation from the outside line telephone are saved to the N-8000AF unit once a day
(at 00:00 AM).
If the N-8000AF is turned off before the contents are saved, the time signal schedule returns to the setting
contents that were programmed before power-off.
2-172
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OPERATION FROM AN OUTSIDE LINE
3.3. ‌External Equipment Control
(only when the N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF/8050DS/8540DS/8640DS/8650DS is used)
If the N-8000CO C/O Line Interface Unit is set to allow external equipment control operation, the outside line
telephone can control external equipment by making the designated Multi-Interface unit, Direct Select unit, or
Audio Interface unit provide one-shot make contact or make/break contact at its contact output, or by making
the designated door station provide one-shot make contact at its contact output.
For example, remote door lock control can be performed using the one-shot make output, and indication boards
can be controlled using the make/break output.
It is also possible to set the outside line control password used when operating from the outside line telephone.
Notes
• Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set the one-shot make duration, operation number digits,
operation numbers, the stations allowed to control external equipment, and the outside line control password.
(Refer to p. 5-27, 5-35, 5-43, 5-49 , 5-62, 5-89, 5-106, 5-110, 5-114 , 5-117.)
• When performing external equipment control, be sure to complete dialing of all keys within 30 seconds,
otherwise the ongoing dialing operation will be forcibly disconnected from the line.
[Door remote control example using one-shot make output control]
Data receiving device
Door lock control
[Hospital waiting status indication board example using the make/break output]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
[One-shot make output operation]
First dial the N-8000CO interface's outside line number and confirm that a dial confirmation tone is heard, and
then dial [ ][3][0]+[4-digit outside line control password*]+[access number for the contact corresponding to
external equipment to be controlled].
* The outside line control password is required only when it has been set.
N-8000CO's
outside line number
X
X
Function designation number
(Dial
confirmation tone) +
+
Outside line
control password
3 + 0 + Y
Y
Y
Contact access No.
(2 – 4 digits)
Y + Z +
+
Z
2-173
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OPERATION FROM AN OUTSIDE LINE
[Make output operation]
First dial the N-8000CO interface's outside line number and confirm that a dial confirmation tone is heard, and
then dial [ ][3][1]+[4-digit outside line control password]+[access number for the contact corresponding to
external equipment to be controlled].
N-8000CO's
outside line number
X
X
Function designation number
(Dial
confirmation tone) +
+
Outside line
control password
3 + 1 + Y
Y
Y
Contact access No.
(2 – 4 digits)
Y + Z +
+
Z
Note
A confirmation tone (ding-dong) is sounded after operation acceptance. The line is automatically cut off after
the confirmation tone stops.
[Break output operation]
First dial the N-8000CO interface's outside line number and confirm that a dial confirmation tone is heard, and
then dial [ ][3][2]+[4-digit outside line control password]+[access number for the contact corresponding to
external equipment to be controlled].
N-8000CO's
outside line number
X
X
Function designation number
(Dial
confirmation tone) +
+
Outside line
control password
3 + 2 + Y
Y
Y
Contact access No.
(2 – 4 digits)
Y + Z +
+
Z
Note
A confirmation tone (ding-dong) is sounded after operation acceptance. The line is automatically cut off after
the confirmation tone stops.
[Door station one-shot make output operation (N-8050DS/8540DS is used.)]
First dial the N-8000CO interface's outside line number and confirm that a dial confirmation tone is heard, and
then dial [ ][3][3]+[4-digit outside line control password]+[door station number to be controlled].
N-8000CO's
outside line number
X
X
Function designation number
(Dial
confirmation tone) +
+
Outside line
control password
3 + 3 + Y
Y
Y
Door station No.
(2 – 6 digits)
Y + Z +
+
Z
Note
A confirmation tone (ding-dong) is sounded after operation acceptance. The line is automatically cut off after
the confirmation tone stops.
2-174
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OPERATION FROM AN OUTSIDE LINE
[Door station one-shot make output operation (N-8640DS/8650DS is used.)]
The N-8640DS/8650DS has 5 contact outputs. Function designation number differs depending on the contact
output to be controlled.
First dial the N-8000CO interface's outside line number and confirm that a dial confirmation tone is heard, and
then dial [Function designation number]+[4-digit outside line control password]+[door station number to be
controlled].
N-8000CO's
outside line number
X
Function designation number
(Dial
confirmation tone) +
+
3
+
A
To control the contact output 1
+
3
+
3
To control the contact output 2
+
3
+
4
To control the contact output 3
+
3
+
5
To control the contact output 4
+
3
+
6
To control the contact output 5
+
3
+
7
X
+
Outside line
control password
Y
Y
Y
Y + Z
Door station No.
(2 – 6 digits)
+
Z
Note
A confirmation tone (ding-dong) is sounded after operation acceptance. The line is automatically cut off after
the confirmation tone stops.
2-175
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OPERATION FROM AN OUTSIDE LINE
4. Outside line telephone Operation table
Function
Call
Paging
Item
Direct In Line
Direct-In Dialing
Zone paging
Selectable paging
Scan monitor
Time signal
External
equipment
control
All-call paging
Start
End
Changing time signal
schedules
Suspending time
signal schedules
Time signal schedule
confirmation
Schedule reservation
Reserved schedule
cancellation
Reserved schedule
confirmation
One-shot make output
Make output
Break output
Door station one-shot
make output
Operation
Dial [N-8000CO's outside line number] keys.
Dial [N-8000CO's outside line number] [station No.] keys.
Dial [N-8000CO's outside line number] [ ] [8] [Zone No.]
keys.
Dial [N-8000CO's outside line number] [ ] [8] [ ]
[Zone No.] [ ] ··· [Zone No.] [#] keys.
Dial [N-8000CO's outside line number] [ ] [8] [0] keys.
Dial [N-8000CO's outside line number] [ ] [2] [Outside line
control password] [Monitor group No.] [Monitor group No.] ···
[#] keys.
or
Dial [N-8000CO's outside line number] [ ] [2] [Outside line
control password] [ ] [Monitored station No.] [ ] [Monitored
station No.] [ ] ··· [#] keys.
Either replace the handset or press the [0][0][#] keys.
Dial [N-8000CO's outside line number] [ ] [9] [0] [Outside
line control password] [Schedule No.] keys.
Dial [N-8000CO's outside line number] [ ] [9] [0] [Outside
line control password] [0] [0] keys.
Dial [N-8000CO's outside line number] [ ] [9] [2] [Outside
line control password] keys.
Dial [N-8000CO's outside line number] [ ] [9] [5] [Outside
line control password] [Reserved day] [Schedule No.] keys.
Dial [N-8000CO's outside line number] [ ] [9] [5] [Outside
line control password] [ ] keys.
Dial [N-8000CO's outside line number] [ ] [9] [6] [Outside
line control password] keys.
Dial [N-8000CO's outside line number] [ ] [3] [0] [Outside
line control password] [contact access number] keys.
Dial [N-8000CO's outside line number] [ ] [3] [1] [Outside
line control password] [contact access number] keys.
Dial [N-8000CO's outside line number] [ ] [3] [2] [Outside
line control password] [contact access number] keys.
(When using the N-8050DS/8540DS)
Dial [N-8000CO's outside line number] [ ] [3] [3] [Outside
line control password] [Door station No.] keys.
(When using the N-8640DS/8650DS)
Dial [N-8000CO's outside line number] [ ] [3] [Designation
number for the contact output ] [Outside line control
password] [Door station No.] keys.
Remarks
Station No: 2 – 6 digits
Zone No.: 1 – 3 digits
Outside line control
password: 4 digits
(Only when it has been
set)
Monitor group No.:
1–4
Monitored station No.:
2 – 6 digits
Outside line control
password: 4 digits
(Only when it has been
set)
Reserved day: 1 – 9
Schedule No.: 01 – 16
Outside line control
password: 4 digits
(Only when it has been
set)
Contact access
number: 2 – 4 digits
Station No: 2 – 6 digits
Designation number for
the contact output :
Contact output 1 = 3
Contact output 2 = 4
Contact output 3 = 5
Contact output 4 = 6
Contact output 5 = 7
2-176
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OTHER FUNCTIONS (CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS)
OTHER FUNCTIONS
(CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS)
1. Priorities
There are two priorities: Call Priority and Speech path Priority.
1.1. Call Priority (available only when in "Selective Response" mode)
• This priority can only be used when the system is set for "Selective Response."
• When the Master Station simultaneously receives two or more calls, the call assigned the highest priority is
put at the head of the waiting queue.
• Lower priority calls or calls assigned the same priority but which have arrived later are placed in the busy
status waiting mode according to priority order. (Calls with the same priority are arranged in arrival order.)
• A distinctive call tone for calls with the highest priority received is sounded and the incoming call display
changes.
[Call priority order] (applicable only when in "Selective Response" mode)
1. Emergency calls from the substation or Door Station (transmitted through manual operation or automatic
operation according to system settings for Priority Level 5)
2. Calls from the outside line telephone
3. Audio Trigger calls
4. Calls from a substation or Door Station set for Priority Level 4
5. Calls from a substation or Door Station set for Priority Level 3
6. Calls from a substation or Door Station set for Priority Level 2
7. Calls from a substation, Door Station, Master Station or telephone set for Priority Level 1 (default value)
1.2. Speech Path Priority
• When the busy station receives a call from another station, current operation is forcibly interrupted or the call
received last is kept waiting according to Speech path Priority order.
• External input broadcast priorities can be changed by settings.
External input broadcast with priority OFF (default value):
Priority level is the same as all-call paging and individual zone paging.
External input broadcast with priority ON:
Priority level is higher than all-call paging and individual zone paging.
[Speech path priority order]
• When in "Sequential Response" mode:
1. Emergency paging
2. Message paging
3. External input broadcast (with priority ON)
4. All-call paging/External input broadcast (with priority OFF)
5. Individual zone paging/External input paging (with priority OFF)
6. Normal conversation/Emergency conversation/Outside line telephone conversation/Audio Trigger
conversation
7. Background music play
• When in "Selective Response" mode:
1. Emergency paging
2. Message paging
3. Emergency conversation
4. Outside line telephone conversation
5. Audio Trigger conversation
6. External input paging (with priority ON)
7. All-call paging/External input paging (with priority OFF)
8. Individual zone paging/External input paging (with priority OFF)
9. Normal call
10. Background music play
2-177
2. Time-Out
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OTHER FUNCTIONS (CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS)
This function restricts the duration of calling, conversation, and paging to prevent the speech path from being
left unused when a user neglects to terminate conversation or paging.
When the set time has elapsed, stations automatically return to standby state.
Notes
• Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set each time limit (programmable for 10 − 990 seconds in
10-second units). (Refer to p. 5-36, 5-43, 5-54, 5-63, 5-90, 5-98.)
• Call time limit is not applicable to Emergency calls.
• Conversation time limit is not applicable to Emergency conversations.
• Paging time limit is not applicable to Emergency paging.
Tip
The time limit is programmed at the exchange to which the station that makes the call is connected, or at the
IP station that makes the call.
3. Recording (only when the N-8000AF is used)
The audio signals when the master station or telephone is engaged in the following operations can be recorded.
Master station: conversations, conference calls, paging, and scan monitoring
Telephone:
conversations, paging, and scan monitoring
Recording starts as soon as the operation above is performed at the master station or the telephone set to
enable recording function. Recording ends when such operations end.
It is also possible to record conversations of the outside line telephones. Such conversations and conferences
are recorded on recorders connected to the N-8000AF.
Contact 1 (fixed) closes during recording.
Notes
• The N-8000AF Audio Interface's operating mode must be set to "Conversation Recording."
• Use of the recording function and the N-8000AF Interface to be used for recording must be preprogrammed
into each Master Station and telephone.
• Use the N-8000 Setting Software to set the N-8000AF Interface unit's operation mode, and the use of the
recording function of the individual Master Stations and telephones. (Refer to p. 5-66, p. 5-81, p. 5-89, p.
5-100, p. 5-106.)
• Master Stations connected to the N-8010EX Exchange cannot use the recording function.
• Up to two Master Stations connected to the N-8000EX Exchange can be set to use the recording function.
2-178
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OTHER FUNCTIONS (CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS)
4. Group Blocking
Stations can be blocked into groups (up to 31 groups) which can or cannot make calls to each other. Paging
zone numbers available among such groups can also be set.
Note
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set the station groups, calls that can be made among groups, and
paging zones that can be mutually called. (Refer to p. 5-123.)
[Group blocking group setting example]
Set arbitrary station groups (up to 31 groups).
Group 1 No. 201 – 209
Group 2
No. 210 – 219
Group 3
Nos. 220 – 249
Group 4
No. 250 – 279
[Setting example for enabling or disabling calls among groups]
Calls that station groups can or cannot make to each other can be freely set. In this example, Group 1 can call
Groups 2 − 4 and Group 2 can call only Group 1. Groups 3 and 4 cannot call other groups.
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Calling station
Group 4
Called station
[Setting example for paging zone numbers that can be called]
Paging zone numbers that can be called from each group can be freely set. In this example, Group 1 can make
all-zone calls or page Zones 1 − 4, Group 2 can make all-zone calls or page only Zone 1, and Group 4 can page
only Zone 4.
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
All-zone call or paging to Zones 1 – 4
Group 4
Paging to Zone 4
All-zone call or paging to Zone 1
Paging station
Paging zone
Note
Paging zones can be set freely regardless of group blocking group assignment.
2-179
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OTHER FUNCTIONS (CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS)
5. Paging Delay Output
This function controls the audio output according to the connected external equipment's activation time.
Delay time can be inserted into the time duration from paging operation completion to paging pre-announcement
tone output (or paging commencement). The contact that provides output in synchronization with paging
activation closes upon paging operation completion, irrespective of the delay time setting.
[When delay time is 0 sec.]
Master station
Paging operation
Making a paging call
Making a paging call
Paging tone
closed
Contact output
[When delay time is 5 sec.]
Master station
Paging pre-announcement tone
5 sec
Paging operation
Making a paging call
Making a paging call
Paging tone
closed
Contact output
6. Paging Pre-Announcement Tone Output Control
Paging can be initiated without using a paging pre-announcement tone. Use of the pre-announcement tone is
selectable.
[When the paging pre-announcement tone is set to ON.]
Master station
Paging operation
Making a paging call
Making a paging call
Paging tone
closed
Contact output
Paging pre-announcement tone
[When the paging pre-announcement tone is set to OFF.]
Master station
Paging tone
Paging operation
Making a paging call
Making a paging call
closed
Contact output
2-180
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OTHER FUNCTIONS (CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS)
Paging (only when the N-8000MI/8000AF is used)
7. External Input
By connecting the Remote microphone or playback components to the Multi-interface unit or Audio interface
unit, activating its control input enables broadcasting to the preprogrammed zone(s).
There are two methods of activation: one is to use the Audio input terminal (A in the following figure), and the
other is to use the Contact input terminal (B).
Set only the broadcast zones when activating the Audio input terminal, and both the broadcast zones and
input sound source when activating the Contact input terminal. Set the input sound source operation mode to
"External input paging."
Priorities can be assigned to External input paging.
For more information, read "Priorities" on p. 2-177.
Note
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to perform each setting. (Refer to p. 5-45, 5-107.)
• Closing the control input terminal broadcasts the outputs from the external sound source to the preprogrammed
paging zone(s).
• The broadcast ends when the control input terminal opens.
• Setting External Input Paging for the N-8000AF unit allows user to set the unit's output for paging output.
However, the N-8000AF cannot receive pagings while concurrently broadcasting a page through its input,
and it cannot broadcast a page while receiving a paging.
[Example of activating both the audio Input terminal and contact input terminal]
N-8000MI/8000AF
Sound source
(chime, etc.)
A
B
Make signal
Make signal
Zone 1
Audio input
terminal
Audio
Control
Contact input
terminal
1
2
3
4
16
Amplifier
Speakers
Zone 23
*
* N-8000AF Audio Interface
unit contact input terminals
are 1 – 8.
In this example, a sound source is broadcast
to Paging Zone 1 by activating the Audio input
terminal and to Paging Zone 23 by activating
the Control input terminal.
Both broadcasts will not coincide. While a
broadcast is being made to Paging Zone
1, another broadcast by the Control input
terminal activation is neglected.
No. 1000
No. 1002
No. 1003
No. 1004
Zone 105
Speaker
Amplifier
No. 2000
[Priority]
• There is no priority between control signals coming to the Audio input terminal and the Contact input terminal.
Even if either terminal is closed while the other terminal is closed, the later activation is not accepted.
• Priorities are equal between paging calls, whether they are initiated by the N-8000 system station or other
system station. If one input terminal closes while the other terminal is closed for paging, the last paging
is placed in standby mode, and is allowed to go through when the other paging is completed. However,
if external input broadcasts have been set for priority ON, they take precedence over all-call paging and
individual zone paging. (Refer to p. 2-177, "Priorities".)
2-181
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OTHER FUNCTIONS (CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS)
8. Paging
‌
Sync Contact Output Control
(only when the N-8000MI/8000AF is used)
The contact output of both the N-8000MI and N-8000AF interface units can be set as the paging output
destination. This makes it possible to control connected external equipment in synchronization with paging
activation.
Contact output destinations can be freely selected for up to 16 outputs for the N-8000MI and up to 8 outputs for
the N-8000AF. When the setting is performed so that only the contacts are included in a paging zone without
selecting audio paging output, only the contact outputs are activated and audio signals are not output at paging
initiation. Additionally, the closed contact status is also judged to be "busy." Therefore, while the contact output
is in use in a certain paging zone, if another page is initiated, it will only begin after the contact opens.
Paging operation
LAN
N-8000MI
Speaker
N-8000AF
Contact output
Revolving light
2-182
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OTHER FUNCTIONS (CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS)
9. Calling
‌
Station Indication/CCTV Interlock
(only when the N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF is used)
By installing a lamp type indication board* at the specified station, conversation partners and calling stations
that made calls to the specified station during conversation can be displayed on the board. The indication board
can be shared among multiple stations (up to 8 stations) to indicate which station within the group has been
called. It is also possible to use the N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF's contact for interlocking the N-8000MI/8000DI
/8000AF with a CCTV system so that a calling party is displayed on the monitor screen.
* Needs to be separately made to interlock with the Multi interface unit's, Direct select unit’s, or Audio interface
unit’s output.
Note
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set the N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF’s contact number and the
stations with the indication board installed. (Refer to p. 5-37, 5-55, 5-57, 5-64, 5-66, 5-81, 5-98, 5-100.)
Indication board installed
at station No. 239
[Calling station indication example]
No.201
• When a station with the indication
board installed is called, the lamp for
the calling station lights. The lamp
goes out when a response is made
to the call and the conversation is
terminated.
200
201
202
Calling in progress
208
209
210
216
217
218
Make contact
2
• Even if the station with the indication
board installed is on another line
when it is called, the lamp for the
calling station (i.e. station in campon-busy mode) lights.
3
Station No. 239 with
indication board installed N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF
9
Indication board installed
at station No. 239
No.201
216
217
218
Station No. 239 with
indication board installed N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF
No.208
No. 208 in camp-on-busy
2
3
9
[CCTV interlock example]
• When there is a call to the station with a
CCTV monitor installed, responding to the
call displays the calling station's place on
the monitor.
Note
Operations in this description are based on
the calling station indication mode being set
to "Closed during talk." Perform the setting
using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software.
(Refer to p. 5-37, 5-55, 5-64, 5-98.)
208
209
210
Make contact
• The lamp goes out when the party
at the station in camp-on-busy mode
cancels the call.
Note
Operations in this description are
based on the calling station indication
mode being set to "Closed during call
and talk." Perform the setting using the
supplied N-8000 Setting Software.
(Refer to p. 5-37, 5-55, 5-64, 5-98.)
200
201
202
Conversation in progress
CCTV switcher
N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF
Make contact
Station No. 301's image
No.301
Conversation in progress
Station No. 350 with
CCTV monitor installed
2-183
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OTHER FUNCTIONS (CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS)
10. ‌Outside line Calling Station Indication/CCTV Interlock
(only when the N-8000CO/8000MI/8000DI/8000AF is used)
The calling station indication/CCTV interlock can be enabled at the time of making calls to or receiving calls
from the outside line or during conversations.
In the case of making calls, the contact output is closed each time the access number set for each calling
station is used.
For calls from an outside line telephone, even the station belonging to the Direct in Line Member is subject to
the calling station indication.
Set whether to enable or disable the calling station indication and the contact output number of the
N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF to be controlled for each station.
• When the calling station indication mode is set to "Closed during call and talk," the following operations are
performed.
[Calling the outside line telephone]
The N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF’s contact is closed at the time when the N-8000CO starts establishing the
connection with an outside line telephone after the C/O interface unit access number is pressed. The contact
output is closed even while the N-8000CO is in use.
[Receiving calls from an outside line telephone]
In the case of calls by Direct-in Dialing, the N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF's contact is closed when the station
to be called is determined and the calling to that station starts. The contact is closed even while the station
to be called is in use.
In the case of calls by Direct-in Line, the N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF’s contact is closed at the time when
the N-8000CO accepts the calls from an outside line telephone. The contact is closed even while the
representative or member station is busy.
• When the calling station indication mode is set to "Closed during talk," the N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF's contact
is closed at the start of the conversations between stations, and opened at the end of the conversations.
Note
Use the supplied N-8000 Software to set whether to enable or disable the calling station indication, the contact
number of the Multi-Interface Unit, Direct Select Unit, or Audio Interface Unit and the calling station indication
mode. (Refer to p. 5-89.)
2-184
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OTHER FUNCTIONS (CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS)
11. ‌Call/Conversation Sync Contact Output
(only when the N-8050DS/8540DS/8640DS/8650DS is used)
The contact output of the N-8050DS Door Station or N-8540DS/8640DS/8650DS IP Door Station is closed in
synchronization with its own station's operating status.
The timing that the contact output is closed can be selected from 4 patterns; During call, During talk, During call
and talk, and Status indicator sync.
For example, a revolving light or camera can be controlled in synchronization with call or talk operation.
The N-8640DS/8650DS IP Door Station has 5 contact outputs. The timing that each contact output is closed
can be set individually.
"Status indicator sync" function can be assigned to the contact outputs of 1 through 4 channels only.
Note
Use the N-8000 Setting Software to perform settings for the Door station contact output.
(Refer to p. 5-37, 5-64.)
[Example for controlling a revolving light]
Revolving light
Contact output
N-8050DS/8540DS
/8640DS/8650DS
[Door station operation vs. Open/closed status of "Door station contact output"]
Door station contact output
During call
During talk
During call
and talk
Status indicator sync
(N-8640DS/8650DS only)
Closed
Open
Closed
Sequential Response mode: Closed (lit)
Selective Response mode: Closed/open
repeated (flashing)
Being called
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed/open repeated
(flashing)
Call waiting
Closed
Open
Closed
Closed (lit)
Conversation mode
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed (lit)
Being paged
Open
Open
Open
Closed (lit)
Receiving scan monitor
Open
Closed
Closed
Subject to the monitor alert operation
set at the scan-monitoring station
Door station operation
Calling
2-185
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OTHER FUNCTIONS (CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS)
12. IP
‌ DOOR STATION EXTERNAL CONTROL INPUT
(only when the N-8640DS/8650Ds is used)
When dialing operations (up to 20 digits) have been preprogrammed into the external control input of the
N-8640DS/8650DS IP Door Station, such dialing operations can be performed by closing the N-8640DS/8650DS's
contact input. Nothing operates even when closing the contact input if no dialing operation is preprogrammed.
The external device make contact signal must be transmitted for at least 100 ms.
Note
Use the N-8000 Setting Software to perform the door station external control input settings.
[Example]
When the dial operation of pressing the call button twice is programmed, closing the N-8640DS/8650DS's
contact input makes the emergency call.
Make Contact
Emergency Call to No. 100
Emergency button
N-8640DS/8650DS
Emergency Call tone
No. 100
2-186
13. ‌Remote Dial Control
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OTHER FUNCTIONS (CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS)
(only when the N-8000MI/8000DI is used)
When the N-8000MI/8000DI's contact input terminal is closed, an arbitrary station is made to automatically
perform dial operation. A set of up to 32 dial codes (including dial numbers and key operations) can be assigned
to each contact input terminal.
For example, signals from a sensor can automatically activate a station to make a call as shown below.
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to perform settings for the Remote dial control. (Refer to p. 5-48,
5-116.)
Note
To perform the remote dial control, the contact input terminal needs to be closed for over 50 ms.
[Example]
No. 200 station automatically calls the No.100 station by means of a make contact input to the N-8000MI/8000DI
from a sensor.
N-8000MI/8000DI
Make contact
Remote control activation
Sensor, etc.
Calls No. 100.
Call tone
No. 200
1
0
No. 100
0
2-187
14. Direct
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OTHER FUNCTIONS (CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS)
Select (only when the N-8000DI is used)
This function can be used when the system's call response mode is set to "Selective Response." By separately
making an operation panel for a specified Master Station which is equipped with the lamps and buttons
corresponding to other stations, and by assigning the Master Station and other stations to the N-8000DI's
contact input and output channels, the stations that are calling the specified Master Station are indicated by
means of lamps. Also, operating the desired channel button allows calls to be made between the Master Station
and the station assigned to that channel.
1
10
2
10
01
2
3
10
2
20
1
30
04
1
3
20
5
10
4
20
2
30
01
4
3
30
2
40
• The lamp for Station No. 201 flashes if the
Master Station is called by Station No. 201.
• Pressing the button for Station No. 201
allows conversations with No. 201 to start.
6
10
05
2
4
30
3
40
6
20
5
30
4
40
06
3
5
40
Calling
6
40
No. 201
No. 202
Specially-made operation panel
(with lamps and buttons)
LAN
No. 203
Calling
N-8000DI
The channel status indicators on the N-8000DI correspond to the contact output operations as listed below.
Channel status indicator
on the N-8000DI
N-8000DI's contact
output status
Emergency call-in*1
Flashing rapidly
Closed
Other call-in*2
Flashing slowly
Closed
Calling
Lit
Closed
Call waiting
Lit
Closed
Conversation mode
Lit
Closed
Holding
Lit
Closed
Unlit
Open
Lit
Closed
Operation of station
under control
Being paged
Scan monitoring
*1 When a call from the station set for emergency call or priority 5 is received
*2 When a call other than "Emergency call-in" is received
2-188
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OTHER FUNCTIONS (CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS)
15. ‌Contact Bridge Function
(only when the N-8000MI/8000DI/8050DS/8540DS/8640DS/8650DS is used)
Contact signals can be transmitted by way of a network.
Contact output
N-8640DS
N-8050DS
Contact output
N-8000EX/8010EX
Contact output
LAN
N-8000MI/8000DI
N-8000MI/8000DI
Contact input
Either of the following 2 control input's operation modes can be selected.
[Input interlock level]
Input
Output
ON
50 ms
50 ms
[Input interlock edge]
Input
OFF
ON
Output
OFF
ON
50 ms
50 ms
OFF
ON
OFF
Notes
• The input is defined when its level remains constant for 50 ms after change.
• Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to make settings for the contact bridge function. (Refer to p. 5-48,
5-116.)
• Contact signals cannot be transmitted to the RS-180/480 Substation or RS-442 Switch board.
16. Paging Busy Input (only when the N-8000MI is used)
When the N-8000 system is interlocked with a large PA system such as an airport broadcast system, busy data
from the host system can be received, allowing important broadcast to be paged consistently.
Large airport broadcast
system, etc.
Busy signal
N-8000MI
Audio signal
Note
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software to set the contacts to be used for paging busy input. (Refer to p.
5-49.)
2-189
17. System Diagnosis
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OTHER FUNCTIONS (CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS)
(only when the N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF is used)
The N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF diagnoses the system condition, and provides its results at the contact output
terminal as open or closed contact. The system diagnosis is performed in a way that the N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF
connects the target equipment via the network.
The contact output terminal is closed only when an abnormality has been detected.
Thereafter, its closed terminal opens when the N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF judges the condition to be normal.
This function aims to diagnose the exchange's line status and the network status of the connected equipment.
Use the N-8000 Setting Software to perform settings for the network lines and equipment to diagnose. (Refer
to p. 5-49, 5-110, 5-117.)
Note
Diagnosis is performed at the set time intervals*. Therefore, the diagnosis results are not obtained in real time.
The system condition, even if a change occurs, cannot be detected in the intervals from a diagnosis to the next
diagnosis.
* Diagnosis results are renewed every 20 seconds or less.
17.1. Line status diagnosis
If the N-8000EX or N-8010EX exchange's line to be diagnosed shows the status below, the N-8000MI/8000DI
/8000AF judges the line to be abnormal.
• Station's CPU failure
• Line synchronization error
• Station number registered but not connected
17.2. Network status diagnosis
The N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF attempts to communicate with the network-connected equipment to be
diagnosed such as exchange, various kinds of interface unit, or IP station. If no response is detected, the
N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF judges such equipment to be failed.
[Example]
Diagnosis results can be displayed on a status indicator.
Status indicator
Contact outputs
N-8000MI/8000DI/8000AF
Network
N-8000EX
N-8010EX
N-8000MI
2-190
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OTHER FUNCTIONS (CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS)
18. Time Signal
(Refer to p. 2-50, "Time Signal".)
19. Time correction
Synchronizes the clocks of all components in the system with the one as a clock master.
The Master Clock transmits a sync command to all other system equipment once a day.
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software for the Master Clock setting.
N-8000AF
Network
N-8000EX
N-8000MI
N-8000AF
Notes
• Only the N-8000AF for which the Time Sync function has been enabled can be set as the master clock.
• The N-8000RS, N-8010RS and N-8400RS Substation interface units cannot be set as the master clocks.
• When the NTP Client function (see p. 2-192) of the N-8000AF set to the clock master is enabled, it is
recommended to synchronize the N-8000AF’s clock with NTP server first, then to perform time correction.
20. Automatic Daylight Saving Time (Summer time) Correction
Daylight saving time (summer time) can be supported and the following settings performed using the N-8000
Setting Software.
• Automatic daylight time correction ON/OFF
• Daylight time start setting (month, week, day, hour)
• Daylight time end setting (month, week, day, hour)
The daylight saving time correction will start or end at the set [hour] of nth [day] of [week] of [month].
The last day of the week in the month can also be designated.
2-191
21. NTP CLIENT FUNCTION
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
OTHER FUNCTIONS (CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS)
(only when the N-8000AF is used)
Synchronizes the clock of the N-8000AF with NTP Server once a day when the NTP Client function of the
N-8000AF set as a clock master is enabled.
Set the IP address and port number of NTP Server using the supplied N-8000 Setting Software.
[Example of Public NTP Server]
Organization of service
Internet Multifeed (MFEED) -JapanNASA - USA -
Reference destination
NICT NTP Server
GPS
IP address
210.173.160.57
198.123.30.132
Port number
123
123
Notes
• Cannot be used simultaneously with the Time Sync function.
• This function updates only minutes and seconds of the clock of the N-8000AF. Before using this function, be
sure to set the clock master N-8000AF to the correct time. (Refer to p. 5-128, 6-42.)
• Domain name of NTP Server cannot be designated. Designate the server using IP address.
• Example of Public NTP Server is based on the information as of April 2014. When using the NTP client
function, check to see if the IP address and port number shown above are correct.
• It is recommended to perform time correction (see p. 2-191) after synchronization with NTP server.
2-192
Chapter 2 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
REMARKS
REMARKS
[List of Signal Tones]
Signal Tone
Timing
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 78 90
Dial tone
Busy tone
Call tone
Continuous call tone
Zone paging
All-call paging
Hold tone
Transfer
Key-touch tone
Error tone
Programming
confirmation tone
Standby for network
connection
Interrupt tone
Howler tone
Telephone reception
tone
4S
4S
4S
4S
Emergency call tone
Emergency paging
Outside line telephone
reception tone
Outside line cutoff
alert tone
Outside line dial
confirmation tone
C/O busy tone
Telephone busy tone
(conversation end tone)
Monitor start tone
Privacy tone
C/O Network
connection waiting
C/O hold tone
2-193
Chapter 3
INSTALLATION & WIRING
This chapter describes installation and wiring procedures, including
the installation and connection of the Exchange, stations, and various
kinds of interface units.
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
1. Installation of the Exchange
The N-8000EX/8010EX can be installed in any of three ways: (1) equipment rack mounting, (2) wall mounting,
and (3) desk-top installation.
1.1. Equipment Rack Mounting
A) Elevated Operating Ambient - If installed in a closed or multi-unit rack assembly, the operating ambient
temperature of the rack environment may be greater than room ambient. Therefore, consideration should
be given to installing the equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum ambient temperature
(Tma) specified by the manufacturer.
B) Reduced Air Flow - Installation of the equipment in a rack should be such that the amount of air flow required
for safe operation of the equipment is not compromised.
C) Mechanical Loading - Mounting of the equipment in the rack should be such that a hazardous condition is
not achieved due to uneven mechanical loading.
D) Circuit Overloading - Consideration should be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply
circuit and the effect that overloading of the circuits might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring.
Appropriate consideration of equipment nameplate ratings should be used when addressing this concern.
E) Reliable Earthing - Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment should be maintained. Particular attention
should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit (e.g. use of power
strips)."
The N-8000EX/8010EX can be mounted on the CR-273, CR-413, or standard EIA 19" Equipment rack.
One CR-273 for up to 128 stations, one CR-413 for up to 192 stations and sixteen CR-413 for up to a total of
3072 stations can be connected. (Refer to p. 1-15.)
For the CR-273 and CR-413 Equipment rack assembly or BU-412 Blower unit installation, read the installation
manual supplied with the rack.
Note
When installing the Blower unit, Terminal boards, and
N-8000EX/8010EX, lay the equipment rack down faceup to do installation work safely. Since the Blower unit is
installed from the inside of the rack, be sure to install it first,
N-8000EX/8010EX
before mounting the other components.
50 cm
50 cm
1.1.1. Setting space
For maintenance works, allow much space between the
wall and Equipment rack.
50 cm
1m
1.1.2. Caution when installing the unit
CAUTION
Do not block the fan exhaust vent.
Doing so may cause heat to build up inside the unit and result in fire.
Do not stack up 3 units or more.
If 2 or more Exchanges are mounted in
the Equipment rack, be sure to mount the
perforated panel of 1-unit size (PF-013B) or
more above and below every 2 units.
N-8000EX/8010EX
Using the supplied rack mounting screws,
install the terminal board in a location that
facilitates wiring and maintenance work,
taking into consideration the direction of cable
entry into the rack.
Equipment rack
Perforated panels
3-2
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
1.1.3. N-8000EX/8010EX mounting
N-8000EX/8010EX
Rack mounting bracket
(supplied with the N-8000EX/8010EX)
Tapping screw 3 x 8
(supplied with the N-8000EX/8010EX)
1
2
Rack mounting screw 5 x 12 with plain washer
(supplied with the N-8000EX/8010EX)
Step 1. Install the rack-mounting
N-8000EX/8010EX.
bracket
to
the
Step 2. Mount the N-8000EX/8010EX on the Equipment
rack.
1.2. Desk-Top Installation
When installing the N-8000EX/8010EX on a desk, secure the supplied plastic feet to the bottom surface of the
N-8000EX/8010EX using the supplied machine screws.
Machine screw M4 x 20
(supplied with the N-8000EX/8010EX)
N-8000EX/8010EX
Plastic foot
(supplied with the N-8000EX/8010EX)
3-3
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
1.3. Wall Mounting
Step 1. Install the supplied wall-mounting bracket to the N-8000EX/8010EX using each 2 supplied screws and
removed screws from the case.
Wall mounting bracket
(supplied with the N-8000EX/8010EX)
Tapping screw 3 x 8
(removed from the case)
N-8000EX/8010EX
Tapping screw 3 x 8
(supplied with the N-8000EX/8010EX)
Step 2. Mount the N-8000EX/8010EX on the wall.
Notes
• Use appropriate screws for the construction of wall.
• Wood screws 3.5 x 20 are supplied with the N-8000EX/8010EX.
• The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and the plug (disconnecting device) shall be
easily accessible.
Protect against disconnection (Power supply plug)
Unlock cable clip and run the power supply cord
through cable clip.
Note
Keep overall cable length between a power
supply plug and cable clip as short as possible.
Power supply cord
Cable clip
Wall surface
Wood screw 3.5 x 20
(supplied with the N-8000EX/8010EX)
3-4
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
2. Installation of the sUBstation interface unit
The N-8000RS/8010RS/8400RS can be installed in any of three ways: (1) equipment rack mounting, (2) wall
mounting, and (3) desk-top installation.
2.1. Equipment Rack Mounting
A) Elevated Operating Ambient - If installed in a closed or multi-unit rack assembly, the operating ambient
temperature of the rack environment may be greater than room ambient. Therefore, consideration should
be given to installing the equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum ambient temperature
(Tma) specified by the manufacturer.
B) Reduced Air Flow - Installation of the equipment in a rack should be such that the amount of air flow required
for safe operation of the equipment is not compromised.
C) Mechanical Loading - Mounting of the equipment in the rack should be such that a hazardous condition is
not achieved due to uneven mechanical loading.
D) Circuit Overloading - Consideration should be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply
circuit and the effect that overloading of the circuits might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring.
Appropriate consideration of equipment nameplate ratings should be used when addressing this concern.
E) Reliable Earthing - Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment should be maintained. Particular attention
should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit (e.g. use of power
strips)."
The N-8000RS/8010RS/8400RS can be mounted on the CR-273, CR-413, or standard EIA 19" Equipment rack.
For the CR-273 and CR-413 Equipment rack assembly or BU-412 Blower unit installation, read the installation
manual supplied with the rack.
Note
When installing the Blower unit and
N-8000RS/8010RS/8400RS, lay the equipment
rack down face-up to do installation work
safely. Since the Blower unit is installed from
the inside of the rack, be sure to install it first,
before mounting the other components.
N-8000RS/8010RS/8400RS
50 cm
50 cm
2.1.1. Setting space
For maintenance works, allow much space
between the wall and Equipment rack.
50 cm
1m
2.1.2. Caution when installing the unit
CAUTION
Do not stack up 3 Substation
interface units or more.
If 2 or more units are mounted
in the Equipment rack, be sure
to mount the perforated panel
of 1-unit size (PF-013B) or more
above and below every 2 units.
Do not block the ventilation slots in the unit’s cover.
Doing so may cause heat to build up inside the unit and result in fire.
Equipment rack
N-8000RS/8010RS/8400RS
Perforated panels
3-5
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
2.1.3. N-8000RS/8010RS/8400RS mounting
N-8000RS/8010RS/8400RS
Tapping screw 3 x 8
(supplied with the N-8000RS
/8010RS/8400RS)
Rack mounting bracket
(supplied with the N-8000RS
/8010RS/8400RS)
2
1
Rack mounting screw 5 x 12 with plain washer
(supplied with the N-8000RS/8010RS/8400RS)
Step 1. Install the rack-mounting bracket to the N-8000RS/8010RS/8400RS.
Step 2. Mount the N-8000RS/8010RS/8400RS on the Equipment rack.
2.2. Desk-Top Installation
When installing the N-8000RS/8010RS/8400RS on a desk, secure the supplied plastic feet to the bottom
surface of the N-8000RS/8010RS/8400RS using the supplied machine screws.
Machine screw M3 x 8
(supplied with the N-8000RS/8010RS/8400RS)
Plastic foot
(supplied with the N-8000RS/8010RS/8400RS)
N-8000RS/8010RS/8400RS
3-6
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
2.3. Wall Mounting
Step 1. Install the optional YC-850 Wall mounting bracket to the N-8000RS/8010RS/8400RS.
YC-850 Wall mounting bracket
Machine screw M3 x 6
(supplied with the YC-850)
N-8000RS/8010RS/8400RS
Step 2. Mount the N-8000RS/8010RS/8400RS on the wall.
Notes
• Use appropriate screws for the construction of wall.
• Wood screws 3.5 x 20 are supplied with the YC-850.
• The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and the plug (disconnecting device) shall be
easily accessible.
Protect against disconnection (Power supply plug)
Unlock cable clip and run the power supply cord
through cable clip.
Note
Keep overall cable length between a power
supply plug and cable clip as short as possible.
Power supply cord
Cable clip
Wall surface
Wood screw 3.5 x 20
(supplied with the YC-850)
3-7
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
3. INSTALLATION OF THE MULTI INTERFACE UNIT
The N-8000MI can be installed in any of three ways: (1) equipment rack mounting, (2) wall mounting, and (3)
desk-top installation.
3.1. Equipment Rack Mounting
A) Elevated Operating Ambient - If installed in a closed or multi-unit rack assembly, the operating ambient
temperature of the rack environment may be greater than room ambient. Therefore, consideration should
be given to installing the equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum ambient temperature
(Tma) specified by the manufacturer.
B) Reduced Air Flow - Installation of the equipment in a rack should be such that the amount of air flow required
for safe operation of the equipment is not compromised.
C) Mechanical Loading - Mounting of the equipment in the rack should be such that a hazardous condition is
not achieved due to uneven mechanical loading.
D) Circuit Overloading - Consideration should be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply
circuit and the effect that overloading of the circuits might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring.
Appropriate consideration of equipment nameplate ratings should be used when addressing this concern.
E) Reliable Earthing - Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment should be maintained. Particular attention
should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit (e.g. use of power
strips)."
The N-8000MI can be mounted on the CR -273, CR -413, or standard EIA 19" Equipment rack.
For the CR -273 and CR -413 Equipment rack assembly, read the installation manual supplied with the rack.
Note
When installing the N-8000MI, lay the equipment rack down face-up to do installation work safely.
3.1.1. Setting space
For maintenance works, allow much space between the
wall and Equipment rack.
N-8000MI
50 cm
50 cm
50 cm
1m
3.1.2. Caution when installing the unit
CAUTION
Do not block the ventilation slots.
Doing so may cause heat to build up inside the unit and result in fire.
Do not stack up 3 units or more. If 2 or more units
are mounted in the Equipment rack, be sure to
mount the perforated panel of 1 U size (PF-013B)
or more above and below every 2 units.
Equipment rack
N-8000MI
Perforated panels
3-8
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
3.1.3. N-8000MI mounting
N-8000MI
Tapping screw 3 x 8
(supplied with the N-8000MI)
Rack mounting bracket
(supplied with the N-8000MI)
1
2
Step 1. Install the rack-mounting bracket to the N-8000MI.
Rack mounting screw 5 x 12 with plain washer
(supplied with the N-8000MI)
Step 2. Mount the N-8000MI on the Equipment rack.
3.2. Desk-Top Installation
When installing the N-8000MI on a desk, secure the supplied plastic feet to the unit's bottom using the supplied
machine screws.
Machine screw M4 x 20
(supplied with the N-8000MI)
Plastic foot
(supplied with the N-8000MI)
N-8000MI
3-9
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
3.3. Wall Mounting
Step 1. Install the supplied wall-mounting bracket to the N-8000MI using 4 removed screws from the case.
Wall mounting bracket
(supplied with the N-8000MI)
Tapping screw 3 x 8
(removed from the case)
N-8000MI
Tapping screw 3 x 8
(removed from the case)
Step 2. Mount the N-8000MI on the wall.
Notes
• Use appropriate screws for the construction of wall.
• Wood screws 3.5 x 20 are supplied with the N-8000MI.
• The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and the plug (disconnecting device) shall be
easily accessible.
Protect against disconnection
(Power supply plug)
Unlock cord clamp and run the
power supply cord through it.
Note
Keep the cable length between a
power supply plug and cord clamp
as short as possible.
Wall surface
Power supply cord
Cord clamp
Wood screw 3.5 x 20
(supplied with the N-8000MI)
3-10
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
4. INSTALLATION OF THE direct select UNIT
The N-8000DI can be installed in any of three ways: (1) equipment rack mounting, (2) wall mounting, and (3)
desk-top installation.
4.1. Equipment Rack Mounting
A) Elevated Operating Ambient - If installed in a closed or multi-unit rack assembly, the operating ambient
temperature of the rack environment may be greater than room ambient. Therefore, consideration should
be given to installing the equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum ambient temperature
(Tma) specified by the manufacturer.
B) Reduced Air Flow - Installation of the equipment in a rack should be such that the amount of air flow required
for safe operation of the equipment is not compromised.
C) Mechanical Loading - Mounting of the equipment in the rack should be such that a hazardous condition is
not achieved due to uneven mechanical loading.
D) Circuit Overloading - Consideration should be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply
circuit and the effect that overloading of the circuits might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring.
Appropriate consideration of equipment nameplate ratings should be used when addressing this concern.
E) Reliable Earthing - Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment should be maintained. Particular attention
should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit (e.g. use of power
strips)."
The N-8000DI can be mounted on the CR -273, CR -413, or standard EIA 19" Equipment rack.
For the CR -273 and CR -413 Equipment rack assembly, read the installation manual supplied with the rack.
Note
When installing the N-8000DI, lay the equipment rack down face-up to do installation work safely.
4.1.1. Setting space
For maintenance works, allow much space between the
wall and Equipment rack.
N-8000DI
50 cm
50 cm
50 cm
1m
4.1.2. Caution when installing the unit
Do not stack up 3 units or more. If 2 or more units
are mounted in the Equipment rack, be sure to
mount the perforated panel of 1 U size (PF-013B)
or more above and below every 2 units.
Equipment rack
N-8000DI
Perforated panels
3-11
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
4.1.3. N-8000DI mounting
N-8000DI
Tapping screw 3 x 8
(supplied with the N-8000DI)
Rack mounting bracket
(supplied with the N-8000DI)
2
Step 1. Install the rack-mounting bracket to the
N-8000DI.
1
Rack mounting screw 5 x 12 with plain washer
(supplied with the N-8000DI)
Step 2. Mount the N-8000DI on the Equipment rack.
4.2. Desk-Top Installation
When installing the N-8000DI on a desk, secure the supplied plastic feet to the unit's bottom using the supplied
machine screws.
Machine screw M3 x 8
(supplied with the N-8000DI)
Plastic foot
(supplied with the N-8000DI)
N-8000DI
3-12
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
4.3. Wall Mounting
Step 1. Install the optional YC-850 Wall mounting bracket to the N-8000DI.
YC-850 Wall mounting bracket
Machine screw M3 x 6
(supplied with the YC-850)
N-8000DI
Step 2. Mount the N-8000DI on the wall.
Notes
• Use appropriate screws for the construction of wall.
• Wood screws 3.5 x 20 are supplied with the YC-850.
• The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and the plug (disconnecting device) shall be
easily accessible.
Protect against disconnection
(Power supply plug)
Unlock cord clamp and run the
power supply cord through it.
Note
Keep the cable length between a
power supply plug and cord clamp
as short as possible.
Wall surface
Power supply cord
Cord clamp
Wood screw 3.5 x 20
(supplied with the YC-850)
3-13
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
5. INSTALLATION OF THE Audio interface unit, c/o interface
UNIT AND TELEPHONE interface unit
The N-8000AF/8000CO/8000AL can be installed in any of three ways: (1) equipment rack mounting, (2) wall
mounting, and (3) desk-top installation.
5.1. Equipment Rack Mounting
A) Elevated Operating Ambient - If installed in a closed or multi-unit rack assembly, the operating ambient
temperature of the rack environment may be greater than room ambient. Therefore, consideration should
be given to installing the equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum ambient temperature
(Tma) specified by the manufacturer.
B) Reduced Air Flow - Installation of the equipment in a rack should be such that the amount of air flow required
for safe operation of the equipment is not compromised.
C) Mechanical Loading - Mounting of the equipment in the rack should be such that a hazardous condition is
not achieved due to uneven mechanical loading.
D) Circuit Overloading - Consideration should be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply
circuit and the effect that overloading of the circuits might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring.
Appropriate consideration of equipment nameplate ratings should be used when addressing this concern.
E) Reliable Earthing - Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment should be maintained. Particular attention
should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit (e.g. use of power
strips)."
The N-8000AF/8000CO/8000AL can be mounted on the CR -273, CR -413, or standard EIA 19" Equipment
rack.
For the CR -273 and CR -413 Equipment rack assembly, read the installation manual supplied with the rack.
Note
When installing the N-8000AF/8000CO/8000AL, lay the equipment rack down face-up to do installation work
safely.
5.1.1. Setting space
For maintenance works, allow much space between the wall and Equipment rack.
N-8000AF/8000CO/8000AL
50 cm
50 cm
50 cm
1m
3-14
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
5.1.2. N-8000AF/8000CO/8000AL mounting
Use the optional mounting hardware set when installing the unit in an equipment rack.
[When mounting a single unit]
Use the optional MB-15B-BK hardware set.
Tapping screw 3 x 14*1
*1 Component parts of MB-15B-BK
Tapping screw 3 x 8*1
N-8000AF/8000CO/8000AL
Blank bracket*1
Tapping screw 3 x 8*1
Rack mounting bracket*1
Rack mounting screw 5 x 12*1
Fiber washer (for M5)*1
[When mounting 2 units]
Use the optional MB-15B-J hardware set.
*2 Component parts of MB-15B-J
Tapping screw 3 x 14*2
N-8000AF/8000CO/8000AL
N-8000AF/8000CO/8000AL
Fiber washer (for M5)*2
Rack mounting screw 5 x 12*2
Machine screw M3 x 12*
Tapping screw 3 x 14*2
2
Linkage bracket*2
Rack mounting bracket*2
3-15
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
5.2. Desk-Top Installation
When installing the N-8000AF/8000CO/8000AL on a desk, secure the supplied plastic feet to the unit's bottom
using the supplied machine screws.
Machine screw M3 x 8
(supplied with the N-8000AF/8000CO/8000AL)
Plastic foot
(supplied with the N-8000AF/8000CO/8000AL)
N-8000AF/8000CO/8000AL
5.3. Wall Mounting
Step 1. Install the optional YC-850 Wall mounting bracket to the N-8000AF/8000CO/8000AL.
YC-850 Wall mounting bracket
Machine screw M3 x 6
(supplied with the YC-850)
Note: This figure represents the N-8000CO/8000AL.
3-16
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
Step 2. Mount the N-8000AF/8000CO/8000AL on the wall.
Notes
• Use appropriate screws for the construction of wall.
• Wood screws 3.5 x 20 are supplied with the YC-850.
• The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and the plug (disconnecting device) shall be
easily accessible.
Protect against disconnection
(Power supply plug)
Unlock cord clamp and run the
power supply cord through it.
Note
Keep the cable length between a
power supply plug and cord clamp
as short as possible.
Wall surface
Power supply cord
Cord clamp
Wood screw 3.5 x 20
(supplied with the YC-850)
Note: This figure represents the N-8000CO/8000AL.
6. INSTALLATION OF THE IP MODULE
Install the SX-200IP IP Module in the module slot of the SX-2000AI or SX-2100AI Audio Input Unit.
For details, refer to the installation manual attached to the SX-200IP.
3-17
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
7. Installation of master Stations
Master stations can be installed in either of two ways: (1) wall mounting or (2) desk-top installation.
Note
When using the PA paging function, keep the station as far away from the PA paging speaker as possible to
avoid acoustic feedback.
7.1. When Mounting the Station on a Wall
When mounting the station on a wall, the orientation of the handset hook needs to be changed.
7.1.1. N-8000MS/8010MS/8410MS/8500MS/8510MS/8600MS
Step 1. Raise the number directory cover forward tab.
Step 2. Remove both the number directory cover and the
directory. Remove the handset hook and reverse
its orientation, then replace.
Number directory cover
Number directory cover
Reverse the orientation.
Number directory
Handset hook
Step 3. After replacing the directory on the station, hook
the directory cover's forward tab and push on the
upper part of the directory cover.
7.1.2. N-8020MS
Reverse the orientation.
Remove the handset hook and reverse its orientation.
Handset hook
3-18
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
7.2. Wall Hanging
7.2.1. N-8000MS/8010MS/8020MS/8410MS/8500MS/8510MS/8600MS
The station can be mounted on a wall using an optional YC-280 Wall-mounting bracket.
The YC-280 can be installed to a one-gang electrical box.
[Mounting example]
Station
Wall
surface
YC-280 Wall mounting bracket
2
1
The figure shows the N-8000MS.
Hook
Wood screw 3.5 x 20
(supplied with the YC-280)
Step 1. Install the YC-280 wall mounting bracket to the wall.
Notes
• Use the appropriate screws for the construction of wall.
• Wood screws 3.5 x 20 are supplied with the YC-280.
• No fitting screws for electrical box are supplied with.
Use commercially available screws.
Step 2. Hang the station on the wall mounting bracket hook to install.
Push down the station main body in the direction indicated by the arrow.
3-19
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
[YC-280 dimensional drawing]
4.6 x 6
Unit: mm
Rubber foot mounting position
(desk-top application)
2-ø4.5
140
23.5
37
60
50
83.5
60
80
100
4.5 x 10
[Installation completion drawing]
• N-8000MS/8010MS/8410MS/8500MS/8510MS/8600MS
148
Unit: mm
YC-280
66.2
208
YC-280
72.1
83.5
170
• N-8020MS
Unit: mm
YC-280
74.7
220
YC-280
76.2
106.5
3-20
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
7.2.2. N-8011MS
The station can be mounted on a wall using an optional YC-290 Wall mounting bracket.
The YC-290 can be installed to a one-gang electrical box.
[Mounting example]
Station
YC-290 Wall mounting bracket
Wall
surface
2
1
Hook
Wood screw 3.5 x 20
(supplied with the YC-290)
Step 1. Install the YC-290 Wall mounting bracket to the wall.
Notes
• Use appropriate screws for the construction of wall.
• Wood screws 3.5 x 20 are supplied with the YC-290.
• No fitting screws for electrical box are supplied.
Use commercially available screws.
Step 2. Hang the station on the Wall mounting bracket hook to install.
Push down the station main body in the direction indicated by the arrow.
3-21
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
[YC-290 dimensional drawing]
4.6 x 6
Unit: mm
Rubber foot mounting position
(desk-top application)
2-ø4.5
131.5
23.5
37
60
50
83.5
34
50
4.5 x 10
64
[Installation completion drawing]
• N-8011MS
92
Unit: mm
YC-290
60.7
195
YC-290
72.1
3-22
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
7.3. Desk-Top Installation
7.3.1. N-8000MS/8010MS/8020MS/8410MS/8500MS/8510MS/8600MS
In desktop installations, the front operation panel can be inclined 16˚ from the desk surface for easier operation
by attaching the YC-280 Wall mounting bracket to its bottom surface.
[Mounting example]
Hang the wall mounting bracket hook on the station's wall bracket mounting slot to install.
Push up the Wall mounting bracket in the direction indicated by the arrow.
Station
YC-280 Wall mounting bracket
Rubber foot
(supplied with the YC-280)
Hook
The figure shows the N-8000MS.
[Installation completion drawing]
• N-8000MS/8010MS/8410MS/8500MS
/8510MS/8600MS
• N-8020MS
Unit: mm
115
101.8
16°
YC-280
16°
245
205.2
YC-280
3-23
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
7.3.2. N-8011MS
In desktop installations, the front operation panel can be inclined 16˚ from the desk surface for easier operation
by attaching the YC-290 Wall mounting bracket to its bottom surface.
[Mounting example]
Station
YC-290 Wall mounting bracket
Rubber foot
(supplied with the YC-290)
Hook
Hang the Wall mounting bracket hook on the station's wall bracket mounting slot to install.
Push up the Wall mounting bracket in the direction indicated by the arrow.
[Installation completion drawing]
Unit: mm
90
16°
192.3
YC-290
3-24
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
7.4. Flush Mounting
[N-8031MS]
Attach the N-8031MS to the YC-241 Back box or an electrical box installed in a wall.
Wall
Wall surface
surface
Acoustic material (supplied with the N-8031MS)
Note
Lay it down along the inside of the box.
N-8031MS
YC-241 Back box
or 5-gang electrical box
Machine screw M4 x 25
(supplied with the N-8031MS)
Accessory screws
[Installation completion drawing]
Unit: mm
184
35
Note
The wall should be over 12 mm thick, and the opening
in the wall for an electrical box should be under 115 mm
(wide) by 254 mm (high).
254
The N-8031MS comes with 2 types of screws: M4 x 25
and UNC No. 6-32 x 18.
For the electrical box provided with unified threads, use
the UNC No. 6-32 x 18.
83.5
115
3-25
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
[YC-241 dimensional drawing]
Unit: mm
119
83.5
60
10-M4
13
54
10
23
274
46
B
C
A
46
80
46
200
276
A
46
A
230
46
B
46
23
4-φ6
B
73
B
117
Dimension of knockout hole
A: φ27.1
B: φ21.5
C: φ34
3-26
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
[N-8033MS]
Attach the N-8033MS to the YC-841 Wall-mount box or an electrical box installed in a wall.
Acoustic material (supplied with the N-8033MS)
Wall surface
YC-841 or electrical box
Note
Lay it down along the inside of the box.
N-8033MS
Machine screw M4 x 35
(supplied with the N-8033MS)
After installing the N-8033MS,
check first if the conversations
can be made, then attach the
both ends of the adhesive sheet
to the N-8033MS’s front surface
by removing exfoliate paper
provided at these ends.
Note
When installing the N-8033MS outdoors or at locations
where it gets wet with water, tightly seal the panel edges.
For sealing method, consult your TOA dealer.
Note
Remove either of the 2 knockout
holes in the bottom so that it can
work as a weep hole (to allow
water to exit), and secure the
YC-841 to a wall.
YC-841 bottom
Knockout holes
[Installation completion drawing]
Unit: mm
236
9
254
Seal the panel edges.
70
115
3-27
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
[YC-841 dimensional drawing]
Unit: mm
70
60
28.3
6-φ5 Knockout hole
258
220
236
180
83.5
φ12.7 Knockout hole
φ20.9 Knockout hole
81
119
40
57
19
4-M4
φ12.7 Knockout hole
φ20.9 Knockout hole
3-28
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
7.5. Wall Surface Mounting
[N-8031MS]
Attach the N-8031MS to the YC-251 Wall-mount box installed on a wall.
Acoustic material (supplied with the N-8031MS)
Wall
surface
Note
Lay it down along the inside of the box.
YC-251 Wall-mount box
N-8031MS
Machine screw M4 x 25
(supplied with the N-8031MS)
Accessory screws
[Installation completion drawing]
Unit: mm
184
35
254
The N-8031MS comes with 2 types of screws: M4 x 25
and UNC No. 6-32 x 18.
For the electrical box provided with unified threads, use
the UNC No. 6-32 x 18.
83.5
115
3-29
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
[N-8033MS]
Attach the N-8033MS to the YC-841 Wall-mount box installed on a wall.
Acoustic material (supplied with the N-8033MS)
Wall surface
YC-841
Note
Lay it down along the inside of the box.
Tip
Refer to p. 3-28 for
YC-841 dimensional
drawing.
N-8033MS
Machine screw M4 x 35
(supplied with the N-8033MS)
After installing the N-8033MS,
check first if the conversations
can be made, then attach the
both ends of the adhesive sheet
to the N-8033MS’s front surface
by removing exfoliate paper
provided at these ends.
Note
Seal the edges of the panel and those of the box's rear surface in
contact with the wall surface when installing the unit outdoors or at
locations where it gets wet with water. For sealing method, contact
your nearest TOA dealer.
Seal all the panel and rear edges.
Note
When running the cable through
the knockout hole in the YC-841's
bottom surface, be sure to attach
a cord bush (waterproof type).
For the cord bush, contact the
TOA dealer where the unit was
purchased.
YC-841 bottom
Knockout holes
[Installation completion drawing]
Unit: mm
236
254
Wall surface
9
YC-841
70
115
3-30
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
8. INSTALLATION OF REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION
8.1. Desk-Top Installation
8.1.1 N-8610RM expansion with the addition of the RM-210
When adding an RM-210 Remote Microphone Extension to expand the N-8610M, use the RM-210's Extension
cable and included Linkage Bracket to link the 2 units.
Follow the procedures below.
Step 1. Turn over both the N-8610RM and the RM-210, and keep them in close contact with each other.
Step 2. Connect between the RM-210 connection terminal (EXTENSION) on the N-8610RM side and the RM
connection terminal (EXTENSION) on the RM-210 side using the extension cable supplied with the
RM-210.
Extension cable
In this case, install the ferrite clamp
(supplied with RM-210)
supplied with the N-8610RM on the
Ferrite clamp
extension cable as shown below.
(white, supplied with N-8610RM)
RM-210
2
[Bottom]
N-8610RM
Extension cable
(supplied with RM-210)
Ferrite clamp
(white, supplied with N-8610RM)
Step 3. Link both the N-8610RM and the RM210 together using the Linkage Bracket B
supplied with the RM-210.
Secure the bracket with the 4 supplied
screws indicated by arrows.
Step 4. Fix both units securely using the Linkage
Bracket A (2 pieces) supplied with the
RM-210.
Secure them with the 8 supplied screws
indicated by arrows.
3
[Bottom]
Linkage bracket B
RM-210
4
Linkage bracket A
N-8610RM
Tip
Follow the same procedures when linking
additional RM-210. But you need not install the
ferrite clamp on the extension cable used to
connect between RM-210s.
Notes
• Because the Linkage Bracket A is provided with 2 spare screw holes, use them to link the 2 units if the
designated screw threaded holes are damaged.
• If incorrect or loose connection is found between both units, loosen all the bracket fixing screws to disassemble
the units and then link them again with the screws.
3-31
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
8.2. Wall Hanging
The N-8610RM can be mounted on a wall using an optional WB-RM200 Wall-Mounting Bracket.
8.2.1 N-8610RM
[WB-RM200 mounting dimensions]
Step 1. Install the WB-RM200 Wall-Mounting Bracket to
the wall.
In this case, leave the LAN cable out of the notch
in the bracket.
WB-RM200 (optional)
N-8610RM
83.5
220.3
WARNING
60.8
Note
Since there are 2 types of mounting screws
supplied with the WB-RM200 for an electrical
box and for wall. Select ones according to the
mounting method.
For electrical box: Machine screw M3.5 x 20
For wall mounting: Tapping screw 4 x 25
• Install the unit only in a location that can
structurally support the weight of the unit and
the mounting bracket. Doing otherwise may
result in the unit falling down and causing
personal injury and/or property damage.
• Be sure to use 2 screws when mounting the
bracket to the wall.
28
Unit: mm
Step 2. Hook the bottom surface of the N-8610RM onto
the WB-RM200.
Step 3. Plug the LAN cable into the N-8610RM's LAN
terminal.
In this case, install the ferrite clamp supplied with
the N-8610RM on the LAN cable as shown below.
LAN cable
LAN cable
3
Ferrite clamp
(gray, supplied with N-8610RM)
Notch
LAN
2
Wall mounting bracket
WB-RM200 (optional)
1
N-8610RM
Wall mounting screw
(supplied with the WB-RM200)
3-32
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
8.2.2 RM-210
The RM-210 can be mounted on a wall using an optional WB-RM200 Wall-Mounting Bracket.
Step 1. Install the N-8610RM to the wall. (Refer to the previous page.)
Step 2. Install the WB-RM200 used for mounting the RM-210
to the wall.
Step 3. Connect between the RM-210 connection terminal
(EXTENSION) on the N-8610RM side and the RM
connection terminal (EXTENSION) on the RM-210 side
using the extension cable supplied with the RM-210.
In this case, install the ferrite clamp supplied with the
N-8610RM on the LAN cable as shown at right.
Extension cable
(supplied with RM-210)
Ferrite clamp
(white, supplied with N-8610RM)
Step 4. Hook the bottom surface of the RM-210 onto the WB-RM200.
Ferrite clamp
(white, supplied with N-8610RM)
Extension cable
(supplied with RM-210)
RM-210
1
N-8610RM
3
2
4
Tip
Follow the same procedures when linking additional
RM-210. But you need not install the ferrite clamp on the
extension cable used to connect between RM-210s.
Wall mounting bracket
WB-RM200 (optional)
[WB-RM200 mounting dimensions]
WB-RM200 (optional)
WB-RM200 (optional)
RM-210
RM-210
6
71.5
83.5
220.3
60.8
N-8610RM
WB-RM200
(Necessary if one more RM-210 is added.)
30
28
123
111
Unit: mm
3-33
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
8.3. Creating Remote Microphone Name Labels
8.3.1. Creating name labels using the SX-2000 Setting Software
Using the SX-2000 Setting Software function, assigned names of preset N-8610RM and RM-210 Function keys
can be printed out. Once printed, cut out the printed names with scissors to use them as corresponding name
labels. The paper used for the name label must be under 0.2 mm in thickness.
Note
For creating and printing name labels using the SX-2000 Setting Software, see the "Printing Labels for Remote
Microphones" section in the setting software Instructions supplied with SX-2000 series unit.
8.3.2 Inserting the name label
• Fully insert the name label cut to the instructed size into the label entry slit.
• To remove the label, pull it out of the slit using the tip of knife blade.
Name label B
(Created and printed using
the SX-2000 Setting Software)
Name label entry slit
Zone 1
Zone 6
Zone 2
Zone 7
Zone 3
Zone 8
Zone 4
Zone 9
Zone 5
Zone 10
Name label entry slit
N-8610RM
Name label A
(Created and printed using
the SX-2000 Setting Software)
N-8610RM
IP REMOTE MICROPHONE STATION
3-34
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
8.3.3. If the name label is not printed correctly
The name label created using the SX-2000 Setting Software may not be printed in correct size depending on
the configuration environment of your PC. In such cases, try one of the methods described below.
(1) Preparation by hand
Copy the handwriting label on pages 3-36 and 3-37 to a paper with under 0.2 mm in thickness. After writing
names, cut out the pattern paper aligning it with the cutting guidelines.
(2) Preparation by using a PC or word processor
Prepare and print according to the instructions given in the "Dimensional diagram for printing devices"
shown below. Then cut out to the instructed size. The printing paper should be under 0.2 mm in thickness.
[Dimensional diagram for printing devices]
Name label A
Name label B
Cutting size: 30 x 110 mm
Cutting size: 30 x 136 mm
30
136
13.5
13
13.5
13
13
13 x 9 (=117)
110
39
13
30
3-35
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
[Preparing handwriting label]
Precautions on Printing
Be sure to print out the corresponding pages of this PDF file 100% in size.
To do so, set the print items of the Adobe Acrobat or Adobe Reader as follows.
Note that the Adobe Acrobat's or Adobe Reader's default setting will reduce the size of pages to be printed.
[Adobe Acrobat 6 – 9, Adobe Reader 6 – 9 settings]
Select [File > Print] from the menu, and the Print dialog box appears.
Set the items in the Page Handling section of the dialog box as follows.
"Page Scaling" item:
None
Other items:
Unchecked
[Adobe Acrobat X or XI, Adobe Reader X or XI settings]
Select [File > Print] from the menu, and the Print dialog box appears.
Make settings as shown below.
Page Sizing & Handling: Size
Size Options:
Actual size
Name label A
Name label B
Guideline
Actual size
3-36
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
Name label B
Guideline
Name label B
Name label B
Name label B
Actual size
3-37
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
9. Installation of DOOr Stations
Door station N-8050DS/8540DS/8640DS/8650DS can be installed in either of two ways: (1) flush mounting or
(2) wall surface mounting.
Note
When using the PA paging function, keep the station as far away from the PA paging speaker as possible to
avoid acoustic feedback.
9.1. Flush Mounting
[N-8050DS/8540DS/8640DS]
Attach the N-8050DS/8540DS/8640DS to the YC-150 Back box or an electrical box installed in a wall.
N-8050DS only
Acoustic material (supplied with the N-8050DS)
Wall surface
Note
Lay it down along the inside of the box.
N-8640DS only
Waterproof washer
(supplied with the N-8640DS)
YC-150 Back box
or 3-gang electrical box
[Installation completion drawing]
Unit: mm
Note
The wall should be over 12 mm thick, and the opening in the wall for
an electrical box should be under 115 mm (wide) by 162 mm (high).
Accessory screws
• The N-8050DS/8540DS comes with 2 types of screws: M4 x 25
and UNC No. 6-32 x 18.
For the electrical box provided with unified threads, use the UNC
No. 6-32 x 18.
• The N-8640DS comes with 2 types of screws: M4 x 20 and UNC
No. 6-32 x 20.
For the electrical box provided with unified threads, use the UNC
No. 6-32 x 20.
92
35
Machine screw
M4 x 25 (supplied with the N-8050DS/8540DS)
or M4 x 20 (supplied with the N-8640DS)
162
N-8050DS/8540DS/8640DS
(This figure represents the N-8050DS/8540DS.)
83.5
115
Note
This
figure
represents
the
N-8050DS/8540DS. Dimensions of
the N-8640DS are the same as the
N-8050DS/8540DS.
3-38
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
Notes
Seal the panel edges.
• When controlling an electronic lock with the N-8050DS/8540DS/8640DS
unit, use "Torx" screws to attach the unit at installation so that it cannot be
detached easily.
• For the N-8050DS installation, be sure to ground the YC-150 or electrical
box.
For the N-8540DS installation, be sure to ground the YC-150, electrical box,
or the frame ground terminal on the unit's rear (p. 3-79).
• For the N-8640DS installation, be sure to ground both the YC-150 or electrical
box, and the frame ground terminal on the unit's rear (p. 3-80).
• When installing the unit at outdoor or locations where it gets wet with water,
tightly seal the panel edges. Besides, provide a weep hole at the underside
of the mounting box to permit water to drain off.
• When installing the N-8050DS/8540DS under difficult environmental
The figure represents
conditions such as in coastal areas or at humid locations, cover the inside N-8500DS/8540DS's front panel.
of the N-8050DS/8540DS with coating. For the coating method, consult your
TOA dealer.
• Treat unused cables so as not to short-circuit. (N-8640DS only)
[YC-150 dimensional drawing]
10
Unit: mm
A
4-φ6
6-M4
182
147
B
46
46
110
184
138
44
A
46
46
A
B
A
10
44
57
60
73
83.5
119
10
93
B
Dimension of knockout hole
A: φ21.5
B: φ27.1
117
3-39
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
[N-8650DS]
Mount the panel mount frame to the YC-150 Back box or 3-gang electrical box installed in a wall, then attach
the N-8650DS to the panel mount frame.
Step 1. Loosen the screw on the N-8650DS's bottom, then detach the panel mount frame.
Screw
Panel mount frame
N-8650DS's bottom
Step 2. Mount the panel mount frame to the YC-150
or electrical box.
Wall surface
Step 3. Attach the N-8650DS to the panel mount
frame.
Hook the tabs on the N-8650DS's upper side
into the panel mount frame's slots, fit them
into place, then secure the both bottom sides
with a screw.
Panel mount frame
Tab
Panel mount frame
Screw hole
N-8650DS
YC-150 Back box or 3-gang
electrical box
Screw
Machine screw M4 x 20 (supplied with the N-8650DS)
Bottom view
Accessory screws
• The N-8650DS comes with 2 type of screws: M4 x 20 and UNC
N0. 6-32 x 20.
• For the electrical box provided with unified threads, use the UNC
N0. 6-32 x 20.
Note
Treat unused cables so as not to short-circuit.
Tip
Refer to p. 3-39 for YC-150 dimensional drawing.
3-40
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
9.2. Wall Surface Mounting
[N-8050DS/8540DS/8640DS]
Attach the N-8050DS/8540DS/8640DS to the YS-13A Wall-mount box installed on a wall.
N-8050DS only
N-8640DS only
Wall
surface
Acoustic material (supplied with the N-8050DS)
Install the YC-13A with its rear
plate removed.
Note
Lay it down along the inside of the box.
N-8640DS only
Waterproof washer
(supplied with the N-8640DS)
Rear plate
Note
Make a weep hole (to
allow water to exit) in the
bottom.
YS-13A Wall-mount box
N-8050DS/8540DS/8640DS
(This figure represents the N-8050DS/8540DS.)
[Installation completion drawing]
Unit: mm
• The N-8050DS/8540DS comes with 2 type of screws: M4 x 25
and UNC No. 6-32 x 18.
Use the M4 x 25 screw.
• The N-8640DS comes with 2 types of screws: M4 x 20 and UNC
No. 6-32 x 20.
Use the M4 x 20 screw.
[YS-13A dimensional drawing]
35
Accessory screws
92
162
Machine screw M4 x 25
(supplied with the N-8050DS/8540DS)
or M4 x 20 (supplied with the N-8640DS)
83.5
115
Note
This
figure
represents
the
N-8050DS/8540DS. Dimensions of
the N-8640DS are the same as the
N-8050DS/8540DS.
Unit: mm
163.5
92
46
4-M4 (for door station mounting)
6-φ4.5 (for wall mounting)
83.5
116.5
55
3-41
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
Notes
• When controlling an electronic lock with the
N-8050DS/8540DS/8640DS unit, use "Torx" screws to
attach the unit at installation so that it cannot be detached
easily.
• For the N-8640DS installation, be sure to ground the rearmounted frame ground terminal (p. 3-80).
• When installing the unit outdoors or at locations where
it gets wet with water, tightly seal the edges of the panel
and those of the box's rear surface in contact with the wall
surface. Besides, make a weep hole (to allow water to
exit) in the YS-13A's bottom.
• When installing the N-8050DS/8540DS under difficult
environmental conditions such as in coastal areas or at
humid locations, cover the inside of the N-8050DS/8540DS
with coating. For the coating method, consult your TOA
dealer.
• Treat unused cables so as not to short-circuit. (N-8640DS
only)
Seal the panel edges and
rear edges (on the wall side).
YS-13A
Wall surface
The figure represents the N-8050DS/8540DS.
3-42
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
[N-8650DS]
Attach the N-8650DS to the YS-13A Wall-mount box installed on a wall.
Step 1. Loosen the screw on the N-8650DS's bottom, then detach the panel mount frame.
Screw
Panel mount frame
N-8650DS's bottom
Step 2. Mount the panel mount frame to the back
box.
Step 3. Attach the N-8650DS to the panel mount
frame.
Hook the tabs on the N-8650DS's upper side
into the panel mount frame's slots, fit them
into place, then secure the both bottom sides
with a screw.
Panel mount frame
Install the YC-13A with its
bottom plate removed.
Tab
Rear plate
Wall surface
Screw hole
Panel mount frame
N-8650DS
Screw
Bottom view
YS-13A
Machine screw M4 x 20 (supplied with the N-8650DS)
Accessory screws
The N-8650DS comes with 2 types of screws: M4 x 20
and UNC No. 6-32 x 20. Use the M4 x 20 screw.
Note
Treat unused cables so as not to short-circuit.
Tip
Refer to p. 3-41 for YS-13A dimensional drawing.
3-43
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
10. Installation of substations
The Substations can be installed in either of 2 ways: flush mounting using the YC-302 2-gang electrical box or
commercial electrical box, or wall surface mounting using the YC-822/823 Wall-mount box.
Note
When using the PA paging function, keep the station as far away from the PA paging speaker as possible to
avoid acoustic feedback.
10.1. Flush Mounting
Mount the substation to the YC-302 or electrical box mounted in the wall.
YC-302 or electrical box
Wall surface
Substation
Machine screw M4 x 25
(supplied with the substation)
[Installation completion drawing]
Unit: mm
Substations come with 2 types of screws: M4 x 25 and UNC No.
6-32 x 18.
For the electrical box provided with unified threads, use the
UNC No. 6-32 x 18.
46
120
37
18.2
83.5
Accessory screws
120
Note: This figure represents the RS-160/170.
Note: This figure represents the RS-160/170.
Note
When installing the RS-170/180/470/480 at outdoor or locations where
it gets wet with water, tightly seal the panel edges. Besides, provide
a weep hole at the underside of the mounting box to permit water to
drain off.
Seal the panel edges.
Note: This figure represents the RS-480.
3-44
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
[YC-302 dimensional drawing]
[Outlet box]
[Cover]
Unit: mm
3-φ21.5 (Knockout hole)
2-φ27.1 (Knockout hole)
73
102
83.5
106
4-M4
102
2-M4
13
44
46
92
106
4-φ21.5 (Knockout hole)
4-φ27.1 (Knockout hole)
3-45
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
10.2. Wall Surface Mounting
Attach the Substation to the YC-822 or YC-823 Wall-mount box installed on a wall.
Wall surface
Substation
YC-822/823
Machine screw M4 x 25
(supplied with the substation)
Note: This figure represents the RS-480.
Note
In the case of the YC-823,
install it facing the ø6
weep hole side down.
YC-823 bottom
ø6 weep hole
Note: This figure represents the YC-822.
Accessory screws
The substation comes with 2 types of screws: M4 x 25 and UNC No. 6-32 x 18.
Use the M4 x 25 screw.
[Installation completion drawing]
120
83.5
Unit: mm
46
Seal the panel edges.
120
Note: This figure represents the RS-480.
Note
When installing the RS-170/180/470/480 outdoors or at
locations where it gets wet with water, tightly seal the panel
edges. Besides, provide a weep hole on the underside of the
mounting box to permit water to drain off.
Note: This figure represents the RS-480.
3-46
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
[YC-822 dimensional drawing]
4-M4 (for substation mounting)
60
8-5×7 oval hole (for wall mounting)
46
φ28 hole
66.7
73
83.5
83
φ28 (Knockout hole)
124
30
Unit: mm
84
124
[YC-823 dimensional drawing]
4-M4 (for substation mounting)
8-5×7 oval hole (for wall mounting)
46
73
124
83
φ28 hole
66.7
84
124
φ6 weep hole
10
61
62
83.5
Unit: mm
10
3-47
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
11. Installation of switch panel
Switch panel RS-140/143/144 can be installed in either of two ways: (1) flush mounting or (2) wall surface
mounting.
11.1. Flush Mounting
Mount the Switch panel to the YC-801 Flush-mount box or electrical box mounted in the wall.
Wall surface
Machine screw M4 x 30
(supplied with the RS-140/143/144)
83.5 mm
UNC No. 6-32 × 18
(supplied with the RS-140/143/144)
YC-801
or electrical box
Mounting bracket
(supplied with the RS-140/143/144)
RS-140
Accessory screws
The RS-140/143/144 comes with 2 types of screws to match the box screw threads: M4 x 30 and UNC No. 6-32
x 30.
For the electrical box provided with unified threads, use the UNC No. 6-32 x 30.
[Installation completion drawing]
115
68.5
Unit: mm
70
Note: This figure represents the RS-140.
3-48
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
[YC-801 dimensional drawing]
72
30
2-φ6
B
10
2-M4
B
44
50
83.5
119
A
A
10
13
117
A
10
Unit: mm
10
Dimension of knockout hole
A: φ21.5
B: φ27.1
70
3-49
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
11.2. Wall Surface Mounting
Attach the Switch panel to the YC-802 Wall-mount box installed on a wall.
Wall surface
Machine screw M4 x 30
(supplied with the RS-140/143/144)
RS-140
83.5 mm
YC-802
Wall-mount box
Mounting bracket
(supplied with the RS-140/143/144)
UNC No. 6-32 × 18
(supplied with the RS-140/143/144)
Accessory screws
The RS-140/143/144 comes with 2 types of screws to match the box screw threads: M4 x 30 and UNC No. 6-32
x 30.
Use the M4 x 30 screw.
[Installation completion drawing]
115
68.5
Unit: mm
70
Note: This figure represents the RS-140.
3-50
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
[YC-802 dimensional drawing]
Unit: mm
φ34 knockout hole
50.5
22.5
4-7x5
44
124
15
83.5
73
66.7
42
29
75
4-double knockout hole
3-51
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
12. Installation of option handset
Option handset RS-141/191/481 can be installed in a wall.
Mount the option handset to the YC-302 or electrical box mounted in the wall.
YC-302 or electrical box
Wall surface
Machine screw M4 x 25
(supplied with the RS-141/191/481)
Option handset
Note: This figure represents the RS-191.
Accessory screws
The RS-141/191/481 comes with 2 types of screws: M4 x 25 and UNC No. 6-32 x 18.
For the electrical box provided with unified threads, use the UNC No. 6-32 x 18.
3-52
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
13. Wiring
13.1. Exchange Connection
N-8000EX/8010EX Exchange
16 lines
Be sure to ground.
To AC mains or a UPS
(Uninterruptible power supply system)*
Mini-clamp connector
232D-02S1B-DA5 (DDK)
(Supplied with the N-8000EX/8010EX)
Note
If there is a danger of lightning strikes,
insert an appropriate power gap arrester
into the power line.
Lines should be twisted
Both upper and lower terminals (clip terminals)
are internally connected.
E-7000TB
Terminal board
Note
Once the station line connected between a station and the
exchange is short-circuited or a ground fault occurs on the
cable, power cannot be supplied to the station even when
the short or ground fault is removed.
To restore the situation, be sure to disconnect the cable
connector at the station or exchange, and then connect it
again after several seconds.
Station
* Select an appropriate UPS taking into consideration the total power consumption of all system components
and the required backup time. On-line uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is recommended.
Reference
Exchange: 50 W (rated)
8-Port 10M/100M Switching Hub: 10 W (Differs depending on products.)
3-53
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
N-8000EX only
N-8000EX/8010EX Exchange
RJ-45 connector
To network
Removable terminal plug
(supplied with the N-8000EX)
Control input
PA Paging amplifier, etc
Line input
[General description of connection]
For cables, refer to p. 3-81.
1. Power supply connection
Connect the supplied power supply cord to AC
Mains or a UPS (Uninterruptible power supply
feeder).
About power supply cord handling
The supplied power supply cord is designed for
exclusive use with the N-8000EX/8010EX.
Never use it with other equipment.
2. Line terminal connection
The line terminals have no polarity.
(Refer to p. 3-83, Mini-clamp connector connection.)
3. Paging audio output terminal connection
(N-8000EX only)
Paging audio output terminals have no polarity.
(Refer to p. 3-83, Terminal plug connection.)
[Specification of paging audio output]
0 dB*, 600 , balanced
4. Paging contact output terminal connection
(N-8000EX only)
Paging contact output terminals have no polarity.
(Refer to p. 3-83, Terminal plug connection.)
[Specification of paging contact output]
No voltage make contact output
Withstand voltage: Max. 24 V DC
Control current:
Max. 0.5 A
5. Network connection
Can be connected to a network of 10BASET/100BASE-TX in auto-sensing.
Use a straight through cable of UTP category 5 or
more for this connection.
6. Station connection
The connection method differs depending on types
of stations. (Refer to p. 3-55, Station and Exchange
connection.)
* 0 dB = 1 V
3-54
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
13.2. Connections of Stations Used in conjunction with the Exchange
13.2.1. Station and Exchange connection
The cables from the N-8000EX Exchange to the Station have no polarity.
[N-8000MS/8010MS/8011MS]
To connect the cables from the N-8000EX Exchange to the Master Station, use the connection cable supplied
with each station and a commercially available RJ-11 modular jack.
To the exchange via
the Terminal Board
Connection cable
(supplied with each station)
Twisted pair cable
RJ-11 modular rosette
(commercially available)
Station
[N-8020MS]
To connect the cables from the N-8000EX Exchange to the Master Station, use the connection cable directly
attached to the station and a commercially available RJ-11 modular jack.
To the exchange via
the Terminal Board
Connection cable
Twisted pair cable
RJ-11 modular rosette
(commercially available)
N-8020MS
3-55
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
[N-8031MS/8033MS]
To connect the cables from the N-8000EX Exchange to the Master station, use the removable terminal plug
(2P) supplied with the N-8031MS/8033MS.
Refer to p. 3-83 "Terminal plug connection."
To the exchange via the Terminal Board
Twisted pair cable
Removable terminal plug (2p)
(supplied with the N-8031MS/8033MS)
2 1
1 2
Line connection terminals
N-8031MS/8033MS (Rear)
[N-8050DS]
Directly connect the cable coming from the Terminal Board to the N-8050DS's line connection terminals.
Refer to p. 3-83 "Terminal plug connection."
To the exchange via the Terminal Board
Twisted pair cable
LINE H C
N-8050DS (Rear)
13.2.2. Headset plug connection (N-8000MS only)
HOT
COM
Microphone sensitivity: –49 dB*
HOT
COM
Speaker impedance: 32
* 0 dB = 1 V/pa (1 kHz)
3-56
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
13.2.3. External speaker terminals and control output terminals connections
[N-8000MS]
These terminals are designed for exclusive connection with external speakers.
Press down the desired push-in terminal button on the rear panel with a tip of standard driver, and insert the
cable securely.
[N-8020MS]
Follow the procedure below for external speaker terminals and control output terminals connections.
Step 1. Remove a protection cover.
Unscrew the 3 fitting screws securing the protection
cover.
N-8020MS rear view
Protection cover
Fitting screws for the
protection cover
View of the terminal where
protection cover is removed
Step 2. Pull out a protection cap on the desired terminal.
Note
Do not remove the protection cover on the unused
terminal.
Protection cap
Step 3. Run the cable through the protection cover removed,
and then connect it to the push-in terminal.
COM
HOT
For the type of cable, refer to p. 3-81,
3-73,
Type of Cable.
Protection cover
11 mm
Press down the desired push-in
terminal button with a tip of
standard driver, and insert the
cable securely.
Push-in terminal
[Connection example of control output terminals]
The terminals permit connection of an external device such as an indicator or relay.
N-8020MS's control output terminals
Open collector output: 30 V DC, 50 mA
External
power supply
Diode
COM
HOT
–
Relay
+
24 V DC
GND
3-57
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
Step 4. After inserting the cables in the supplied rubber bushing, insert the bushing into the station, then put
the protection cover back in place.
Protection cover
Protection cover fixing screw
(the screw removed in Step 1)
Since wire leads can be pinched,
make them as short as possible.
Rubber bushing
(supplied with the N-8020MS)
13.2.4. N-8031MS and RS-191 connections
Connecting the RS-191 Option Handset to the N-8031MS permits handset conversation.
Step 1. Remove the handset jumper attached to the N-8031MS's handset connection terminal, then insert it to
the socket on the RS-191's rear PC board.
RS-191 rear
N-8031MS rear
Socket
Handset jumper
Handset connection terminal
Note
Though the socket on the PC board is faced inside, you can
insert the handset jumper into the socket from the side.
Step 2. Install the ferrite clamp (supplied with the N-8031MS) onto the RS-191's handset cables. Then, connect
the cables to the N-8031MS's handset connection terminal.
Handset cable
Ferrite clamp
(supplied with the N-8031MS)
Handset cable
RS-191
Handset connection terminal
N-8031MS
Note
Run the cables along the ferrite groove,
and clamp them.
3-58
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
13.2.5. N-8031MS/8033MS and external switch connections
External switches such as footswitches can be connected to the N-8031MS's/8033MS's external dial input
terminal.
Note
The cable length from the external switch should not exceed 3 m.
[Connections]
7
8
9
C
COM
8 mm
7
8
9
C
COM
External dial input terminal
Press down.
Cable
N-8031MS/8033MS rear
External dial input terminal block
Note: For cables, refer to p. 3-81.
Turning on each switch connected to the terminal [7], [8], [9], or [C] permits the same operation as performed
by pressing the dial [7], [8], [9], or [C].
For example, the pre-programmed station numbers can be called by pressing the foot switch if one-touch
dialing is programmed into these dials.
Refer to p. 2-12, 5-83.
13.2.6. N-8050DS and external relay connections
An external relay can be connected to the N-8050DS's external output terminals. (Refer to p. 3-83 "Terminal
plug connection.")
To N-8000EX/8010EX Exchange
External
power supply
Diode
-
Relay
+
24 V DC
GND
Open collector output: 30 V DC, 50 mA
LINE H C
N-8050DS (Rear panel)
3-59
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
13.3. N-8000RS/8010RS Substation Interface Unit Connection
N-8000RS/8010RS Substation interface unit
16 lines
1
2
Be sure to ground.
Note
If there is a danger of lightning
strikes, insert an appropriate
surge arrester into the power line.
3
Red
3P removable terminal plug
(supplied with the N-8000RS
/8010RS)
To AC mains or a UPS
(Uninterruptible power supply
system)*
Brown
2-core shielded cable
Orange (A)
RJ-45 connector
Orange
To network
2-core shielded cable
Brown (B)
Black (C)
Brown (A)
Red (B)
Orange (C)
RS-150, RS-160,
RS-170, or RS-180
RS-140, RS-142, RS-143, or RS-144
Note: This figure represents the RS-160/170.
Note: This figure represents
the RS-140.
[General description of connection]
For cables, refer to p. 3-81.
1. Power supply connection
Connect the supplied power supply cord to AC
Mains or a UPS (Uninterruptible power supply).
2. Substation, Switch panel, or Switch board
Connections
(Refer to p. 3-83, Terminal plug connection.)
About power supply cord handling
The supplied power supply cord is designed for
exclusive use with the N-8000RS/8010RS.
Never use it with other equipment.
3. Network connection
Can be connected to a network of 10BASET/100BASE-TX in auto-sensing.
Use a straight through cable of UTP category 5 or
more for this connection.
* Select an appropriate UPS taking into consideration the total power consumption of all system components
and the required backup time. On-line uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is recommended.
Reference
N-8000RS: 40 W (rated) for CE version, 35 W (rated) for CU version
N-8010RS: 30 W (rated) for CE version, 25 W (rated) for CU version
8-Port 10M/100M Switching Hub: 10 W (Differs depending on products.)
3-60
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
13.4. Connections of Stations Used in conjunction with the N-8000RS/8010RS
13.4.1. RS-180 and external relay connections
External
power supply
Diode
RS-180
Blue (HOT)
–
Relay
+
24 V DC
White (COM)
GND
Open collector output: 24 V DC, Max. 30 mA
Note: Cut out the control cables if they are not used to avoid short-circuiting.
13.4.2. Substation interface unit and RS-140 Switch panel connections
Connect the cables from the RS-140 to the N-8000RS/8010RS using the supplied removable terminal plug.
13.4.3. RS-140/142/143/144 and speaker connections
N-8000RS/8010RS Substation interface unit
Brown
3P removable terminal plug
(supplied with the N-8000RS
/8010RS)
Red
Orange
2-core shielded cable
RS-140/142/143/144
Note
Cut out the unused Wire (purple)
to avoid short-circuiting.
Brown (A)
Red (B)
Orange (C)
Yellow (C+)
Green (B+)
Blue (A+)
N.C.
2-core shielded cable
Blue (COM)
Green (HOT)
Purple (H)
Note: This figure represents
the RS-140.
High-impedance speaker
(Impedance: 600 Ω or more)
3-61
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
13.4.4. RS-140/142/143/144, RS-141, and speaker connections
N-8000RS/8010RS Substation interface unit
3P removable terminal plug
(supplied with the N-8000RS/8010RS)
Brown
Red
Orange
2-core shielded cable
RS-140/142/143/144
Brown (A)
Red (B)
Orange (C)
N.C.
Yellow (C+)
Green (B+)
Blue (A+)
Purple (H)
Note: This figure represents
the RS-140.
RS-141
2-core shielded cable
Brown (A)
Red (B)
Orange (C)
Yellow (C+)
Green (B+)
Blue (A+)
Green (HOT)
High-impedance speaker
(Impedance: 600 Ω or more)
Blue (COM)
Purple (H)
2-core shielded cable
Note
Cut out unused wires to avoid short-circuiting.
3-62
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
13.5. N-8400RS Substation Interface Unit Connection
N-8400RS Substation interface unit
16 lines
1
2
3
RJ-45 connector
Be sure to ground.
To AC mains or a UPS
(Uninterruptible power supply system)*
4P removable terminal plug
(supplied with the N-8400RS)
To network
Two pairs of twisted pair cable
Note
If there is a danger of lightning strikes,
insert an appropriate surge arrester
into the power line.
To station
[General description of connection]
For cables, refer to p. 3-81.
1. Power supply connection
Connect the supplied power supply cord to AC
Mains or a UPS (Uninterruptible power supply).
About power supply cord handling
The supplied power supply cord is designed for
exclusive use with the N-8400RS.
Never use it with other equipment.
2. Station connections
The connection method differs depending on types
of stations.
(Refer to p. 3-64 for station connections, and p.
3-83 for Terminal plug connection.)
3. Network connection
Can be connected to a network of 10BASET/100BASE-TX in auto-sensing.
Use a straight through cable of UTP category 5 or
more for this connection.
* Select an appropriate UPS taking into consideration the total power consumption of all system components
and the required backup time. On-line uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is recommended.
Reference
N-8400RS: 35 W (rated) for CE version, 31 W (rated) for CU version
8-Port 10M/100M Switching Hub: 10 W (Differs depending on products.)
3-63
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
13.6. Connections of Stations Used in conjunction with the N-8400RS
13.6.1. Station and substation interface unit connections
[N-8410MS]
[RS-450/460/470/480]
N-8400RS Substation interface unit
N-8400RS Substation interface unit
4P removable terminal plug
(supplied with the N-8400RS)
4P removable terminal plug
(supplied with the N-8400RS)
Two pairs of twisted pair cable
Two pairs of twisted pair cable
To line 1 (brown)
To line 2 (red)
To line 3
To line 2
To line 1
To line 4
RJ-11 modular rosette
(commercially available)
To line 3 (orange)
To line 4 (yellow)
RS-450, RS-460, RS-470,
or RS-480
Note: This figure represents the RS-450.
Connection cable
(supplied with the N-8410MS)
N-8410MS
3-64
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
13.6.2. RS-480 and external relay connections
External
power supply
Diode
RS-480
Blue (HOT)
–
Relay
+
White (COM)
24 V DC
GND
Open collector output: 24 V DC, Max. 30 mA
Note: Cut out the control cables if they are not used to avoid short-circuiting.
13.6.3. RS-480 and RS-481 connections
Connect the RS-480 handset cables to the RS-481's handset connection cables.
Wall surface
Handset cables
RS-481
Handset cables
RS-480
Note
When using the RS-481 Option handset, cut the
jumper wire next to the handset joint connector on
the circuit board as illustrated at right.
If not cut, sound comes out from the RS-480's front
speaker and returns back to the handset’s
microphone, resulting in acoustic feedback.
Jumper wire
Handset joint
connector
RS-480 (top)
3-65
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
13.7. Multi Interface Unit Connection
N-8000MI
Be sure to ground this
terminal unless the unit
connects to a
PBX.
PBX.
(For grounding in PBX
connection,
refer
connection, refer
to to
p.
p.
3-61.)
3-68.)
9P removable terminal plug
(supplied with the N-8000MI)
Contact input signals
Contact output signals
Contact input signals
Contact output signals
To AC mains or a UPS
(Uninterruptible power supply system)*
Note
If there is a danger of lightning strikes,
insert an appropriate surge arrester
into the power line.
[General description of connection]
For cables, refer to p. 3-81.
1. Power supply connection
Connect the supplied power supply cord to AC
Mains or a UPS (Uninterruptible power supply).
About power supply cord handling
The supplied power supply cord is designed for
exclusive use with the N-8000MI.
Never use it with other equipment.
2. Contact input terminal connection
(Refer to p. 3-83, Terminal plug connection.)
[Specification of no-voltage make contact input]
Short-circuit current: 10 mA
Open-circuit voltage: 12 V
3. Contact output terminal connection
Contact output terminals have no polarity.
(Refer to p. 3-83, Terminal plug connection.)
[Specification of relay contact output]
Withstand voltage: 24 V DC
Control current:
Max. 0.5 A
* Select an appropriate UPS taking into consideration the total power consumption of all system components
and the required backup time. On-line uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is recommended.
Reference
Multi interface unit: 19 W (rated) for CE version, 16 W (rated) for CU version
8-Port 10M/100M Switching Hub: 10W (Differs depending on products.)
3-66
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
N-8000MI
M
E
M
E
Input volume
controls
RJ-45 connector
8P removable
terminal plug
(supplied with
the N-8000MI)
To network
Mini-clamp connector
232D-02S1B-DA5 (DDK)
(supplied with the N-8000MI)
To the tie-line unit of intercom system
or the PBX's analog E&M interfaces
Control input
Line output *1
Line input *1
Control output
BGM player, etc.
Amplifier, etc.
*1 Connect the Line input cables in a way as shown below according to the type
of connected unit's input or output.
• Connecting to a balanced input or output
N-8000MI
Hot (H)
Cold (C)
Earth (E)
Connected Unit
• Connecting to an unbalanced input or output
N-8000MI
4. Audio input terminal connection
Audio input terminals have no polarity.
(Refer to p. 3-83, Terminal plug connection.)
[Specification of audio input]
Max. 0 dB*2, over 10 kΩ, balanced
Audio input sensitivity for each channel can be
adjusted in the range of 0 to –25 dB*2 with the
input volume control. Adjust the input sensitivity
depending on the equipment to be connected.
(Default factory setting: 0 dB*2)
[Specification of control input]
No-voltage make contact
Short-circuit current: 10 mA
Open-circuit voltage: 12 V
5. Audio output terminal connection
Audio output terminals have no polarity.
(Refer to p. 3-83, Terminal plug connection.)
[Specification of audio output]
Max. 0 dB*2, under 600 , balanced
Hot (H)
Earth (E)
Note
You can use only either
of the Audio input/output
CH1 terminals or the PBX
interface CH1 terminal.
Likewise, it is the same for
CH2.
Connected Unit
[Specification of control output]
Relay contact output
Withstand voltage: 24 V DC
Control current:
Max. 0.5 A
6. PBX interface terminal connection
Differs depending on the connections to the
Exchange of the EXES-2000 or EXES-6000 by
a tie-line, or to the PBX exchange via the analog
E&M interface.
(Refer to p. 3-68 for the connection method.)
(Refer to p. 3-83, Mini-clamp connector connection.)
7. Network connection
Can be connected to a network of 10BASET/100BASE-TX in auto-sensing.
Use a straight through cable of UTP category 5 or
more for this connection.
*2 0 dB = 1 V
3-67
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
[Connecting to the PBX's analog E&M interface]
Connect the PBX's transmitting line to the unit's RX terminal, and the PBX's receiving line to the TX terminal.
Also connect the PBX's M (Mouth) line to the unit's E (Ear) terminal, and the PBX's E line to the M terminal.
CH1
M
TX
CH2
E
RX
M
C
TX
E
RX
C
N-8000MI's PBX interface terminal
To PBX's ground point
To PBX analog E&M interface's M and E lines
To PBX analog E&M interface's transmitting line (T2)
To PBX analog E&M interface's receiving line (R2)
To PBX's ground point
2 channels
To PBX analog E&M interface's M and E lines
To PBX analog E&M interface's transmitting line (T1)
To PBX analog E&M interface's receiving line (R1)
Notes
• The "C" terminals for CH1 and CH2 are internally connected to the unit body (functional earth terminal).
• Do not ground the Functional earth terminal (No. 6 on p. 1-60) in this PBX connection.
Tips
• Output level and input sensitivity can be adjusted in the range of 0 to 15 dB depending on the equipment to
be connected and cable length. (Refer to p. 5-46.)
• The Line attribute (Address signaling) and Line start method (Start dial supervision signaling) can be set for
the connected equipment. (Refer to p. 5-46.)
[Connecting to the Intercom's Tie-Line Unit]
Connect the intercom's transmitting line to the unit's RX terminal, and the receiving line to the TX terminal.
CH1
M
TX
RX
CH2
E
M
C
TX
RX
E
C
N-8000MI's PBX interface terminal
To Intercom's transmitting
line (T1)
To Intercom's receiving
line (R1)
To Intercom's transmitting
line (T2)
To Intercom's receiving
line (R2)
2 channels
Tip
Output level and input sensitivity can be adjusted
in the range of 0 to 15 dB depending on the
equipment to be connected and cable length.
(Refer to p. 5-46.)
3-68
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
13.8. Direct Select Unit Connection
N-8000DI Direct select unit
1
*1
Be sure to ground.
To AC mains or a UPS
(Uninterruptible power supply system)*
2
Contact input signals
2
Contact input signals
Note
If there is a danger of lightning strikes,
insert an appropriate surge arrester
into the power line.
2
Contact input signals
2
Contact input signals
*1 10P removable terminal plug
(supplied with the N-8000DI)
[General description of connection]
For cables, refer to p. 3-81.
1. Power supply connection
Connect the supplied power supply cord to AC
Mains or a UPS (Uninterruptible power supply).
About power supply cord handling
The supplied power supply cord is designed for
exclusive use with the N-8000DI.
Never use it with other equipment.
2. Contact input terminal connection
(Refer to p. 3-83, Terminal plug connection.)
[Specification of no-voltage make contact input]
Short-circuit current: 5 mA
Open-circuit voltage: 24 V
* Select an appropriate UPS taking into consideration the total power consumption of all system components
and the required backup time. On-line uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is recommended.
Reference
Direct select unit: 16 W (rated) for CE version, 16 W (rated) for CU version
8-Port 10M/100M Switching Hub: 10 W (Differs depending on products.)
3-69
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
N-8000DI Direct select unit
3
Contact output signals
3
Contact output signals
3
Contact output signals
4
RJ-45 connector
To network
16P removable terminal plug
(supplied with the N-8000DI)
3
Contact output signals
3. Contact output terminal connection
Contact output terminals have no polarity.
(Refer to p. 3-83, Terminal plug connection.)
[Specification of relay contact output]
Withstand voltage: 24 V DC
Control current:
2 mA – 500 mA
4. Network connection
Can be connected to a network of 10BASET/100BASE-TX in auto-sensing.
Use a straight through cable of UTP category 5 or
more for this connection.
3-70
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
13.9. Audio Interface Unit Connection
N-8000AF Audio interface unit
1
Be sure to ground.
2
3
4
RJ-45
connector
*2
*1
7
5
To AC mains or a UPS
(Uninterruptible power supply system)*5
Contact input
signals
Note
If there is a danger of lightning strikes,
insert an appropriate surge arrester
into the power line.
6
Contact output
signals
*3
To network
*4
Make connections as follows when the
connected device has unbalanced inputs.
Hot (H)
Cold (C)
Earth (E)
Connected
Unit
N-8000AF
5
Contact input
signals
To mixer, power amplifier, etc.
6
Contact output
signals
To microphone,
audio device, etc.
To program timer, etc.
*1 3P removable terminal plug
*3 5P removable terminal plug
*2 2P removable terminal plug
*4 8P removable terminal plug
(supplied with the N-8000AF)
(supplied with the N-8000AF)
(supplied with the N-8000AF)
(supplied with the N-8000AF)
[General description of connection]
For cables, refer to p. 3-81.
1. Power supply connection
Connect the supplied power supply cord to AC
Mains or a UPS (Uninterruptible power supply).
About power supply cord handling
The supplied power supply cord is designed for
exclusive use with the N-8000AF.
Never use it with other equipment.
2. Audio output terminal connection
Connect the mixer, power amplifier, etc. to this
terminal using the two-core shielded cable.
(Refer to p. 3-83, Terminal plug connection.)
[Audio output terminal specifications]
0 dB*6, 600 Ω, balanced.
This terminal outputs line level audio signal.
H: Hot
C: Cold
E: Earth
*6 0 dB = 1 V
*5 Select an appropriate UPS taking into consideration the total power consumption of all system components
and the required backup time. On-line uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is recommended.
Reference
Audio interface unit: 7 W (rated) for CE version, 7 W (rated) for CU version
8-Port 10M/100M Switching Hub: 10W (Differs depending on products.)
3-71
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
3. Audio input terminal connection
Connect the microphone, audio device, etc. to this
terminal using the two-core shielded cable.
(Refer to p. 3-83, Terminal plug connection.)
[Audio input terminal specifications]
-58 – 0 dB*6, 2 kΩ, balanced.
This terminal inputs microphone level or line level
audio signals.
Use software to switch signal levels between
microphone and line.
H: Hot
C: Cold
E: Earth
4. Time sync input terminal connections
Connect the program timer, etc. to this terminal.
(Refer to p. 3-83, Terminal plug connection.)
[Specification of no-voltage make contact input]
Short-circuit current: 5 mA
Open-circuit voltage: 24 V
5. Contact input terminal connection
(Refer to p. 3-83, Terminal plug connection.)
[Specification of no-voltage make contact input]
Short-circuit current: 5 mA
Open-circuit voltage: 24 V
6. Contact output terminal connection
Contact output terminals have no polarity.
(Refer to p. 3-83, Terminal plug connection.)
[Specification of relay contact output]
Withstand voltage: 24 V DC
Control current:
2 mA – 500 mA
7. Network connection
Can be connected to a network of 10BASET/100BASE-TX in auto-sensing.
Use a straight through cable of UTP category 5 or
more for this connection.
*6 0 dB = 1 V
3-72
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
13.10. C/O Interface Unit Connection
N-8000CO C/O interface unit
1
Be sure to ground.
2
3
RJ-45 connector
To network
To AC mains or a UPS
(Uninterruptible power supply system)*3
Mini-clamp connector
232D-02S1B-DA5 (DDK)
(supplied with the N-8000CO)
Note
If there is a danger of lightning strikes,
insert an appropriate surge arrester
into the power line.
*1 Install
the protector if the telephone
company has not already installed it.
*2 This
terminal is installed by the telephone
company.
A pair of twisted pair cables
Protector *1
U.S.O.C *2
RJ11C or W
Note
The Interface Unit’s DC resistance is 327 Ω
(maximum).
Depending on line resistance conditions, the
unit might not be useable.
Central office line
(or PBX extension)
[General description of connection]
For cables, refer to p. 3-81.
1. Power supply connection
Connect the supplied power supply cord to AC
Mains or a UPS (Uninterruptible power supply).
About power supply cord handling
The supplied power supply cord is designed for
exclusive use with the N-8000CO.
Never use it with other equipment.
2. C/O line connection
Connect the C/O line to the PSTN (public switched
telephone network) using the supplied mini-clamp
connector.
(Refer to p. 3-83, Mini-clamp connector connection.)
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of fire, use only No.26 AWG or
larger telecommunication line cord.
3. Network connection
Can be connected to a network of 10BASET/100BASE-TX in auto-sensing.
Use a straight through cable of UTP category 5 or
more for this connection.
*3 Select an appropriate UPS taking into consideration the total power consumption of all system components
and the required backup time. On-line uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is recommended.
Reference
C/O interface unit: 6 W (rated) for CE version, 6 W (rated) for CU version
8-Port 10M/100M Switching Hub: 10W (Differs depending on products.)
3-73
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
13.11. Telephone Interface Unit Connection
N-8000AL Telephone interface unit
1
Be sure to ground.
2
3
RJ-45 connector
To network
To AC mains or a UPS
(Uninterruptible power supply system)*
Mini-clamp connector
232D-02S1B-DA5 (DDK)
(supplied with the N-8000AL)
Note
If there is a danger of lightning strikes,
insert an appropriate surge arrester
into the power line.
Analog
telephone
[General description of connection]
For cables, refer to p. 3-81.
1. Power supply connection
Connect the supplied power supply cord to AC
Mains or a UPS (Uninterruptible power supply).
About power supply cord handling
The supplied power supply cord is designed for
exclusive use with the N-8000AL.
Never use it with other equipment.
2. Telephone connection
Connect the unit to the telephones certified in the
country where the unit is used.
(Refer to p. 3-83, Mini-clamp connector connection.)
3. Network connection
Can be connected to a network of 10BASET/100BASE-TX in auto-sensing.
Use a straight through cable of UTP category 5 or
more for this connection.
Notes
• The apparatus shall be connected to a main socket outlet with a protective earthing connection.
• Do not defeat the Class I product's earthed connections.
• ‌The interconnected telecommunication terminal equipment (via "TELEPHONE"-connecter of N-8000AL)
should be UL Listed and the connections shall be made in accordance with Article 800 of the NEC. (CU
version)
• ‌The interconnected telecommunication terminal equipment (via "TELEPHONE"-connecter of N-8000AL)
should comply with IEC60950-1. (CE version)
* Select an appropriate UPS taking into consideration the total power consumption of all system components
and the required backup time. On-line uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is recommended.
Reference
Telephone interface unit: 7 W (rated) for CE version, 7 W (rated) for CU version
8-Port 10M/100M Switching Hub: 10W (Differs depending on products.)
3-74
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
13.12. IP Station Connection
13.12.1. N-8500MS connections
N-8500MS rear
DC INPUT EXT.SP. HEAD
12V 400mA
SET
LAN
PC
1
2
To AC mains
To external speaker
1. AC adapter terminal connection
Connect the AC adapter*1.
Install the supplied ferrite clamp on the AC adapter
cable by winding the cable around the ferrite clamp
once.
4
5
To PC
3
To network
To headset
Note
When using the external speaker,
set the internal/external speaker
switch on the bottom to the EXT.
SP position.
INT.
SP
EXT.
SP
3.Headset plug connection
Cable
Ferrite clamp
(supplied with the N-8500MS)
*1 ‌Use the AC adapter AD-1210P/1215P (optional)
or the equivalent.
As for the usable adapter, consult your TOA
dealer.
2.External speaker terminal connection
Press down the desired pushin terminal button with a tip of
standard driver, and insert the
cable securely.
For the
the type
typeofofcables,
cables,refer
refer
to
p.
3-73,
Type
of Cables.
Cable.
to p. 3-81, Type of
11 mm
HOT
COM
Microphone sensitivity: –49 dB*2
HOT
COM
Speaker impedance: 32
4. Network connection terminal connection
Can be connected to a network of 10BASET/100BASE-TX in auto-sensing.
Connecting the station to a PoE (Power over
Ethernet) switching hub compliant with IEEE802.3af
eliminates the need for an AC adapter. (For
connection, refer to the instruction manual supplied
with the switching hub.)
Use a straight through cable of UTP category 5 or
more for this connection.
5. PC connection terminal connection
A PC can be cascaded with the station. If power
is not supplied to the station, hub function will not
work.
Use a straight through cable of UTP category 5 or
more for this connection.
Note: Be sure to connect one PC only.
*2 0 dB = 1 V/pa (1 kHz)
3-75
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
13.12.2. N-8510MS connection
N-8510MS rear
CONTACT IN
C H
LAN
1
2
3
To AC mains
To network
To external control equipment
such as a switch or sensor
1. AC adapter terminal connection
Connect the AC adapter*.
Install the supplied ferrite clamp on the AC adapter
cable by winding the cable around the ferrite clamp
once.
Cable
3. Network connection terminal connection
Can be connected to a network of 10BASET/100BASE-TX in auto-sensing.
Connecting the station to a PoE (Power over
Ethernet) switching hub compliant with IEEE802.3af
eliminates the need for an AC adapter. (For
connection, refer to the instruction manual supplied
with the switching hub.)
Use a straight through cable of UTP category 5 or
more for this connection.
Ferrite clamp
(supplied with the N-8510MS)
* ‌Use the AC adapter AD-1210P/1215P (optional) or
the equivalent.
As for the usable adapter, consult your TOA
dealer.
2. Message start terminal connection
Press down the desired pushin terminal button with a tip of
standard driver, and insert the
cable securely.
COM
HOT
For the
the type
typeofofcables,
cables,refer
refer
to
of Cables.
Cable.
to p.
p. 3-73,
3-81, Type
Type of
11 mm
3-76
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
13.12.3. N-8600MS connection
N-8600MS rear
DC INPUT EXT SP
12V 200mA
HEAD SET
SP
MIC
LAN
1
2
5
To AC mains
3
To external speaker
1. AC adapter terminal connection
Connect the AC adapter*.
* ‌Use the AC adapter AD-1210P/1215P (optional) or
the equivalent.
As for the usable adapter, consult your TOA
dealer.
2.External speaker terminal connection
4
To network
To headset microphone
To headset speaker
3.Headset speaker connection
ø3.5 mm mini jack.
Connect the headset speaker.
4.Headset microphone connection
ø3.5 mm mini jack.
Connect the headset microphone.
5. Network connection terminal connection
Can be connected to a network of 10BASET/100BASE-TX in auto-sensing.
Connecting the station to a PoE (Power over
Ethernet) switching hub compliant with IEEE802.3af
eliminates the need for an AC adapter. (For
connection, refer to the instruction manual supplied
with the switching hub.)
Use a straight through cable of UTP category 5 or
more for this connection.
Press down the desired pushin terminal button with a tip of
standard driver, and insert the
cable securely.
For
Forthe
thetype
type of
of cables, refer
3-73,Type
TypeofofCables.
Cable.
totop.p.3-81,
11 mm
Note
When using the external speaker,
set the internal/external speaker
switch on the bottom to the EXT.
SP position.
INT.
SP
EXT.
SP
3-77
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
13.12.4. N-8610RM connection
N-8610RM rear
DC INPUT
12V 200mA
LAN
1
2
To AC mains
1. AC adapter terminal connection
Connect the AC adapter*.
* ‌Use the AC adapter AD-1215P (optional) or the
equivalent.
As for the usable adapter, consult your TOA
dealer.
Note
Install the supplied ferrite clamp (black) on the AC
adapter cable by winding the cable around the
ferrite clamp once.
Cable
To network
2. Network connection terminal connection
Can be connected to a network of 10BASET/100BASE-TX in auto-sensing.
Connecting the station to a PoE (Power over
Ethernet) switching hub compliant with IEEE802.3af
eliminates the need for an AC adapter. (For
connection, refer to the instruction manual supplied
with the switching hub.)
Use a straight through cable of UTP category 5 or
more for this connection.
Note
Install the supplied ferrite clamp (gray) on the LAN
cable by winding the cable around the ferrite clamp
once.
LAN cable
Ferrite clamp (black, supplied
with the N-8610RM)
Ferrite clamp (gray, supplied
with the N-8610RM)
3-78
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
13.12.5. N-8540DS connection
External
power supply
Diode
Relay
-
+
+24 V DC
GND
2
Frame ground
H C
LAN
3
1
Ground from the frame ground
when the switch box is not grounded.
To network
N-8540DS rear
To AC mains
1. AC adapter terminal connection
Connect the AC adapter*.
* ‌Use the AC adapter AD-1210P/1215P (optional) or
the equivalent.
As for the usable adapter, consult your TOA
dealer.
2. Contact output terminal connection
An external relay can be connected as illustrated
above.
(Refer to p. 3-83, Terminal plug connection.)
[Specification of contact output]
Open collector output
Withstand voltage: Max. 30 V DC,
Control current:
Max. 50 mA
3. Network connection terminal connection
Can be connected to a network of 10BASET/100BASE-TX in auto-sensing.
Connecting the station to a PoE (Power over
Ethernet) switching hub compliant with IEEE802.3af
eliminates the need for an AC adapter. (For
connection, refer to the instruction manual supplied
with the switching hub.)
Use a straight through cable of UTP category 5 or
more for this connection.
Install the ferrite clamp (supplied with the
N-8540DS) on the network cable.
Ferrite clamp
(supplied with the N-8540DS)
Cable
3-79
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
13.12.6. N-8640DS/8650DS connection
N-8640DS/8650DS rear
Note: This figure represents the N-8640DS.
Frame ground
(N-8640DS only)
Notes
• Be sure to ground the N-8640DS's
frame ground terminal. Also ground
the electrical box if used.
• When an electrical box is used in
conjunction with the N-8650DS, be
sure to ground the electrical box.
[External connection cables]
Contact output 1 (brown)
Contact output 2 (red)
Contact output 3 (orange)
To an indicator or other
external equipment
Contact output 4 (yellow)
2
Contact output COM (purple)
Contact output (blue)
To an electronic lock or
other external equipment
Contact output (blue)
Contact input HOT (gray)
3
LAN coupler
(supplied with the
N-8640DS/8650DS)
To a switch, sensor, or
other external equipment
Contact input COM (white)
1
Speaker cable (black)
To external speakers
(8 Ω, 0.6 W or more)
Speaker cable (black)
[Connection example]
Contact output (blue)
Contact output (blue)
External power
supply
Diode
-
Relay
+
DC24 V
GND
To AC mains
To network
1. AC adapter terminal connection
Connect the AC adapter*.
* ‌Use the AC adapter AD-1210P/1215P (optional) or
the equivalent.
As for the usable adapter, consult your TOA
dealer.
2.External connection cables
[Contact output specifications]
Open collector output
Withstand voltage: 30 V DC
Max. control current: 50 mA
[Contact output (blue x 2) specifications]
Relay contact output
Withstand voltage: 30 V DC
Max. control current: 500 mA
[Contact output (gray, white) specifications]
No-voltage closed contact input.
Open voltage:
5 V DC
Short-circuit current: 10 mA or less
3. Network connection terminal connection
Can be connected to a network of 10BASET/100BASE-TX in auto-sensing.
Connecting the station to a PoE (Power over
Ethernet) switching hub compliant with IEEE802.3af
eliminates the need for an AC adapter. (For
connection, refer to the instruction manual supplied
with the switching hub.)
Use a straight through cable of UTP category 5 or
more for this connection.
3-80
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
13.13. Type of Cable
The types of cables are to be determined according to the following conditions.
• To use twisted pair wires (such as those used for electronic push-button telephone) for wiring between the
Exchange and the stations, for wiring between the N-8400RS Substation interface unit and the N-8410MS
Master station or the RS-450/460/470/480 Substations, and for connections to the Multi interface unit's audio
input/output terminals and PBX interface terminals.
• Use a straight through cable of UTP category 5 or more with RJ-45 connector for wiring the equipment to IP
network.
• The number of cables pairs laid should be determined considering the possibility of future expansion of the
system.
• Outdoor wires should be used where wiring passes through inaccessible areas such as ceilings or under
floors where the maintenance is not performed. Indoor wires may also be used, however, in case where there
is no risk of deterioration due to exposure to heat, etc.
• Make sure that the 2-core shielded cable is used for wiring from the N-8000RS/8010RS Substation interface
unit to the RS-150/160/170/180 Substation , RS-140/143/144 Switch panel, or RS-142 Switch board.
Note
Specifications related to each connections are as follows.
Mini-clamp connector (N-8000EX/8010EX line terminal)
(N-8000MI PBX interface terminal)
(N-8000CO C/O line connection terminal.)
(N-8000AL Telephone connection terminal.)
Conductor diameter: ø 0.4 – 0.65 mm (AWG22 – 26), Solid wire
Outside diameter:
ø 1.05 mm or below
Clip terminal (E-7000TB)
Conductor diameter: ø 0.4 – 0.8 mm (AWG20 – 26), Solid wire
Outside diameter:
ø 1.5 mm or below
Removable terminal plug (N-8000EX Paging output terminal.)
(N-8000RS/8010RS/8400RS Line terminal.)
(N-8000MI Control I/O and Audio I/O terminal.)
(N-8000DI Control I/O terminal.)
(N-8000AF Control I/O and Audio I/O and Time sync input terminal.)
Conductor diameter: ø 0.5 – 2 mm (AWG12 – 24), Solid wire/Stranded wire
Removable terminal plug (N-8031MS/8033MS line terminal)
Conductor diameter: ø 0.4 – 1.6 mm (AWG14 – 26), Solid wire/Stranded wire
External speaker terminal (N-8000MS/8500MS/8600MS),
Message start terminal connection (N-8510MS)
Conductor diameter: ø 0.4 – 1.3 mm (AWG16 – 26), Solid wire
ø 0.7 – 1.4 mm (AWG16 – 22), Stranded wire
External speaker terminal, Control output terminal (N-8020MS)
Conductor diameter:
ø 0.65 mm (AWG22), Solid wire
ø 0.7 mm (AWG22), Stranded wire
External dial input terminal (N-8031MS/8033MS)
Conductor diameter:
ø 0.8 – 1.3 mm (AWG16 – 20), Solid wire/Stranded wire
Station terminal (N-8050DS line terminal, contact output terminal, N-8540DS contact output terminal)
Conductor diameter:
ø 0.4 – 1.3 mm (AWG16 – 26), Solid wire/Stranded wire
3-81
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
13.14. Relations Between Core Diameter of Cable and Maximum Cable Length
Refer to the following chart as guidelines when designing the distance between the Exchange and stations so
that loop resistance value becomes 170 Ω or less.
Conductor diameter
(mm)
ø 0.4
ø 0.5
ø 0.65
ø 0.9
Loop resistance
( Ω/km)
295
187
113
58
Maximum cable length between the Exchange and station.
(Assuming that the loop resistance is 170 Ω)
570 m
900 m
1.5 km
2.9 km
For the maximum (2-core shielded) cable length to be used for connection between the N-8000RS/8010RS
Substation interface unit and the RS-150/160/170/180 Substation, RS-140/143/144 Switch panel, or RS-142
Switch board, refer to the following table.
Conductor diameter
(mm)
ø 0.5
ø 0.65
ø 0.9
Maximum cable length
(km)
0.5
0.8
1.3
For the maximum (two pairs of twisted pair) cable length to be used for connection between the N-8400RS
Substation interface unit and the N-8410MS Master station or the RS-450/460/470/480 Substation, refer to the
following table.
Conductor diameter
(mm)
ø 0.5
ø 0.65
ø 0.9
Maximum cable length
(km)
1.0
1.5
2.0
3-82
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
13.15. Connector Connection
13.15.1. Mini-clamp connector connection
Connect the mini-clamp connector supplied with the N-8000EX, N-8010EX, N-8000MI, N-8000CO, N-8000AL
to a cable using a commercially available tool (pliers).
Step 1. Cut off two-cable ends in equal length, and insert them
securely to a cover section (transparent side) of the Cover (transparent side)
mini-clamp connector.
Note
Insert the cable without stripping the cable jacket.
For cables, refer to p. 3-81, "Type of Cable."
Cable
Mini-clamp connector
(supplied with the
N-8000EX/8010EX/8000MI
8000CO/8000AL model
232D-02S1B-DA5
manufactured by DDK Ltd.)
Step 2. With a pair of pliers, lightly pinch the mini-clamp cover
and, after ensuring that the cable is securely inserted,
firmly squeeze on the cover.
Note
Squeeze on the mini-clamp cover until it is correctly
locked.
Step 3. Insert the wired connector (plug) into the exchange's connector (socket) until it locks into place.
Rear panel
Note: This figure shows the N-8000EX.
13.15.2. Terminal plug connection
Step 1. Strip a cable jacket of approx. 7 mm (approx. 5 mm for the N-8031MS/8033MS only) from the cable
end.
For cables, refer to p. 3-81, Type of Cable.
7 mm*
* Approx. 5 mm for the N-8031MS/8033MS
Note
Do not solder on exposed inner cables when using a stranded
wire.
3-83
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION & WIRING
Step 2. Loosen the terminal screws and insert the cables.
Step 3. Tighten the terminal screws securely.
Notes
• Tug lightly on the cable to be sure that it does not pull free. If the cable pulls free, loosen the terminal
screw again and reconnect from Step 2.
• Use the screwdriver appropriate to the screws tightened into the terminal plug.
Step 4. (Removable terminal plug only)
Insert the wired terminal plug into the terminal block or the pin header.
[N-8000EX]
N-8000EX rear panel
3
Tighten
4
Removable terminal block
2
Removable terminal plug
(supplied with the N-8000EX)
Note: The connection method for the N-8000MI, N-8000RS, N-8010RS, N-8400RS, N-8000DI and N-8000AF
is the same as for the N-8000EX.
[N-8031MS/8033MS]
Terminal block
3
3
Tighten
Terminal screw
2
Cable
Note
This terminal connection method also applies to
the N-8540DS.
Cable
Pin header
2
Tighten
4
Removable terminal plug
(supplied with the N-8031MS/
8033MS)
1 2
[N-8050DS]
N-8031MS's/8033MS's PC board
3-84
Chapter 4
SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW
This chapter describes system setting items and switching on power to
the system.
Chapter 4 SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW
1. SYSTEM DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
System and equipment settings must be performed before operating the N-8000 Series systems.
Three different methods are available for individual settings, and the details of these methods are explained in
each of the following chapters.
• Settings using software (Chapter 5. System Settings Using Software)
• Settings using a web browser (Chapter 6. System Settings Using a Browser)
• Settings using the multi-function station (Chapter 7. System Settings Using the Multi-Function Station)
2. Turning the system's power switch on
To perform system settings, the power supply needs to be connected to the system.
2.1. Caution When Turning the Power Switch On
Check the following to be sure before turning the power switch on:
Cables and connectors are correctly wired and connected.
The functional earth of Exchanges and Various kinds of interface units is correctly grounded.
2.2. Turning the Power Switch On
Follow the procedures below to turn the power switch on.
Step 1. Turn the power switches on of the network equipment connected such as switching hubs, router, etc
on.
Step 2. Turn all exchanges', Various kinds of interface units' and IP stations' power switches on.
3. SETTING PROCEDURES
1. Set a network. (Refer to p. 5-15, p. 6-5, p. 7-8)
Perform network settings (IP address, Default gateway, and Subnet mask) for all exchanges, Various
kinds of interface units and IP stations connected to the local network.
The following three setting methods are applicable:
• Settings using software
• Settings using a web browser
• Settings using the multi-function station
For an overview of network settings, please read "Network Settings Using a PC" on the following page.
2. Perform system settings. (Refer to p. 5-19)
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software program to perform individual settings related to the system
such as the Exchange, Various kinds of interface units, Station, Paging, etc.
Here, settings are performed using a PC.
For an overview of system settings, please read "System Setting Items and Default.
(Refer to p. 4-5)
3. Save the settings and upload to the units. (Refer to p. 5-126)
Save the setting contents and write them into the Exchange, Various kinds of interface units, and IP
stations.
4-2
Chapter 4 SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW
4. Network Settings Using a Personal Computer
Network settings involving the use of a PC can vary depending on the network configuration. No particular care
need be taken within the LAN (i.e. the range within which broadcast transmission is permitted), however some
planning regarding the enabling of settings is required for configurations extending beyond the perimeter of the
LAN.
This section uses a system example in which three local area networks (LAN) are connected via the Internet
in order to explain how to perform network settings for each exchange, Various kinds of interface units, and IP
station using a PC.
This example assumes that broadcast communications are possible within each LAN, but not possible between
different LANs. The PC (A) connected to LAN (A) is assumed to be used for system settings.
[System example]
Station
Multi Interface Unit
Exchange
LAN (A)
PC (A)
(for system settings)
Router
Exchange
IP station
Private line, IP-VPN, etc.
Router
Exchange
Router
Exchange
LAN (C)
LAN (B)
Exchange
Multi Interface Unit
PC (B)
PC (C)
4-3
Chapter 4 SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW
[Setting procedures]
Step 1. Using a system setting PC*1, set a network*2 for Exchanges, Various kinds of interface units, and IP
stations that permit broadcast communications with this PC.
*1 PC (A) in the illustration on the previous page
*2 LAN (A) in the illustration on the previous page
Use the supplied N-8000 Setting Software program's unit scan function to perform settings. (Refer to
p. 5-15.)
Step 2. Using the PC in each LAN, set the networks*3 for Exchanges, Various kinds of interface units, and IP
stations that cannot conduct broadcast communications with the system setting PC.
*3 LANs (B) and (C) in the illustration on the previous page.
•Use the N-8000 Setting Software program's unit scan function to perform settings.
Note
Use the N-8000 Setting Software only for the network settings of Exchanges, Various kinds of
interface units, and IP stations. When performing individual settings related to the general system,
use the PC (A).
•One of the following two methods can also be used to perform settings (Refer to p. 6-5.):
(1) Perform settings via a network using the PC's Web browser.
Note
If the system contains multiple Exchanges, Various kinds of interface units, or IP stations, and their
IP address numbers are identical (factory-preset setting), connect each exchange to a network
and perform settings individually.
(2) Disconnect the Exchange, Various kinds of interface units, or IP stations from the LAN to directly
connect it to the PC using a crossover LAN cable, then perform settings by way of the Web
browser.
•Another method can also be used to perform settings on the menu screen of the multifunctional master
station without using a PC. To perform an exchange's network setting, connect the multifunctional
master station to the exchange to be set. For the IP multifunctional master station, its network setting
can be performed using its on-screen setting menu. (Refer to p. 7-8.)
Step 3. Set the system to allow communications from the system setting PC to all Exchanges, Various kinds of
interface units, and IP stations on the network.
Using the N-8000 Setting Software's system setting function on the system setting PC, register the
Exchanges, Various kinds of interface units, and IP stations of which network settings have been set
in Step 1 or 2. (Refer to p. 5-19.)
These procedures permit communications between the system setting PC and all Exchanges, Various
kinds of interface units, and IP stations within the system.
4-4
Chapter 4 SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW
5. SYSTEM SETTING ITEMS AND DEFAULT
All system setting items except the auto-dialing programming can be set using the N-8000 Setting Software.
Some setting items, however, can also be set on the browser or at stations. The browser can only make the
connected Exchange-, Various kinds of interface units-, or IP station-related items, while stations can only
make the connected Exchange- or their own stations-related items.
The following tables, classified according to the system setting items on the N-8000 Setting Software, show
items, their default, and reference pages in this manual.
Note: In "Reference page" column, "SW" represents the software, "BR" represents the browser, and "ST"
represents a station.
5.1. General System
Side TAB
Equipment Registration
Station Table
Item
Contents
Default
Reference
page
-
p. 5-20
Equipment number
1–
Equipment name *1
Each unit's
model No.
(Example: N-8000EX)
Station number digits
2
Station number *2
Station name
p. 5-20
Line 1: 10,
Line 2: 11, .... ,
Line 16: 25
SW: p. 5-20
BR: p. 6-5
p. 5-22
SW: p. 5-22
ST: p. 7-9
-
p. 5-23
Network communications
ON or OFF between
exchanges
-
p. 5-24
Multicast communications
ON or OFF between
exchanges
-
p. 5-25
System Settings
Response Mode
Clock Master
Sequential
-
NTP client
Time Signal
OFF
DST end time
1/1 0:00
NTP server address
NTP server port
1/1 0:00
-
NTP sync time
2:45
C/O control password
0000
Clock sync time
Maintenance Password
Enable/Disable the SX System
SX-200IP connection
ID (SX) : Slot
p. 5-26
-
DST (Summer time)
DST start time
Gateway Settings
-
p. 5-27
3:00
-
Disable
-
p. 5-28
-
• All of the above items can be set on the N-8000 Setting Software.
*1 Settings possible from a browser as well.
*2 ‌Settings possible from a station as well only when it is the N-8000MS Multifunctional master station or
N-8500MS/8600MS IP Multifunctional master station.
4-5
Chapter 4 SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW
5.2. Exchange
Side TAB
Network settings
Item
Default
IP address *1, 2, 3
192.168.1.1
Subnet Mask *
255.255.255.0
1, 2, 3
0.0.0.0
Default Gateway *1, 2, 3
Web server port number *
Sampling frequency
correction
Function settings
1, 2
80
5000
UDP start port number
5006
Multicast port number
6000
NAPT compatible
Incompatible
Network ID
1
WAN IP address
192.168.1.1
WAN Web server port number
80
WAN TCP start port number
5000
WAN UDP start port number
5006
Broadcast specification
High quality sound
transmission mode
Communication capacity
2990 kbps
Sampling frequency correction
Automatic
p. 5-31
p. 5-32
Transmitted party IP address
-
Transmitted party port number
-
Recipient party IP address
-
Reception multicast ON/OFF
-
Reception multicast address
-
OFF
Time-based call forwarding function
OFF
Time-based call forwarding start time
0:00
Time-based call forwarding end time
0:00
Group hunting function
OFF
Absence transfer function
OFF
Absence transfer call duration
p. 5-33
p. 5-34
p. 5-35
10 seconds
Oneshot make time
1 second
Call time-out
No limit
Conversation time-out
No limit
Paging time-out
No limit
BGM input
Time-based audio trigger
SW: p. 5-30
BP: p. 6-5
ST: p. 7-8
SW: p. 5-31
BR: p. 6-5
TCP start port number
Call forwarding function
Reference
page
-
p. 5-36
OFF
Start time
0:00
End time
0:00
• All of the above items can be set on the N-8000 Setting Software.
*1 Be sure to set this since settings and conversations are performed via a network.
*2 ‌Settings possible from a browser as well.
*3 ‌Settings possible from a station as well only when it is the N-8000MS Multifunctional master station.
4-6
Chapter 4 SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW
Side TAB
Function settings
Item
Default
Audio trigger time-out
ON
Time limit
10 seconds
Paging with call tone
ON
Delay time
0
Paging response mode
Zone number
designation
response mode
Paging priority mode
Paging priority
Calling station indication
During call and talk
Door station contact output
Door remote control
Reference
page
p. 5-36
p. 5-37
• All of the above items can be set on the N-8000 Setting Software.
4-7
Chapter 4 SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW
5.3. Multi Interface Unit
Side TAB
Network settings
Item
Default
IP address *1, 2
192.168.1.1
Subnet Mask *1, 2
255.255.255.0
Default Gateway *1, 2
Web server port number *
Sampling frequency
correction
Function settings
0.0.0.0
1, 2
80
Reference
page
SW: p. 5-38
BR: p. 6-5
SW: p. 5-39
BR: p. 6-5
TCP start port number
5000
UDP start port number
5006
Multicast port number
6000
NAPT compatible
Incompatible
Network ID
1
WAN IP address
192.168.1.1
WAN Web server port number
80
WAN TCP start port number
5000
WAN UDP start port number
5006
Broadcast specification
High quality sound
transmission mode
Communication capacity
2990 kbps
Sampling frequency correction
Automatic
p. 5-39
p. 5-40
Transmitted party IP address
-
Transmitted party port number
-
Recipient party IP address
-
Reception multicast ON/OFF
-
Reception multicast address
-
Oneshot make time
1 second
Call time-out
No limit
Conversation time-out
No limit
Paging time-out
No limit
Aux input paging priority
OFF
Paging response mode
Zone number
designation
response mode
Paging priority mode
Paging priority
p. 5-41
p. 5-42
p. 5-43
p. 5-44
• All of the above items can be set on the N-8000 Setting Software.
*1 Be sure to set this since settings and conversations are performed via a network.
*2 ‌Settings possible from a browser as well.
4-8
Chapter 4 SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW
Side TAB
Audio I/O
Contact inputs
Item
Input mode
Unused
Output mode
Unused
Input sensitivity
Level 1
Access number
-
Paging zone
-
Output level
Level 4
Line attributer
PB
Line start
Wink start
Contact Input No.
1
Operation mode
Contact outputs
Default
Unused
Interlock contact / DS No.
-
Interlock contact / DS Contact No.
-
Interlock contact / Equipment No.
-
Interlock contact / Contact No.
-
Aux input paging / Zone No.
-
Aux input paging / Audio input No.
-
Remote dial control / Equipment No.
-
Remote dial control / Line No.
-
Remote dial control / Dial code
-
Contact output No.
p. 5-45
p. 5-46
p. 5-47
p. 5-48
1
Access No.
Access No. digits
Reference
page
-
2
Line status
Unused
Network status
Unused
p. 5-49
• All of the above items can be set on the N-8000 Setting Software.
4-9
Chapter 4 SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW
5.4. Sub Stations
Side TAB
Network settings
Item
IP address *1, 2
Subnet Mask *
Default Gateway *1, 2
1, 2
Web server port number *1, 2
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
80
5000
Multicast port number
6000
NAPT compatible
Network ID
WAN IP address
WAN Web server port number
WAN TCP start port number
WAN UDP start port number
Broadcast specification
Communication capacity
Call time-out
Conversation time-out
Paging time-out
Paging response mode
Sub-station-interface
Selection
192.168.1.1
TCP start port number
UDP start port number
Function settings
Default
Calling station indication
Call master Call 1
Call volume
Sub-station Selection Line No.
p. 5-51
Incompatible
1
192.168.1.1
80
5006
High quality sound
transmission mode
2990 kbps
No limit
No limit
Zone selection
During call and talk
-
3
-
-
1
2
3
-
Control output / Contact output No.
Called station's No.
-
OFF
Refusal of priority call operation
OFF
Access to emergency call operation
p. 5-57
-
Call Activation - push 3 times
with call tone
p. 5-56
-
1
Control output / MI/DI/AF equipment No.
p. 5-55
-
Priority Level (Call 3)
Speaker output
p. 5-54
-
1 (5 for RS-144 only)
Microphone sensitivity
p. 5-53
No limit
Priority Level (Call 1)
Priority Level (Call 2)
p. 5-52
5000
Sub-station Selection Sub-station No.
Sub-station Selection Sub-station
name
SW: p. 5-50
BR: p. 6-5
SW: p. 5-51
BR: p. 6-5
5006
Call master Call 2
Call master Call 3
Reference
page
ON
OFF
• All of the above items can be set on the N-8000 Setting Software.
*1 Be sure to set this since settings and conversations are performed via a network.
*2 ‌Settings possible from a browser as well.
4-10
Chapter 4 SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW
5.5. IP Stations
Side TAB
Network settings
Item
IP address *1, 2, 3
Subnet Mask *
Default Gateway *1, 2, 3
1, 2, 3
Web server port number *1, 2
SW: p. 5-58
BR: p. 6-5
ST: p. 7-8
80
SW: p. 5-59
BR: p. 6-5
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
5000
Multicast port number
6000
NAPT compatible
Network ID
WAN IP address
WAN Web server port number
WAN TCP start port number
WAN UDP start port number
Broadcast specification
Communication capacity
Call forwarding function
Time-based call forwarding function
Time-based call forwarding start time
Time-based call forwarding end time
Group hunting function
Absence transfer function
Absence transfer call duration
Oneshot make time
Call time-out
Conversation time-out
Paging time-out
BGM input
5006
p. 5-59
Incompatible
1
192.168.1.1
80
5006
High quality sound
transmission mode
2990 kbps
OFF
0:00
0:00
p. 5-62
OFF
OFF
10 seconds
1 second
No limit
No limit
No limit
-
Paging response mode
Zone number
designation
response mode
Calling station indication
Door station contact output
p. 5-61
OFF
ON
Paging priority mode
p. 5-60
5000
Paging with call tone
Delay time
Reference
page
192.168.1.1
TCP start port number
UDP start port number
Function settings 1
Default
0
p. 5-63
Paging priority
During call and talk
Door remote control
p. 5-64
• All of the above items can be set on the N-8000 Setting Software.
*1 Be sure to set this since settings and conversations are performed via a network.
*2 ‌Settings possible from a browser as well.
*3 ‌Settings possible from a station as well only when it is the N-8500MS/8600MS IP Multifunctional master
station.
4-11
Chapter 4 SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW
Side TAB
Function settings 2
Item
Incoming call mode
with call tone
Microphone sensitivity
Speaker output *
Station speaker sound volume
Group call member
Default
Automatic
connection mode
ON
Level 2
Level 3
p. 5-65
SW: p. 5-65
ST: p. 2-5
Level 3
-
Call forwarding destination station *
Reference
page
p. 5-65
-
SW: p. 5-65
ST: p. 2-20
-
SW: p. 5-65
ST: p. 2-21
Group hunting destination station *
-
SW: p. 5-65
ST: p. 2-18
Absence transfer destination station *
-
SW: p. 5-65
ST: p. 2-19
Time-based call forwarding destination
station *
Priority Level
BGM reception ON/OFF *
BGM input *
1
OFF
-
Door remote MI/DI/AF equipment No.
-
Control output MI/DI equipment No.
-
Control output Contact output No.
Record conversation
Record conversation AF No.
Speaker selection
Activate Access Code
Access Code
Access to audio trigger
Mode
Equipment No.
Contact No.
-
OFF
Internal
OFF
-
OFF
Call master
-
Level
Level
5
Duration (Audio)
Sensitivity
External contact input
5
5
-
OFF
Access to priority call
OFF
Refusal of priority call setting
Access to emergency call operation
Access to paging call operation
p. 5-67
5
Door station mode
Call Activation - push 3 times
p. 5-66
-
Trigger
Duration (Level)
SW: p. 5-66
ST: p. 2-69
-
Door remote Contact output No.
Called station's No.
p. 5-66
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
• All of the above items can be set on the N-8000 Setting Software.
* Settings possible from a station as well only when it is the IP master station.
4-12
Chapter 4 SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW
Side TAB
Function settings 2
Item
Access to emergency all paging call
operation
Access to audio trigger setting
operation
External equipment control
Speed dialing
Scan monitor
Message Paging
Default
OFF
OFF
-
-
Scan monitor sequencing time
3 seconds
Monitor Alert
None
Scan monitor group
Operate message paging
Time-based message paging ON/OFF
Time-based message paging Start time
Time-based message paging End time
OFF
-
Repeated during
activation
Operation terminal to mute
OFF
Message paging direction Send
ON
Sync control mode
Contact output MI/DI/AF equipment No.
Pattern
Talk key (PTT/LOCK selectable)
Talk key: Timeout (only when LOCK is
selected)
Chime: Start
Chime: End
Chime: Volume
Chime: Delay Time
Setting Priority
Number of RM-210
Function key
Zone
Control Input/Output
One-touch Dial
p. 5-70
All
OFF
OFF
Busy
-
Contact output Contact output No.
Sync control mode
ST: p. 2-11
OFF
Repeat
Message paging direction Receive
p. 5-68
-
Dial operation only
Access to internal contact output
SW: p. 5-68
ST: p. 2-12
p. 5-69
Activation method
Paging zone number
Remote Mic Settings
p. 5-67
OFF
Onetouch dial *1
Master calling
Auto Dial *2
Reference
page
p. 5-71
-
Make during
activation
PTT
None
None
None
−6 (dB)
0 (second)
SX-2000
0
p. 5-72
-
p. 5-77
-
• All of the above items except "Auto Dial" can be set on the N-8000 Setting Software.
*1 Settings possible from the IP master station as well.
*2 ‌Settings possible only from the N-8500MS/8600MS IP Multifunctional master station.
4-13
Chapter 4 SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW
5.6. Stations
Side TAB
Function settings
Item
Incoming call mode
with call tone
Microphone sensitivity
Speaker output *
Station speaker sound volume
Group call member
Default
Automatic
connection mode
ON
Level 2
Level 3
p. 5-80
SW: p. 5-80
ST: p. 2-5
Level 3
-
Call forwarding destination station *
Reference
page
p. 5-80
-
SW: p. 5-80
ST: p. 2-20
-
SW: p. 5-80
ST: p. 2-21
Group hunting destination station *
-
SW: p. 5-80
ST: p. 2-18
Absence transfer destination station *
-
SW: p. 5-80
ST: p. 2-19
Time-based call forwarding destination
station *
Priority Level
BGM reception ON/OFF *
BGM input *
1
OFF
-
Door remote MI/DI/AF equipment No.
-
Door remote Contact output No.
-
Control output equipment No.
Record conversation
Record conversation AF No.
Activate Access Code
Access Code
Access to audio trigger
Mode
Equipment No.
Contact No.
-
OFF
-
-
OFF
Call master
-
Level
5
Sensitivity
p. 5-81
OFF
Level
Duration (Audio)
p. 5-80
-
Trigger
Duration (Level)
SW: p. 5-80
ST: p. 2-69
-
Control output Contact output No.
Called station's No.
p. 5-80
5
p. 5-82
5
5
• All of the above items can be set on the N-8000 Setting Software.
* Settings possible from a station as well only when it is the IP master station.
4-14
Chapter 4 SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW
Side TAB
Function settings
Item
Door station mode
OFF
Access to priority call
OFF
Call Activation - push 3 times
Refusal of priority call setting
Access to emergency call operation
Access to paging call operation
Access to emergency all paging call
operation
Access to audio trigger setting
operation
External equipment control
Speed dialing
Scan monitor
Default
OFF
OFF
OFF
p. 5-82
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Onetouch dial *1
Master calling
Auto Dial *2
-
-
Scan monitor sequencing time
3 seconds
Monitor Alert
None
Scan monitor group
Reference
page
SW: p. 5-83
ST: p. 2-12
p. 5-83
ST: p. 2-11
p. 5-84
-
• All of the above items except "Auto Dial" can be set on the N-8000 Setting Software.
*1 Settings possible from the Master station as well.
*2 ‌Settings possible only from the N-8000MS Multifunctional master station.
4-15
Chapter 4 SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW
5.7. C/O Interface
Side TAB
Network settings
Item
IP address *1, 2
Subnet Mask *
Default Gateway *1, 2
1, 2
Web server port number *1, 2
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
80
5000
Multicast port number
6000
NAPT compatible
Network ID
WAN IP address
WAN Web server port number
WAN TCP start port number
WAN UDP start port number
Broadcast specification
Communication capacity
Control output / MI/DI equipment No.
Control output / Contact output No.
Record conversation
Record conversation AF No.
192.168.1.1
80
5006
High quality sound
transmission mode
2990 kbps
-
OFF
-
-
5 minutes
Paging time-out
No limit
Access to direct in line
Direct in line Leader
Direct in line Member
5 minutes
-
OFF
-
ON
C/O control password enable
ON
Scan monitor sequencing time
Monitor Alert
Scan monitor group
p. 5-90
OFF
Paging with call tone
Delay time
p. 5-89
OFF
Timeout
Access to direct in dial
p. 5-88
-
OFF
Dial of transfer to
p. 5-87
5000
Call/Transfer Access No.
Scan Monitor
p. 5-86
1
External equipment control
Scan monitor timeout
SW: p. 5-58
BR: p. 6-5
Incompatible
OFF
C/O Name
Reference
page
SW: p. 5-86
BR: p. 6-5
5006
Access to paging call operation
Access to scan monitor operation
Function Settings 2
192.168.1.1
TCP start port number
UDP start port number
Function Settings 1
Default
p. 5-91
0
3 seconds
None
p. 5-92
-
• All of the above items can be set on the N-8000 Setting Software.
*1 Be sure to set this since settings and conversations are performed via a network.
*2 ‌Settings possible from a browser as well.
4-16
Chapter 4 SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW
5.8. Telephone Interface
Side TAB
Network settings
Item
IP address *1, 2
Subnet Mask *
Default Gateway *1, 2
1, 2
Web server port number *1, 2
192.168.1.1
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
80
TCP start port number
5000
Multicast port number
6000
UDP start port number
NAPT compatible
Network ID
WAN IP address
WAN Web server port number
WAN TCP start port number
WAN UDP start port number
Broadcast specification
Function Settings 1
Default
Communication capacity
Call forwarding function
Time-based call forwarding function
Time-based call forwarding start time
Time-based call forwarding end time
Group hunting function
Absence transfer function
Absence transfer call duration
Oneshot make time
Call time-out
Conversation time-out
5006
SW: p. 5-93
BR: p. 6-5
SW: p. 5-94
BR: p. 6-5
p. 5-94
Incompatible
1
192.168.1.1
80
p. 5-95
5000
5006
High quality sound
transmission mode
2990 kbps
p. 5-96
OFF
OFF
0:00
0:00
OFF
p. 5-97
OFF
10 seconds
1 second
No limit
No limit
Paging time-out
No limit
Paging with call tone
ON
Paging response mode
Zone number
designation
response mode
Calling station indication
During call and talk
Delay time
Reference
page
0
p. 5-98
• All of the above items can be set on the N-8000 Setting Software.
*1 Be sure to set this since settings and conversations are performed via a network.
*2 ‌Settings possible from a browser as well.
4-17
Chapter 4 SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW
Side TAB
Function settings 2
Item
Microphone sensitivity
Speaker output
Station speaker sound volume
Group call member
Default
Level 2
Level 3
Level 3
p. 5-99
-
Call forwarding destination station *
-
SW: p. 5-99
ST: p. 2-140
-
SW: p. 5-99
ST: p. 2-141
Group hunting destination station *
-
SW: p. 5-99
ST: p. 2-138
Absence transfer destination station *
-
SW: p. 5-99
ST: p. 2-139
Time-based call forwarding destination
station *
Door remote MI/DI/AF equipment No.
-
Door remote contact output No.
-
Control output / MI/DI/AF equipment No.
-
Control output / Contact output No.
Called station's No.
Record conversation
Record conversation AF No.
-
OFF
-
Access to priority call
OFF
Access to emergency all paging call
operation
OFF
Access to paging call operation
Scan Monitor
Reference
page
ON
External equipment control
OFF
Monitor Alert
None
Scan monitor sequencing time
Scan monitor group
p. 5-100
3 seconds
p. 5-101
-
• All of the above items can be set on the N-8000 Setting Software.
* ‌Settings possible from a browser as well.
4-18
Chapter 4 SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW
5.9. Audio Interface
Side TAB
Network settings
Item
IP address *1, 2
Subnet Mask *
Default Gateway *1, 2
1, 2
Web server port number *1, 2
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
80
5000
Multicast port number
6000
NAPT compatible
Network ID
WAN IP address
WAN Web server port number
WAN TCP start port number
WAN UDP start port number
Broadcast specification
Communication capacity
Oneshot make time
Operation mode
Aux input paging / Paging No.
192.168.1.1
80
Clock adjust / Start time
Clock adjust / End time
Time signal / Schedule settings
5006
High quality sound
transmission mode
2990 kbps
Unused
-
OFF
Line
OFF
00:00:00
00:10:00
-
Source
1
External control Activation time
Name
Time
Day
p. 5-107
OFF
-
External control Equipment No.
External control Contact No.
p. 5-106
0
10
Paging No.
p. 5-105
1 second
Signal activation time
External timer Enable
p. 5-104
5000
0
Clock adjust / Adjust enable
p. 5-103
1
Paging Delay Time
Input Level
SW: p. 5-102
BR: p. 6-5
Incompatible
OFF
Aux input paging priority
Reference
page
SW: p. 5-103
BR: p. 6-5
5006
Aux input paging / Paging time-out
Aux input paging / Time limit
Schedule Settings
192.168.1.1
TCP start port number
UDP start port number
Function settings
Default
-
p. 5-108
10
-
00:00:00
p. 5-109
OFF
• All of the above items can be set on the N-8000 Setting Software.
*1 Be sure to set this since settings and conversations are performed via a network.
*2 ‌Settings possible from a browser as well.
4-19
Chapter 4 SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW
Side TAB
Schedule Settings
Contact Output
Item
Paging No.
Default
-
Source
1
Contact Output No.
1
Access to external control
Access No.
p. 5-109
OFF
-
Access No. digits
2
Network status
Unused
Line status
Reference
page
p. 5-110
Unused
• All of the above items can be set on the N-8000 Setting Software.
4-20
Chapter 4 SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW
5.10. Direct Select
Side TAB
Network settings
Item
IP address *1, 2
Subnet Mask *
Default Gateway *1, 2
1, 2
Web server port number *1, 2
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
80
5000
Network ID
1
WAN IP address
WAN Web server port number
Contact inputs
192.168.1.1
TCP start port number
NAPT compatible
Function settings
Default
WAN TCP start port number
Oneshot make time
Contact Input No.
Operation mode
Interlock contact / DS No.
80
1 second
1
Unused
-
-
Direct Select / Master Station No.
Device / LED
Line status
Network status
p. 5-116
-
Remote dial control / Dial code
Device / Relay
p. 5-115
-
Remote dial control / Line No.
Access No. digits
p. 5-114
-
Remote dial control / Equipment No.
Access No.
p. 5-113
5000
Interlock contact / Contact No.
Contact output No.
p. 5-112
192.168.1.1
Interlock contact / Equipment No.
Contact outputs
SW: p. 5-111
BR: p. 6-5
SW: p. 5-112
BR: p. 6-5
Incompatible
Interlock contact / DS Contact No.
Direct Select / Select Station No.
Reference
page
-
1
-
2
ON
p. 5-117
ON
Unused
Unused
• All of the above items can be set on the N-8000 Setting Software.
*1 Be sure to set this since settings and conversations are performed via a network.
*2 ‌Settings possible from a browser as well.
4-21
Chapter 4 SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW
5.11. Gateway
Side TAB
Network settings
Item
Default
Reference
page
192.168.1.1
IP address *1, 2
255.255.255.0
Subnet Mask *
1, 2
Web server port number *
p. 5-118
0.0.0.0
Default Gateway *
1, 2
1, 2
80
TCP start port number
5000
UDP start port number
5006
NAPT compatible
Incompatible
Network ID
1
WAN IP address
192.168.1.1
WAN Web server port number
80
WAN TCP start port number
5000
WAN UDP start port number
5006
p. 5-119
p. 5-120
• All of the above items can be set on the N-8000 Setting Software.
*1 Be sure to set this since settings and conversations are performed via a network.
*2 ‌Settings possible from a browser as well.
5.12. Paging
Side TAB
Paging
Item
Paging No. digit
Paging port
Paging Zone Name
Select stations and external PA paging
outputs
Default
1
6000 (to 6039)
Reference
page
p. 5-121
-
-
p. 5-122
Default
Reference
page
-
p. 5-123
• All of the above items can be set on the N-8000 Setting Software.
5.13. Group
Side TAB
Group
Item
Group Blocking Group
Group Blocking To
Remote Response Group
-
p. 5-124
p. 5-125
• All of the above items can be set on the N-8000 Setting Software.
4-22
Chapter 5
SYSTEM SETTINGS BY
SOFTWARE
This chapter describes how to install and use the N-8000 system
settings software.
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
1. N-8000 Setting Software General Description
1.1. General Description
The supplied N-8000 Setting Software program is for performing system settings and features following two
functions.
1.1.1. Equipment scan and network setting functions
Detect the Exchange, various kinds of interface units, and IP station connected to the local network, and then
perform equipment network settings. Use this software when performing initial setting.
Note
The equipment scan function can only be used within the effective broadcast range. Other equipment that is
not within this range must be set using a different network setting (Refer to p. 4-3).
1.1.2. System setting function
Performs individual settings related to system.
Note
This software does not display system operation logs. Use either a browser or the maintenance software.
(Refer to p. 6-32.)
1.2. PC Network Settings
Perform PC network settings in advance according to your network administrator's instructions. Be sure to
verify these, since incorrect settings could adversely affect other equipment connected to the same network.
Note
Perform the PC's network setting to allow the PC to communicate with Exchanges, various kinds of interface
units, and IP stations.
N-8000 system settings cannot be performed unless the PC's network setting is completed.
However, even the PC of which network setting is not completed may perform the network setting for the
Exchange, various kinds of interface units, and IP station.
1.3. Notes on Setting Update
To avoid equipment failures, never restart the Exchange, various kinds of interface units, and IP station or
switch off the power while in the process of updating* settings.
* The Status indicator light will remain lit while updating is in progress.
5-2
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
2. Installing Software
2.1. System Requirements
This program has been designed based on the following system requirements.
• OS:Windows XP Professional SP2 or later, Windows Vista Business,
Windows 7 Professional, Windows 8.1 Pro*
• CPU:
Pentium , 2 GHz or greater
• Memory:
1 GB or greater
• Required component: Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 SP1, and Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Express
Edition SP3 or later (For the installation method, refer to p. 5-4.)
* Installation procedures and required components for Windows 8.1 are different from those for other OS.
For details, see p. 5-7 "Operating the N-8000 Setting Software Program on Windows 8.1."
2.2. Activating the Setup Guide
Placing the supplied CD-ROM into the CD drive runs the setup guide automatically.
Note
If your PC's CD drive is not compatible with the AutoRun function, the setup guide is not automatically started
even when the CD is inserted.
Use either "Explorer" or "My Computer" to execute the following files, or use [Start
Run] in the Task Bar and
enter the following command.
<Drive where CD is placed> \index.html
For example, when placing the CD in the "d" drive,
d:\index.html
The following screen will be displayed.
Tip
Click "select language," and the language selection screen is displayed. Select the language to be displayed
on the screen.
5-3
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
If your Web browser is not JavaScript-enabled, the screen at
right will be displayed.
Press the English button to display English screens.
2.3. Required Component Installation (Except when the OS is Windows 8.1)
To activate the N-8000 Setting Software program, the following components are required.
• Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 or later*
• Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Express Edition SP3 or later
* This component need not be installed when the OS is Windows 7.
Install these components on the PC in advance using the procedure below.
Note that the PC should be connected to the Internet to download the component installer.
Step 1. Click "3. N-8000 Setting software" on the Setup
Guide screen on p. 5-3.
Step 2. Click the desired component in the "3.2. Required
Component."
As this allows you to access the download site,
download the component installer.
1
Step 3. Run the installer downloaded in Step 2 to install
the desired component.
2
5-4
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
2.4. N-8000 Setting Software Installation
Step 1. Click "Installation Start" in the "N8000 Setting software Installation"
section on the N-8000 Setting
Software Setup Guide screen to start
software program installation.
1
The installer will start up.
2
Step 2. Press [Next] button.
The screen "License Agreement" will be displayed.
Note
Selecting “I Do Not Agree,” followed by [Cancel]
button will exit the software without installing it.
Step 4. Select the language, then press [Next] button.
3
3
Step 3. Carefully read the contents of the License
Agreement, and select “I Agree.” Then, press
[Next] button.
The screen "Language selection" will be displayed.
4
4
5-5
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
The screen "Select Installation Folder" will be
displayed.
Step 5. If you need to change the folder to install the
program, select a desired folder.
To install the software into a different folder other
than indicated on the screen, press [Browse...]
button or [Disk Cost...] button to select a desired
folder.
5
6
Step 6. Press [Next] button.
The screen ready for program installation is
displayed.
Step 7. Press [Next] button to install the software program
into the selected folder.
The screen "Installation Complete" is displayed
when the installation is correctly completed.
Step 8. Press [Close] button.
7
8
5-6
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
2.5. Operating the N-8000 Setting Software Program on Windows 8.1
To activate the N-8000 Setting Software program on Windows 8.1 Pro, the following procedures are required.
Activation of Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 (Refer to the next item.)
Installation of Microsoft SQL Server 2012 Express (See the next page.)
Installation of the N-8000 Setting Software program (See p. 5-10.)
Giving the user the permission to change the "N8000Config.mdf" and "N8000Config_log.
ldf" files (See p. 5-11.)
Note: To perform above procedures, you need to connect a PC to the Internet.
2.5.1. Activation of Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5
Step 1. Open the Control Panel on your PC, then
Programs and Features
click [Programs
Turn Windows features on or off].
The screen "Windows Features" will be
displayed.
Step 2. Mark the checkboxes for all the components
contained in ".NET Framework 3.5 (includes
.NET 2.0 and 3.0)," then press [OK] button.
5-7
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
2.5.2. Installation of Microsoft SQL Server 2012 Express
Step 1. Download "Microsoft SQL Server 2012 Express."
Access the Microsoft Download Center for download.
Step 2. Run the downloaded installer, then click
"New SQL Server stand-alone installation or
add features to an existing installation."
The screen "License Terms" will be displayed.
Step 3. Read the License Terms, then press [Next]
button after marking the checkbox for "I
accept the license terms."
The screen "Product Updates" will be displayed.
Step 4. If there is any update program of the SQL
Server product, mark the checkbox for
"Include SQL Server product updates," then
press [Next] button.
5-8
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
The screen "Feature Selection" will be
displayed.
Step 5. Press [Next] button.
The screen "Instance Configuration" will be
displayed.
Step 6. Check that "SQLExpress" is preset in
Named instance field and "SQLEXPRESS”
in Instance ID field, then press [Next]
button.
The screen "Server Configuration" will be
displayed.
Step 7. Press [Next] button.
5-9
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
The
screen
"Database
Configuration" will be displayed.
Engine
Step 8. Press [Next] button.
The screen "Error Reporting" will be
displayed.
Step 9. Press [Next] button.
Installation begins.
The
Installation
Complete
screen
is displayed when the installation is
successfully completed.
Step 10. Press [Close] button.
2.5.3. N-8000 Setting Software installation
Install the N-8000 Setting Software program referring to p. 5-5 "N-8000 Setting Software Installation."
5-10
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
2.5.4. Giving the user the permission to change the "N8000Config.mdf" and "N8000Config_log.ldf" files
Step 1. Open the folder to which you installed the N-8000 Setting Software program,
then right-click the "N8000Config.mdf" file to select its properties.
The screen "N8000Config Properties" will be displayed.
Step 2. Select "Security" tab.
Step 3. Press [Edit...] button.
Step 4. Select "Users" from "Group or user names," mark the Allow checkboxes for
"Modify" and "Write," then press the [OK] button.
Step 5. Similarly perform the above steps for the "N8000Config_log.ldf" file.
2.6. N-8000 Setting Software Uninstallation
Select [Control Panel]
[Programs and Features] to delete the N-8000 Setting Software program.
5-11
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
2.7. Folder Configuration
The N-8000 Setting Software program is installed in the default location C:\Program Files\TOA\N-8000.
The system setting file is created in the location (1) for Windows XP or (2) for Windows Vista, Windows 7, and
Windows 8.1 as follows:
(1) C:\Document and Settings\All Users\Application Data\TOA\N-8000
(2) C:\ProgramData\TOA\N-8000
The configuration of the folders is as follows. (Note that the system setting file is created after the setting has
been performed using the software.)
Do not change the folder configuration (file location) or the folder and file names.
Install Folder
ConfigurationSoft.exe (Executable program)
N8000Config.mdf (Main database file)
N8000Config_log.ldf (Log database file)
Note
If a data backup is needed, make a backup copy of
Data Folder.
Data Folder
(System name)
(System name).pi8
Setting file
SXInfo.bin
Setting file regarding the SX-2000 system
001.cfg
002.cfg
Setting file
(Unit number).cfg
Message (Original message for emergency message broadcast)
***.pmf
(System name)
2.8. Version Update Information
Download our TOA Products Data, web site (http://www.toa-products.com/international/) to get the up-to-date
version for N-8000 Setting Software, firmware, and Instruction manuals.
• N-8000 Setting Software version number can be confirmed using the Help menu.
• The current firmware version can be confirmed on the system management screen displayed when the
browser establishes the connection to the Exchange, various kinds of Interface unit, or IP station.
• The instruction manual version number can be confirmed by checking the preparation date (month and year)
shown at the lower right corner of the last page.
Example: Prepared in June 2014: 201406
5-12
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
3. Activating N-8000 Setting Software Program
Step 1. Double-click the shortcut icon created on the desk-top screen when installing, or double-click the
ConfigurationSoft.exe created in the installed folder directly.
[System Selection] screen is displayed.
(1) New System
Creates a new system.
Enter the system name to be created.
The password "guest" is set by default.
(2) Existing System
Selects one from the existing systems.
Enter a password after selecting the system
name.
(3) Import button
Reads system information from the pi8-formatted
file and saves it to the database.
Use this button when reading system information
created by another PC.
Note
If the system to be imported and that already
having been registered are the same in name, the
new system cannot be imported.
In this case, delete the existing system setting
data folder with the same name, and then perform
data import.
For details of the data folder, refer to p. 5-12
Step 2. Select "System name", enter password, then press [OK].
Note
System name and password are case-sensitive.
To perform new system settings, select "New System," then enter the system name and press the "OK"
button.
System name and password are factory-preset to "N-8000" and "guest" respectively.
For changing System name or Password, refer to , .
5-13
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
After system name and password have been entered correctly, N-8000 Setting Software program initial screen
is displayed.
Step 3. Click [Unit Scan (Network Settings)] when detecting equipment.
Step 4. Click [System Settings] when setting system.
Step 5. Click [Clock Settings] when setting system clock.
Step 6. Click [Message Paging Settings] when creating and registering the message for the IP Master station
and IP Remote microphone station.
Step 7. Click [End] when terminating this software program.
5-14
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
4. Unit Scan (Network Settings)
These functions enable the detection and network setting of Exchanges, various kinds of interface units, and
IP stations connected to the local area network.
The equipment detection function can only be used within the effective broadcast range (refer to p. 8-9).
Other equipment must be set using a different network setting (refer to p. 4-3).
4.1. Screen Description
Click [Unit Scan (Network Settings)] on the initial screen.
The Equipment Detection screen starts up, initiating automatic equipment detection.
The following shows an example of the screen displayed after equipment has been scanned, including a list of
scanned Exchanges, various kinds of interface units, and IP stations.
(1) Communicable Equipment
Displays all devices that can perform communications
normally.
(2) Non-Communicable Equipment
Displays all devices that cannot
communicate network settings.
(3) Status Reacquisition button
Re-enables equipment detection.
correctly
(5) Change IP Settings button
Changes IP settings of selected device.
(6) Transmit Setting Change Information button
Transmits changed settings to device.
(7) End button
Terminates equipment detection.
(4) Delete button
Deletes selected device from the list.
5-15
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
4.2. Changing Equipment Settings
4.2.1. Single Unit Selection and Activation
Select the device to be changed on the Equipment IP Setting screen, then click "Change IP Settings" button.
The following screen shows an example in which a single device is activated after it has been selected on the
Equipment IP Setting screen.
(1) IP Address
Set the device’s IP address.
(2) Subnet Mask
Set the device’s subnet mask.
Click on the "Validate subnet mask edit" checkbox
to change settings.
(3) Default Gateway
Set the device’s default gateway.
Click on the "Validate default gateway edit"
checkbox to change settings.
(4) Enable Subnet Mask Configuration
Selects whether to enable or disable subnet mask
changes.
(5) Enable Default Gateway Configuration
Selects whether to enable or disable default
gateway changes.
(6) Web Port
Set the web server port number.
(7) Name
Set the name of the device.
4.2.2. Multiple Unit Selection and Activation
Select the device to be changed on the Equipment IP Setting screen, then click "Change IP Settings" button.
The following screen shows an example in which a single device is activated after it has been selected on the
Equipment IP Setting screen.
(1) IP Address
Set the starting value of the IP address to be
assigned to the selected devices.
(2) Subnet Mask
Set the subnet mask to be assigned to the
selected devices.
(3) Number of Assigned Units
Set the number of devices for which the same
IP address is to be assigned from the starting
IP address number. The IP addresses for the
designated number of devices is assigned in
sequential order from the IP address set in "(1) IP
Address."
5-16
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5. System Setting function
Performs individual system settings. Use the Unit Scan/Network Setting function, a browser, an N-8000MS
Multifunctional station, or an N-8500MS/8600MS IP Multifunctional station to set the IP address correctly, then
use this System Setting function to update the exchange's, various kinds of interface units, or IP station's setting
data.
5.1. Screen Description
Click [System Settings] on the initial screen.
Note
The screen above represents the state when settings for 15 pieces of equipment have been completed.
(1) General tab
Performs settings related to the overall
system configuration. Available tabs include:
[Equipment
Registration],
[Station
Table],
[Network Communication Registration], [Multicast
Registration], [System Settings] and [Gateway
Settings].
(2) Exchange tab
Performs settings related to the exchange.
Available tabs include: [Network Settings],
[Sampling Frequency Correction] and [Function
Settings].
(3) Multi Interface tab
Perform settings related to the multi interface
unit. Available tabs include: [Network Settings],
[Sampling Frequency Correction], [Function
Settings], [Audio I/O], [Contact Input] and [Contact
Output].
(4) Sub-station Interface tab
Perform settings related to the Sub-station
interface unit. Available tabs include: [Network
Settings], [Function Settings] and [Sub-Station
Settings].
(5) IP Station tab
Perform settings related to the IP station. Available
tabs include: [Network Settings], [Function Settings
1], [Function Settings 2], [Speed Dialing], [Scan
Monitor] and [Message Paging].
(6) Station tab
Perform settings related to the station connected
to the exchange and the analog master station
connected to the Substation interface unit.
Available tabs include: [Function Settings], [Speed
Dialing] and [Scan Monitor].
5-17
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
(7) C/O Interface tab
Perform settings related to the C/O interface
unit. Available tabs include: [Network Settings],
[Function Settings 1], [Function Settings 2] and
[Scan Monitor].
(10) Direct Select tab
Perform settings related to the Direct select
unit. Available tabs include: [Network Settings],
[Function Settings], [Contact Input] and [Contact
Output].
(8) Telephone Interface tab
Perform settings related to the Telephone
interface unit. Available tabs include: [Network
Settings], [Function Settings 1], [Function Settings
2] and [Scan Monitor].
(11) Gateway tab
Perform settings related to the IP module.
Available tab includes: [Network Settings].
(9) Audio Interface tab
Perform settings related to the Audio interface
unit. Available tabs include: [Network Settings]
and [Function Settings].
(12)Paging tab
Used to set paging zones.
(13) Group tab
Perform settings for Group Blocking and Remote
Response group functions. Available tabs
include: [Group Blocking Group], [Group Blocking
To] and [Remote Response Group].
5.2. Menu
5.2.1. File
New :
Open :
Save :
Save As :
Print:
Close :
Creates the setting file for a new system.
Opens the stored setting file.
Saves the setting file currently being edited.
Saves the setting file being edited as a file for the different system by renaming it.
Prints the set data of the system.
Terminates this software program.
5.2.2. Configuration
Upload :
Writes settings data to equipment.
Download :
Downloads equipment settings data to a PC.
Export :
Outputs the setting files. (*.pi8/*.cfg)
Firmware Version Check :Verifies the device’s firmware version. If a device is detected to be using a firmware
version earlier than 2.00, the firmware can be updated to version 2.00.
5-18
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
General: Equipment Registration
5.2.3. Help
About : Displays the version number of this software program.
5.3. Overall System Configuration Settings
Click "General" tab.
5.3.1. Equipment registration
Determines the configuration of the equipment connected to the network within the system and register it.
Program data can be entered manually, or it can be imported using data scan for the Equipment using the Unit
Scan/Network Setting function.
Step 1. Click "Equipment Registration" tab to display the setting screen.
1
2
3-1
3
Note
The screen above represents the state when settings for 16 pieces of equipment have been completed.
5-19
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
[Screen description]
General: Equipment Registration
(1) Starting Equipment Number
Enter the first unit number to be set. Unit numbers of 1 – 192 are automatically assigned in sequential
order starting with the number entered here. However, duplicated numbers cannot be assigned.
(2) Equipment No.
Used to enter the equipment number of the exchange. Set a number (1 – 192) that does not
duplicate other unit numbers.
(3) Equipment name
Allows a name up to eight alphanumeric characters to be entered for the equipment.
(4) Model (Can't be edited.)
Model numbers of equipment are displayed.
(5) IP Address
Allows an IP address for the equipment to be entered.
(6) Web Port
Allows the Web server's port number to be entered.
(7) WAN IP address
Allows the IP address for the equipment as viewed from the wide-area network (WAN) to be
entered. This space may be left blank if NAPT is not used.
(8) WAN Web port
Allows the Web server's port number for the equipment as viewed from the wide-area network
(WAN) to be entered. This space may be left blank if NAPT is not used.
Step 2. Set the system configuration.
Enter the number of the equipment connected to the network .
The total number is displayed in the "Total number of equipment connected to Network" space, and a
list of equipment (exchanges, various kinds of interface units, and IP stations) is displayed.
5-20
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
General: Equipment Registration
Step 3. Set the Equipment name, Model, IP Address, and Web Port.
These items can be set directly by clicking and editing the data in each cell, or by importing equipment
data detected using the Unit Scan/Network Setting function. Follow the below procedures when
importing data from the result of Unit Scan.
3-1. Press [Import from scan result] to display the following dialog.
3-2. Select an import destination from [Equipment Registration], and select an import source from [Equipment
Table], then press the [import] button. This will cause the settings data for the detected equipment to be
copied to the equipment selected as the import destination.
Note
Be sure to match the model number of import source with that of import destination for selection.
3-3. Click [OK] to close the dialog and return the display to the previous edit screen.
Step 4. Change the WAN IP address and the WAN Web port as required by clicking and editing the contents
of each cell directly.
5-21
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.3.2. Station number and type settings
General: Station Table
Step 1. Click "Station Table" tab to display the setting screen.
Step 2. Select the number of digits in the station number.
Step 3. Set each item as follows:
(1) Equipment No. (Can't be edited.)
Refers to the equipment number of the exchange to which stations are connected.
(2) Equipment name (Can't be edited.)
Refers to the name of the Exchange to which stations are connected.
(3)Line No. (Can't be edited.)
Refers to the number of the line to which stations are connected.
(4) Type
Allows the type of station to be selected. Setting contents change depending on the type of station selected.
(5) Station No.
Refers to the station number used when making a call. Set the number with the same digit length (2 – 6
digits) as that in the Station Number Digit setting.
When an identification number is used in the multi-interface unit or C/O line interface unit, station numbers
beginning with the same identification number (including the 2-digit identification number) cannot be used.
Example: When the access number is "10," "110" and "1100" can be used but "10," "100," "101," or "1000"
cannot be used for station numbers.
Note
If you set the station number starting with "0" (such as 01 or 0001), enter the station number exactly as
registered without omitting "0" in the item requiring the station number entry (e.g. Master station calls from
the door station and Substation).
Example: If the station number is "0001," enter "0001." ("1" or "01" is invalid entry.)
5-22
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
General: Station Table
(6) Station name
Set the name of each station using up to eight alphanumeric characters. Station names can be displayed
on multifunctional stations.
[Collective setup]
Pressing the Collective setup button permits station types, station numbers, and station names for all or
selected stations to be set all at once.
Step 1. Press the Collective Setup button.
The Collective setup window appears.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Step 2. Select either "All stations" or "Selected stations" for the Setup range.
When "Selected stations" is selected, designate the setup range on the Station Table screen.
To do so, drug the mouse over the station list, or click stations one by one while holding down the Shift
key of the PC.
Step 3. To change the type of station connected to the exchange, tick the "Change station type" box and select
desired type from the pull-down menu.
Note: Types of IP stations cannot be set collectively.
Step 4. To change the type of station connected to the Substation interface unit, tick the "Change sub-station/
station type" box and select desired type from the pull-down menu.
Step 5. To assign sequence station number, tick the corresponding box and enter the start number.
Example: When "100" is entered for a start number, the station numbers to be automatically set are
"100," "101," "102," and so on.
If a set station number comes to the maximum number in the set number digits, no further station
number is assigned.
Step 6. To set the station name with sequence number, tick the corresponding box and enter a new name.
Up to eight alphanumeric characters including the sequence number can be used.
Example: When a station name "sta1-" is entered, the station names to be automatically set are "sta11," "sta1-2," "sta1-3," and so on.
Step 7. Press the [OK] button.
5-23
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.3.3. Network communications registration
General: Network Communication Registration
Enables or disables unicast network communications among equipment connected to the network.
Step 1. Click "Network Communication Registration" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Select device combinations capable of network communications.
Selection can be made by clicking the combinations that allow communications.
5-24
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.3.4. Multicast communications registration
General: Multicast Registration
Enables or disables Multicast communications among equipment connected to the network. When multicast
communications are an available option, performing this registration conserves network bandwidth by allowing
multicast paging.
Step 1. Click "Multicast Registration" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Enter the multicast address to be used for the system.
Note
Avoid setting multicast addresses that have "0" or "128" in the second octet and "1" in the fourth octet
(example: 225.0.0.1 or 225.128.0.1). The IP station cannot correctly receive audio if so set.
Step 3. Mark the checkbox associated with the combinations that enable multicast communications.
5-25
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.3.5. System settings registration
General: System Settings
Perform settings common to the entire system.
Step 1. Click "System Settings" tab to display the following setting screen.
(1) Response Mode
Set the Response Mode.
Sequential:Responds to individual calls in order of receipt.
Selective:The master station selects a station and responds to that station.
Note
Selective response mode is invalid in firmware versions earlier than 2.00.
(2) Clock Master Setting
Select the device that functions as the master clock to which all system equipment clocks are referenced.
Only one device per system can be designated as the master clock. If time synchronization has been
enabled in the N-8000AF Audio interface unit, only that N-8000AF unit can be set as the master clock. Also,
the N-8000RS, N-8010RS and N-8400RS Substation interface units cannot be set as the master clocks.
(3) NTP client Setting
Select the device to connect to the NTP server.
Only a clock master-designated N-8000AF can be set as the NTP client within the system.
Note
This function updates only minutes and seconds of the clock of the N-8000AF. Before using this function,
be sure to set the clock master N-8000AF to the correct time. (Refer to p. 5-128, 6-42.)
(4) Time Signal Setting
Set the N-8000AF Audio interface unit that uses a time signal.
5-26
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
General: System Settings
(5) DST (Summer time) Settings
Set daylight saving time.
with DST: Set whether or not to enable daylight saving time.
Start/End: Set the date and time to start and end daylight saving time. Designate it in the format [hour] of
[day] of [nth week] of [month]. The last day of the week in the month can also be designated.
(Setting example)
June
Sun
Start of DST
When set as above, the DST will start
and end as shown on the calendar at
right.
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
1
2
3
October
Sun
End of DST
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
(6) NTP Settings
NTP server address: Enter the IP address of the NTP server.
NTP server port:
Enter the port number of the NTP server.
NTP sync time:
Set time to communicate with the NTP server.
Note: NTP Ver. 3 is used to synchronize the system clock.
(7) Clock sync time
When the master clock has been designated, set the time at which system clocks are synchronized.
Notes
• It is recommended to set the Clock sync time later than the NTP sync time.
• Setting the Clock sync time and the NTP sync time to the same time may cause some system equipment
not to be adjusted to the correct time even after NTP synchronization.
(8) C/O control password
Set the C/O control password.
(9) System Password button
Set the System password.
(10) Maintenance Password button
Set the Maintenance password.
5-27
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.3.6. Gateway Settings
General: Gateway Settings
Perform settings necessary for making broadcasts to the SX-2000 system.
Prepare the SX-2000 Setting file in advance.
Step 1. Click the “Gateway Settings” tab.
The setting screen below is displayed.
Step 2. Select the SX-2000 System to be connected.
Mark the [Enable] checkbox for the SX-2000 System to be connected.
3-1
The [Detailed setting] button becomes active.
Up to 8 systems can be connected.
Note: A number (1 through 8) above the checkbox is the ID of SX-2000 system.
Step 3. Read the SX-2000 System settings.
3-1. Click the [Detailed setting] button.
The SX-2000 Setting dialog is
displayed.
3-2. Click the [Browse] button to
select the SX-2000 Setting file.
3-2
5-28
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
General: Gateway Settings
SX-2000 System name, IP
address, and other related
items are displayed.
Step 4. Select the SX-200IP to be
connected.
4-1. Mark the checkbox of the SX200IP connection.
Up to 8 SX-200IP units can
be connected per SX-2000
System.
4-2
4-1
4-2. Click the [Close] button.
The Slot number (SX) dialog
is displayed.
4-3. Select the Slot from the pulldown menu, then click the
[OK] button.
4-3
5-29
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.4. Exchange Settings
Exchange: Network Settings
Click "Exchange" tab to select the exchange to be set.
Choose the name or number of the exchange from the list.
5.4.1. Network settings
Step 1. Click "Network Settings" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set individual items.
(1) IP address
Allows entry of the Exchange's IP address.
(2) Subnet mask
Allows entry of the Subnet mask.
(3) Default gateway
Allows entry of the Default gateway.
5-30
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
(4)Port No.
Set the start port number to be used for each protocol.
Exchange: Network Settings
[Web server]
Allows entry of the Web server's port number. The valid range is from 1 to 65535. The default factory setting
is 80.
[TCP port]
Allows entry of a TCP port start number other than the Web server (valid range from 1 to 65532). The
N-8000 system uses 4 consecutive ports starting with the TCP start port. The default factory setting is
5000.
The TCP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Web server
TCP
Web server
Call control
TCP
Port start number + 0
5000
PC monitoring
TCP
Port start number + 1
5001
PC control
TCP
Port start number + 2
5002
Reservation
TCP
Port start number + 3
5003
80
[UDP port]
Allows entry of UDP port start number to be used (valid range from 1 to 65516). The N-8000 system uses
20 consecutive ports starting with the UDP start port. The default factory setting is 5006.
The UDP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Reservation
UDP
Port start number + 0
Frequency compensation
UDP
Port start number + 1 to 3
5007 to 5009
Conversation
UDP
Port start number + 4 to 19
5010 to 5025
5006
Note
Because UDP port number 15000 is used internally by the system, the numbers from 14981 to 15000 are
not available.
[Paging port (UDP)]
Displays the UDP port number to be used when making paging using the multicast communications.
To perform settings, refer to p. 5-121, Paging Zone Settings.
(5) NAPT compatible
When connecting a PC to the exchange using the global IP address, mark the [Enable] checkbox to make
the items from [Network ID (6)] to [WAN port No. (8)] available for input.
5-31
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Exchange: Network Settings
(6) Network ID
When connecting a PC to the exchange using the global IP address, enter the number that identifies
networks for each range accessible by the PC using the local address.
When networks are connected as shown below, for example, assign different ID numbers for each, such as
"1" to equipment connected to LAN (1) and "2" to equipment connected to LAN (2).
Network ID No. 1 is assigned to the PC for setting. Set network ID No. 1 to equipment that can be accessed
by the PC (for example, equipment connected to LAN 1) using the local address.
LAN
Router
WAN
LA N
Router
NAPT
NAPT
(7) WAN IP address
Allows entry of the Exchange's IP address as viewed from the WAN side.
(8) WAN Port No.
Set the start port number to be used for each protocol as viewed from the WAN side.
[Web server]
Allows entry of the Web server's port number. The valid range is from 1 to 65535. The default factory setting
is 80.
[TCP port]
Allows entry of TCP port start number other than the Web server. The valid range is from 1 to 65532. The
N-8000 system uses 4 consecutive ports starting with the TCP start port. The default factory setting is
5000.
The TCP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Web server
TCP
Web server
Call control
TCP
Port start number + 0
5000
PC monitoring
TCP
Port start number + 1
5001
PC control
TCP
Port start number + 2
5002
Reservation
TCP
Port start number + 3
5003
80
[UDP port]
Allows entry of UDP port start number to be used. (valid range from 1 to 65516) The N-8000 system uses
20 consecutive ports starting with the UDP start port. The default factory setting is 5006.
The UDP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Reservation
UDP
Port start number + 0
5006
Frequency compensation
UDP
Port start number + 1 to 3
5007 to 5009
Conversation
UDP
Port start number + 4 to 19
5010 to 5025
5-32
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Exchange: Network Settings
(9) Available bit rate
Set the capacity (or a usable upper limit value) of the network line to which the Exchange is connected.
Setting this communication capacity prevents sound quality deterioration and longer time delays caused by
excess conversation and/or paging communications traffic.
(10) Broadcast Spec
Select the voice transmission mode that is appropriate for the usable frequency band.
• High quality sound transmission mode
Transmits voices at high sound quality with short time delay. Use this mode as the normal default mode.
• Standard mode
Transmits voice audio with a short time delay. In this mode, the sound quality is reduced, but the delay
time is identical to that in high quality mode, allowing a narrower frequency band to be used. Use this
mode when exchanges are connected via an ISDN line (128 kbps).
• Band width saving transmission mode
Voice transmission uses a very narrow frequency band, but with lesser quality sound and longer time
delay. Use this mode when exchanges are connected via an Analog line (56 kbps).
Sampling frequency
Delay time
Frequency band to be used
16 kHz
0.08 second
130 kbps
Standard mode
8 kHz
0.08 second
98 kbps
Band width saving
transmission mode
8 kHz
0.32 second
49.5 kbps
High quality sound
transmission mode
5-33
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.4.2. Sampling frequency correction settings
Exchange: Sampling Frequency Correction
Step 1. Click "Sampling Frequency Correction" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set individual items.
(1) Sampling Frequency Correction
Select this tab when setting the transfer of sampling frequency correction data between different networks.
(Correction data is automatically transmitted and received within the range that can receive broadcast
packets.)
Note: See p. 8-9 regarding sampling frequency correction.
Auto:Corrects frequency correction data only over the local area network without transferring
it to other networks.
Transmission:
Transmits frequency data to other networks. The transmission destination column
becomes available for input of transmission destination IP addresses and their port
numbers. Up to sixteen destinations can be set. When correcting the sampling frequency
using multicast communications, enter the transmission destination's IP address.
Reception:Receives frequency data from other networks. The receiving source address column
becomes available for input of addresses.
When transferring frequency data using multicast communications, checkmark "Receives
via Multicast" and enter the multicast address to be used.
5-34
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.4.3. Function settings
Exchange: Function Settings
Step 1. Click "Function Settings" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set individual items.
(1) Transfer settings
Set the transfer function ON or OFF for the station connected to the exchange.
Call forwarding:Calls to stations are automatically transferred to another designated station
without sounding a call tone only when Call forwarding function is enabled.
Time-based call forwarding:Calls to stations are automatically transferred to another designated station
without sounding a call tone only when the preset time is reached.
This function can be set only when the call forwarding function is enabled.
Preset time can be set only when the time-based call forwarding function is
enabled.
Group hunting:Calls to a busy station are automatically transferred to another designated
station, if group hunting function is set to the called station.
Absence transfer:When no response is made to a call to the station for a set period of time,
the call is automatically transferred to another designated station. Preset
time duration can be set only when the absence transfer mode is enabled.
(2) Oneshot make time (second)
Sets the duration that the external control output terminals are shorted momentarily.
The setting range is from 1 to 9 (in 1-second units).
5-35
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Exchange: Function Settings
(3) Time limit
Set the time-out value for calling, conversation or paging functions in ten-second units between 10 and 990
seconds.
Call time-out:Set whether to limit the duration of a call to the station. If setting a time-out,
enter the time limit after which calls to the station are automatically terminated.
If not setting a time-out, calls will continue until they are cancelled or the called
station responds.
Conversation time-out:Set whether to limit the duration of conversations with the station. If setting
a time-out, enter the time limit after which conversations to the station are
automatically terminated. If not setting a time-out, conversations will continue
until executing the termination operation.
Paging time-out:Set whether to limit the duration of paging call with the station. If setting a timeout, enter the time limit after which paging calls to the station are automatically
terminated.
If not setting a time-out, paging calls will continue until executing the termination
operation.
(4) BGM input
Set BGM to be heard at the stations connected to the selected exchange.
Select the unit's number and audio input number of the multi interface unit to which the BGM sound sources
are connected.
(5) Audio Trigger
Set the timer interlock and restricted time interval for the N-8050DS unit’s audio trigger. This setting is
possible only when the N-8000EX exchange is used.
Time-based audio trigger:Selecting "Time Interlock ON" allows the time range that enables the audio
trigger to be set.
Audio trigger time-out:
Set the operation time limit for the audio trigger monitor.
(6)Paging with call tone
Sounds a pre-announcement tone when paging is initiated.
(7) Delay Time
Set the delay time before paging is initiated.
(8)Paging response mode
Select either "Zone Selection" or "Automatic response" modes when responding to the paging.
Zone Selection:Responds to a paging call by designating the number of the paging zone. Respond
to the paging party who made the paging to the designated zone last is called. Use
this mode if paging announcements are heard from multiple zones.
Automatic response:Use only the paging response key to make a response. The responding station
is connected to the station that made a paging call over the paging zone through
which the responding station last received a call.
(9)Priority settings
Sets whether paging calls or conversations should take precedence when these occur simultaneously.
This function is fixed to "Conversation priority" for the N-8010EX.
Paging priority:When a call is received while receiving a paging call, the called station becomes
busy and the paging call is gone through. Station keys cannot be used while
receiving a paging call. (Paging response cannot be performed at a paging
receiving station, either.)
Conversation priority:A paging call is not received when paged during a conversation or dialing operation.
Station keys can be dialed even while receiving a paging call.
5-36
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Exchange: Function Settings
(10) Calling station indication
Select either "During call and talk" or "During talk" mode when performing the calling station indication
function.
The table below shows the timing that the Multi interface unit's, Direct select unit’s, or Audio interface
unit’s contact output is closed.
Calling station indication
During call and talk
During talk
Calling
Closed
Open
Being called
Closed
Open
Call waiting
Closed
Open
Talking
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Station operation
Being paged
Receiving scan monitor
(11) Door station contact output
Set the contact output operation mode of the door station connected to this exchange.
Select one from "Door remote control," "During call," "During talk," and "During call and talk."
The table below shows the timing that the door station's contact output is closed.
Door station contact output
Door remote
control
During call
During talk
During
call and talk
Calling
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Being called
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Call waiting
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Talking
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Being paged
Open
Open
Open
Open
Receiving scan monitor
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Door station operation
Door remote
Closed
5-37
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.5. Multi Interface Unit Settings
Multi Interface: Network Settings
Click "Multi Interface" tab to select the multi interface unit to be set.
Choose the name or number of the multi interface unit from the list.
5.5.1. Network settings
Step 1. Click "Network Settings" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set individual items.
(1) IP address
Allows entry of the multi interface unit's IP address.
(2) Subnet mask
Allows entry of the Subnet mask.
(3) Default gateway
Allows entry of the Default gateway.
5-38
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
(4)Port No.
Set the start port number to be used for each protocol.
Multi Interface: Network Settings
[Web server]
Allows entry of the Web server's port number. The valid range is from 1 to 65535. The default factory setting
is 80.
[TCP port]
Allows entry of a TCP port start number other than the Web server (valid range from 1 to 65532). The
N-8000 system uses 4 consecutive ports starting with the TCP start port. The default factory setting is
5000.
The TCP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Web server
TCP
Web server
Call control
TCP
Port start number + 0
5000
PC monitoring
TCP
Port start number + 1
5001
PC control
TCP
Port start number + 2
5002
Reservation
TCP
Port start number + 3
5003
80
[UDP port]
Allows entry of UDP port start number to be used (valid range from 1 to 65516). The N-8000 system uses
20 consecutive ports starting with the UDP start port. The default factory setting is 5006.
The UDP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Reservation
UDP
Port start number + 0
Frequency compensation
UDP
Port start number + 1 to 3
5007 to 5009
Conversation
UDP
Port start number + 4 to 19
5010 to 5025
5006
Note
Because UDP port number 15000 is used internally by the system, the numbers from 14981 to 15000 are
not available.
[Paging port (UDP)]
Displays the UDP port number to be used when making paging using the multicast communications.
To perform settings, refer to p. 5-121, Paging Zone Settings.
(5) NAPT compatible
When connecting a PC to the Multi interface unit using the global IP address, mark the [Enable] checkbox
to make the items from [Network ID (6)] to [WAN port No. (8)] available for input.
5-39
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Multi Interface: Network Settings
(6) Network ID
When connecting a PC to the multi interface unit using the global IP address, enter the number that identifies
networks for each range accessible by the PC using the local address.
When networks are connected as shown below, for example, assign different ID numbers for each, such as
"1" to equipment connected to LAN (1) and "2" to equipment connected to LAN (2).
Network ID No. 1 is assigned to the PC for setting. Set network ID No. 1 to equipment that can be accessed
by the PC (for example, equipment connected to LAN 1) using the local address.
L AN
Router
WAN
LA N
Router
NAPT
NAPT
(7) WAN IP address
Allows entry of the Multi interface unit's IP address as viewed from the WAN side.
(8) WAN Port No.
Set the start port number to be used for each protocol as viewed from the WAN side.
[Web server]
Allows entry of the Web server's port number. The valid range is from 1 to 65535. The default factory setting
is 80.
[TCP port]
Allows entry of TCP port start number other than the Web server. The valid range is from 1 to 65532. The
N-8000 system uses 4 consecutive ports starting with the TCP start port. The default factory setting is
5000.
The TCP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Web server
TCP
Web server
Call control
TCP
Port start number + 0
5000
PC monitoring
TCP
Port start number + 1
5001
PC control
TCP
Port start number + 2
5002
Reservation
TCP
Port start number + 3
5003
80
[UDP port]
Allows entry of UDP port start number to be used (valid range from 1 to 65516). The N-8000 system uses
20 consecutive ports starting with the UDP start port. The default factory setting is 5006.
The UDP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Reservation
UDP
Port start number + 0
5006
Frequency compensation
UDP
Port start number + 1 to 3
5007 to 5009
Conversation
UDP
Port start number + 4 to 19
5010 to 5025
5-40
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Multi Interface: Network Settings
(9) Available bit rate
Set the capacity (or a usable upper limit value) of the network line to which the Multi interface unit is
connected. Setting this communication capacity prevents sound quality deterioration and longer time
delays caused by excess conversation and/or paging communications traffic.
(10) Broadcast Spec
Select the voice transmission mode that is appropriate for the usable frequency band.
• High quality sound transmission mode
Transmits voices at high sound quality with short time delay. Use this mode as the normal default mode.
Also use this mode when BGM sound sources are connected.
• Standard mode
Transmits voice audio with a short time delay. In this mode, the sound quality is reduced, but the delay
time is identical to that in high quality mode, allowing a narrower frequency band to be used. Use this
mode when multi interface units are connected via an ISDN line (128 kbps).
• Band width saving transmission mode
Voice transmission uses a very narrow frequency band, but with lesser quality sound and longer time
delay. Use this mode when multi interface units are connected via an Analog line (56 kbps).
Sampling frequency
Delay time
Frequency band to be used
16 kHz
0.08 second
130 kbps
Standard mode
8 kHz
0.08 second
98 kbps
Band width saving
transmission mode
8 kHz
0.32 second
49.5 kbps
High quality sound
transmission mode
5-41
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.5.2. Sampling frequency correction settings
Multi Interface: Sampling Frequency Correction
Step 1. Click "Sampling Frequency Correction" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set individual items.
(1) Sampling Frequency Correction
Select this tab when setting the transfer of sampling frequency correction data between different networks.
(Correction data is automatically transmitted and received within the range that can receive broadcast
packets.)
Note: See p. 8-9 regarding sampling frequency correction.
Auto:Corrects frequency correction data only over the local area network without transferring
it to other networks.
Transmission:
Transmits frequency data to other networks. The transmission destination column
becomes available for input of transmission destination IP addresses and their port
numbers. Up to sixteen destinations can be set. When correcting the sampling frequency
using multicast communications, enter the transmission destination's IP address.
Reception:Receives frequency data from other networks. The receiving source address column
becomes available for input of addresses.
When transferring frequency data using multicast communications, checkmark "Receives
via Multicast" and enter the multicast address to be used.
5-42
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.5.3. Function settings
Multi Interface: Function Settings
Step 1. Click "Function Settings" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set individual items.
(1) Oneshot make time (second)
Sets the duration that the external control output terminals are shorted momentarily.
The setting range is from 1 to 9 (in 1-second units).
(2) Time Limit
Set the time-out value for calling, conversation or paging functions in ten-second units between 10 and 990
seconds.
Call time-out:Set whether to limit the duration of a call to the station. If setting a timeout, enter
the time limit after which calls to the station are automatically terminated. If not
setting a timeout, calls will continue until they are cancelled or the called station
responds.
Conversation time-out:Set whether to limit the duration of conversations with the station. If setting a timeout,
enter the time limit after which conversations to the station are automatically
terminated. If not setting a timeout, conversations will continue until executing the
termination operation.
Paging time-out:Set whether to limit the duration of paging call with the station. If setting a timeout,
enter the time limit after which paging calls to the station are automatically
terminated.
If not setting a timeout, paging calls will continue until executing the termination
operation.
5-43
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Multi Interface: Function Settings
(3) Aux input paging
Allows external input broadcasts to take precedence over all-zone paging and individual zone paging.
(4) Delay Time
Set the delay time before paging is initiated.
(5)Paging response mode
Select either "Zone Selection" or "Automatic response" modes when responding to the paging.
Zone Selection:Responds to a paging call by designating the number of the paging zone. Respond
to the paging party who made the paging to the designated zone last is called. Use
this mode if paging announcements are heard from multiple zones.
Automatic response:Use only the paging response key to make a response. The responding station
is connected to the station that made a paging call over the paging zone through
which the responding station last received a call.
(6)Priority settings
Sets whether paging calls or conversations should take precedence when these occur simultaneously.
Paging priority:When a call is received while receiving a paging call, the called station becomes busy
and the paging call is gone through. Station keys cannot be used while receiving a
paging call.
Conversation priority:A paging call is not received when paged during a conversation or dialing operation.
Station keys can be dialed even while receiving a paging call.
5-44
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.5.4. Audio I/O settings
Multi Interface: Audio I/O
Step 1. Click "Audio I/O" tab.
The corresponding setting screen is displayed.
Step 2. Perform settings for each item of Audio I/O Ch 1 and Ch 2.
Set how to use the Multi-interface unit's Audio input and output terminals. The following setting items
are provided in Audio I/O Ch1 and Ch2.
(1) Input mode
Set the operation mode to be used.
If "Tie-line" or "PBX I/F" is selected, the output mode is also automatically set to the same contents.
Tie-line:
Select this item when connecting the Multi interface unit to the exchange of different
series intercom system (EXES-2000 or EXES-6000 series system).
PBX I/F:
Select this item when connecting the Multi interface to the PBX analog E&M interface.
Aux input paging: Select this item when connecting the Multi interface unit to playback components
or Remote microphone to make paging calls. Paging calls can be made to the
preprogrammed paging zones when the control input is activated.
BGM:
Select this item when broadcasting BGM to the stations in standby mode by connecting
playback components.
Unused:
The audio input is not used.
5-45
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Multi Interface: Audio I/O
(2) Output mode
Setting "Input mode" to "Aux input paging," "BGM" or "Unused" permits "PA paging" to be selected.
Tie-line:
Select this item when connecting the Multi interface unit to the exchange of different series
intercom system (EXES-2000 or EXES-6000 series system).
PBX I/F:
Select this item when connecting the Multi interface unit to the PBX analog E&M interface.
PA paging: Select this item when connecting the amplifier, etc. for PA paging.
Unused:
The audio output is not used.
(3) Input sensitivity
Setting "Input mode" to "Tie-line" or "PBX I/F" permits the input sensitivity to be set.
Set the sensitivity level in 4 increments of 1 – 4. "1" (default) is the minimum and "4" is maximum. (5 dB per
step)
(4) Access No.
Setting "Input mode" to "Tie-line" or "PBX I/F" permits the access number to be set. Set the access number
between 0 and 99 (single or double digit), which is used when the Multi interface unit is connected to
different series intercom system or when making calls to a PBX.
Note
When a single digit number is set for the access number, avoid using numbers that match the first 1 digit
of station numbers.
When a double digit number is set for the access number, avoid using numbers that match the first 2 digits
of station numbers.
(5)Paging No.
Setting "Input mode" to "Aux input paging" permits the paging zone to be set.
Enter the paging zone number.
(6) Output level
Setting "Input mode" to "Tie-line" or "PBX I/F" permits the output level to be set.
Set the sensitivity level in 4 increments of 1 – 4. "1" is the minimum and "4" (default) is maximum. (5 dB per
step)
(7)Line attr (Line attribute)
Choose a line attribute from "PB," "DP10," and "DP20."
(8)Line start
Setting "Input mode" to "PBX I/F" permits the line start method to be set. Choose the line start method from
"Wink start," "Second dial tone," and "Timing start" signaling methods, which are defined as follows.
Wink start signaling method
After sending a start signal, a calling device sends a selective signal when it detects the acknowledgment
signal (140 to 290 ms contact-closure pulse) from the called device.
Second dial tone signaling method
After sending a start signal, a calling device sends a selective signal when it detects the dial tone from
the called device.
Timing start signaling method
After sending a start signal, a calling device sends a selective signal after 3 seconds have passed.
5-46
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Multi Interface: Contact Input
5.5.5. Contact input setting
Step 1. Click "Contact Input" tab. The setting screen is displayed.
Step 2. Set each item of "Contact input."
(1) Contact input No. (Can't be edited.)
The Multi interface unit's contact input terminal number.
(2) Operation mode
Select the contact input's operation mode. The setting contents differ depending on the mode selected
here.
Input interlock level: Select this item when closing the contact output terminal in synchronization with
the contact input terminal as shown below. (The input is defined when its level
remains constant for 50 ms after change.)
Input interlock edge: Select this item when closing the contact output terminal in synchronization with
the contact input terminal as shown below. (The input is defined when its level
remains constant for 50 ms after change.)
[Input interlock level]
Input
Output
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
50 ms
50 ms
[Input interlock edge]
Input
Output
ON
50 ms
50 ms
OFF
ON
OFF
5-47
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Multi Interface: Contact Input
Aux input paging:
Select this item when activating playback components or other devices connected
to the Multi interface unit's audio input terminal from the control input.
Paging busy 1:
Select this item when sending externally-connected paging equipment's busy
status data to the Audio output 1.
Paging busy 2:
Select this item when sending externally-connected paging equipment's busy
status data to the Audio output 2.
Remote dial control: When the Multi interface unit's contact input terminal is closed, a station is made
to automatically perform dial operation. A set of up to 20 dial codes (including dial
numbers and key operations) can be assigned to each contact input terminal.
Unused:
The contact input is not used.
(3) Interlock contact
Set the contact numbers to be output when "Input interlock level" or "Input interlock edge" is selected in the
operation mode setting. To designate the door station's contact output terminal, select "DS" and enter the
door station number. When the door station is N-8640DS or N-8650DS, enter the contact output number in
the "Contact No." box as well. To designate the contact output terminal of the Multi interface unit or Direct
select unit, select "MI/DI," and enter the equipment number and contact output terminal number of the unit.
(4) Aux input paging
Set the paging zone number and the audio input terminal number of paging source when "Aux input paging"
is selected in the Operation mode setting.
(5) Remote dial control
Set the equipment number of exchange and line number to which the remote-controlled station is connected.
Referring to the table below, enter the dial codes that correspond to the dial operation the station is made
to perform.
• The table below shows assignable keys or operations vs. dial codes to be registered.
• A set of up to 32 dial codes can be registered.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
C
Assignable key or operation
Dial code
Assignable key or operation
Dial code
1
Press PTT key (PTT key is on.)
3
Paging call
PC
HOLD
HD
FUNCTION
FN
2
Release PTT key (PTT key is off.)
4
Paging response
6
TRANSFER
5
7
8
9
0
*
C
TR
RD
MENU
MN
SELECT
Left arrow key (
Up arrow key (
PF
PR
REDIAL
Right arrow key (
PN
)
)
Down arrow key (
SL
LC
)
RC
)
DC
UC
5-48
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.5.6. Contact output setting
Multi Interface: Contact Output
Step 1. Click "Contact Output" tab. The setting screen is displayed.
Step 2. Set each item of "Contact output."
Set the access number for the contact output terminal to be activated when the station performs
external equipment control (one-shot make output or make/break output).
(1) Contact output No. (Can't be edited.)
The Multi interface unit's contact output terminal number.
(2) Access No. digits
Select the number of digits to be used when controlling external equipment at the station.
(3) Access No.
Set the access number of the digit set in "Access No. digit", which is used to control external equipment at
the station.
Notes
• The access number cannot be set to "0."
• If the number of digits of the access number is 4, the usable numbers range from "0001" to "6144."
(4)Line status
Select the line to be diagnosed.
The specified contact output terminal is closed when such status is judged abnormal that the CPU failure is
detected on the line or the line is not connected though the station number has been registered.
(5) Network status
Select the equipment to be diagnosed.
The specified contact output terminal is closed when the equipment is judged failed if no response is
detected from it.
5-49
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.6. Setting Sub-station Interface
Sub-station Interface: Network Settings
Click "Sub-station Interface" tab to select the Sub-station Interface to be set.
Choose the name or number of the Sub-station Interface unit from the list.
5.6.1. Network settings
Step 1. Click "Network Settings" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set individual items.
(1) IP address
Allows entry of the Sub-station Interface unit's IP address.
(2) Subnet mask
Allows entry of the Subnet mask.
(3) Default gateway
Allows entry of the Default gateway.
5-50
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
(4)Port No.
Set the start port number to be used for each protocol.
Sub-station Interface: Network Settings
[Web server]
Allows entry of the Web server's port number. The valid range is from 1 to 65535. The default factory setting
is 80.
[TCP port]
Allows entry of a TCP port start number other than the Web server (valid range from 1 to 65532). The
N-8000 system uses 4 consecutive ports starting with the TCP start port. The default factory setting is
5000.
The TCP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Web server
TCP
Web server
Call control
TCP
Port start number + 0
5000
PC monitoring
TCP
Port start number + 1
5001
PC control
TCP
Port start number + 2
5002
Reservation
TCP
Port start number + 3
5003
80
[UDP port]
Allows entry of UDP port start number to be used (valid range from 1 to 65516). The N-8000 system uses
20 consecutive ports starting with the UDP start port. The default factory setting is 5006.
The UDP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Reservation
UDP
Port start number + 0
Frequency compensation
UDP
Port start number + 1 to 3
5007 to 5009
Conversation
UDP
Port start number + 4 to 19
5010 to 5025
5006
Note
Because UDP port number 15000 is used internally by the system, the numbers from 14981 to 15000 are
not available.
[Paging port (UDP)]
Displays the UDP port number to be used when making paging using the multicast communications.
To perform settings, refer to p. 5-121, Paging Zone Settings.
(5) NAPT compatible
When connecting a PC to the Sub-station interface unit using the global IP address, mark the [Enable]
checkbox to make the items from [Network ID (6)] to [WAN port No. (8)] available for input.
5-51
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Sub-station Interface: Network Settings
(6) Network ID
When connecting a PC to the Sub-station interface unit using the global IP address, enter the number that
identifies networks for each range accessible by the PC using the local address.
When networks are connected as shown below, for example, assign different ID numbers for each, such as
"1" to equipment connected to LAN (1) and "2" to equipment connected to LAN (2).
Network ID No. 1 is assigned to the PC for setting. Set network ID No. 1 to equipment that can be accessed
by the PC (for example, equipment connected to LAN 1) using the local address.
L AN
Router
WAN
LA N
Router
NAPT
NAPT
(7) WAN IP address
Allows entry of the Sub-station interface unit's IP address as viewed from the WAN side.
(8) WAN Port No.
Set the start port number to be used for each protocol as viewed from the WAN side.
[Web server]
Allows entry of the Web server's port number. The valid range is from 1 to 65535. The default factory setting
is 80.
[TCP port]
Allows entry of TCP port start number other than the Web server. The valid range is from 1 to 65532. The
N-8000 system uses 4 consecutive ports starting with the TCP start port. The default factory setting is
5000.
The TCP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Web server
TCP
Web server
Call control
TCP
Port start number + 0
5000
PC monitoring
TCP
Port start number + 1
5001
PC control
TCP
Port start number + 2
5002
Reservation
TCP
Port start number + 3
5003
80
[UDP port]
Allows entry of UDP port start number to be used (valid range from 1 to 65516). The N-8000 system uses
20 consecutive ports starting with the UDP start port. The default factory setting is 5006.
The UDP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Reservation
UDP
Port start number + 0
5006
Frequency compensation
UDP
Port start number + 1 to 3
5007 to 5009
Conversation
UDP
Port start number + 4 to 19
5010 to 5025
5-52
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Sub-station Interface: Network Settings
(9) Available bit rate
Set the capacity (or a usable upper limit value) of the network line to which the Sub-station interface unit
is connected. Setting this communication capacity prevents sound quality deterioration and longer time
delays caused by excess conversation and/or paging communications traffic.
(10) Broadcast Spec
Select the voice transmission mode that is appropriate for the usable frequency band.
• High quality sound transmission mode
Transmits voices at high sound quality with short time delay. Use this mode as the normal default mode.
Also use this mode when BGM sound sources are connected.
• Standard mode
Transmits voice audio with a short time delay. In this mode, the sound quality is reduced, but the delay
time is identical to that in high quality mode, allowing a narrower frequency band to be used. Use this
mode when Sub-station interface units are connected via an ISDN line (128 kbps).
• Band width saving transmission mode
Voice transmission uses a very narrow frequency band, but with lesser quality sound and longer time
delay. Use this mode when Sub-station interface units are connected via an Analog line (56 kbps).
Sampling frequency
Delay time
Frequency band to be used
16 kHz
0.08 second
130 kbps
Standard mode
8 kHz
0.08 second
98 kbps
Band width saving
transmission mode
8 kHz
0.32 second
49.5 kbps
High quality sound
transmission mode
5-53
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.6.2. Function settings
Sub-station Interface: Function Settings
Step 1. Click "Function Settings" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set individual items.
(1) Transfer settings (N-8400RS only)
Set the transfer function ON or OFF for the station connected to the exchange.
Call forwarding:Calls to stations are automatically transferred to another designated station
without sounding a call tone only when Call forwarding function is enabled.
Time-based call forwarding:Calls to stations are automatically transferred to another designated station
without sounding a call tone only when the preset time is reached.
This function can be set only when the call forwarding function is enabled.
Preset time can be set only when the time-based call forwarding function is
enabled.
Group hunting:Calls to a busy station are automatically transferred to another designated
station, if group hunting function is set to the called station.
Absence transfer:When no response is made to a call to the station for a set period of time,
the call is automatically transferred to another designated station. Preset
time duration can be set only when the absence transfer mode is enabled.
(2) Time limit
Set the time-out value for calling, conversation or paging functions in ten-second units between 10 and 990
seconds.
Call time-out:Set whether to limit the duration of a call to the station. If setting a timeout, enter
the time limit after which calls to the station are automatically terminated. If not
setting a timeout, calls will continue until they are cancelled or the called station
responds.
Conversation time-out:Set whether to limit the duration of conversations with the station. If setting a timeout,
enter the time limit after which conversations to the station are automatically
terminated. If not setting a timeout, conversations will continue until executing the
termination operation.
5-54
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Sub-station Interface: Function Settings
Paging time-out:Set whether to limit the duration of paging call with the station. If setting a timeout, enter the time limit after which paging calls to the station are automatically
(N-8400RS only)
terminated.
If not setting a time-out, paging calls will continue until executing the termination
operation.
(3)Paging with call tone (N-8400RS only)
Sounds a pre-announcement tone when paging is initiated.
(4) Delay Time
Set the delay time before paging is initiated.
(5)Paging response mode (N-8400RS only)
Select either “Zone Selection” or “Automatic response” modes when responding to the paging.
Zone Selection:Responds to a paging call by designating the number of the paging zone. Respond
to the paging party who made the paging to the designated zone last is called. Use
this mode if paging announcements are heard from multiple zones.
Automatic response:Use only the paging response key to make a response. The responding station
is connected to the station that made a paging call over the paging zone through
which the responding station last received a call.
(6) Calling station indication
Select either “During call and talk” or “During talk” mode when performing the calling station indication
function.
The table below shows the timing that the Multi interface unit’s, Direct select unit’s, or Audio interface unit’s
contact output is closed.
Calling station indication
During call and talk
During talk
Calling
Closed
Open
Being called
Closed
Open
Call waiting
Closed
Open
Talking
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Station operation
Being paged
Receiving scan monitor
5-55
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.6.3. Sub-station Settings
Sub-station Interface: Sub-station Settings
Step 1. Click "Sub-station Settings" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set individual items.
(1) Common settings
Set common functions of all substations to be connected to the substation interface unit.
Call master:
Enter the master station number to be called when each
station's "Call 1," "Call 2," or "Call 3" button is pressed.
Call volume (N-8000RS/8010RS only):Substation call volume can be adjusted in five increments
from 1 (minimum) to 5 (maximum).
The default setting is Level 3.
(2) Each sub-station settings
Set functions of individual substations to be connected to the substation interface unit.
Sub-station Selection:
Choose the line number, substation number or substation
name of the substation from the list.
Choose the Line No. and Sub-station No. or Sub-station name
from the list.
5-56
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Sub-station Interface: Sub-station Settings
Priority call (Selective response mode only): Set the priority level from 1 to 5 to be assigned to each
station’s "Call 1," "Call 2," or "Call 3" button. Priority level 1 is
the lowest, and Priority level 5 is the same as the priority for
the Emergency call button. The default level is 5 only for the
RS-144’s Emergency call button and 1 for all other buttons.
Notes
•The stations’ call buttons corresponding to "Call 1," "Call 2," or "Call 3" serve as function buttons as listed
below.
• "Call 2" can be set only when the RS-142, RS-144, or RS-442 is connected.
• "Call 3" can be set only when the RS-442 is connected.
Call 1
RS-150/160/170/180
/450/460/470/480
Call button
Call 2
Call 3
RS-140
RS-142
RS-143
Call button Call button 1 Call button
(CALL)
(CALL)
Call button 2
RS-144
RS-442
Emergency call button
Call button 1
(EMERGENCY)
Call button 2 (NORMAL) Call button 2
Call button 3
Calling station indication/CCTV control
Control output:Set the Multi interface unit's, Direct select unit's, or Audio interface
unit’s unit number and contact output terminal number, which provide
a make signal when the station is called.
Called party's station No.:Provides a make contact when the station to be set here is called. Up
to 8 stations can be set.
Level (N-8000RS/8010RS only)
Microphone sensitivity:
Substation hands-free microphone sensitivity can be adjusted in
three increments from 1 (minimum) to 3 (maximum).
The default sensitivity is Level 2.
Speaker output:Substation's speaker output level can be adjusted in five increments
from 1 (minimum) to 5 (maximum).
The default sensitivity is Level 3.
Call Activation - push 3 times (Sequential response mode, RS-150/160/170/450/460/470/480/442 only):
Sets whether or not to make a call by the operation of pressing the
Call button 3 times within 3 seconds.
With call tone:
Call with a call tone or without a call tone can be set.
Refusal of priority call operation:Enables the substation to refuse priority calls from others stations.
(Sequential response mode only)
Access to emergency call operation:Sets whether or not to allow the substation to make an emergency call.
(Selective response mode only)
5-57
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.7. Setting IP Stations
IP Station: Network Settings
Click "IP Station" tab to select the IP station to be set.
Choose the name or number of the IP station from the list.
5.7.1. Network settings
Step 1. Click "Network Settings" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set individual items.
(1) IP address
Allows entry of the IP station's IP address.
(2) Subnet mask
Allows entry of the Subnet mask.
(3) Default gateway
Allows entry of the Default gateway.
5-58
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
(4)Port No.
Set the start port number to be used for each protocol.
IP Station: Network Settings
[Web server]
Allows entry of the Web server's port number. The valid range is from 1 to 65535. The default factory setting
is 80.
[TCP port]
Allows entry of a TCP port start number other than the Web server (valid range from 1 to 65532). The
N-8000 system uses 4 consecutive ports starting with the TCP start port. The default factory setting is
5000.
The TCP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Web server
TCP
Web server
Call control
TCP
Port start number + 0
5000
PC monitoring
TCP
Port start number + 1
5001
PC control
TCP
Port start number + 2
5002
Reservation
TCP
Port start number + 3
5003
80
[UDP port]
Allows entry of UDP port start number to be used (valid range from 1 to 65516). The N-8000 system uses
20 consecutive ports starting with the UDP start port. The default factory setting is 5006.
The UDP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Reservation
UDP
Port start number + 0 to 3
5006 to 5009
Conversation
UDP
Port start number + 4 to 19
5010 to 5025
Note
Because UDP port number 15000 is used internally by the system, the numbers from 14981 to 15000 are
not available.
[Paging port (UDP)]
Displays the UDP port number to be used when making paging using the multicast communications.
To perform settings, refer to p. 5-121, Paging Zone Settings.
(5) NAPT compatible
When connecting a PC to the IP station using the global IP address, mark the [Enable] checkbox to make
the items from [Network ID (6)] to [WAN port No. (8)] available for input.
5-59
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
IP Station: Network Settings
(6) Network ID
When connecting a PC to the IP station using the global IP address, enter the number that identifies
networks for each range accessible by the PC using the local address.
When networks are connected as shown below, for example, assign different ID numbers for each, such as
"1" to equipment connected to LAN (1) and "2" to equipment connected to LAN (2).
Network ID No. 1 is assigned to the PC for setting. Set network ID No. 1 to equipment that can be accessed
by the PC (for example, equipment connected to LAN 1) using the local address.
L AN
Router
WAN
LA N
Router
NAPT
NAPT
(7) WAN IP address
Allows entry of the IP station's IP address as viewed from the WAN side.
(8) WAN Port No.
Set the start port number to be used for each protocol as viewed from the WAN side.
[Web server]
Allows entry of the Web server's port number. The valid range is from 1 to 65535. The default factory setting
is 80.
[TCP port]
Allows entry of TCP port start number other than the Web server. The valid range is from 1 to 65532. The
N-8000 system uses 4 consecutive ports starting with the TCP start port. The default factory setting is
5000.
The TCP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Web server
TCP
Web server
Call control
TCP
Port start number + 0
5000
PC monitoring
TCP
Port start number + 1
5001
PC control
TCP
Port start number + 2
5002
Reservation
TCP
Port start number + 3
5003
80
[UDP port]
Allows entry of UDP port start number to be used. (valid range from 1 to 65516) The N-8000 system uses
20 consecutive ports starting with the UDP start port. The default factory setting is 5006.
The UDP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Reservation
UDP
Port start number + 0 to 3
5006 to 5009
Conversation
UDP
Port start number + 4 to 19
5010 to 5025
5-60
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
IP Station: Network Settings
(9) Available bit rate
Set the capacity (or a usable upper limit value) of the network line to which the IP station is connected.
Setting this communication capacity prevents sound quality deterioration and longer time delays caused by
excess conversation and/or paging communications traffic.
(10) Broadcast Spec
Select the voice transmission mode that is appropriate for the usable frequency band.
• High quality sound transmission mode
Transmits voices at high sound quality with short time delay. Use this mode as the normal default mode.
• Standard mode
Transmits voice audio with a short time delay. In this mode, the sound quality is reduced, but the delay
time is identical to that in high quality mode, allowing a narrower frequency band to be used. Use this
mode when IP stations are connected via an ISDN line (128 kbps).
• Band width saving transmission mode
Voice transmission uses a very narrow frequency band, but with lesser quality sound and longer time
delay. Use this mode when IP stations are connected via an Analog line (56 kbps).
Sampling frequency
Delay time
Frequency band to be used
16 kHz
0.08 second
130 kbps
Standard mode
8 kHz
0.08 second
98 kbps
Band width saving
transmission mode
8 kHz
0.32 second
49.5 kbps
High quality sound
transmission mode
5-61
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.7.2. Function settings
IP Station: Function Settings 1
Step 1. Click "Function Settings 1" tab to display the following setting screen.
Available item differs depending on the type of IP stations.
Step 2. Set individual items.
(1) Transfer settings (IP Master station and IP Remote microphone station only)
Set the transfer function ON or OFF.
Call forwarding:Calls to stations are automatically transferred to another designated station
without sounding a call tone only when Call forwarding function is enabled.
Time-based call forwarding:Calls to stations are automatically transferred to another designated station
without sounding a call tone only when the preset time is reached. Preset
time can be set only when the time-based call forwarding function is
enabled.
Group hunting:Calls to a busy station are automatically transferred to another designated
station, if group hunting function is set to the called station.
Absence transfer:When no response is made to a call to the station for a set period of time,
the call is automatically transferred to another designated station. Preset
time duration can be set only when the absence transfer mode is enabled.
(2) Oneshot make time (second)
Sets the duration that the external control output terminals are shorted momentarily.
The setting range is from 1 to 9 (in 1-second units).
5-62
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
IP Station: Function Settings 1
(3) Time limit
Set the time-out value for calling, conversation or paging functions in ten-second units between 10 and 990
seconds.
Call time-out:Set whether to limit the duration of a call to the station. If setting a time-out, enter
the time limit after which calls to the station are automatically terminated. If not
setting a time-out, calls will continue until they are cancelled or the called station
responds.
Conversation time-out:Set whether to limit the duration of conversations with the station. If setting a timeout, enter the time limit after which conversations to the station are automatically
terminated. If not setting a time-out, conversations will continue until executing the
termination operation.
Paging time-out (IP Master station and IP Remote microphone station only):
Set whether to limit the duration of paging call with the station. If setting a timeout, enter the time limit after which paging calls to the station are automatically
terminated.
If not setting a time-out, paging calls will continue until executing the termination
operation.
(4) BGM input
Set BGM to be heard at this IP station.
Select the unit's number and audio input number of the Multi interface unit to which the BGM sound sources
are connected.
(5)Paging with call tone (IP Master station and IP Remote microphone station only)
Sounds a pre-announcement tone when paging is initiated.
(6) Delay Time
Set the delay time before paging is initiated.
(7)Paging response mode (IP Master station and IP Remote microphone station only)
Select either "Zone Selection" or "Automatic response" modes when responding to the paging.
Zone Selection:Responds to a paging call by designating the number of the paging zone. Respond
to the paging party who made the paging to the designated zone last is called. Use
this mode if paging announcements are heard from multiple zones.
Automatic response:Use only the paging response key to make a response. The responding station
is connected to the station that made a paging call over the paging zone through
which the responding station last received a call.
(8)Priority settings (Sequential response mode only)
Sets whether paging calls or conversations should take precedence when these occur simultaneously.
Paging priority:When a call is received while receiving a paging call, the called station becomes
busy and the paging call is gone through. Station keys cannot be used while
receiving a paging call. (Paging response cannot be performed at a paging
receiving station, either.)
Conversation priority:A paging call is not received when paged during a conversation or dialing operation.
Station keys can be dialed even while receiving a paging call.
5-63
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
IP Station: Function Settings 1
(9) Calling station indication
Select either "During call and talk" or "During talk" mode when performing the calling station indication
function.
The table below shows the timing that the Multi interface unit’s, Direct select unit’s, or Audio interface unit’s
contact output is closed.
Calling station indication
During call and talk
During talk
Calling
Closed
Open
Being called
Closed
Open
Call waiting
Closed
Open
Talking
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
IP station operation
Being paged
Receiving scan monitor
(10) Door station contact output (IP door station only)
Set the contact output operation mode of the IP door station connected to this exchange.
Select one from "Door remote control," "During call," "During talk," "During call and talk," and "Status
indicator sync."
The table below shows the timing that the IP door station's contact output is closed.
Door station contact output
IP door station operation
Door remote
During
During call During talk
control
call and talk
Status indicator sync
(N-8640DS/8650DS only)
Sequential Response mode:
Closed (lit)
Selective Response mode:
Closed/open repeated
(flashing)
Calling
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Being called
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed/open repeated
(flashing)
Call waiting
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Closed (lit)
Talking
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed (lit)
Being paged
Open
Open
Open
Open
Closed (lit)
Receiving scan monitor
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Subject to the monitor alert
operation set at the scanmonitoring station
Door remote
Closed
5-64
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Step 3. Click "Function Settings 2" tab to display the following setting screen.
IP Station: Function Settings 2
Available item differs depending on the type of IP stations.
Step 4. Set individual items.
(1) Incoming call mode
Call receiving mode (p. 2-10) can be selected either "Automatic connection" or "Continuous call". Call with
a call tone or without a call tone can be set on both modes.
The IP door station is fixed to "Automatic connection" mode.
(2)Level
Microphone sensitivity: Station hands-free microphone sensitivity can be adjusted in three increments
from 1 (minimum) to 3 (maximum). The default sensitivity is Level 2.
Speaker output:
Station speaker output level can be adjusted in five increments from 1 (minimum)
to 5 (maximum). The default sensitivity is Level 3.
Call volume:
Station call volume can be adjusted in five increments from 1 (minimum) to 5
(maximum). The default sensitivity is Level 3.
(3) Group call (max. 15) (IP Master station and IP Remote microphone station only)
Set a group of up to 15 stations that will be called simultaneously when the IP station being set now is
called. With this setting, even when a called station is busy, any registered station in the group can respond.
(4) Calls transferred to (IP Master station and IP Remote microphone station only)
Set the station number to which each transfer is to be directed.
When the C/O interface unit is set as a transfer destination station, enter "#", followed by the access
number. For example, when setting the C/O interface unit with access number "05," enter "#05".
Call forwarding receiving station can be set only when the call forwarding function is enabled. (Refer to
p. 5-62.)
Note
The station to be called via Multi interface unit cannot be programmed as a transfer destination station.
5-65
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
IP Station: Function Settings 2
(5)Priority call (Selective response mode, IP door station only)
Call priorities can be adjusted in five increments from 1 (minimum) to 5 (maximum).
Level 5 is the same priority as an emergency call.
The default sensitivity is Level 1.
(6) BGM
Set whether the IP station receives BGM broadcasts. If receiving, place a checkmark and select the BGM
channel number (1 – 8; Channel No.).
(7) Door remote
Set the Multi interface unit's, Direct select unit's, or Audio interface unit’s unit number and contact output
terminal number to be used for door remote control.
(8) Calling station indication/CCTV control
Control output :
Set the Multi interface unit's, Direct select unit's, or Audio interface unit’s unit number
and contact output terminal number, which provide a make contact when the station
is called.
Called station's No.: Provides a make contact when the station to be set here is called. Up to 8 stations
can be set.
When the C/O interface unit is set as a called station, enter "#", followed by the
access number. For example, when setting the C/O interface unit with access
number "05," enter "#05".
(Example)
The operation example illustrated below is based on the following settings:
Station No. (for IP station): 148
Control Output
MI Equipment No.: 5
Contact output No.: 6
Called station's No.: 149
N-8000MI (Equipment No. 5)
Contact Output No. 6
Make contact
No. 148
Call
1
4
9
No.149
The Multi interface unit's (equipment No. 5) Contact No. 6 closes when the station No. 148 calls the station
No. 149.
(9) Record conversation
Records IP station conversations.
The conversation of the station is provided from the audio output of the designated N-8000AF audio
interface unit.
(10) Speaker selection (N-8640DS/8650DS only)
Select the internal or external speaker to output paging calls or conversations.
Select one from "Always use internal speaker," "External speaker only in paging call," and "Always use
external speaker."
(11) User Access Code (N-8600MS only)
Set whether or not to enable the Access code authentication.
Enter the access code number (4-digit number).
5-66
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
IP Station: Function Settings 2
(12) Audio Trigger (N-8640DS/8650DS only)
Performs the audio trigger settings for the station.
Access to audio trigger:Set whether or not to use the audio trigger function.
(13) Mode (N-8640DS/8650DS only)
Selects operation when audio is detected.
Call master:
Calls the master station.
Monitor:
The station’s audio is output from the master station’s handsfree speaker.
Remote contact: Provides a one-shot pulse to close the contact output of the designated device.
(14) Trigger (N-8640DS/8650DS only)
Selects the trigger.
Level:Detects sounds of a sound pressure level higher than the set level that last for a specified
period of time.
Audio:Detects human voices.
Duration (Level):
Level:
Duration (Audio):
Sensitivity:
Set the time interval till sounds are detected.
Set the threshold sound pressure level.
Set the duration of the human voice’s vowels to detect.
Sets the detection sensitivity of the human voice.
Setting range: 1 – 9 (9 steps, 1: Most likely to detect, 9: Least likely to detect)
(15) External control input (N-8640DS/8650DS only)
Enter the station number to call when the IP door station's contact input is closed.
(16) Door station mode (Sequential response mode, IP door station only)
Set whether to operate the IP door station in door station mode*.
* The call tone sounds only once at the IP door station when the IP door station calls the pre-programmed
master station. The call timeout and conversation timeout are set to 30 seconds each.
(17) Call Activation - push 3 times (Sequential response mode, N-8640DS/8650DS only):
Sets whether or not to make a call by the operation of pressing the Call button 3 times within 3 seconds.
(18)‌Access to priority call operation (Sequential response mode, IP Master station and IP Remote
microphone station only)
Enables the IP station to initiate priority calls.
This function can only be used when the system has been set for sequential response mode.
(19) Refusal of priority call operation (Sequential response mode only)
Enables the IP station to refuse priority calls from others stations.
(20) Access to emergency call operation (Selective response mode, IP door station only)
Sets whether or not to allow the IP station to make an emergency call.
This function is only possible for the IP door station when the system has been set for selective response
mode.
(21) Access to paging call operation (IP Master station and IP Remote microphone station only)
Enables or disables paging calls from the IP station.
(22)‌Access to emergency all paging call operation (IP Master station and IP Remote microphone
station only)
Enables or disables emergency all paging calls from the IP station.
(23)‌Access to audio trigger setting operation (IP Master station and IP Remote microphone station
only)
Enables or disables audio trigger setting from the IP station.
(24) External equipment control (IP Master station and IP Remote microphone station only)
Set whether the one-shot make contact output or make/break contact output is operated at the IP station.
5-67
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.7.3. Speed dialing settings
IP Station: Speed Dialing
Step 1. Click "Speed Dialing" tab to display the following setting screen.
Available item differs depending on the type of stations.
Step 2. Enter the station numbers to be called for each of the one-touch dial keys ([7], [8], [9] and [0] keys) and
the Off-Hook function*. (IP Master station and IP Remote microphone station only)
* This function cannot be assigned to the IP Remote microphone station.
Tips
• Enter one-touch dialing programming using the Dial keys (12), Paging key, Paging response key,
Function key, Hold key, and/or Transfer key.
• Up to 32 digits dialing operation can be preset.
• To set keys other than the numerical keys listed above for speed dialing, enter these as follows:
] key
:#
[
[
] key
:*
Paging key
:P
Paging response key : R
Function key
:F
Hold key
:H
Transfer key
:T
Step 3. Enter the master station number to be called when the door station's call button is pressed.
(IP door station only)
5-68
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
IP Station: Scan Monitor
5.7.4. Scan Monitor settings (IP Master station and IP Remote microphone station only)
Step 1. Click "Scan monitor" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set the scan monitor sequencing time in 1-second units from 1 to 10 seconds.
Step 3. Set the operation of monitor alert.
None:
The display remains the same as in standby mode even during monitoring.
Display:
The status indicator continuously lights during monitoring.
Display and Tone:A start tone sounds when monitoring begins, and the status indicator remains lit
during monitoring.
Step 4. Set the group of stations to be monitored.
Input the number of station to be monitored in the order of monitoring.
5-69
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
IP Station: Message Paging
5.7.5. Message Paging settings (IP Master station and IP Remote microphone station only)
Step 1. Click "Message Paging" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Mark the [Operate message paging] checkbox. This allows the following items to be set.
Step 3. Set the [Time-based message paging].
Time-based message paging:Restricts the duration available for the message paging. The message
paging operation can be performed only for the duration between Start
and End time.
Step 4. Set the [Activation method].
Dial operation: Activates the message paging by means of dial operation.
Contact input: Activates the message paging by means of external contact input.
Note: The N-8500MS/8600MS/8610RM IP Master Station cannot activate broadcasts
using the external contact input.
Step 5. Set the broadcast destination.
Set the [Paging zone number] of the broadcast destination.
Step 6. Perform settings for [Repeat].
Repeated during activation:‌
The message is endlessly repeated and broadcast until operation is
terminated.
Restricted No. of times:
The message is repeated for the designated number of times from 1 to 10.
Step 7. Set the mute function of the station to operate. (N-8510MS only)
Set whether or not to mute sound to be output from the built-in speaker of the master station that
activates Message pagings.
5-70
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
IP Station: Message Paging
Step 8. Perform settings for [Contact sync control].
Set the Multi Interface unit's, Direct Select unit's, or Audio Interface unit's unit number and the contact
output number that is closed in synchronization with the start of the message paging.
Make during activation:‌The contact is closed when the message paging is started, and opens when
the broadcast ends.
One-shot make:‌The contact is closed when the message paging is started, and automatically
opens after the time set in One-Shot Make duration settings elapses.
5-71
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
IP Station: Remote Mic Settings
5.7.6. Remote microphone setting (N-8600MS and IP Remote microphone station only)
Step 1. Click "Remote Mic Settings" tab.
The setting screen below is displayed.
Step 2. Perform Talk key setting.
2-1. Set the Talk key operation mode to either “PTT” or “LOCK.” (N-8610RM only)
PTT:
Microphone announcement can be made while the Talk key is held down.
LOCK:‌‌Pressing the Talk key once initiates microphone announcement and pressing the key again
terminates the microphone announcement.
2-2. Set the Time-out. (only when the Talk key operation mode is set to “LOCK”) (N-8600MS and N-8610RM)
In case that you forget turning off the microphone switch, select the time to automatically terminate
announcement from the remote microphone.
The time can be selected from 0 to 20 minutes (in 1-minute steps).
Step 3. Perform the chime setting when making zone broadcasts.
(N-8600MS and N-8610RM)
3-1. Select the chime tones at the start and end of the microphone announcement.
Start chime :Select the chime tone at the start of announcement.
End chime :Select the chime tone at the end of announcement.
The chime tone can be selected from “None (no chime tone),” “1 (Ascending 4-note tone),” “2
(Descending 4-note tone),” “3 (2-note tone),” or “4 (gong).”
3-2. Set the chime volume.
Chime volume to be output at the station can be selected.
The setting range is from 0 to -20 dB (in 2 dB steps).
3-3. Set the delay time.
Set the interval after pressing the Talk key until the microphone announcement starts.
When “None” is selected for the Start chime setting, the delay time is time duration before the
microphone announcement starts, and when one other than “None” is selected, it is the time duration
before the chime sounds.
Set the delay time depending on the start-up time of the power amplifier or line selector relay.
The setting value: 0, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0, 9.0 (sec.)
5-72
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
IP Station: Remote Mic Settings
Step 4. Perform priority setting.(N-8600MS and N-8610RM)
Select one of 2 settings in the table below when making simultaneous paging/zone broadcasts.
Options
N-8000
SX-2000
Settings
Paging with call tone, delay time, and time-out set in the Function setting (see p. 5-63)
Chime tone,delay time, and time-out set in the Remote microphone setting (see p. 5-72)
Step 5. Perform Function key setting. (Subsequent settings: N-8610RM)
Note: ‌Two kinds of functions can be assigned to each Function key; one is the function that works
when the function assigned Function key is pressed and the other is the function that works
when both the Function key and Shift key are simultaneously pressed.
5-1. Set the number of the RM-210 Remote Microphone Extension units.
Select the number of the units.
The setting range is from 0 to 4.
5-2. Set the function to be assigned to the Function key.
Select the line of the key to be set, then select the desired function from the pull-down menu on the
"Key+Shift" tab.
Function key's names are as follows.
N-8610RM top panel
Function key
EMG
SYS1
SYS2
SYS3
RM-210 top panel
Function key
1
N-8610RM
10
Function key
11
21
31
41
20
30
40
50
(1st unit)(2nd unit)(3rd unit)(4th unit)
The following functions can be set.
"Zone(SX)," "Tenkey," "Function," "General Broadcast (SX)," "BGM (SX)," "Control Output (SX),"
"Onetouch Dial," or "Station no. (N-8000)."
Click on the line of the Function key to be set, then select the function from the pull-down menu on the
right side of the screen.
5-3. Set the details of the function to be assigned to the
Function key.
Read the next page regarding the detailed settings for
each function.
5-4. Assign another different function to the Function key as
needed.
If the "Key+Shift" tab is selected, another function of
"Volume +," "Volume −," "Mic indicator," or "Privacy (N8000)" can be assigned to the Function key.
When the Function key is pressed while holding down
the Shift key, the 2nd function assigned to it on the "Key
+ Shift" tab works.
5-73
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
[Setting the details of the function]
IP Station: Remote Mic Settings
(1) Paging (N-8000)/Zone (SX)
Broadcast destinations can be selected either from zones of the SX-2000 system or those of the N-8000 system.
Multiple zones can be set.
If the SX-2000 system zone is set, a control output pattern can also be programmed. (p. 5-76)
Step 1. Select "N-8000" or "SX-2000."
Step 2. Click the [Zone] or [Zone pattern] button to determine the broadcast destination.
Zone button:
Sets one zone.
‌Clicking on this button displays the Zone dialog,
then enter the number.
Zone pattern button: Sets the paging zone pattern.
‌
Clicking on this button displays the Pattern
selection dialog, then enter the number.
Step 3. Repeat the operation in Step 2 as needed to add the broadcast destination.
Clicking the [Zone] button followed by the [Zone pattern] button allows the zones or channels to be
added.
But it is not possible to mix and set the N-8000 zones and SX-2000 zones.
Step 4. (Only when "SX-2000" is selected in Step 1) To activate the control output pattern in synchronization
with broadcast, program the control output pattern by clicking the [COUT pattern] button.
Select the ID of the SX-2000 system, then enter the pattern number.
The ID of the SX-2000 system is the system ID having been
assigned to the SX-200IP IP module in the Gateway settings (p.
5-28).
Multiple control output patterns can be programmed by repeating
operations.
5-74
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
IP Station: Remote Mic Settings
(2) Tenkey
The following keys can be selected.
Paging call, Paging response, Hold, Transfer, Function, Redial, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, , 0, #, and C
(3) Function
The following functions can be selected.
Volume +, Volume –, PTT, Shift, Mic indicator, Privacy, All Zone clear (N-8000), and All Zone clear (SX)
(4) General broadcast (SX)
The General broadcast (SX) patterns having been set in the SX-2000 system can be selected.
Only the events set to the General broadcast patterns (Level) among the events to be activated by the SX2000 system’s control input can be selected.
Click the [Add] button to select the event.
(5) BGM (SX)
"BGM (SX)" having been set in the SX-2000 system can be selected.
Only the events set to "BGM pattern change/end" among the events to be activated by the SX-2000 system’s
control input can be selected.
Click the [Add] button to select the event.
5-75
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
IP Station: Remote Mic Settings
(6) Control output (SX)
Control output destination can be selected from the control output patterns.
Clicking the [Add] button displays the pattern selection dialog.
Select the ID of SX-2000 from the pull-down menu, then enter pattern number assigned to the control input.
The ID of SX-2000 is the one of the SX-2000 system having been set to the SX-200IP Smart matrix IP
module in the Gateway setting (p. 5-28).
Multiple control output patterns can be set by repeating the procedure of addition.
(7) Onetouch dial
Onetouch dial can be selected.
Enter the Onetouch dial number having been set in the Onetouch dial setting (p. 5-77).
(8) Station no. (N-8000)
Station number can be selected.
Enter the Station number.
5-76
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.7.7. Pattern setting (N-8600MS and IP Remote microphone only)
IP Station: Pattern
Each pattern of the "Zone," "Control" and "Dial" can be registered.
Step 1. Click "Pattern" tab.
The setting screen is displayed.
2
3
1
Step 2. Select the Pattern type.
It can be selected from "Zone," "Control" or "Dial" on the pull-down menu.
Step 3. Press the [Edit] button, then set the details of the pattern selected in Step 2.
A detailed setting dialog corresponding to the selected pattern type is displayed.
[Detailed settings for the pattern]
(1) Zone pattern
Zone pattern can be registered by selecting either "Import" or
"User setting."
•‌When importing from the SX-2000 system's setting data
‌Select "Import," then select ID of SX-2000 and Pattern name
from the pull-down menu.
‌The ID of SX-2000 is that of the SX-2000 system having been
set to the SX-200IP Smart matrix IP module in the Gateway
setting (p. 5-28).
• When setting the new zone pattern (SX)
‌Select "User setting," then mark the checkbox(es) of the zone(s)
to be registered.
[AO1] − [AO32] represent the SX-2000AO Audio output unit.
‌[All] and [1] through [8] represent the audio output terminal
numbers.
5-77
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
IP Station: Pattern
• When setting the new zone pattern (N-8000)
When "User setting" is selected, the N-8000 System's zone patterns can be set.
In this event, regard the [AO1] - [AO32] as the N-8000 System's zones, and read them as follows.
1 of [AO1]
Zone 1
2 of [AO1]
Zone 2
8 of [AO24]
Zone 192
(2) Control pattern
• When no pattern is used
Select "None."
•‌When importing the BGM pattern from the SX-2000
system’s setting data
‌Select "In: BGM," then select the ID of SX-2000* and
Pattern name (SX) from the pull-down menu.
• ‌When importing the General broadcast pattern from
the SX-2000 system’s setting data
‌Select "In: General Broadcast," then select the ID of SX2000 and Pattern name (SX) from the pull-down menu.
•‌When importing the Control output pattern from the
SX-2000 system’s setting data
‌Select "Out: Control Output," then select the ID of SX2000 and Pattern name (SX) from the pull-down menu.
* ‌The "ID of SX-2000" is the system ID having been
assigned to the SX-200IP in the "Gateway Settings" on
p. 5-28.
• When setting the new control pattern (SX)
Select "Out: User setting," then select the Model.
SM: SX-2000SM System manager
AI: ‌SX-2100AI Audio input unit
AO: SX-2000AO or SX-2100AO Audio output unit
CO: SX-2000CO Control output unit
For the AI, AO, and CO, select the ID as well.
‌The numbers next to the checkboxes represent the control output terminal numbers.
‌The number of the checkboxes varies depending on the equipment.
(3) Dial pattern
Can be registered by entering dial keys.
Tips
•‌Keys that can be registered in the Dial pattern are the
Dial keys (12 kinds), Paging call key, Paging response
key, Function key, Hold key, and Transfer key.
• Up to 380-digit dial operation can be registered.
•‌When wishing to register the codes other than figures,
enter the following characters.
] key
:#
[
[
] key
:*
Paging key
:P
Paging response key : R
Function key
:F
Hold key
:H
Transfer key
:T
5-78
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Station: Function Settings
5.8. ‌Setting Stations Connected to the Exchange, and Analog Master Stations
Connected to the Substation Interface Unit
Click "Station" to select the station to be set.
Choose the number of the exchange, exchange name, line number, station number or station name from the
list.
(1) Exchange No.
Select the equipment number of the exchange or
Substation interface unit to which the station is
connected.
(2) Exchange name
Select the exchange or Substation interface unit
name to which the station is connected.
(4) Station No.
Select the station number.
(5) Station name
Select the station name.
(3)Line No.
Select the number of the line to which the station
is connected.
5.8.1. Function settings
Step 1. Click "Function Settings" tab to display the following setting screen
.
Available item differs depending on the type of stations.
5-79
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Step 2. Set individual items.
Station: Function Settings
(1) Incoming call mode
Call receiving mode (p. 2-10) can be selected either "Automatic Connection" or "Continuous Call". Call with
a call tone or without a call tone can be set on both modes.
The door station is fixed to "Automatic connection" mode.
(2)Level (except the analog master station)
Microphone sensitivity: Station hands-free microphone sensitivity can be adjusted in three increments
from 1 (minimum) to 3 (maximum). The default sensitivity is Level 2.
Note
The sensitivity for the handset microphone is fixed (not adjustable).
Speaker output:
Station speaker output level can be adjusted in five increments from 1 (minimum)
to 5 (maximum). The default sensitivity is Level 3.
Call volume:
Station call volume can be adjusted in five increments from 1 (minimum) to 5
(maximum). The default sensitivity is Level 3.
(3) Group call (max. 15) (Master station only)
Set a group of up to fifteen stations that will be called simultaneously when the station being set now is
called. With this setting, even when a called station is busy, any registered station in the group can respond.
Note
When the call response mode is set to “Selective Response,” the stations connected to the same N-8010EX
Exchange or the N-8400RS Substation Interface Unit cannot be assigned to the group call member stations.
(4) Calls transferred to (Master station only)
Set the station number to which each transfer is to be directed.
When the C/O interface unit is set as a transfer destination station, enter "#", followed by the access
number. For example, when setting the C/O interface unit with access number "05," enter "#05".
Call forwarding receiving station can be set only when the call forwarding function of the Exchange is
enabled. (Refer to p. 5-35)
Note
The station to be called via Multi interface unit cannot be programmed as a transfer destination station.
(5)Priority call (Selective response mode, Door station only)
Call priorities can be adjusted in five increments from 1 (minimum) to 5 (maximum).
Level 5 is the same priority as an emergency call.
The default sensitivity is Level 1.
(6) BGM
Set whether the station receives BGM broadcasts. If receiving, place a checkmark and select the BGM
channel number (1 – 8; Channel).
(7) Door remote
Set the Multi interface unit's, Direct select unit's, or Audio interface unit’s unit number and contact output
terminal number to be used for door remote control.
5-80
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Station: Function Settings
(8) Calling station indication/CCTV control
Control output :
Set the Multi interface unit's, Direct select unit's, or Audio interface unit’s unit number
and contact output terminal number, which provide a make signal when the station is
called.
Called station's No.: Provides a make contact when the station to be set here is called. Up to 8 stations can
be set.
When the C/O interface unit is set as a called station, enter "#", followed by the
access number. For example, when setting the C/O interface unit with access number
"05," enter "#05".
(Example)
The operation example illustrated below is based on the following settings:
Station No.: 101
Control Output
MI Equipment No.: 5
Contact output No.: 3
Called station's No.: 105
N-8000MI (Equipment No. 5)
Contact Output No. 3
Make contact
No.101
Call
1
0
5
No.105
The Multi interface unit's (equipment No. 5) Contact No. 3 closes when the station No. 101 calls the station
No. 105.
(9) Record conversation
Records Station conversations.
The conversation of the station is provided from the audio output of the designated N-8000AF audio
interface unit.
(10) User Access Code (Master station only)
Sets whether or not to enable the Access code authentication.
Enter the access code number (4-digit number).
(11) Audio Trigger (Door station only)
Performs the audio trigger settings for the station.
Access to audio trigger:Set whether or not to use the audio trigger function.
(12) Mode (Door station only)
Selects operation when audio is detected.
Call master:
Calls the master station.
Monitor:
The station’s audio is output from the master station’s handsfree speaker.
Remote contact:
Provides a one-shot pulse to close the contact output of the designated device.
5-81
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
(13) Trigger (Door station only)
Selects the trigger.
Station: Function Settings
Level:Detects sounds of a sound pressure level higher than the set level that last for a specified
period of time.
Audio:Detects human voices.
Duration (Level):
Level:
Duration (Audio):
Sensitivity:
Set the time interval till sounds are detected.
Set the threshold sound pressure level.
Set the duration of the human voice’s vowels to detect.
Sets the detection sensitivity of the human voice.
Setting range: 1 – 9 (9 steps, 1: Most likely to detect, 9: Least likely to detect)
(14) Door station mode (Sequential response mode, Door station only)
Set whether to operate the door station in door station mode*.
* The call tone sounds only once at the door station when the door station calls the pre-programmed master
station. The call timeout and conversation timeout are set to 30 seconds each.
(15) Call Activation - push 3 times (Sequential response mode, Door station only):
Sets whether or not to make a call by the operation of pressing the Call button 3 times within 3 seconds.
(16) Access to priority call operation (Sequential response mode, Master station only)
Enables the station to initiate priority calls.
(17) Refusal of priority call operation (Sequential response mode only)
Enables the station connected to the N-8000EX to refuse priority calls from other stations.
For the station connected to the N-8010EX, this function is fixed to ON (with the checkbox ticked).
(18) Access to emergency call operation (Selective response mode, Door station only)
Sets whether or not to allow the station to make an emergency call.
(19) Access to paging call operation (Master station only)
Enables or disables paging calls from the station.
(20) Access to emergency all paging call operation (Master station only)
Enables or disables emergency all paging calls from the station.
(21) Access to audio trigger setting operation (Master station only)
Enables or disables audio trigger setting from the station.
(22) External equipment control (Master station only)
Set whether the one-shot make output or make/break output is operated at the station.
5-82
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.8.2. Speed dialing settings
Station: Speed Dialing
Step 1. Click "Speed Dialing" tab to display the following setting screen.
Available item differs depending on the type of stations.
Step 2. Enter the station numbers to be called for each of the one-touch dial keys ([7], [8], [9] and [0] keys) and
the Off-Hook function. (Master station only)
Tips
• Enter one-touch dialing programming using the Dial keys (12), Paging key, Paging response key,
Function key, Hold key, and/or Transfer key.
• Up to 32 digits dialing operation can be preset.
• To set keys other than the numerical keys listed above for speed dialing, enter these as follows:
] key
:#
[
[
] key
:*
Paging key
:P
Paging response key : R
Function key
:F
Hold key
:H
Transfer key
:T
Step 3. Enter the master station number to be called when the IP door station's call button is pressed.
(Door station only)
5-83
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.8.3. Scan monitor settings
Station: Scan Monitor
Step 1. Click "Scan monitor" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set the scan monitor sequencing time in 1-second units from 1 to 10 seconds.
Step 3. Set the operation of monitor alert.
None:
The display remains the same as in standby mode even during monitoring.
Display:
The status indicator continuously lights during monitoring.
Display and Tone:A start tone sounds when monitoring begins, and the status indicator remains lit
during monitoring.
Step 4. Set the group of stations to be monitored.
Input the number of station to be monitored in the order of monitoring.
5-84
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.9. Setting C/O Interface
C/O Interface: Network Settings
Click "C/O Interface" tab to select the C/O Interface to be set.
Choose the number of the C/O interface unit or name from the list.
5.9.1. Network settings
Step 1. Click "Network Settings" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set individual items.
(1) IP address
Allows entry of the C/O Interface unit's IP address.
(2) Subnet mask
Allows entry of the Subnet mask.
(3) Default gateway
Allows entry of the Default gateway.
5-85
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
(4)Port No.
Set the start port number to be used for each protocol.
C/O Interface: Network Settings
[Web server]
Allows entry of the Web server's port number. The valid range is from 1 to 65535. The default factory setting
is 80.
[TCP port]
Allows entry of a TCP port start number other than the Web server (valid range from 1 to 65532). The
N-8000 system uses 4 consecutive ports starting with the TCP start port. The default factory setting is
5000.
The TCP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Web server
TCP
Web server
Call control
TCP
Port start number + 0
5000
PC monitoring
TCP
Port start number + 1
5001
PC control
TCP
Port start number + 2
5002
Reservation
TCP
Port start number + 3
5003
80
[UDP port]
Allows entry of UDP port start number to be used (valid range from 1 to 65516). The N-8000 system uses
20 consecutive ports starting with the UDP start port. The default factory setting is 5006.
The UDP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Reservation
UDP
Port start number + 0 to 3
5006 to 5009
Conversation
UDP
Port start number + 4 to 19
5010 to 5025
Note
Because UDP port number 15000 is used internally by the system, the numbers from 14981 to 15000 are
not available.
[Paging port (UDP)]
Displays the UDP port number to be used when making paging using the multicast communications.
To perform settings, refer to p. 5-121, Paging Zone Settings.
(5) NAPT compatible
When connecting a PC to the C/O interface unit using the global IP address, mark the [Enable] checkbox
to make the items from [Network ID (6)] to [WAN port No. (8)] available for input.
5-86
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
C/O Interface: Network Settings
(6) Network ID
When connecting a PC to the C/O interface unit using the global IP address, enter the number that identifies
networks for each range accessible by the PC using the local address.
When networks are connected as shown below, for example, assign different ID numbers for each, such as
"1" to equipment connected to LAN (1) and "2" to equipment connected to LAN (2).
Network ID No. 1 is assigned to the PC for setting. Set network ID No. 1 to equipment that can be accessed
by the PC (for example, equipment connected to LAN 1) using the local address.
L AN
Router
WAN
LA N
Router
NAPT
NAPT
(7) WAN IP address
Allows entry of the C/O Interface's IP address as viewed from the WAN side.
(8) WAN Port No.
Set the start port number to be used for each protocol as viewed from the WAN side.
[Web server]
Allows entry of the Web server's port number. The valid range is from 1 to 65535. The default factory setting
is 80.
[TCP port]
Allows entry of TCP port start number other than the Web server. The valid range is from 1 to 65532. The
N-8000 system uses 4 consecutive ports starting with the TCP start port. The default factory setting is
5000.
The TCP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Web server
TCP
Web server
Call control
TCP
Port start number + 0
5000
PC monitoring
TCP
Port start number + 1
5001
PC control
TCP
Port start number + 2
5002
Reservation
TCP
Port start number + 3
5003
80
[UDP port]
Allows entry of UDP port start number to be used. (valid range from 1 to 65516) The N-8000 system uses
20 consecutive ports starting with the UDP start port. The default factory setting is 5006.
The UDP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Reservation
UDP
Port start number + 0 to 3
5006 to 5009
Conversation
UDP
Port start number + 4 to 19
5010 to 5025
5-87
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
C/O Interface: Function Settings 1
(9) Available bit rate
Set the capacity (or a usable upper limit value) of the network line to which the C/O interface unit is connected.
Setting this communication capacity prevents sound quality deterioration and longer time delays caused by
excess conversation and/or paging communications traffic.
(10) Broadcast Spec
Select the voice transmission mode that is appropriate for the usable frequency band.
• High quality sound transmission mode
Transmits voices at high sound quality with short time delay. Use this mode as the normal default mode.
• Standard mode
Transmits voice audio with a short time delay. In this mode, the sound quality is reduced, but the delay
time is identical to that in high quality mode, allowing a narrower frequency band to be used. Use this
mode when C/O interface units are connected via an ISDN line (128 kbps).
• Band width saving transmission mode
Voice transmission uses a very narrow frequency band, but with lesser quality sound and longer time
delay. Use this mode when C/O interface units are connected via an Analog line (56 kbps).
Sampling frequency
Delay time
Frequency band to be used
16 kHz
0.08 second
130 kbps
Standard mode
8 kHz
0.08 second
98 kbps
Band width saving
transmission mode
8 kHz
0.32 second
49.5 kbps
High quality sound
transmission mode
5.9.2. Function settings
Step 1. Click "Function Settings 1" tab to display the following setting screen.
5-88
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
C/O Interface: Function Settings 1
Step 2. Set individual items.
(1) Calling station indication/CCTV control
Control output :
Set the Multi interface unit's, Direct select unit's, or Audio interface unit’s unit number
and contact output terminal number, which provide a make signal when the station is
called.
Called station's No.: Provides a make contact when the station to be set here is called. Up to 8 stations can
be set.
When the C/O interface unit is set as a called station, enter "#", followed by the
access number. For example, when setting the C/O interface unit with access number
"05," enter "#05".
(Example)
The operation example illustrated below is based on the following settings:
C/O interface unit No.: 1
Control Output
MI Equipment No.: 5
Contact output No.: 3
Called station's No.:
105
N-8000MI (Equipment No. 5)
Contact Output No. 3
Make contact
Outside line telephone
Call
Call
N-8000CO (Equipment No. 1)
N-8000CO's
outside line number
X
X
(Dial
confirmation tone)
No.105
1
0
5
The Multi interface unit's (equipment No. 5) Contact No. 3 closes when the C/O interface unit (equipment
No.1) calls the station No. 105.
(2) Record conversation
Records C/O Interface conversations.
The conversation of the C/O Interface is provided from the audio output of the designated N-8000AF audio
interface unit.
(3) Access to paging call operation
Enables or disables paging calls from the C/O Interface.
(4) Access to scan monitor operation
Enables or disables scan monitor from the C/O Interface.
(5) External equipment control
Set whether the one-shot make contact output or make/break contact output is operated at the C/O
Interface.
5-89
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
C/O Interface: Function Settings 2
Step 1. Click "Function Settings 2" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set individual items.
(1) C/O Setting
Name:
Set the name of the C/O line.
(2) Timeout
Timeout:
Set the time interval for automatic termination of conversations ( 1 – 99 min).
Scan monitor timeout:Set the time interval for automatic termination of scan monitoring ( 1 – 99 min).
Paging time-out:Set whether to limit the duration of paging call with the station. To set a timeout,
enter the time limit after which paging calls to the station are automatically
terminated.
If a time-out is not set, paging calls will continue until executing the termination
operation.
(3) Call/Transfer
Access No: Select the identification number (from 0 to 99) to be dialed when making a call
to the C/O line.
Note
When a single digit number is set for the access number, avoid using numbers
that match the first 1 digit of station numbers.
When a double digit number is set for the access number, avoid using numbers
that match the first 2 digits of station numbers.
Dial of transfer to:Set a telephone number of up to 32 digits to be used when a call is transferred
through the C/O line interface unit.
(4) Direct in line/dial
Access to direct in dial:
Access to direct in line:
Leader:
Set whether to enable or disable direct inward dialing operation.
Set whether to enable or disable direct in line operation.
Set the master station to be called up.
5-90
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
C/O Interface: Function Settings 2
Member: Up to 3 member stations can be simultaneously called up when the
representative station receives a call.
Note
If the representative station has not been set, calls are not made to the member stations.
(5)Paging with call tone
Sounds a pre-announcement tone when paging is initiated.
(6) Delay time
Set the delay time before paging is initiated.
(7) C/O control password enable
Set whether or not to use a password when C/O line scan monitoring or C/O line external equipment control
is performed.
5-91
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.9.3. Scan monitor settings
C/O Interface: Scan Monitor
Step 1. Click "Scan Monitor" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set the scan monitor sequencing time in 1-second units from 1 to 10 seconds.
Step 3. Set the operation of monitor alert.
None:
The display remains the same as in standby mode even during monitoring.
Display:
The status indicator continuously lights during monitoring.
Display and Tone:A start tone sounds when monitoring begins, and the status indicator remains lit
during monitoring.
Step 4. Set the group of stations to be monitored.
Input the number of station to be monitored in the order of monitoring.
5-92
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.10. Setting Telephone Interface
Telephone Interface: Network Settings
Click "Telephone Interface" tab to select the Telephone Interface to be set.
Choose the number of the Telephone Interface unit or name from the list.
5.10.1. Network settings
Step 1. Click "Network Settings" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set individual items.
(1) IP address
Allows entry of the Telephone Interface unit's IP address.
(2) Subnet mask
Allows entry of the Subnet mask.
(3) Default gateway
Allows entry of the Default gateway.
5-93
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
(4)Port No.
Set the start port number to be used for each protocol.
Telephone Interface: Network Settings
[Web server]
Allows entry of the Web server's port number. The valid range is from 1 to 65535. The default factory setting
is 80.
[TCP port]
Allows entry of a TCP port start number other than the Web server (valid range from 1 to 65532). The
N-8000 system uses 4 consecutive ports starting with the TCP start port. The default factory setting is
5000.
The TCP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Web server
TCP
Web server
Call control
TCP
Port start number + 0
5000
PC monitoring
TCP
Port start number + 1
5001
PC control
TCP
Port start number + 2
5002
Reservation
TCP
Port start number + 3
5003
80
[UDP port]
Allows entry of UDP port start number to be used (valid range from 1 to 65516). The N-8000 system uses
20 consecutive ports starting with the UDP start port. The default factory setting is 5006.
The UDP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Reservation
UDP
Port start number + 0 to 3
5006 to 5009
Conversation
UDP
Port start number + 4 to 19
5010 to 5025
Note
Because UDP port number 15000 is used internally by the system, the numbers from 14981 to 15000 are
not available.
[Paging port (UDP)]
Displays the UDP port number to be used when making paging using the multicast communications.
To perform settings, refer to p. 5-121, Paging Zone Settings.
(5) NAPT compatible
When connecting a PC to the Telephone interface unit using the global IP address, mark the [Enable]
checkbox to make the items from [Network ID (6)] to [WAN port No. (8)] available for input.
5-94
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Telephone Interface: Network Settings
(6) Network ID
When connecting a PC to the Telephone interface unit using the global IP address, enter the number that
identifies networks for each range accessible by the PC using the local address.
When networks are connected as shown below, for example, assign different ID numbers for each, such as
"1" to equipment connected to LAN (1) and "2" to equipment connected to LAN (2).
Network ID No. 1 is assigned to the PC for setting. Set network ID No. 1 to equipment that can be accessed
by the PC (for example, equipment connected to LAN 1) using the local address.
L AN
Router
WAN
LA N
Router
NAPT
NAPT
(7) WAN IP address
Allows entry of the Telephone Interface unit's IP address as viewed from the WAN side.
(8) WAN Port No.
Set the start port number to be used for each protocol as viewed from the WAN side.
[Web server]
Allows entry of the Web server's port number. The valid range is from 1 to 65535. The default factory setting
is 80.
[TCP port]
Allows entry of TCP port start number other than the Web server. The valid range is from 1 to 65532. The
N-8000 system uses 4 consecutive ports starting with the TCP start port. The default factory setting is
5000.
The TCP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Web server
TCP
Web server
Call control
TCP
Port start number + 0
5000
PC monitoring
TCP
Port start number + 1
5001
PC control
TCP
Port start number + 2
5002
Reservation
TCP
Port start number + 3
5003
80
[UDP port]
Allows entry of UDP port start number to be used. (valid range from 1 to 65516) The N-8000 system uses
20 consecutive ports starting with the UDP start port. The default factory setting is 5006.
The UDP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Reservation
UDP
Port start number + 0 to 3
5006 to 5009
Conversation
UDP
Port start number + 4 to 19
5010 to 5025
5-95
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Telephone Interface: Network Settings
(9) Available bit rate
Set the capacity (or a usable upper limit value) of the network line to which the Telephone interface unit
is connected. Setting this communication capacity prevents sound quality deterioration and longer time
delays caused by excess conversation and/or paging communications traffic.
(10) Broadcast Spec
Select the voice transmission mode that is appropriate for the usable frequency band.
• High quality sound transmission mode
Transmits voices at high sound quality with short time delay. Use this mode as the normal default mode.
• Standard mode
Transmits voice audio with a short time delay. In this mode, the sound quality is reduced, but the delay
time is identical to that in high quality mode, allowing a narrower frequency band to be used. Use this
mode when Telephone interface units are connected via an ISDN line (128 kbps).
• Band width saving transmission mode
Voice transmission uses a very narrow frequency band, but with lesser quality sound and longer time
delay. Use this mode when Telephone interface units are connected via an Analog line (56 kbps).
Sampling frequency
Delay time
Frequency band to be used
16 kHz
0.08 second
130 kbps
Standard mode
8 kHz
0.08 second
98 kbps
Band width saving
transmission mode
8 kHz
0.32 second
49.5 kbps
High quality sound
transmission mode
5-96
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.10.2. Function settings
Telephone Interface: Function Settings 1
Step 1. Click "Function Settings 1" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set individual items.
(1) Transfer settings
Set the transfer function ON or OFF for the station connected to the exchange.
Call forwarding:Calls to stations are automatically transferred to another designated station
without sounding a call tone only when Call forwarding function is enabled.
Time-based call forwarding:Calls to stations are automatically transferred to another designated station
without sounding a call tone only when the preset time is reached.
This function can be set only when the call forwarding function is enabled.
Preset time can be set only when the time-based call forwarding function is
enabled.
Group hunting:Calls to a busy station are automatically transferred to another designated
station, if group hunting function is set to the called station.
Absence transfer:When no response is made to a call to the station for a set period of time,
the call is automatically transferred to another designated station. Preset
time duration can be set only when the absence transfer mode is enabled.
(2) Oneshot make time (second)
Sets the duration that the external control output terminals are shorted momentarily.
The setting range is from 1 to 9 (in 1-second units).
5-97
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Telephone Interface: Function Settings 1
(3) Time limit
Set the time-out value for calling, conversation or paging functions in ten-second units between 10 and 990
seconds.
Call time-out:Set whether to limit the duration of a call to the station. If setting a time-out, enter
the time limit after which calls to the station are automatically terminated. If not
setting a time-out, calls will continue until they are cancelled or the called station
responds.
Conversation time-out:Set whether to limit the duration of conversations with the station. If setting a timeout, enter the time limit after which conversations to the station are automatically
terminated. If not setting a time-out, conversations will continue until executing the
termination operation.
Paging time-out:Set whether to limit the duration of paging call with the station. If setting a timeout, enter the time limit after which paging calls to the station are automatically
terminated.
If not setting a time-out, paging calls will continue until executing the termination
operation.
(4)Paging with call tone
Sounds a pre-announcement tone when paging is initiated.
(5) Delay Time
Set the delay time before paging is initiated.
(6)Paging response mode
Select either "Zone Selection" or "Automatic Response" modes when responding to the paging.
Zone Selection:Responds to a paging call by designating the number of the paging zone. Respond
to the paging party who made the paging to the designated zone last is called. Use
this mode if paging announcements are heard from multiple zones.
Automatic Response:Use only the paging response key to make a response. The responding station
is connected to the station that made a paging call over the paging zone through
which the responding station last received a call.
(7) Calling station indication
Select either "During call and talk" or "During talk" mode when performing the calling station indication
function.
The table below shows the timing that the Multi interface unit’s, Direct select unit’s, or Audio interface unit’s
contact output is closed.
Calling station indication
During call and talk
During talk
Calling
Closed
Open
Being called
Closed
Open
Call waiting
Closed
Open
Talking
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Station operation
Being paged
Receiving scan monitor
5-98
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Telephone Interface: Function Settings 2
Step 1. Click "Function Settings 2" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set individual items.
(1)Level
Microphone sensitivity: Station hands-free microphone sensitivity can be adjusted in three increments
from 1 (minimum) to 3 (maximum). The default sensitivity is Level 2.
Note
The sensitivity for the handset microphone is fixed (not adjustable).
Speaker output:
Station speaker output level can be adjusted in five increments from 1 (minimum)
to 5 (maximum). The default sensitivity is Level 3.
Call volume:
Station call volume can be adjusted in five increments from 1 (minimum) to 5
(maximum). The default sensitivity is Level 3.
(2) Group call (max. 15)
Set a group of up to fifteen stations that will be called simultaneously when the Station being set now is
called. With this setting, even when a called station is busy, any registered station in the group can respond.
(3) Calls transferred to
Set the station number to which each transfer is to be directed.
Call forwarding receiving station can be set only when the call forwarding function is enabled. (Refer to
p. 5-97.)
Note
The station to be called via Multi interface unit cannot be programmed as a transfer destination station.
5-99
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Telephone Interface: Function Settings 2
(4) Door remote
Set the Multi interface unit's, Direct select unit's, or Audio interface unit’s unit number and contact output
terminal number to be used for door remote control.
(5) Calling station indication/CCTV control
Control output :
Set the Multi interface unit's, Direct select unit's, or Audio interface unit’s unit number
and contact output terminal number, which provide a make contact when the station
is called.
Called station's No.: Provides a make contact when the station to be set here is called. Up to 8 stations
can be set.
When the C/O interface unit is set as a called station, enter "#", followed by the
access number. For example, when setting the C/O interface unit with access
number "05," enter "#05".
(Example)
The operation example illustrated below is based on the following settings:
Station No. (for Station): 148
Control Output
MI Equipment No.: 5
Contact output No.: 6
Called station's No.: 149
N-8000MI (Equipment No. 5)
Contact Output No. 6
Make contact
No. 148
Call
1
4
9
No.149
The Multi interface unit's (equipment No. 5) Contact No. 6 closes when the station No. 148 calls the station
No. 149.
(6) Record conversation
Records Telephone interface conversations.
The conversation of the Telephone interface is provided from the audio output of the designated N-8000AF
audio interface unit.
(7) User Access Code
Sets whether or not to enable the Access code authentication.
Enter the access code number (4-digit number).
(8) Access to priority call operation
Enables the station to initiate priority calls.
This function can only be used when the system has been set for sequential response mode.
(9) Access to paging call operation
Enables or disables paging calls from the station.
(10) Access to emergency all paging call operation
Enables or disables emergency all paging calls from the station.
(11) External equipment control
Set whether the one-shot make contact output or make/break contact output is operated at the station.
5-100
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.10.3. Scan Monitor settings
Telephone Interface: Scan Monitor
Step 1. Click "Scan Monitor" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set the scan monitor sequencing time in 1-second units from 1 to 10 seconds.
Step 3. Set the operation of monitor alert.
None:
The display remains the same as in standby mode even during monitoring.
Display:
The status indicator continuously lights during monitoring.
Display and Tone:A start tone sounds when monitoring begins, and the status indicator remains lit
during monitoring.
Step 4. Set the group of stations to be monitored.
Input the number of station to be monitored in the order of monitoring.
5-101
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.11. Setting Audio Interface
Audio Interface: Network Settings
Click "Audio Interface" tab to select the Audio Interface to be set.
Choose the number of the Audio interface unit or name from the list.
5.11.1. Network settings
Step 1. Click "Network Settings" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set individual items.
(1) IP address
Allows entry of the Audio Interface unit's IP address.
(2) Subnet mask
Allows entry of the Subnet mask.
(3) Default gateway
Allows entry of the Default gateway.
5-102
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
(4)Port No.
Set the start port number to be used for each protocol.
Audio Interface: Network Settings
[Web server]
Allows entry of the Web server's port number. The valid range is from 1 to 65535. The default factory setting
is 80.
[TCP port]
Allows entry of a TCP port start number other than the Web server (valid range from 1 to 65532). The
N-8000 system uses 4 consecutive ports starting with the TCP start port. The default factory setting is
5000.
The TCP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Web server
TCP
Web server
Call control
TCP
Port start number + 0
5000
PC monitoring
TCP
Port start number + 1
5001
PC control
TCP
Port start number + 2
5002
Reservation
TCP
Port start number + 3
5003
80
[UDP port]
Allows entry of UDP port start number to be used (valid range from 1 to 65516). The N-8000 system uses
20 consecutive ports starting with the UDP start port. The default factory setting is 5006.
The UDP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Reservation
UDP
Port start number + 0 to 3
5006 to 5009
Conversation
UDP
Port start number + 4 to 19
5010 to 5025
Note
Because UDP port number 15000 is used internally by the system, the numbers from 14981 to 15000 are
not available.
[Paging port (UDP)]
Displays the UDP port number to be used when making paging using the multicast communications.
To perform settings, refer to p. 5-121, Paging Zone Settings.
(5) NAPT compatible
When connecting a PC to the Audio interface unit using the global IP address, mark the [Enable] checkbox
to make the items from [Network ID (6)] to [WAN port No. (8)] available for input.
5-103
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Audio Interface: Network Settings
(6) Network ID
When connecting a PC to the Audio interface unit using the global IP address, enter the number that
identifies networks for each range accessible by the PC using the local address.
When networks are connected as shown below, for example, assign different ID numbers for each, such as
"1" to equipment connected to LAN (1) and "2" to equipment connected to LAN (2).
Network ID No. 1 is assigned to the PC for setting. Set network ID No. 1 to equipment that can be accessed
by the PC (for example, equipment connected to LAN 1) using the local address.
L AN
Router
WAN
LA N
Router
NAPT
NAPT
(7) WAN IP address
Allows entry of the Audio interface unit's IP address as viewed from the WAN side.
(8) WAN Port No.
Set the start port number to be used for each protocol as viewed from the WAN side.
[Web server]
Allows entry of the Web server's port number. The valid range is from 1 to 65535. The default factory setting
is 80.
[TCP port]
Allows entry of TCP port start number other than the Web server. The valid range is from 1 to 65532. The
N-8000 system uses 4 consecutive ports starting with the TCP start port. The default factory setting is
5000.
The TCP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Web server
TCP
Web server
Call control
TCP
Port start number + 0
5000
PC monitoring
TCP
Port start number + 1
5001
PC control
TCP
Port start number + 2
5002
Reservation
TCP
Port start number + 3
5003
80
[UDP port]
Allows entry of UDP port start number to be used. (valid range from 1 to 65516) The N-8000 system uses
20 consecutive ports starting with the UDP start port. The default factory setting is 5006.
The UDP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Reservation
UDP
Port start number + 0 to 3
5006 to 5009
Conversation
UDP
Port start number + 4 to 19
5010 to 5025
5-104
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Audio Interface: Network Settings
(9) Available bit rate
Set the capacity (or a usable upper limit value) of the network line to which the Audio interface unit is
connected. Setting this communication capacity prevents sound quality deterioration and longer time
delays caused by excess conversation and/or paging communications traffic.
(10) Broadcast Spec
Select the voice transmission mode that is appropriate for the usable frequency band.
• High quality sound transmission mode
Transmits voices at high sound quality with short time delay. Use this mode as the normal default mode.
• Standard mode
Transmits voice audio with a short time delay. In this mode, the sound quality is reduced, but the delay
time is identical to that in high quality mode, allowing a narrower frequency band to be used. Use this
mode when Audio interface units are connected via an ISDN line (128 kbps).
• Band width saving transmission mode
Voice transmission uses a very narrow frequency band, but with lesser quality sound and longer time
delay. Use this mode when Audio interface units are connected via an Analog line (56 kbps).
Sampling frequency
Delay time
Frequency band to be used
16 kHz
0.08 second
130 kbps
Standard mode
8 kHz
0.08 second
98 kbps
Band width saving
transmission mode
8 kHz
0.32 second
49.5 kbps
High quality sound
transmission mode
5-105
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Audio Interface: Function Settings
5.11.2. Function settings
Step 1. Click "Function Settings" tab to display the following setting screen.
2
3
Step 2. Set individual items.
(1) Oneshot make time (second)
Sets the duration that the external control output terminals are shorted momentarily.
The setting range is from 1 to 9 (in 1-second units).
(2) Operation mode
Set the operation mode of the audio interface unit.
Unused:
This unit is not used.
Aux input paging:
elect this item when connecting the Audio interface unit to playback
S
components or Remote microphone to make paging calls. Paging calls
can be made to the preprogrammed paging zones when the control input
is activated.
Contact input No./Paging No.: Set the paging zone number to be called when the contact input is closed
for each contact input terminal.
Rec:Select this function when recording the station conversation by connecting
the audio interface unit to a recorder, etc.
Time signal:Select this function when playing chime tones or other sound sources at
the fixed time or on the fixed day.
Note
Only a single equipment per system can be set to "Time signal."
"Time signal" item in this operation mode can be selected only for the
equipment for which Time signal has been set on the system settings
screen (refer to p. 5-26).
5-106
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
(3)Paging
Set the operation mode of the audio interface unit.
Delay Time:
Audio Interface: Function Settings
Set the delay time before paging is initiated.
Aux input paging priority:Allows external input broadcasts to take precedence over all-zone paging
and individual zone paging.
(4) Input level
Set the audio input sensitivity.
(5) Time sync function
Set the Time sync function.
Adjust enable:
Set whether or not to enable the time sync function.
Start time/End time:
Set time ranges that make the time sync function operable.
Note
This function cannot be used simultaneously with the NTP Client function.
(6) Time signal
This function sets the schedule for the time signal.
Clicking the "Schedule settings" button displays the schedule setting screen.
3-1
3-2
Step 3. Set the schedule.
(1) Signal activation time
Set the activation time interval for individual sound sources (1 – 1,024 sec).
Sound source numbers 1 – 5 correspond to an internal sound source, while numbers 6 – 9 correspond to
an external sound source (contact outputs 1 – 4).
5-107
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Audio Interface: Function Settings
(2) External timer
Perform settings for broadcasting time signals enabled by a make signal from external equipment connected
to the contact input of the audio interface unit.
Contact Input:The Audio interface unit’s contact input terminal number. (Can’t be edited.)
Enable:
Enables the external timer function of the selected contact input.
Source:Set the sound source number to be activated when the selected contact input
terminal is closed. Numbers 1 – 5 correspond to internal sound sources,
while numbers 6 – 9 correspond to external sound sources (contact outputs
1 – 4).
Access to external control:Controls the contact output terminal set in the External Equipment Activation
setting when the selected contact input terminal is closed.
Paging No.:Set the paging zone over which broadcasts are made when the selected
contact input terminal is closed.
(3) External control
External equipment can be set to be activated when the timer-controlled or time signal programs are
initiated.
Equipment No.:Select the equipment number of the Multi interface unit, Direct select unit,
or Audio interface unit of which operation mode is set to "Time signal."
Contact No.:Select one of the contact output terminals. When the target unit is Audio
interface unit, only the terminal numbers 5 to 8 can be set.
Activation time:Set the time interval that activates the contact (1 – 1,024 sec).
(4) Schedule
Up to 16 types of schedules can be registered, and up to 64 events registered for each schedule.
Enable Schedule No.:Activated schedule number: Set the schedule number to be used.
Each schedule settings:Selecting one of tabs 1 – 16 allows each schedule to be set.
New button:Add new events. Up to 64 events can be added per individual schedule.
Clicking the "New" button displays the New Event screen.
Step 3-1. Set the New event.
(1) Name
Set an event name.
The name is displayed on the multi-function master station's LCD screen. The name must be of 8 characters
or less.
(2) Time
Set the time that the event takes place.
5-108
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Audio Interface: Function Settings
(3) Day
Set the day that the event takes place.
Note: Multiple events cannot be simultaneously registered for the same time of the same day.
Step 3-2. Set the Weekly schedule.
(1) Weekly schedule
Shows a list of events registered on a day/time basis.
Delete button:Deletes the selected event.
Copy button:Copies the selected event’s setting contents without time settings.
(2) Detail
Detailed contents of events can be set and confirmed.
Name:Set an event name.
Set the name of each event using up to eight alphanumeric characters.
Time:Set the time that the event takes place.
Day:Set the day that the event takes place.
Note
Multiple events cannot be simultaneously registered for the same time of
the same day.
Paging No.:Sets the paging zone over which broadcasts are made when the event
takes place.
Source:Selects the sound source number to be activated when the event occurs.
Access to external control:Controls the contact output terminal set in the External Equipment Activation
setting when the event takes place.
Paste button:Pastes copied setting contents of the event.
Update button:Makes the changed content valid.
5-109
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Audio Interface: Contact Output
5.11.3. Contact output setting
Step 1. Click "Contact Output" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set each item of "Contact output."
Set the access number for the contact output terminal to be activated when the station performs
external equipment control (one-shot make output or make/break output).
(1) Contact output No. (Can't be edited.)
The Audio interface unit's contact output terminal number.
(2) Access No. digits
Select the number of digits to be used when controlling external equipment at the station.
(3) Access No.
Set the access number of the digit set in "Access No. digit", which is used to control external equipment at
the station.
Notes
• The access number cannot be set to "0."
• If the number of digits of the access number is 4, the usable numbers range from "0001" to "6144."
(4)Line status
Select the line to be diagnosed.
The specified contact output terminal is closed when such status is judged abnormal that the CPU failure is
detected on the line or the line is not connected though the station number has been registered.
(5) Network status
Select the equipment to be diagnosed.
The specified contact output terminal is closed when the equipment is judged failed if no response is
detected from it.
5-110
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.12. Setting Direct Select
Direct Select: Network Settings
Click "Direct Select" tab to select the Direct Select to be set.
Choose the number of the Direct select unit or name from the list.
5.12.1. Network settings
Step 1. Click "Network Settings" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set individual items.
(1) IP address
Allows entry of the Direct select unit's IP address.
(2) Subnet mask
Allows entry of the Subnet mask.
(3) Default gateway
Allows entry of the Default gateway.
5-111
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Direct Select: Network Settings
(4)Port No.
Set the start port number to be used for each protocol.
[Web server]
Allows entry of the Web server's port number. The valid range is from 1 to 65535. The default factory setting
is 80.
[TCP port]
Allows entry of a TCP port start number other than the Web server (valid range from 1 to 65532). The
N-8000 system uses 4 consecutive ports starting with the TCP start port. The default factory setting is
5000.
The TCP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Web server
TCP
Web server
Call control
TCP
Port start number + 0
5000
PC monitoring
TCP
Port start number + 1
5001
PC control
TCP
Port start number + 2
5002
Reservation
TCP
Port start number + 3
5003
80
(5) NAPT compatible
When connecting a PC to the Direct select unit using the global IP address, mark the [Enable] checkbox to
make the items from [Network ID (6)] to [WAN port No. (8)] available for input.
(6) Network ID
When connecting a PC to the Direct select unit using the global IP address, enter the number that identifies
networks for each range accessible by the PC using the local address.
When networks are connected as shown below, for example, assign different ID numbers for each, such as
"1" to equipment connected to LAN (1) and "2" to equipment connected to LAN (2).
Network ID No. 1 is assigned to the PC for setting. Set network ID No. 1 to equipment that can be accessed
by the PC (for example, equipment connected to LAN 1) using the local address.
L AN
Router
NAPT
WAN
Router
LA N
NAPT
(7) WAN IP address
Allows entry of the Direct select unit's IP address as viewed from the WAN side.
5-112
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Direct Select: Network Settings
(8) WAN Port No.
Set the start port number to be used for each protocol as viewed from the WAN side.
[Web server]
Allows entry of the Web server's port number. The valid range is from 1 to 65535. The default factory setting
is 80.
[TCP port]
Allows entry of TCP port start number other than the Web server. The valid range is from 1 to 65532. The
N-8000 system uses 4 consecutive ports starting with the TCP start port. The default factory setting is
5000.
The TCP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Web server
TCP
Web server
Call control
TCP
Port start number + 0
5000
PC monitoring
TCP
Port start number + 1
5001
PC control
TCP
Port start number + 2
5002
Reservation
TCP
Port start number + 3
5003
80
5-113
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.12.2. Function settings
Direct Select: Function Settings
Step 1. Click "Function Settings" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set the following item.
(1) Oneshot make time (second)
Sets the duration that the external control output terminals are shorted momentarily.
The setting range is from 1 to 9 (in 1-second units).
5-114
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Direct Select: Contact Input
5.12.3. Contact input setting
Step 1. Click "Contact Input" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set each item of "Contact input."
(1) Contact input No. (Can't be edited.)
The Direct select unit's contact input terminal number.
(2) Operation mode
Select the contact input's operation mode. The setting contents differ depending on the mode selected
here.
Input interlock level: Select this item when closing the contact output terminal in synchronization with
the contact input terminal as shown below. (The input is defined when its level
remains constant for 50 ms after change.)
Input interlock edge: Select this item when closing the contact output terminal in synchronization with
the contact input terminal as shown below. (The input is defined when its level
remains constant for 50 ms after change.)
[Input interlock level]
Input
Output
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
50 ms
50 ms
[Input interlock edge]
Input
Output
ON
50 ms
50 ms
OFF
ON
OFF
5-115
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Direct Select: Contact Input
Remote dial control: When the Multi interface unit's or Direct select unit's contact input terminal is
closed, a station is made to automatically perform dial operation. A set of up to 20
dial codes (including dial numbers and key operations) can be assigned to each
contact input terminal.
Direct select:
If the Direct select unit's contact input is closed, a set station is called up.
Unused:
The contact input is not used.
(3) Interlock contact
Set the contact numbers to be output when "Input interlock level" or "Input interlock edge" is selected in the
operation mode setting. To designate the door station's contact output terminal, select "DS" and enter the
door station number. When the door station is N-8640DS or N-8650DS, enter the contact output number in
the "Contact No." box as well. To designate the contact output terminal of the Multi interface unit or Direct
select unit, select "MI/DI," and enter the equipment number and contact output terminal number of the unit.
(4) Remote dial control
Set the equipment number of exchange and line number to which the remote-controlled station is connected.
Referring to the table below, enter the dial codes that correspond to the dial operation the station is made
to perform.
• The table below shows assignable keys or operations vs. dial codes to be registered.
• A set of up to 32 dial codes can be registered.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
C
Assignable key or operation
Dial code
Assignable key or operation
Dial code
1
Press PTT key (PTT key is on.)
3
Paging call
PC
HOLD
HD
FUNCTION
FN
2
Release PTT key (PTT key is off.)
4
Paging response
6
TRANSFER
5
7
8
9
0
*
C
TR
RD
MENU
MN
SELECT
Left arrow key (
Up arrow key (
PF
PR
REDIAL
Right arrow key (
PN
)
)
Down arrow key (
SL
LC
)
RC
)
DC
UC
(5) Direct select
Set the master station number to be controlled and the station number to be connected to the master station
when "Direct Select" has been selected in the Operation mode setting.
5-116
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.12.4. Contact output setting
Direct Select: Contact Output
Step 1. Click "Contact Output" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set each item of "Contact output."
Set the access number for the contact output terminal to be activated when the station performs
external equipment control (one-shot make output or make/break output).
(1) Contact output No. (Can't be edited.)
The Direct select unit's contact output terminal number.
(2) Access No. digits
Select the number of digits to be used when controlling external equipment at the station.
(3) Access No.
Set the access number of the digit set in "Access No. digit", which is used to control external equipment at
the station.
Notes
• The access number cannot be set to "0."
• If the number of digits of the access number is 4, the usable numbers range from "0001" to "6144."
(4) Device
Enable or disable relay and LED outputs.
(5)Line status
Select the line to be diagnosed.
The specified contact output terminal is closed when such status is judged abnormal that the CPU failure is
detected on the line or the line is not connected though the station number has been registered.
(6) Network status
Select the equipment to be diagnosed.
The specified contact output terminal is closed when the equipment is judged failed if no response is
detected from it.
5-117
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.13. Setting Gateway
Gateway: Network Settings
Click "Gateway" tab to select the IP module to be set.
Choose the name or number of the IP module from the list.
5.13.1. Network settings
Step 1. Click "Network Settings" tab to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Set individual items.
(1) IP address
Allows entry of the IP module’s IP address.
(2) Subnet mask
Allows entry of the Subnet mask.
(3) Default gateway
Allows entry of the Default gateway.
5-118
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
(4)Port No.
Set the start port number to be used for each protocol.
Gateway: Network Settings
[Web server]
Allows entry of the Web server's port number. The valid range is from 1 to 65535. The default factory setting
is 80.
[TCP port]
Allows entry of a TCP port start number other than the Web server (valid range from 1 to 65532). The
N-8000 system uses 4 consecutive ports starting with the TCP start port. The default factory setting is
5000.
The TCP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Web server
TCP
Web server
Call control
TCP
Port start number + 0
5000
PC monitoring
TCP
Port start number + 1
5001
PC control
TCP
Port start number + 2
5002
Reservation
TCP
Port start number + 3
5003
80
[UDP port]
Allows entry of UDP port start number to be used (valid range from 1 to 65516). The N-8000 system uses
20 consecutive ports starting with the UDP start port. The default factory setting is 5006.
The UDP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Reservation
UDP
Port start number + 0
Frequency compensation
UDP
Port start number + 1 to 3
5007 to 5009
Conversation
UDP
Port start number + 4 to 19
5010 to 5025
5006
Note
Because UDP port number 15000 is used internally by the system, the numbers from 14981 to 15000 are
not available.
[Paging port (UDP)]
Displays the UDP port number to be used when making paging using the multicast communications.
To perform settings, refer to p. 5-121, Paging Zone Settings.
(5) NAPT compatible
When connecting a PC to the exchange using the global IP address, mark the [Enable] checkbox to make
the items from [Network ID (6)] to [WAN port No. (8)] available for input.
5-119
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Gateway: Network Settings
(6) Network ID
When connecting a PC to the exchange using the global IP address, enter the number that identifies
networks for each range accessible by the PC using the local address.
When networks are connected as shown below, for example, assign different ID numbers for each, such as
"1" to equipment connected to LAN (1) and "2" to equipment connected to LAN (2).
Network ID No. 1 is assigned to the PC for setting. Set network ID No. 1 to equipment that can be accessed
by the PC (for example, equipment connected to LAN 1) using the local address.
LAN
Router
WAN
LA N
Router
NAPT
NAPT
(7) WAN IP address
Allows entry of the IP module’s IP address as viewed from the WAN side.
(8) WAN Port No.
Set the start port number to be used for each protocol as viewed from the WAN side.
[Web server]
Allows entry of the Web server's port number. The valid range is from 1 to 65535. The default factory setting
is 80.
[TCP port]
Allows entry of TCP port start number other than the Web server. The valid range is from 1 to 65532. The
N-8000 system uses 4 consecutive ports starting with the TCP start port. The default factory setting is
5000.
The TCP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Web server
TCP
Web server
Call control
TCP
Port start number + 0
5000
PC monitoring
TCP
Port start number + 1
5001
PC control
TCP
Port start number + 2
5002
Reservation
TCP
Port start number + 3
5003
80
[UDP port]
Allows entry of UDP port start number to be used. (valid range from 1 to 65516) The N-8000 system uses
20 consecutive ports starting with the UDP start port. The default factory setting is 5006.
The UDP port is assigned as follows.
Port
Protocol
Port Number
Default setting
Reservation
UDP
Port start number + 0 to 3
5006 to 5009
Conversation
UDP
Port start number + 4 to 19
5010 to 5025
5-120
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.14. Paging Zone Settings
Paging Zone Settings
Step 1. Click "Paging" to display the following setting screen.
Step 2. Select the paging number digit.
Select the number for [Paging No. digit].
Zones are automatically indicated depending on which number is set.
The maximum number of zones is 192.
Step 3. Enter the paging port number to be used.
Enter the start paging port number to be used in the system. The valid range is from 1 to 65535. The
N-8000 system uses (the number of Exchanges) x 4, (the number of various kinds of interface units) x
4 and (the number of IP Stations) x 4 consecutive ports starting with the start port.
Note
Take care not to duplicate the number with the UDP port number set on p. 5-31, 5-39, 5-51, 5-59,
5-86, 5-94, 5-103, and 15000 that is internally used.
Step 4. Enter a zone name.
Double-clicking the cell (pag 1 – ) located above the zone number allows the zone name to be edited.
The zone name can be up to eight characters long.
5-121
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
Paging Zone Settings
Step 5. Select stations, external PA paging outputs, and N-8000MI/8000AF's contact outputs included in each
zone.
Pressing the down arrow button of the paging zone to be set displays individual buttons containing
output destination information (station, PA paging output, or N-8000MI/8000AF's contact output).
Whether or not to include these output zones in the channel can be selected by clicking the button.
When they have already been included in the channel, the button is displayed in orange.
[Display example]
Paging zone number
Equipment number
Equipment name
Station number
Station name
Line number
Paging zone number
Equipment number
Equipment name
Paging output terminal number (N-8000EX)
Audio output terminal number (N-8000MI)
Paging zone number
Equipment number
Equipment name
Contact output number
5-122
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.15. Group Settings
Group: Group Blocking Group
Step 1. Click "Group" to set either Group Blocking or Remote Response group.
5.15.1. Group blocking settings
Stations can be divided into groups, to each of which call-to-other groups setting and paging zone setting can
be assigned. Setting groups in this way allows a single system to be divided into several independent zones.
Up to 31 groups can be preset.
[Group settings]
Step 1. Click "Group blocking group" tab to display the following screen.
Step 2. Select the station to be assigned to each group.
Clicking the right arrow button of the paging zone to be set displays the group buttons for individual
devices. Clicking the button selects whether or not to include such devices in the group. If they have
already been included, the corresponding button is displayed in orange.
5-123
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
[Group blocking group settings]
Group: Group Blocking To
Step 1. Click "Group blocking to" tab to display the following screen.
Step 2. Tick the cell for the group to be selected to "Group blocking group" and "Paging."
Press the right arrow button of "Restricted Station Calling Group" to set the groups that can be called
up by another group, and press the right arrow button of "Paging" to set the paging zones. This causes
individual buttons to be displayed for the restricted station calling group or paging zones.
Whether or not calls are possible can be selected by clicking the button.
The button for the group that can be called is displayed in orange.
Note
The paging zones desired to be enabled can be selected from "ALL" and individual zone numbers.
Select the checkbox of "ALL" to make all zones paging.
Even if all zone numbers are selected, all-zone paging cannot be performed unless "All-Zone" has been
selected.
5-124
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
5.15.2. Remote response group settings
Group: Remote Response Group
Setting the remote response station group permits any station programmed for this function to respond to calls
to other stations within the group.
Up to 16 stations can be preset.
Also, this function is only possible when the system is set to sequential response mode.
Note
Stations connected to the N-8010EX cannot be assigned to the Remote Response Group.
[Creating new remote response group]
Step 1. Click "Remote response group" tab to display the following screen.
Step 2. Choose the stations to be configured into the group from the list.
Pressing the right arrow button for the device to be set displays the group buttons for individual stations.
Stations can be selected for inclusion by clicking the button. When a selected station has already been
included in the group, its corresponding button is displayed in orange.
Notes
• Up to 16 stations can be programmed per group.
• A single station cannot be assigned to more than one group.
5-125
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
6. When Settings Are Completed
6.1. Saving Setting Contents to Files
Save the setting contents to a specified location (refer to p. 5-12).
Select [File
Save] from the menu bar.
6.2. Uploading Settings
Uploads setting contents currently being edited.
Before uploading, be sure to save the settings contents to file as described above.
Select [Configuration
Upload] from the menu bar.
6.3. Downloading Settings
Reads the setting contents of equipment currently connected to the N-8000 Setting Software.
Select [Configuration
Download] from the menu bar.
The settings data for equipment currently programmed into the system will be displayed on the system setting
screen.
5-126
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
6.4. Printing Settings
The settings in edit can be printed.
Select [File
Print] from the menu bar.
The set data of the equipment registered in the system can be printed.
[Print example]
5-127
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
7. System Clock Settings
The N-8000 Setting Software program allows the clocks for all exchanges, various kinds of interface units, and
IP stations connected to the system to be set. To set exchange clocks individually (for example, if there is a time
difference between exchanges), use either the browser (refer to p. 6-42), the N-8000MS Multifunctional Master
station, or the N-8500MS/8600MS IP Multifunctional Master station (refer to p. 7-10).
• Synchronize the system clock with the PC clock through the following procedure. Make sure that the PC clock
has been set with the correct time beforehand.
Step 1. Click "Clock Settings" on the initial screen.
A clock-setting dialog is displayed, showing the PC's current time.
Step 2. Performs system clock settings.
Press "OK" to synchronize the clocks for all exchanges connected to the network with the PC clock.
5-128
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
8. message PAGING Settings
Create and set the messages to be used in the IP Master station’s and IP Remote microphone station’s message
paging.
8.1. Display the Setting Screen
Clicking [Message Paging Settings] on the initial screen displays the Message Paging Setting screen.
[Initial screen]
[Message Paging Setting screen]
(1)
(2)
(1)List of Original Messages
Displays the list of original messages stored in the PC.
New messages can be created or the sound volume of existing messages adjusted.
(2) Message Registration
Displays the message content registered in the IP Master station and IP Remote microphone station.
The siren tone to be used in the system can be selected.
The content of the created message can be confirmed.
5-129
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
8.2. Menu
8.2.1. File
New:
Creates a new message.
Save:
Saves the message.
Save As:
Assigns a name to the message and saves it.
Delete:
Deletes the message.
Rename File:
Changes the name of the message.
Read WAVE File: Creates original messages by converting WAV-format files to the original format.
Write WAVE File: Converts original format files to the WAV-format and saves them as files.
Send Message:‌Transfers messages stored in the PC to the IP Master station and IP Remote microphone
station.
Print:
Prints the list of original messages and the registered message content.
Print Preview:
Displays the print preview screen.
Close:
Close the Message Paging Setting Screen.
8.2.2. Edit
Playback:
Pause:
Stop:
Recording:
Plays back recorded messages.
Temporarily stops message recording, playback and other operations.
Stops message recording, playback and other operations.
Starts message recording.
8.2.3. Help
About: Displays current software version information.
5-130
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
8.3. Create and Test-Listen to the Original Messages
Click the [List of Original Messages] tab on the message paging setting screen.
The list of original messages that have been created is displayed.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
[Screen description]
(1) Recording/playback progress indicator
Progress bar indicates the progress of the
process during recording or playback.
(2)Playback button
Plays back selected messages or recorded
messages (not saved).
(3)Pause button
Temporarily stops message recording or
playback of selected or recorded messages.
(4) Stop button
Stops message recording or playback.
(5) Recording button
Starts message recording.
(6) Save button
Saves recorded messages.
(7) Volume control
Adjusts the message volume level.
The center position is the standard level, with
lower volume to left and higher volume to right.
Pressing the Save button after moving the knob
to either the left or right from the standard level
position resets the standard level to the new
position and saves the message.
Note
If a message is saved while the volume control is
set to the minimum position, the original message
volume cannot be restored even if the volume is
increased.
(8) Read button
Creates original messages by converting WAVformat files to the original format.
(9) Write button
Converts selected messages to the WAV-format
to save them as files.
(10)List of created messages
Displays the name, recorded time and date, and
message length of saved messages.
Files stored in the [(System name)\Message]
folder located in the Data Folder are shown here.
5-131
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
8.3.1. Creating new messages
Connect the input source (microphone, external playback device, etc.) to be recorded to the PC.
The recording sound volume corresponds to the input sound volume set in the PC. Set the PC sound volume
to an appropriate level.
Step 1. Select [File New] from the menu bar.
The PC is placed in new message creation mode.
Note: This mode is already started when the program is activated.
Step 2. Press the Recording button or select [Edit
Recording] from the menu bar and begin to record the
message.
Either speak into the microphone or play back the input device.
Messages of up to 20 seconds in length can be recorded. Recording automatically stops after 20
seconds. To stop recording partway through, either press the Stop button or select [Edit
Stop] from
the menu bar.
Step 3. To check the recorded content, either press the Playback button or select [Edit
menu bar.
Playback] from the
Step 4. Either press the Save button or select [File Save] from the menu bar.
A dialog for entering the message name is displayed.
Step 5. Enter the message name and press the OK button.
The message name can be up to 128 characters in length.
If the save is complete, the message's file is created in the [(system name)\Message] folder located in
the Data Folder.
8.3.2. Deleting created messages
Step 1. Select the desired message in the list of created messages.
Step 2. Select [File Delete] from the menu bar or press the PC's Delete key.
The selected message is deleted.
8.3.3. Changing the names of created messages
Step 1. Select the desired message in the list of created messages.
Step 2. Select [File Rename File] from the menu bar or click the selected message again.
The filename can then be changed.
Step 3. Enter the new name.
The message name can be up to 128 characters in length.
5-132
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
8.3.4. Creating messages from WAV-format files
WAV-format file can be converted to original format files and saved as original messages.
Note
The compatible WAV-format file specifications are:
• 16 bits and 16 kHz sampling frequency
• Monaural
Step 1. Press the Read button or select [File Read WAVE File] from the menu bar.
A dialog for selecting the WAV-format file is displayed.
Step 2. Select the file and press the Open button.
The file is converted to the original format and saved as an original message.
After conversion is complete, the message file is saved in the [(system name)\Message] folder located
in the Data Folder.
8.3.5. Creating WAV-format files from messages
WAV-format files can be created from registered original message files.
Step 1. Select the message from the list of created messages and either press the Write button or select [Edit
Write WAVE File] from the menu bar.
A file save dialog is displayed.
Step 2. Enter the filename to be saved, then select the destination and press the Save button.
The WAV-format file is created and saved.
The WAV-format file specifications are:
• 16 bits and 16 kHz sampling frequency
• Monaural
5-133
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
8.3.6. Test-listening to messages
Step 1. Select the message to listen to from the list of
created messages.
Step 2. Press the Playback button or select [Edit
Playback] from the menu bar.
The message automatically stops after being
played to its end.
To stop the message partway through playback,
either press the Stop button or select [Edit
Stop] from the menu bar.
2
1
8.3.7. Adjusting the sound volume
3
4
2
1
Step 1. Select the message to adjust the sound volume for from the list of created messages.
Step 2. Adjust the volume using the volume control knob.
Step 3. Press the Playback button or select [Edit
volume level.
Step 4. Press the Save button or select [File
Playback] from the menu bar and confirm the output
Save] from the menu bar.
Notes
• If the changed volume is not saved, the volume data is not updated.
• If the message is saved while the volume control is set to the minimum position, the original message
volume cannot be restored even if the volume is increased.
• If the volume is changed and saved, the saved volume becomes the standard level (the central value
of the volume adjustment range) when the message is played back the next time.
5-134
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
8.4. Registering Messages in the IP Master Station and IP Remote Microphone Station
Click the [Message Registration] tab on the message paging settings screen.
(1)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(7)
(5)
(6)
(8)
(9)
[Screen description]
(1) Siren tone selection
The currently selected siren tone is displayed
when the N-8000 program is started. To listen to
or change a tone, select the desired type of siren
tone from the pull-down menu.
(2) Test-listen button
Used to test-listen to selected siren tones.
(3) Change button
Transfers a changed siren tone to all IP Master
stations and IP Remote microphone stations.
(4) Test message button
Used to test-listen to selected messages.
(6) Clear all button
Clears all selection of stations.
(7) Send button
Transfers selected messages to the IP Master
station and IP Remote microphone station.
(8) Original message list
Displays messages stored in the Data Folder.
(9) Station list
Displays all IP Master stations and IP Remote
microphone stations in the system and the
messages to be transferred to these stations.
Click the checkbox to select the station.
(5) Select all button
Selects all stations.
5-135
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
8.4.1. Test-listening to a siren tone
1
2
Step 1. Select the desired siren tone from the pull-down menu.
Step 2. Press the Test-listen button.
The selected siren tone plays and automatically stops upon reaching its end.
The test siren tone is played back on the PC together with the announcement "This is a sample."
8.4.2. Transferring a siren tone to the IP Master station and IP Remote microphone station
1
2
Step 1. Select the desired siren tone from the pull-down menu.
Step 2. Press the Change button.
The changed siren tone is transmitted to all IP Master stations and IP Remote microphone stations
within the system.
8.4.3. Test-listening to messages
Step 1. Select the message to listen to from the message list.
Step 2. Press the Test message button.
The selected message is played, and automatically stops at
its end.
2
1
5-136
Chapter 5 SYSTEM SETTINGS BY SOFTWARE
8.4.4. Registering messages from the PC to the IP Master stations and IP Remote microphone stations
Step 1. Designate the message to be transferred to the IP Master stations or IP Remote microphone stations.
The message to be transferred can be selected by dragging and dropping them from the messages
list to the stations list.
To do so, select and drag the message to be registered, then drop it on the IP Master station or IP
Remote microphone station that the message is to be transferred to.
Repeat this operation for all IP Master stations and IP Remote microphone stations to which the
message is to be transmitted.
3
1
2
Step 2. Mark the checkbox for the desired IP Master station and IP Remote microphone station to which the
message is to be transferred.
To uncheck, click the checkbox again.
Notes
• To simultaneously mark all the checkboxes for the IP Master stations and IP Remote microphone
stations displayed in the list, press the Select all button.
• To simultaneously uncheck them, press the Clear all button.
Step 3. Press the Send button or select [File Send Message] from the menu bar.
Message data is transferred from the PC to the checked IP Master stations and IP Remote microphone
stations, and the message is registered to those stations.
5-137
Chapter 6
SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE
BROWSER
This chapter describes browser network settings, and system
maintenance functions.
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
1. Outline of settings using browser
Network settings can be updated and maintenance functions controlled by connecting to all exchanges, various
kinds of interface units and IP stations in the system via the PC's browser*. If an exchange, interface unit or
IP station is not within range for the PC to administrate broadcast communications, use another PC to enable
communications with all exchanges, various kinds of interface units and IP stations in the system.
* Recommended Windows browser: Internet Explorer 6/Internet Explorer 7/Internet Explorer 8
Notes
• Not all settings can be performed via the browser. After updating the network settings, add the exchange or
various kinds of interface units manually using a PC installed with the N-8000 Software, then perform the
required settings. (refer to p. 4-3 and p. 5-19.)
• In the factory settings, the same IP address may be duplicated or the PC and the exchange, interface unit
or IP station may not be set to the same network. When using the browser to perform network settings,
either connect only one the exchange, interface unit or IP station within the same network or disconnect the
equipment and the PC to be set from the network, and connect them directly using an Ethernet crossing
cable.
• CAUTION: If the power supply is shut off during setting change, this may cause a system failure.
• Updated settings become valid only after the equipment is restarted. Be sure to restart the equipment if
settings are changed. Conversations and paging currently in progress will be temporarily interrupted while
the equipment restarts.
2. Menu Items
Menu
Network Setting (refer to p. 6-5)
Changes the IP address, subnet mask, and
default gateway of the exchange, interface
unit or IP station connected to the PC.
Operation Status (refer to p. 6-6)
Displays usage conditions of speech links,
lines, contacts, call-in, etc.
Line Status (refer to p. 6-26)
This setting is applicable to the exchange
andSub-station interface unit only.
Displays the line status.
Network Status (refer to p. 6-31)
Displays the connection status for all exchanges,
various kinds of interface units and IP stations
within the system.
Operation Log (refer to p. 6-32)
Displays the exchange, interface unit or IP station
operation logs.
Stream Log (refer to p. 6-34)
Displays a log of the IP network’s audio
communications.
System Management (refer to p. 6-37)
Used to change passwords and handle uploads
and downloads of settings files.
Note
This System Management menu is used to
maintain the exchanges, various kinds of interface
units, or IP stations for which system and function
settings have been completed by using the
supplied N-8000 Setting Software.
6-2
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
3. Displaying the Menu Screen
Note
Perform the PC's network setting in advance to allow the PC to communicate with all exchanges, various kinds
of interface units and IP stations in the system.
The user authentication screen will not be displayed unless the PC's network setting completed.
Step 1. Start the browser and enter the URL.
• All exchanges, various kinds of interface units or IP stations in the system are shipped from the
factory with the IP address set to "192.168.1.1" and the Web server port number set to "80." When the
Web server port number is "80," the port number description after the colon (:) can be omitted.
URL
http://IP address:Web server port number/index-e.htm
Example
http://192.168.1.1/index-e.htm
The user authentication screen appears.
Notes
• The screen below is an example for the N-8000EX.
• This screen will look slightly different depending on the browser being used.
Step 2. Enter the user name (case-sensitive) and the password, then press the "OK" button.
Enter the user name programmed to the exchange, interface unit or IP station.
The system name is factory-preset to "N-8000" and the password to "guest." Refer to p. 6-39 for
information on how to change the system name and password.
6-3
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
The setting menu screen is displayed once you have entered the correct user name and the password.
The screen below is an example for the N-8000EX.
Note
Use the menu located on the left of the screen to display each setting screen. These screens will not be
displayed properly using the browser's "Back" or "Forward" buttons.
6-4
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
4. Network Setting
Click "Network Setting" on the menu on the left of the screen.
The screen below is an example for the N-8000EX.
(1) IP Address
Enter the IP address of the exchange, interface unit or IP station.
(factory-preset: 192.168.1.1)
(2) Subnet Mask
Set the subnet mask. (factory-preset: 255.255.255.0)
(3) Default Gateway
Set this gateway if using equipment outside the assigned subnet. (factory-preset: 0.0.0.0)
(4) Web server Port No.
Enter the Web server port No.
The valid range is from 1 to 65535. (factory-preset: 80)
(5) Unit Name
Enter the name of equipment up to 8 characters long.
6-5
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
(6) Save button
Write set data into the settings file in the equipment.
Notes
• The status indicator located on the equipment remains lit during the write process. Do not switch off or
restart the power or remove the LAN cable while the light is on.
• Changed network settings are not immediately updated, and the new settings take effect only after the
exchange, interface unit or IP station has been restarted. Restart the exchange, interface unit or IP station
by pressing the restart button that appears at the upper right of the screen whenever settings have been
changed.
5. OPERATION Status Display
Click Operation Status on the menu on the left side of the screen.
5.1. N-8000EX/8010EX
The screen below is an example for the N-8000EX.
Only when the system is set to
"Selective Response" mode
6-6
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
[Operation buttons]
(1) Refresh
Updates status data for speech path, line, and call-in*.
* Call-in status refers to one station being called by others when the N-8000 system's call response mode
is set to "Selective Response."
(2)Line No. and Terminal No. buttons
Used to display line numbers or station numbers for each station.
[Link status]
Displays the exchange’s current link status. Pressing the Update button updates this data.
(1)Link No.
Speech path numbers.
(2) Calling Station
Displays the number of the calling station.
(3) Called Station
Displays the number of the called station.
(4) Station on hold
Displays the number of the station on hold.
(5) Status
Displays the operating status of the speech path.
[Call-in status]
Displays the Call-in status currently being received by the exchange.
(1) Terminal No.
Displays the connected station number.
(2) Call-in (Only when the system is set to "Selective Response" mode)
Displays all the station numbers making calls to each station connected to the exchange.
Emergency calls are displayed in red.
Note
The call-in status is not displayed in systems set for sequential-answer priority.
6-7
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
5.2. N-8000RS/8010RS
The screen below is an example for the N-8000RS.
Note
Only 1 link is displayed in the N-8010RS.
[Operation buttons]
(1) Refresh
Updates status data for speech path and line.
(2)Line No. and Terminal No. buttons
Used to display line numbers or station numbers for each station.
[Link status]
Displays the Sub station interface unit’s current link status. Pressing the Refresh button updates this data.
(1)Link No.
Speech path numbers.
6-8
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
(2) Calling Station
Displays the number of the calling station.
(3) Called Station
Displays the number of the called station.
(4) Station on hold
Displays the number of the station on hold.
(5) Status
Displays the operating status of the speech path.
5.3. N-8400RS
Only when the system is set to
"Selective Response" mode
6-9
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
[Operation buttons]
(1) Refresh
Updates status data for speech path, line, and call-in*.
* Call-in status refers to one station being called by others when the N-8000 system's call response mode
is set to "Selective Response."
(2) Terminal No. and Line No. buttons
Used to display line numbers or station numbers for each station.
[Link status]
Displays the N-8400RS's current link status. Pressing the Refresh button updates this data.
(1)Link No.
Speech path numbers.
(2) Calling Station
Displays the number of the calling station.
(3) Called Station
Displays the number of the called station.
(4) Station on hold
Displays the number of the station on hold.
(5) Status
Displays the operating status of the speech path.
[Call-in status]
Displays the Call-in status currently being received by the N-8400RS.
(1) Terminal No.
Displays the connected station number.
(2) Call-in (Only when the system is set to "Selective Response" mode)
Displays all the station numbers making calls to each station connected to the N-8400RS.
Emergency calls are displayed in red.
Note
The call-in status is not displayed in systems set for sequential-answer priority.
6-10
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
5.4. N-8000MI
[Operation buttons]
(1) Refresh
Updates status data for speech path, line, and contact.
(2) Terminal No. and Line No. buttons
Used to display line numbers or station numbers for each station.
[Link status]
Displays the Multi interface unit's current link status. Pressing the Refresh button updates data.
(1)Link No.
Speech path numbers.
(2) Calling Station
Displays the number of the calling station.
(3) Called Station
Displays the number of the called station.
6-11
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
(4) Station on hold
Displays the number of the station on hold.
(5) Status
Displays the operating status of the speech path.
[Contact]
Displays the Multi interface unit's current contact status. Pressing the Refresh button updates data.
(1) Contact No.
Multi interface unit's contact input and output terminal numbers.
(2) Input
Current status of the contact input terminal is displayed.
Indicator abbreviations are as follows:
ON: Make, OFF: Break
(3) Output
Current status of the contact output terminal is displayed.
Indicator abbreviations are as follows:
ON: Make, OFF: Break
6-12
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
5.5. N-8000DI
[Operation buttons]
(1) Refresh
Updates status data for contact.
[Contact]
Displays the Direct select unit’s current contact status. Pressing the Refresh button updates data.
(1) Contact No.
Direct select unit’s contact input and output terminal numbers.
(2) Input
Current status of the contact input terminal is displayed.
Indicator abbreviations are as follows:
ON: Make, OFF: Break
(3) Output
Current status of the contact output terminal is displayed.
Indicator abbreviations are as follows:
ON: Make, OFF: Break
6-13
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
5.6. N-8000AF
[Operation buttons]
(1) Refresh
Updates status data for speech path, line, and contact.
(2) Terminal No. and Line No. buttons
Used to display line numbers or station numbers for each station.
[Link status]
Displays the Audio interface unit’s current link status. Pressing the Update button updates this data.
(1) Calling Station
Displays the number of the calling station.
(2) Called Station
Displays the number of the called station.
(3) Station on hold
Displays the number of the station on hold.
6-14
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
(4) Status
Displays the operating status of the speech path.
[Contact]
Displays the Audio interface unit’s current contact status. Pressing the Refresh button updates data.
(1) Contact No.
Audio interface unit’s contact input and output terminal numbers.
(2) Input
Current status of the contact input terminal is displayed.
Indicator abbreviations are as follows:
ON: Make, OFF: Break
(3) Output
Current status of the contact output terminal is displayed.
Indicator abbreviations are as follows:
ON: Make, OFF: Break
5.7. N-8000CO
6-15
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
[Operation buttons]
(1) Refresh
Updates status data for speech path and line.
(2) Terminal No. and Line No. buttons
Used to display line numbers or station numbers for each station.
[Link status]
Displays the C/O interface unit’s current link status. Pressing the Refresh button updates this data.
(1) Calling Station
Displays the number of the calling station.
(2) Called Station
Displays the number of the called station.
(3) Station on hold
Displays the number of the station on hold.
(4) Status
Displays the operating status of the speech path.
6-16
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
5.8. N-8000AL
Only when the system is set to
"Selective Response" mode
[Operation buttons]
(1) Refresh
Updates status data for speech path, line, and call-in*.
* Call-in status refers to one station being called by others when the N-8000 system's call response mode
is set to "Selective Response."
(2)Line No. and Terminal No. buttons
Used to display line numbers or station numbers for each station.
[Link status]
Displays the Telephone interface unit’s current link status. Pressing the Refresh button updates this data.
(1) Calling Station
Displays the number of the calling station.
(2) Called Station
Displays the number of the called station.
6-17
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
(3) Station on hold
Displays the number of the station on hold.
(4) Status
Displays the operating status of the speech path.
(5)Automatic transfer
Displays the station number to which calls to the Telephone interface unit are to be automatically transferred.
(6)Level
Displays sound volume set for the Telephone interface unit’s.
Indicator abbreviations are as follows:
MIC: Microphone sensitivity
SP:
Speaker output volume
[Call-in status]
Displays the Call-in status currently being received by the Telephone interface unit.
(1) Terminal No.
Displays the connected station number.
(2) Call-in (Only when the system is set to "Selective Response" mode)
Displays all the station numbers making calls to the Telephone interface unit.
Emergency calls are displayed in red.
Note
The call-in status is not displayed in systems set for sequential-answer priority.
6-18
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
5.9. N-8500MS/8510MS
The screen below is an example for the N-8500MS.
Only when the system is set to
"Selective Response" mode
[Operation buttons]
(1) Refresh
Updates status data for speech path, line, and call-in*.
* Call-in status refers to one station being called by others when the N-8000 system's call response mode
is set to "Selective Response."
(2) Terminal No. and Line No. buttons
Used to display line number or station number.
[Operation status]
Displays the IP master station's current status of speech path and line. Pressing the Refresh button updates
data.
(1) Calling Station
Displays the number of the calling station.
(2) Called Station
Displays the number of the called station.
6-19
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
(3) Station on hold
Displays the number of the station on hold.
(4) Status
Displays the operating status of the speech path.
(5) Call receiving
Displays the call tone mode of the IP master station.
(6)Automatic transfer
Displays the station number to which calls to the IP master station are to be automatically transferred.
(7)Level
Displays sound volume set for the IP master station. Indicator abbreviations are as follows:
MIC: Microphone sensitivity
SP:
Speaker output volume
Signal: Call tone volume
[Call-in status]
Displays the call-in status currently being received by the IP master station.
(1) Terminal No.
Displays the connected station number.
(2) Call-in (Only when the system is set to "Selective Response" mode)
Displays all the station numbers making calls to the IP master station.
Emergency calls are displayed in red.
Note
The call-in status is not displayed in systems set for sequential-answer priority.
6-20
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
5.10. N-8600MS
Only when the system is set to
"Selective Response" mode
[Operation buttons]
(1) Refresh
Updates status data for speech path, line, and call-in*.
* Call-in status refers to one station being called by others when the N-8000 system's call response mode
is set to "Selective Response."
(2) Terminal No. and Line No. buttons
Used to display line number or station number.
[Operation status]
Displays the IP master station's current status of speech path and line. Pressing the Refresh button updates
data.
(1) Calling Station
Displays the number of the calling station.
(2) Called Station
Displays the number of the called station.
6-21
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
(3) Station on hold
Displays the number of the station on hold.
(4) Status
Displays the operating status of the speech path.
(5) Call receiving
Displays the call tone mode of the IP master station.
(6)Automatic transfer
Displays the station number to which calls to the IP master station are to be automatically transferred.
(7)Level
Displays sound volume set for the IP master station. Indicator abbreviations are as follows:
MIC: Microphone sensitivity
SP:
Speaker output volume
Signal: Call tone volume
[Call-in status]
Displays the call-in status currently being received by the IP master station.
(1) Terminal No.
Displays the IP master station number.
(2) Call-in (Only when the system is set to "Selective Response" mode)
Displays all the station numbers making calls to the IP master station.
Emergency calls are displayed in red.
Note
The call-in status is not displayed in systems set for sequential-answer priority.
6-22
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
5.11. N-8540DS
[Operation buttons]
(1) Refresh
Updates status data for speech path, line, and contact.
(2) Terminal No. and Line No. buttons
Used to display line number or station number.
[Operation status]
Displays the IP door station's current status of speech path and line. Pressing the Refresh button updates data.
(1) Calling Station
Displays the number of the calling station.
(2) Called Station
Displays the number of the called station.
(3) Station on hold
Displays the number of the station on hold.
(4) Status
Displays the operating status of the speech path.
(5)Level
Displays sound volume set for the IP door station. Indicator abbreviations are as follows:
MIC: Microphone sensitivity
SP:
Speaker output volume
Signal: Call tone volume
6-23
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
5.12. N-8640DS/8650DS
The screen below is an example for the N-8640DS.
[Operation buttons]
(1) Refresh
Updates status data for speech path, line, and contact.
(2) Terminal No. and Line No. buttons
Used to display line number or station number.
[Operation status]
Displays the IP door station's current status of speech path and line. Pressing the Refresh button updates data.
(1) Calling Station
Displays the number of the calling station.
(2) Called Station
Displays the number of the called station.
6-24
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
(3) Station on hold
Displays the number of the station on hold.
(4) Status
Displays the operating status of the speech path.
(5)Level
Displays sound volume set for the IP door station. Indicator abbreviations are as follows:
MIC: Microphone sensitivity
SP:
Speaker output volume
Signal: Call tone volume
[Contact]
Displays the IP door station's current contact status. Pressing the Refresh button updates data.
(1) Contact No.
IP door station's contact input and output terminal numbers.
(2) Input
Current status of the contact input terminal is displayed.
Indicator abbreviations are as follows:
ON: Make, OFF: Break
Note
The Contact input is assigned to the Contact No. 1 only.
The "–" indications are displayed for Contact Nos. 2 to 5.
(3) Output
Current status of the contact output terminal is displayed.
Indicator abbreviations are as follows:
ON: make, OFF: break
6-25
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
6. Line
‌
Status Indication (only for Exchange and Sub-station interface unit)
6.1. N-8000EX/8010EX
Click "Line Status" on the menu on the left side of the screen.
Displays information on line status and connected stations.
The screen below is an example for the N-8000EX.
[Operation buttons]
(1) Refresh
Updates status data for line, and station to the latest data.
[Line Status]
Displays the operation statuses of the stations currently connected to the exchange.
For the idle line, the symbols of "–" are displayed in all columns.
(1) No.
Line numbers
(2) Model No.
Displays the model number of the connected station.
6-26
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
(3) Status
Displays line status.
(4) Call receiving
Displays the call tone mode of the connected station.
(5)Automatic transfer
Displays the station number to which calls to the connected station are to be automatically transferred.
(6)Level
Displays sound volume set for the connected station. "Noise" is a measured ambient noise value. Indicator
abbreviations are as follows:
MIC: Microphone sensitivity
SP:
Speaker output volume
Signal: Call tone volume
Noise: Noise level
(7) Ver.
Indicates the connected station's firmware version number.
6-27
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
6.2. N-8000RS/8010RS
Click "Line Status" on the menu on the left side of the screen.
Displays information on line status and set stations.
The screen below is an example for the N-8000RS.
[Operation buttons]
(1) Refresh
Updates status data for line and set station to the latest data.
Note
For the N-8000RS and N-8010RS interface units, the current line connection status cannot be displayed.
[Line Status]
Displays the setting contents of all the stations set to the Sub-station interface unit.
The symbols "–" displayed in a row indicate that nothing is set for the line.
(1) No.
Line numbers
(2) Model No.
Displays the model number of the set station.
(3) Call receiving
Displays the call tone mode of the set station.
6-28
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
(4)Level
Displays sound volume set for the Sub station interface unit. Indicator abbreviations are as follows:
MIC: Microphone sensitivity
SP:
Speaker output volume
Signal: Call tone volume
6.3. N-8400RS
Click "Line Status" on the menu on the left side of the screen.
Displays information on line status and connected stations.
[Operation buttons]
(1) Refresh
Updates status data for line and station to the latest data.
6-29
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
[Line Status]
Displays the setting contents of all the stations connected to the N-8400RS.
The symbols "–" displayed in a row indicate that no connection is made to the line.
(1) No.
Line numbers
(2) Model No.
Displays the model number of the connected station.
(3) Status
Displays line status.
(4) Call receiving
Displays the call tone mode of the connected station.
(5)Automatic transfer
Displays the number of station to be automatically transferred to from the connected station.
(6)Level
Displays sound volume set for the connected station. Indicator abbreviations are as follows:
MIC: Microphone sensitivity
SP:
Speaker output volume
Signal: Call tone volume
6-30
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
7. Network Status Indication
Click "Network Status" on the menu on the left side of the screen.
Connections between all exchanges, various kinds of interface units and IP stations and networks within the
system can be confirmed. Connection status data is updated every two seconds, and if network connections
are not achieved within ten seconds, the equipment is assumed to not be connected to the network.
The screen below is an example for the N-8000EX.
[Operation buttons]
(1) Start
Starts network connection verification.
(2)Abort
Aborts the network connection verification in progress.
6-31
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
[Network status setting]
(1) No.
Equipment number of the exchange, various kinds of interface units or IP station.
(2) IP Address
IP address of the exchange, various kinds of interface units or IP station.
(3) Status
"OK" is displayed when the unit connection is established.
"NG" is displayed when the unit connection is not established.
The symbol of "–" is displayed during connection confirmation.
8. Operation Log
Click "Operation Log" on the menu on the left side of the screen.
The operation log displays the equipment's operating records. Up to 1,000 events can be stored.
The screen below is an example for the N-8000EX.
6-32
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
[Operation buttons]
(1)Log Save button
Saves operation logs to a PC.
(2)Latest button
Updates operation logs.
(3)Prev. Page button
Returns the display to the previous page.
(4) Next Page button
Advances the display to the next page.
(5) Number Indication button
Switches the station display in the line column between "station number" and "line number." The display
alternates between station and line numbers whenever this button is pressed.
(6) Detail Indication button
Adds any relevant error logs to the operation log display. The display alternates between operation logs and
operation logs containing error logs each time this button is pressed.
[Log items]
(1) Time
Indicates the time that the event occurred.
(2) Category
Indicates the type of log.
Exchange Processing: Line control data
System:
System data
Remote:
Control from PC
(3) Contents
Indicates event contents. Errors are indicated in red.
(4)Line 1, Line 2 and Line 3
Indicates the line on which an event occurred. Station and IP address numbers are displayed.
Note
If the indication "Firmware failed. Please contact our sales office." is displayed, the system is suffering a
problem and could fail. In such cases, please contact TOA immediately.
6-33
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
9. Stream Log
Click "Stream Log" on the menu on the left side of the screen.
The stream log is a history of voice communications (both conversations and paging) carried over the IP
network. Displays can be switched between current and past histories. Up to 1,000 events can be stored.
[Current stream screen]
The screen below is an example for the N-8000EX.
[Operation buttons]
(1)Log Save button
Saves stream logs to a PC.
(2) Current button and Past button
The Current button displays the current stream log; the Past button displays finished stream logs.
[Current stream operation buttons]
(1) Refresh button
Updates stream logs.
6-34
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
[Past stream screen]
The screen below is an example for the N-8000EX.
[Past stream operation buttons]
(1) Refresh
Displays the last sixteen finished streams.
(2)Prev. Page button
Returns the display to the previous page.
(3) Next Page button
Advances the display to the next page.
[Log items] (common to current and past stream logs)
(1) Time
Time the stream began.
(2) Duration
Duration of the communication stream.
(3) Source
IP address of the exchange the station is connected to.
6-35
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
(4)Link
Speech path number.
(5) Direction
Sending or receiving.
(6)Fs
Sampling frequency, either 8 kHz or 16 kHz.
(7) Delay
Time between voice input and output.
(8)Packets
Number of packets transmitted or successfully received.
(9)Loss
Number of packets lost due to network failures, which is counted at the receiving end only.
(10) Silence
When voice output is reproduced as silence due to packet loss or late packet arrival (due to high network
traffic), the number of packets in which silence data is embedded is counted at the receiving end.
6-36
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
10. System MANAGEMENT
Click "System Management" on the menu on the left side of the screen.
The screen below is an example for the N-8000EX.
[User Data]
The system name and password can be changed (refer to p. 6-39).
(1) System Name
Displays the user name entered on the user authentication screen when the browser was started (refer to
p. 6-3).
(2) New Password
Enter a new password.
(3) New Password (verification)
Enter the same password again for verification.
6-37
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
(4) User Data Change button
Pressing this button registers the newly changed user data.
[System Management Utility]
(1) Upload button
Used to write backed-up settings files into the exchange, interface unit or IP station connected to the PC.
(refer to p. 6-39).
(2) Browse button
A file selection dialog appears.
(3) Download button
Saves the equipment's settings data (files) to the PC (refer to p. 6-40).
(4) Delete All Settings button
Deletes all settings and returns the exchange to its initial factory settings shown below.
IP address:
192.168.1.1
System name: N-8000
Password:
guest
Confirm other settings online using the N-8000 software.
(5)Firmware Update button
Updates firmware (refer to p. 6-41).
Use the latest version of firmware, which is released on the following our web site.
Tips
• Download the latest version of firmware from our site http://www.toa-products.com/international/.
• The current version is displayed above the Firmware Update button.
(6) Clock retrieve button
Pressing this button displays the date and time of the connected PC's clock (refer to p. 6-42).
(7) Setting button
Used to set the equipment's clock (refer to p. 6-42).
(8) Restart button
Restarts the equipment.
Note
Never restart the equipment while changing settings files or performing a firmware update.
6-38
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
10.1. Changing System Names and Passwords
When adding the exchange, interface unit or IP station, or initializing the exchange, interface unit or IP station
settings, the system name and password can be changed remotely using the browser even from locations
where the system settings PC is not available.
• Set the same system name and password as previously set using the N-8000 software. The N-8000 software
cannot be used for centralized administration if different passwords have been used within the same system.
Step 1. Enter a new system name in "System Name box."
Enter a new system name up to fifteen characters long.
This name is case-sensitive.
The following symbols cannot be used.
: ; / \ | , * ? " < >
Step 2. Enter a new password in the "New Password" box.
Enter a new password up to fifteen characters long.
This password is case-sensitive.
The following symbols cannot be used.
: ; / \ | , * ? " < >
Step 3. Enter a new password that has been entered in step 2 in "New Password (verification)" box for
verification.
Step 4. Press User Data Change button.
Note
The status indicator located on the exchange, interface unit or IP station remains lit during update.
Do not switch off or restart the power or remove the LAN cable.
10.2. Uploading Setting File
Step 1. Press "Browse..." button to display "File Selection" dialog.
Step 2. Select "Backup file (extension cfg)", then press "Open" button.
Step 3. Press "Upload" button.
Note
The status indicator located on the exchange, interface unit or IP station remains lit during update.
Do not switch off or restart the power or remove the LAN cable.
6-39
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
10.3. Downloading Setting File
Step 1. Press "Download" button to display "File Download" dialog.
Step 2. Press "Save" button to display the dialog.
Step 3. Select saving location, then enter file name.
Tip
The default name is [IP address] .cfg.
Step 4. Select "All Files" in the file type box, then press "Save" button.
6-40
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
10.4. Updating Firmware
Note
Updating the firmware may erase the set data (the settings reverts to the factory default settings) depending on
the updated contents.
Before update, be sure to save the current setting file to the PC first.
After update completion, perform network settings, and change the system name and password, then upload
the stored setting file using the N-8000 Software program. Review the settings and correct them if changed.
Step 1. Press "Browse..." button to display "Choose file" dialog.
Step 2. Select the firmware (extension bin), then press "Open" button.
Use the latest version of firmware, which is released on the following our web site.
Tips
• Download the latest version of firmware from our products data site
http://www.toa-products.com/international/.
• The current firmware version can be confirmed on the browser's system management screen.
Step 3. Press "Firmware update" button to start firmware updating.
Note
The status indicator located on the exchange, interface unit or IP station remains lit during update.
Do not switch off or restart the power or remove the LAN cable.
6-41
Chapter 6 SYSTEM SETTINGS USING THE BROWSER
10.5. Clock Settings
If there is a time difference between the exchange, interface unit or IP station system connected to the system,
each exchange's time can be adjusted individually. When the red indication "Clock not set." is displayed in the
"Clock setting" box, this indicates that the clock has never been set in the past or the power has long been
turned off. In such cases, perform clock settings.
Clock adjustment using the Clock Retrieve button
The date and time of the exchange, interface unit or IP station can be adjusted to those of the PC.
Step 1. Press "Clock retrieve" button.
Step 2. Press "Setting" button.
Clock adjustment using a PC
Permits the time to be entered. It is impossible to change the date with this method.
Step 1. Move the cursor to the "hours" and "minutes" cells and enter the time in 24-hour formats.
Step 2. Press "Setting" button.
6-42
Chapter 7
MULTIFUNCTIONAL STATION
MENU SCREEN OPERATION
(N-8000MS/8500MS/8600MS only)
This chapter describes the settings and displays available using the
menu screen of the Multi-Functional Station and IP Multi-Functional
Station.
Chapter 7 MULTIFUNCTIONAL STATION MENU SCREEN OPERATION (N-8000MS/8500MS/8600MS only)
1. Keys Used for Menu Screen Operation
The following keys are used to operate the menu screen of the N-8000MS Multifunctional Master Station and
the N-8500MS/8600MS IP Multifunctional Master Station.
Liquid crystal display: Displays the menu screen.
Selection key: Used for item selection and input
value set.
Menu key: Used for changing either setting or
normal modes.
Arrow keys: Used for moving the arrow (cursor).
Dial keys: Used to enter figures.
Clear key: Used to delete a last single character
shown on the display.
N-8000MS
This figure represents the N-8000MS.
7-2
Chapter 7 MULTIFUNCTIONAL STATION MENU SCREEN OPERATION (N-8000MS/8500MS/8600MS only)
2. Menu Items
1. Auto-dialing programming (refer to p. 2-11) Programs the contents into the Auto Dial key.
2. Line monitor (refer to p. 7-4)
Monitors the Line connection status of the Exchange.
3. Updating log file (refer to p. 7-5)
Updates the operation log files of the Exchange or
N-8500MS/8600MS.
4. Volume (refer to p. 7-5)
Sound volume set for the N-8500MS/8600MS can be
confirmed. (N-8500MS/8600MS only)
5. LCD backlight (refer to p. 7-6)
Sets ON/OFF of the N-8600MS’s LCD backlight.
(N-8600MS only)
0. Maintenance (refer to p. 7-7)
1. Network settings (refer to p. 7-8)
Changes the IP address, subnet mask, or default gateway
of the Exchange or N-8500MS/8600MS.
2. The line attribute setting (refer to p. 7-9)
Sets the station number of the station to be connected to
the Exchange and IP station.
3. Clock settings (refer to p. 7-10)
Sets the system clock.
4. System reset (refer to p. 7-11)
Restarts the system.
When network settings have been changed, it is necessary
to restart the Exchange or N-8500MS/8600MS.
7-3
Chapter 7 MULTIFUNCTIONAL STATION MENU SCREEN OPERATION (N-8000MS/8500MS/8600MS only)
3. Monitoring Line Status
Causes the station's LCD to display the connection status for all sixteen lines associated with the exchange to
which the N-8000MS is connected.
The N-8500MS/8600MS does not have the monitoring function.
Step 1. Press the Menu key to place the display in setting
mode.
1 : Au t o - d i a l i ng
2 : L i n e mo n i t o r
Step 2. Use the down arrow key or the [2] key to move the
cursor to "2: Line monitor."
1 : Au t o - d i a l i ng
2 : L i n e mo n i t o r
Step 3. Press the Select key to display the connection status
for all sixteen lines. Lines are listed in order from left to
right as Line 1, Line 2, and so on up to Line 16.
2 : L i n e mo n i t o r
OOOXOOOX XOOF FOOO
Display symbol
Contents
Details
O
Connected
(Normal)
Station is connected to the line and communications are being
performed correctly between the exchange and station.
X
Unconnected
F
Connected
(Abnormal)
Station is not connected to the line or a wire is broken.
Station is connected to the line, but communications are not
being performed correctly.
"No Information" is displayed on the N-8500MS/
8600MS's LCD.
Step 4. Press the Menu key to return the display to its normal
standby mode.
1 0 : 0 8 AM
2000
7-4
Chapter 7 MULTIFUNCTIONAL STATION MENU SCREEN OPERATION (N-8000MS/8500MS/8600MS only)
4. Updating Log Files
Update the file that stores the operation logs for the exchange or N-8500MS/8600MS*.
Use this function when some malfunction has made it impossible to view the operation log via a PC (refer to p.
6-32, Browser Operation Log Display). Follow the procedures below to update the log file at the station, then
restart the exchange or N-8500MS/8600MS.
* Exchange when the station performing update is N-8000MS, and the N-8500MS/8600MS itself when it is the
N-8500MS/8600MS.
Step 1. Press the Menu key to place the display in setting mode.
Step 2. Use the down arrow key or the [3] key to move the cursor
to "3: Log file."
Step 3. Press the Select key to update the log file of the exchange
to which the station is connected or N-8500MS/8600MS.
Note
The status indicator located on the exchange's front
panel or N-8500MS/8600MS remains lit during the
update process. Do not restart the system or turn off the
power while this light is on.
Step 4. Press the Menu key to return the display to its normal
standby mode.
1 : Au t o - d i a l i ng
2 : L i n e mo n i t o r
2 : L i n e mo n i t o r
3 :Log f i l e
3 :Log f i l e
Upda t ed
1 0 : 0 8 AM
2000
5. CONFIRMING THE SET SOUND VOLUME (N-8500MS/8600MS only)
The microphone sensitivity and speaker output volume set for the N-8500MS/8600MS can be confirmed.
Step 1. Press the Menu key to place the display in setting
mode.
1 : Au t o - d i a l i ng
2 : L i n e mo n i t o r
Step 2. Use the down arrow key or the [4] key to move the
cursor to "4: Volume."
3 :Log f i l e
4 : V o l ume
Step 3. Press the Select key.
Both set levels for microphone sensitivity (MIC) and
speaker output (SP) are displayed.
The MIC level is indicated in 3 steps from 1 (min.) to
3 (max.), and the SP level in 5 steps from 1 (min.) to 5
(max.).
Step 4. Press the Menu key to return the display to its normal
standby mode.
4 : V o l ume
MI C : 2 SP : 3
1 0 : 0 8 AM
2000
7-5
Chapter 7 MULTIFUNCTIONAL STATION MENU SCREEN OPERATION (N-8000MS/8500MS/8600MS only)
6. SETTING THE LCD BACKLIGHT (N-8600MS only)
ON/OFF of the N-8600MS’s LCD backlight can be set.
Step 1. Press the Menu key to place the display in setting
mode.
1 : Au t o - d i a l i ng
2 : L i n e mo n i t o r
Step 2. Use the down arrow key or the [5] key to move the
cursor to "5: LCD BACKLIGHT."
4 : V o l ume
5 : LCD BACKL I GHT
Step 3. Press the Select key.
The current setting is indicated with the cursor.
5 : LCD BACKL I GHT
ON OF F AUTO
Step 4. Press the left or right arrow key to move the cursor to
"ON," "OFF," or "AUTO."
Shown below are the setting contents.
ON:
Always ON (Default factory setting)
OFF: Always OFF
AUTO:OFF in standby mode, ON during use, OFF 5
seconds after being placed in standby mode
after use.
5 : LCD BACKL I GHT
ON OF F AUTO
Step 5. Press the Select key.
The setting changes to the one indicated with the
cursor.
5 : LCD BACKL I GHT
ON OF F AUTO
Step 6. Press the Menu key to return the display to its normal
standby mode.
1 0 : 0 8 AM
2000
7-6
Chapter 7 MULTIFUNCTIONAL STATION MENU SCREEN OPERATION (N-8000MS/8500MS/8600MS only)
7. System Settings
Only a portion of system setting items can be set at the Multifunctional Station.
7.1. Entering Maintenance Screen
Step 1. Press the Menu key to place the display in setting
mode.
1 : Au t o - d i a l i ng
2 : L i n e mo n i t o r
Step 2. Use the up or down arrow keys or the [0] key to move
the cursor to "0: Maintenance."
3 :Log f i l e
0 :Ma i n t enanc e
Step 3. Press the Select key to display the password entry
screen.
Step 4. Enter 4-digit-password by pressing dial keys, then
press the Select key.
The default factory setting is 0000. It can be changed
using the N-8000 Setting Software. (Refer to p. 5-27.)
After password has been entered correctly, system
setting screen is displayed.
Pa s swo r d
[Example]
1
2
3
4
1 : Ne t wo r k s e t
2 : L i neAt t r i bu t e
7-7
Chapter 7 MULTIFUNCTIONAL STATION MENU SCREEN OPERATION (N-8000MS/8500MS/8600MS only)
7.2. Network Settings
It is possible to change the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway of the exchange or N-8500MS/8600MS*.
* Exchange when the station performing setting is N-8000MS, and the N-8500MS/8600MS itself when it is the
N-8500MS/8600MS.
Step 1. Using the up or down arrow keys or the [1] key on the
maintenance screen, move the cursor to "1: Network
set."
1 : Ne t wo r k s e t
2 : L i neAt t r i bu t e
Step 2. Press the Select key to display the IP address of the
exchange to which the station is connected or of the
N-8500MS/8600MS.
I P Add r ess
192 . 168 . 001 . 128
Step 3. Using the dial keys, enter the desired IP address,
then press the Select key. When not changing the IP
address, press the Select key only.
The subnet mask of the exchange or
N-8500MS/8600MS is displayed.
•The periods (.) within the IP address need not be
entered. Enter numerals consecutively.
•If a number separated by a period is a single or
double digit number, add the prefix [0] or [00] to
make them 3-digit numbers. For example, enter the
IP address "192.168.5.64" as "192168005064."
X
Su b n e t ma s k
255 . 255 . 255 . 000
Step 4. Using the dial keys, enter the desired subnet mask,
then press the Select key. When not changing the
subnet mask, press the Select key only.
The default gateway of the exchange or N-8500MS
/8600MS is displayed.
Note
For entering figures, follow the same process as Step
3.
X
Step 5. Using the dial keys, enter the desired default gateway,
then press the Select key. When not changing the
default gateway, press the Select key only.
The screen reverts to the system setting item selection
display, completing the change in network settings.
Note
For entering figures, follow the same process as Step
3.
X
Step 6. Press the Menu key to return the display to its normal
standby mode.
I P Add r ess
192 . 168 . 005 . 064
Su b n e t ma s k
255 . 255 . 000 . 000
De f au l t ga t eway
192 . 168 . 001 . 254
Da f au l t ga t eway
192 . 168 . 254 . 001
1 : Ne t wo r k s e t
2 : L i neAt t r i bu t e
1 0 : 0 8 AM
2000
Note
Network settings are not immediately updated, but must be made effective by restarting the exchange or
N-8500MS/8600MS.
To restart the exchange, press the Reset key located on the front panel of the exchange or use the exchange
reset screen (refer to p. 7-11).
To restart the N-8500MS/8600MS, use the exchange reset screen (refer to p. 7-11).
7-8
Chapter 7 MULTIFUNCTIONAL STATION MENU SCREEN OPERATION (N-8000MS/8500MS/8600MS only)
7.3. Station Number Settings
It is possible to set the station number for all stations and IP stations.
Step 1. Using the up or down arrow keys or the [2] key on
the maintenance screen, move the cursor to "2: Line
Attribute."
1 : Ne t wo r k s e t
2 : L i neAt t r i bu t e
Step 2. Press the Select key to display the line attribute
setting screen.
L i ne a t t r i bu t e
ExchangeNo . :
Step 3. Enter the equipment number (001 to 192) of the
Exchange or IP station to be set with the dial keys
(3-digit number), then press the Select key.
X
L i ne a t t r i bu t e
ExchangeNo . : 024
Step 4. Enter the line number (01 – 16) of the line to be set
with the dial keys (2-digit number), then press the
Select key.
For IP stations, select the line number 01.
X
EX0 2 4 : L I NE0 1
N o p r o g r a mm i n g
Step 5. Use the arrow keys or dial key to select the type of
station connected to the designated line, then press
the Select key.
The types of stations selectable at this point are as
follows.
Dial key
Indication
Type of stations
EX0 2 4 : L I NE0 1
N o p r o g r a mm i n g
EX0 2 4 : L I NE0 1
Mu l t i f u n c t i o n
Corresponding model
None
0
No programming
1
8000MS
Multifunctional master station,
IP Multifunctional master station
N-8000MS/8500MS
/8600MS
2
8010MS
Standard master station, IP standard
master station, Telephone
N-8010MS/8410MS/8510MS
/8000AL
3
8011MS
Hands-free master station
N-8011MS
4
8020MS
Industrial-use master station
N-8020MS
5
8031MS
Flush-mount master station
N-8031MS/8033MS
6
8050DS
Door station, IP door station,
Substation
N-8050DS/8540DS/8640DS
/8650DS,
RS-140/142/143/144/150/160
/170/180/450/460/470/480
Selecting "No programming" only completes the
registration and reverts the screen back to Step2,
permitting the next Exchange number to be entered
for the line attribute setting.
L i ne a t t r i bu t e
ExchangeNo . :
7-9
Chapter 7 MULTIFUNCTIONAL STATION MENU SCREEN OPERATION (N-8000MS/8500MS/8600MS only)
Step 6. Enter the station number (00-999999) of the
designated line using the dial keys, then press the
Select key.
Only if "8050DS" has been selected, the designated
master station number setting screen appears.
Proceed to Step 7.
When other items are selected, the registration is
completed and the screen reverts to Step2, permitting
the next Exchange number to be entered for the line
attribute setting.
X
Step 7. (Door station, IP door station, and substation only)
Enter the designated master station number (00999999) using the dial keys, then press the Select
key.
The registration is completed and the screen reverts
to Step2, permitting the next Exchange number to be
entered for the line attribute setting.
X
EX0 2 4 : L I NE0 1
8 0 0 0MS 2 0 0 0
L i ne a t t r i bu t e
ExchangeNo . :
EX0 2 4 : L I NE0 1
Ma s t e r No . 2 0 0 5
L i ne a t t r i bu t e
ExchangeNo . :
Step 8. Press the Menu key to return the display to its normal
standby mode.
1 0 : 0 8 AM
2000
7.4. System Clock Settings
The clock of the exchange or N-8500MS/8600MS* can be set as needed. This function is useful if there are
time differences among exchanges connected to the system.
* Exchange when the station performing setting is N-8000MS, and the N-8500MS/8600MS itself when it is the
N-8500MS/8600MS.
Step 1. Using the up or down arrow keys or the [3] key
on the maintenance screen, move the cursor to
"3: Clock set."
2 : L i neAt t r i bu t e
3:Clock set
Step 2. Press the Select key to display the clock setting
screen.
Step 3. Use the dial keys to enter the time to be set for the
exchange or N-8500MS/8600MS in two-digit sets in
the order Hours:Minutes:Seconds.
•Enter the time in 24-hour format.
•Colons (:) need not be entered.
Step 4. Press the Select key to revert the screen to Step 1.
Step 5. Press the Menu key to return the screen to ordinary
standby mode with the updated time displayed.
Clock set
X
Clock set
08:22:00
2 : L i neAt t r i bu t e
3:Clock set
8 : 2 2 AM
2000
7-10
Chapter 7 MULTIFUNCTIONAL STATION MENU SCREEN OPERATION (N-8000MS/8500MS/8600MS only)
7.5. Restarting the Equipment
Restart the exchange or N-8500MS/8600MS* when network settings have been changed.
The exchange can be restarted at the Multifunctional Station even without pressing "Reset" key located on the
exchange's front panel.
* Exchange when the station performing restart is N-8000MS, and the N-8500MS/8600MS itself when it is the
N-8500MS/8600MS.
Note
Before restarting the exchange, ensure that no paging, conversation, or firmware update is in progress.
Step 1. Using the up or down arrow keys or the [4] key on the
maintenance screen, move the cursor to "4:Reset EX."
Step 2. Press the Select key to display verification screen.
Step 3. Pressing the left or right arrow keys, move the cursor to
"Yes."
Step 4. Press the Select key to revert the screen to Step 1, then
the Exchange or N-8500MS/8600MS restarts.
Dialing operations are refused during restarting.
When restart has been completed, the display returns to
its normal standby mode.
3 :Cl ock se t t i ng
4 : Rese t EX
Rese t EX .
Yes No
OK?
Rese t EX .
Yes No
OK?
3 :Cl ock se t t i ng
4 : Rese t EX
8 : 2 2 AM
2000
7-11
Chapter 8
APPENDIX
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
1. FULL DUPLEX AND HALF DUPLEX CONVERSATIONS
1.1. Speech Method
The Packet Intercom system uses 5 types of methods for conversations between stations.
For conditions in which these speech methods are used, refer to the table on p. 8-5.
1.1.1. Full duplex conversation between handset stations
This method is the same as that used for an ordinary
subscribed telephone.
Simultaneous two-way conversations are possible
between both parties.
(Refer to p. 8-5, "Full duplex.")
Full duplex conversation
1.1.2. Full duplex conversation using an echo canceller
An echo canceller realizes simultaneous two-way
conversations between both parties.
(Refer to p. 8-5, "AEC.")
The echo canceller is a circuit to prevent echo or
feedback that possibly occurs when sound from the builtin speaker enters the microphone.
Full duplex conversation
1.1.3. Half duplex conversation using a voice switch
This is one-way conversation from a speaking station to
a listening station.
When a party speaks after the other party's speech has
ended, the speech transmission direction is reversed,
allowing two-way alternate conversations.
Note that speech overlapped during speech will not
change the transmission direction.
(Refer to p. 8-5, "VS.")
One-way conversation
One-way conversation
8-2
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
1.1.4. Full duplex conversation using echo canceller and voice switch
This is a speech method using the echo
canceller (see the previous page) in
combination with the voice switch. In
this method, the echo canceller works
continuously. Actions by way of the
voice switch overlap with those by way
of the echo canceller. The voice switch
works to reduce the other party's voice
level.
A strong action of the voice switch
makes the attenuation level large (when
its level is "0", only the echo canceller
works), while a weak action of the voice
switch makes the attenuation level
small.
The strength of voice switch action
depends on the total set value of the
microphone sensitivity and speaker
output volume at both stations.
As the value is small, the action of voice
switch becomes weak and as the value
is large, the action becomes strong.
Such operations allow the other party's
voice not to be cut, realizing nearly full
duplex conversation between stations.
However, depending on the settings
of microphone sensitivity and speaker
output volume, the other party's voice
may not almost be heard.
(Refer to p. 8-5, "AEC + VS.")
Total set value of the
microphone sensitivity
and speaker output
volume at both stations
[When only the echo canceller works]
(small)
Full duplex conversation
Action of the
voice switch
(weak)
[When actions of the voice switch overlap]
(Large) (Strong)
Notes
• The echo canceller works continuously.
• A smaller white arrow indicating the direction of
voice shows a smaller volume level of voice.
[Setting example]
(Example 1: When the total set value at both stations is “10.”)
Setting at the station
• Microphone sensitivity: 1
• Speaker output volume: 3
Setting at the station
• Microphone sensitivity: 1
• Speaker output volume: 5
Reduced by 4 dB
(Example 2: When the total set value at both stations is “13.”)
Setting at the station
• Microphone sensitivity: 3
• Speaker output volume: 4
Setting at the station
• Microphone sensitivity: 3
• Speaker output volume: 3
Reduced by 12 dB
8-3
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
1.1.5. Half duplex conversation by way of PTT operation
When the PTT key is pressed, this permits
one-way conversation from the key-operated
station. Releasing the PTT key enables oneway conversation from the other party.
When the PTT keys at both stations are
pressed simultaneously, the last key-operated
station takes precedence.
(Refer to p. 8-5, "PTT Conversation.")
One-way conversation
PTT
One-way conversation
8-4
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
1.2. A Difference of Speech Method Depending on Usage Conditions of the Station
Packet Intercom system permits hands-free full duplex conversation. However, operations of an echo canceller
or a voice switch could change depending on the stations to be used, conversation partner, or each station's
usage condition (handset or hands-free conversation), resulting in half duplex conversation.
Effective use of hands-free conversation function requires some consideration of settings and operations.
(Refer to next item.)
Speech methods related to station usage conditions are given in a table below. Use this table as a guide for
selecting appropriate stations and their speech method.
Calling station Master Station,
IP master station (N-86xxMS)
Called station
Handset
Hands-free
AEC
PTT conver.
IP remote
microphone
station
AEC
PTT conver.
Door Station, IP master station (N-85xxMS),
IP door station
Substation
IP door station Analog master station
(N-8540DS)
(N-86xxDS)
Handset
Hands-free
VS
VS
VS
AEC
Full duplex
PTT conver. PTT conver. PTT conver.
PTT conver.
Handset
Full duplex
Handsfree
AEC
PTT conver.
AEC + VS
PTT conver.
AEC + VS
PTT conver.
AEC + VS
PTT conver.
AEC
PTT conver.
VS
PTT conver.
VS
PTT conver.
AEC
PTT conver.
AEC + VS
PTT conver.
AEC + VS
PTT conver.
AEC + VS
PTT conver.
AEC
PTT conver.
VS
PTT conver.
VS
PTT conver.
AEC
AEC + VS
PTT conver.
AEC + VS
PTT conver.
x (Conver.
impossible)
AEC
PTT conver.
VS
PTT conver.
x (Conver.
impossible)
Handset
Full duplex
AEC
PTT conver.
AEC
PTT conver.
AEC
Full duplex
VS
PTT conver.
VS
PTT conver.
VS
PTT conver.
Handsfree
VS
PTT conver.
VS
PTT conver.
VS
PTT conver.
VS
PTT conver.
VS
PTT conver.
VS
PTT conver.
VS
PTT conver.
IP door station (N-8540DS)
VS
PTT conver.
VS
PTT conver.
VS
PTT conver.
x (Conver.
impossible)
VS
PTT conver.
VS
PTT conver.
x (Conver.
impossible)
x (Conver.
impossible)
Substation
VS
PTT conver.
Master station,
IP master station
(N-86xxMS)
IP remote microphone
station
Door Station,
IP door station (N-86xxDS)
IP master station
(N-85xxMS),
Analog master
station
x (Conver.
impossible)
x (Conver.
impossible)
x (Conver.
impossible)
VS
PTT conver.
x (Conver.
impossible)
x (Conver.
impossible)
x (Conver.
impossible)
x (Conver.
impossible)
x (Conver.
impossible)
x (Conver.
impossible)
x (Conver.
impossible)
PTT conver. = PTT Conversation
Conver. = Conversation
[Explanations of terms used in the table]
Represents the station that makes calls and its usage conditions.
• Calling station:
Represents the station that receives calls and its usage conditions.
• Called station:
An abbreviation of "Automatic Echo Canceller." Represents the state that the echo
• AEC:
canceller works. Full duplex conversation is always possible.
• VS:
An abbreviation of "Voice Switch." Represents the state that the voice switch works.
Half duplex conversation is possible.
Represents the state that both echo canceller and voice switch work simultaneously
• AEC + VS:
depending on the settings of microphone sensitivity and speaker output volume of
the station.
• PTT conversation:
Pressing the PTT key of the master station, IP master station, or IP remote
microphone station enables half duplex conversation.
• Full duplex:
Full duplex conversation is always possible between the handset stations.
• Conversation impossible: Conversation between the door stations, between the substations, and between
the door station and the substation is impossible.
Notes
• Models corresponding to stations are given below.
· Master station:
N-8000MS, N-8010MS, N-8011MS, N-8020MS, N-8031MS, N-8033MS
· Door station:
N-8050DS
· IP master station:
N-8500MS, N-8510MS, N-8600MS
· IP Remote microphone station: N-8610RM
N-8540DS, N-8640DS, N-8650DS
· IP door station:
N-8410MS
· Analog master station:
• In conversation with substations, handset conversation is required for the master station and IP master.
In this case, the type of conversation method is half-duplex conversation.
• In conversation between both analog master stations connected to the same Sub-station interface unit, half
duplex conversation is made between the stations when both are engaged in hands-free conversation, but
full duplex conversation when engaged in other conversation mode.
• When the N-8000CO outside line interface is connected, conversations between outside line telephones and
intercom stations are half-duplex using the voice switch if the station is in hands-free mode, and full-duplex if
the station is in handset mode.
• Operation of the analog telephone connected to the N-8000AL is the same as for the master station handset.
8-5
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
1.3. What If You Failed to Make Conversation Properly
• If the voice switches of the master and door stations do not flip properly, adjust the microphone sensitivity and
speaker output volume of the stations. (For the master station, refer to p. 2-5, 5-65 and 5-80, and for the
door station, refer to p. 5-65 and 5-80.)
• Though IP stations are so designed to always ensure optimum hands-free conversation automatically, adjust
the microphone sensitivity and speaker output volume of the stations if voice switches do not flip smoothly.
(Refer to p. 2-5, p. 2-98, and 5-65.)
• Press the PTT key to establish conversations if one-way conversation from the station in higher ambient
noise area occurs during hands-free conversation between stations or when acoustic echo is generated
during conversation.
2. Basic Knowledge About Networks
2.1. IP Networks and Address
The IP networks that the Exchanges, various kinds of interface units and IP stations can use include Local Area
Networks (LAN) used in small-scale area, such as within or on the premises of a company, and the Internet,
which covers a wide area over remote distances.
Router
N-8000EX
(A)
Internet
N-8000EX
(B)
Router
N-8000EX
(C)
LAN
LANs differ from the Internet in the IP address to be used.
Local IP address (private IP address):
This address is used and can be freely set within the LAN.
Global IP address:
This is the only one address that is used to access the Internet.
To use the Exchanges, various kinds of interface units and IP stations through the Internet, a fixed global
IP address must be acquired and assigned to each unit. When using the router, set the global IP address
to it.
When a connection is made from Unit B to Unit A in the above figure, the local address can be used. However,
when a connection is made from Unit C to Unit A, the global IP address must be used.
The fixed global IP address must be assigned to the units connected via the Internet.
Consult with a network administrator or ISP (Internet service provider) for the acquisition of a fixed global IP
address.
Note
The Internet is not guaranteed quality. Packet loss may result if the network is congested, possibly causing
voice communications to be interrupted or noise to be generated.
8-6
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
2.2. ‌Network Address Port Translation (NAPT, IP Masquerade) and N-8000 Setting
Software Program
Because the Internet cannot be accessed using the local IP address, the local IP address must be converted
into global IP address by means of Network Address Port Translation (NAPT, IP Masquerade).
Router 1
N-8000EX
(A)
N-8000EX
(B)
Internet
Router 2
N-8000EX
(C)
LAN
Connection can be made from Unit C to Unit A using the global IP address. The global IP address used for the
connection is converted into the local address for Unit A by Router 1.
The N-8000 Setting Software program is designed for full compatibility with the NAPT (IP Masquerade).
When performing settings for the equipment connected by means of NAPT (IP Masquerade), tick the "NAPT
compatible" item displayed by pressing on the "Network setting tab" of the Exchange, any kind of interface unit,
or IP station, and enter the router's IP address and Port No.
(Refer to p. 5-31, 5-39, 5-51, 5-59, 5-86, 5-94, 5-103, 5-112, and p. 5-119.)
8-7
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
2.3. Unicast vs. Multicast Communications
When making paging calls via multiple exchanges, various kinds of interface units, or IP stations connected
to a network, either "unicast" or "multicast" may be selected as the communication method. For unicast
communications, separate data packets are created and sent individually to each destination IP address.
For multicast communications, however, a single data packet is transmitted to a special IP address, which
offers the advantage of allowing the communication band to be compressed. Note, however, that multicast
communications require routers and other networking equipment connected to the network (excluding nonintelligent hubs and switches) that support appropriate protocols like the Internet Group Management Protocol
(IGMP) to enable packet transmission to special multicast addresses. The valid multicast address range for the
N-8000 System is from 225.0.0.0 to 238.255.255.255. (Some multicast addresses cannot be used. Refer to
p. 5-25.)
• Consult your network administrator regarding the details of setting the multicast address, including confirming
whether or not such communications are possible.
To use the unicast method, the number of transmission source communication bands must equal the number
of transmission destination exchanges, various kinds of interface units, or IP stations.
[Unicast]
[Multicast]
N-8000EX (A)
(A)
N-8000EX (B)
(B)
N-8000MI (C)
(C)
Switching hub,
router, etc.
N-8000EX (A)
N-8000MI (C)
• Networking equipment
copy data and transmit
copied data.
(Multicast settings
need be performed for
Switching hub,
routers, etc.).
router, etc.
Packet to N-8000EX (A)
Packet to N-8000EX (B)
Packet to N-8000MI (C)
N-8000EX (Z)
N-8000EX (B)
• The number of transmission
source communication bands
must equal the number of transmission destination exchanges.
Packet to multicast
address (225.0.0.0
-238.255.255.255)
N-8000EX (Z)
2.4. Network Paging Restrictions
When performing unicast or multicast paging via a network, the numbers of paging destinations are restricted
as follows.
• Multicast Paging:
Up to 191 destinations
• Unicast Paging:Up to 16 destinations for the exchanges, IP stations, and N- 8000MI,
and up to 8 destinations for various kinds of interface units.
• Multicast/Unicast Combined paging:Up to 191 destinations combined. However, Unicast paging is limited
to up to 15 destinations for the exchanges, IP stations, and N-8000MI,
and up to 7 destinations for various kinds of interface units.
8-8
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
2.5. Unit Scan and Broadcast Communications Domains
The broadcast communications method is utilized to detect equipment (exchange, any kind of interface unit,
or IP station) connected to a network. Therefore, only equipment within the network's multicasting range
will be detected. This range is called the "broadcast domain." The broadcast address used for detection is
255.255.255.255. Normally, a broadcast packet does not reach beyond a router, even within a local area
network.
Router
NET1
Router
NET2
N-8000EX (A)
N-8000MI (B)
N-8000EX (C)
PC
In the above figure, NET 1 represents a network, while NET 2 is the valid broadcasting range. In this example,
if the PC performs equipment detection, it will not be able to detect Equipment C despite its location within the
same local area network.
Consult your network administrator regarding the valid broadcast range.
2.6. Sampling Frequency Correction (N-8000EX/8010EX/8000MI only)
This function is used to correct and synchronize the operating clocks for all exchanges and multi interface units
on the system to the same value. Failure to synchronize operating clocks in this way may result in word dropout
during broadcasts over two minutes.
By default, automatic correction is enabled for equipment within the above broadcast domain. To correct sampling
frequencies between equipment connected to different networks divided by a router or other equipment (for
example "Network A" and "Network B"), first correct the sampling frequency setting for one of the exchanges
or multi interface units connected to Network A, and designate the IP address of one of the exchanges or
multi interface units connected to Network B as a corrected data transmission destination, then perform the
correction data receiving setting for that Network B exchange. When Router B is using NAT, designate the
global IP address of Router B as a corrected data transmission destination.
The number of destinations to which correction data can be transferred to is limited to 16 total for unicast and
multicast combined.
Network A
Network B
(Automatic correction within the network)
(Automatic correction within the network)
Router A
N-8000EX (A)
N-8000EX (C)
N-8000MI (B)
"Transmission to the N-8000EX (F)" setting
Router B
N-8000EX (D)
N-8000EX (F)
N-8000MI (E)
"Reception from the N-8000EX (C)" setting
8-9
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
2.7. NTP (Network Time Protocol)
NTP is a networking protocol for distributing accurate current time information over a TCP/IP network. Normally it uses
UDP port 123 to communicate between server and client.
The N-8000AF set to the NTP Client receives the time information in communication with NTP Server and synchronizes
the current time.
Atomic clock
GPS
NTP server
N-8000AF
N-8000EX
N-8600MS
8-10
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
3. If Trouble Occurs:
Symptom
The exchange or any
kind of interface unit
does not operate.
The IP station does not
operate.
The N-8000 Setting
Software fails to
recognize the exchange,
any kind of interface unit,
or IP station. (Includes
the case when network
setting is available)
The browser setting
screen fails to display
correctly. (Includes the
case when network
setting is available)
The exchange, any kind
of interface unit, or IP
station does not operate
correctly. (operations
such as station calls
or paging via other
exchange cannot be
performed.)
Potential Cause/Place to Inspect
Remedy
Power and cables may not be
connected correctly.
Connect the power source and cables
properly.
All indicators located on the
equipment's front panel may be out.
Make sure the power is turned on.
Check to see if the equipment's front
panel Status indicator remains lit or if
flashes repeatedly three times at onesecond intervals.
Refer to "Indicator Status &
Troubleshooting" on p. 8-14.
Power and cables may not be
connected correctly.
Connect the power source and cables
properly.
Check to see if the Status indicator
remains lit or if flashes repeatedly
three times at one-second intervals.
Refer to "Indicator Status &
Troubleshooting" on p. 8-14.
The PC on which the N-8000 Setting
Software is installed may not be
connected or set correctly.
Set and connect the PC's IP
address,subnet mask, and default
gateway correctly.
The equipment's IP address, subnet
mask, default gateway, or port number
may not be set correctly.
Set the equipment's IP address,
subnet mask, default gateway, and
port number correctly. (See p. 5-16,
p. 6-5.)
If connected to another network
via a router, the router may not be
connected correctly.
Confirm with your network
administrator that the router is
connected correctly.
The PC used for exchange data
settings via browser may not be
connected correctly to the network, or
the browser may not be set correctly.
Perform settings or connections
correctly. (See p. 6-2.)
The setting screen uses JavaScript.
The browser used may not support
JavaScript, or the JavaScript function
may be disabled.
When using Internet Explorer, select
[Tools] [Internet options] [Security]
[Custom level...] on the menu,
then set [Scripting] [Active scripting]
[Enable].
The browser is set to the option "Via a
proxy."
The screen may not be correctly
displayed if "Via a proxy" is selected
for the browser. Consult your network
administrator to find work-around
measures.
Equipment may not be registered
correctly.
Select the correct model number on
the Equipment registration screen
(p. 5-20).
8-11
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
Symptom
No voice is output or the
sound is distorted.
Potential Cause/Place to Inspect
Remedy
The exchange or any kind of interface
unit may not be connected correctly to
the amplifiers and/or speakers.
Connect the amplifiers and/or
speakers correctly.
The amplifier's audio input volume
control may not be adjusted correctly.
Adjust the audio input volume control
correctly.
The amplifier's audio input level
selector switch may not be set
correctly.
Set the audio input level selector
switch correctly.
Voice and sound settings may not be
performed correctly.
Perform the "Broadcast Specification"
setting correctly. (See p. 5-33, 5-41,
5-53, 5-61, 5-88, 5-96, 5-105.)
Microphone's audio level of the
partner station may be extremely low.
Partner's microphone (handset) may
not be connected correctly or opening
of the partner's microphone for handsfree use may be blocked.
Check to see if the indication "Input
audio error" is displayed in the
operation log of the exchange or
"DSP silent fault" is displayed in the
operation log of the IP station.
Check the contents of log. (See p.
6-34.)
Connect the partner's station handset
correctly or remove obstacles that
block the opening of the partner's
station microphone for hands-free use.
Voice signals include
intermittent noise or
break up.
The network may be congested. Check When the network is congested,
the contents of log. (See p. 6-34.)
consult with the network administrator.
No sound is output from
the station speaker.
Station's internal speaker (handset)
may not be connected correctly.
Connect the handset correctly.
No sound is output from
the station's internal or
external speaker.
(N-8000MS/8020MS/
8500MS/8600MS only).
The speaker selector switch may not
be set correctly.
Set the speaker selector switch
located on the station's bottom surface
to the speaker type you want to use.
The exchange generates
excessive heat.
Check to see if the exchange's front
The exchange may be malfunctioning.
panel-mounted Status indicator flashes Contact your nearest TOA sales office
continuously.
immediately.
The system temporarily
stops operating but is
restored after a few
seconds.
Check to see if the indication
"Firmware failed. Please contact
our sales office." is displayed in the
operation log.
A problem has occurred and the
system has been reset. Nonetheless,
since there is a chance that the system
may fail again, please contact your
nearest TOA sales office immediately.
8-12
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
Symptom
The LNK/ACT indicator
does not illuminate for
exchange or any kind of
interface unit.
The FD indicator does
not illuminate for IP
station.
Potential Cause/Place to Inspect
Remedy
The LAN cable may not be connected
correctly. Check to see if the switching
hub is connected to an appropriate
port with the correct type of cable.
Connect the LAN cable correctly.
The switching hub may not be turned
on.
Turn on the switching hub.
Station does not operate. The cable may not be connected
correctly.
Connect the cable correctly.
A password has been
forgotten.
Contact your nearest TOA dealer.
–
8-13
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
4. Indicator Status & Troubleshooting
Exchange and various kinds of interface units
front panel
[Exchange and various kinds of interface units]
The following table shows the Status indicator mode, its
corresponding equipment condition or symptom, and any
measures to be taken in the event of system failure.
Status indicator
OFF
Status Indicator
Equipment Condition
Action to Take
Normal operation or power
OFF
–
Rapid flashing*
(in a cycle of 200 ms)
Failure of fan
Contact your nearest TOA dealer.
Flashes three times in a row (in a
cycle of 200 ms) at one-second
intervals.
Failure
Contact your nearest TOA dealer.
Lights for a few seconds repeatedly
at certain intervals.
Accessing flash memory
(normal operation).
Never turn off the power or press
the Reset key until the indicator
extinguishes completely.
Remains lit (for long hours).
Failure
Contact your nearest TOA dealer.
Flashes slowly (in a cycle of 4 s)
Operation in progress in a
mode not usually used.
Press the Reset key to return to normal
operation mode.
* Applicable to the N-8000EX/8010EX/8000RS/8010RS/8400RS only
[IP station]
Station status can be confirmed by checking the status indicator while the station is in normal standby mode.
Take appropriate measures according to the equipment condition referring to the table below.
Status indicator
Status indicator
Status indicator
N-8540DS
N-8640DS
Status indicator
N-8650DS
N-8610RM
OFF
N-8500MS/8600MS
Status Indicator
N-8510MS
Equipment Condition
Normal operation or power
OFF
Action to Take
–
Flashes three times in a row (in a
cycle of 200 ms) at one-second
intervals.
Failure
Contact your nearest TOA dealer.
Lights for a few seconds repeatedly
at certain intervals.
Accessing flash memory
(normal operation).
Never turn off the power nor restart the
station until the indicator extinguishes
completely.
Flashes slowly (in a cycle of 4 s)
Operation in progress in a
mode not usually used.
Restart the station to return to normal
operation mode.
8-14
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5. Specifications
5.1. N-8000EX IP Intercom Exchange
Power Source
Power Consumption
Interface Section for Station
Number of Lines
Number of Speech Links
Type of Speech Path
Transmission System
Signal Level
Transmission Range
Speech Method
Connector
Wiring Method
Feeding Voltage/Current
Paging Output
Audio
Control
Connector
Network Section
Network I/F
Network Protocol
Audio Packet Transmission
System
Number of Paging
Destinations
Connector
Voice Sampling Frequency
Quantifying Bit Number
Voice Encoding Method
Voice Packet Loss Recovery
Audio Delay Time
Indication
Others
Installation Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
CE version: 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz
CU version: 120 V AC, 50/60 Hz
50 W (at rated), 75 W (max.)
16 lines
Internal: 1/External: 2
Space sharing/Time Space sharing
2 wire 160 kbps echo canceller transmission system
0 dB* or less
Max. 1500 m (ø0.65 mm, Loop resistance 170 Ω)
Simultaneous conversation by way of echo canceller (Hands-free),
Simultaneous conversation by way of echo canceller or
Half-duplex conversation by way of voice switch (Handset),
PTT conversation
Dedicated connector
1 set of twisted pair cable
48 V DC, Max. 70 mA
2 channels, Max. 0 dB*, 600 Ω, balanced
2 channels, relay contact output, contact capacity: 24 V DC/0.5 A
Removable terminal block
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Automatic-Negotiation)
TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP, RTP, ARP, ICMP, IGMP
Unicast, Multicast
Unicast (max. 16), Multicast (max. 191)
RJ-45 connector
16 kHz, 8 kHz (controllable on the software)
16-bit
Sub-band ADPCM, Cryptosystem
Silence insertion
80 ms, 320 ms (controllable on the software)
LNK/ACT indicator, Status indicator, Power indicator
Firmware update function, System date hold function, Reset key
(front panel), Forced air cooling, Time of day hold facility
Rack, Desk, Surface mount
0 to 40 °C
90 % RH or less (no condensation)
Pre-coated steel plate, black, 30 % gloss
420 (w) x 44.3 (h) x 356 (d) mm
4.1 kg
* 0 dB = 1 V
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
AC power cord (2 m) ............................................... 1
CD (for PC setting, maintenance use) .................... 1
Removable terminal plug (4 pins) ........................... 2
Mini-clamp connector (2 pins) .............................. 20
Plastic foot .............................................................. 4
Machine screw M4 x 20 .......................................... 4
Rack mounting bracket ...........................................
Tapping screw 3 x 8 ...............................................
Rack mounting screw with plain washer ................
Wall mounting bracket ............................................
Wood screw 3.5 x 20 ..............................................
2
8
4
2
4
8-15
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.2. N-8010EX IP Intercom Exchange
Power Source
Power Consumption
Interface Section for Station
Number of Lines
Number of Speech Links
Type of Speech Path
Transmission System
Signal Level
Transmission Range
Speech Method
Connector
Wiring Method
Feeding Voltage/Current
Paging Output
Network Section
Network I/F
Network Protocol
Audio Packet
Transmission System
Number of Paging
Destinations
Connector
Voice Sampling Frequency
Quantifying Bit Number
Voice Encoding Method
Voice Packet Loss Recovery
Audio Delay Time
Indication
Others
Setting Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
CE version: 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz
CU version: 120 V AC, 50/60 Hz
50 W (at rated), 75 W (max.)
16 lines
Internal: 4/External: 8
Space sharing/Time Space sharing
2 wire 160 kbps echo canceller transmission system
0 dB* or less
Max. 1500 m (ø0.65 mm, Loop resistance 170 Ω)
Simultaneous conversation by way of echo canceller (Hands-free),
Simultaneous conversation by way of echo canceller or
Half-duplex conversation by way of voice switch (Handset),
PTT conversation
Dedicated connector
1 set of twisted pair cable
48 V DC, Max. 70 mA
Station paging only
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Automatic-Negotiation)
TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP, RTP, ARP, ICMP, IGMP
Unicast, Multicast
Unicast (max. 16), Multicast (max. 191)
RJ-45 connector
16 kHz, 8 kHz (controllable on the software)
16-bit
Sub-band ADPCM, Cryptosystem
Silence insertion
80 ms, 320 ms (controllable on the software)
LNK/ACT indicator, Status indicator, Power indicator
Firmware update function, System registration date entry hold facility,
Time of day hold facility, Forced air cooling, Rest switch (front panel)
Rack, Desk, Surface mount
0 to 40 °C
90 % RH or less (no condensation)
Pre-coated steel plate, black, 30 % gloss
420 (w) x 44.3 (h) x 356 (d) mm
4.2 kg
* 0 dB = 1 V
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
AC power cord (2 m) ............................................... 1
CD (for PC setting, maintenance use) .................... 1
Mini-clamp (2 pins) ............................................... 20
Plastic foot .............................................................. 4
Machine screw M4 x 20 .......................................... 4
Rack mounting bracket ...........................................
Tapping screw 3 x 8 ...............................................
Rack mounting screw with plain washer ................
Wall mounting bracket ............................................
Wood screw 3.5 x 20 ..............................................
2
8
4
2
4
8-16
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.3. N-8000MS Multifunctional Master Station
Power Source
Power Consumption
Wiring Method
Transmission System
Signal Level
Speech Method
Audio Frequency Range
Transmission Range
Hands-free
Handset
Display
Indication
Line Connecting Terminal
Headset Terminal
External Speaker Terminal
Installation Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
48 V DC (supplied from the IP intercom exchange)
1.8 W (at rated), 2.4 W (max.)
1 set of twisted pair cable
2 wire 160 kbps echo canceller transmission system
Under 0 dB*
Hands-free or handset conversation
300 Hz – 7 kHz
Max. 1500 m (ø0.65 mm, Loop resistance 170 Ω)
Speaker:
5.7 cm cone-type, 0.6 W, 8 Ω
Microphone: Omni-directional electret condenser microphone
Receive path: Dynamic type
Send path:
Electret condenser microphone
LCD: Alphanumeric characters (16 characters x 2 lines)
Status indicator
RJ-11 modular jack
Speaker: 3 mW, 32 Ω, Microphone: –49 dB*, ø3.5 mm mini jack
0.6 W, 8 Ω, screwless connector (2 pins)
Desk/Surface mounted master station
(When mounting to the wall, use the optional YC-280.)
0 to 40 °C
Under 90 % RH (no condensation)
Body, Handset: ABS resin, gray
148 (w) x 208 (h) x 70.5 (d) mm (excluding a curl cord section)
800 g
* 0 dB = 1 V
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessory
Connection cord (3 m) ............................................ 1
• Optional product
Wall mounting bracket: YC-280
8-17
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.4. N-8010MS Standard Master Station
Power Source
Power Consumption
Wiring Method
Transmission System
Signal Level
Speech Method
Audio Frequency Range
Transmission Range
Hands-free
Handset
Indication
Line Connecting Terminal
Installation Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
48 V DC (supplied from the IP intercom exchange)
1.8 W (at rated), 2.4 W (max.)
1 set of twisted pair cable
2 wire 160 kbps echo canceller transmission system
Under 0 dB*
Hands-free or handset conversation
300 Hz – 7 kHz
Max. 1500 m (ø0.65 mm, Loop resistance 170 Ω)
Speaker:
5.7 cm cone-type, 0.6 W, 8 Ω
Microphone: Omni-directional electret condenser microphone
Receiver path: Dynamic type
Send path:
Electret condenser microphone
Status indicator
RJ-11 modular jack
Desk/Surface mounted master station
(When mounting to the wall, use the optional YC-280.)
0 to 40 °C
Under 90 % RH (no condensation)
Body, Handset: ABS resin, gray
148 (w) x 208 (h) x 70.5 (d) mm (excluding a curl cord section)
700 g
* 0 dB = 1 V
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessory
Connection cord (3 m) ............................................ 1
• Optional product
Wall mounting bracket: YC-280
8-18
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.5. N-8011MS Standard Hands-Free Master Station
Power Source
Power Consumption
Wiring Method
Transmission System
Signal Level
Speech Method
Audio Frequency Range
Transmission Range
Hands-Free
Indication
Line Connecting Terminal
Installation Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
48 V DC (supplied from the IP intercom exchange)
1.8 W (at rated), 2.4 W (max.)
1 set of twisted pair cable
2 wire 160 kbps echo canceller transmission system
Under 0 dB*
Hands-free conversation
300 Hz – 7 kHz
Max. 1500 m (ø0.65 mm, Loop resistance 170 Ω)
Speaker:
5.7 cm cone-type, 0.6 W, 8 Ω
Microphone: Omni-directional electret condenser microphone
Status indicator
RJ-11 modular jack
Desk/Surface mounted master station
(When mounting to the wall, use the optional YC-290.)
0 to 40 °C
Under 90 % RH (no condensation)
Body: ABS resin, gray
92 (w) x 195 (h) x 56.1 (d) mm
400 g
* 0 dB = 1 V
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessory
Connection cord (3 m) ............................................ 1
• Optional product
Wall mounting bracket: YC-290
8-19
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.6. N-8020MS Industrial-Use Master Station
Power Source
Power Consumption
Wiring Method
Transmission System
Signal Level
Speech Method
Audio Frequency Range
Transmission Range
Hands-free
Handset
Dial-in Contact Output
Indication
Line Connecting Terminal
External Speaker Terminal
Installation Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Dust/Water Protection
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
48 V DC (supplied from the IP Intercom exchange)
1.8 W (at rated), 2.4 W (max.)
1 set of twisted pair cable
2 wire 160 kbps echo canceller transmission system
Under 0 dB*
Hands-free or handset conversation
300 Hz – 7 kHz
Max. 1500 m (ø0.65 mm, Loop resistance 170 Ω)
Speaker:
5.7 cm cone-type, 0.6 W, 8 Ω
Microphone: Omni-directional electret condenser microphone
Receiver path: Dynamic type
Send path:
Electret condenser microphone
Open collector output (polarized), withstand voltage: Max. 30 V DC,
control current: Max. 50 mA, screwless connector (2 pins)
Status indicator
RJ-11 modular jack
0.6 W, 8 Ω, screwless connector (2 pins)
Desk/Surface mounted master station
(When mounting to the wall, use the optional YC-280.)
–10 to +50 °C
Under 90 % RH (no condensation)
IP54
Body, Handset: ABS resin, gray
170 (w) x 220 (h) x 97.8 (d) mm
(excluding a curl cord and projection sections)
1 kg
* 0 dB = 1 V
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
Rubber cap ............................................................. 2
• Optional product
Wall mounting bracket: YC-280
8-20
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.7. N-8031MS Flush-Mount Master Station
Power Source
Power Consumption
Wiring Method
Transmission System
Signal Level
Speech Method
Audio Frequency Range
Transmission Range
Hands-Free
Indication
Line Connecting Terminal
External Dial Input
Installation Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
48 V DC (supplied from the IP Intercom exchange)
1.8 W (at rated), 2.4 W (max.)
1 set of twisted pair cable
2 wire 160 kbps echo canceller transmission system
Under 0 dB*
Hands-free conversation
(Handset conversation can be established in conjunction with the RS-191.)
300 Hz – 7 kHzMax.
1500 m (ø0.65 mm, Loop resistance 170 Ω)
Speaker:
5.7 cm cone-type, 0.6 W, 8 Ω
Microphone: Omni-directional electret condenser microphone
Status indicator
Pin header (2 pins)
No-voltage make contact input, open voltage: 5 V DC, short-circuit
current: 1 mA, screwless connector (5 pins)
Flush-mount/Surface-mount
0 to 40 °C
Under 90 % RH (no condensation)
Panel: Stainless steel (SUS304), hairline
115 (w) x 254 (h) x 54.6 (d) mm
850 g
* 0 dB = 1 V
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
Oval head slotted screw UNC No.6 x 18 .......................................................
Oval head combination screw M4 x 25 .........................................................
Removable terminal plug (2 pins, preinstalled on the unit) ...........................
Headset jumper (8 pins, preinstalled on the unit) ..........................................
Acoustic material ...........................................................................................
4
4
1
1
1
• Optional products
Back Box:
YC-241 (For flush mounting)
Wall-mount Box: YC-251 (For surface mounting)
Option Handset: RS-191
5.8. RS-191 Option Handset
Handset Receiver
Handset Transmitter
Operating Temperature
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Dynamic type
Electret condenser type
0 to 40 °C
(Temperature range not to freeze the speaker and switch)
ABS resin, pale white
116 (w) x 220 (h) x 70 (d) mm
330 g
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
UNC No.6 x 18 ....................................................... 4
Machine screw M4 x 25 .......................................... 4
• Applicable model
N-8031MS
8-21
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.9. N-8033MS Flush-Mount Master Station
Power Source
Power Consumption
Wiring Method
Transmission System
Signal Level
Speech Method
Audio Frequency Range
Transmission Range
Hands-free
Indication
Line Connecting Terminal
External Dial Input
Installation Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Dust/Water Protection
Resistance to Environment
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
48 V DC (supplied from the IP intercom exchange)
1.8 W (at rated), 2.4 W (max.)
1 set of twisted pair cable
2 wire 160 kbps echo canceller transmission system
Under 0 dB*
Hands-free conversation
300 Hz – 7 kHz
Max. 1500 m (ø0.65 mm, Loop resistance 170 Ω)
Speaker:
5.7 cm cone-type, 0.6 W, 8 Ω
Microphone: Omni-directional electret condenser microphone
Status indicator
Pin header (2 pins)
No-voltage make contact input, open voltage: 5 V DC, short-circuit
current: 1 mA, screwless connector (5 pins)
Flush-mount/Surface-mount
0 to 40 °C
Under 90 % (no condensation)
IP65 (Note that panel edges must be sealed at installation.)
Passed our chemical-resistant test
Membrane switch: Polyester film
115 (w) x 254 (h) x 51 (d) mm
850 g
* 0 dB = 1 V
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
Machine screw M4 x 35 ................................................................................. 4
Acoustic material ........................................................................................... 1
Removable terminal plug (2 pins, preinstalled on the unit) ........................... 1
• Optional product
Back Box: YC-841
8-22
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.10. N-8050DS Door Station
Power Source
Power Consumption
Wiring Method
Transmission System
Signal Level
Speech Method
Audio Frequency Range
Transmission Range
Hands-free
Contact Output
Indication
Line Connecting Terminal
Setting Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Housing Protection
Dust/Water Protection
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
48 V DC (supplied from the IP Intercom exchange)
1.8 W (at rated), 2.4 W (max.)
1 set of twisted pair cable
2 wire 160 kbps echo canceller transmission system
Under 0 dB*
Hands-free conversation
300 Hz – 7 kHz
Max. 1500 m (ø0.65 mm, Loop resistance 170 Ω)
Speaker:
3.5 cm cone-type, 1 W, 8 Ω
Microphone: Omni-directional electret condenser microphone
Open collector output, withstand voltage: Max. 30 V DC,
control current: Max. 50 mA, one shot: can be set from 1 to 9 s ,
screw terminal (polarized)
Status indicator
2 wire, screw terminal (non-polar)
Flush-mount/Surface-mount
–10 to +50 °C
Under 90 % RH (no condensation)
BS EN62262: 2002: IK02 equivalent
IP54 (Note that panel edges must be sealed at installation.)
Plate:
Stainless steel (SUS304), hairline
Call button: Metal
115 (w) x 162 (h) x 54 (d) mm
680 g
* 0 dB = 1 V
The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
UNC No.6-32 x 18 .................................................. 4
Machine screw M4 x 25 .......................................... 4
Acoustic material ..................................................... 1
• Optional products
Back box:
YC-150 (For flush mounting)
Wall-mount Box: YS-13A (For surface mounting)
8-23
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.11. N-8500MS IP Multifunctional Master Station
Power Source
Power Consumption
Speech Method
Audio Frequency Range
Hands-free
Handset
Headset Terminal
External Speaker Terminal
Network Section
Network I/F
Network Protocol
Audio Packet
Transmission System
Number of Paging
Destinations
Connector
Voice Sampling Frequency
Quantifying Bit Number
Voice Encoding Method
Voice Packet Loss
Recovery
Audio Delay Time
Display
Indication
Installation Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Power supply device that complies with IEEE802.3af standard or
12 V DC (supplied from the AC adapter)
4.2 W (at rated), 6 W (max.)
Hands-free or handset conversation
300 Hz – 7 kHz
Speaker:
5.7 cm cone-type, 0.6 W, 8 Ω
Microphone: Omni-directional electret condenser microphone
Receive path: Dynamic type, Send path: Electret condenser microphone
Speaker: 3 mW, 32 Ω, Microphone: –49 dB*, ø3.5 mm mini jack
0.6 W, 8 Ω, screwless connector (2 pins)
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Automatic-Negotiation)
TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP, RTP, ARP, ICMP, IGMP
Unicast, Multicast
Unicast (max. 16), Multicast (max. 191)
LAN: RJ-45 connector (PoE compatible)
PC: RJ-45 connector (not-compatible with PoE)
16 kHz, 8 kHz (controllable on the software)
16-bit
Sub-band ADPCM, Cryptosystem
Silence insertion
80 ms, 320 ms (controllable on the software)
LCD: Alphanumeric characters (16 characters x 2 lines)
Status indicator
Desk/Surface mounted master station
(When mounting to the wall, use the optional YC-280.)
0 to 40 °C
90 % RH or less (no condensation)
Body, Handset: ABS resin, gray
148 (w) x 208 (h) x 70.5 (d) mm (excluding a curl cord section)
810 g
* 0 dB = 1 V
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
CD (for PC setting, maintenance use) .................... 1
Ferrite clamp .......................................................... 1
• Optional products
Wall mounting bracket: YC-280
AC adapter:
AD-1210P or AD-1215P
8-24
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.12. N-8510MS IP Standard Master Station
Power Source
Power Consumption
Speech Method
Audio Frequency Range
Hands-Free
Handset
External Control Input Terminal
Network Section
Network I/F
Network Protocol
Audio Packet Transmission
System
Number of Paging
Destinations
Connector
Voice Sampling Frequency
Quantifying Bit Number
Voice Encoding Method
Voice Packet Loss Recovery
Audio Delay Time
Indication
Installation Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Power supply device that complies with IEEE802.3af standard or 12 V
DC (supplied from the AC adapter)
4.2 W (at rated), 6 W (max.)
Hands-free or handset conversation
300 Hz – 7 kHz
Speaker:
5.7 cm cone-type, 0.6 W, 8 Ω
Microphone: Omni-directional electret condenser microphone
Receive path: Dynamic type, Send path: Electret condenser microphone
No-voltage contact input, open voltage: 5 V DC,
short-circuit current: 5 mA or less, screwless connector (2 pins)
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Automatic-Negotiation)
TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP, RTP, ARP, ICMP, IGMP
Unicast, Multicast
Unicast (max. 16), Multicast (max. 191)
LAN: RJ-45 connector (PoE compatible)
PC: RJ-45 connector (not-compatible with PoE)
6 kHz, 8 kHz (controllable on the software)
16-bit
Sub-band ADPCM, Cryptosystem
Silence insertion
80 ms, 320 ms (controllable on the software)
Status indicator
Desk/Surface mounted master station
(When mounting to the wall, use the optional YC-280.)
0 to 40 °C
90 % RH or less (no condensation)
Body, Handset: ABS resin, gray
148 (w) x 208 (h) x 70.5 (d) mm (excluding a curl cord section)
740 g
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
CD (for PC setting, maintenance use) .................... 1
Ferrite clamp .......................................................... 1
• Optional products
Wall mounting bracket: YC-280
AC adapter:
AD-1210P or AD-1215P
8-25
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.13. N-8600MS IP Multifunctional Master Station
Power Source
Power Consumption
Speech Method
Audio Frequency Range
Hands-free
Handset
Headset Terminal
External Speaker Terminal
Network Section
Network I/F
Network Protocol
Audio Packet
Transmission System
Number of Paging
Destinations
Connector
Voice Sampling Frequency
Quantifying Bit Number
Voice Encoding Method
Voice Packet Loss Recovery
Audio Delay Time
Display
Indication
Installation Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Power supply device that complies with IEEE802.3af standard or
12 V DC (supplied from the AC adapter)
Use of the AC adapter (12 V DC): 2.5 W (station only)
Use of the PoE (48 V DC): 3 W
Hands-free or handset conversation
300 Hz – 7 kHz
Speaker:
5.7 cm cone-type, maximum output 0.5 W, 8 Ω
Microphone: Omni-directional electret condenser microphone
Receive path: Dynamic type, Send path: Electret condenser microphone
Speaker:
150 Ω, ø3.5 mm mini jack
Microphone: –49 dB*, ø3.5 mm mini jack
Maximum output 0.5 W, 8 Ω, screwless connector (2 pins)
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Automatic-Negotiation)
TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP, RTP, ARP, ICMP, IGMP
Unicast, Multicast
Unicast (max. 16), Multicast (max. 191)
RJ-45 connector (PoE compatible)
16 kHz, 8 kHz (controllable on the software)
16-bit
Sub-band ADPCM, Cryptosystem
Silence insertion
80 ms, 320 ms (controllable on the software)
LCD: Alphanumeric characters (16 characters x 2 lines)
Status indicator
Desk/Surface mounted master station
(When mounting to the wall, use the optional YC-280.)
0 to 40 °C
90 % RH or less (no condensation)
Body, Handset: ABS resin, gray
148 (w) x 208 (h) x 70.5 (d) mm (excluding a curl cord section)
770 g
* 0 dB = 1 V
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessory
CD (for PC setting, maintenance use) .................... 1
• Optional products
Wall mounting bracket: YC-280
AC adapter:
AD-1210P or AD-1215P
8-26
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.14. N-8610RM IP Microphone Station
Power Source
Power Consumption
Speech Method
Audio Frequency Range
Microphone
Built-in Speaker
Network Section
Network I/F
Network Protocol
Audio Packet
Transmission System
Number of Paging
Destinations
Connector
Voice Sampling Frequency
Quantifying Bit Number
Voice Encoding Method
Voice Packet Loss Recovery
Audio Delay Time
No. of Connectable Expansion
Operation
Indicator
Installation Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Power supply device that complies with IEEE802.3af standard or
12 V DC (use of the optional AC adapter)
Use of the AC adapter (12 V DC): 4 W (microphone only)
‌8.5 W (when connecting 4 RM-210,
Extension units)
Use of the PoE (48 V DC): 5.2 W (microphone only),
‌7.5 W (when connecting 4 RM-210, Extension
units)
Hands-free conversation (use of goose-neck microphone)
300 Hz – 7 kHz
Unidirectional electret condenser microphone
6.6 cm cone-type, rated output 0.3 W, 8 Ω
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Automatic-Negotiation)
TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP, RTP, ARP, ICMP, IGMP
Unicast, Multicast
Unicast (max. 16), Multicast (max. 191)
RJ-45 connector (PoE compatible)
16 kHz, 8 kHz (controllable on the software)
16-bit
Sub-band ADPCM, Cryptosystem
Silence insertion
80 ms, 320 ms (controllable on the software)
Max. 4 units (maximum 2 units at PoE power supply)
Function keys (including a covered key), talk key
Power indicator, Status indicator, Selection indicator,
Broadcast status indicator, Microphone indicator
Desk/Surface mounted master station
(When mounting to the wall, use the optional WB-RM200.)
0 to 40 °C
90 % RH or less (no condensation)
ABS resin, blueish gray
190 (w) x 76.5 (h) x 215 (d) mm (excluding microphone)
700 g
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
CD (for PC setting, maintenance use) ........ 1
Ferrite clamp (black).................................... 2
Ferrite clamp (white).................................... 1
• Optional products
Remote microphone extension: RM-210
Wall mounting bracket:
WB-RM200
AC adapter:
AD-1210P or AD-1215P
8-27
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.15. N-8540DS IP Door Station
Power Source
Power Consumption
Speech Method
Audio Frequency Range
Hands-free
Contact Output
Network Section
Network I/F
Network Protocol
Audio Packet Transmission
System
Number of Paging
Destinations
Connector
Voice Sampling Frequency
Quantifying Bit Number
Voice Encoding Method
Voice Packet Loss Recovery
Audio Delay Time
Indication
Installation Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Housing Protection
Dust/Water Protection
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Power supply device that complies with IEEE802.3af standard or
12 V DC (supplied from the AC adapter)
4.2 W (at rated), 6 W (max.)
Hands-free conversation
300 Hz – 7 kHz
Speaker:
3.5 cm cone-type,1 W, 8 Ω
Microphone: Omni-directional electret condenser microphone
Open collector output, withstand voltage: 30 V DC,
control current: 50 mA, one shot: can be set from 1 to 9 sec,
screw terminal (polarized)
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Automatic-Negotiation)
TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP, RTP, ARP, ICMP, IGMP
Unicast, Multicast
0
Note: Reception only
RJ-45 connector (PoE compatible)
16 kHz, 8 kHz (controllable on the software)
16-bit
Sub-band ADPCM, Cryptosystem
Silence insertion
80 ms, 320 ms (controllable on the software)
Status indicator
Flush-mount/Surface-mount
–10 to +50 °C
Under 90 % RH (no condensation)
BS EN62262: 2002: IK02 equivalent
IP54 (Note that panel edges must be sealed at installation.)
Plate:
Stainless steel (SUS304), hairline
Call button: Metal
115 (w) x 162 (h) x 55.1 (d) mm
700 g
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
UNC No.6-32 x 18 .................................................. 4
Machine screw M4 x 25 .......................................... 4
Ferrite clamp .......................................................... 1
• Optional products
Back box:
YC-150 (For flush mounting)
Wall-mount Box: YS-13A (For surface mounting)
AC adapter:
AD-1210P or AD-1215P
8-28
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.16. N-8640DS IP Door Station
Power Source
Power Consumption
Speech Method
Audio Frequency Range
Hands-free
Contact Input
Contact Output
External Speaker Terminal
Network Section
Network I/F
Network Protocol
Audio Packet Transmission
System
Number of Paging
Destinations
Connector
Voice Sampling Frequency
Quantifying Bit Number
Voice Encoding Method
Voice Packet Loss Recovery
Audio Delay Time
Indication
Installation Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Housing Protection
Dust/Water Protection
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Power supply device that complies with IEEE802.3af standard or 12 V
DC (supplied from the AC adapter)
Use of the AC adapter (12 V DC): 3.5 W (station only)
Use of the PoE (48 V DC):
5W
Hands-free conversation
300 Hz – 7 kHz
Speaker:
3.5 cm cone-type, maximum output 0.5 W, 8 Ω
Microphone: Omni-directional electret condenser microphone
1 channel, no-voltage make contact input, open circuit voltage: 5 V DC,
short circuit current: 10 mA or less, unterminated ends
Open collector output, withstand voltage: 30 V DC,
control current: Max. 50 mA (4 output 1 COMMON) unterminated ends
Relay contact output, 1 channel, withstand voltage: 30 V DC,
control current: Max. 500 mA, unterminated ends
Maximum output 0.5 W, 8 Ω, unterminated ends
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Automatic-Negotiation)
TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP, RTP, ARP, ICMP, IGMP
Unicast, Multicast
0
Note: Reception only
RJ-45 connector (PoE compatible)
16 kHz, 8 kHz (controllable on the software)
16-bit
Sub-band ADPCM, Cryptosystem
Silence insertion
80 ms, 320 ms (controllable on the software)
Status indicator
Flush-mount/Surface-mount
–10 to +50 °C
Under 90 % RH (no condensation)
BS EN62262: 2002: IK02 equivalent
IP65 (Note that panel edges must be sealed at installation.)
Plate:
Stainless steel (SUS304), hairline
Call button: Metal
115 (w) x 162 (h) x 58.5 (d) mm
780 g
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
UNC No.6-32 x 20 .................................................. 4
Machine screw M4 x 20 .......................................... 4
Waterproof washer ................................................. 4
LAN coupler ........................................................... 1
• Optional products
Back box:
YC-150 (For flush mounting)
Wall-mount Box: YS-13A (For surface mounting)
AC adapter:
AD-1210P or AD-1215P
8-29
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.17. N-8650DS IP Door Station
Power Source
Power Consumption
Speech Method
Audio Frequency Range
Hands-free
Contact Input
Contact Output
External Speaker Terminal
Network Section
Network I/F
Network Protocol
Audio Packet Transmission
System
Number of Paging
Destinations
Connector
Voice Sampling Frequency
Quantifying Bit Number
Voice Encoding Method
Voice Packet Loss Recovery
Audio Delay Time
Indication
Installation Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Housing Protection
Dust/Water Protection
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Power supply device that complies with IEEE802.3af standard or
12 V DC (supplied from the AC adapter)
Use of the AC adapter (12 V DC): 3.5 W (station only)
Use of the PoE (48 V DC):
5W
Hands-free conversation
300 Hz – 7 kHz
Speaker:
3.5 cm cone-type, maximum output 0.5 W, 8 Ω
Microphone: Omni-directional electret condenser microphone
1 channel, no-voltage make contact input, open circuit voltage: 5 V DC,
short circuit current: 10 mA or less, unterminated ends
Open collector output, withstand voltage: 30 V DC,
control current: Max. 50 mA (4 output 1 COMMON) unterminated ends
Relay contact output, 1 channel, withstand voltage: 30 V DC,
control current: Max. 500 mA, unterminated ends
Maximum output 0.5 W, 8 Ω, unterminated ends
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Automatic-Negotiation)
TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP, RTP, ARP, ICMP, IGMP
Unicast, Multicast
0
Note: Reception only
RJ-45 connector (PoE compatible)
16 kHz, 8 kHz (controllable on the software)
16-bit
Sub-band ADPCM, Cryptosystem
Silence insertion
80 ms, 320 ms (controllable on the software)
Status indicator (built in the Call button)
Flush-mount/Surface-mount
–10 to +50 °C
Under 90 % RH (no condensation)
BS EN62262: 2002: IK02 equivalent
IP65 (Note that panel edges must be sealed at installation.)
ABS resin, dark gray
116 (w) x 162 (h) x 60 (d) mm
400 g
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
UNC No.6-32 x 20 .................................................. 4
Machine screw M4 x 20 .......................................... 4
LAN coupler ........................................................... 1
• Optional products
Back box:
YC-150 (For flush mounting)
Wall-mount Box: YS-13A (For surface mounting)
AC adapter:
AD-1210P or AD-1215P
8-30
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.18. N-8000RS Substation Interface Unit
Power Source
Power Consumption
Interface Section for Sub-station
Number of Lines
Number of Speech Links
Transmission System
Transmission Range
Speech Method
Connector
Wiring Method
Audio Output
Feeding Voltage/Current
Control Signal
Network Section
Network I/F
Network Protocol
Audio Packet
Transmission System
Number of Paging
Destinations
Connector
Voice Sampling Frequency
Quantifying Bit Number
Voice Encoding Method
Voice Packet Loss Recovery
Audio Delay Time
Indication
Others
Setting Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
CE version:
CU version:
CE version:
CU version:
220 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
120 V AC, 50/60 Hz
40 W (at rated), 50 W (max.)
35 W (at rated), 45 W (max.)
16 lines
2 links
Analog baseband
500 m/ø0.5 mm (AWG24), 800 m/ø0.65 mm (AWG21),
1300 m/ø0.9 mm (AWG19)
Half-duplex conversation by way of voice switch
Removable terminal block (3 pins)
2-core shielded cable
Max. 1 W/line (conversation), Max. 0.5 W/line (paging)
22 V DC, 30 mA max.
Call in button detection, privacy button detection, hook detection
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Automatic-Negotiation)
TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP, RTP, ARP, ICMP, IGMP
Unicast, Multicast
0
Note: Reception only
RJ-45 connector
16 kHz, 8 kHz (controllable on the software)
16-bit
Sub-band ADPCM, Cryptosystem
Silence insertion
80 ms, 320 ms (controllable on the software)
LNK/ACT indicator, Status indicator, Power indicator
Firmware update function, System data hold function,
Reset key (front panel), Forced air cooling
Rack, Desk, Surface mount
0 to 40°C
90 % RH or less (no condensation)
Pre-coated steel plate, black, 30 % gloss
420 (w) x 44.3 (h) x 325.5 (d) mm
3.9 kg
The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
AC power cord (2 m) ............................................... 1
CD (for PC setting, maintenance use) .................... 1
Removable terminal plug (3 pins) ......................... 16
Plastic foot .............................................................. 4
Machine screw M3 x 8 ...........................................
Rack mounting bracket ...........................................
Tapping screw 3 x 8 ...............................................
Rack mounting screw with plain washer ................
4
2
8
4
• Optional product
Wall mounting bracket: YC-850
8-31
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.19. N-8010RS Substation Interface Unit
Power Source
Power Consumption
Interface Section for Sub-station
Number of Lines
Number of Speech Links
Transmission System
Transmission Range
Speech Method
Connector
Wiring Method
Audio Output
Feeding Voltage/Current
Control Signal
Network Section
Network I/F
Network Protocol
Audio Packet
Transmission System
Number of Paging
Destinations
Connector
Voice Sampling Frequency
Quantifying Bit Number
Voice Encoding Method
Voice Packet Loss Recovery
Audio Delay Time
Indication
Others
Setting Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
CE version:
CU version:
CE version:
CU version:
220 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
120 V AC, 50/60 Hz
32 W (at rated), 38 W (max.)
26 W (at rated), 32 W (max.)
16 lines
1 link
Analog baseband
500 m/ø0.5 mm (AWG24), 800 m/ø0.65 mm (AWG21),
1300 m/ø0.9 mm (AWG19)
Half-duplex conversation by way of voice switch
Removable terminal block (3 pins)
2-core shielded cable
Max. 1 W/line (conversation), Max. 0.5 W/line (paging)
22 V DC, 30 mA max.
Call in button detection, privacy button detection, hook detection
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Automatic-Negotiation)
TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP, RTP, ARP, ICMP, IGMP
Unicast, Multicast
0
Note: Reception only
RJ-45 connector
16 kHz, 8 kHz (controllable on the software)
16-bit
Sub-band ADPCM, Cryptosystem
Silence insertion
80 ms, 320 ms (controllable on the software)
LNK/ACT indicator, Status indicator, Power indicator
Firmware update function, System data hold function,
Reset key (front panel), Forced air cooling
Rack, Desk, Surface mount
0 to 40°C
90 % RH or less (no condensation)
Pre-coated steel plate, black, 30 % gloss
420 (w) x 44.3 (h) x 325.5 (d) mm
3.8 kg
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
AC power cord (2 m) ............................................... 1
CD (for PC setting, maintenance use) .................... 1
Removable terminal plug (3 pins) ......................... 16
Plastic foot .............................................................. 4
Machine screw M3 x 8 ...........................................
Rack mounting bracket ...........................................
Tapping screw 3 x 8 ...............................................
Rack mounting screw with plain washer ................
4
2
8
4
• Optional product
Wall mounting bracket: YC-850
8-32
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.20. RS-150 Indoor Substation
Rated Input
Rated Impedance
Internal Speaker
Wiring
Transmission Range
Operating Temperature
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Applicable Box (option)
1W
625 Ω (1 W/25 V)
4 cm cone-type
2-core shielded cable
500 m/ø0.5 mm (AWG24)
800 m/ø0.65 mm (AWG22)
1300 m/ø0.9 mm (AWG19)
–10 to +50°C (Temperature range not to freeze the speaker and switch)
Panel:
Stainless steel, hairline
Call button: Resin
120 (w) x 120 (h) x 48.5 (d) mm
410 g
For flush-mount:
2-gang electrical box YC-302
For surface-mount: Indoor wall-mount box YC-822
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
UNC No.6 x 18 ....................................................... 4
Machine screw M4 x 25 .......................................... 4
5.21. RS-160 Indoor Vandal-Resistant Substation
Rated Input
Rated Impedance
Internal Speaker
Wiring
Transmission Range
Operating Temperature
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Applicable Box (option)
1W
625 Ω (1 W/25 V)
4 cm cone-type
2-core shielded cable
500 m/ø0.5 mm (AWG24)
800 m/ø0.65 mm (AWG22)
1300 m/ø0.9 mm (AWG19)
–10 to +50°C (Temperature range not to freeze the speaker and switch)
Panel:
Stainless steel, hairline
Call button: Metal
120 (w) x 120 (h) x 57.5 (d) mm
540 g
For flush-mount:
2-gang electrical box YC-302
For surface-mount: Indoor wall-mount box YC-822
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
UNC No.6 x 18 ....................................................... 4
Machine screw M4 x 25 .......................................... 4
8-33
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.22. RS-170 Outdoor Vandal-Resistant Substation
Rated Input
Rated Impedance
Internal Speaker
Wiring
Transmission Range
Operating Temperature
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Applicable Box (option)
1W
625 Ω (1 W/25 V)
4 cm cone-type
2-core shielded cable
500 m/ø0.5 mm (AWG24)
800 m/ø0.65 mm (AWG22)
1300 m/ø0.9 mm (AWG19)
–10 to +50°C (Temperature range not to freeze the speaker and switch)
Panel:
Stainless steel, hairline
Call button:
Metal
Printed circuit board: Weather-resistant coating
120 (w) x 120 (h) x 57.5 (d) mm
540 g
For flush-mount:
2-gang electrical box YC-302
For surface-mount: Indoor wall-mount box YC-822
Outdoor wall-mount box YC-823
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
UNC No.6 x 18 ....................................................... 4
Machine screw M4 x 25 .......................................... 4
5.23. RS-180 Emergency Substation
Rated Input
Rated Impedance
Internal Speaker
Control Output
Wiring
Transmission Range
Operating Temperature
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Applicable Box (option)
1W
625 Ω (1 W/25 V)
4 cm cone-type
Open collector, Withstand voltage: 30 V DC, Control current: 30 mA
(The open collector output is kept turned on till the conversation
is finished after the call button was pressed.)
2-core shielded cable
500 m/ø0.5 mm (AWG24)
800 m/ø0.65 mm (AWG22)
1300 m/ø0.9 mm (AWG19)
–10 to +50°C (Temperature range not to freeze the speaker and switch)
Panel:
Stainless steel, hairline
Call button:
Metal
Printed circuit board: Weather-resistant coating
120 (w) x 120 (h) x 58.5 (d) mm
570 g
For flush-mount:
2-gang electrical box YC-302
For surface-mount: Indoor wall-mount box YC-822
Outdoor wall-mount box YC-823
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
UNC No.6 x 18 ....................................................... 4
Machine screw M4 x 25 .......................................... 4
8-34
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.24. RS-140 Switch Panel
Call Button
Privacy Button
Indicator
Wiring
Transmission Range
Operating Temperature
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Applicable Box
Momentary
Latching
When called:
Status indicator (red) flashing
In conversation: Status indicator (red) lit
In privacy:
Privacy indicator (red) lit
2-core shielded cable
500 m/ø0.5 mm (AWG24), 800 m/ø0.65 mm (AWG22),
1300 m/ø0.9 mm (AWG19)
0 to 40°C
Panel:
Stainless steel, hairline
Call button:
Resin, red
Privacy button: Resin, white
70 (w) x 115 (h) x 28.6 (d) mm
80 g
Flush-mount box: YC-801 (option)
Wall-mount box: YC-802 (option)
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
Mounting bracket .................................................... 1
No. 6-32UNC x 18 .................................................. 2
Machine screw M4 x 30 ......................................... 2
No. 6-32UNC x 30 .................................................. 2
5.25. RS-141 Option Handset
Handset Receiver
Handset Microphone
Wiring
Handset Receiver Volume
Control
Operating Temperature
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Applicable Box
Dynamic type
Electret condenser type
2-core shielded cable
Slide volume
Maximum control level: 12 – 18 dB
0 to 40°C
ABS resin, pale white
116 (w) x 220 (h) x 71 (d) mm
350 g
2-gang electrical box: YC-302 (option)
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
No.6-32UNC x 18 ................................................... 4
Machine screw M4 x 25 .......................................... 4
8-35
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.26. RS-142 Switch Board
Call Button Wiring
Wiring
Transmission Range
Operating Temperature
Weight
4 cables (for 2 momentary switches)
2-core shielded cable
500 m/ø0.5 mm (AWG24), 800 m/ø0.65 mm (AWG22),
1300 m/ø0.9 mm (AWG19)
0 to 40°C
30 g
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
5.27. RS-143 Switch Panel
Call Button
Wiring
Transmission Range
Operating Temperature
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Applicable Box
Momentary
2-core shielded cable
500 m/ø0.5 mm (AWG24), 800 m/ø0.65 mm (AWG22),
1300 m/ø0.9 mm (AWG19)
0 to 40°C
Panel:
Stainless steel, hairline
Call button: Resin, red
70 (w) x 115 (h) x 28.6 (d) mm
80 g
Flush-mount box: YC-801 (option)
Wall-mount box: YC-802 (option)
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
Mounting bracket .................................................... 1
No. 6-32UNC x 18 .................................................. 2
Machine screw M4 x 30 ......................................... 2
No. 6-32UNC x 30 .................................................. 2
5.28. RS-144 Switch Panel
Call Button
Wiring
Transmission Range
Operating Temperature
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Applicable Box
Momentary
2-core shielded cable
500 m/ø0.5 mm (AWG24), 800 m/ø0.65 mm (AWG22),
1300 m/ø0.9 mm (AWG19)
0 to 40°C
Panel:
Stainless steel, hairline
Emergency call button: Resin, red
Call button:
Resin, white
70 (w) x 115 (h) x 28.6 (d) mm
80 g
Flush-mount box:YC-801 (option)
Wall-mount box:YC-802 (option)
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
Mounting bracket .................................................... 1
No. 6-32UNC x 18 .................................................. 2
Machine screw M4 x 30 ......................................... 2
No. 6-32UNC x 30 .................................................. 2
8-36
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.29. N-8400RS Substation Interface Unit
Power Source
Power Consumption
Interface Section for Sub-station
Number of Lines
Number of Speech Links
Transmission System
Transmission Range
Speech Method
Connector
Wiring Method
Audio Output
Feeding Voltage/Current
Control Signal
Network Section
Network I/F
Network Protocol
Audio Packet
Transmission System
Number of Paging Destinations
Connector
Voice Sampling Frequency
Quantifying Bit Number
Voice Encoding Method
Voice Packet Loss Recovery
Audio Delay Time
Indication
Others
Setting Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
CE version:
CU version:
CE version:
CU version:
220 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
120 V AC, 50/60 Hz
30 W (at rated), 45 W (max.)
35 W (at rated), 50 W (max.)
16 lines
Internal: 1/External: 2
Analog baseband
1000 m/ø0.5 mm (AWG24), 1500 m/ø0.65 mm (AWG21),
2000 m/ø0.9 mm (AWG19)
Half-duplex conversation by way of voice switch (Hands-free),
Full-duplex (Handset)
Removable terminal block (4 pins)
2 sets of twisted pair cables
Max. 1 W/line (conversation), Max. 0.5 W/line (paging)
24 V DC, 30 mA max.
Call in button detection, hook detection
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Automatic-Negotiation)
TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP, RTP, ARP, ICMP, IGMP
Unicast, Multicast
Unicast (max. 8), Multicast (max.191)
RJ-45 connector
16 kHz, 8 kHz (controllable on the software)
16-bit
Sub-band ADPCM, Cryptosystem
Silence insertion
80 ms, 320 ms (controllable on the software)
LNK/ACT indicator, Status indicator, Power indicator
Firmware update function, System data hold function,
Reset key (front panel), Forced air cooling
Rack, Desk, Surface mount
0 to 40°C
90 % RH or less (no condensation)
Pre-coated steel plate, black, 30 % gloss
420 (w) x 44.3 (h) x 325.5 (d) mm
4 kg
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
AC power cord (2 m) ............................................... 1
CD (for PC setting, maintenance use) .................... 1
Removable terminal plug (4 pins) ......................... 16
Plastic foot .............................................................. 4
Machine screw M3 x 8 ...........................................
Rack mounting bracket ...........................................
Tapping screw 3 x 8 ...............................................
Rack mounting screw with plain washer ................
4
2
8
4
• Optional product
Wall mounting bracket: YC-850
8-37
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.30. N-8410MS Analog Standard Master Station
Power Source
Current Consumption
Wiring Method
Transmission System
Signal Level
Speech Method
Audio Frequency Range
Transmission Range
Hands-free
Handset
Indication
Line Connecting Terminal
Installation Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
24 V DC (supplied from the sub station interface unit N-8400RS)
Max. 30 mA
2 set of twisted pair cable
4 wire baseband transmission system
25 dB* (up), 0 dB* or less (down)
Hands-free or handset conversation
300 Hz – 7 kHz
1000 m/ø0.5 mm (AWG24), 1500 m/ø0.65 mm (AWG22),
2000 m/ø0.9 mm (AWG19)
Speaker:
5.7 cm cone-type, 0.6 W, 8 Ω
Microphone:
Omni-directional electret condenser microphone
Speaker volume control: 3-step switch (1-step, 4 dB)
Receive path:
Send path:
Handset receiver volume control:
Maximum control level:
Dynamic type
Electret condenser microphone
Rotary volume
12 – 18 dB
Status indicator
RJ-11 modular jack
Desk/Surface mounted master station
(When mounting to the wall, use the optional YC-280.)
0 to 40 °C
Under 90 % RH (no condensation)
Body, Handset: ABS resin, gray
148 (w) x 208 (h) x 70.5 (d) mm (excluding a curl cord section)
720 g
* 0 dB = 1 V
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessory
Connection cord (3 m) ............................................ 1
• Optional product
Wall mounting bracket: YC-280
8-38
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.31. RS-450 Indoor Substation
Call Button
Rated Input
Internal Speaker
Internal Microphone
Wiring
Transmission Range
Operating Temperature
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Applicable Box
Momentary (Emergency call: Press twice within 400 ms.)
1W
Cone-type
Electret condenser type
Twisted pair cables (2-pair)
1000 m/ø0.5 mm (AWG24), 1500 m/ø0.65 mm (AWG22),
2000 m/ø0.9 mm (AWG19)
–10 to +50°C (Temperature range not to freeze the speaker and switch)
Panel:
Stainless steel, hairline
Call button: Resin, black
120 (w) x 120 (h) x 41.5 (d) mm
510 g
2-gang electrical box: YC-302 (option)
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
No.6-32UNC x 18 ................................................... 4
Machine screw M4 x 25 .......................................... 4
5.32. RS-460 Indoor Vandal-Resistant Substation
Call Button
Rated Input
Internal Speaker
Internal Microphone
Wiring
Transmission Range
Operating Temperature
Housing Protection
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Applicable Box
Momentary (Emergency call: Press twice within 400 ms.)
1W
Cone-type
Electret condenser type
Twisted pair cables (2-pair)
1000 m/ø0.5 mm (AWG24), 1500 m/ø0.65 mm (AWG22),
2000 m/ø0.9 mm (AWG19)
–10 to +50°C (Temperature range not to freeze the speaker and switch)
BS EN62262: 2002: IK02 equivalent
Panel:
Stainless steel, hairline
Call button: Metal, silver
120 (w) x 120 (h) x 49.5 (d) mm
540 g
2-gang electrical box: YC-302 (option)
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
No.6-32UNC x 18 ................................................... 4
Machine screw M4 x 25 .......................................... 4
8-39
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.33. RS-470 Outdoor Vandal-Resistant Substation
Call Button
Rated Input
Internal Speaker
Internal Microphone
Wiring
Transmission Range
Operating Temperature
Housing Protection
Dust/Water Protection
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Applicable Box
Momentary (Emergency call: Press twice within 400 ms.)
1W
Cone-type
Electret condenser type
Twisted pair cables (2-pair)
1000 m/ø0.5 mm (AWG24), 1500 m/ø0.65 mm (AWG22),
2000 m/ø0.9 mm (AWG19)
–10 to +50°C (Temperature range not to freeze the speaker and switch)
BS EN62262: 2002: IK02 equivalent
IP54
Panel:
Stainless steel, hairline
Call button: Metal, silver
Circuit board: Weather-resistant coating
120 (w) x 120 (h) x 49.5 (d) mm
550 g
2-gang electrical box: YC-302 (option)
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
No.6-32UNC x 18 ................................................... 4
Machine screw M4 x 25 .......................................... 4
5.34. RS-480 Emergency Substation
Call Button
Rated Input
Control Output
Internal Speaker
Internal Microphone
Indicator
Wiring
Transmission Range
Operating Temperature
Housing Protection
Dust/Water Protection
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Applicable Box
Momentary (Emergency call: Press twice within 400 ms.)
1W
Open collector, Maximum controlled voltage: 30 V DC, Control current: 30 mA
Cone-type
Electret condenser type
When called: Status indicator (red) flashing
In conversation: Status indicator (red) lit
Twisted pair cables (2-pair)
1000 m/ø0.5 mm (AWG24), 1500 m/ø0.65 mm (AWG22),
2000 m/ø0.9 mm (AWG19)
–10 to +50°C (Temperature range not to freeze the speaker and switch)
BS EN62262: 2002: IK02 equivalent
IP54
Panel:
Stainless steel, hairline
Call button: Metal, red
Circuit board: Weather-resistant coating
120 (w) x 120 (h) x 50.5 (d) mm
575 g
2-gang electrical box: YC-302 (option)
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
No.6-32UNC x 18 ................................................... 4
Machine screw M4 x 25 .......................................... 4
8-40
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.35. RS-442 Switch Board
Call Button Wiring
Rated Input
Control Output
Microphone
Wiring
Transmission Range
Operating Temperature
Weight
6 cables (for 3 momentary switches)
1W
Open collector, Maximum controlled voltage: 30 V DC
Control current: 30 mA
Electret condenser microphone
Twisted pair cables (2 pairs)
1 km/ø0.5 mm (AWG24)
1.5 km/ø0.65 mm (AWG22)
2 km/ø0.9 mm (AWG19)
0 to 40 ºC
140 g
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
5.36. RS-481 Option Handset
Handset Receiver
Handset Microphone
Handset Receiver Volume
Control
Operating Temperature
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Applicable Box
Dynamic type
Electret condenser type
Slide volume
Maximum control level: 12 – 18 dB
0 to 40°C
ABS resin, pale white
116 (w) x 220 (h) x 71 (d) mm
365 g
2-gang electrical box: YC-302 (option)
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
No.6-32UNC x 18 ................................................... 4
Machine screw M4 x 25 .......................................... 4
8-41
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.37. N-8000MI Multi Interface Unit
Power Source
Power Consumption
Audio Input
Audio Output
Contact Input
Contact Output
PBX I/F
Tie-line I/F
Network Section
Network I/F
Network Protocol
Audio Packet
Transmission System
Number of Paging
Destinations
Connector
Voice Sampling Frequency
Quantifying Bit Number
Voice Encoding Method
Voice Packet Loss Recovery
Audio Delay Time
Indication
Others
Installation Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
*1 0 dB = 1 V
CE version: 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz
CU version: 120 V AC, 50/60 Hz
CE version: 19 W (180 mA) (at rated), 24 W (230 mA) (max.)
CU version: 16 W (250 mA) (at rated), 21 W (330 mA) (max.)
Input:2 inputs (2P/input), Max. 0 dB*1, 600 Ω or less, balanced,with a
semi-fixed volume for adjustment (0 to –25 dB)
Control:2 inputs (2P/input), no-voltage make contact input,
open voltage: 12 V DC, short-circuit current: 10 mA
Removable terminal block (8 pins)
Output: 2 outputs (2P/output), Max. 0 dB*1, 600 Ω or less, balanced
Control:‌2 outputs (2P/output), relay contact output,
contact capacity: 24 V DC/0.5 A
Removable terminal block (8 pins)
16 inputs, no-voltage make contact input, open voltage: 12 V DC,
short-circuit current: 10 mA, removable terminal block (18 pins)
16 outputs, relay contact output, contact capacity: 24 V DC/0.5 A,
removable terminal block (18 pins)
PBX input and output:
2 channels, Max.: 0 dB*2 or less, Average: –15 dB*2 or less,
600 Ω, balanced, mini-clamp connector (2 pins),
with adjustment functions for both input and output
(Input: 0 to 15 dB, Output: –15 to 0 dB), Analog E & M interface
Tie-line input and output:
2 channels, Max.: 0 dB*2 or less, Average: –15 dB*2 or less,
600 Ω, balanced, mini-clamp connector (2 pins),
Signal method: EXES-2000/EXES-6000 tie-line method
Selective signal: DTMF signal
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Automatic-Negotiation)
TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP, RTP, ARP, ICMP, IGMP
Unicast, Multicast
Unicast (max. 16), Multicast (max. 191)
RJ-45 connector
16 kHz, 8 kHz (controllable on the software)
16-bit
Sub-band ADPCM, Cryptosystem
Silence insertion
80 ms, 320 ms (controllable on the software)
LNK/ACT indicator, Status indicator, Power indicator
Firmware update function, System registration data entry hold facility,
Time of day hold facility, Reset key (front panel)
Rack, Desk, Surface mount
0 to 40°C
90 % RH or less (no condensation)
Pre-coated steel plate, black, 30 % gloss
420 (w) x 44.3 (h) x 239.5 (d) mm
2.8 kg
*2 0 dB = 0.775 V
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
8-42
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
• Accessories
AC power cord (2 m) ............................................... 1
CD (for PC setting, maintenance use) .................... 1
Removable terminal plug (9 pins) ........................... 4
Removable terminal plug (8 pins) ........................... 2
Mini-clamp connector (2 pins) .............................. 10
Plastic foot .............................................................. 4
Machine screw M4 x 20 ..........................................
Rack mounting bracket ...........................................
Tapping screw 3 x 8 ...............................................
Rack mounting screw with plain washer ................
Wall mounting bracket ............................................
Wood screw 3.5 x 20 ..............................................
4
2
8
4
2
4
5.38. N-8000CO C/O Interface Unit
Power Source
Power Consumption
C/O Interface
Network Section
Network I/F
Network Protocol
Audio Packet
Transmission System
Number of Paging
Destinations
Connector
Voice Sampling Frequency
Quantifying Bit Number
Voice Encoding Method
Voice Packet Loss Recovery
Audio Delay Time
Indication
Others
Setting Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
CE version: 220 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
CU version: 120 V AC, 50/60 Hz
7 W (max.)
Public switched telephone networks
Number of lines:
1 line
Selective signal type: DTMF signal
Signal system:
Compatible with loop start signaling
Wiring method:
1 pair of twisted pair cables
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Automatic-Negotiation)
TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP, RTP, ARP, ICMP, IGMP
Unicast, Multicast
Unicast (max. 8), Multicast (max. 191)
RJ-45 connector
16 kHz, 8 kHz (controllable on the software)
16-bit
Sub-band ADPCM, Cryptosystem
Silence insertion
80 ms, 320 ms (controllable on the software)
LNK/ACT indicator, Status indicator, Power indicator
Outside line indicator
Firmware update function, System data hold function,
Time of day hold facility, Reset key (front panel)
Rack, Desk, Surface mount
0 to 40°C
90 % RH or less (no condensation)
Pre-coated steel plate, black, 30 % gloss
210 (w) x 44.3 (h) x 267 (d) mm
1.7 kg
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
AC power cord (2 m) ............................................... 1
CD (for PC setting, maintenance use) .................... 1
Mini-clamp connector (2 pins) ................................ 2
Plastic foot .............................................................. 4
Machine screw M3 x 8 ........................................... 4
• Optional products
Rack mounting bracket: MB-15B-BK (for rack mounting one N-8000CO unit)
MB-15B-J (for rack mounting two N-8000CO units)
Wall mounting bracket: YC-850
8-43
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.39. N-8000AF Audio Interface Unit
Power Source
Power Consumption
Audio Input
Audio Output
Contact Input
Contact Output
Time Sync Input
Network Section
Network I/F
Network Protocol
Audio Packet
Transmission System
Number of Paging
Destinations
Connector
Voice Sampling Frequency
Quantifying Bit Number
Voice Encoding Method
Voice Packet Loss Recovery
Audio Delay Time
Indication
Others
Setting Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
CE version: 220 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
CU version: 120 V AC, 50/60 Hz
7 W (max.)
1 input (transformer isolated), –58 to 0 dB*, 2 kΩ, balanced
(MIC/LINE input, controllable on the software)
with input volume control knob, removable terminal block (3 pins)
1 output (transformer isolated), 0 dB*, 600 Ω, balanced,
removable terminal block (3 pins)
8 inputs, no-voltage make contact input, open voltage: 24 V DC,
short-circuit current: 5 mA or less, removable terminal block (10 pins),
(1 common terminal for 4 inputs)
8 outputs, relay contact output, contact capacity: 24 V DC/2 – 500 mA,
removable terminal block (16 pins)
1 input, no-voltage make contact input, open voltage: 24 V DC,
short-circuit current: 5 mA or less, removable terminal block (2 pins)
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Automatic-Negotiation)
TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP, RTP, ARP, ICMP, IGMP
Unicast, Multicast
Unicast (max. 8), Multicast (max. 191)
RJ-45 connector
16 kHz, 8 kHz (controllable on the software)
16-bit
Sub-band ADPCM, Cryptosystem
Silence insertion
80 ms, 320 ms (controllable on the software)
LNK/ACT indicator, Status indicator, Power indicator,
Signal indicator, Peak indicator
Firmware update function, System data hold function,
Time of day hold facility, Reset key (front panel)
Rack, Desk, Surface mount
0 to 40°C
90 % RH or less (no condensation)
Pre-coated steel plate, black, 30 % gloss
210 (w) x 44.3 (h) x 267 (d) mm
1.7 kg
* 0 dB = 1 V
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
AC power cord (2 m) ...............................................
CD (for PC setting, maintenance use) ....................
Removable terminal plug (2 pins) ...........................
Removable terminal plug (3 pins) ...........................
1
1
1
2
Removable terminal plug (5 pins) ...........................
Removable terminal plug (8 pins) ...........................
Plastic foot ..............................................................
Machine screw M3 x 8 ...........................................
2
2
4
4
• Optional products
Rack mounting bracket: MB-15B-BK (for rack mounting one N-8000AF unit)
MB-15B-J (for rack mounting two N-8000AF units)
Wall mounting bracket: YC-850
8-44
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.40. N-8000AL Telephone Interface Unit
Power Source
Power Consumption
Telephone Interface
Number of Telephone Lines
Selective Signal Type
Monitoring Function
Control Function
Wiring Method
Short-Circuit Current
Open Voltage
Calling Signal Output
Voltage
Network Section
Network I/F
Network Protocol
Audio Packet Transmission
System
Number of Paging
Destinations
Connector
Voice Sampling Frequency
Quantifying Bit Number
Voice Encoding Method
Voice Packet Loss Recovery
Audio Delay Time
Indication
Others
Setting Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
CE version: 220 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
CU version: 120 V AC, 50/60 Hz
8W (max.)
1 line
DTMF signal
Line Loop detection
Caller ID function
1 pair of twisted pair cables
120 mA
24 V DC
Max. 80 V (0-p) AC (16 Hz)
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Automatic-Negotiation)
TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP, RTP, ARP, ICMP, IGMP
Unicast, Multicast
Unicast (max. 8), Multicast (max. 191)
RJ-45 connector
16 kHz, 8 kHz (controllable on the software)
16-bit
Sub-band ADPCM, Cryptosystem
Silence insertion
80 ms, 320 ms (controllable on the software)
LNK/ACT indicator, Status indicator, Power indicator, Line indicator
Firmware update function, System date hold function,
Time of day hold facility, Reset key (front panel)
Rack, Desktop, Surface mount
0 to 40 °C
90 % RH or less (no condensation)
Pre-coated steel plate, black, 30 % gloss
210 (w) x 44.3 (h) x 267 (d) mm
1.7 kg
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
AC power cord (2 m) ............................................... 1
CD (for PC setting, maintenance use) .................... 1
Mini-clamp connector (2 pins) ................................ 2
Plastic foot .............................................................. 4
Machine screw M3 x 8 ........................................... 4
• Optional products
Rack mounting bracket: MB-15B-BK (for rack mounting one N-8000AL unit)
MB-15B-J (for rack mounting two N-8000AL units)
Wall mounting bracket: YC-850
8-45
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.41. N-8000DI Direct Select Unit
Power Source
CE version: 220 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
CU version: 120 V AC, 50/60 Hz
16 W (max.)
32 inputs, no-voltage make contact input, open voltage: 24 V DC,
short-circuit current: 5 mA or less, removable terminal block (20 pins)
(1 common terminal for 4 inputs)
Power Consumption
Contact Input
Contact Output
32 outputs, relay contact output, contact capacity: 24 V DC/2 – 500 mA,
removable terminal block (32 pins)
Network I/F:
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Automatic-Negotiation)
Network protocol: TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP, RTP, ARP, ICMP, IGMP
Connector:
RJ-45 connector
Network Section
Indication
LNK/ACT indicator, Status indicator, Power indicator,
Channel status indicator (32 channels)
Firmware update function, System data hold function, Time of day hold
facility, Reset key (front panel)
Rack, Desk, Surface mounting
0 to 40°C
Under 90 % RH (no condensation)
Pre-coated steel plate, black, 30 % gloss
420 (w) x 44.3 (h) x 267 (d) mm
2.8 kg
Other
Setting Method
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
AC power cord (2 m) ...............................................
CD (for PC setting, maintenance use) ....................
Removable terminal plug (10 pins) .........................
Removable terminal plug (16 pins) .........................
Plastic foot ..............................................................
• Optional product
Wall mounting bracket:
1
1
4
4
4
Machine screw M3 x 8 ...........................................
Rack mounting bracket ...........................................
Tapping screw 3 x 8 ...............................................
Rack mounting screw with plain washer ................
4
2
8
4
YC-850
5.42. SX-200IP IP Module
Network Section
Network I/F:‌
Network protocol:
Connector:
Voice sampling frequency:
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Automatic-Negotiation)
TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP, RTP, ARP, ICMP, IGMP
RJ45 connector for LAN
16 kHz, 8 kHz (controllable on the software)
48 kHz sample rate is used for SX-2000 system only.
Quantifying bit number:
16-bit
Voice encoding method:
Sub-band ADPCM, Cryptosystem
Voice packet loss recovery: Silence insertion
Audio delay time:
80 ms, 320 ms (controllable on the software)
Indicator
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Operation indicator (RUN)
0 to 40 ºC
90% RH or less (no condensation)
Panel: Pre-coated steel plate, black, 30% gloss
35 (w) x 119.5 (h) x 178.4 (d) mm
150 g
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
8-46
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.43. YC-280 Wall Mounting Bracket
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Surface-treated steel plate, gray, paint
100 (w) x 140 (h) x 31.8 (d) mm
120 g
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
Wood screw 3.5 x 20 .............................................. 2
Rubber foot ............................................................. 4
• Applicable models
N-8000MS/8010MS/8020MS/8410MS/8500MS/8510MS/8600MS
5.44. YC-290 Wall Mounting Bracket
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Surface treated steel sheet, gray, paint
64 (w) x 131.5 (h) x 31.8 (d) mm
100 g
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
Wood screw 3.5 x 20 .............................................. 2
Rubber foot ............................................................. 4
• Applicable model
N-8011MS
5.45. YC-850 Wall Mounting Bracket
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Surface-treated steel plate, black, 30 % gloss
45.1 (w) x 220 (h) x 10 (d) mm
180 g
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
Machine screw M3 x 6 ........................................... 4
Wood screw 3.5 x 20 .............................................. 4
• Applicable models
N-8000RS/8010RS/8400RS/8000DI/8000AF/8000CO/8000AL
Note: The YC-850 cannot be used with the N-8000EX, N-8010EX, or N-8000MI.
8-47
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.46. YC-241 Back Box
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Colored chrome plating
119 (w) x 276 (h) x 67 (d) mm
100 g
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Applicable model
N-8031MS
5.47. YC-251 Wall-Mount Box
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Surface-treated steel plate, white
124 (w) x 258.5 (h) x 50.5 (d) mm
1.06 kg
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Applicable model
N-8031MS
5.48. YC-150 Back Box
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Zinc-plating, t1.6
184 (w) x 119 (h) x 57 (d) mm
700 g
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Applicable models
N-8050DS/8540DS/8640DS/8650DS
5.49. YS-13A Wall-Mount Box
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Surface treated steel sheet, ivory, paint
116.5 (w) x 163.5 (h) x 55 (d) mm
550 g
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
Machine screw M3 x 12 .......................................... 4
Wood screw 3.8 x 16 .............................................. 4
Rubber foot ............................................................. 4
Bushing .................................................................. 1
• Applicable models
N-8050DS/8540DS/8640DS/8650DS
8-48
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.50. YC-302 2-Gang Electrical Box
Quantity Packed per
Display Carton
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
10 pieces
SPHT, MFZn4 (glazed chromate)
Outlet box: 102 (w) x 102 (h) x 44 (d) mm
Cover:
106 (w) x 106 (h) x 13 (d) mm
370 g
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Applicable models
RS-141/150/160/170/180/191/450/460/470/480/481
5.51. YC-801 Flush-Mount Box
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Colored chrome plating
72 (w) x 119 (h) x 57 (d) mm
350 g
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Applicable models
RS-140/143/144
5.52. YC-802 Wall-Mount Box
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Surface-treated steel plate, white
75 (w) x 124 (h) x 50.5 (d) mm
360 g
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Applicable models
RS-140/143/144
5.53. YC-822 Indoor Wall-Mount Box
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Surface-treated steel plate, off-white
124 (w) x 124 (h) x 61 (d) mm
400 g
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
Wood screw 3.5 x 20 .............................................. 4
• Applicable models
RS-141/150/160/170/180/191/450/460/470/480/481
8-49
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.54. YC-823 Outdoor Wall-Mount Box
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Stainless steel plate, off-white
124 (w) x 124 (h) x 62 (d) mm
440 g
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
Wood screw 3.5 x 20 .............................................. 4
• Applicable models
RS-170/180/470/480
5.55. YC-841 Back Box
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
Surface-treated steel plate, white
119 (w) x 258 (h) x 57 (d) mm
1 kg
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
Wood screw 3.5 x 20 .............................................. 4
• Applicable model
N-8033MS
5.56. E-7000TB Terminal Board
Line Capacity
Line Connection Terminal
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
80 (40 lines)
Clip terminal
Panel: Surface treated steel plate, black, 30 % gloss
482 (w) x 132.6 (h) x 108.8 (d) mm
2.5 kg
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Accessories
Rack mounting screw 5 x 12 .................................. 4
Fiber washer M5 ..................................................... 4
Name plate ............................................................. 4
Cord clamp ............................................................. 6
8-50
Chapter 8 APPENDIX
5.57. AD-1210P AC Adapter
Model number
Power Source
Output
Current Consumption
Cord Length
Plug
Operating Temperature
Finish
Dimensions (Case)
Weight
AD-1210P CU
AD-1210P CE
100 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
230 V AC, 50 Hz
12 V DC, 1 A
270 mA (rated output)
120 mA (rated output)
1.5 m
1.8 m
Center positive
0 to 40 °C
Case: Polycarbonate, black
Case: Noryl resin, black
50 (w) x 72 (h) x 58 (d) mm
56.5 (w) x 70.5 (h) x 85.5 (d) mm
110 g
470 g
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Applicable models
N-8500MS/8510MS/8600MS/8610RM/8540DS/8640DS/8650DS
5.58. AD-1215P AC Adapter
Power Source
Output
Power Consumption
Cord Length
Plug
Operating Temperature
Finish
Dimensions
Weight
100 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
12 V DC, 1.5 A
0.5 A AC Input 100 V (rated output)
1.8 m
Conductor: Center positive, ø5.5 x ø2.1 x L9.5 mm
0 to 40 °C
Polycarbonate, black
45 (w) x 70 (h) x 55.5 (d) mm
130 g
Note: The design and specifications are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• Applicable models
N-8500MS/8510MS/8600MS/8610RM/8540DS/8640DS/8650DS
8-51
201408
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising